Skip to main content

Full text of "British Antarctic Expedition, 1907-9, under the command of Sir E.H. Shackleton, c.v.o. Reports on the scientific investigations .."

See other formats 


— — — — — ~ fO<    ;l     >T^ 


OF    THE    UNIVERSITY   OF    CALIFORNIA 

35^  (5V^/T£> 


i 


••w  i 

LIBERT    OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   OF    CH.FORNU          UBRARY.OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   OF    C, 


OF   THE    UNIVERS.TY   OF    CALIFORNIA 


LIBRARY    OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   OF    CALIFORNIA 

<5\\~yfD 


LIBRARY    OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   OF    CA 

<5v_/re> 


'}*  •-* 


OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   OF 
(5\N 


i 


IY    OF    THF    II N I  K  f  n  « i  T  v    n  t 


=    "• 

LIBRARY    OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   OF    CALIWN4A          LIBRARY    OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   OF    CALIFORNIA          LIBRARY 


9 


3 


io 

SITY   OF    CALIFORNIA 

f& 


9  != 

\ 

~a  s 


Qj^^Q 

LIBRARY    OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   OF    CALIFORNIA 
:x-^     <T^\      /f5 


m 


^^   QJS^\D 
LIBRARY    OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   OF    CALIFORNIA 

'••.   O  \V^_/T ( 


r 


SITY   OF    CALIFORNIA 

r& 


LIBRARY    OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   OF    CALIFORNIA 


^S'      ,-.   I  y- 

LIBRARY    OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   OF    CALIFORNIA 


LIBRARY 


ID 


^tv/ae 


BRITISH  ANTARCTIC  EXPEDITION  1907-9 

UNDER  THE  COMMAND  OF  SIR  E.  H.  SHACKLETON,  C.V.O. 

REPORTS   ON   THE   SCIENTIFIC   INVESTIGATIONS 


VOL.   I 

BIOLOGY 

EDITOR   -  -  JAMES  MURRAY 


PARTS  I  TO  IV 

I.  ONT  COLLECTING  AT  CAPE  ROYDS  BY  JAMES  MURRAY 

II.  ON  MICROSCOPIC  LIFE  AT  CAPE  ROYDS  BY  JAMES  MURRAY 

III.  ANTARCTIC  ROTIFERA  BY  JAMES  MURRAY 

IV.  MUSCI  BY  JULES  CARDOT 


(WITH  THIRTEEN  PLATES  AND  THREE 
FIGURES  IN  THE  TEXT) 


LONDON 
PUBLISHED  FOR  THE  EXPEDITION  15V  WILLIAM  HEINEMANX 

•21    HKnKOKD  STUKKT.  W.f. 

1910 

PRICK  TWKI.VK  SIHLUN'tiS  AND  SIX  I'KN'CK   N  K  I 
THESK   PAJITK   \nr.  ALSO   ISSI'F.D  SF.I' 


Ons 


/U 


PART   I 

ON    COLLECTING  AT-  <CAPE    ROYDS* 

BY  JAMES   MURRAY 


Ix  making  the  biological  collections,  almost  every  member  of  our  small  party  lent 
more  or  less  assistance.  Though  busy  with  other  occupations,  all  were  ready  to  bring 
home  to  the  biologist  anything  strange  which  they  noticed.  Armytage  found  a  sea- 
urchin  during  a  walk  on  the  sea-ice  before  we  had  made  a  landing,  and  while  landing  he 
picked  up  the  first  scrap  of  sea-weed.  Mr.  Shackleton  brought  in  some  moss  and  lichen 
soon  after  the  Nimrod  departed.  Wild  got  specimens  of  the  lake  vegetation.  Adams 
found  a  starfish  on  the  beach,  and  the  others  in  like  manner  helped  when  opportunity 
offered. 

All  these  indications  that  there  was  life  in  the  district,  coming  as  they  did  before 
the  biological  work  was  properly  started,  were  encouraging  for  the  future. 

When  the  dredging  operations  began  there  were  many  willing  helpers.  Mr. 
Shackleton,  with  David,  Mawson,  and  Priestley,  were  always  interested  in  the  dredg- 
ing and  ready  to  help,  not  only  at  hauling  the  dredge,  but  at  the  more  disagreeable 
labour  of  conveying  the  collections  to  the  hut.  It  is  no  disparagement  to  others  to 
acknowledge  the  share  which  Priestley  took  in  the  biological  work.  Without  him  the 
greater  part  of  the  collections  would  not  have  been  made.  When  the  biologist  was 
debarred  by  some  trifling  but  mastering  indisposition  from  active  participation  in  the 
dredging  during  the  midwinter  weeks,  Priestley  kept  the  dredging-holes  open,  no  small 
labour  with  the  temperature  sometimes  as  low  as  from  minus  30°  to  minus  40°  Fahr. 
With  the  assistance  of  Mr.  Shackleton,  David,  and  others,  he  kept  up  the  dredging 
and  brought  home  the  proceeds  to  be  examined. 

Throughout  the  entire  season  practically  the  whole  of  the  arduous  labour  of  digging 
holes  in  the  sea-ice  and  of  sinking  shafts  in  the  lakes  fell  upon  Priestley,  and  he  did  the 
active  hauling  of  the  dredge  as  well.  It  does  not  lessen  our  indebtedness  to  him  to 
tell  that  he  enjoyed  his  self-imposed  task,  and  his  voice  might  be  heard  issuing  in 
light-hearted  song  from  some  deep  shaft  in  lake  or  sea. 

The  Field  of  Operations. — This  was  extremely  limited.  The  great  majority  of  the 
collections  were  made  within  a  radius  of  a  few  miles  from  our  base  camp  at  Cape 

*  Cape  Royds  is  the  westernmost  point  of  Ross  Island,  South  Victoria  Land,  and  is  situated  in  about 
latitude  77°  32'  S.,  longitude  1G6°  12'  E. 

BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.  1907-9.      VOL.  I.      PART  1,  ISSUED  APRIL  1910  A 

13 
M749992 


2  JAMES  MURRAY 

Koyds.  Those  who  went  on  the  long  sledging  journeys  brought  back  specimens  from 
more  distant  points.  Mr.  Shackleton  brought  lake  vegetation  and  Joyce  brought  moss 
from  Hut  Point  (the  Discovery's  winter  quarters,  twenty  miles  south  of  Cape  Royds) ; 
Priestley  brought  rotifers,  mosses,  lichens,  and  some  marine  organisms  from  the 
neighbourhood  of  the  Ferrar  Glacier  and  the  Stranded  Moraines,  when  he  visited  the 
west  with  Armytage's  party  ;  and  Brocklehurst  on  the  same  journey  obtained  some 
lichens  at  an  elevation  of  about  4000  feet  at  New  Harbour  Heights ;  David  brought 
moss  and  lichen  from  near  Cape  Irizar,  the  most  distant  point  from  our  camp  at  which 
any  biological  specimens  were  collected.  So  far  as  known,  the  species  were  the  same 
in  all  the  localities. 

The  promontory  of  Cape  Boyds,  round  which  most  of  the  collecting  was  done,  is  a 
hilly  tract  of  triangular  form,  separated  from  the  main  mass  of  Mount  Erebus  by  a 
valley  in  which  there  is  a  series  of  small  lakes,  and  terminating  at  its  southernmost 
point  in  a  bluff  rising  vertically  from  the  sea  to  a  considerable  height.  This  culminat- 
ing-point  of  the  Cape  was  familiarly  known  as  Flagstaff  Point,  from  a  pole  which  we 
erected  there  for  the  purpose  of  signalling  to  the  ship.  In  the  hollow  between  it  and 
the  hut  was  Pony  Lake,  and  between  the  lake  and  the  shore  was  the  rookery  of 
Adelie  Penguins. 

The  triangular  area  is  just  about  a  mile  in  length  and  half  a  mile  in  greatest  breadth. 
It  includes  many  little  sharp  rocky  peaks,  composed  of  kenyte,  with  ridges  of  the  same 
rock  diverging  from  the  peaks.  The  valleys  are  filled  with  a  gravelly  debris  resulting 
from  the  decomposition  of  the  kenyte,  and  contain  many  little  lakes  or  ponds.  Con- 
siderable stretches  of  morainic  material  occur.  The  highest  point  of  land  is  no  more 
than  300  feet  above  the  sea.  The  greater  part  of  the  shore-line  consists  of  low  cliffs 
with  a  few  small  patches  of  sandy  beach.  The  most  extensive  of  these  beaches,  known 
as  Black  Sand  Beach,  is  about  a  mile  to  the  north  of  the  hut. 

On  the  shore  there  is  no  vestige  of  marine  life,  animal  or  vegetable,  such  as  is 
found  in  the  littoral  zone  of  other  coasts.  The  beaches  are  formed  of  a  coarse,  hard, 
black  sand,  with  boulders  of  kenyte  and  other  rocks.  The  presence  of  an  ice-foot 
throughout  the  greater  part  of  the  year,  and  the  grinding  of  ice  along  the  coast  when 
there  is  open  sea,  must  destroy  any  living  things  which  attempt  to  establish  them- 
selves. The  zone  thus  kept  devoid  of  life  is  of  no  great  depth.  Standing  on  the 
edge  of  the  ice-foot  at  Black  Sandy  Beach,  when  the  Sound  was  open,  various  living 
things  could  be  seen  at  a  depth  of  from  one  to  two  fathoms.  Starfish  were  commonest 
in  this  situation,  but  a  living  Pecten  Colbecki  was  got  in  equally  shallow  water  at 
Back-door  Bay. 

The  larger  lakes  were  given  distinguishing  names.  Pony  Lake,  close  beside  the 
hut,  formed  the  exercising  ground  for  the  ponies  during  the  long  night.  A  short 
distance  to  the  north  was  Green  Lake,  named  from  the  colour  of  its  ice.  A  mile  north 
of  the  hut  and  close  to  the  shore  was  Coast  Lake,  remarkable  for  its  level  smooth 
ice,  which  would  have  served  for  skating  and  curling.  Close  by  was  Clear  Lake,  named 


ON  COLLECTING  AT  CAPE  ROYDS 


FIG.  1. 


M9  MURDO 
SOUND 


CAPE  ROYDS 


SKETCH-MAP  OF  THE  IMMEDIATE  NEIGHBOURHOOD  OF  CAPE  ROYDS 
Showing  the  positions  of  the  lakes,  &c. 

Copied  from  Map  lent  by  R.  E.  PRIESTLEY. 


.it>-(>  a- 


4  JAMES  MURRAY 

from  the  clear  transparent  ice,  through  which  on  our  first  arrival  we  could  see  the 
vegetation  grosving  on  the  bottom  at  a  depth  of  several  feet.  The  largest  of  all  was 
Blue  Lake,  which  most  nearly  deserved  the  name  of  "  lake."  It  was  nearly  half 
a  mile  in  length,  and  filled  about  half  of  the  valley  separating  the  promontory  of 
Cape  Royds  from  Mount  Erebus.  The  lake  was  divided  into  two  portions  by  a  very 
narrow  strait,  known  as  the  "Narrows,"  in  which  the  depth  was  only  about  three 
feet.  The  northern  half  was  deeper,  and  was  found  to  have  a  few  feet  of  water  under 
twenty-one  feet  of  ice.  The  southern  half  was  frozen  to  the  bottom. 

The  accompanying  sketch-map  (Fig.  1)  shows  the  positions  of  some  of  the  principal 
geographical  features  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of  the  camp.  The  principal  lakes  are 
marked,  and  the  highest  point  of  land  on  the  promontory,  known  as  "  High  Peak." 
The  lower  hills  are  not  indicated. 

Beyond  the  valley  occupied  by  Blue  Lake  rise  the  lower  slopes  of  Mount  Erebus. 
This  is  a  region  of  rocky  ridges  and  moraines  like  those  of  Cape  Royds  promontory, 
extending  for  several  miles  up  the  mountain,  on  the  sides  of  which  the  moraines  have 
been  traced  to  a  height  of  1100  feet.  Many  small  lakes  occur  up  to  a  height  of  at 
least  500  feet.  Northward  and  southward,  at  the  distance  of  a  few  miles,  the  rock 
and  moraine  give  place  to  crevassed  glacier.  Beyond  the  limits  of  the  small  area  thus 
briefly  described,  snowfield  and  glacier  stretch  for  many  miles,  offering  no  support  for 
any  living  thing,  unless  it  be  some  of  those  lowliest  organisms  which  can  exist  on 
the  surface  of  the  snow  itself. 

At  Cape  Barne,  two  miles  south  of  Cape  Royds,  there  is  a  district  of  hill  and 
valley  similar  to  those  of  Cape  Royds,  but  the  hills  are  higher  and  the  valleys  deeper. 
In  this  region  there  are  many  interesting  lakes.  In  one  place  there  are  two 
concentric  curved  gullies,  both  ends  of  which  open  to  the  shore.  These  are  occupied 
by  lakes,  one  of  which,  in  the  gully  nearest  the  shore,  is  considerably  below  sea- 
level. 

The  bay  immediately  east  of  the  hut  was  our  customary  dredging  ground.  All 
the  dredging  was  done  within  a  mile  of  the  Cape,  in  shallow  water,  nowhere  more 
than  100  fathoms  in  depth.  Farther  out  the  Sound  deepened  to  300  fathoms  or 
more,  but  that  region  remained  for  ever  inaccessible. 

Collecting  on  Land. — It  is  difficult  to  imagine   a   more   unpromising  field  for 
biological  study  than  Cape  Royds  appears  on  a  first  examination.     Nothing  is  to 
be  seen  but  a  succession  of  ridges  of  black  lava  (shattered  into  loose  blocks  by  the 
.  intense  cold),  moraines  and  snowdrifts,  all  apparently  equally  barren. 

Near  the  shore  the  monotony  is  relieved  by  the  busy  Penguin  Rookery,  the  Skua 
Gulls,  the  Weddell  Seals,  and  an  occasional  Giant  or  Snowy  Petrel.  All  these 
animals  are  only  summer  visitors,  except  the  Weddell  Seal,  which  comes  ashore  at 
all  seasons.  Apart  from  these  there  is  no  conspicuous  life,  animal  or  vegetable,  in 
the  whole  area.  Indeed,  leaving  the  lakes  out  of  account,  the  collecting  which  could 
be  done  on  land  was  of  the  most  meagre  description. 


ON  COLLECTING  AT  CAPE  ROYDS  5 

On  the  triangular  promontory  no  moss  or  lichen  wai  ever  found.  Higher  up 
among  the  moraines  on  the  slopes  of  Erebus  dwarfed  tufts  of  moss  were  fairly 
abundant,  but  so  feeble  is  their  growth  that  M.  Cardot,*  who  examined  them, 
describes  them  as  "sickly  plants,  struggling  painfully  against  exceptionally  hard 
conditions."  Lichens  were  more  abundant,  though  scarcely  more  vigorous  in  their 
growth,  and  there  were  more  kinds  of  them.  The  commonest  was  a  pretty  orange- 
coloured  kind,  closely  encrusting  the  rocks,  and  crowded  with  apothecia.  The  Tripe 
de  Roche,  familiar  in  books  of  Arctic  travel  for  its  role  in  prolonging  the  lives  of 
starving  explorers,  occurred  in  two  forms.  Its  little  scales,  some  half-inch  in  diameter, 
and  attached  by  a  single  point  on  the  under  surface,  were  scarcely  so  abundant  as  to 
fulfil  the  same  life-saving  role  in  the  Antarctic.  The  largest-growing  lichen  was  a 
tufted  kind,  growing  to  an  inch  or  more  in  height,  and  resembling  Usnea  in  possess- 
ing a  fragile  cortex,  which  breaks  on  pulling  the  stalks  and  exposes  a  tougher  elastic 
medullary  portion.  The  Tripe  de  Roche  and  the  tufted  lichen  could  be  picked  off  the 
rocks,  but  most  of  the  other  kinds  could  only  be  collected  by  selecting  conveniently 
small  stones  on  which  they  were  growing.  When  the  snow  completely  melted  from 
some  of  the  moraines  in  the  height  of  summer,  patches  of  the  tufted  species  were 
found  a  yard  or  more  in  diameter. 

In  the  valley  bottoms,  where  water  had  run  or  at  least  percolated  in  summer, 
there  was  a  faint  scum  of  green,  which  consisted  generally  of  dried -up  green  algae. 
On  some  parts  of  the  moraines,  where  there  was  some  depth  of  soft  soil,  considerable 
masses  occurred  of  a  plant  which  seems  to  be  identical  with  that  which  abounds  in 
the  lakes,  and  which  will  be  more  fully  studied  when  dealing  with  them.  It  is  of  a 
whitish,  yellowish,  or  pink  colour,  and  is  in  sheets  like  thin  paper,  superposed  to  form 
masses  of  considerable  thickness.  In  some  eskers  on  Blue  Lake  it  was  traced  to  a 
depth  of  several  feet,  and  on  some  flat  moraines  it  was  discovered  occupying  pockets 
underground.  In  all  cases  when  found  on  land  the  plant  was  friable  and  had  a 
bleached  appearance.  From  this  fact  it  is  doubtful  if  it  ever  grew  in  the  kind  of 
situation  it  now  occupies.  It  may  have  been  preserved  from  a  time  when  these 
were  parts  of  lake  bottoms. 

Collecting  in  the  Lakes. — Soon  after  landing  at  Cape  Royds,  on  walking  across 
the  lake  afterwards  called  Green  Lake,  some  thin  films  of  vegetation  of  a  dull  green 
colour  were  seen  projecting  above  the  surface  of  the  ice.  Shortly  afterwards  Wild 
found  pieces  of  a  similar  plant,  but  of  pink  or  brown  colour,  exposed  on  the  surface 
of  Clear  Lake.  At  the  margin  of  Clear  Lake,  where  the  ice  was  transparent,  the 
same  plant  was  seen  at  a  depth  of  about  a  foot,  of  much  brighter  colour  than  that 
exposed  at  the  surface.  Pieces  of  this  were  cut  out  with  an  ice-pick,  and  taken 
home  and  melted,  when  several  microscopic  animals  were  found. 

This  was  the  introduction  to  the  most  prolific  source  of  fresh-water  life  in  the 
district.  The  plant  was  found  embedded  in  the  ice  of  nearly  all  the  lakes,  and  when 

*  "  Musci,"  by  J.  Cardot,  in  Part  IV.  of  this  volume. 


6  JAMES  MURRAY 

the  smaller  ones  melted  in  summer  it  was  seen  that  it  formed  continuous  sheets  over 
the  whole  bed  of  some  of  them.  Everywhere  microscopic  life  swarmed  on  this  weed. 
The  method  of  collecting  during  the  winter  was  very  simple.  A  few  pieces  of  ice 
containing  plants  were  chipped  out  and  taken  to.  the  house  to  thaw.  When  quite 
melted  the  weed  was  put  into  a  coarse  silk  net,  which  was  again  put  inside  a  very 
fine  silk  net,  and  the  whole  immersed  in  a  bucket  of  water.  When  the  nets  were 
violently  shaken  in  the  water  the  microscopic  organisms,  animal  and  vegetable,  were 
washed  off  the  weed,  and  strained  through  the  coarse  net  into  the  fine  one,  from 
which  they  could  be  easily  transferred  to  a  bottle.  Thus  were  obtained  multitudes 
of  living  things  for  study. 

In  summer  the  collecting  was  still  simpler.  The  weed  could  be  washed  in  the  lake 
water  without  the  need  for  preliminary  thawing. 

In  this  way  we  collected  continually  from  the  shallow  lakes.  There  were  some 
deeper  lakes,  which,  as  it  proved,  did  not  melt  in  summer.  In  Clear  Lake  a  hole 
was  dug  through  the  ice.  We  came  on  water  at  a  depth  of  about  four  feet.  Here 
we  dredged  on  the  lake  bottom,  at  a  depth  of  seventeen  feet.  There  was  a  quantity 
of  vegetation  brought  up,  but  it  was  discoloured  and  dead,  and  there  was  no  living 
thing  upon  it. 

Late  in  the  winter,  Priestley  sunk  a  shaft  in  the  southern  portion  of  Blue  Lake, 
for  the  purpose  chiefly  of  observing  the  temperatures  of  the  ice.  At  a  depth  of  nine 
feet  some  scraps  of  weed  were  got,  and  when  thawed  a  number  of  living  animals 
were  found  on  it.  At  a  depth  of  fifteen  feet  we  came  on  the  bottom  of  the  lake, 
which  was  here  composed  of  angular  fragments.  These  were  covered  by  a  continuous 
film  of  yellow  weed,  and  on  this  also  there  were  numerous  living  things. 

In  autumn  an  attempt  was  made  to  use  the  tow-net  in  some  of  the  lakes.  The 
lakes  being  at  this  time  covered  by  a  thick  sheet  of  ice,  the  net  could  not  be  drawn 
through  the  water.  A  hole  was  dug  and  some  gallons  of  water  taken  up  with  a 
bucket  and  poured  through  the  net.  At  this  time  the  temperatr"0  of  the  air  was 
about  Zero  Fahrenheit,  and  the  net  was  soon  filled  with  ice.  When  thawed  out 
there  was  no  living  thing  found  in  it.  In  summer,  when  the  lakes  were  melted,  and 
the  air  temperature  was  about  freezing-point,  the  tow-net  could  be  easily  used,  and 
good  collections  were  got. 

The  vegetation  of  these  lakes  is  so  important  a  feature  in  the  biology  of  the  district 
that  it  merits  some  attention.  Portions  of  it  have  been  submitted  to  expert  botanists, 
but  no  report  has  yet  been  received,  so  it  cannot  be  stated  to  what  group  of  the 
vegetable  kingdom  it  belongs.  Its  appearance  and  method  of  growth  will  be  described. 

In  Green  Lake  and  many  other  lakes  it  is  in  the  form  of  sheets,  from  a  few  inches 
to  many  yards  in  extent,  sometimes  continuously  covering  the  bed  of  a  pond  from 
side  to  side.  It  varies  in  thickness,  from  one-eighth  to  half  an  inch  or  more,  and  is 
of  a  consistency  like  sodden  paper,  so  that  it  was  not  possible  to  lift  up  sheets  of  any 
considerable  size  without  breaking  them.  The  upper  surface  is  of  a  bright  orange 


ON  COLLECTING  AT  CAPE  ROYDS 


FIG.  2. 


DIAGRAMMATIC  SECTION  OF  BLUE  LAKE 


The  part  shaded  with  short  vertical  lines  is  the  uppermost  "  prismatic  "  layer  of  ice.  The 
convex  upper  surface  of  the  lake  is  indicated,  and  the  irregular  thickness  of  the  prismatic 
layer.  The  area  marked  by  little  arrows  is  the  clear  transparent  ice  which  fills  the  whole 
lake  to  the  bottom.  The  bed  of  the  lake  is  of  angular  fragments,  and  the  dark  line  over 
them  is  meant  to  represent  the  film  of  vegetation  which  covers  the  bottom.  At  the  bottom 
of  the  shaft  is  seen  the  geologist  chipping  out  some  gravel  and  vegetation. 


8  JAMES  MURRAY 

colour,  and  is  coarsely  and  irregularly  wrinkled.  It  is  composed  of  few  or  many 
layers,  like  superposed  sheets  of  paper.  The  lower  surface  of  the  sheet  is  of  a  dirty 
green  colour,  and  is  composed  of  a  tangled  mass  of  many  different  algse,  green  and 
blue-green.  The  whole  mass  was  slimy  to  the  touch. 

The  mode  of  growth  differs  in  different  lakes.  The  broad  sheets  above  described 
are  the  commonest  form.  In  Clear  Lake  it  does  not  form  flat  sheets,  but  is  coarsely 
lobed  and  undulate,  and  can  be  seen  through  the  clear  ice  growing  up  from  the 
bottom.  In  Coast  Lake  the  lobed  character  is  carried  further,  and  little  dendroid 
masses  of  fine  lobes  can  be  seen  embedded  in  the  ice  near  the  surface.  When  one  of 
these  is  cut  out  and  thawed  the  plant  loses  its  dendroid  character  and  falls  down  to 
form  flat  sheets.  When  the  ablation  of  the  ice  of  Coast  Lake  goes  so  far  as  to  expose 
part  of  the  lake  bed,  it  is  seen  to  be  covered  with  a  deposit  of  small  flakes  of  the 
plant,  in  colour  and  appearance  not  unlike  used  tea-leaves. 

In  a  lake  near  Cape  Barne  the  ablation  of  the  ice  exposed  small  masses  of  the 
weed  in  which  the  successive  superposed  layers  made  up  a  thickness  of  six  inches. 
The  layers  were  very  thin  and  the  colour  a  fine  pink. 

Large  fragments  dredged  from  the  bottom  of  Clear  Lake  and  dried  on  blotting- 
paper  had  a  glossy  surface  and  ash-grey  colour  like  some  of  the  lichens  of  the  genus 
Peltigera.  In  most  other  samples  the  surface  was  dull  when  dried. 

Under  the  microscope  the  brown  weed  is  seen  to  be  composed  of  a  felt  of  very 
fine  fibres,  crossing  one  another  irregularly  in  all  directions.  Usually  no  definite 
structure  can  be  detected  in  the  fibres,  but  Mr.  Scourfield  noticed  some  in  which  an 
obscure  division  into  cells  could  be  seen. 

In  some  ponds  we  found  another  weed  of  very  similar  colour  and  appearance,  but 
in  very  small  quantity.  This  was  definitely  composed  of  moniliform  rows  of  cells  of 
some  blue-green  alga,  very  probably  of  the  large  olive-green  laminae  which  we  got  in 
some  streams  and  ponds  in  summer.  The  similarity  of  the  two  suggests  that  the 
commoner  brown  weed  has  in  like  manner  originated  in  the  blue-green  filamentous 
algaa  generally  associated  with  it.  Plausible  though  the  suggestion  is,  it  requires 
expert  investigation  before  we  can  decide  upon  it.  The  filaments  (Oscillatoria  ?) 
seem  inadequate  to  the  production  of  such  masses,  being  to  a  large  extent  in  the 
form  of  longer  or  shorter  rods  (as  shown  in  Plate  IV.  Fig.  15). 

The  method  of  trenching  a  lake  in  order  to  get  at  the  sheet  of  vegetation  at  the 
bottom  is  illustrated  in  the  accompanying  diagram  (Fig.  2). 

The  shallow  lakes  were  very  easily  trenched,  a  few  hours'  work  sufficing  to  reach 
the  bottom.  The  trenching  of  the  deeper  lakes,  Clear  Lake  and  Blue  Lake,  was  a 
more  laborious  undertaking.  The  trench  is  marked  out  by  a  draft  cut  with  the  ice- 
pick, enclosing  an  area  of  about  six  feet  long  by  three  feet  wide.  The  whole  surface 
is  then  picked  over  to  a  depth  of  a  few  inches,  and  the  chips  are  shovelled  out.  A 
very  little  chipping  seems  to  make  a  great  depth  of  chips,  and  frequent  clearing  out 
is  necessary,  or  it  becomes  impossible  to  get  at  the  solid  ice  on  account  of  the  loose 


ON  COLLECTING  AT  CAPE  ROYDS  9 

stuff.  Thus  alternately  picking  and  shovelling,  a  few  inches  at  a  time,  the  trench 
gradually  deepens  to  five  or  six  feet.  Up  to  this  time  everything  is  easy.  The  debris 
is  easily  shovelled  out  with  force  enough  to  carry  it  well  clear  of  the  hole.  With 
every  increase  in  depth  this  becomes  more  difficult,  till  at  last  the  chips  come  shower- 
ino-  back  on  the  worker  below.  It  then  becomes  necessary  to  have  another  man  to 
pull  up  the  chips  in  a  bucket,  or  if  one  man  attempts  to  do  everything,  he  must  inter- 
rupt his  work  below  every  little  while,  climb  out  of  the  hole  and  pull  up  a  load  of 
chips.  Beyond  a  depth  of  five  feet  it  is  necessary  to  construct  a  stairway.  It  was 
usual  to  have  a  few  broad  steps  near  the  top,  and  lower  down  to  cut  niches  for  the 
feet  alternately  at  one  side  and  the  other. 

Blizzards  are  apt  to  interfere  with  the  work,  filling  the  trenches  with  snow. 
After  some  experience  we  learnt  wisdom,  and  covered  the  trenches  with  sacking, 
which  was  secured  with  ice-picks  whenever  we  had  to  go  away  for  a  time.  The  most 
laborious  part  of  the  picking  was  the  squaring  of  the  corners.  Some  of  the  latest 
shafts  were  made  round,  and  of  just  the  diameter  at  which  a  human  arm  can  con- 
veniently wield  an  ice-pick.  In  these  the  minimum  of  material  had  to  be  removed. 

At  depths  of  fifteen  feet  and  more  progress  becomes  very  slow.  It  is  necessary 
to  have  a  ladder  to  get  down.  If  there  are  two  men  the  ladder  can  be  drawn  up  out 
of  the  way  after  one  man  has  gone  down.  If  there  is  only  one  the  ladder  is  very 
much  in  the  way.  The  man  below  is  in  some  danger  when  the  bucket  is  being 
hauled  up,  as  the  breaking  of  the  line  would  let  it  fall  upon  him. 

Collecting  in  the  Sea. — Mr.  Hodgson  has  given  an  account  *  of  his  collecting  at 
Hut  Point,  and  he  mentions  some  of  the  difficulties  which  attend  the  collector  in 
polar  regions.  Though  our  location  at  Cape  B/oyds  was  only  twenty  miles  north  of 
the  Discovery  winter  quarters  the  local  conditions  differ  very  considerably.  The 
temperature  appears  to  be  usually  ten  degrees  or  more  (Fahrenheit)  higher  than  at 
Hut  Point.  Being  close  to  the  spot  where  McMurdo  Sound  opens  into  the  Ross  Sea 
we  had  open  water  close  by  throughout  the  year.  In  fact,  even  in  winter  the  edge 
of  the  permanent  ice  was  never  more  than  a  mile  from  our  camp.  Beyond  the  fast 
ice  the  Sound  frequently  filled  with  pack-ice  stretching  as  far  as  eye  could  see. 
Sometimes,  in  a  period  of  calm,  the  pack  was  cemented  into  a  solid  field  by  new  ice, 
but  this  was  broken  up  by  every  storm,  and  it  was  therefore  always  unsafe  to  go  out 
on  it.  The  marginal  zone  of  even  the  permanent  winter  ice  was  liable  to  be  broken 
off  in  a  severe  storm. 

From  this  cause  marine  dredging  was  confined  within  a  very  small  area.  We 
could  work  steadily  during  winter  only  in  a  little  bay  between  Cape  Royds  and  Cape 
Barne,  where  the  ice  formed  early  and  stayed  late.  Here,  as  early  as  the  beginning 
of  May,  the  ice  was  strong  enough  to  allow  us  to  cut  holes  and  put  down  traps.  The 
traps  were  baited,  and  brought  up  Amphipods  and  Molluscs.  Some  pieces  of  a  den- 
droid sponge  were  entangled  in  the  net  and  from  these  we  got  a  number  of  minute 

*  "  On  Collecting  in  Antarctic  Seas."  By  T.  V.  Hodgson.  "  National  Antarjt.  Exped.  1901-4,"  vol.  iii. 
BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.  1907-9.  VOL.  I.  B 


10  JAMES   MURRAY 

molluscs  and  other  animals.     A  storm  early  in  May  broke  up  the  ice  and  our  dredging 
apparatus  went  out  with  it. 

On  May  11  ice  again  formed  in  the  Bay,  and  proved  to  be  permanent,  remaining 
fast  till  February  of  the  following  year.  As  soon  as  the  ice  was  strong  enough 
dredging  was  begun.  The  first  dredging-line  was  put  down  while  the  Bay  was  open, 
from  the  edge  of  a  small  area  of  fast  ice  which  remained  near  the  head  of  the  Bay. 
Afterwards  we  had  to  take  advantage  of  tide-cracks  in  order  to  get  lines  put  down. 
It  rarely  happened  that  we  found  the  cracks  open  and  could  get  the  line  down  with- 
out labour.  Usually  they  were  filled  with  new  ice  to  a  depth  of  6  inches  or  a  foot, 
and  it  was  by  hard  labour  with  ice-pick  and  crowbar  that  we  got  a  sufficient  length 
open  to  serve  for  dredging.  Foot  by  foot  as  the  crack  was  cleared  the  rope  was  forced 
through,  for  with  the  low  temperatures  new  ice  quickly  forms  in  the  part  we  have 
opened.  When  the  rope  was  through  for  a  sufficient  length  it  was  secured  at  the 
two  ends  to  bamboo  poles,  enough  slack  being  paid  out  to  allow  the  ends  to  hang 
nearly  vertically,  thus  avoiding  the  danger  of  the  rope  being  frozen  in.  It  was  then 
necessary  to  dig  holes  in  the  ice  at  the  two  ends  of  the  rope,  through  which  the 
dredge  could  be  lowered  and  drawn  up. 

The  holes  were  from  fifty  to  one  hundred  yards  apart,  but  the  effective  dredging 
distance  was  less  than  that  on  the  ice,  as  the  dredge  would  always  leave  the  bottom 
some  considerable  time  before  arriving  directly  under  the  opening  in  the  ice.  Each  time 
that  we  wished  to  dredge  the  holes  had  to  be  reopened  with  pick  and  crowbar.  They 
would  be  frozen  over  with  ice  from  a  few  inches  to  a  foot  or  more  in  thickness, 
according  to  the  temperature  and  the  length  of  time  they  had  been  left  undisturbed. 
In  cold  weather  it  was  not  well  to  leave  them  for  more  than  a  day,  and  Priestley 
sometimes  opened  them,  although  there  was  no  intention  of  dredging,  in  order  to  lessen 
the  labour  next  time.  The  Weddell  seals  were  of  assistance  in  keeping  the  holes 
open.  They  found  them  useful  as  breathing-holes  and  visited  them  frequently,  some- 
times arriving  in  an  apparently  exhausted  condition,  to  judge  from  their  laboured 
breathing. 

In  order  to  avoid  dredging  too  frequently  over  the  same  ground  it  was  necessary 
to  cut  trenches  in  the  ice  alongside  the  ends  of  the  rope  and  at  right  angles  to  the 
line  joining  the  two  ends.  In  these  trenches  the  rope  could  be  shifted  a  yard  or  so 
at  each  time  of  dredging  and  so  the  dredge  covered  entirely  fresh  ground.  Sometimes 
the  rope  was  left  too  long  and  got  frozen  in  too  solidly  to  be  cut  out  in  the  usual  way. 
A  new  hole  was  then  cut  close  by  the  old  one,  and  the  line  was  fished  up  by  means  of 
a  hook  on  the  end  of  a  long  bamboo  pole. 

The  arrangement  of  the  apparatus  and  method  of  using  it  are  illustrated  in 
Fig.  3,  in  which  the  Bay  where  we  dredged  is  shown  in  section. 

The  dredge  was  fixed  to  the  middle  of  the  line  so  that  it  could  be  used  in  either 
direction.  It  was  found  that  it  often  caught  nothing  when  travelling  downhill,  so  it  was. 
usual  to  haul  it  downhill  and  then  back  again  uphill  before  bringing  it  to  the  surface 


ON  COLLECTING  AT  CAPE  ROYDS 


11 


FIG.  3. 


DIAGRAM  ILLUSTRATING  METHOD  OF  DREDGING 


The  ice  (which  is  supposed  to  be  five  or  six  feet  in  thickness)  and  the  bed  of  the  sea  are 
shown  in  section.  The  vertical  lines  mark  the  sea-ice,  and  their  cessation  indicates  the 
positions  of  the  two  holes  kept  open  for  the  purpose  of  dredging.  One  man  is  shown 
hauling  the  dredge,  and  another  is  paying  out  the  spare  line  to  lessen  the  strain  which 
tends  to  lift  the  dredge  off  the  ground.  A  few  feet  in  front  of  the  dredge  a  weight  is  seen, 
which  series  to  keep  the  dredge  down,  and  at  the  same  time  by  the  length  of  its  attaching 
cord  maintains  it  in  the  right  position.  The  weight  was  sometimes  a  lump  of  kenyte  tied  in 
a  cloth,  but  generally  some  discarded  parts  of  a  motor-car  were  used. 


12  JAMES  MURRAY 

When  the  dredge  reached  the  surface  both  men  went  to  the  opening,  the  one  who 
had  been  hauling  keeping  the  line  taut  to  prevent  it  sinking  again.  The  contents  of 
the  dredge,  consisting  of  a  thick  black  mud  in  which  only  the  larger  objects  such  as 
sponges,  shells,  blocks  of  kenyte,  and  sea-anemones  could  be  distinguished,  were 
emptied  into  a  bucket.  This  was  made  from  a  4-gallon  kerosene  tin  provided  with 
two  wire  handles.  The  bucket  was  filled  nearly  to  the  top  with  sea-water  in  the 
hope  of  enabling  the  animals  to  remain  alive  for  some  time.  At  first  it  was  conveyed 
home,  a  distance  of  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  by  slinging  it  on  a  bamboo  pole  carried 
on  the  shoulders  of  two  men.  This  caused  too  much  splashing,  and  thej  bucket  was 
thenceforward  carried  by  the  handles. 

Generally  all  the  water  in  the  bucket  was  frozen  into  a  kind  of  soft  sludge  before 
we  reached  home.  It  was  placed  behind  the  stove  to  thaw,  but  so  cold  was  it  on  the 
floor  of  the  hut  that  it  often  took  a  day,  or  even  two  days,  before  it^was  ready  for 
examination. 

Any  large  objects  visible  on  the  top  of  the  mud  were  first  taken  out.  To  get  out 
the  smaller  organisms  the  thick  coherent  mud  was  taken  by  a  handful  at  a  time  and 
put  in  a  small  silk  net  having  a  mesh  of  about  one-sixteenth  of  an  inch.  This  was 
shaken  in  clean  sea-water  till  the  fine  mud  was  all  washed  away.  What  remained  in 
the  net  was  emptied  into  plates  and  picked  over.  The  larger  pieces -of  kenyte  and 
shells,  sea-urchins,  &c.,  were  first  separated.  Then  came  the  task  (very  trying  in  the 
dim  gas-light,  which  alone  penetrated  to  the  biological  lab.,  or  the  equally  dim  light  of 
a  hurricane  lamp)  of  picking  out  the  smaller  things,  minute  Crustacea,  shells,  &c., 
requiring  the  use  of  a  lens  to  detect  them.  All  these  various  objects  were  sorted 
according  to  their  size  and  kinds,  and  stored  in  bottles. 

When  we  had  enough  jars  filled  to  occupy  one  of  the  compartment  boxes  provided 
for  the  purpose,  they  had  to  be  removed,  as  there  wasn't  room  in  the  hut  for  them. 
The  first  was  put  under  the  floor  of  the  hut,  as  likely  to  be  warmer  than  the  outside 
air,  and  to  escape  filling  with  snow  during  blizzards.  The  air-lock  under  the  house 
was  so  very  difficult  of  access  that  the  boxes  were  afterwards  put  outside,  to  take 
their  chance  of  cold  and  snow.  A  few  jars  were  broken  by  the  cold,  but  there  was  no 
help  for  it.  The  formalin  which  was  used  for  certain  kinds  of  animals  suffered  a 
change  from  the  low  temperature,  becoming  milky,  and  did  not  again  regain  its 
clearness. 

When  not  in  use  the  dredge  was  left  at  the  bottom  of  the  sea.  This  kept  the 
rope  soft, , and  the  dredge  was  ready  for  use  whenever  the  holes  were  opened.  The 
one-inch  lines  used  lasted  throughout  the  season.  This  may  be  partly  attributable  to 
leaving  them  in  the  sea  and  never  allowing  them  to  freeze  solid.  The  part  never 
immersed  was  air-dried  and  flexible. 

The  Bay,  which  was  the  only  place  where  dredging  was  possible  during  almost 
the  entire  season,  was  very  shallow,  the  depth  varying  from  seven  to  eighteen 
fathoms.  The  sea  bottom  was  everywhere  covered  with  a  deep  layer  of  very  fine 


ON  COLLECTING  AT  CAPE  ROYDS  18 

black  mud,  in  which  there  were  many  pebbles  of  kenyte.  While  this  mud  was 
favourable  to  certain  forms  of  life  it  was  unfavourable  to  others,  and  thus  though 
life  was  abundant  it  was  restricted  to  a  comparatively  small  number  of  species. 

Shells  of  the  large  mud-lo  ving  Mollusc  (Anatind)  were  very  plentiful  (thoughwe  rarely 
found  the  living  animal),  as  well  as  ofPecten  Colbecki.  The  large  predaceous  Gastropod 
(Neobucdnum)  crowded  to  any  bait  put  down.  Dendroid  sponges  and  a  large  kind 
of  yellow  Sea-anemone  adhered  to  the  shells  of  Anatina  or  to  the  pebbles  of  kenyte, 
and  rarely  large  turnip-like  Tunicates  came  up.  Ugly  little  fishes  with  enormous 
heads  (Notothenia)  were  grubbing  closely  among  the  other  organisms.  In  the  mud 
were  numerous  worms  of  many  kinds,  echini,  and  multitudes  of  minute  Crustacea,  &c. 

This  shallow  muddy  dredging-ground  was  used  constantly  throughout  the  winter, 
and  at  intervals  afterwards  till  February  1909.  It  was  not  till  the  beginning  of  July 
that  there  was  an  opportunity  to  dredge  over  fresh  ground.  At  this  time  a  crack 
opened  which  stretched  from  the  cliff  of  Cape  Royds  away  towards  Cape  Barne. 
This  crack  appeared  to  be  caused  by  the  contraction  of  the  main  icefield  in  McMurdo 
Sound.  At  any  rate  it  only  opened  in  cold  spells  and  closed  in  warmer  weather. 
When  the  cracks  were  open  the  dredge  could  be  put  down  and  dragged  a  long  way 
without  any  need  to  cut  through  the  ice. 

Near  the  Cape  this  new  ground  was  quite  as  shallow  as  the  Bay  but  it  was  quite 
free  from  mud,  and  the  collections  differed  a  good  deal  in  their  composition.  There  were 
many  loose  stones  near  the  shore,  but  as  we  extended  our  operations  farther  and 
farther  out  we  reached  greater  depths  and  there  were  no  more  stones.  The  sea 
bottom  here  appears  to  be  covered  by  a  continuous  carpet  of  living  things. 

The  sponges  were  much  more  numerous  and  the  siliceous  kinds  were  first  obtained. 
There  were  Sea-spiders  (Pycnogonids),  Lace-corals  (Polyzoa),  Holothurians,  File-shells 
(Lima),  Alcyonarian  Corals,  Star-fishes  and  Brittle-stars,  pretty  milky  white 
Nudibranchs  (Tritoniella) ,  and  many  other  things. 

The  greatest  depth  at  which  we  dredged  in  this  crack  was  about  eighty  fathoms. 
The  dredge  was  not  left  down  en  the  bottom  when  not  in  use  as  we  did  in  the  Bay, 
because  the  crack  was  apt  to  close  at  any  time,  and  when  it  did  so  the  one  side  of  the 
floe  was  often  caused  to  override  the  other,  which  would  have  snapped  the  line  and 
lost  the  dredge. 

On  July  6,  a  crack  opened  from  the  Penguin  Rookery  westward  out  into  the 
Sound,  in  which  we  were  able  to  dredge  once  at  100  fathoms.  Nothing  strikingly 
different  was  obtained.  In  one  haul  pretty  near  the  shore,  the  dredge  was  filled 
with  the  common  red  Star-fish,  and  there  was  almost  nothing  else. 

Collecting  Plankton. — Very  little  plankton  collecting  could  be  done  in  McMurdo 
Sound.  As  the  Nimrod  passed  through  the  Ross  Sea  the  tow-net  was  used  several 
times,  being  kept  clear  of  the  ship  by  a  long  boom  projecting  about  ten  feet  from  the 
side.  The  last  of  these  tow-nettings  was  made  as  we  entered  McMurdo  Sound.  The 
boom  had  then  to  be  unshipped  to  prepare  for  the  vessel  lying  alongside  the  ice-foot. 


14  JAMES  MURRAY 

While  she  remained  for  some  days  moored  to  the  fast  ice  in  the  middle  of  the  Sound, 
a  number  of  hauls  were  made  with  the  tow-net  used  vertically.  The  net  was  let 
down  to  a  depth  of  100  or  200  fathoms  and  hauled  steadily  to  the  surface.  These 
hauls  brought  in  a  good  many  things,  including  two  kinds  of  Pteropods,  a  small 
hyaline  species,  and  a  pretty  red  one  about  an  inch  in  length. 

No  further  collecting  could  be  attempted  till  we  were  settled  down  on  shore  at 
Cape  Royds  and  the  ship  had  gone  away.  There  was  at  this  time  open  water  all 
round,  but  the  coast  was  too  rugged  to  allow  of  any  good  tow-netting  by  throwing  in 
the  nets,  and,  moreover,  we  were  too  busy  in  other  ways.  When  the  ice  formed  for 
the  winter  it  was  always  unsafe  to  go  to  the  edge  which  bordered  the  open  sea. 
There  were  no  lanes  where  the  net  could  be  used.  The  only  feasible  method  was  to 
attach  the  net  to  the  dredging-line  and  pull  it  from  one  of  the  holes  to  the  other, 
under  the  ice.  When  this  was  attempted  the  net  came  up  full  of  sludge,  which 
probably  came  in  early  in  the  haul  and  so  prevented  much  water  passing  through. 
The  sludge  took  a  long  time  to  thaw,  and  when  it  was  reduced  to  water  there  was 
almost  nothing  in  it.  In  one  such  haul  we  got  two  phosphorescent  Copepods,  one 
Diatom,  and  one  Peridinium. 

The  method  of  taking  vertical  hauls  at  the  dredging-holes  might  have  been 
practised  had  the  depth  been  sufficient,  but  at  our  habitual  dredging-ground  the 
depth  was  only  from  seven  to  eighteen  fathoms. 

Early  in  July  a  crack  opened  to  the  west  of  the  Cape.  At  a  distance  of  a  quarter 
of  a  mile  from  shore  the  depth  was  100  fathoms.  Our  first  concern  was  to  dredge  on 
this  fresh  ground,  and  as  the  temperature  was  very  low  fresh  ice  filled  the  crack 
before  there  was  time  to  use  the  tow-net. 

After  the  Nimrod  returned  on  her  second  trip  south,  when  the  ice  had  broken 
up  to  beyond  Glacier  Tongue  (twelve  miles  south  of  Cape  Royds),  we  noticed  a  great 
many  brown  bodies,  from  one  to  six  inches  in  length,  floating  in  the  sea.  While  the 
ship  was  moored  to  the  Glacier  Tongue  some  members  of  the  ship's  crew  fished  up  a 
few  of  them  in  a  tow-net.  Some  of  them,  at  least,  were  Ctenophores.  The  ship's 
company  also  picked  up  a  large  medusa  (of  sorts),  but  as  there  were  no  conveniences 
available  for  preserving  it,  it  was  allowed  to  freeze  in  a  jar  of  sea-water,  and  by  the 
time  it  could  be  put  in  spirit  it  was  in  such  a  condition  as  to  be  unrecognisable. 
Occasionally  shoals  of  Shizopods  (mistaken  by  the  sailors  for  fish  fry)  came  alongside 
the  ship. 

The  Fish-trap. — At  the  end  of  August,  Day  made  a  fish-trap,  at  Priestley's 
instigation,  from  Joyce's  design,  and  with  the  object  not  so  much  of  adding  to 
scientific  knowledge  as  replenishing  the  larder.  It  was  constructed  of  copper  wire, 
and  was  originally  of  the  shape  of  a  water-melon,  with  a  small  opening  at  each  of  the 
poles.  From  the  openings  several  wires  projected  into  the  inside,  converging  inwards, 
so  that  the  fish  could  easily  push  them  aside  to  get  in,  but  could  not  get  out  again. 
The  trap  was  baited  and  put  down  in  about  twenty-five  fathoms.  After  an  hour  or 


ON  COLLECTING  AT  CAPE  ROYDS  15 

two  it  was  drawn  up  and  two  dozen  fish  found  in  it.  Put  down  on  the  same  spot  for 
a  time  there  was  nothing  caught  except  star-fish  and  gigantic  red  worms. 

The  trap  was  used  several  times,  and  when  put  down  at  a  fresh  place  always 
caught  plenty  of  fish  the  first  time  used,  but  few  or  none  afterwards.  As  the  fish 
were  not  appreciated  when  cooked  the  trap  fell  into  disuse.  The  big-headed  fish 
caught  in  the  trap  were  good  collectors  for  the  Expedition,  for  in  their  mouths  we 
found  Isopods  and  Opisthobranchs,  larger  and  finer  than  any  that  ever  came  in  the 
dredge,  and  frequently  small  fish,  to  all  appearance  of  the  same  species  as  the  big 
ones. 

The  fish- trap  was  the  best  collector  of  the  giant  worms,  which  came  up  hanging 
from  it  like  long  ribbons.  As  they  contracted  on  feeling  the  cold,  and  thickened  at 
the  end  inside  as  well  as  outside  the  trap,  we  could  not  get  them  out  as  complete 
specimens.  The  largest  of  our  star-fish,  nine  inches  across,  came  into  the  trap. 


, 


PART  II 

MICROSCOPIC  LIFE  AT  CAPE  HO  YDS 

BY  JAMES  MURRAY 


THE  finding  of  an  abundant  microscopic  fauna  and  flora  at  Cape  Royds  came  somewhat 
as  a  surprise.  It  is  true  that  the  most  northerly  lands  hitherto  carefully  examined 
(Spitsbergen  and  Franz  Josef  Land,  in  about  latitude  80°  0'  N.)  have  a  rich  microscopic 
fauna,  but  in  these  lands  the  higher  summer  temperature  allows  of  a  flora  of  the 
higher  plants,  and  a  luxuriant  growth  of  mosses,  among  which  so  many  microscopic 
animals  have  their  haunts.  In  Grant  Land  at  an  equally  high  latitude  there  has 
recently  been  found  a  rich  moss  flora,  which  would  undoubtedly  be  found  to  harbour 
plenty  of  animal  life,  though  this  has  not  yet  been  reported. 

Cape  Royds,  though  at  a  much  lower  latitude  (77°  30'  S.)  and  close  by  the  open 
sea,  has  a  much  lower  summer  temperature.  The  mean  temperature  of  a  summer  day 
rarely  rises  above  freezing-point,  and  there  is  no  vegetation  higher  than  mosses.  As 
contrasted  with  the  northern  lands  the  moss  fauna  is  a  very  poor  one.  We  found  only 
four  species,  and  from  the  whole  of  Victoria  Land  there  are  but  eight  species  known. 
At  Cape  Royds  they  are  very  scarce,  and  are  stunted  and  sickly  in  growth.  The 
micro-fauna  which  they  support  is  very  meagre,  a  few  water-bears  and  rotifers,  one 
rhizopod,  and  little  else.  In  some  tufts  of  moss  the  individual  animals  were 
numerous  ;  in  others  no  life  could  be  detected. 

The  kinds  of  animals  which  are  usually  to  be  found  among  mosses  have  at  Cape 
Royds  a  shelter  of  another  sort,  which,  judging  from  their  numbers,  appears  to  suit 
them  better.  This  is  furnished  by  the  foliaceous  vegetation  which  grows  so 
abundantly  in  the  lakes  and  ponds.  On  the  surface  and  between  the  layers  of  this 
plant  they  abound  both  summer  and  winter.  In  summer,  when  the  ponds  are 
melted,  they  enjoy  for  some  weeks  a  warm  climate,  the  temperature  rising  as  high  as 
60°  F.  in  some  ponds.  There  they  are  sheltered  from  the  air,  which  would  freeze 
them  every  day  if  they  lived  among  the  mosses.  In  winter  again  they  are  frozen  in 
the  ice  for  many  months,  in  some  of  the  deeper  lakes  for  many  years.  While  the 
mosses  appear  to  be  dwarfed  by  the  cold,  the  microscopic  animals  are  not  at  all 
troubled  by  the  rigours  of  the  climate.  When  the  cold  comes  they  curl  up  and  go  to 
sleep,  it  may  be  for  years,  and  when  the  thaw  comes  they  go  merrily  on  as  though 
nothing  had  happened.  Indeed,  since  the  cold  does  not  harm  them,  the  ice 

BEIT.  ANTAECT.  EXPED.    1907-9.       VOL.  I.       PAET  2,  ISSUED  APEIL  1910  0 


18  JAMES  MURRAY 

preserves  them,  secure  against  all  other  dangers,  except  only  the  advent  ot 
explorers.  Their  numbers  prove  how  completely  they  are  adapted  to  the  local 
conditions.  I  have  never  anywhere  seen  Bdelloid  rotifers  so  plentiful  as  are  the  two 
dominant  species  at  Cape  Royds  (Philodina  gregaria  and  Adineta  grandis). 

Among  the  higher  Invertebrata  the  Rotifers  are  easily  first  in  numbers,  both  of 
individuals  and  species.  The  Water-Bears  are  of  only  a  few  kinds,  but  one  of  them 
(Macrobiotus  arcticus)  is  extremely  abundant.  There  are  Nematode  Worms  of  two 
or  more  kinds,  Mites  of  several  kinds,  and  two  Crustacea  belonging  to  the 
Entomostraca.  The  Ciliate  Infusoria  are  very  numerous,  there  are  a  good  many 
Flagellata,  but  only  two  Rhizopods  were  observed. 

The  vegetation  consists  solely  of  Algae,  Blue-green  and  Green,  in  filaments, 
colonies,  and  single  cells.  The  Diatoms  are  few  and  very  small,  and  the  Desmids 
very  rare,  only  two  filamentous  kinds  being  seen. 

In  this  paper  a  preliminary  account  will  be  given  of  the  microscopic  life,  illustrated 
with  photographs  from  life  taken  on  the  spot,  and  with  drawings.  Some  of  the 
groups,  as  the  Rotifera  and  Tardigrada,  will  be  worked  up  and  reported  upon  in 
separate  papers.  Other  groups,  especially  the  Infusoria,  cannot  be  worked  up  in  a 
scientific  manner.  Such  animals  must  be  studied  by  a  specialist  on  the  spot.  Most 
of  them  cannot  be  preserved  in  recognisable  condition,  or  to  thus  preserve  them 
requires  special  training  and  experience.  Even  were  these  objections  inoperative 
there  is  not  time  on  such  an  expedition,  with  a  limited  scientific  staff,  to  overtake 
work  of  this  kind.  It  is  best  that  the  specialist  should  give  as  much  as  possible  of 
his  available  time  to  the  line  of  work  which  he  is  best  qualified  to  deal  with,  and 
outside  of  that  do  what  he  can. 

Such  information  as  we  were  able  to  collect  upon  the  Antarctic  Infusoria,  &c.,  in 
the  form  of  notes  and  sketches,  will  be  here  presented,  without  supposing  that  it  can 
be  of  much  value  to  scientific  students  of  these  groups.  A  specialist  looking  at  the 
sketches  might  make  a  guess  at  the  genera  of  some  of  the  animals.  Lack  of  know- 
ledge prevented  observations  being  made  on  various  organs  (mouth,  nucleus,  &c.) 
which  are  important  in  determining  species. 

Photographing  the  Microscopic  Organisms. — The  first  microphotographs  were 
made  by  Mawson,  who  had  some  previous  experience.  Mawson,  however,  could  not 
spare  much  time  for  this  work,  since  he  had  all  the  physical  observations  to  attend 
to,  as  well  as  the  preparations  for  a  long  sledge  journey.  After  a  few  lessons  from 
Mawson  the  biologist  was  able  to  continue  the  work  when  Mawson  had  left  on  his 
journey. 

It  was  not  easy  to  find  an  opportunity  for  microphotography  in  our  crowded 
hut.  During  the  day  the  tramping  of  feet  caused  too  much  vibration.  We  had 
to  wait  for  the  hours  of  the  night-watch  before  anything  could  be  done,  and 
Mawson  gave  an  entire  night-watch  to  experimenting  with  different  exposures  and 
plates. 


MICROSCOPIC  LIFE  AT  CAPE  ROYDS  19 

The  photographs  were  all  made  by  acetylene  light.  This  light  was  quite 
unsuitable  for  ordinary  work  with  the  microscope,  at  any  rate  with  the  lenses  we 
used.  We  could  never  get  good  definition  with  it.  Oil  lamps  were  used,  and 
though  they  were  of  a  very  poor  quality  for  such  purposes,  being  ordinary  stable 
lamps  with  very  inferior  glass,  they  sufficed  for  the  work.  Photographs  were  tried 
by  the  light  of  the  oil  lamps  and  also  by  daylight,  but  the  acetylene  proved  better 
than  either  for  photography.  The  little  daylight  which  filtered  through  the  frost- 
encrusted  window  was  insufficient  for  microphotography,  though  it  sufficed  for 
ordinary  photography. 

In  addition  to  difficulties  with  regard  to  light  we  had  to  contend  against 
dust.  In  our  small  hut,  with  its  large  stove  requiring  frequent  stirring  up,  its 
crowded  sleeping  accommodation  and  infinite  paraphernalia  of  fifteen  men,  cleaning 
could  be  of  but  a  perfunctory  character,  and  there  was  always  a  great  deal  of  dust 
settling. 

The  exposure  varied,  according  to  light,  subject,  and  especially  the  degree  of 
magnification,  from  two  seconds  to  half  an  hour.  With  higher  magnifications  we  got 
no  satisfactory  results,  and  we  ordinarily  used  a  magnification  of  about  100  diameters, 
at  the  eye,  which  would  give  about  200  at  the  full  length  of  the  camera.  The  eye- 
piece was  sometimes  removed,  but  the  results  were  not  so  good.  Two  plates 
were  exposed  on  each  occasion  and  immediately  afterwards  developed,  in  order  to 
check  the  time  of  exposure.  This  varied  so  much  with  different  subjects  that  we 
could  have  no  general  rule.  We  wished  to  shorten  the  time  to  the  utmost,  as  nearly 
all  the  animals  to  be  photographed  were  alive,  and  liable  to  change  their  positions. 
They  were  under  the  influence  of  a  mild  narcotic  which  quietened  them  down  a 
little,  but  which  had  to  be  so  weak  as  to  permit  them  to  feed  in  a  natural  way. 
Exposures  of  five,  and  even  of  two  seconds  were  used,  but  they  were  too  short,  and 
the  average  was  about  half  a  minute.  As  the  whole  of  a  subject  could  never  be  in 
focus  at  one  time  it  was  customary  when  using  long  exposures  to  gradually  alter 
the  focus,  with  the  view  of  giving  every  depth  a  chance.  This  was  done  too  much 
by  guess  to  be  a  conspicuous  success,  but  in  some  instances  it  gave  a  clearer 
outline  for  the  whole  body  of  a  thick  animal  than  would  have  been  possible 
otherwise. 

The  photographs,  as  such,  are  very  poor,  but  since  they  have  an  interest  as 
pictures  from  life  of  subjects  which  cannot  be  seen  anywhere  else  but  in  the 
Antarctic  Region,  their  shortcomings  will  perhaps  be  overlooked.  Unfortunately, 
through  some  mischance  the  best  negatives  have  been  mislaid,  and  are  not  available 
for  reproduction. 

Crustacea. — In  ice  from  Blue  Lake,  shortly  after  we  landed,  there  were  found 
immature  examples  of  a  Calanid  of  small  size.  It  was  "hot  in  condition  to  be  iden- 
tified, and  we  hoped  to  find  the  same  species  alive  and  mature  when  the  lake  melted, 
so  the  specimen  was  not  mounted.  As  it  happened  the  lake  never  melted  and  we 


20  JAMES  MURRAY 

never  saw  another  example.  It  is  possible  that  the  species  is  not  a  native  of  the  lake, 
which  is  situated  only  a  few  hundred  yards  to  the  north  of  a  bay  of  the  sea,  and 
it  is  conceivable  that  in  a  severe  summer  gale  microscopic  Crustacea  and  other 
organisms  might  get  caught  up  with  the  spray  and  blown  into  the  lake.  Against 
this  is  the  fact  that  Blue  Lake  is  the  freshest  of  all  the  lakes,  and  the  water  from  it 
is  as  fresh  as  condensed  water.  No  organism  definitely  recognisable  as  marine 
was  ever  got  in  it. 

The  only  other  Crustacean  found,  a  small  Harpacticid  like  Canthocamptus,  was 
also  got  in  Blue  Lake.  It  was  never  found  in  the  shallow  part  of  the  lake,  called  the 
Narrows,  but  only  at  a  depth  of  from  9  to  1 5  feet  below  the  surface  in  a  shaft  sunk 
by  Priestley  in  July  1908.  On  July  13,  we  found  a  skin  on  some  scraps  of  weed  at 
a  depth  of  9  feet.  On  July  17,  on  a  film  of  weed  covering  the  gravel  of  the  bed  of 
the  lake  at  a  depth  of  15  feet,  another  skin  was  got.  There  is  more  probability  of 
this  Crustacean  being  a  native  of  the  lake  than  the  Calanid,  as  its  relatives  are  not 
free-swimmers,  but  creep  about  on  various  plants.  No  drawings  or  photographs  of 
the  Crustacea  were  obtained. 

Mites. — In  Coast  Lake,  Blue  Lake,  Clear  Lake,  and  Deep  Lake  (near  Cape 
Barne)  skins  of  small  mites  were  got.  During  our  stay  in  the  Antarctic,  none  were 
seen  alive,  but  after  our  return  to  England  a  living  mite  was  obtained  from  vegeta- 
tion brought  from  Deep  Lake.  It  had  probably  hatched  from  an  egg.  In  Coast 
Lake  they  were  abundant,  and  of  several  species.  No  drawings  or  photographs  were 
made,  but  a  specimen  of  one  kind  was  mounted,  and  it  is  hoped  that  enough 
examples  will  yet  be  got  to  enable  us  to  report  upon  them. 

Insect. — On  Plate  IV.,  Fig.  16,  is  the  photograph  of  the  only  Antarctic  insect 
which  we  obtained,  a  parasite  on  Maccormick's  Skua.  Two  examples  were  got  by 
Joyce  on  one  Skua,  and  it  appears  to  be  rare,  as  very  careful  search  failed  to  find 
any  others.  On  an  Emperor  Penguin  also  a  small  louse  was  seen,  but  the  specimen 
was  lost. 

Other  Arthropods. — In  the  lakes  we  occasionally  found  fragments  of  Arthropods, 
but  whether  of  Crustacean,  Insect,  or  Acarid  we  did  not  find  out.  A  probable  explana- 
tion of  such  occurrences  is  that  they  were  parts  of  small  marine  Crustacea,  brought  by 
penguins  as  food  for  their  chicks,  and  blown  into  the  lakes. 

Worms. — In  addition  to  the  Kotifera  we  found  worms  belonging  to  several  other 
groups — Gastrotricha,  Turbellaria,  and  Nematoda. 

Gastrotricha. — This  small  group,  supposed  to  stand  near  the  Rotifera,  was  repre- 
sented by  a  single  example  of  Chcetonotus  found  among  weed  from  the  Deep  Lake 
at  Cape  Barne. 

Turbellaria. — Microscopic  Turbellaria  were  found  in  Coast  Lake  and  Blue  Lake. 
In  the  former  they  were  at  one  time  very  abundant. 

Nematoda. — The  Nematodes  of  the  lakes  were  microscopic  and  free-living.     Two 


MICROSCOPIC  LIFE  AT  CAPE  ROYDS  21 

kinds  were  common,  one  of  which  is  figured  on  Plate  IV.,  Fig.  13.     Another  kind 
had  the  skin  minutely  annulate. 

Injusoria. — In  dealing  with  the  lowest  and  simplest  forms  of  life,  which  are 
easily  carried  about  in  the  form  of  dust,  there  must  always  be  some  doubt  as  to 
whether  many  of  the  species  are  native  or  introduced  by  the  expedition  making  the 
observations. 

When  we  arrived  at  Cape  Eoyds  the  season  was  well  advanced  towards  autumn, 
and  nearly  all  the  lakes  were  already  frozen.  When  we  cut  out  blocks  of  ice 
containing  portions  of  the  vegetation  which  so  abounds  in  these  lakes  we  found  many 
kinds  of  Infusoria,  some  of  them  of  large  size,  dead  and  embedded  in  the  ice.  These 
were  undoubtedly  native.  Afterwards,  when  the  lakes  melted  and  living  Infusoria 
appeared  in  them,  we  were  able  to  recognise  many  of  them  as  of  the  same  kinds  which 
we  had  previously  found  frozen  into  the  ice.  Some  of  them  were  encysted  and 
probably  alive  when  found  in  the  ice,  but  we  never  observed  any  of  them  leaving  the 
cysts  while  under  observation. 

One  of  the  puzzling  organisms  which  we  first  observed  consisted  of  clusters  of 
whitish  elliptical  bodies,  in  which  no  definite  organs  could  be  seen.  They  were 
supposed  to  be  some  kind  of  eggs.  Long  afterwards  they  were  accidentally  dis- 
covered to  be  Vorticellids.  On  treating  with  formalin  an  "infusion"  in  which  a  kind 
of  Vorticellid  abounded,  it  was  found  that  they  contracted  into  the  puzzling  egg-like 
bodies. 

There  is  little  doubt  that  most,  if  not  all,  of  the  Infusoria  and  other  organisms 
hereafter  figured  were  true  natives  of  the  lakes  of  Cape  Royds.  The  number  of  kinds 
seen  was  much  greater  than  the  number  noted  and  figured.  Very  many  were  seen 
at  times  when  important  observations  were  in  progress,  which  allowed  of  no  time 
being  given  to  side  issues.  The  Flagellata,  on  account  of  the  greater  difficulty 
attending  their  study,  were  generally  passed  over  without  note. 

Rhizopoda, — The  paucity  of  Rhizopods  at  Cape  Royds  was  surprising,  after  it 
became  known  that  so  many  other  kinds  of  microscopic  life  abounded  in  the  lakes. 
In  the  lakes  only  two  testaceous  species  were  observed  :  the  well-known  Difflugia  vas, 
and  a  very  small  kind  which  appears  to  be  a  Quadrula.  Among  the  moss  there  was 
another  species,  not  identified. 

On  one  occasion,  when  the  ice  of  a  lake  was  melted,  we  found  numbers  of  an 
amorphous  granular  organism,  each  with  a  round  nucleus,  which  were  probably 
Amoebae,  but  being  only  seen  dead  nothing  could  be  made  of  them. 

When  our  material  is  submitted  to  a  specialist  it  is  expected  that  he  will  find 
other  forms  which  we  have  overlooked.* 

Heliozoa, — In  Coast  Lake  in  April  1908,  there  occurred  an  animal  which  appears 

*  Dr.  Penard  has,  in  fact,  detected  about  a  dozen  species,  which  will  be  reported  upon  in  a  subsequent 
paper. 


82  JAMES  MURRAY 

to  be  a  Heliozoan  (Acanthocystis  ?).  The  spines  are  all  of  one  kind,  and  they  are  few 
in  number  and  of  clavate  form  (Plate  VIII. ,  Fig.  23). 

Microscopic  Plants. — The  Algae,  the  majority  of  which  are  microscopic,  will  be 
reported  upon  in  a  separate  paper. 

Bacteria. — Many  kinds  abounded  in  the  lakes  in  summer  ;  but  in  this  group  it  is 
impossible  to  discriminate  between  native  and  introduced  kinds. 

Organisms  of  Doubtful  Position. — Many  organisms  occurred,  of  whose  nature 
we  had  no  guess.  Certain  of  these  are  figured  on  Plates  VII.  and  VIII.  Perhaps 
the  sight  of  these  sketches  may  suggest  some  of  their  names  to  other  naturalists. 

Acinetaria. — No  tentaculiferous  Infusoria  were  definitely  recognised,  but  while 
these  pages  are  in  the  press,  Mr.  A.  W.  Sheppard,  F.R.M.S.,  has  identified  the 
organism  figured  on  Plate  VII.,  Fig.  19,  as  the  encysted  condition  of  a  species  of 
Podophrya. 


PLATE  I 


PLATE   I 

MICROPHOTOGRAPHS  OF  A  ROTIFER 

PhUodina  gregaria,  sp.  n. 

FIGURE  1. — Portion  of  the  field  of  the  microscope,  crowded  with  the  Rotifers,  under 
a  low  power.  These  examples  were  brought  by  Priestley  from  a  lake  in  the 
west.  They  were  frozen  solid  when  brought  in.  As  soon  as  they  were  thawed 
some  were  transferred  by  a  pipette  to  a  slide  and  photographed.  They  were 
not  narcotised,  and  were  beginning  to  stretch  themselves  and  creep  about,  so 
the  exposure  had  to  be  very  short.  Many  of  them  have  moved  and  are  blurred 
in  the  photograph. 

FIGURE  2. — One  of  the  Rotifers  feeding.  It  is  under  the  influence  ot  Eucaine, 
but  its  form  has  been  little  affected  by  it,  and  is  nearly  normal.  The  dark 
column  in  front  of  the  head  is  formed  of  an  accumulation  of  minute  particles 
which  have  been  swept  towards  the  mouth  by  the  cilia  of  the  discs.  The 
little  clouds  of  particles  on  each  side  of  the  neck  are  those  which  have  been 
rejected  by  the  selectors  in  the  gullet,  while  those  chosen  for  food  have  passed 
down  to  the  jaws. 

FIGURE  3. — Side  view  of  an  extremely  large  example.  It  has  been  narcotised  and 
the  constrictions  bounding  the  turgid  central  trunk  have  been  much  deepened 
by  the  influence  of  the  Eucaine  on  the  muscles.  (Photograph  by  Mawson.) 

FIGURE  4. — A  Rotifer  under  slight  pressure,  to  show  some  of  the  internal  organs 
and  the  well-grown  young.  The  dark  central  tract  was  coloured  deep  red, 
and  the  eyes,  being  also  red,  show  more  conspicuously  than  in  life. 


BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.  1907-9. 


VOL.  I.  PLATE  I. 


MURRAY:    MICROSCOPIC  LIFE 


n-:  1. 


FIGURE  2. 


FIOUIIE  3. 


FIGURE  4-. 


PLATE   II 


BRIT.    ANTARCT.    EXPED.    1907-9.      VOL.    I. 


PLATE  II 

MICROPHOTOGRAPHS  OF  ROTIFERS 

Adineta,  Hydatina,'  Diaschiza 

FIGURE  5. — Adineta  grandis  under  the  influence  of  Eucaine.  The  trunk  and  anterior 
part  of  the  body  are  of  the  normal  form.  The  Eucaine  has  caused  the  foot  to  be 
drawn  in,  which  would  not  usually  be  the  case  in  the  natural  condition.  The  two 
examples,  of  which  portions  are  seen  at  the  foot  of  the  photograph,  show  the 
deep  constrictions  of  the  neck  which  are  caused  by  the  influence  of  the  Eucaine 
on  the  muscles  of  the  trunk. 

FIGURE  6. — A  very  large  example  of  Adineta  grandis.  It  is  under  slight  pressure, 
so  that  the  foot  could  not  be  drawn  in.  The  head  and  neck  have  been  moved 
while  the  photograph  was  being  taken,  but  the  central  trunk  shows  clearly  the 
six  contained  young. 

FIGURE  7. — Hydatina  senta,  side  view.  This  is  the  only  free-swimming  Rotifer  which 
we  obtained  in  the  Antarctic.  It  appeared  in  Coast  Lake  in  summer.  The 
photograph  is  taken  from  a  living  example,  under  the  influence  of  Eucaine,  which 
causes  the  cilia  to  move  very  slowly.  The  natural  shape  was  not  affected  by  the 
narcotic  in  this  instance,  though  it  frequently  causes  some  distortion. 

FIGURE  8. — A  small  Rotifer,  probably  Diaschiza  tenuior,  seen  from  the  side.  It  was 
narcotised,  and  was  showing  the  natural  form  very  well  when  the  plate  was  put 
in,  but  at  the  very  moment  of  exposure  the  body  has  become  turgid,  which  is  an 
indication  that  death  is  imminent. 

Close  under  the  head  of  the  Rotifer  can  be  seen  one  of  the  small  Diatoms  which 
are  common  in  the  lakes. 


BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.  1907-9. 


VOL.  I.  PLATE  II. 


MURRAY:   MICROSCOPIC  LIFE 


r 


FIGURE  5. 


FIGURE  6. 


v 


FIGURE  7. 


FIGURE  8. 


PLATE  III 


PLATE  III 

MICROPHOTOGRAPHS  OF  WATER-BEARS 

FIGURE  9. — Side  view  of  the  common  Antarctic  species  of  Water-bear,  Macrobiotus 
arcticus,  which  is  also  found  in  the  Arctic  Region.  In  the  photograph  may  also 
be  seen  a  Eotifer  and  some  filaments  of  Algae. 

FIGURE  10. — Dorsal  view  of  another  example  of  the  same  species.  Four  eggs  at  an 
early  stage  of  development  can  be  seen  in  the  body.  To  the  left  of  the  animal  is 
one  of  the  eggs  of  the  species,  but  it  is  so  encumbered  by  debris  that  its 
characteristic  peculiarities  cannot  be  seen. 

FIGURE  11. — A  different  species  of  Water-bear  (Macrobiotus  oberhduseri]  found  among 
moss  at  Cape  Royds.  It  has  one  excessively  long  claw  on  each  foot,  and  the  body 
is  marked  with  a  warm  brown  colour,  forming  longitudinal  and  transverse  bands, 
indicated  in  the  photograph. 

Mb  />*'\  i>  i^*£ 
FIGURE  12. — Another  example  of  Macrobiotus  arcticus,  containing  six  eggs  not  very 

far  advanced  in  development.     In  the  anterior  part  of  the  body  the  fat-cells  in 
the  body  fluid  can  be  distinguished. 


BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.  1907-9. 


VOL.  I.  PLATE  III. 


MURRAY:   MICROSCOPIC  LIFE 


FlClL-RH    10. 


'*' 


FIGURE  11. 


FicniK  U. 


PLATE  IV 


PLATE   IV 

MICROPHOTOGRAPHS  OF  NEMATODE,  ALG^E,  AND  LOUSE 

FIGURE  13. — Part  of  the  field  of  the  microscope  under  a  low  power,  showing  many 
kinds  of  organisms.  The  largest  is  a  Nematode  of  the  commonest  Antarctic  kind. 
The  pear-shaped  pharynx  can  be  seen.  There  is  a  Water- bear  and  the  cast  skin 
of  another,  a  contracted  Rotifer,  and  some  Algae  in  round  colonies.  Near  the 
upper  right-hand  corner  is  a  large  egg,  which  is  probably  that  otHydatina  senta. 
(Photograph  by  Mawson.) 

FIGURE  14. — Fine  filamentous  Alga  from  Pony  Lake.  This  is  probably  an  Oscillatoria, 
but  is  different  from  the  kind  most  commonly  found  in  the  other  lakes. 

FIGURE  15. — A  short  rod  of  the  common  blue-green  Alga  (probably  Oscillatoria), 
highly  magnified.  Beside  it  are  some  narrower  filaments  of  another  kind. 

FIGURE  16. — Photograph  from  life  of  the  only  parasite  which  we  obtained  from  the 
feathers  of  Antarctic  birds.  Two  examples  were  got  on  a  Skua  Gull  (Megalestris 
Maccormicki).  Though  not  so  purely  microscopic  as  the  other  animals  photo- 
graphed, it  is  a  very  small  species. 


BUIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPE1).  1907-9. 


VOL.  I.  PLATE  IV. 


MURRAY:   MICROSCOPIC  LIFE 


FlGI'KK    13. 


FIGURE  14. 


FIG  IT  UK 


FlCiUUK     1(>. 


PLATE   V 


PLATE   V 

CiLIATE  INFUSORIA ;  VOET1CELLA  AND  SIMILAR  FORMS 

FIGURE  1. — Vorticella,  a  narrowly  pyriform  species,  with  slender  contractile  stalk, 
which  can  extend  to  five  or  six  times  the  length  of  the  body.  The  whole  body 
was  covered  by  papillae,  as  in  V.  monilata  Tatem,  but  the  shape  of  the  body  is 
different. 

FIGURE  2. — Vorticella,  a  species  of  conical  form,  widest  at  the  mouth,  and  with  a  con- 
striction separating  a  basal  portion,  one-third  of  the  total  length.  There  is  only 
a  short  broad  stalk,  but  it  may  have  been  broken  off. 

FIGURE  3. —  Vorticella,  mouth  not  expanded. 

FIGURK  4. —  Vorticellid,  narrowly  oblong  ;  free-swimming  example,  with  posterior 
ring  of  cilia  and  no  stalk. 

FIGURE  5. —  Vorticella,  long  narrowly  oval  species,  with  narrow  mouth. 
FIGURE  6. —  Vorticellids,  two  contracted  individuals  on  one  stalk. 

FIGURE  7. — An  animal  of  doubtful  position,  resembling  the  Vorticellids  in  possessing 
only  a  circlet  of  cilia  round  the  mouth. 

FIGURE   8. —  Vorticellid,  another  free-swimming  example. 


Brit  Antarct.  Exped  1907-9. 

MURRAY;     MICROSCOPIC    LIFE. 


Vol.  1.  Plate  V 


J.  Murray   del    ad  nat. 


PLATE   VI 


BRIT.    ANTARCT.    EXPED.    1907-9.       VOL.    I.  E 


PLATE  VI 

CILIATE  INFUSORIA 

FIGURE  9a. — A  large  reddish  brown  animal,  common  in  all  the  lakes.  It  is  covered 
all  over  with  short  cilia,  which  appear  to  continue  beneath  the  surface  as  short 
rods,  making  a  thick  skin.  A  bundle  of  pbaryngeal  rods  forms  a  kind  of  narrow 
cage,  tapering  downwards,  as  in  Nassula,  &c. 

FIGURE  96. — Probably  the  same  animal  as  Fig.  9a,  at  a  different  stage  in  its  life- 
history.  The  cage  of  pharyngeal  rods  is  of  the  same  form,  and  projects  far  above 
the  surface.  The  skin  is  thin,  and  not  ciliated.  Many  of  these  colourless 
examples  were  found  at  the  same  time. 

FIGURE  10. — A  narrow  curved  animal,  narrowing  to  one  end.  It  is  marked  longitu- 
dinally with  faint  ridges,  which  are  seen  in  profile  to  be  finely  undulate.  It  is 
ciliated  on  all  the  ridges,  the  cilia  being  long  and  not  very  close  together. 
They  gradually  elongate  to  the  broad  end.  All  are  motile  but  only  those  on  a 
limited  area  move  actively.  No  mouth  could  be  detected. 

FIGURE  11. — A  ciliate  with  projecting  crest  ;  no  other  details  noted. 

FIGURE  12. — Ciliate  with  a  beak,  a  series  of  strong  cilia  at  the  mouth,  and  another 
series  round  half  the  circumference  of  the  body. 

FIGURE  13. — Large  oval  ciliate,  ciliated  all  over,  and  with  a  vibrating  membrane 
occupying  an  elliptical  area.  The  cilia  appear  to  be  continued  under  the  skin 
as  rods  (as  in  the  species  figured  in  9a). 

FIGURE  14. — A  dark  brown  ciliate,  with  cilia  all  over  the  body.  It  is  elliptical  in 
form,  with  the  poles  produced  into  rounded  processes.  No  mouth  or  other 
organs  could  be  seen.  As  it  travels  along  in  the  direction  of  its  long  axis  it 
at  the  same  time  revolves  round  it. 

FIGURE  15. — An  oval  ciliate,  marked  with  longitudinal  ridges.  There  are  four 
strong  setse  at  each  end,  a  row  of  motile  setae  half-way  down  one  side,  and 
a  single  seta  on  the  same  side. 


Brit  Antarct.  Expect  1907-9. 

MURRAY:     MICROSCOPIC    LIFE. 


Vol.  1.  Plate  VI 


9.  a 


10. 


15 


M.rray  del    ad  nat. 


PLATE    VII 


PLATE  VII 

FLAGELLATA;   AND  VARIOUS  ORGANISMS  OF  DOUBTFUL  POSITION 

FIGURE  16. — An  oval  flagellate  with  green  granular  contents.  One  strong 
flagellum  was  seen. 

FIGURE  17. — A  cluster  of  four  cells,  with  one  flagellum  visible  on  each.  The  cluster 
rotated  rapidly  with  an  irregular  motion.  The  contents  were  green. 

FIGURE  18. — A  colourless  flagellate,  of  ovate  form  with  a  long  tail:  one  flagellum 
seen  :  contents  granular. 

FIGURE  19. — A  hyaline,  almost  spherical  body,  set  on  a  slender  stalk.  The  body  is 
marked  with  ten  prominent  annular  ridges,  about  equidistant  from  one  another, 
except  near  the  pole  to  which  the  stalk  is  attached,  where  they  are  crowded. 
The  protoplasmic  contents  form  a  globular  mass  much  smaller  than  the  envelope. 
Identified  as  an  encysted  Podophrya,  by  Mr.  A.  W.  Sheppard,  F.R.M.S. 
(see  p.  22). 

FIGURE  20. — A  soft  orange -coloured  ciliated  body  issuing  from  a  small  opening  in 
a  hyaline  shell. 

FIGURE  21. — A  cluster  of  oval  bodies  of  sienna-brown  colour,  in  a  darker  brown 
matrix. 

FIGURE  22. — A  soft  thick-skinned  animal,  finely  ciliate  all  over.  Little  internal 
structure  could  be  seen  except  two  cavities  occupying  the  greater  part  of  the 
interior.  The  granular  part  between  the  cavities  is  sienna-brown  in  colour. 
Two  vibrating  membranes  were  seen,  like  those  which  are  found  in  various 
sorts  of  worms. 


Brit  Antarct.  Exped  1907-9. 

MURRAY     MICROSCOPIC    LIFE 


16 


17 


Vol.  1.   Plato  VII 


20 


19 


21 


22 


J.  Murray   del    ad  nat. 


PLATE   VIII 


PLATE  VIII 

VARIOUS  ORGANISMS  OF  DOUBTFUL  POSITION 

FIGUEE  23. — Possibly  a  heliozocm  (Acanthocystis  ?).  The  spines  are  few  and  of  one 
kind  only,  clavate  in  form.  Plentiful  in  Coast  Lake. 

FIGURE  24. — Oval  bodies  of  a  dingy  purple  colour,  always  occurring  in  clusters,  as 
many  as  eight  together.  They  always  included  many  round  pellet-like  bodies. 

FIGUBE  25. — Apparently  a  bit  of  vegetable  tissue.  Such  a  plant  must  have  been 
introduced,  but  if  so  it  must  have  been  previous  to  our  expedition,  as  it  was 
found  in  the  ice  of  a  lake  which  was  frozen  when  we  arrived. 

FIGURE  26. — An  elliptical  hyaline  body,  made  up  of  eight  rings. 

FIGURE  27a. — A  brown  discoid  body  with  finely  reticulate  surface.  One  pole  is  pro- 
duced with  a  little  point.  There  is  no  opening  of  any  kind.  Fig.  27b  shows  a 
bit  of  the  reticulate  surface  more  highly  magnified. 

FIGURE  28. — Round  vegetable  cells,  in  irregular  clusters  and  strings.  A  few  were 
filled  with  green  contents,  like  two  of  those  figured ;  most  had  a  little  shrivelled 
dark  mass  as  in  four  of  the  cells  figured  ;  the  empty  cells  were  open,  as  shown 
in  the  two  cells  at  the  ends  of  the  series. 


Brit  Antarct  Exped  1907-9. 

MURRAY     MICROSCOPIC    LIFE. 


Vol.  1.  Plate  Vlll. 


23 


25 


27 


26 


27  fe 


ad  nat. 


PART  III 

ANTARCTIC  KOTIFERA 

BY  JAMES  MURRAY 


AMONG  the  various  forms  of  freshwater  life  the  Rotifera  were  most  conspicuous. 
They  were  found  among  mosses  and  in  the  lakes  and  ponds.  In  the  former  situation 
they  were  relatively  scarce,  while  in  the  lakes  they  were  extremely  abundant,  and 
were  often  associated  in  such  numbers  as  to  affect  the  colour  of  the  water. 

Some  sixteen  species  were  distinguished,  representing  three  of  the  recognised 
orders,  and  five  or  six  distinct  families.  The  predominance  of  the  Rotifera  was 
entirely  due  to  the  Bdelloida,  of  which  a  dozen  species  were  found.  In  the  other 
orders  there  were  only  one  or  two  members  of  each  family  present. 

Five  of  the  Bdelloids  are  species  previously  unknown.  Most  of  the  others  differ 
more  or  less  from  the  types  of  their  species.  Only  two  non-Bdelloids  species  were 
recognised  (Hydatina  senta  and  Diaschiza  tenuior),  the  others  were  only  assigned  to 
their  genera.  No  Rotifera  were  found  in  the  sea. 

I  have  been  able  to  find  no  record  of  any  species  of  rotifers  found  on  the  Antarctic 
Continent  or  on  any  of  the  islands  which,  though  lying  outside  the  Antarctic  Circle, 
possess  a  polar  climate.  The  German  Expedition  found  Rotifers  on  the  Gaussberg, 
just  on  the  Antarctic  Circle  (Richters,  31) ;  *  the  Swedish  Expedition  obtained  them 
at  Snow  Hill  Island,  not  far  from  the  Circle  (Richters,  32),  and  the  Scottish  Expedi- 
tion at  the  South  Orkneys,  a  little  farther  north  (Murray,  26).  t  All  of  these  were 
unrecognisable. 

The  only  species  doubtfully  identified  from  this  whole  great  area  is  Callidina 
papillosa,  Thomp.  (40).  Richters  found  an  egg  in  moss  from  the  Gaussberg  which 
resembled  the  egg  of  C.  papillosa  figured  by  Jansou  (20).  The  identification  of  this 
egg  can  never  be  certain,  as  there  are  several  other  Bdelloids  which  have  similar  eggs, 
covered  with  blunt  processes. 

To  find  definite  records  of  Rotifera  in  the  southern  hemisphere  we  must  go  far 

*  Figures  in  heavy  type  enclosed  in  brackets  refer  to  list  of  books  at  the  end  of  the  paper. 
t  The  Rotifer  vulgaris  casually  recorded  in  that  paper  must  be  regarded  with  doubt.     As  all  the  others 
•were  dead,  it  had  probably  been  accidentally  introduced  into  the  bottle. 

BRIT.  ANTARCT.  KXPED.   1907-9.       VOL.  I.       PART  3,  ISSUED  APRIL  1910  F 


42  JAMES  MURRAY 

beyond  the  Antarctic  Region.  A  few  species  have  been  found  in  Gough  Island 
(Murray,  29),  and  Amsterdam  Island  (Richters,  31).  Hilgendorf  (19)  has  published 
a  list  of  over  forty  species  from  New  Zealand,  in  about  latitude  43°  S.,  and  these  are- 
the  nearest  neighbours  to  the  Antarctic  Rotifers  of  which  I  can  find  any  notice. 


Order— BDELLOIDA 
Family — PHILODINAD^E 

Genus — Philodina 
Philodina  gregaria,  sp.  n.    (Plate  XL,  Figs.  7a—7e) 

Specific  characters. — Large,  corona  large,  narrower  than  trunk,  wider  than  collar, 
space  between  discs  wide,  the  rounded  lobes  springing  from  collar  large,  the  interspace 
with  two  smaller  convexities ;  collar  very  prominent,  but  scarcely  marked  off  from 
pedicels;  rostrum  short  and  broad;  antenna  short;  eyes  large,  pale  brown;  teeth  2+1/1+2;- 
foot  of  four  joints,  spurs  slender,  acute,  moderately  divergent,  separated  by  broad  flat 
interspace;  viviparous;  found  aggregated  in  great  numbers,  forming  larger  or  smaller 
patches. 

Detailed  description. — Size  variable ;  smallest  about  •£$  inch  long,  in  the  feeding 
attitude  (=  416  M)  ;  longest  measured  ^  inch  (=  800  /*)  when  fully  extended  creep- 
ing :  a  fairly  large  example  had  the  following  measurements,  diameter  of  corona  y^ 
inch  (=  166  yu),  of  collar  y^  (inch  =  132  /*),  of  neck  -^  inch  (=  106  /*),  of  trunk 
yyT  inch  (=  213  ft),  length  of  jaw  ^fa  inch  (=*  47  M).  of  spur  ygVs  inch  (=25  /*). 
Central  setae  were  not  detected  on  the  discs.  The  very  prominent  collar  passes 
insensibly  into  the  pedicels,  the  junction  marked  only  by  the  line  of  fine  cilia 
(secondary  wreath).  The  rostrum  bears  short  lamellae,  a  brush  of  active  cilia,  and 
four  stout  straight  setae,  corresponding  to  the  tactile  setae  of  P.  brevipes  (25)  and 
some  other  species,  but  they  were  not  seen  in  motion.  The  length  of  the  antenna  is 
about  equal  to  half  the  diameter  of  the  neck  segment  which  bears  it. 

The  brain  is  fairly  large.  Each  jaw  bears  two  strong  teeth  and  one  thin  one,  and 
in  addition  the  usual  fine  striae.  There  is  a  prominent  hook  at  the  back  of  the  ramus. 
The  stomach  is  very  voluminous,  and  of  a  very  bright  deep  ruby  or  crimson  colour, 
due  to  the  presence  of  coloured  granules  and  globules.  The  central  trunk  is  the 
broadest  part  of  the  body,  and  varies  in  size  with  the  number  of  young  carried.  It  is- 
regularly  plicate,  the  folds  shallower  on  the  back,  deeper  on  the  sides. 

The  reproduction  is  viviparous.  Usually  there  are  two  or  three  young  carried  at  a 
time.  Whatever  the  number,  they  appear  to  be  all  at  the  same  stage  of  development. 
At  any  rate  they  are  all  of  the  same  apparent  size,  and  after  the  jaws  are  developed 
they  appear  to  be  alike  in  all.  It  is  very  different  with  the  genus  Rotifer,  in  which. 


ANTARCTIC  ROTIFERA  43 

the  young  are  obviously  of  very  different  ages,  one  being  fully  developed  while  another 
shows  no  detail  at  all.     The  yolk  mass  contains  eight  nuclei. 

The  spurs  vary  greatly  in  size,  generally  most  closely  resembling  those  of  P.  acuti- 
cornis  (25).  The  interspace  is  relatively  broader.  Occasionally  they  are  very  long 
and  apparently  two-jointed.  The  last  foot-joint  is  long.  The  ventral  toes  are  very 
large,  and  the  dorsal  ones  very  small. 

The  vibratile  tags  are  short,  and  broadly  spindle-shaped.  Three  pairs  have  been 
seen. 

Habitat. — In  lakes  and  ponds  at  Cape  Royds,  Cape  Barne,  and  at  the  Stranded 
Moraines  on  the  west  side  of  McMurdo  Sound.  It  was  absent  from  the  very  saline 
Green  Lake,  but  was  in  nearly  all  the  other  waters  examined.  It  was  much  the  most 
abundant  species  in  the  district.  Its  abundance  in  Coast  Lake  and  in  the  lake  at 
the  Stranded  Moraines  was  remarkable.  In  winter  it  was  got  by  digging  out  ice 
containing  plants  from  the  lakes.  As  soon  as  these  were  thawed  the  rotifers  were 
found  active  in  great  plenty.  In  summer  blood-red  patches  began  to  form  on  the 
stones  at  the  margin  of  Coast  Lake.  These  attained  to  a  diameter  of  an  inch. 
Similar  patches  were  on  the  plants,  but  these  were  more  difficult  to  detect  owing  to 
the  orano-e-red  colour  of  the  plants.  In  the  lake  at  the  Stranded  Moraines,  Priestley 
reports  that  the  patches  reached  to  six  or  eight  inches  in  diameter,  and  were  of 
appreciable  thickness.  These  patches  were  formed  solely  of  P.  gregaria,  which  were 
fixed  side  by  side,  as  close  as  they  could  stand. 

To  obtain  them  a  handful  of  weed  was  taken  and  washed  in  a  bucket  of  water, 
being  vigorously  shaken  in  order  to  detach  all  the  adherent  microscopic  organisms. 
The  sediment  thus  obtained  was  strained  through  a  coarse  silk  net,  in  order  to  remove 
the  larger  particles,  and  the  fine  sediment  was  then  bottled  and  allowed  to  settle.  At 
first  it  was  of  a  dull  green  colour,  from  the  preponderance  of  blue-green  Algae.  After 
an  hour  or  two  a  red  film,  like  blood,  appeared  on  the  surface  of  the  mud.  The  rotifers 
have  crept  out  of  the  mud.  After  a  time  they  leave  the  mud  and  creep  up  the  sides 
of  the  bottle  into  the  clear  water  above  ;  eventually  they  reach  the  surface  of  the  water 
and  there  form  a  ring  of  red  round  the  bottle.  They  may  then  be  collected  in 
thousands  with  a  brush  and  put  into  clean  water.  This  process  may  be  continued 
with  one  lot  for  days,  an  hour  or  two  being  sufficient  time  for  new  hosts  of  the  endless 
procession  to  reach  the  surface. 

Habits. — P.  gregaria  is  ordinarily  rather  a  restless  animal.  It  is  ready  enough 
to  feed,  and  remains  fixed  in  one  spot  for  a  long  time,  but  it  swings  about  continually 
so  that  it  is  not  easy  to  get  a  good  portrait.  Though  normally  anchoring  itself,  in 
company  with  its  myriad  neighbours,  it  occasionally  casts  off"  and  goes  swimming.  In 
Coast  Lake  it  was  got  in  the  tow-net,  and  a  few  might  be  seen  if  a  bottle  of  the  lake 
water  was  held  up  to  the  light.  According  to  Priestley  it  was  much  more  plentiful 
in  the  water  of  the  lake  at  the  Stranded  Moraines. 

It  was  particularly  amenable  to  treatment  with  mild  narcotics.     When  a  very 


44  JAMES  MURRAY 

dilute  solution  of  Eucaine  was  added  to  the  water,  it  at  once  changed  both  habits  and 
appearance.  It  ceased  its  restless  swaying  about  and  went  on  feeding  so  steadily 
that  it  could  easily  be  photographed.  The  circular  muscles  were  slightly  contracted, 
thus  deepening  the  constrictions  between  the  principal  divisions  of  the  body.  The 
foot  was  inclined  to  be  further  retracted  than  in  the  normal  condition.  Otherwise 
there  was  little  change  in  form,  and  the  corona  was  quite  unaltered.  The  effect  of  the 
narcotic  was  much  less  than  on  P.  laticeps.  When  that  species  is  treated  with  Eucaine 
it  partially  retracts  the  foot,  expands  the  usually  narrow  central  trunk,  and  reduces 
the  width  of  the  corona,  in  fact  it  so  completely  alters  its  proportions  that  it  is  not 
recognisable  for  the  same  species,  and  might  be  mistaken  for  some  species  of  the  central 
group  (P.  citrina,  P.  brevipes,  &c.)  unless  particular  attention  were  paid  to  the  spurs. 
Affinities. — P.  gregaria  belongs  to  the  central  group  of  the  genus,  possessing  eyes 
and  tapering  spurs  of  moderate  size.  There  is  nothing  distinctive  in  the  general 
form.  The  viviparous  reproduction  distinguishes  it  from  all  the  species  of  that  group. 
The  red  colour  is  differently  distributed  from  that  of  P.  roseola,  in  which  the  red  is 
diffused.  In  this  species  it  is  limited  to  the  stomach.  The  slender  spurs,  with  broad 
interspace,  are  like  those  of  P.  laticeps  and  P.  acuticornis.  The  short  antenna 
separates  it  from  both.  It  is  of  larger  size  than  any  of  the  other  species  in  the 
central  group,  except  perhaps  P.  citrina. 

The  large  size,  red  stomach,  viviparous  reproduction,  and  slender  spurs  set  far 
apart,  will  distinguish  it  from  all  known  species  of  Philodina.  The  absence  of  a 
groove  between  the  prominent  collar  and  the  pedicels  is  also  a  good  character. 

Natural  history. — As  the  dominant  species  in  the  lakes  of  Cape  Royds  the 
natural  history  of  P.  gregaria  received  a  good  deal  of  attention,  and  many  experi- 
ments were  made  to  elucidate  it.  These  will  not  be  detailed  here,  but  a  short 
summary  of  the  facts  will  be  given.*  Its  extraordinary  abundance  must  indicate  that 
it  is  possessed  of  great  powers  of  resistance  to  all  the  adverse  influences  which  would 
be  supposed  to  attend  upon  it  in  such  a  rigorous  climate,  or  else  that  it  is  of  remark- 
able fecundity.  It  appears  to  triumph  in  both  ways. 

It  is  perhaps  inaccurate  to  call  it  "gregarious."  It  is  found  in  large  "  flocks,"  but 
it  is  doubtful  if  they  ever  "  flocked  "  together.  The  great  crowds  in  which  they  occur 
appear  to  arise  from  the  rapidity  with  which  they  reproduce  themselves.  Several 
young,  probably  sometimes  as  many  as  six  or  eight,  are  produced  at  a  time,  and  they 
seem  to  stay  and  fix  themselves  where  they  are  born.  Thus  the  patches  increase  till 
they  reach  inches  in  diameter,  and  as  there  is  not  foothold  for  all,  they  stand  on  one 
another's  heads  (so  to  speak)  till  a  layer  of  measurable  thickness  is  produced. 

They  withstood  all  the  tests  applied  to  Adineta  grandis  except  the  heating,  which 
was  not  tried  on  them.  They  are  normally  frozen  in  the  ice  of  the  lakes  for  the 
greater  part  of  the  year,  and  revive  at  any  time  that  the  ice  is  thawed.  When  dried 
and  exposed  to  the  lowest  air  temperatures  for  a  long  time,  they  were  not  killed,  nor 

*  The  detailed  account  of  the  observations  and  experiments  will  be  found  in  a  paper  on  "  Life  under 
Polar  Conditions,"  in  a  later  number  of  this  series  of  Reports. 


ANTARCTIC  ROTIFERA  45 

did  they  die  when  alternately  thawed  and  refrozen  at  weekly  intervals  for  several 
months.  They  lived  for  a  month  in  sea-water  and  in  a  much  more  saline  solution,  and 
became  active  again  immediately  on  being  transferred  to  fresh  water.  They  were 
dried  while  in  the  Antarctic  by  exposing  to  the  air  till  all  the  ice  passed  off  by  ablation, 
'  and  were  then  conveyed  by  a  long  voyage  through  the  tropics  to  England,  where  they 
revived  within  an  hour  of  being  moistened  and  could  be  seen  alive  in  London  a  year 
after  they  were  collected. 

In  England  they  were  subjected  to  a  temperature  of  —  78°  Cent,  for  many  hours, 
by  Mr.  J.  H.  Priestley,  of  Bristol,  and  survived. 

Philodina  antarctica,  sp.  n.  (Plate  X.,  Figs.  5a-5c) 

Specific  characters. — Large,  elongate  :  corona  of  moderate  breadth,  wider  than 
the  prominent  collar,  discs  with  central  papilla?,  each  bearing  several  fine  setae  ; 
antenna  long  :  teeth  2/2  :  foot  four-jointed,  long,  slender ;  spurs  with  broad  triangular 
basal  portion,  and  narrow  apical  portion  of  about  equal  length  (Fig.  5b) ;  last  joint 
of  foot  short,  dorsal  toes  nearly  as  large  as  the  ventral  ones  :  pale  brown  eyes. 

Detailed  description. — The  size  is  variable.  The  shortest  measured  was  380  /*  in 
length,  in  the  feeding  attitude,  and  with  the  foot  well  drawn  in.  The  longest 
measured  714  n,  fully  extended,  creeping.  In  a  large  example  the  diameter  of  the 
corona  was  96  n,  of  the  collar  73  M,  of  the  neck  60  p.,  of  the  trunk  106  n  :  the  length 
of  the  spur  was  30  /x. 

The  stomach  is  of  a  deep  ruby-red  colour,  the  anterior  part  of  the  body  of  a 
faint  brown,  and  the  foot  clear  and  hyaline.  The  longitudinal  folds  of  the  trunk 
are  deep  at  the  sides  and  shallow  on  the  back.  The  discs  are  separated  by  a  space 
equal  to  half  the  diameter  of  a  disc.  Into  this  come  the  low  rounded  lobes  terminat- 
ing the  collar.  They  are  slightly  separated,  and  the  part  between  is  convex.  The 
collar  appears  two-lobed  in  dorsal  view,  and  is  distinctly  marked  off  from  the  pedicels. 
The  rostrum  is  short  and  broad.  The  length  of  the  antenna  is  equal  to  the  diameter 
of  the  neck  segment  bearing  it.  The  reproduction  is  unknown.  Neither  eggs  nor 
embryos  were  ever  seen.  The  yolk  mass  has  the  eight  nuclei  usual  in  the  order. 
The  vibratile  tags  were  not  detected. 

It  was  an  extremely  difficult  animal  to  study,  on  account  of  its  restless  disposition. 
It  went  wriggling  and  twisting  and  creeping  about,  often  stopping  to  feed  for  a 
moment,  but  never  still.  There  were  no  narcotics  available  when  it  was  first  found 
in  considerable  numbers,  and  it  afterwards  proved  to  be  a  rare  species,  and  very 
uncertain  in  its  occurrence.  For  this  reason  no  photographs  were  obtained,  and 
no  specimens  could  be  preserved. 

Habitat. — Among  plants  in  the  ice  of  several  lakes  at  Cape  Royds  and  Cape 
Barne.  It  was  never  got  except  by  thawing  the  ice  of  the  lakes.  Most  of  the  lakes 
in  which  it  lived  did  not  melt  in  either  of  the  two  summers  we  spent  in  the  district. 

Affinities. — Belonging  also  to  the  central  group  of  species,  there  is  little  in  its  general 
proportions  and  characters  to  distinguish  it  from  several  other  species.  It  is  more 


46  JAMES  MURRAY 

elongate  than  most  of  them,  and  in  that  respect  comes  nearest  to  P.  erythrophthalma 
Ehr.  (15).  The  characteristic  spurs,  consisting  of  a  narrow  blunt  apical  portion 
springing  abruptly  from  a  broad  conical  base,  will  separate  it  from  that  and  all  other 
known  species  when  well  developed.  Sometimes  the  narrow  part  is  considerably 
reduced.  No  other  member  of  the  genus  has  such  spurs,  but  very  similar  spurs, 
differing  only  in  being  sharper  pointed,  are  possessed  by  Callidina  hexodonta,  Ber- 
gendal  (3),  formerly  regarded  (from  the  possession  of  cervical  eyes)  as  belonging  to 
the  genus  Philodina. 

The  slender  foot,  which  can  be  elongated  much  more  than  the  drawing  (Fig.  5a) 
shows,  the  lack  of  interspace  between  the  spurs,  and  the  deep  red  stomach  are 
also  good  characters. 

Philodina  alata,  sp.  n.  (Plate  X.,  Figs.  4o-4/) 

Specific  characters. — Size  moderate  :  corona  broad,  diameter  about  equal  to  that 
of  the  trunk  (exclusive  of  the  processes)  in  ordinary  extension  ;  collar  inconspicuous, 
the  lobes  going  to  the  upper  lip  not  reaching  beyond  the  line  of  the  bridge  joining 
the  pedicels :  interspace  between  discs  equal  to  diameter  of  disc  ;  central  setae  on 
discs  :  teeth  2/2  :  trunk  plicate,  bearing  two  large  rounded  lateral  processes  (one  on 
each  side)  a  little  way  in  front  of  the  widest  part  of  the  central  segments  :  rump 
short,  with  a  rounded  boss  in  the  middle  of  the  preanal  segment :  foot  short,  four- 
jointed,  spurs  diverging,  tapering,  conical,  rather  blunt.  Eyes  brown. 

General  description. — Length  300  /t,  in  the  feeding  attitude.  The  stomach  is  of 
the  same  deep  red  as  in  P.  gregaria,  the  colour  being  seated  in  small  granules  and 
globules.  The  rostrum  is  short  and  rather  narrow.  The  length  of  the  antenna  is 
about  equal  to  the  diameter  of  the  neck.  On  the  fairly  large  brain  are  seated  the 
pale  brown  eyes.  The  jaws  are  rather  small,  and  bear  two  teeth  each.  The  trunk 
is  regularly  plicate,  the  dorsal  folds  being  wider  and  shallower  than  the  lateral  ones. 
The  trunk  is  sometimes  decidedly  viscous,  and  has  extraneous  matter  adhering  to  it, 
but  this  is  not  always  so.  It  is  sometimes  quite  clear. 

The  lateral  processes  are  not  thickenings,  like  most  of  the  trunk  processes  of 
Bdelloids.  They  are  large,  hollow,  approximately  conical  protuberances,  with  skin 
no  thicker  than  that  of  the  trunk,  unless  at  the  extreme  apex,  where  it  is  a  little 
thicker.  They  are  controlled  by  special  muscles,  by  which  the  apex  may  be  more  or 
less  pulled  in  and  inverted,  making  the  form  truncate,  as  shown  in  Fig.  4a.  Some- 
times, when  creeping  or  feeding,  the  processes  are  so  far  inverted  that  they  are 
scarcely  visible  in  dorsal  view,  but  this  is  not  always  the  case,  as  shown  in  Fig.  4c, 
where  they  are  fully  extended  when  the  animal  is  creeping.  In  complete  con- 
traction of  the  animal  they  have  their  greatest  projection,  and  are  then  more 
directed  forward  than  at  any  other  times. 

No  suggestion  as  to  the  function  of  these  curious  processes  has  been  offered.  In 
other  Bdelloids  having  warts  on  the  body  they  are  supposed  to  have  a  defensive 


ANTARCTIC  ROTIFER  A  47 

function.  It  can  hardly  be  so  with  P.  alata,  as  the  processes  are,  from  their  form, 
more  vulnerable  than  the  trunk  wall  would  be. 

The  boss  on  the  preanal  segment  is  of  another  nature.  It  is  a  thickening,  and 
may  have  a  protective  function. 

The  vibratile  tags  are  short  and  somewhat  broadly  spindle-shaped  (Fig.  4e). 

Habitat. — Among  weeds  from  the  Narrows  between  the  two  portions  of  Blue 
Lake,  pretty  numerous,  March  27,  1908.  Afterwards  found  in  several  lakes  at  Cape 
Royds  and  Cape  Barne,  always  scarce  and  uncertain.  A  few  could  usually  be  got 
when  wanted  from  the  Narrows  of  Blue  Lake. 

It  was  living,  among  scraps  of  weed,  at  a  depth  of  1 1  feet  in  Blue  Lake. 

Habits. — A  quiet  animal  and  slow  in  its  movements.  When  feeding,  which  it 
rarely  did,  it  could  be  easily  studied.  Under  the  influence  of  a  narcotic  (Eucaine) 
it  behaved  in  a  very  unsatisfactory  manner.  It  kept  the  corona  expanded  and 
continued  feeding,  but  contorted  itself  till  it  was  not  recognisable  except  by  the 
side  processes.  No  good  photographs  of  it  could  be  obtained,  but  under  pressure 
some  were  made  which  showed  the  internal  structure  and  the  characteristic  processes. 

Affinities. — P.  alata,  like  the  other  two  Antarctic  members  of  the  genus,  belongs 
to  the  central  group  of  species.  The  lateral  processes,  which  are  unique  in  the 
order,  serve  to  distinguish  it  from  all  other  Philodince  and  Bdelloids.  The  boss  on 
the  preanal  is  an  uncommon  character.  Without  these  processes  it  would  be  very 
difficult  to  characterise. 

Philodina,  sp.  (Plate  X.,  Fig.  6) 

Description. — Size  moderate.  Corona  narrow,  about  equalling  the  prominent 
collar,  and  less  than  the  trunk.  Upper  lip  with  two  rounded  lobes  meeting  in  the 
middle  line.  Two  pale  or  colourless  eyes.  Teeth  2/2.  Foot  short  (number  of 
joints  ?) ;  spurs  broad  short  cones  slightly  diverging  and  with  no  interspace. 

This  species,  which  is  undoubtedly  distinct  from  all  the  other  Antarctic  species, 
was  only  once  seen,  and  is  insufficiently  studied.  The  form  of  the  upper  lip  and 
spurs  are  like  those  of  P.  plena  (4).  There  is  little  to  separate  it  from  that  species 
except  the  possession  of  eyes.  It  is  doubtful  if  the  presence  or  absence  of  eyes 
constitute  characters  of  even  specific  value,  as  several  species  are  variable  in  this 
respect  (P.  rugosa,  P.  macrostyla,  &c.). 

It  had  not  the  red  stomach  of  nearly  all  the  Antarctic  Bdelloids,  but  that  might 
merely  indicate  youth. 

Habitat. — Among  weed  from  the  Narrows  of  Blue  Lake. 

Genus —  Callidina 

Note. — The  genus  Callidina  contains  a  host  of  species,  many  of  them  not  at  all 
closely  related,  and  offering  material  for  many  genera.  C.  constricta  and  C.  angularis 


48  JAMES  MURRAY 

in  our  list  should  le  in  a  different  genus  from  C.  habit  a.     As  the  whole  order  requires 
revision  by  a  competent  authority,*  the  old  names  are  retained  here. 

Callidina  constricta,  Duj.  (14)  (Plate  XII. ,  Figs.  13a,   136) 

Dujardin's  meagre  description  would  fit  equally  well  a  considerable  number  of 
those  CallidincB  which  mould  the  food  into  pellets,  and  which  are  distinguished  from 
one  another  by  characters  requiring  more  careful  examination  than  the  Bdelloids 
usually  receive.  The  commonest  of  those  species  which  have  numerous  teeth  on  the 
jaws,  the  corona  somewhat  less  in  diameter  than  the  widest  part  of  the  head,  the 
discs  close  together,  and  the  spurs  short  divergent  cones,  may  be  taken  as  the  type 
of  C.  constricta. 

To  establish  C.  constricta,  Duj.,  and  C.  elegans,  Ehr.  (15),  and  to  distinguish  them 
from  the  numerous  related  species,  it  would  be  necessary  that  both  should  be  re- 
described  by  a  competent  authority.  Janson  (20)  briefly  describes  them,  but  scarcely 
with  the  detail  necessary  to  firmly  establish  them,  neglecting,  for  example,  the  form 
of  the  upper  lip,  a  character  of  the  utmost  importance  in  all  Philodinadse.  Janson 
gives  C.  constricta  as  having  fewer  teeth  than  C.  elegans  (8/8  instead  of  10  or  11)  and  a 
shorter  jaw.  There  is  nothing  so  difficult  as  to  make  certain  of  the  number  of  teeth 
in  those  pellet-making  Callidince  which  have  many  teeth.  They  can  be  clearly  enough 
seen,  but  the  anterior  ones  are  usually  thickest,  and  the  others  diminish  successively 
till  they  cannot  be  distinguished  from  the  fine  striae  which  are  found  on  the  rami  of 
all  Bdelloids.  Very  commonly  there  are  four  strong  teeth,  the  fourth  (counting 
from  the  anterior  end)  much  thinner  than  the  first;  then  there  is  an  abrupt  transition 
to  finer  teeth  which  are  still  thicker  than  the  striae,  but  merge  gradually  into  them. 

The  Cape  Royds  Callidina,  which  I  identify  as  C.  constricta  (see  Plate  XII., 
Fig.  13),  is  a  small  animal,  about  ^-Q  inch  in  length  (250  /u).  It  is  not  much  enlarged 
in  the  central  trunk,  which  is  faintly  plicate  and  not  obviously  stippled.  The  small 
discs  are  touching,  and  the  whole  diameter  of  the  corona  is  distinctly  less  than  the 
widest  part  of  the  head.  The  jaws  are  long  and  narrow,  and  each  bears  four  distinct 
teeth,  diminishing  in  thickness  backwards,  succeeded  by  finer  teeth  which  continue 
to  diminish  in  thickness  to  the  posterior  end  of  the  jaw.  The  rump  is  clearly 
marked  off  from  the  central  trunk,  but  its  two  segments  are  only  seen  as  the  animal 
extends  itself  in  creeping.  The  foot  is  short,  of  three  joints,  and  the  spurs  are  very 
short,  quickly  tapering,  and  widely  divergent. 

Habits. — It  is  a  quiet  sedate  animal,  moving  steadily  and  readily  feeding.  It 
often  swims  free,  rotating  on  its  long  axis. 

Habitat. — In  most  of  the  lakes  at  Cape  Royds.  Common,  but  not  abundant.  It 
is  one  of  the  two  Bdelloids  found  in  Green  Lake. 

s- — In  company  with  C.   constricta   two  different  forms  of  egg  have  been 

*  Mr.  D.  Bryce  is  at  present  engaged  on  such  a  revision. 


ANTARCTIC  ROTIFERA  49 

found,  which  may  belong  to  this  species  or  to  C.  angularis  (Plate  XII.,  Figs.  12c-12c£). 
Each  of  these  eggs  was  found  with  the  jaws  of  the  contained  young  so  well  grown 
that  the  numerous  teeth  could  be  seen.  As  there  are  only  the  two  species  known  at 
Cape  Royds  which  have  many  teeth,  it  is  practically  certain  that  these  eggs  belong  to 
them,  but  as  they  were  never  found  in  the  bodies  of  the  rotifers  it  cannot  be  determined 
to  which  each  belongs. 


Callidina  angularis,  sp.  n.  (Plate  XII.,  Figs.   12a— I2d) 

Specific  characters. — Small,  yellow,  much  widest  in  central  trunk ;  strongly 
nodose  from  the  lateral  projection  of  certain  segments,  from  the  neck  to  the  preanal  : 
trunk  strongly  plicate,  and  stippled  (except  head,  neck,  and  foot).  The  head  is  widest 
at  the  cheeks,  and  the  corona  is  distinctly  smaller,  and  about  equal  in  diameter  to  the 
neck.  Rump  narrower  than  the  fourth  central  segment,  its  two  segments  distinct. 
Foot  short,  of  three  segments.  Spurs  small,  divergent,  acuminate  and  acute.  Food 
moulded  into  pellets.  Jaws  narrow,  teeth  many. 

General  description. — Length  when  feeding  about  ^^  inch,  rather  greater 
when  creeping.  The  diameter  of  the  corona  is  about  -§^  inch  (50  ju),  and  of  the 
widest  part  of  the  trunk  about  ^<y  inch  (100  M).  The  rostrum  is  short  and  broad 
and  the  antenna  short.  There  are  from  eight  to  ten  teeth  in  each  jaw,  and  they 
diminish  rapidly  in  thickness  towards  the  posterior  end  of  the  jaw.  The  anterior 
edges  of  the  three  segments  succeeding  the  neck  are  strongly  produced  outward, 
giving  a  nodose  appearance  to  the  anterior  trunk.  The  mid-trunk  is  also  laterally 
produced  into  an  angle.  The  fourth  central  and  preanal  segments  are  also  produced 
at  their  posterior  edges.  The  trunk  has  few  broad  clearly  marked  folds.  The 
preanal  has  two  folds  near  the  middle  line.  The  three  toes  are  short  and  obscure. 

The  upper  lip  is  a  somewhat  triangular  area.  The  central  portion  forms  a  pointed 
arch,  or  may  be  rounded  or  slightly  cleft.  The  collar  is  very  inconspicuous.  The 
voluminous  stomach  is  red  or  brown  or  pale  yellow.  The  pellets  are  very  obscure. 

Habitat. — In  most  of  the  lakes  at  Cape  Royds. 

Reproduction. — The  absence  of  living  young  makes  it  practically  certain  that  the 
species  is  oviparous.  Associated  with  it  were  eggs  (already  referred  to  under 
C.  constricta)  which  could  only  belong  to  one  of  these  species. 

Affinities. — C.  angularis  is  undoubtedly  derived  from  C.  constricta.  There  are  so 
many  points  in  common  that  they  were  for  long  considered  to  be  identical.  The  out- 
line of  a  Bdelloid  rotifer  can  vary  so  much  during  the  different  movements  that  it  was 
considered  inadvisable  to  put  much  importance  on  the  angular  outline  of  this  species. 
It  was  only  when  the  peculiar  form  was  found  to  be  always  associated  with  a  stippled 
skin  that  it  came  to  be  regarded  as  distinct  from  G.  constricta. 

Eggs. — As  to  the  eggs  of  this  species,  see  remarks  under  C.  constricta. 

BRIT.    ANTARCT.    EXPED.    1907-9.       VOL.    I.  G 


50  JAMES  MURRAY 

Callidina  habita,  Bryce  (4)  Variety  (Plate  XL,  Figs.  8a-8e) 

Description. — Large,  stout,  hyaline  or  yellowish,  much  widest  in  central  trunk, 
which  is  plicate  with  broad  folds.  Length  when  feeding,  up  to  570  M,  diameter  of 
trunk  125  M  and  upwards,  of  corona  95  /u-  The  corona  is  much  wider  than  the  collar, 
and  that  is  much  wider  than  the  neck.  The  discs  are  large  and  bear  central  setae. 
They  are  separated  by  a  space  equal  to  half  the  diameter  of  the  disc.  The  collar  is 
prominent  and  appears  two-lobed  in  dorsal  view.  It  is  continued  on  to  the  upper 
lip  as  two  large  rounded  lobes  which  meet  in  the  middle  line. 

The  rostrum  is  stout,  and  the  lamellae  appear  to  be  quite  separated.  The 
antenna  is  equal  to  one-third  the  diameter  of  the  neck.  The  jaws  are  large  and 
have  a  thickened  border,  sometimes  coloured  brown.  The  teeth  are  two  in  each  jaw, 
witha  thinner  one. 

The  voluminous  stomach  is  of  a  deep  crimson  colour,  and  the  walls  are  filled  with 
larger  and  smaller  globules.  The  yolk-mass  contains  eight  nuclei.  The  two 
segments  of  the  rump  are  obscurely  distinguishable.  The  foot  is  four-jointed,  but 
there  is  often  difficulty  in  making  out  more  than  three.  The  spurs  are  stout,  almost 
cylindrical,  quickly  tapering  to  the  acute  points,  divergent.  The  first  foot-joint  has 
a  thickening  forming  a  more  or  less  distinct  boss. 

The  egg  is  elliptical  and  is  produced  at  each  pole  into  a  rounded  prominence 
(Fig.  8d). 

This  variety,  which  is  typical  in  every  other  respect,  differs  conspicuously  in"  the 
form  of  the  spurs.  Those  of  the  type  are  broad  and  very  acuminate,  the  lower  edge 
making  an  ogee  curve.  The  highly  coloured  stomach  is  an  important  feature,  but  it 
cannot  be  considered  of  much  specific  value. 

Another  variety. — Rather  smaller,  the  two  lobes  of  the  upper  lip  less  distinct, 
separated  only  by  a  small  notch.  Spurs  in  form  like  the  type,  but  smaller,  and  the 
curvature  of  the  lower  edge  less  marked.  The  foot-boss  more  distinct.  Otherwise 
like  the  type  (Plate  XL,  Fig.  86). 

Both  forms  were  fairly  common  in  most  of  the  lakes  at  Cape  Royds.  They  did 
not  occur  in  Green  Lake.  In  Blue  Lake  at  a  depth  of  fifteen  feet. 


Fa  m  ily — ADINET  AD^E 
'Genus — Adineta 

The  genus  Adineta,  the  only  one  yet  described  in  the  family,  is  a  small  one.  It 
contains  at  present  some  eight  recognised  species.  It  is  better  represented  in  the 
Antarctic  Region  than  any  of  the  other  genera  of  Bdelloids. 

Five   species   were   recognised,    of  which   one   (A.  grandis)   is  new  to   science. 


ANTARCTIC  ROTIFER  A  51 

None  of  them,  except  A.  grandis,  is  very  common.     That  species  swarms  in  numbers 
-  only  inferior  to  those  of  Philodina  gregaria. 

Adineta  grandis,  sp.  n.  (Plate  XIL,  Figs.  Wa-Wd) 

Specific  characters. — Very  large,  stout,  rostrum  philodinoid,  with  lamellae  and 
brush  of  cilia  as  in  Philodina ;  posterior  margin  "of  mouth  pectinate  :  spurs  short 
broad  cones,  separated  by  straight  interspace,  reproduction  viviparous. 

Detailed  description. — Large  examples  measure  750  M  in  length.  The  colour  is 
light  brown  or  yellowish,  darker  in  the  alimentary  tract.  It  has  the  graceful  form 
usual  in  the  genus,  very  broad  in  the  central  region  of  the  trunk  and  tapering  to 
narrow  extremities.  The  trunk  is  regularly,  and  not  very  deeply,  plicate.  The 
neck  is  slightly  constricted  below  the  head,  then  there  is  an  expansion  at  the  normal 
level  of  the  mastax. 

The  head  is  ovate,  and  rounded  in  front.  The  rostrum  is  short  and  stout, 
and  is  quite  like  that  of  a  typical  philodine,  except  that  it  is  not  retractile. 
In  ventral  view  the  lamella?,  which  are  relatively  smaller  than  is  usual  in  the  genus, 
appear  to  meet  in  the  middle  line.  Beneath  them  is  the  brush  of  cilia,  looking  as 
they  do  in  a  philodine  when  contracted,  but  the  tip  was  never  seen  everted  so  as  to 
make  the  brush  project.  On  each  side,  close  to  the  edge  of  the  lamellae,  is  a  longer 
cilium,  moving  like  the  tactile  setae  occurring  in  the  same  situation  in  Philodina 
macrostyla,  &c.  Only  one  could  be  distinguished  at  each  side.  The  antenna  is 
short  and  broad. 

The  pectinate  part  of  the  mouth  appears  to  be  a'  fold  within  the  margin  proper- 
The  processes  are  flat  plates,  with  the  spaces  between  about  equal  to  the  thickness  of 
the  plates.  They  are  rounded  at  the  ends.  The  number  varies  from  six  to  ten  on 
each  side.  At  the  inner  end  of  each  series  the  terminal  process  is  drawn  out  into  a 
longer  narrow  rod,  which  appears  to  be  attached  to  the  flat  surface  of  the  corona. 
The  furred  surface  is  uninterrupted  from  side  to  side,  but  at  the  anterior  end  a  tooth- 
like  process  projects  backwards  in  the  median  line.  The  jaws  are  normal,  with  the 
usual  two  teeth  on  each. 

The  stomach  is  large  and  of  a  warm  brown  colour.  The  intestine  is  elliptical. 
The  two  segments  can  be  distinguished  in  the  rump,  which  tapers  gradually  in  line 
with  the  stout  four-jointed  foot.  The  spurs  are  stout  and  subacute.  They  diverge 
widely  and  are  separated  by  an  interspace  about  equal  to  the  diameter  of  the  spur  at 
its  base.  The  terminal  joint  of  the  foot  is  of  moderate  length  and  the  three  toes  are 
small  and  short. 

The  stoutness  of  the  trunk  varies  greatly  according  to  the  number  of  young 
carried,  and  their  degree  of  development."  It  becomes  enormous  when  it  contains 
six  or  seven  young  almost  full-grown.  The  largest  number  observed  was  seven,  but 
the  usual  number  was  three.  It  was  noticed  that  when  the  young  were  well  enough 


52  JAMES  MURRAY 

giown  to  show  definite  structures  (such  as  the  teeth)  all  of  them  were  in  the  same 
degree  of  advancement,  as  far  as  could  be  perceived.  This  is  different  from  what  is 
the  case  in  the  genus  Rotifer,  in  which  all  the  species  are  viviparous.  There  the 
two  or  three  embryos  are  at  different  stages.  The  yolk-mass,  which  could  rarely  be 
seen,  contained  eight  nuclei.  On  one  occasion  (March  27,  1908)  a  yolk-mass  was. 
seen  divided  up  into  six  portions,  each  containing  a  nucleus,  no  doubt  a  brood  at  an 
early  stage.  Three  pairs  of  narrow  spindle-shaped  vibratile  tags  have  been  seen. 

Habits. — A.  grandis  has  not  the  restlessness  which  is  characteristic  of  the  genus. 
It  is  sufficiently  active,  but  it  creeps  steadily,  and  "right  side  up,"  like  many  of  the 
Philodinadse,  and  can  therefore  be  more  easily  studied.  It  feeds  on  minute  organic 
particles,  among  which  there  is  rarely  any  recognisable  organism. 

Habitat. — Among  the  brown  vegetation  in  the  lakes  at  Cape  Royds.  It  was  the 
most  generally  distributed  of  all  the  Antarctic  rotifers,  and  occurred  in  saline  lakes 
from  which  most  of  the  other  species  were  absent. 

Natural  history. — A  detailed  study  of  Adineta  grandis  will  be  made  in  another 
paper.*  A  summary  of  the  ascertained  facts  will  be  here  given.  The  species  is  the 
only  rival  to  Philodina  gregaria  in  abundance,  and  in  this  connection  it  is  important 
to  note  that  it  shares  with  it  the  viviparous  mode  of  reproduction.  It  is  found  in  a 
greater  number  of  lakes  than  P.  gregaria,  but  it  never  appears  to  be  in  such 
prodigious  numbers.  This  may  be  due  merely  to  its  less  conspicious  colouring,  which 
is  almost  identical  with  that  of  the  plant  on  which  it  lives. 

It  is  not  extremely  abundant  in  the  freshwater  lakes,  where  it  has  many  com- 
petitors, but  in  the  very  saline  Green  Lake,  from  which  all  the  other  species  but 
Callidina  constricta  are  absent,  it  is  almost  as  abundant  as  P.  gregaria  is  in  Coast 
Lake,  and  may  be  collected  in  the  same  way.  When  the  fine  debris  washed  from 
the  weed  of  Green  Lake  is  allowed  to  stand  undisturbed  for  some  hours  a  pale  brown 
layer  appears  on  the  surface.  This  may  be  taken  up  by  the  pipette  and  is  found  to 
be  pure  Adineta  grandis,  without  admixture  of  other  organisms.  The  rotifer  has 
crept  out  of  the  mud  to  the  surface.  This  habit  allows  quantities  to  be  got  for  study 
and  makes  it  easy  to  make  simple  experiments  upon  them.  It  did  not  usually  creep 
up  the  sides  of  the  bottle,  as  P.  gregaria  does,  but  on  one  occasion,  when  a  moderate 
number  were  mixed  with  that  species,  they  also  crept  to  the  surface  of  the  water. 
They  could  be  obtained  at  any  time  during  the  winter  by  melting  some  ice  from 
Green  Lake  enclosing  some  of  the  brown  weed.  They  usually  began  to  move  as  soon 
as  released. 

In  its  power  to  endure  extreme  changes  of  temperature  and  other  adverse 
conditions,  Adineta  grandis  is  the  most  interesting  of  the  Antarctic  rotifers.  From 
its  large  size  and  great  abundance,  it  was  the  species  selected  for  most  of  the  experi- 
ments made  with  the  object  of  finding  the  limits  to  the  vitality  of  Rotifers.  It 
survived  the  lowest  temperatures  experienced  at  Cape  Royds  ( -  40°  F.),  and  repeated 

*  On  "  Life  under  Polar  Conditions." 


ANTARCTIC  ROTIFER  A  53 

freezing  and  thawing.  It  was  the  only  species  subjected  to  the  heating  experiment, 
in  which  a  proportion  of  them  lived  after  the  bottle  containing  them  (in  the  dry  con- 
dition) was  immersed  in  boiling  water  for  a  short  time.  It  was  one  of  the  rotifers 
which  was  to  be  seen  alive  and  active  in  London  in  September  1909,  after  being  dry 
for  about  a  year,  and  spending  some  months  in  tropical  and  subtropical  climates.  It 
revived  in  about  an  hour  after  being  moistened.  It  was  immersed  in  sea-water,  and 
in  the  much  more  saline  fluid  obtained  from  under  ihe  ice  of  Green  Lake  (of  which  it 
is  a  native),  and  kept  there  for  one  month,  after  which  it  revived  quickly  when  trans- 
ferred to  fresh  water.  The  diameter  of  the  contracted  animal  in  fresh  water  was 
225  p. — in  the  brine  of  Green  Lake  it  contracted  to  150  p,  or  two -thirds  of  the  normal 
diameter. 

It  is  indifferent  to  the  interruption  of  its  active  vital  functions  by  freezing,  often 
for  long  periods,  and  quickly  resumes  activity  when  thawed.  The  development  of  the 
young  likewise  does  not  appear  to  suffer  from  its  interruption  at  any  stage.  In  con- 
sequence of  interruption  development  may  often  take  many  years  for  its  completion, 
but  in  the  periods  when  the  lakes  are  melted  it  probably  only  occupies  a  few  days, 
and  many  generations  may  be  completed  in  the  few  weeks  of  summer. 

Affinities. — A.  grandis  shows  most  resemblance  to  A.  vaga  Davis  (12).  The 
pectinate  margin  to  the  mouth  is  a  character  which  may  readily  be  overlooked  in 
species  of  this  genus,  as  the  structures  of  the  head  of  an  Adineta  are  very  difficult  to 
see,  on  account  of  the  restless  contortions  of  the  animal.  The  pectinate  border  is 
easily  seen  in  A.  grandis  owing  to  its  large  size. 

The  species  may  be  a  derivative  of  A.  vaga,  but  of  very  long  standing,  as  the 
profound  changes  show.  A  different  mode  of  reproduction  has  been  adopted,  and 
the  form  of  spurs  and  rostrum,  &c.,  changed.  The  ciliated  surface  of  the  face  of 
A.  vaga  is  described  as  divided  into  two  parts  by  an  unciliated  band.  This  is  not 
the  case  with  A.  grandis,  in  which  there  is  no  perceptible  interruption  of  the  furred 
surfaee  from  side  to  side. 

Adineta  barbata,  Janson?  (20)  (Plate  XII. ,  Figs.  9a-9c) 

Description. — Of  moderate  size.  Head  ovate  ;  rostral  tip  produced  laterally  into 
little  sharp  points  ;  lamellae  long,  slender,  curved,  rounded,  accompanied  by  several 
long  bristles  ;  spurs  divergent,  curved,  tapering,  acuminate. 

While  corresponding  in  general  to  the  type  of  A.  barbata,  the  animal  found  at 
Cupe  Royds  differs  in  two  particulars :  the  spurs  taper  from  the  base  and  are 
acuminate ;  in  the  type  the  thickness  is  maintained  to  near  the  tip,  and  the  tapering 
is  then  abrupt ;  the  processes  on  the  rostrum  which  correspond  to  the  lamellae  of 
the  Philodinadse  are  very  long  and  slender,  and  in  dorsal  view  look  like  antennae  of 
insects. 

Jansou  does  not  describe  the  lamellae  as  of  this  narrow  elongate  form,  and  his 
figure  shows  them  quite  moderate.  The  difference  is  of  specific  value,  but  as  the 


54  JAMES  MURRAY 

Antarctic  species  was  not  at  the  time  studied  critically  enough,  and  the  knowledge  of 
the  peculiar  lamellae  is  only  gathered  from  my  sketches,  I  prefer  to  leave  it  meanwhile 
as  a  form  of  A.  barbata,  to  which  it  appears  to  be  closely  related. 

The  pectinate  border  of  the  mouth  was  difficult  to  see,  owing  to  the  restless 
movements  of  the  animal,  but  it  was  clearly  seen  in  a  well-grown  young  in  the  egg 
(Fig.  9c). 

The  first  eggs  found  confirmed  the  belief  that  the  animal  is  distinct  from 
A.  barbata.  They  were  elliptical,  and  lacked  the  knobs  characteristic  of  the  egg  of 
A.  barbata.  Later  on  a  different  egg  was  found,  which  had  the  knobs  as  in  A.  barbata, 
but  much  reduced  in  size  (Fig.  9c). 

Adineta  vaga,  Davis  (12) 

The  type  of  this  species  (which  is  the  var.  minor  of  Bryce)  was  found  in  several 
lakes  soon  after  we  landed  at  Cape  Royds.  It  was  not  seen  later,  and  was  thus  never 
subjected  to  a  very  critical  examination. 

Habitat. — Blue  Lake,  Clear  Lake,  and  Coast  Lake. 

Adineta  gracilis,  Janson  (20) 

Habitat.  — Blue  Lake,  Clear  Lake,  and  a  little  pond  on  the  lower  slopes  of  Mount 
Erebus.  The  examples  appeared  to  be  quite  typical. 

Adineta  longicornis,  Murray  ?  (27) 

Description. — Small,  head  ovate,  rostral  part  divided  into  two  large,  evenly  rounded 
lobes.  The  spurs  are  long,  slightly  divergent,  and  taper  to  acute  points. 

Habitat. — Among  moss  from  the  High  Moraines,  Cape  Royds,  January  1909,  one 
example  seen. 

It  is  with  hesitation  that  this  animal  is  referred  to  A.  longicornis.  The  spurs  are 
shorter  than  in  the  type,  and  the  head  is  of  slightly  different  shape.  As  the  rostral 
structures  were  not  clearly  made  out,  it  cannot  be  confidently  separated  from  that 
species. 

NOTE 

Additional  Species. — In  April  1910,  just  as  we  go  to  press,  an  additional  Bdelloid 
has  been  found  alive,  in  moss  collected  by  Priestley  at  the  Stranded  Moi-aines.  It  is 
a  pellet-maker  having  three  teeth  in  each  jaw,  and  may  be  identified  as  Callidina 
(Macrotrachela)  tridens,  Milne.  That  species  is  very  similar  to  C.  constricta,  except 
in  the  very  distinct  teeth.  A  more  detailed  description  of  it  is  wanted. 

This  addition,  with  the  identification  of  the  Floscidaria  as  F.  cornuta,  brings  up 
the  list  of  recognised  Antarctic  Rotifera  to  16  species. 


ANTARCTIC  ROTIFERA  55 

Order— EHIZOTA 
Family — FLOSCULARIAD^E 

Genus — Floscularia 
Floscularia,  sp.  (Plate  XIII.,  Fig.  15)  * 

On  January  18,  1909,  among  weed  from  a  pond  between  Cape  Barne  and  Cape 
Royds,  a  species  of  Floscularia  was  found  in  some  abundance.  When  examined  after 
reaching  the  hut  they  were  moving  languidly  and  showing  an  inclination  to  expand. 
The  long  setoe,  which  exceeded  the  trunk  in  length,  projected  as  a  long  brush.  The 
lobes  were  not  unfolded,  and  there  was  little  time  to  wait  for  it. 

Although  there  is  no  hope  of  identifying  the  species,  a  sketch  of  it  in  the  partly 
contracted  condition  is  given,  in  order  to  complete  our  records  of  the  rotifera  of  the 
region. 

In  this  state  the  length,  exclusive  of  the  setae,  was  284  /j..  The  foot  is  transversely 
wrinkled  in  the  usual  manner,  and  terminates  in  a  conical  portion,  tapering  to  a 
narrow  apex  (probably  the  adhesive  disc  unattached  at  the  time). 

Neither  tube  nor  eggs  were  observed.  The  teeth  and  the  various  viscera  were 
seen,  but  detailed  studies  under  pressure  could  not  be  made. 

Order— PLOIMA 
Family — HYDATINAD^E 

Genus — Hydatina 
Hydatina  senta,  Ehr.  (Photograph  from  life.     Plate  II.,  Fig.  7) 

No  description  need  be  given,  as  the  Antarctic  examples  appear  to  be  quite  typical. 
The  species  was  identified  with  certainty  by  Mr.  Rousselet  from  preserved  examples. 
It  was  found  in  great  abundance  in  Coast  Lake  when  it  was  tow-netted  for  the  first 
time  on  January  2,  1909.  It  might  have  been  found  much  earlier  if  the  lake  had 
been  examined  in  a  suitable  manner,  as  there  was  some  open  water  from  the  end  of 
November  1908,  and  the  temperature  of  the  water,  as  early  as  December  4,  was 
+  47°  Fahr.  When  the  Hydatina  was  first  found  the  temperature  had  gone  down 
to  +40°.  On  January  18,  1909,  the  temperature  had  gone  up  again  to  +45°,  and 
the  Hydatina  was  much  less  plentiful. 

Large  oval  smooth  brown  eggs  were  known,  which  proved  to  be  those  of 
Hydatina. 

Under  the  influence  of  Eucaine  Hydatina  behaved  well,  retaining  the  normal  form 

*  An  example  having  the  corona  fully  expanded  has  s-ince  been  found,  which  allows  of  its  identifi- 
cation as  F.  cornuta,  Dobie. 


56  JAMES  MURRAY 

perfectly,  but  remaining  so  still  that  it  could  easily  be  photographed  while  living  and 
feeding. 

Hydatina  was  only  seen  in  Coast  Lake.  Its  restriction  to  one  lake  led  Mr. 
Rousselet  to  suggest  the  possibilit}r  of  its  recent  introduction,  say  by  the  Discovery 
Expedition.  It  is  not  impossible,  though  hardly  probable.  Hydatina  is  a  common 
animal  in  ponds  around  farmhouses,  and  eggs  might  readily  enough  adhere  to  farm 
produce  such  as  hay  or  straw.  When  Captain  Scott  and  Dr.  Wilson  camped  for  a 
short  time  at  Cape  Koyds,  close  by  the  spot  where  we  afterwards  had  our  hut,  they 
may  have  had  some  straw  packing  among  their  gear.  In  this  connection  it  is  worth 
noting  that  we  dredged  in  Back-door  Bay  a  stalk  of  old  sodden  straw  on  which  a 
sponge  had  grown.  This  straw  could  hardly  be  of  older  date  than  the  Discovery 
Expedition.  Against  the  theory  of  the  recent  origin  of  Hydatina  is  the  fact  that 
Coast  Lake  is  a  mile  from  Captain  Scott's  camp,  and  that  several  suitable  lakes  lie 
nearer  the  camp.  Still,  one  egg  is  enough  for  the  introduction,  and  the  straw  bear- 
ing the  one  egg  may  have  blown  to  Coast  Lake. 


Family — NOTOMMATAD^E 

Genus — Pleurotrocha 
Pleurotrocha,  sp.  ?  (Plate  XIII. ,  Figs.   14a-14c) 

Description. — Of  large  size,  520  yu  in  length.  In  lateral  view  greatly  elevated 
just  behind  the  middle  of  the  trunk.  Head  long,  mouth  narrow.  Jaws  very  like 
those  of  P.  grandis,  Western,  and  some  related  species.  Toes  longer  than  those  of 
P.  grandis.  Stomach  large,  orange-coloured. 

This  large  active  animal  was  found  in  Blue  Lake  early  in  the  season,  before  the 
requisites  for  narcotising  and  preserving  were  available.  It  was  fairly  abundant  then 
but  was  not  obtainable  afterwards,  when  it  could  have  been  photographed  and  pre- 
served. We  are  therefore  dependent  for  our  knowledge  of  the  animal  on  a  few 
sketches  by  onelittle  acquainted  with  the  order  to  which  it  belongs.  Mr.  Rousselet 
has  examined  the  sketches  critically,  taking  such  points  as  could  be  best  trusted,  and 
compared  them  with  the  same  points  in  the  species  coming  nearest  to  our  one. 

It  is  undoubtedly  very  near  P.  grandis  (41),  which  is  like  it  in  size  and  activity. 
The  jaws  differ  in  being  more  ovoid  in  form,  diminishing  backward  from  the  widest 
part.  In  P.  grandis  the  greatest  width  is  maintained  for  some  distance  backward. 
The  toes  are  considerably  longer  and  narrower  than  in  P.  grandis.  The  general 
outline  of  the  jaws  is  very  similar  to  that  of  Diglena  permollis,  Gosse  (16),  as  shown 
in  a  drawing  by  Mr.  Dixon-Nuttall. 

Reproduction. — Two  kinds  of  egg  have  been  seen  which  contained  animals  having 
jaws  exactly  like  those  of  the  Pleurotrocha  (the  drawing,  Fig.  14c,  is  made  from  an 
example  in  an  egg).  One  of  the  eggs  was  elliptical  and  smooth.  The  other  was 


ANTARCTIC  ROTIFERA  57 

also  elliptical  but  was  thicker  shelled,  and  was  covered  with   little  points  projecting 
from  the  surface  (Fig. 


Genus — Diaschiza 
Diaschiza  tenuior,  Gosse  ?  (17)  (Plate  XIII.,  Figs.  16o-16/) 

Of  the  species  described  in  Dixon-Nuttall  and  Freeman's  Monograph  of  the  genus 
(13)  the  Antarctic  Diaschiza  can  only  be  D.  tenuior.  It  differs  only  in  being  somewhat 
laterally  compressed,  and  in  carrying  the  toes  more  ventrally  than  usual.  The 
length  of  the  toes  easily  separate  it  from  D.  caeca,  Gosse: 

With  it  was  associated  a  much  smaller  animal,  which  may  be  the  male  of  the  same 
species  (Figs.  14c-14d).  It  has  a  large  head  and  comparatively  insignificant  body. 
The  corona  has  the  large  strong  cilia  common  to  most  males,  and  it  swam  powerfully. 
The  dorsal  cleft  is  seen  on  the  trunk.  The  segment  between  the  trunk  and  the  toes 
is  well  marked.  The  toes  are  small,  conical,  divergent  and  decurved.  Unlike  most 
males  it  possesses  teeth.  The  male  organs  were  not  definitely  seen,  nor  were  any 
viscera  distinguished. 

In  the  female  the  seise  at  the  base  of  the  toes  were  not  made  out,  but  we  were 
working  with  very  poor  light. 

The  elliptical,  smooth,  thin-shelled  egg  was  seen,  containing  the  young.  A 
smaller  egg,  with  thick  shell,  through  which  obscure  lines  passed  obliquely  in  various 
directions  (Fig.  16/),  contained  an  animal  with  jaws  like  those  of  the  supposed  male. 

REMARKS  ON  THE  ANTARCTIC  ROTIFER  FAUNA 

Its  Composition. — The  Rotifer  Fauna  of  Cape  Royds,  comprising  not  much  more 
than  a  fiftieth  part  of  the  known  species,  is  very  remarkable  in  its  composition.  When 
the  number  of  species  is  so  small  it  is  curious  that  all  the  orders  of  Rotifera  are  repre- 
sented [the  Scirtopoda  being,  as  a  result  of  Beauchamp's  studies  (2),  reduced  from 
ordinal  rank]. 

The  great  preponderance  of  the  small  order  Bdelloida  (with  twelve  species)  over  the 
Plo'ima  (with  four  species)  is  not  surprising  in  view  of  the  well-known  remarkable 
vitality  and  facility  of  distribution  of  these  animals. 

The  proportions  in  which  the  various  genera  of  Bdelloids  occur  in  the  fauna  are 
very  curious  and  interesting.  The  four  species  of  Philodina  are  all  unknown  else- 
where. The  large  genus  Callidina,  which  elsewhere  contains  half,  or  more  than  half 
of  the  species  in  the  entire  order,  has  only  three  species  at  Cape  Royds.  Two  of  these 
are  known  species  and  one  is  new.  The  small  genus  Adineta,  of  which  only  seven 
species  have  been  described,  has  no  fewer  than  five  species  at  Cape  Royds.  Only  one 
of  these  is  new  to  science.  The  genus  Rotifer  is  absent. 

BRIT.    ANTARCT.    EXPED.    1907-9.       VOL.    I.  H 


58  JAMES  MURRAY 

The  sixteen  species  ofRotifera  are  thus  distributed  :  eight  known  species,  five  new 
species,  three  not  identified.  While  there  are  only  five  new  species  named,  one  of  the 
others  (Philodina,  sp.)  though  not  sufficiently  studied  to  be  named,  is  certainly  new, 
and  several  of  the  known  species  differ  more  or  less  from  their  types,  and  may  be 
incipient  species  resulting  from  long  isolation  in  peculiar  conditions. 

Peculiarities. — The  distinctive  characters  of  the  new  species  are  not  very  remark- 
able. They  consist  in  the  forms  and  proportions  of  the  spurs,  head,  upper  lip,  &c.,  or  in 
the  possession  of  peculiar  processes  (Philodina  alata).  There  are  no  peculiar  types. 
Development  has  gone  on  lines  similar  to  those  it  might  have  followed  in  any  region. 
The  rotifers  may  have  acquired  peculiar  physiological  properties,  enabling  them  to 
resist  the  rigours  of  the  Antarctic  climate,  but  such  adaptation  (if  it  has  taken  place) 
is  not  correlated  with  any  peculiarity  in  outward  form. 

Reviewing  the  rotifer  fauna  as  a  whole,  its  most  notable  features  are  the  general 
prevalence  of  red  colour  among  the  Bdelloids,  and  the  viviparous  reproduction 
acquired  by  some  of  them  belonging  to  groups  which  are  rarely  viviparous. 

Colour  of  Bdelloids. — All  the  Philodince,  except  the  unnamed  species,  have  the 
voluminous  stomach  coloured  of  a  vivid  deep  crimson.  This  colour  is  shared  in  equal 
degree  by  Callidina  habita.  Callidina  constricta  and  C.  angularis  have  the  stomach 
sometimes  red,  sometimes  brown,  and  occasionally  pale  yellow.  None  of  the 
Adinetce  have  red  stomachs.  A.  grandis  has  the  alimentary  tract  of  a  warm  brown 
colour,  the  others  are  pale  yellow  or  colourless. 

The  prevalent  red  colour  may  be  related  to  the  nature  of  the  food.  Callidina 
habita  and  C.  constricta  are  not  normally  red  in  other  countries.  All  the  species 
live  among  the  same  plants,  which  are  of  a  warm  orange  colour,  but  associated  with 
this  are  numerous  green  and  blue-green  Algae,  so  that  there  is  a  variety  of  food 
available,  and  the  different  species  may  select  different  foods.  We  have  no  exact 
information  as  to  the  kinds  of  food  actually  eaten  by  the  Antarctic  species.  Though 
they  can  be  readily  watched  feeding,  they  rarely  swallow  organic  matter  in  recognis- 
able condition,  but  fine,  flocculent  material,  the  result  of  decomposition.  Bdelloids 
have  the  power  of  selecting  their  food.  A  pair  of  knuckle-like  processes  in  the 
gullet  can  be  brought  together,  and  these  are  opened  or  closed  according  as  the 
particles  swept  down  the  funnel  are  acceptable  or  not. 

There  were  no  red-coloured  rotifers  in  Green  Lake,  which  was  very  saline.  The 
only  two  Bdelloids  which  occurred  there  were  Adineta  grandis  and  Callidina  con- 
stricta. A.  grandis  was  never  red  in  any  lake,  but  in  freshwater  lakes  C.  constricta 
had  sometimes  a  red  stomach. 

Reproduction. — Of  the  Antarctic  rotifers  seven  are  oviparous,  two  are  viviparous^ 
and  the  reproduction  of  the  remaining  seven  is  unknown.  The  genus  Rotifer,  all 
the  members  of  which  are  viviparous,  is  unknown  in  the  region. 

The  two  viviparous  species,  Philodina  gregaria  and  Adineta  grandis,  prepon- 
derate enormously  in  numbers  over  all  the  other  species.  This  mode  of  reproduction 


ANTARCTIC  ROTIFERA  59 

appears  therefore  to  be  best  adapted  to  secure  success  in  the  struggle  for  existence 
under  the  severe  conditions  experienced  at  Cape  Royds. 

Dispersal. — Most  of  the  Bdelloid  Rotifers  were  found  generally  distributed 
among  the  lakes  of  the  district.  Dispersal  from  one  to  another  is  therefore  prob- 
ably easy.  The  most  striking  exception  is  Green  Lake,  where  there  are  only  two 
of  the  species.  There  is  little  doubt  that  the  qualities  of  the  water  are  responsible 
for  the  limitation  in  that  lake,  as  there  are  other  lakes  close  by  from  which  rotifers 
might  be  derived. 

Hydatina  is  only  known  in  Coast  Lake.  It  is  the  only  normally  free-swimming 
rotifer  in  the  region,  and  very  likely  its  large  eggs  fall  to  the  bottom  in  the  deeper 
part  of  the  lake,  and  are  not  likely  to  be  in  the  marginal  zone  which  is  exposed  by 
the  ablation  of  the  ice.  Even  so  it  is  to  be  expected  that  some  eggs  would  get 
among  the  weeds  which  are  thus  exposed. 

No  rotifers  were  found  in  Pony  Lake,  but  the  proximity  of  the  penguin  rookery 
renders  the  water  so  foul  that  it  would  be  surprising  if  there  were  rotifers  in  it, 
always  excepting  Hydatina,  which  frequents  such  situations. 

There  are  only  two  probable  means  by  which  rotifers  can  be  transferred  from  one 
lake  to  another.  One  is  by  the  agency  of  birds,  and  the  other  is  by  means  of  the 
wind.  The  skua  gulls  are  the  only  birds  which  frequent  the  fresh  water.  They  are 
very  fond  of  bathing,  and  stand  in  the  shallow  parts  of  the  lakes,  where  the  water  is 
a  few  inches  deep  and  the  bottom  usually  covered  with  weed  and  rotifers,  and  there 
they  splash  the  water  about  with  great  gusto.  Fragments  of  weeds  may  adhere 
to  their  feet  or  may  get  on  their  feathers  as  the  water  splashes  over  them.  The 
skuas  may  visit  several  ponds  in  the  course  of  their  flights  and  thus  distribute  the 
rotifers  over  the  countryside. 

At  the  margins  of  the  lakes  there  is  generally  a  zone  of  dried  weed,  which 
increases  in  breadth  as  the  winter  advances,  as  a  result  of  the  ablation  of  the  ice 
surface.  This  zone  varies  in  colour  from  brown  to  dull  green.  The  weed  is  strongly 
wrinkled  and  very  light.  Pieces  of  it  might  easily  be  torn  off  by  the  wind  and  blown 
about  the  country  till  the  next  summer,  when  it  might  happen  to  get  into  another 
body  of  water.  Fragments  of  weed  were  often  seen  blowing  about.  In  Coast  Lake 
the  ablation  of  the  ice  exposed  the  weed  on  the  bottom,  which  was  in  small  flakes. 
Showers  of  these  flakes  were  blown  by  the  wind  over  the  shore  and  out  to  sea. 

Dispersal  by  the  wind  and  conveyance  from  lake  to  lake  in  a  small  district  like 
Cape  lioyds  is  easily  understood.  The  prevalent  strong  winds  in  the  region  are  all 
from  the  south,  and  it  is  therefore  difficult  to  imagine  that  the  plants  and  their  living 
freight  could  be  transferred  in  this  way  over  long  distances  where  there  are  not 
intermediate  resting-places,  except  from  south  to  north.  It  is,  however,  possible  that 
northerly  gales  occur  at  long  intervals,  which  would  help  to  disperse  the  species  in 
the  opposite  direction. 

Distribution. — Of  the  distribution  of  the  Rctifera  in  the  Antarctic  Region  there  is 


60 


JAMES  MURRAY 


nothing  to  be  said,  as  there  are  no  previous  records,  except  the  doubtful  egg  of 
Callidina  papillosa  mentioned  by  Richters  (31).  Rlchters  gives  details  of  the  jaws 
and  teeth  of  four  species  from  the  Gaussberg,  and  figures  them,  as  well  as  other  details 
of  two  of  the  species.  These  are  insufficient  for  certain  identification,  though  if  the 
rotifer  fauna  of  the  Gaussberg  could  be  studied  in  life  we  might  have  a  good  guess  as 
to  what  those  four  were.  As  our  knowledge  at  present  stands  we  cannot  connect  any 
of  them  with  the  species  found  at  Cape  Royds,  though  it  may  be  suggested  that  the 
figures  five  and  six  on  his  Plate  XVII.  may  be  Callidina  constricta,  which  was  the 
only  moss-dwelling  species  identified  at  Cape  Royds. 

As  the  thirteen  species  found  at  Cape  Royds  appear  to  be  the  first  recorded  for 
the  continent,  we  can  only  study  the  distribution  over  the  world  of  those  of  the 
species  which  are  not  new  to  science.  The  distribution  is  most  clearly  seen  when  the 
facts  are  given  in  tabular  form.  It  is  not  claimed  that  the  records  tabulated  are 
complete,  but  I  have  given  all  which  I  could  find. 

TABLE  SHOWING  THE  GENERAL  DISTRIBUTION  OF  ALL  RECORDED  ANTARCTIC 

ROTIFERA. 


o 

OD  "3 

u 

g 

I 

31 

1 

i 

3 

3 
B 

£ 

0 

H 

s 

a  s 

5 

s 

s 

5 

H 

ISB 

§ 

<] 

•< 

"1 

<l 

•5 

•< 

<  ^ 

fc 

02 

Philodina  gregaria,  sp.  n. 

X 

_ 



_ 





_ 



„         antarctica,  sp.  n. 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

„         alata,  pp.  n. 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Callidina  angularis,  sp.  n. 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Adineta  grandis,  sp.  n. 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Callidina  conslricta,  Duj. 

X 

X 

X 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

,,      habita.,  Bryce  '(     . 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

„      papillosa,  Thomp. 

? 

X 

X 

X 

— 

X 

— 

X 

Adineta  vaga,  Davis 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

„     barbata,  Janson  ?     . 

X 

X 

X 

— 

X 

X 

— 

X 

„     gracilis,  Janson  .     . 

X 

X 

X 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

,,     longicornis,  Murray  ? 

X 

X 

— 

X 

X 

— 

— 

— 

Hydatina  senta,  Ehr.   .     . 

X 

X 

X 



X 

X 

? 

X 

Diaschiza  tennior,    Gosse  . 

? 

X 

X 

— 

1  —  ' 

— 



— 

The  facts  made  use  of  in  the  above  table  are  compiled  in  part  from  the  following 
sources  :  for  the  Antarctic  from  a  paper  by  Richters  (31) :  for  Australasia  from  Hilgen- 
dorfs  list  (19)  and  from  my  own  unpublished  notes  which  will  appear  in  a  later 
number  of  this  series :  for  Europe  from  papers  by  Bryce,  Janson  (20),  and  others : 
for  Africa  from  a  paper  by  Rousselet  (33)  and  unpublished  notes :  for  N.  America 
from  a  paper  by  Jennings  (21)  and  from  unpublished  notes :  for  the  Arctic  Region 
from  papers  by  Bryce  (5),  Bergendal  (3)  and  myself  (28). 

The  new  Antarctic  species  are  placed  at  the  top  of  the  list  in  order  that  the  other 
facts  may  be  compactly  grouped.  The  facts  of  distribution  of  the  nine  previously 


ANTARCTIC  ROTIFERA  61 

known  species  are  given  under  eight  headings,  being  a  column  for  each  continent,  for 
Australasia,  and  for  the  Arctic  and  Antarctic  regions.  This  covers  the  greater  part 
of  the  earth's  surface,  only  excluding  oceanic  islands.  It  may  fairly  be  said  that  an 
animal  which  occurs  in  all  of  these  broad  divisions  is  "  generally  distributed." 

Callidina  habita  and  Adineta  vaga  are  in  every  column  ;  C.  constricta,  A.  gracilis, 
and  Hydatina  senta  are  absent  from  one  region  only  ;  C.  papillosa  and  A.  barbata 
from  two ;  A.  longicornis  from  four ;  and  Diaschiza  tenuior  from  five.  These  facts 
have  very  little  significance,  as  some  of  the  regions  have  been  very  little  worked. 

Considered  in  another  way  the  table  shows  that  all  the  previously  known  species 
are  also  in  New  Zealand,  all  but  one  in  Europe,  all  but  two  in  Africa,  N.  America, 
and  the  Arctic,  all  but  four  in  S.  America,  and  all  but  five  in  Asia.  For  the  reason 
given  in  the  preceding  paragraph  these  facts  have  no  special  significance.  Were 
the  world  more  fully  explored  we  would  in  all  probability  find  that  all  the  species 
are  ubiquitous. 

The  Rotifera  of  the  southern  hemisphere,  from  which  any  migrants  to  the  Ant- 
arctic have  most  probably  come,  are  very  imperfectly  known.  In  New  Zealand 
Hilgendorf  s  was  the  only  work,  and  in  the  Index  Faunae  Novse-Zealandise  (19)  he 
gives  a  list  of  over  furty  species  then  known.  In  Australia  short  lists  were  published 
by  Anderson  (1)  and  Shephard  (34  to  37),  and  Whitelegge  (42)  in  1889  summed  up 
the  known  species,  giving  a  list  of  110.  In  Africa  there  were  short  lists  by  Milne  (24) 
and  Kirkman  (22  and  23).  Rousselet  (33)  in  1905  visited  S.  Africa,  and  in  his 
paper  summarises  all  that  was  known,  giving  a  list  of  156  species.  In  S.  America 
Schmarda  (39)  found  many  rotifers,  but  his  descriptions  and  figures  are  such  that 
most  of  the  species  are  unrecognisable.  Recently  Daday  wrote  upon  the  Rotifera 
of  Patagonia  (9),  Chile  (10),  and  Paraguay  (11).  He  enumerates  106  species, 
including  some  noted  by  Wierzejski  (43).  There  may  be  isolated  references  to 
rotifers  of  the  southern  hemisphere  in  works  other  than  those  cited,  but  they 
comprise  almost  all  that  was  known  till  recently. 

All  those  lists  are  noticeable  for  the  very  subordinate  position  occupied  by  the 
Bdelloids.  This  is  due  to  the  fact  that  it  was  not  suspected  that  mosses  supported 
a  very  rich  fauna  of  rotifers  and  other  animals.  Some  of  the  early  investigators  of 
these  animals,  who  were  more  interested  in  their  physiology  than  in  the  discrimina- 
tion of  species,  distinguished  between  the  moss-dwellers  and  water-dwellers. 

In  papers  by  Thompson  (40)  and  Bryce  (6)  such  terms  as  "  moss-haunting"  are 
found  in  use,  and  in  Germany  also  the  word  "  Moosbewohner  "  [Richters  (32)]  is 
recognised.  So  little  was  the  existence  of  the  moss-fauna  known  among  naturalists 
that  in  some  of  the  latest  expeditions  the  mosses  were  taken  only  as  botanical 
specimens,  and  were  treated  with  preservatives  which  killed  the  fauna. 

Much  work  has  in  recent  years  been  done  on  the  Rotifera  of  all  parts  of  the 
globe,  from  specimens  procured  from  moss.  No  easier  method  of  collecting  is  possible 
than  by  bringing  home  dried  mosses  ;  and  it  is  to  be  hoped  that  future  expeditions 


62  JAMES  MURRAY 

will  realise  the  desirability  of  collecting  some  moss  for  the  sake  of  its  fauna.  The 
moss-fauna  of  rotifers  consists  chiefly  of  Bdelloids,  though  there  are  a  few  others 
which  have  adopted  the  same  habitat. 

Origin  of  the  Rotifer  Fauna. — In  the  present  state  of  our  knowledge  it  would 
be  premature  to  discuss  the  origin  of  the  Antarctic  Rotifer  Fauna  with  any  expecta- 
tion of  arriving  at  definite  conclusions.  We  know  almost  nothing  of  the  geological 
history  of  Antarctica,  especially  of  its  recent  glaciation  ;  we  know  nothing  of  the  dis- 
tribution of  the  Rotifera  round  the  fringe  of  the  continent  (the  heart  we  may  infer  to 
be  as  dead  as  anything  on  earth) ;  and  our  knowledge  of  the  Rotifera  of  the  nearest 
land-masses  and  of  the  scattered  islands  of  the  southern  hemisphere  is  inadequate. 

It  may,  however,  be  permitted  to  discuss  in  a  tentative  manner  the  bearing  of 
the  known  facts.  It  may  safely  be  assumed  that  the  Antarctic  Region  has  known 
periods  of  greater  glaciation  or  of  greater  cold  than  at  present,  and  periods  of  temperate 
or  warm  climate.  Is  it  possible  that  the  rotifer  fauna  is  aboriginal,  and  has  survived 
through  the  various  climatic  changes  of  long  geological  ages  ? 

Judging  from  the  summer  condition  of  the  Antarctic  coast  at  present,  it  does  not 
seem  too  much  to  suppose  that  during  the  coldest  periods  there  might  always  be 
some  rock  faces  so  inclined  as  to  make  the  most  of  the  northern  sun,  and  so  form 
little  pools  where  the  rotifers  might  live.  The  rotifers  have  been  proven  to  survive  a 
lower  temperature  than  any  yet  known  under  natural  conditions  on  the  earth,  and 
we  have  seen  (under  descriptions  of  Adineta  grandis  and  Philodina  gregaria)  that 
they  do  not  ask  for  much  in  the  way  of  luxury.  Give  them  a  week  or  two  of  warm 
weather  ( +  40°  F.  or  so)  and  they  are  content  to  be  frozen  up  for  years. 

Periods  of  intense  cold  need  not  be  periods  of  great  precipitation,  as  we  see  in  the 
present  low  snowfall  in  South  Victoria  Land,  and  thus  the  bearing  of  temperature  on 
the  problem  falls  to  be  separately  discussed  from  that  of  glaciation.  Has  there  ever 
been  a  period  when  the  glaciation  was  such  that  the  very  mountain  peaks  were  covered 
by  a  thick  ice-cap  which  would  scrape  the  rotifers,  in  common  with  all  other  living 
things  great  or  small,  off  the  surface  of  the  continent?  That  will  not  be  discussed 
here,  but  short  of  such  a  mechanical  destruction  as  extreme  glaciation  or  complete 
submergence  would  achieve,  I  see  no  reason  why  there  should  not  always  have  been 
rotifers  on  the  coast  at  least  of  the  Antarctic  continent. 

The  peculiarities  of  the  species  of  rotifers  which  at  present  appear  to  be  peculiar 
to  the  Antarctic  are  not  very  great,  morphologically  considered,  yet  they  are  great 
enough  to  require  us  to  presuppose  a  very  long  isolation  if  they  have  been  acquired 
in  their  present  location.  For  four  of  them  it  would  be  difficult  to  suggest  a  probable 
ancestor  among  known  species.  Although  our  list  of  fourteen  species  shows  five  new 
and  nine  previously  known,  the  amount  of  peculiarity  is  greater  than  these  figures 
would  indicate.  Three  species  indicated  bjr  marks  of  interrogation  in  the  table 
given  differ  more  or  less  from  their  supposed  types  elsewhere.  It  was  doubtful 
whether  they  should  be  regarded  as  new  species  or  as  varieties.  In  such  cases  one  has 


ANTARCTIC  ROTIFERA  63 

to  decide  whether  the  advance  of  knowledge  will  be  better  served  by  emphasising  the 
affinities  in  using  the  old  names  or  pointing  the  differences  in  bestowing  new  names. 

If  the  rotifers  are  not  aboriginal  but  have  reached  the  Antarctic  by  immigration 
in  comparatively  recent  times,  since  the  last  period  in  which  the  conditions  were  such 
as  to  prevent  the  continuance  of  life  on  the  continent,  we  must  look  for  some  possible 
means  of  immigration. 

The  Rotifera  share  with  the  lowest  forms  of  life  that  facility  for  distribution 
which  makes  them,  as  Jennings  (21)  puts  it,  "potentially  cosmopolitan."  The  agent 
of  distribution  is  the  wind.  When  some  rotifers,  and  the  eggs  of  others,  are  dried  they 
may  be  blown  in  the  form  of  dust  for  long  distances.  There  is  no  difficulty  in 
supposing  the  Antarctic  peopled  in  this  way,  though  there  is  no  region  where  such 
distances  of  sea  must  be  crossed  in  the  process  ;  but  all  round  the  Antarctic  continent 
the  storm-winds  generally  blow  off  the  land,  and  so  could  play  no  part  in  bringing  a 
rotifer  population  to  the  country. 

There  are  numerous  small  islands  scattered  over  the  Antarctic  Ocean,  and  there 
are  some  storms  which  blow  from  the  north  :  even  in  the  Antarctic  they  are  known, 
though  rare.  While  it  is  difficult  to  believe  the  wind  currents  of  the  lowest  strata 
of  the  atmosphere  adequate  to  transport  rotifers  over  the  wide  ocean  separating,  for 
example,  New  Zealand  and  South  Victoria  Land,  they  might  transport  them  from  one 
island  to  another,  and  thus  the  rotifers  might  in  long  ages  work  their  way  by  slow 
and  intermittent  steps  from  the  one  land  to  the  other. 

There  is  yet  another  way  in  which  the  wind  might  be  supposed  to  effect  the 
transference.  If  a  violent  local  storm  were  capable  of  whirling  rotifer  dust  up  till  it 
was  caught  in  those  high  currents  which  set  to  the  southward,  then  they  might 
conceivably  be  carried  all  the  way  and  dropped  on  land.  If,  however,  it  were  as  easy 
as  all  that,  we  would  expect  a  much  more  extensive  rotifer  fauna. 

In  one  region,  south  of  Cape  Horn,  the  Antarctic  continent  approaches  very  near 
one  of  the  other  continents,  and  there  the  rotifer  dust  might  readily  be  blown  across. 
From  such  a  point  of  easy  access  the  animals  might  get  distributed  all  round  the 
Antarctic  coast  by  the  aid  of  wind  and  birds. 

The  paucity  of  the  rotifer  fauna,  as  far  as  we  know  it,  points  to  great  difficulty  of 
access.  The  varying  degrees  of  peculiarity  exhibited  by  the  different  species  suggest 
that  some  have  been  longer  resident  in  the  Antarctic  than  others.  Hydatina  senta 
may  be  a  recent  immigrant,  may  even  have  taken  passage  with  Captain  Scott  in  the 
early  days  of  the  present  century  :  Callidina  habita  and  C.  angularism&y  have  been 
there  for  a  few  hundreds  or  thousands  of  years  :  whilst  Philodina  alata,  P.  gregaria 
and  Adineta  grandis  may  be  aborigines  of  immense  antiquity. 

That  great  difficulties  lie  in  the  way  of  emigration  to  the  Antarctic,  and 
difficulties  quite  apart  from  the  climatic  rigours  which  meet  the  immigrants,  we  have 
one  more  indication  in  the  adaptability  of  many  rotifers  to  various  climates.  Not 
only  do  a  grea.t  many  species  extend  from  the  temperate  into  the  Arctic  Region,  but 


64  JAMES  MURRAY 

rotifers  taken  from  a  subtropical  forest  in  the  extreme  north  of  New  Zealand,  and 
subjected  to  low  temperatures  at  Cape  Royds,  revived  on  being  moistened.  Many 
Rotifers,  Bdelloids  at  least,  do  not  require  much,  if  any,  extension  of  their  powers  of 
endurance  to  fit  them  for  life  in  the  polar  regions,  so  that  if  species  are  few  in  the 
Antarctic  it  is  almost  certainly  because  of  mechanical  difficulties  in  the  way  of  getting 
there. 

Vitality  of  Rotifers. — Observations  on  the  Biology  of  the  Rotifera  constituted  the 
most  interesting  part  of  the  naturalist's  work  in  the  Antarctic.  Many  experiments, 
of  a  very  simple  nature,  were  made  upon  them  in  order  to  ascertain  their  powers  of 
resistance  to  every  kind  of  adverse  circumstance  which  might  affect  them  in  the 
course  of  a  migration  to  Antarctica,  or  from  place  to  place  in  it. 

These  observations  and  experiments  will  be  described  in  detail  in  a  paper  now  in 
preparation.  A  short  summary  of  the  most  interesting  points  will  be  found  under 
the  descriptions  of  Philodina  gregaria  and  Adineta  grandis  in  the  preceding  pages. 


LIST  OF  WORKS  REFERRED  TO  IN  THE  TEXT 

1 .  ANDERSON,  H.  H.  and  SHEPHAUD,  J.,  Victorian  Rotifers,  Proc.  Boy.  Soc.  of  Victoria,  iv.,  1892,  pp.  C9-80. 

2.  BEAUCHAMP,  P.  DE,  "  Recherches  sur  les  Rotiferes,"  Arch,  de  Zool.Experiment.  et  Gen.,  t:  x.,  p.  43, 1 909. 

3.  BERGENDAL,  D.,  "  Beitrage  zur  Fauna  Gronlands,"  K.  Fysiograf.  Sdllskapets  Handl.,  N.F.,  1891-2, 

Bd.  iii. 

4.  BEYCE,  D.,  " Further  Notes  on  '  Macrotrachelous  Callidinao,'"  Journ.  Quekett  Micr.  Club,  Ser.  II., 

vol.  v.,  1894,  p.  451. 

5.  ,,         ,,   - "  Contributions  to  the  Non-Marine  Fauna  of  Spitsbergen,"  Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  London,  1897, 

pp.  793-9. 

6.  „        „     "Moss-dwelling  Cathypnadse,"  Science  Gossip,  1892,  p.  271. 

7.  CEKTES,  A.,  "  Mission  a  Cap  Horn,  1889. 

8.  „         „     "Infusoires  et  Rotiferes,"  Act.  Soc.  Sclent.  Chili,  iv.,  1894. 

9.  DADAY,  E.  VON,  "  Mikro-Siisswasserthiere  aus  Patagonien,"  Term,  rajzifiiz.,  Bd.  25,  1902,  p.  201. 

10.  „          „         "Susswasser-Mikrofauna  von  Chile,"  Term,  rajzifuz.,  Bd.  25,  1902,  p.  436. 

11.  „          ,,         "Susswasser-Mikrofauna  Paraguays,"  in  Chun's  Zoologica,  Bd.   18,  H.   44,  Stutt- 

gart, 1905. 

12.  DAVIS,  H.,  "  A  New  Callidina,"  &c.,  Month.  Micr.  Journ,.,  ix.,  1873,  p.  201. 

13.  DixoN-NuTTALL,  F.  R.,  AND  FREEMAN,  R.,  "  The  Rotatorian  Genus  Diaschiza,"  Journ.  Roy.  Micr 

Soc.,  1903,  p.  1. 

14.  DUJARDIN,  F.,  "  Histoire  Naturelle  des  Zoophytes,"  Suites  &  Euffon,  1841. 

15.  EHRENBERQ,  C.  G.,  "Organisation  der  Infusorien/'  Abhandl.  K.  Akad.  Wiss.  Berlin  (1831),  1832. 

16.  GOSSE,  P.  H.,  "  Catalogue  of  Rotifera  found  in  Britain,"  Ann.  Nat.  Hist.,  vol.  viii.,  1851,  p.  197. 

17.  „  „        In  "  The  Rotifera,"  Hudson  and  Gosse,  London,  1889,  vol.  ii.,  p.  81. 

18.  HILGENDORF,  F.  W.,  "  A  Contribution  to  the  Study  of  the  Rotifera  of  New  Zealand,"  Trans,  and 

Proc.  of  New  Zealand  Inst.,  vol.  xxxi.  (14  of  New  Series),  1898,  pp.  107-134. 

19.  ,,  -,        "  Rotatoria,"  in  Index  Faunae  Novce-Zealandice,  1894. 

20.  JANSON,  O.,  "  Rotatorien-Familie  der  Philodinseen,"  Marburg,  1893. 

21.  JENNINGS,  H.  S.,  "  Rotatoria  of  the  United  States,"  U.S.  Fish.  Comm.  Bull,  for  1899,  p.  81. 

22.  KIRKMAN,  T.,  "Rotifera of  Natal/'  Journ.  Roy.  Micr.  Soc.  London,  1901,  pp.  229-241. 

23.  „          „  "  Second  List  of  Rotifera  of  Natal,"  Journ.  Roy.  Micr.  Soc.  London,  1906,  pp.  263-268. 


ANTARCTIC  ROTIFERA  65 

24.  MILNE,  W.,  "On  the  Function  of  the  Water- vascular  System  in  the  Rotifera,"  Proe.  Phil.  Soc. 

Glasgow,  1907,  pp.  1-12. 

25.  MURRAY,  J., "  The  Rotifera  of  the  Scottish  Lochs,"  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Edin.,  vol.  xlv.,  1906,  pp.  151-191 . 

26.  ,t         ,,    "  Scottish  National  Antarctic  Expedition,  Tardigrada  of  the  South  Orkneys,"  Trans. 

Roy.  Soc.  Edin.,  xlv.,  1906,  p.  323. 

27.  „          „  "  Some  Rotifera  of  the  Sikkim  Himalaya,"  Journ.  Roy.  Micr.  Soc.,  1906,  p.  643. 

28.  ,,          „  "Arctic  Rotifers,"  Proc.  Roy.  Phys.  Soc.  Edin.,  vol.  xvii.,  1908,  pp.  121-7, 

29.  „         „  "Microscopic  Life  in  Gough  Island,"  Proc.  Roy.  Phys.  Soc.  Edin.,  vol.  xvii.,  1908,  pp. 

127-9. 

30.  „          „  "  Some  African  Rotifers,"  Journ.  Roy.  Micr.  Soc.  London,  1 908,  p.  669. 

31.  RICHTERS,  F.,  "  Fauna  der  Moosrasen  des  Gaussbergs  und  Einiger  Siidlicher  Inseln,"  Deut.   Sudpol. 

Exped'.'^QZ,  Bd.  ix.  Zool.,^>?261. 

32.  „  „    "  Moosbewohner,"  Schwed.  Sudpol.  Exped.,  1901-3,  Bd.  vi.,  1908. 

33.  "ROUSSELET,  0.  F.,  "  Rotifera  of  South  Africa,"  Journ.  Roy.  Micr.  Soc.  London,  1907,  pp.  395-414. 

34.  SHEPHARD,  J.,  "A  New  Rotifer,  Lacinularia  elongata,"  Victorian  Naturalist,  xiii.,  No.  2,  May  1896, 

pp.  22-4. 

35.  „  „   "A  New  Rotifer,  Lacinularia  eUiptica,"  Victorian  Naturalist,  October  1897. 

36.  „  i,   "  A  New  Rotifer,  Lacinularia  striolata,"  Proc.  Soy.  Soc.  of  Victoria,  August  1899, 

pp.  20-35. 

37.  SHEPHARD,  J.,  and  STRICKLAND,  W.,  "  A  New  Rotifer,  Melicerta  fimbriata,"  Victorian  Naturalist, 

xvi.,  No.  3,  July  1899,  pp.  38-40. 

38.  STRICKLAND,  W.,  "  The  Rotifer  in  Melbourne,"  Victorian  Naturalist. 

39.  SCHMARDA,  L.,  "Neue  Wirbellose  Thiere,"  Leipzig,  1859. 

40.  THOMPSON,  P.  G.,  "  Moss-haunting  Rotifers,"  Science  Gossip,  1892,  p.  56, 

41.  WESTERN,  G.,  "  Notes  on  Rotifers,"  Journ.  Quekett  Micr.  Club,  1893,  pp.  155-160. 

42.  WHITELEGOE,  T.,  "  Invertebrate  Fauna  of  Port  Jackson  and  Neighbourhood,"  Journ.  and  Proc.  Roy. 

Soc.  of  New  South  Wales  for  1899,  pp.  308-17. 

43.  WIERZEJSKI,  A.,  "  Rot.  W.  Argentinie,"  Bull.  Acad.  Cracovie,  1902,  p.  158. 


NOTE 

In  the  preparation  of  this  paper  I  have  been  indebted  to  several  friends  for  assist- 
ance, which  I  desire  here  to  acknowledge.  Mr.  D.  Bryce  examined  the  drawings  of 
the  Bdelloid  rotifers,  and  gave  me  the  advantage  of  his  opinion  on  the  values  of  the 
species.  Mr.  C.  F.  Kousselet  did  the  same  for  the  non-Bdelloid  rotifers,  and  helped 
me  with  the  list  of  literature.  Mr.  D.  J.  Scourfield  experimented  on  the  dried 
rotifers  brought  from  the  Antarctic,  and  demonstrated  that  some  had  survived  the 
many  changes  of  climate  which  they  had  experienced.  Mr.  J.  H.  Prieetley  subjected 
some  of  the  rotifers  to  a  temperature  of  —78°  C.  for  many  hours,  and  showed  that 
some  ,  were  not  killed  by  this,  thus  completing  the  simple  series  of  experiments 
commenced  in  the  Antarctic. 

Mr.  Rousselet  was  also  good  enough  to  remount  the  few  specimens  of  the  new 
species  of  Antarctic  rotifers,  which  had  been  mounted  in  a  temporary  way,  thus 
saving  them  from  destruction. 

BRIT.    ANTARCT.    EXPED.    1907-9.        VOL.    I.  I 


PLATE   IX 


PLATE    IX 

This  plate  is  designed  to  illustrate  the  bright  coloration  which  distinguishes  most 
of  the  Antarctic  Bdelloids.  The  brilliant  red  of  the  stomach  of  Philodina  gregaria 
and  Callidina  hctbita  (Figs.  1  and  3)  may  give  the  impression  of  being  overdone. 
If  we  have  not  caught  the  precise  shade  of  the  red,  it  is  not  that  it  was  lees  vivid 
than  we  show  it.  It  was  a  deep,  clear,  pure  crimson  or  ruby.  When  seen  in  large 
mass  the  colour  approaches  blood-red,  but  by  transmitted  light  it  appears  crimson 
under  the  microscope. 

When  we  succeeded  in  reviving  a  few  examples  of  Philodina  gregaria  and  showed 
them  to  a  naturalist  in  London,  he  exclaimed,  "  Are  they  so  red  as  all  that." 

FIGURE  1. — Philodina  gregaria,  lateral  view,  showing  the  red  stomach  and  eyes, 
small  antenna,  and  two  young. 

FIGURE  2. — Adineta  grandis,  dorsal  view,  showing  the  brown  colour  deepest  in  the 
alimentary  tract. 

FIGURE  3. — Callidina  habita,  dorsal  view.     The  distinctive  spurs  of  this  variety  are 
shown,  and  the  prominent  foot-boss. 


Brit.  Antarct.  Expecl.  1907-9.  Vol.  I.  Plate  IX. 

MURRAY:    ANTARCTIC    R  o  T  i  F  K  R  A. 


i)  P.  gregaria. 


(2)  A.  grandis. 
Colours  of   Antarctic  Rotifers. 


(3)  C.  habita. 


J.  Murray,  del.  ad.  nat. 


PLATE   X 


PLATE    X 

FIGURE  4a. — Philodina  alata,  sp.  n.,  dorsal  view,  feeding  :  the  lateral  processes,  which 
distinguish  it  from  all  other  known  species,  are  in  this  figure  slightly  drawn  in  at 
the  tips  (which  is  accomplished  by  special  muscles,  shown  in  Fig.  4e). 

FIGURE  46. — The  same,  fully  contracted.  The  lateral  processes  are  then  turgid  from 
the  pressure  of  the  body-fluid,  and  are  projected  to  their  fullest  extent  and 
somewhat  forward. 

FIGURE  4c. — The  same,  in  the  creeping  attitude :  usually  the  lateral  processes  are 
drawn  in,  almost  out  of  sight,  among  the  skin-folds  when  creeping,  but  in  this 
instance  they  were  fully  extended. 

FIGURE  4c£. — Jaw  of  the  same  with  its  two  teeth  and  wide  border. 

FIGURE  4e. — One  of  the  lateral  processes  of  the  same.  It  is  seen  to  be  hollow,  and 
special  muscles  enter  it  and  are  attached  near  the  top.  One  of  the  vibratile  tags 
is  seen  at  the  base  of  the  process.  It  is  unusually  short  and  wide  for  a  Bdelloid. 

FIGURE  4f. — Foot  and  rump  of  the  same  seen  from  the  side.  The  prominent  boss  of 
the  preanal  segment  can  also  be  seen  as  a  curved  line  in  Fig.  4c. 

FIGURE  5a. — Philodina  antarctica,  sp.  n.  The  figure  shows  the  prominent  collar,  the 
eyes  on  a  conspicuous  brain,  the  elongate  foot,  and  the  peculiar  spurs.  The 
basal  portion  of  the  spurs  is  badly  drawn  in  this  figure  (it  is  correctly  shown  in 
Fig.  56). 

FIGURE  56. — Spurs  of  the  same.  These,  with  the  broad  triangular  bases  and  peg-like 
apices,  are  the  best  character  of  the  species.  The  distinction  of  the  two  parts  is 
sometimes  obliterated.  Even  then  the  absence  of  interspace  will  distinguish 
this  from  P.  gregaria,  and  there  are  many  other  differences  of  general  propor- 
tions and  details,  requiring,  however,  careful  study. 

FIGURE  5c. — Lateral  view  of  the  foot  of  the  same.  The  dorsal  toes  are  almost  as  thick 
as  the  ventral,  though  shorter.  This  is  a  point  of  difference  from  P.  gregaria, 
in  which  the  dorsal  toes  are  relatively  very  small. 

FIGURE  6. — Philodina,  unnamed  species. 


Brit  Antarct  Exped  1907-9. 


Vol.  1.  Plate  X. 


MURRAY     ANTARCTIC   ROTIFER  A 


J.  ML 


PHILODINAALATA.sp.il  5,     P  ANTARCTICA sp.n.  6.    PHILODINA. 


sp. 


Murrav 


PLATE    XI 


PLATE    XI 

FIGURE  7ot. — Philodina  gregaria,  sp.  n.  dorsal  view  of  the  animal  when  feeding.  The 
very  prominent  collar  is  only  marked  off  from  the  pedicels  by  the  cilia  of  the 
wreath.  Two  well-grown  young  are  seen. 

FIGURE  7b. — Spurs  and  toes  of  the  same.  The  dorsal  toes  are  seen  to  be  greatly 
smaller  than  the  ventral. 

FIGURE  7c.— One  of  the  spindle-shaped  vibratile  tags  of  the  same. 

FIGURE  Id.— Jaw  of  the  same,  with  two  strong  teeth,  one  thinner  tooth,  and  many 
fine  striae. 

FIGURE  7e. — Lateral  view  of  the  jaw  of  the  same,  showing  the  process  of  the  ramus 
behind. 

FIGURE  Sa. — Callidina  habita,  dorsal  view  of  a  variety  which  differs  from  the  type 
in  the  form  of  the  spurs. 

FIGURE  86. — The  same,  a  variety  having  spurs  nearer  the  typical  form,  but  smaller. 

FIGURE  8c. — Lateral  view  of  the  foot  of  the  same  showing  the  thickened  part  of  the 
first  foot-joint  which  forms  the  boss. 

FIGURE  8d. — Egg  of  the  same,  elliptical  in  form,  with  each  pole  produced  into  a 
process. 

FIGURE  8e. — Tip  of  rostrum  of  the  same.     The  lamellae  are  widely  separated. 


Brit  Antarct  Exped  1907-9. 


Vol.  1.  Plate  XI 


MURRAY:    ANTARCTIC   ROTIKERA. 


8.c 


7.    PHILODINA  GREGARIA,  sp.n. 
Murray  del   ad  nat. 


8.     CALLIDINA  HABITA  BRYCE. 


PLATE   XII 


BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.   1907-9.       VOL.  I. 


PLATE  XII 

FIGURE  9a. — Adineta  barbata,  Janson  ? 

FIGURE  96. — Egg  of  the  same  from  Blue  Lake ;  one  pole  is  produced,  and  there  are 

no  other  processes. 
FIGURE  9c. — Egg  from  Deep  Lake,  Cape  Barne,  from  which  a  similar  Adineta  was 

hatched  on  September  24,  after  the  egg  had  been  dry  for  about  a  year,  and  had 

been  conveyed  from  Antarctica  to  Britain. 
FIGURE  10a. — Adineta  grandis,  large  stout  example,  showing  six  young,  apparently 

all  in  an  equally  advanced  state  of  development,  and  with  the  jaws  well  grown. 
FIGURE  106. — Head  of  the  same,  ventral  surface,  showing  the  lamellse,   brush   of 

cilia  and  motile  setse,  pectinate  folds  at  posterior  margin  of  corona,  &c. 
FIGURE  lOc. — Jaw  of  the  same,  showing  the  projection  at  back  of  ramus. 
FIGURE  Wd. — Yolk-mass  of  the  same,  dividing  into  six  parts,  each  containing  one 

nucleus.     The  number  of  nuclei  is  normally  eight,  as  in  moat  Bdelloids.     In  this 

instance  the  full  number  may  be  present,  two  of  them  hidden  behind  the  centre 

of  the  mass. 
FIGURE  lla. — Adineta  longicornis  ?     The  rostral  part  is  not  of  the  same  form  as  in 

the  type,  but  allowing  for  a  different  angle  of  inclination  it  may  be  the  same. 
FIGURE  116. — Spurs  of  the  same.     They  are  considerably  shorter  than  in  the  type, 

but  are  still  relatively  much  longer  than  in  any  other  known  species. 
FIGURE  12a. — Callidina  angularis,  sp.  n.,  dorsal  view,  showing  angular  outline  and 

stippled  surface. 
FIGURE  126. — Jaw  of  the   same,  with   four   principal   teeth  and   many  finer  ones 

diminishing  backwards. 

FIGURES  12cand  I2d. — Eggs  found  associated  with  this  species  and  with  G.  constricta. 
FIGURE  13a. — Callidina   constricta,  Duj.,  dorsal  view,  illustrating   the   differences 

between  this  species  and  G.  angularis  ;  the  outline  is  not  angular  and  the  skin 

is  not  stippled. 
FIGURE  136. — Part  of  one  disc  of  the  corona  of  C.  constricta,  showing  the  groups  ot 

cilia  which  give  the  appearance  of  toothed  wheels  to  the  philodinoid  corona. 

Diagrams  elucidating  the  motions  of  the  cilia  which  cause  the  appearance  of 

teeth  have  often  been  published.     This  is  not  a  diagram,  but  a  drawing  from  an 

example  which  had  just  been  killed  and  fixed  with  osmic  acid  while  in  the  act 

of  feeding.     Each  group  has  cilia  at  every  stage  of  the  stroke,  thus  showing  the 

course  followed  by  each.      The  specimen  was  mounted  in  fluid  and  preserved. 

Unfortunately,  as  was  only  to  be  expected,  the  slight  difference  of  density  between 

the  fluids  within  and  without  the  body  has  resulted  in  making  the  disc  turgid  and 

opened  out  the  groups  of  cilia  into  one  uniform  fringe. 


Brit  Antarct.  Exped  1907-9.  Vol.  1.  Plate  Xll 

MURRAY:    ANTARCTIC   ROTIFER  A. 


HI 


10.  A 


9,   ADINETA  BARBATA^          10,  A  GRANDIS,  sp.-n.         II,  A  LONGICORNIS 
12,  CALLIDINA  ANGULARIS,  sp  n.  13,  C.  CONSTRICTA. 


\A  I 


PLATE   XIII 


PLATE  XIII 

FIGURE  14a. — Pleurotrocha,  sp.     A  large  active  animal  resembling  P.  grandis,  but 
with  longer  spurs  and  some  other  differences. 

FIGURE  1 46. — Elliptical  papillose  egg  of  the  same. 

FIGURE  14c. — Jaws  of  the  same,  drawn  from  an  example  in  the  egg. 

FIGURE  15. — Floscularia,  sp.,  semi-contracted. 

FIGURE  16a. — Diaschiza  tenuior,  lateral  view  with  the  foot  drawn  well  under  the 
body. 

FIGURE  166. — The  same,  dorsal  view. 

FIGURE  16c  and  16cZ. — Dorsal  and  lateral  views  of  a  supposed  male  of  the  same, 
having  rudimentary  jaws. 

FIGURE  16e. — Rough  sketch  of  jaws  of  the  female. 

FIGURE  16/ — Thick-shelled  egg  containing  jaws  similar  to  those  of  the  supposed 
male  (Figs.  16c  and 


Brit  Antarct.  Exped  1907-9.  yo]  j   pjate  Xlll 

MURRAY:    ANTARCTIC   ROTIFERA. 


16.  b. 


14,    PLEUROTROCHA,  sp        15,  FLOSCULARIA,  SP.         16,    DIASCHIZA  TENUIOR 
^Murray  del    ad  nat 


PART  IV 

* 

MUSCI 

NOTE  SUB  LES  MOUSSES  RAPPORTEES  PAR  L'EXPEDITION  DU  "NJMROD" 

PAR  JULES  CARDOT 


LES  Mousses  de  1'exp^dition  du  Nimrod  proviennent  de  la  me'me  region  que  celles 
rapporte"es  anterieurement  par  le  Discovery*  Elles  consistent  seulement  en 
4  especes,  dej&  connues,  mais  dont  1'une  toutefois  est  nouvelle  pour  la  flore  ant- 
arctique.  Les  echantillons  sont  extremement  rabougris,  et  tous  donnent  1 'impression  de 
plantes  malades,  luttant  pe"niblement  centre  des  conditions  de  milieu  exceptionelle- 
ment  rudes. 

Alors  que  nous  ne  connaissons  encore  que  8  mousses  ve"ge"tant  mise'rablement  sur 
les  cotes  inhospitalieres  de  la  Terre  Victoria,  M.  Bryhn  vient  de  publier  f  une  liste 
de  62  especes  de  Muscinees  (57  Mousses  et  5  Hepatiques)  rapportees  par  Peary  de 
3  localites  de  la  Terre  de  Grant,  par  81°-82°  de  latitude  boreale — chiffre  supe"rieur  a 
celui  des  especes  actuellement  connues  dans  tout  le  domaine  antarctique  au  sud  du 
60ime  parallele. 

La  seule  comparaison  du  nombre  des  especes  connues  d'une  part  a  la  Terre 
Victoria,  par  77°-78°  lat.  sud,  et  d'autre  part  a  la  Terre  de  Grant,  sous  une  latitude 
sensiblement  plus  elevee,  fait  ressortir  d'une  fagon  frappante  combien  sont  diflerentes 
les  conditions  climateriques  auxquelles  sont  soumises  les  regions  polaires  dans  les 
deux  hemispheres. 

• 

DlCRANACE^: 

Dicranella  Hookeri 

Dicranetta  Hookeri  (0.  Mull.),  Card,  in  Bull.  Herb.  Boissier,  2*  sir.,  vi.,  p.  4,  et  Fl.  bryol.  Terres  Magell., 

etc.,  p.  60. 
Angstrcemia  ffookeri  (C.  Miill.),  Syn.  II.  p.  607. 

*  Of.  National  Antarctic  Expedition,  Nat.  History,  vol.  ii.,  Musci. 

t  Ad   cognitionem   Bryophytorum    arcticorum    contributiones   sparsae    (Christiania,    Videiifck.-Selhk 
Fordhandl.  for  1908,  No.  5.). 

BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.   1907-9.      VOL.  I.      PART  4,  ISSUED  APRIL  1910  I, 


78  J.   CARDOT 

Anisothecium  Jamesoni,  Mitt.  Musci.,  austro-amer.,  p.  39,  pro  parte. 

Dichodontium  Jamesoni,  Sch.  Syn.  Muse.  Europ.,  ed.  i.,  p.  CO,  et  auct.  plurim.,  pro  parte. 

Dicranella  Jamesoni,  Broth,  in  Nat.  Pflanzenfam.,  Musci,  p.  311,  jro  parte. 

"CapeEoyds,  1908." 

Echantillon  en  tres  mauvais  ^tat,  d'un  vert  noiratre.  Les  feuilles  sont  tantot 
entieres,  comme  dans  la  forme  normale  de  1'espece,  tantot  denticule'es  vers  I'extre'mite. 
II  me  parait  ne'anmoins  certain  que  ce  specimen  appartient  bien  au  D.  Hookeri,  espece 
connue  dans  le  domaine  magellanique,  a  la  Ge"orgie  du  sud,  &  Kerguelen  et  &  1'ile 
Heard,  et  qui  n'avait  pas  encore  ete  signalee  dans  1'Antarctide. 

II  y  a  quelques  tiges  de  Bryum  argenteum,  L.,  en  melange. 


POTTIACE^E 

Sarconeurum  glaciate 

Sarconeurum  glaciale  (Hook,  fils  et  Wils.),  Card,  et  Bryhn,  in  Nat.  Antarc.  Exped.,  Musci,  p.  3. 
Didymodon  (?)  glacialis  (Hook,  fils  et  Wils.),  Fl.  Antarc.,  ii.  p.  408,  t.  152,  fig.  6. 
Sarconeurum  antarcticum,  Bryhn,  in  Nyt.  Mag.  f.  Naturvidensk,  B.  40,  H.  iii.,  p.  204,  tab.  i.  et  ii. 
Barbula,  sp.,  Gepp,  Report  on  the  coll.  voyage  Southern  Cross,  XXI.  Cryptog.,  Musci,  p.  319. 

"Hut  Point,  Boss  Island,  77°  50'  S.  lat.,  Coll.  E.  Joyce,  Nov.  1908 ;  Cape  Irizar, 
S.  Victoria  Land,  Coll.  T.W.E.  David,  Nov.  1908;  Cape  Barne,  Ross  Island,  Coll. 
J.  Murray,  Nov.  1908  ;  High  Moraines,  Cape  Royds,  77°  30'  S.  lat.,  Coll.  J.  Murray, 
Jan.  1909." 

Les  rhizoides  forment  une  masse  feutre*e,  compacte,  me'langee  de  sable  et  de  terre, 
epaisse  d'un  centimetre  environ,  et  limitee  inferieurement  par  une  surface  nette.  II 
est  probable  que  cette  surface  indique  le  contact  avec  la  partie  du  sol  qui  ne  de"gele 
jamais  et  qui  arrete  ainsi  la  penetration  des  rhizoiides. 


BRYACE.E 
Bryum  argenteum 

Bryum  argenteum,  L.,  Sp.  pi.  p.  1120. 

"High  Moraines,  Cape  Royds,  Ross  Island,  77°  30'  S.  lat.,  Col.  J.  Murray, 
Jan.  1909." 

Forme  excessivement  rabougrie,  identique  aux  dchantillons  deja  rapportds  de  la 
meme  region  par  le  Discovery 

"  Stranded  Moraines,  McMurdo  Sound,  S.  Victoria  Land,  Coll.  R.  E.  Priestley, 
1908." 


MUSCI  79 

Tiges  e*mettant  de  nombreux  rameaux  tres  greles,  longs  de  2  a  4  millimetres, 
garnis  de  tres  petites  feuilles  espacees,  tres  concaves,  orbiculaires,  ou  suborbiculaires, 
obtuses  ou  apiculees,  rappelant  beaucoup  les  feuilles  du  B.  cephalozioides,  Card.,  mais 
les  feuilles  inferieures  sont  normales. 

Bryum  antarcticum 

Bryum  anlarcticum  (Hook,  fils  et  Wila.),  Fl.  Antarct.  n.  p.  414,  t.  153,  fig.  6. 
Webera  antarctica,  Jaeg.  Ad.  i.  p.  599. 

"  Stranded  Moraines,  McMurdo  Sound,  S.  Victoria  Land,  Coll.  R.  E.  Priestley, 
1908." 


I  BRITISH   ANTARCTIC  EXPEDITION    1907-9 

UNDER  THE  COMMAND  OF  SIR  E.  H.  SHACKLETON,  C.V.O. 


REPORTS   ON   THE   SCIENTIFIC   INVESTIGATIONS 


VOL.   I 

BIOLOGY 

EDITOR  JAMES  MURRAY 

PART  V 

TARDIGRADA 

BY  JAMES  MURRAY,   F.R.S.E.,  F.Z.S. 


(WITH  EIGHT  PLATES) 


LONDON 
PUBLISHED  FOR  THE  EXPEDITION  BY  WILLIAM  HEINEMANN 

21  BEDFORD  STREET,  W.C. 
1910 

ISSUED   SEPARATELY.    DECEMBER    IfllO 
PRICE  TEN  SHILLINGS  NET 


REPORTS  ALREADY  ISSUED 

VOL.   I.  PART  I.,  ON  COLLECTING  AT  CAPE  ROYDS 

BY  JAMES  MURRAY  PRICE  Is.  6d. 

VOL.  I.  PART  II.,  ON  MICROSCOPIC  LIFE  AT  CAPE  ROYDS 

By  JAMES  MURRAY  PRICE  5s.  Od. 

VOL.  I.  PART  III.,  ANTARCTIC  ROTIFERA 

By  JAMES  MURRAY  PRICE  5s.  Od. 

VOL.  I.  PART  IV.,  MUSCI 

BY  JULES  CARDOT  PRICE  Is.  Od. 


PART  V 

TAEDIGEADA 

BY  JAMES  MURRAY 

(WITH  PLATES  XIV.-XXI.) 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

INTRODUCTION .83 

ON  STRUCTURE  OF  TAHDIGRADA .84 

ON  NOMENCLATURE 91 

ON  THE  VALUE  OF  SPECIES  OF  TARDIGRADA 91 

ANTARCTIC  TARDIGRADA 95 

TARDIGRADA  OF  NEW  ZEALAND .107 

AUSTRALIAN  TARDIGRADA 123 

TARDIGRADA  OF  SOME  PACIFIC  ISLANDS 147 

CANADIAN  TARDIGRADA 159 

SUMMARY  OF  RESULTS 179 

ON  DISTRIBUTION 179 

BIBLIOGRAPHY    .... 183 

INDEX  TO  SPECIES 185 

PLATES  XIV.-XXI.  .        .        .187 


BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.   1907-9.       VOL.  I.      PART  5,  ISSUED  DECEMBER    1910 


M 


INTRODUCTION 

TARDIGRADA.  were  collected  not  only  in  the  Antarctic,  but  in  all  other  countries 
visited  by  the  Expedition  in  the  course  of  the  voyage  round  the  world.  These  were 
New  Zealand,  the  Macquarie  Islands,  Australia,  Fiji,  Hawaii,  and  Canada.  A  brief 
visit  was  paid  to  South  Africa,  and  some  moss  was  collected  on  Table  Mountain  by 
Drs.  Mackay  and  Michell,  but  though  animals  of  other  sorts  were  plentiful  enough, 
no  Tardigrada  were  found. 

The  great  majority  of  the  Tardigrada  obtained  were  of  the  k'nds  which  live  among 
moss.  These  everywhere  over  the  world  greatly  exceed  in  numbers  the  true  water- 
dwellers.  All,  of  course,  are  aquatic  animals,  in  the  sense  that  they  must  have  at  least 
a  film  of  water  to  support  their  active  life,  but  the  dwellers  among  moss  have  to 
endure  frequent  and  often  long-continued  desiccation,  while  the  others  live  in  ponds 
and  other  waters  of  a  more  permanent  sort.  Though  a  number  of  species  are  common 
to  both  habitats,  there  is  no  doubt  that  most  are  confined  to  one  or  other.  The  moss- 
dwellers  are  adapted  to  withstand  desiccation,  the  others  may  be  equally  so,  but  they 
are  rarely  exposed  to  tests  of  their  powers.  By  desiccation  it  is  not  meant  that  the 
animals  can  endure  the  loss  of  all  moisture  from  their  bodies,  but  that  they  can  live 
when  completely  deprived  of  the  external  watery  element.  When  so  deprived  they 
are  dormant,  and  if  any  physiological  change  goes  on,  it  must  be  excessively  slow. 

Only  some  half-dozen  species  are  well  recognised  as  habitual  pond-dwellers, 
though  in  Scotland  a  good  many  others  are  frequently  found  in  ponds,  lakes,  and 
rivers. 

It  was  only  in  New  Zealand,  Australia,  and  the  Antarctic  that  there  was  much 
opportunity  of  looking  for  the  purely  aquatic  kinds.  In  those  countries  which  were 
only  visited  in  passing  there  was  no  available  method  of  collecting  except  by  taking 
dry  moss  to  be  examined  afterwards  at  leisure.  Nothing  could  exceed  the  facility  of 
this  mode  of  collecting.  The  moss  is  preferably  gathered  dry ;  the  animals  have 
already  become  dormant  in  the  natural  course,  and  nothing  is  required  for  the 
examination  afterwards,  but  to  moisten  the  moss,  when  in  half  an  hour  or  so  the 
animals  are  found  to  be  active.  They  will  not  live  indefinitely,  but  for  a  year  at 
least  they  can  quickly  be  revived  when  wanted,  and  some  have  been  kept  for  a 
number  of  years  alive. 

In  this  paper,  after  some  introductory  paragraphs  dealing  with  structure,  nomen- 

83 

13 


84  J.  MURRAY 

clature,  and  other  matters,  the  Tardigrada  of  each  country  visited  will  be  treated  in 
a  separate  section,  five  altogether. 

In  the  section  dealing  with  each  country  there  will  be  given  first  an  account  01 
how  the  collecting  was  done  in  that  country,  and  a  summary  of  previous  knowledge 
of  the  Tardigrada.  Then  will  follow  the  list  of  species  and  notes  upon  them,  includ- 
ing descriptions  of  new  species.  The  peculiarities  of  the  Tardigrade  fauna,  and  its 
relation  to  the  rest  of  the  world,  will  be  briefly  treated.  General  questions  of 
geographical  distribution,  &c.,  concerning  the  entire  area  over  which  work  has  been 
done,  will  be  reserved  for  discussion  in  the  general  summary  of  results. 

The  information  brought  together  about  Tardigrada  might  have  been  exhibited  in 
a  more  concise  form  by  giving  a  complete  list  of  all  the  species  collected  in  all  the 
countries,  in  one  table,  followed  by  notes  on  the  species,  and  a  discussion  of  general 
questions  of  distribution.  It  seems  to  me,  however,  so  important  to  the  student  to 
find  all  the  information  about  each  country  collected  together  by  itself,  that  I 
have  adopted  this  form,  even  at  the  expense  of  a  little  repetition,  and  some  redun- 
dancy in  the  tables  illustrating  the  distribution. 

The  object  has  been  to  offer  the  information  in  accessible  form,  so  that  the 
student  of  one  country  may  readily  find  what  he  wants.  This  has  been  attempted 
by  a  suitable  classification  of  the  facts  under  various  headings,  and  for  further 
assistance,  there  is  a  "  Contents  "  page,  and  at  the  end  an  alphabetical  index  to  the 
species,  while  the  explanations  of  the  plates  have  references  to  the  pages  of  the  text 
where  the  species  figured  are  described. 

We  have  thus  what  is  practically  a  series  of  five  papers,  each  complete  in  itself, 
with  Introductory  and  Recapitulatory  chapters,  dealing  with  all  of  them  collectively. 

STRUCTURE  OF  TARDIGRADA 

The  student  is  referred  to  other  works  for  a  general  account  of  the  structure  of 
Tardigrada.  Here  there  will  be  given  only  such  details  as  are  necessary  to  the 
understanding  of  the  descriptions  of  the  species. 

Ecliiniscus. — In  this  genus  the  important  points  in  description  are  :  the  number  and 
texture  of  the  plates  ;  the  processes  on  the  body  ;  the  claws  ;  and  the  skinfold  (fringe) 
of  the  last  legs.  The  plates  vary  in  number.  The  minimum  may  be  taken  as  nine 
and  the  maximum  as  twelve.  There  may  often  appear  to  be  more  than  twelve 
plates,  but  I  regard  these  as  originating  in  the  subdividing  of  the  normal  plates. 
The  plates  are  either  single  or  paired.  The  single  plates  are  of  two  kinds  :  first, 
large,  covering  the  back  arid  sides ;  second,  small,  triangular,  median  plates.  The 
pairs  meet  in  the  middle  line,  and  go  over  the  sides  like  the  large  single  plates. 

The  number  of  segments  of  an  Ecliiniscus  have  been  variously  estimated  by 
different  writers.  Doyere  gives  four  body-segments,  without  regarding  the  head, 
which  he  supposes  to  show  traces  of  several  segments.  Schultze's  E.  heller- 


TARDIGRADA  85 

manni  (43),  has  nine  segments.  What  they  mean  by  segments  can  only  be 
ascertained  by  studying  the  figures  which  these  writers  have  given.  Richters' 
scheme  is  perhaps  the  most  useful.  It  does  not  aim  at  accounting  for  all  the 
morphological  segments  of  some  hypothetical  primitive  or  typical  Tardigrade,  but  is 
merely  a  division  of  the  body  for  practical  use  to  systematic  naturalists. 

He  reckons  six  segments,  and  indicates  them  by  roman  numbers,  I.  to  VI.  These 
numbers  are  here  adopted  to  distinguish  the  segments,  and  as  there  are  two  distinct 
types  of  segmentation  I  give  two  figures,  one  of  each  type,  on  which  the  segments 
are  numbered,  and  other  points  of  structure  indicated  (see  Plates  XVIII.  Fig.  34, 
and  XVI.  Fig.  14). 

In  one  group  of  Echinisci  the  segments  V.  and  VI.  have  coalesced  so  completely 
that  there  is  no  external  mark  of  their  separation  (Plate  XVI.  Fig  14).  This 
includes  the  great  majority  of  the  species.  Segment  I.  is  the  head,  II.,  III.,  and  IV. 
the  body  segments  bearing  the  first,  second,  and  third  pairs  of  legs,  V.  -f  VI.  bears 
the  fourth  legs.  The  reckoning  of  V.  as  a  segment  is  rather  inconvenient,  as  there 
is  in  most  species  no  visible  trace  of  it. 

In  the  other  group,  which  includes  only  about  a  dozen  species,  segments  V. 
and  VI.  remain  distinct  (Plate  XVIII.  Fig.  34).  When  V.  is  separate  it  usually 
bears  a  pair  of  plates,  like  those  of  segments  III.  and  IV.,  but  it  may  be  a  half-ring, 
without  trace  of  division  in  the  middle,  as  in  E.  pulclier  here  figured. 

All  of  the  plates  are  liable  in  one  species  or  another  to  be  subdivided  in  various 
ways.  This  usually  only  affects  the  surface  markings.  The  divisions  may  be  merely  lines 
separating  different  areas,  or  they  may  be  broad  bands  devoid  of  markings.  The  median 
plates  are  often  divided  by  a  transverse  line  into  two  parts  (E.  novcezeelandice,  Plate 
XV.  Fig.  5),  or  by  median  lines  into  pairs  (E.  pulcher,  Plate  XVIII.  Fig.  34). 

E.  tessellatus  (Plate  XVI.  Fig.  15)  is  an  extreme  case  of  the  division  of  segments 
II.  and  V.  +  VI.  by  transverse  and  longitudinal  bands.  E.  scrofa,  Richters  (26), 
is  an  example  of  subdivision  of  the  median  plates  into  many  narrow  bands. 

The  plates  of  the  first  and  second  pairs  are  commonly  divided  into  two  parts  by  a 
transverse  plain  band  (E.  duboisi,  Plate  XVII.  Fig.  19,  E.  spinulosus,  Plate  XIX. 
Fig.  38).  This  band  occupies  a  furrow.  Sometimes  the  separation  is  a  mere  line, 
and  the  markings  continue  into  the  furrow.  Occasionally  there  are  two  lines  on  each 
plate,  separating  narrow  portions  at  the  anterior  and  posterior  borders,  without  any 
cessation  of  the  markings  (E.  tessellatus,  Plate  XVI.  Fig.  15). 

The  markings  of  the  plates  are  of  several  kinds.  As  their  true  character  is  often 
in  doubt  they  are  named  from  their  appearances.  There  are  pellucid  dots  which  do  not 
appear  to  project  from  the  general  surface,  actual  projecting  granules  (E.  granulatus, 
.Doyere,  very  large  in  E.  tessellatus,  Plate  XVI.  Fig.  15),  pits  or  apparent  perfora- 
tions, and  reticulation  of  raised  lines.  The  reticulation  may  be  simply  the  borders  of 
adjacent  depressions  (E.  intermedius,  Plate  XVI.  Fig.  17).  Very  peculiar  are  the 
close-set  spicules  of  E.  spiculifer,  Schaudinn  (41),  and  the  reticulation  of  pearly  dots 


86  J.  MURRAY 

of  E.  islandicus  (18).  A  very  few  species  are  said  to  have  no  surface  markings 
whatever  on  the  plates. 

The  lumbar  plate,  which  covers  segment  VI.,  or  V.  +  VI.  when  these  are  joined, 
is  nearly  always  divided  by  two  lateral  slits  into  a  sort  of  trefoil.  Often  the  middle 
and  lateral  flaps  thus  produced  are  bent  downwards  at  an  angle  to  the  small  median 
portion  of  the  plate,  which  is  then  said  to  be  faceted.  The  angle  joining  the  two 
slits  has  caused  it  to  be  supposed  that  the  posterior  "  tail-piece  "  thus  separated  is  a 
distinct  segment,  and  it  has  also  been  supposed  that  the  portion  in  front  of  the  slits 
is  homologous  with  segment  V.  This  is  undoubtedly  not  the  case,  as  when  V.  and 
VI.  are  separate,  VI.  is  trefoliate  in  the  usual  way.  A  number  of  species  have  been 
figured  without  a  trefoliate  "lumbar  plate"  \_E.  sintsbergensis,  Scorn  field  (45),  and  E. 
bisetosus,  Heinis  (7)  ].  Personally  I  have  only  seen  one  species  in  which  the  lumbar 
plate  is  not  trefoliate  (E.  intermedium,  described  in  this  paper,  see  Plate  XVI.  Fig.  17, 
and  Plate  XX.  Fig.  52).  In  other  cases  I  do  not  take  the  evidence  of  figures,  unless 
the  authors  refer  to  the  character  in  their  descriptions,  as  in  certain  positions  the  slits 
are  hidden  and  may  be  overlooked. 

The  processes  connected  with  the  plates  are  either  setce,  longer  or  shorter  spines, 
little  spicules,  or  blunt  cones  or  knobs.  Certain  processes  often  occur  in  definite 
situations,  easily  indicated  in  descriptions.  Near  the  mouth  there  are  four  cirri  and 
two  palps,  which  are  in  most  species  of  no  distinctive  value.  In  a  few  species  they 
are  conspicuously  large,  or  slightly  modified  in  form  [considerably  in  E.  cornutus 
(34)].  In  one  or  two  species  they  are  stated  to  be  lacking  [E.  imberbis  (38)]. 

Of  most  regular  occurrence  are  the  five  lateral  processes  and  two  dorsal  processes, 
on  each  side.  Richters  distinguishes  the  lateral  processes  by  the  letters  a,  b,  c,  d,  e, 
(Plate  XVI.  Fig.  14)*  counting  from  the  head  backwards.  «  is  the  head  seta,  the 
only  process  present  in  every  known  Echiniscus.  It  is  situated  at  the  base  of  the 
head,  between  I.  and  II.  The  pair  commonly  curve  forward,  and  look  very  like 
cow's  horns,  but  very  thin,  except  in  E.  cornutus,  where  the  resemblance  is  perfect. 

At  the  base  of  seta  a  there  is  generally  (perhaps  always)  a  little  triangular  or 
cylindrical  palp  or  "  Auricle  "  as  it  may  be  called.  It  is  rarely  distinctive  but  in  a 
few  species  is  of  characteristic  shape  or  large  size. 

In  a  few  species  there  are  other  processes  besides  these  most  common  ones.  The 
most  frequent  are  little  spicules  on  the  posterior  borders  of  the  plates  of  segments 
II.,  III.,  and  IV.  between  the  lateral  and  dorsal  processes.  In  such  cases  there  may 
be  a  similar  spicule  beside  the  slit  in  the  lumbar  plate,  close  to  seta  e,  if  that  be 
present.  There  may  be  more  than  one  spicule  between  the  lateral  and  dorsal 
processes,  especially  on  segment  IV.  (plates  of  the  second  pair),  where  there  may  be 
two  or  three  [E.  oihonnce,  Heinis  (9)]. 

The  dorsal  processes  usually  spring  from  the  postero-dorsal  angle  of  the  paired 
plates,  that  is,  at  the  angle  marking  the  limits  of  the  space  occupied  by  the  median 

*  Seta  e  is  not  present  in  the  species  figured. 


TARDIGRADA  87 

plates.  Sometimes  the  dorsal  processes  are  nearer  the  median  line  (E.  borecdis,  &c.), 
and  when  there  are  any  processes  on  segment  V.  they  are  usually  near  the  middle 
line  (E.  islandicus,  E.  novcezeelandice). 

In  the  group  which  has  segments  V.  and  VI.  united  there  are  usually  only  two 
median  plates.  A  well-defined  third  median  is  rare,  but  there  is  often  an  area  in 
the  triangular  space  behind  the  second  pair,  dotted  exactly  like  the  plates,  but 
without  definite  bounding  lines. 

In  the  group  which  has  V.  and  VI.  separate  there  are  always  three  median  plates, 
although  they  are  often  very  obscurely  separated  from  the  pairs  in  front  of  them. 

In  the  majority  of  species  there  is  a  serrate  fold  of  skin  on  the  fourth  leg.  The 
teeth  or  spines  on  this  fold  vary  from  short  and  blunt  to  slender  and  acute,  and  are 
useful  for  distinguishing  species. 

Near  the  base  of  the  fourth  leg,  on  the  outer  side,  there  is  usually  a  blunt  palp. 
On  the  first  leg  there  is  often  a  longer  or  shorter  sharp  spine.  Rarely  there  are 
little  spines  on  other  legs  (E.  perarmatus). 

The  colour  of  Echiniscus  is  usually  red,  varying  from  pale  pink  to  deep  crimson  or 
scarlet.  A  very  few  species  are  yellow  (E.  mutabilis,  sylvanus,  tessellatus),  green 
(E.  viridis)  or  colourless  (E.  intermedius). 

The  eggs  are  always  smooth,  shortly  oval,  and  are  laid  in  the  cast  skin.  From 
one  to  nine  have  been  seen  in  a  single  skin.  As  many  as  nine  is  quite  exceptional, 
the  usual  number  being  three  or  four. 

Oreella. — Like  Echiniscus  in  every  important  detail  of  structure  except  that  the 
body  is  not  covered  with  plates.  It  is  soft  and  flexible  like  Macrobiotus.  The  only 
trifling  differences  from  Echiniscus  are  that  the  "  Auricle  "  at  the  base  of  seta  a  is 
elongate  and  acute,  and  is  elevated  on  a  large  papilla  which  bears  the  seta  also ; 
and  that  the  anterior  cirri  at  the  mouth  are  replaced  by  narrowly  conical  processes. 

The  generic  forms  of  land  Tardigrada  do  not  seem  to  be  very  numerous. 
Although  work  has  been  done  in  all  regions  of  the  globe  now,  no  new  genus  has 
been  found  since  Diphascon  (Plate,  1888)  till  now. 

Oreella  has  no  eye-spots.     The  eggs  are  unknown. 

Milnesium. — Though  several  species  have  been  described,  their  differences  are 
slight  and  inconstant,  and  only  M.  tardigradum  is  here  admitted.  It  is  a  large 
animal  with  very  wide  gullet  and  elongate  pear-shaped  pharynx,  in  which  there  are 
no  rods  such  as  Macrobiotus  has.  There  are  six  cylindrical  palps  round  the  mouth, 
and  a  pair  farther  back.  A  distinct  genus,  Acrophanes,  of  no  value,  was  separated 
by  Ehrenberg  (5)  apparently  to  receive  a  shrivelled  skin  of  Milnesium. 

The  claws  are  very  different  from  those  of  Macrobiotus.  On  each  foot  there  are 
two  claws,  usually  with  two  or  three,  or  even  four,  branches.  The  three-branched  claw 
appears  to  be  homologous  with  a  pair  of  Macrobiotus  claws,  including  the  supple- 
mentary point.  On  each  foot  there  are  also  two  very  slender,  bristle-like  claws,  each 
with  a  very  fine  supplementary  point. 


88  J.  MURRAY 

The  number  of  points  on  the  branched  claws  has  been  used  to  distinguish  species. 
Some  examples  have  all  these  claws  alike,  and  three-branched.  In  others  they  vary  on 
the  different  legs.  I  find  the  commonest  form  to  have  fewer  points  on  the  front  legs 
and  more  on  the  last.  Thus,  they  will  have  only  one  point  or  two  on  the  front  legs  ; 
two  or  three  on  the  second  and  third  legs,  and  three  on  the  fourth  legs. 

The  colour  in  old  animals  is  a  very  warm  brown.  The  eggs  are  laid  in  the  skin, 
and  are  often  pretty  numerous. 

Macrobiotus. — In  this  genus  the  characters  which  lend  themselves  for  descriptive 
purposes  are  :  the  organs  of  the  mouth  (teeth,  gullet,  and  pharynx) ;  the  claws  ;  the 
skin  ;  the  eyes  ;  the  fat-cells ;  and  the  egg.  The  teeth  are  slender  or  thick,  more  or 
less  curved  or  bent  abruptly,  and  have  a  larger  or  smaller  furea  where  the  bearer 
is  attached,  the  bearer  itself,  though  often  mentioned  in  descriptions,  having  no 
specific  importance.  The  gullet  is  slender  or  wide,  and  at  the  end  in  the  pharynx 
may  have  merely  a  slightly  enlarged  run,  or  may  be  bent  out  into  a  flange- 
more  or  less  wide.  The  pharynx  may  be  nearly  round,  or  somewhat  elongated, 
The  hard  rods  or  nuts  which  surround  the  tube  may  be  two,  three,  or  four  in  each 
row.  The  last  one  in  the  row  is  often  small  and  obscure,  and  is  called  from  its 
shape  the  comma.  There  is  often  no  comma.  The  more  important  rods  (or  nuts 
when  they  are  so  short  that  the  name  "  rod  "  would  be  inappropriate)  are  never  more 
than  three  in  number.  When  there  are  three  they  are  generally  nearly  equal  in 
length :  when  there  are  only  two,  that  nearer  the  gullet  is  longer,  and  often 
shows  obvious  traces  of  the  two  rods  by  the  joining  of  which  it  may  be  supposed  to 
have  originated.  Besides  the  rods  there  are  apophyses  attached  to  the  end  of  the 
gullet.  These  are  not  in  line  with  the  rods,  but  alternate  with  them.  When  they 
are  large,  however,  they  may  readily  be  mistaken  for  rods,  and  even  recent 
descriptions  have  not  always  clearly  distinguished  the  two  structures. 

The  claivs  vary  chiefly  in  their  relative  sizes,  and  in  the  degree  of  union  of  the 
pairs.  They  are  always  united  in  pairs,  if  only  at  the  bases.  Several  types  have 
been  recognised,  but  they  are  connected  by  intermediate  forms  which  are  difficult  to 
classify.  The  hufelandi  type  is  commonest.  The  claws  of  each  pair  are  united  for 
some  way  above  the  base,  usually  for  half  their  length  or  more.  There  is  much 
variation  within  this  type.  Usually  the  claws  of  a  pair  are  unequal,  and  the  larger 
one  has  one  or  two  supplementary  points.  Sometimes  they  are  equal  and  placed  side 
by  side,  but  only  one  has  the  extra  points.  In  some  species  they  are  very  thick,  and 
the  supplementary  point  is  very  strong,  and  the  whole  thing  makes  a  distinct 
approach  to  the  branched  claw  of  Milnesium. 

The  dispar  type  (or  macronyx  type)  has  the  claws  of  each  pair  very  unequal,  the 
larger  claw  strongly  curved  and  bearing  a  supplementary  point,  the  smaller  claw  like 
a  little  barb  from  the  base  of  the  larger  one.  The  two  pairs  are  similar,  and  on  the 
last  legs  the  lesser  claw  is  relatively  larger. 

The   Diphascon   type    (found   throughout   the    genus    Diwhascon,    and   in    M. 


TARDIGRADA  89 

oberhciuseri  and  a  few  other  Macrobioti)  has  the  two  pairs  dissimilar.  One  pair  has 
two  claws,  of  which  one  is  longer,  united  at  the  base  ;  the  other  pair  has  one  very 
long  claw  (bristle-like  in  M.  oberhanaeri),  which  is  loosely  attached  to  the  middle  of 
the  back  of  a  smaller  claw. 

The  echinogenitus  type  has  two  similar  pairs  of  claws  which  are  united  at  the  base 
only.  The  claws  of  each  pair  are  equal  or  unequal.  This  type  is  not  so  distinct  from 
the  hufelandi  type  as  it  seems,  and  is  connected  with  it  by  a  series  of  forms 
having  the  claws  united  more  or  less  above  the  base.*  The  typical  form  has  the 
claws  very  widely  divergent.  Forms  having  the  pairs  unequal  lead  to  the 
Diphascon  type. 

The  skin  varies  in  texture,  &c.  It  may  be  smooth  and  hyaline,  papillose,  or 
more  or  less  pigmented.  Often  the  young  are  transparent  and  colourless,  and  the  older 
ones  increasingly  pigmented.  The  pigment  is  rarely  of  specific  value,  as  most  of  the 
large  old  animals  become  brown,  but  in  M.  oberhciuseri  it  is  characteristic.  A  few'species 
are  papillose  (M.  annulatus,  M.  nodosus,  &c.),  and  a  few  bear  processes  on  the  skin 
(M.  ornatus,  M.  tuberculatus,  M.  sattleri,  M.  papillifer,  and  sometimes  M.  dispar). 

The  eyes  are  of  doubtful  specific  value.  They  are  usually  dark  brown  or  black, 
occasionally  red.  Though  it  is  believed  that  the  presence  or  absence  of  eye-spots  is 
characteristic  of  each  species,  there  is  enough  variation  to  make  the  character 
unreliable.  It  should,  however,  always  be  noted  in  descriptions. 

The  fat-cells  are  generally  of  no  specific  importance.  In  a  few  species  (M. 
coronifer,  M.  islandicus,  M.  rubens,  M.  occidentalis,  &c.)  they  have  a  characteristic 
colour,  red,  yellow,  orange,  or  brown. 

The  egg  varies  greatly.  It  is  either  smooth  or  covered  with  processes  which  are 
characteristic  for  each  species.  The  smooth  eggs  are  never  quite  spherical,  but 
shortly  oval,  rarely  narrowly  oval.  They  are  left  in  the  skin  at  the  moult.  The 
ornamented  eggs  are  spherical,  with  a  very  few  exceptions  (M.  coronifer,  M.  pullari, 
&c.).  The  form  of  the  processes  should  be  noted,  the  distance  (if  any)  separating 
them,  and  the  nature  of  the  egg-shell  where  free  from  processes.  In  a  number  of 
forms  the  shell  is  areolate.  It  is  thick,  and  composed  of  two  layers,  the  space 
between  which  is  divided  into  a  number  of  equal  chambers,  showing  on  the  surface 
as  hexagons.  From  some  of  these  the  processes  spring,  at  equal  distances  apart. 
The  turgidity  of  the  processes  destroys  the  regularity  of  the  hexagons,  and  additional 
septa  in  the  chambers  give  rise  to  a  variety  of  patterns  in  the  "  areolation." 

The  spiny  eggs  are  laid  free,  not  enclosed  in  the  cast  skin.  An  intermediate  type 
of  egg  has  the  shell  ornamented  with  rods,  which  are  embedded  in  a  hyaline  substance, 
so  that  the  surface  is  even  (M.  arcticus,  &c.).  In  M.  hastatus  these  rods  have  tops 
shaped  like  fleurs-de-lis,  which  project  above  the  general  surface. 

*  Prof.  Richters  informs  me,  in  a  recent  letter,  that  he  has  ascertained  that  M.  echinogenitus  and  related 
species  have  the  claws  separate,  but  close  together,  in  embryos  in  the  egg,  and  that  they  join  afterwards. 
The  adult  M.  echinogenitus  has  claws  of  the  hufelandi  type,  not  V-shaped. 

BRIT.  ANTARCT.  BXPED.   1907-9.      VOL.  I.  N 


90  J.  MURRAY 

Many  species  of  Macrobiotus  cannot  be  distinguished  with  certainty  unless  the 
egg  is  seen.  The  mere  presence  of  eggs  beside  the  adults  is  of  no  use,  although  there 
may  be  a  presumptive  relationship  in  such  cases.  The  relation  must  be  demonstrated, 
and  this  can  be  done  in  two  ways :  first,  by  finding  in  an  egg  the  young  so  far 
advanced  that  the  claws  and  pharynx  can  be  recognised ;  second,  by  finding,  in  the 
adult,  eggs  so  far  advanced  as  to  show  the  characteristic  processes.  The  first  way  is 
the  more  generally  useful.  The  second  may  be  of  greater  use  than  the  beginner 
would  suspect.  The  eggs  are  soft  till  they  are  almost  ready  for  laying,  and  the 
processes,  when  formed,  are  still  so  soft  that  they  are  squeezed  flat  against  the  shell 
by  the  enclosing  membrane.  If  the  membrane  can  be  torn,  and  the  eggs  released,  the 
processes  often  stand  up  and  can  be  recognised. 

All  species  of  Macrobiotus,  and  probably  other  water-bears,  may  be  found  in  what 
is  called  the  "  simplex  "  state.  They  are  then  devoid  of  teeth,  of  rods  in  the  pharynx, 
sometimes  of  all  the  mouth  parts.  Plate  founded  the  genus  Doyeria  on  an  animal  in 
this  condition.  The  simplex  state  is  now  explained  as  a  part  of  the  moult,  though 
it  does  not  occur  simultaneously  with  the  casting  of  the  skin.  Identification  of  an 
animal  in  the  simplex  condition  is  difficult,  as  one  of  the  most  important  characters 
is  lacking. 

Many  water-bears,  perhaps  all,  encyst  themselves.  This  appears  to  be  a  sort  of 
hibernation,  in  which  a  quiescent  period  is  passed  in  a  special  protective  case.  Some 
species,  when  encysted,  undergo  a  simplification  going  far  beyond  the  ordinary 
"  simplex,"  for  they  lose  all  recognisable  organs,  teeth,  pharynx,  and  claws,  and 
afterwards  acquire  them  anew. 

Diphascon. — The  genus  differs  from  Macrobiotus  solely  in  having  the  gullet 
elongated  between  the  teeth  and  the  pharynx.  As  specimens  of  Macrobiotus  are 
sometimes  found  which  have  the  gullet  elongated,  the  value  of  the  genus  is  very 
slight.  Nevertheless,  I  believe  Diphascon  to  be  a  natural  group.  All  the  species 
have  claws  of  one  type,  known  as  the  Dipliascon  type,  which  is  also  found,  but  rarely, 
in  Macrobiotus.  Many  of  the  species  have  the  pharynx  very  narrow,  but  others 
have  it  quite  round.  Most  of  the  known  species  have  no  eye-spots. 

In  distinguishing  species  the  chief  points  to  attend  to  are  the  diameter  of  the 
gullet,  which  varies  extremely,  the  proportions  of  the  pharynx,  and  the  number  and 
sizes  of  the  rods  or  nuts  in  it. 

In  outward  form  there  is  little  variety.  All  are  very  similar  except  D.  bnllatum, 
which  is  short,  nodose,  and  papillose,  and  D.  augustatum,  which  has  a  heavy  body, 
but  tapers  to  a  very  narrow  head. 

As  a  rule  the  animals  of  the  genus  are  small,  but  some  very  large  forms  inhabit 
the  arctic  regions. 

The  eggs  are  smooth,  and  are  laid  in  the  cast  skin,  as  in  Echiniscus  and  a  large 
section  of  Macrobiotus, 


TARDIGRADA  91 


NOMENCLATURE 

The  nomenclature  of  the  Tardigrada  is  in  need  of  revision.  The  validity  of  many 
of  the  accepted  names,  generic  and  specific,  may  be  questioned,  and  some  of  them 
will  certainly  not  hold.  Professor  Hay  (6)  has  suggested  a  number  of  corrections 
which  must  be  made.  He  has  shown  that  the  water-bears  have  no  right  to  bear  the 
name  Tardigrada,  which  is  preoccupied  (for  a  suborder  of  Edentata). 

The  recognition  by  the  earlier  naturalists  of  species  having  two,  three,  and  four 
claws  may  be  explained  as  arising  from  different  interpretations  of  the  claws  of 
Macrobiotus  and  Milnesium.  Macrobiotun  may  be  said  to  have  two  forked  claws  on 
each  foot,  or  to  have  four  claws  united  in  pairs,  just  as  you  please.  It  is  curious 
that  so  many  good  naturalists  have  recorded  a  water-bear  with  three  claws,  which 
nobody  finds  nowadays. 

Milnesium  is  commonly  supposed  to  be  the  same  as  Schrank's  Arctiscon,  in  which 
case  the  earlier  name  must  be  used,  unless  it  can  be  shown  to  be  preoccupied.  If 
Schultze's  Macrobiotus  hufelandii  is  accepted  as  the  common  water-bear,  and  the 
same  as  Miiller's  Acarus  ursellus,  Miiller's  specific  name  should  be  used  for  it.  All 
these  points  would  require  a  very  careful  revision  of  the  whole  literature  of  the 
group,  and  a  comparison  of  all  the  early  descriptions  and  figures. 

The  revision  is  so  important  that  it  should  be  made  in  a  work  of  monographic 
character,  or  at  any  rate  should  comprehend  the  whole  group.  While,  therefore,  in 
perfect  agreement  with  Professor  Hay  as  to  the  necessary  changes,  I  shall  in  this 
paper  continue  to  use  the  familiar  names.  By  this  means  the  present  report  will  be 
kept  in  line  with  a  whole  series  of  others  dealing  with  the  water-bears  of  various 
countries  under  the  name  "  Tardigrada."  This  report  has  been  announced  in  the 
earlier  numbers  of  this  publication  under  that  title. 

When  changing  the  name  it  is  desirable  that  the  change  should  be  final,  if  that 
be  possible.  It  would  require  a  careful  examination  of  all  writings  on  the  subject 
prior  to  1835  to  satisfy  ourselves  that  Perty's  name  Xenomorphidce  (22)  [which 
Professor  Hay  shows  to  have  precedence  of  Schultze's  Arctiscoida  (44)  ]  is  really  the 
earliest  applied  to  the  water-bears  as  a  family. 

The  name  Xenomorphidce  is  a  family  name,  and  the  group  of  the  water-bears 
must  be  considered  as  of  more  than  family  value.  Schultze's  name  Arctiscoida, 
although  proposed  as  a  family  name,  might  be  adopted  as  an  ordinal  name  for  the 
group,  and  Xenomorpkida  for  the  only  family  as  yet  recognised. 

ON  THE  VALUE  OF  SPECIES  OF  TARDIGRADA. 

In  the  course  of  this  Expedition  a  great  many  diverse  forms  of  Tardigrada  were 
collected  or  observed.  Some  of  these  are  described  in  the  following  papers  as  species, 


92  J.   MURRAY 

one  even  as  of  generic  rank.  Had  the  early  practice  been  followed,  whereby  species 
of  the  genus  Echiniscus  were  supposed  to  be  sufficiently  characterised  if  they  differed 
by  one  pair  of  spines  or  setoe  from  the  related  species,  or  if  even  a  seta  were  replaced 
by  a  spine  or  vice  versa,  a  hoat  of  new  species  would  have  been  added.  I  prefer  a 
definition  of  species  in  that  genus  which  excludes  such  forms,  and  requires  species  to 
show  peculiarities  in  other  points  of  structure  than  the  spines  (such  as  claws,  or  plates, 
or  texture),  or  to  have  the  spinous  armature  conspicuously  different  from  that  of  the 
nearest  relatives. 

No  definition  of  species  can  be  made  which  will  be  universally  applicable.  In 
some  groups  it  is  necessary  to  distinguish  species  by  characters  so  slight  that  they 
would  not  be  admitted  in  other  groups.  Species  corresponds  to  no  entity  in  Nature — 
it  is  a  human  convenience.  We  may  seek  to  distinguish  by  it  such  races  of  any 
organism  which  have  through  some  degree  of  isolation  and  the  tendency  to  vary 
(under  influences  of  which  we  are  profoundly  ignorant)  acquired  more  or  less  distinct 
marks  by  which  they  may  be  distinguished  from  the  related  races  of  the  same  stock, 
and  which  we  believe  to  be  constant  (in  the  sense  that  they  continually  recur,  and 
that  we  believe  the  recurrence  to  indicate  community  of  origin).  The  amount  of 
distinctness  considered  necessary  to  constitute  specific  value  gives  an  opportunity  for 
the  personal  element  in  naturalists  to  assert  itself,  and  has,  incidentally,  given  occasion 
for  much  disputation. 

Every  species  throws  some  light  on  the  biological  history  of  the  world,  and  so  we 
want  to  discover  them  all.  Such  cheap  species  as  the  ardent  discoverer  could  so 
easily  manufacture  out  of  the  myriad  forms  of  Echiniscus  would  yield  the  minimum 
of  light  on  biological  problems.  In  so  far  as  they  are  permanent,  they  are  only 
fortuitous  side  eddies  in  the  stream  of  evolution,  if  such  a  term  can  be  per- 
mitted a  popular  application  in  science.  I  mean  that  the  species  having  two 
spines  and  those  having  three,  and  not  otherwise  differing,  are  not  instances  of 
essential  adaptation  to  the  conditions  of  life  of  the  animals,  but  that  one  is  as 
good  as  the  other.  Further,  the  probability  is  that  many  of  these  slight  forms  are 
really  not  species  in  even  the  widest  acceptation  of  the  term,  but  merely  individual 
peculiarities. 

Among  Echinisci  there  are  forms  known,  such  as  E.  granulatus  and  E.  quadri- 
spinosus,  var.  cribrosus.  '[see  Murray  (12)  and  (18)]  which  possess  several  good  charac- 
teristics, besides  their  distinctive  spines.  In  colonies  of  such  species,  which  may  be 
confidently  identified  by  the  concurrence  of  many  characters,  it  continually  happens 
that  individuals  occur  in  which  one  or  more  of  the  customary  spines  is  lacking. 
That  it  is  frequently  only  one  spine  of  a  pair  which  is  absent  indicates  that  these  are 
:nly  errors  or  peculiarities  in  the  development  of  the  individual.  Yet  by  the  accepted 
practice  one  pair  of  spines  or  seta)  makes  a  species. 

There  is  next  to  be  considered  the  case  where  these  slight  peculiarities  seem  to  be 
constant.  Admittedly  when  example  after  example  turns  up,  having  all  the  trifling 


TARDIGRADA  93 

features  identical,  the  idea  of  the  value  of  the  characters  grows.  This  happens  most 
frequently  in  colonies  got  at  one  place  and  time.  Now  a  whole  brood,  or  even  a 
whole  colony,  may  possess  some  little  peculiarity  which  would  not  be  permanent  in  a 
race  of  animals  having  the  sexes  distinct,  and  where  cross-fertilisation  may  occur. 
The  case  of  the  Bdelloid  liotifera,  which  will  be  discussed  in  a  subsequent  paper,  is 
very  different,  as  only  females  are  known.  The  reproduction  being  parthenogenetic 
there  seems  to  be  no  check  to  the  multiplication  «f  slightly  marked  species,  and  the 
study  of  certain  groups  of  forms  bears  this  out. 

The  group  of  Tardigrada  has  hitherto  been  fortunate  in  that  it  has  not  attracted 
the  attention  of  any  too-enthusiastic  discoverer  of  species.  Professor  Richters  has 
shown  a  commendable  reserve  in  simply  describing  and  figuring  those  doubtful 
Echinisci,  without  giving  them  names. 

This  appeal's  to  be  the  right  course  to  take,  in  the  present  state  of  our  knowledge, 
and  yet  these  unnamed  forms  are  a  trouble  to  the  student.  There  is  nothing  to  get 
hold  of,  and  the  memory  recognises  them  not — even  reference  to  them  is  laborious. 
Since  species  are  a  human  convenience  one  is  sometimes  tempted  to  wonder  whether 
the  convenience  of  naturalists  is  better  served  by  describing  unnamed  forms  than  by 
lightly  naming  them  in  the  good  old  way,  with,  however,  its  accompaniment  of 
burdening  the  synonymy  when  we  come  to  know  better. 

In  the  genus  Macrobiotus  the  species  difficulty  takes  another  form.  There  is  little 
external  variability.  As  few  of  the  species  have  superficial  processes  there  is  little 
difficulty  of  the  sort  we  have  in  Echiniscus. 

Variability  is  seen  in  the  coloration — the  animal  may  be  colourless  when  young, 
and  highly  pigmented  when  old ;  in  the  claws — the  amount  of  union  of  the  pairs 
may  vary  considerably ;  in  the  rods  of  the  pharynx — the  first  rod,  next  the  gullet, 
may  be  a  long  one,  or  divided  into  two  shorter  ones,  and  the  "  comma  "  may  be 
present  or  absent ;  in  the  eyes,  which  may  be  present  or  absent.  Some  of  these 
differences  are  known  to  be  dependent  upon  age.  The  limits  and  value  of  others  are 
not  definitely  known. 

Two  forms  of  Macrobiotus  may  differ  in  two  of  the  most  important  characters  used 
in  discriminating  species  (claws  and  pharynx  for  example),  yet  the  range  of  variation 
of  each  of  these  characters,  taken  separately,  is  wide  enough  to  embrace  both  forms. 
Whether  it  is  likely  that  two  or  more  characters  would  vary  simultaneously,  to  the 
extreme  extent,  in  animals  which  are  of  the  same  species,  we  cannot  tell.  If  it  were 
so  specific  distinctions  in  the  genus  would  to  a  large  extent  break  down,  and  we  would 
have  only  a  few  species,  representing  the  principal  types  of  claws  recognised 
(hufolandi,  oberhiiusem,  dispar),  or  of  eggs  (the  hufelandi  type,  the  hastatus  type, 
and  the  smooth  eggs). 

Another  difficulty  with  Macrobiotus  is  that  series  of  species  agree  so  closely  in  all 
the  characters  of  the  adult  that  they  cannot  be  distinguished  with  certainty,  and  it  is 
necessary  to  find  the  egg  before  a  species  can  be  identified.  These  series  of  closely 


94  J.  MURRAY 

related  species  only  occur  in  tliu  groups  which  lay  spiny  eggs,  or  at  least  the  eggs 
are  only  of  value  in  that  group. 

Now  the  eggs  do  not  show  the  characteristic  processes  while  they  are  in  the  body 
of  the  parent,  and  once  they  have  been  deposited  there  is  nothing  to  indicate 
their  relation  to  one  animal  or  another.  The  actual  act  of  deposition  can  rarely  be 
observed. 

While  the  eggs  are  still  soft  and  their  shape  readily  distorted  by  the 
pressure  of  the  enclosing  membrane,  and  of  adjacent  eggs,  the  processes  are  often 
already  formed,  and  if  the  membrane  be  ruptured,  the  external  pressure  being 
removed,  the  turgidity  of  the  egg  causes  it  to  assume  its  proper  shape,  and  the 
processes  then  stand  out.  The  opportunities  for  completing  an  identification  in  this 
way  must  be  casual  and  uncertain,  and  it  is  oftener  possible  to  find  an  egg  in  which 
the  young  is  so  well  grown  that  it  shows  the  distinctive  characters  of  the  adult. 

While  many  species  are  only  distinguishable  by  their  eggs,  the  converse  occurs. 
Quite  distinct  species  have  eggs  exactly  similar,  or  so  nearly  alike  that  identification 
cannot  be  certain. 

These  facts  show  the  necessity  there  is  for  making  an  exhaustive  study  of  each 
species  whenever  the  opportunity  offers,  and  the  danger  there  is  that  species  will  be 
multiplied  to  no  good  purpose,  if  such  study  is  neglected. 

Bibliography. — Throughout  the  text  references  to  the  bibliographical  list  are 
made  in  heavy  type  enclosed  in  brackets. 

Tables  of  Species. — In  the  lists  of  species  given  to  illustrate  distribution  there 
was  some  difficulty  in  presenting  the  facts  concisely.  To  classify  the  records  of 
Tardigrada  broadly  the  world  was  divided  into  nine  great  regions,  one  for  each  of 
the  five  continents,  for  Australasia,  and  for  the  Antarctic  and  Arctic  Regions.  As 
regards  these  eight  divisions  the  classification  is  obvious  and  natural  enough.  The 
ninth  division  (Oceanic  Islands)  was  introduced  to  receive  a  lot  of  scattered  records, 
not  otherwise  provided  for.  This  is  not  satisfactory,  as  the  islands  are  so  scattered. 
Those  which  lie  near  continents  are  included  with  them,  the  others  are  all  slumped 
together.  It  is  a  makeshift  which  may  serve  for  the  moment.  Greater  accuracy  is 
not  called  for  till  a  more  comprehensive  survey  of  the  distribution  of  all  the  Tardi- 
grada is  attempted. 

I  have  given  all  the  records  I  could  find,  but  many  may  have  been  overlooked. 
Some  discrepancies  may  be  found  between  the  number  of  species  for  any  one  region 
given  in  different  tables.  This  is  due  to  the  fact  that  many  records  were  added  from 
time  to  time  after  the  tables  were  first  compiled,  and  it  could  hardly  be  hoped  that 
no  errors  would  occur  in  collating  so  many  tables. 

In  dealing  with  each  country  the  local  distribution  is  treated  with  more  detail, 
and  in  addition  to  the  nine  main  divisions  of  the  earth's  surface  there  may  be  given  a 
column  for  such  adjacent  regions  as  may  be  supposed  likely  to  show  some  relation- 
ship. Thus  with  the  Antarctic  a  sub-Antarctic  area  is  distinguished. 


ANTARCTIC  TAEDIGRADA 


On  collecting  Antarctic  Tardigrada. — The  methods  employed  in  collecting  the 
fresh-water  organisms  in  general  have  been  detailed  in  Part  I.  of  this  volume,  and 
need  not  be  repeated  here.  The  water-bears  were  collected  among  the  vegetation  in 
the  lakes,  and  also  among  moss.  They  came  next  in  importance  after  the  Rotifers, 
but  not  on  account  of  being  numerous  in  species.  They  were  conspicuous  in  the 
lakes  from  the  great  abundance  of  one  species  (Macrobiotus  arcticus),  which  occurred 
in  numbers  comparable  with  those  of  the  two  Bdelloid  Rotifers,  Philodina  gregarict 
and  Adineta  grandis. 

Two  species  were  got  in  the  lakes.  The  same  two  occurred  among  moss,  with 
two  others. 

Priestley  collected  moss  on  the  west  side  of  Macmurdo  Sound,  at  the  Stranded 
Moraines.  It  contained  three  species,  one  of  which  was  not  known  at  Cape  Royds 
(M.  polaris),  and  one  species  found  on  Ross  Island  (M.  oberhtiuseri)  did  not  occur  at 
the  Stranded  Moraines. 

All  the  Tardigrada  were  collected  between  77°30'  and  78°S.lat.  No  Tardigrada  were 
found  among  the  mosses  collected  by  Professor  David  about  2  degrees  farther  north. 

Summary  of  previous  knoivledge. — The  water-bears  are  better  known  than  any 
other  group  of  Antarctic  fresh-water  animals.  Half  a  dozen  papers  on  the  subject 
have  appeared,  most  of  them  by  Professor  Richters.  The  first  mention  I  can  find  of 
an  Antarctic  Tardigrade  is  by  Richters,  who  in  1904  (31),  in  his  preliminary  report 
on  the  Antarctic  Moss  Fauna,  described  a  species  (Macrobiotus  antarcticus)  found  by 
the  German  "  Gauss  "  Expedition  on  the  Gaussberg,  a  hill  on  the  Antarctic  continent, 
and  just  within  the  Antarctic  Circle.  This  was  the  only  truly  Antarctic  species 
recorded  in  that  paper,  the  other  ten  species  being  from  islands  in  the  southern  ocean. 

In  1906  there  appeared  the  report  on  the  Tardigrada  collected  in  the  South 
Orkneys  by  Bruce's  Scottish  Expedition  [Murray  (15)].  These  islands  are  truly  polar 
in  climate,  although  lying  outside  the  Antarctic  Circle  and  distant  from  the  continent. 
Fifteen  distinct  species  were  found,  but  owing  to  the  condition  of  the  specimens  it  was 
only  possible  to  name  six  of  them,  three  of  which  were  known  and  three  were  new. 

Richters'  full  report  on  the  Tardigrada  of  the  Gauss  Expedition  appeared  in  1907 
(35).  It  made  no  addition  to  the  list  of  Antarctic  species,  though  it  extended  the 
list  of  species  known  from  the  islands  of  the  southern  ocean  to  seventeen. 

95 


96  J.  MURRAY 

In  1907  (36)  Richters  published  also  a  summary  of  all  that  was  known  of  Ant- 
arctic Tardigrada,  including  the  results  of  the  work  of  the  German,  Scottish,  and 
Swedish  Expeditions  (although  the  report  on  the  last  had  not  then  appeared).  He 
gives  a  list  of  twenty-three  species  recognised,  and  mentions  fifteen  others  which  had 
been  imperfectly  observed,  but  he  does  not  in  that  paper  discriminate  between  the 
Antarctic  and  the  sub- Antarctic  species. 

The  Tardigrada  of  the  Swedish  Expedition  were  described  by  Richters  in  1908  (38). 
In  a  table  at  the  end  of  this  paper  he  enumerates  ten  species  from  the  Antarctic 
Region  proper.  Adding  one  species  collected  by  the  Scottish  Expedition  and  one  by 
the  German,  we  have  a  total  of  twelve  Antarctic  species  recognised  and  named, 
besides  many  insufficiently  studied. 

Lastly,  in  1909  (40),  in  a  short  note  in  the  Zoologischen  Anzeiger,  Richters 
noted  three  species  found  in  moss  collected  by  the  National  Antarctic  Expedition, 
under  Captain  Scott,  in  S.  Victoria  Land.  Only  one  of  these  was  sufficiently  studied, 
\  and  was  found  to  be  a  new  species,  and  described  as  Macrobiotus  meridionalis. 

There  were  thus  thirteen  species  recorded  for  the  Antarctic.  We  collected  only 
four  species,  but  ,of  these  three  were  new  to  the  Antarctic  and  one  was  new  to 
science. 

The  full  list  of  the  Antarctic  species,  with  their  relation  to  sub- Antarctic  and 
other  regions,  will  be  given  in  tabular  form  at  the  end  of  this  paper. 


LIST  OF  SPECIES 

Macrobiotus  arcticus,  Murray. 
M.  oberhauseri,  Doy6re. 
M.  polaris,  sp.n.,  Murray. 
Diphascon  alpmum,  Murray. 
Diphascon  or  Macrobiotus^). 


NOTES  ON  THE  SPECIES 

GENUS — Macrobiotus,  Schultze  (42) 

Macrobiotus  arcticus,  Murray  (19)  (Plate  XIV.  Figs.  2a—2f) 

Specific  characters. — Large  :  young  hyaline,  adult  pigmented.  Teeth  strongly 
curved ;  gullet  narrow  ;  pharynx  shortly  oval,  with  two  short  rods,  the  second 
shorter,  and  no  comma.  Claws  large,  of  the  Diphascon  type,  one  pair  with  nearly 
equal  claws,  united  for  some  way  above  the  base,  the  other  pair  with  a  very  long 
claw  springing  from  the  back  of  a  shorter  thick  one.  Egg  oval  or  round,  thick- 
shelled,  studded  with  short  rods  which  are  embedded  in  a  hyaline  substance.  Dark 
eyes. 


ANTARCTIC  TARDIGRADA  97 

As  M.  arcticus  was  originally  described  from  an  egg  containing  the  young  ready 
to  hatch,  and  the  adult  had  never  been  seen,  it  is  here  redescribed  from  adult 
examples.  The  principal  differences  are  that  the  rods  in  the  pharynx  are  longer  in 
the  adult  (they  are  nearly  round  or  quadrate  in  the  young),  and  that  it  acquires  a 
brown  pigment  like  that  of  M.  hnjelandii. 

Detailed  description. — Length  500  /u.  and  upwards.  The  young  is  perfectly 
hyaline,  and  has  the  long  claws  as  slender  and  bristle-like  as  those  of  M.  oberhciuseri. 
The  long  claws  become  a  little  thicker  in  the  adult.  They  are  strongly  curved 
towards  the  tip,  which  is  not  the  case  with  oberhauseri, 

The  gullet  is  narrow,  and  is  expanded  at  the  end  in  the  pharynx  into  a  prominent 
thickened  flange.  In  the  adult  the  rod  nearest  the  gullet  is  between  three  and  four 
times  as  long  as  broad— the  second  rod  is  a  little  shorter,  three  times  as  long  as 
broad,  or  rather  less  than  that. 

The  stomach  is  voluminous :  about  a  dozen  of  its  component  cells  are  visible  in 
dorsal  view.  They  are  filled  with  large  granules  of  a  brownish  colour,  and  there  are 
deeper  brown  patches.  About  the  middle  of  August  many  were  observed  which  had 
the  stomach  green  or  deep  blue.  Macrobiotus  with  blue  stomach  has  been  noticed 
in  Scottish  lochs  and  in  the  Arctic. 

Four  unripe  eggs  have  been  seen  in  the  body  at  once.  The  eggs  are  spherical  or 
very  shortly  oval,  96  p.  in  diameter.  The  thickness  of  the  shell  is  about  5  or  6  n,  but 
varies  considerably.  The  eggs  often  appear  to  be  viscous,  and  have  much  adherent 
material :  some  are  quite  clean  and  don't  seem  viscous.  It  may  be  that  they  are 
viscous  when  first  laid,  and  become  hard  afterwards. 

Habitat. — In  nearly  all  the  lakes  about  Cape  Royds  and  Cape  Barne,  extremely 
abundant. 

It  was  the  first  water-bear  which  we  found.  On  March  15  we  obtained  it,  and 
also  eggs,  among  dried  vegetation  on  the  ground.  This  had  doubtless  originated  in 
a  lake.  It  was  most  abundant  in  Coast  Lake,  where  we  could  always  get  great 
quantities. 

In  Blue  Lake  on  July  17  it  was  found  alive  at  the  bottom,  on  a  thin  pellicle  of 
vegetation  under  1 5  feet  of  ice. 

In  the  experiments  made  to  test  the  vitality  of  rotifers,  many  water-bears  of  this 
species  were  present  with  the  rotifers.  They  endured  equally  well  exposure  to  the 
greatest  Antarctic  cold,  and  repeated  freezing  and  thawing,  at  weekly  intervals,  for 
months.  They  were  not  subjected  to  heat. 

After  being  kept  dry  for  a  year,  and  conveyed  on  a  voyage  through  the  Tropics  ' 
to  England,  no  adult  animals  revived,  but  the  eggs  retained  their  vitality  and  some     jx<* 
hatched    out,    and   were    exhibited    at    the    Quekett    Microscopical    Club    by    Mr.      >• 
Scourfield. 

M.  arcticus  appeared  to  be  a  thorough  pond-dweller,  and  was  never  found  among 
mosses  at  Cape  Royds.  Nevertheless,  in  mosses  which  Priestley  brought  from  the 

BEIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.   1907-9.       VOL    I  O 


98  J.  MURRAY 

Stranded  Moraines,  on  the  west  side  of  Macmurdo  Sound,  they  were  plentiful,  and 
there  were  many  eggs. 

These  eggs  differ  from  those  got  in  the  lakes,  but  not  enough  to  cause  us  to 
regard  it  as  a  distinct  species.  They  are  smaller  and  much  thinner-shelled.  The 
shell  is  so  thin  that  the  rods  which  traverse  it  are  scarcely  longer  than  broad.  They 
do  not  seem  viscous.  The  animal  does  not  differ  at  all.  The  thinner-shelled  eggs 
may  be  summer  eggs. 

The  distribution  of  M.  arcticus  is  peculiar.  As  far  as  our  meagre  knowledge 
goes  it  is  confined  to  the  polar  regions,  but  an  egg  of  the  thin-shelled  form  has  been 
got  in  a  Scottish  loch,  and  a  similar  egg,  but  smaller,  in  tropical  Africa.  In  various 
countries  visited  on  the  homeward  voyage  (New  Zealand,  Australia,  Canada)  an 
animal  was  found  which  is  almost  certainly  this  species,  as  it  has  all  the  characters 
of  the  adult,  but  as  no  eggs  were  found  there  is  a  certain  doubt  about  the 
identification. 

M.  arcticus  has  only  one  near  relative,  M.  hastatus,  Murray  (18),  an  inhabitant  of 
peat-bogs.  Several  Macrobioti  are  now  known  which  have  claws  of  the  Diphascon 
type,  but  only  these  two  species  have  the  peculiar  eggs,  studded  with  rods. 

Macrobiotus  polaris,  sp.  n.  (Plate  XIV.  Figs,   lo-le) 

Specific  characters.— Large,  hyaline,  or  old  examples  somewhat  pigmented. 
Gullet  of  intermediate  width  :  teeth  curved  :  pharynx  shortly  oval,  with  apophysis, 
and  three  short  rods  and  comma  in  each  row.  Claws  slender,  of  hufelandi  type, 
very  unequal,  and  united  less  than  half-way.  Eggs  spherical :  processes  from 
polygonal  bases,  varying  from  round  to  acuminate,  separated  by  polygons  of  equal 
size  to  their  bases.  Dark  eyes. 

Detailed  description. — Length,  up  to  800  /x-  The  egg  measures  75  M  in  diameter, 
exclusive  of  the  processes,  and  about  85  M  over  the  rounded  processes,  or  95  M  over 
the  pointed  ones.  A  young  one  squeezed  out  of  an  egg  was  250  /JL  in  length,  which 
is  a  very  large  animal  to  come  from  such  a  small  egg,  but  it  may  have  been  slightly 
elongated  by  pressure.  The  animal  is  somewhat  narrow  and  elongated.  The  gullet 
is  about  4  n  wide,  with  parallel  sides,  and  bent  out  to  form  a  narrow  flange  at  the 
end  in  the  pharynx.  The  pharynx  measures  36  M  by  30  M-  The  three  rods  are  of 
nearly  equal  length  and  are  rounded  at  the  ends.  They  vary  in  length,  according 
to  age,  from  1^  to  2|-  times  as  long  as  broad.  The  stomach  is  narrowed  at  both 
ends,  and  consists  of  numerous  cells,  about  twenty  being  in  view  at  one  time.  The 
fat-cells  are  small,  5  or  6  M  in  diameter.  The  body-fluid  in  old  animals  is  pale 
yellow,  the  stomach  sienna-brown. 

The  claws  are  unusually  slender  for  a  large  animal  of  the  hufelandi  group.  The 
lesser  claw  of  each  pair  is  little  more  than  half  as  long  as  the  larger  one.  Only  one 
supplementary  point  could  be  seen  on  the  long  claw. 


ANTARCTIC  TARDIGRADA  99 

The  egg  is  extremely  variable.  It  is  one  of  the  "areolate"  type  (see  M. 
areolatus,  p.  167).  The  shell  appears  to  be  double,  and  the  enclosed  space  is 
divided  into  a  number  of  equal  cells  or  chambers  by  septa  which  appear  on  the 
surface  as  a  hexagonal  reticulation.  From  certain  hexagons,  at  equal  distances 
apart,  the  processes  spring.  They  are  separated  by  one  hexagon.  They  vary 
greatly  in  form.  Some  are  rounded  at  the  top  and  appear  as  semicircles  in  optical 
section  :  others  are  conical  and  acute  :  others  again  acuminate,  with  slender  points. 
The  turgidity  of  the  processes  causes  pressure  upon  the  surrounding  hexagons,  and 
thus  interferes  with  the  regularity  of  the  reticulation.  Sometimes  the  processes 
appear  wrinkled  or  shrunken  at  their  bases,  when  they  may  become  smaller  than  the 
intervening  polygons.  . 

Habitat. — Among  moss  collected  by  R.  E.  Priestley  at  the  Stranded  Moraines  on 
the  west  side  of  Macmurdo  Sound,  very  abundant,  eggs  also  numerous. 

After  being  dry  for  more  than  a  year,  several  adults  were  found  alive  when  the 
moss  was  moistened  on  February  15, 1910.  Some  eggs  were  hatched,  thus  completing 
the  life- history  of  the  animal. 

M.  polovris  has  affinities  with  a  great  many  species  forming  what  may  be  called 
the  hufdandi  group.  Most  of  the  species  are  characterised  by  eggs  having  very 
distinctive  characters,  but  it  must  be  admitted  that  several  of  them  could  not  be 
recognised  with  certainty,  unless  the  egg  were  found,  and  its  relation  to  the  animal 
demonstrated  by  hatching  or  otherwise.  It  is  not  one  of  the  species  nearest  to 
M.  hufelandii,  which  have  very  wide  gullets.  It  is  only  necessary  here  to  point  out 
the  characters  in  which  it  differs  from  those  species  which  have  somewhat  similar  eggs. 

The  nearest  relative  is  perhaps  M.  ineridionalis ,  Richters  (40),  with  which  I  at 
first  identified  it.  Professor  Eichters'  figure  does  not  give  all  the  details  necessary 
to  separate  the  species,  but  he  informs  me  in  a  letter  that  the  processes  of  the  egg 
are  hemispheres  with  a  small  discoid  projection  on  top,  and  that  the  surface  is  not 
reticulate  in  the  manner  described  above.  This  form  of  egg  I  know  as  occurring  on 
Scottish  mountains,  and  it  is  quite  different  from  M.  polaris. 

M.  echinogenitus  and  M.  areolatus  have  the  claws  joined  near  the  base  only  :  the 
former  has  not  a  reticulate  shell,  and  the  latter  has  a  much  larger  egg  and  no  comma 
in  the  pharynx. 

M.  montanus  (nee  p.  116)  has  the  processes  hemispherical,  almost  touching  at 
their  bases,  and  the  surface  not  reticulate.  M.  harmsworthi  has  the  processes 
acuminate,  and  close  together  on  the  shell,  which  is  not  reticulate. 

Macrobiotus  oberhciuseri,  Doyere  (2) 

As  an  Antarctic  species  this  is  only  known  from  a  single  example,  found  in  moss 
from  the  High  Moraines  at  Cape  Royds,  January  1909.  A  photograph  of  the  animal 
from  life  is  shown  in  Part  2  of  this  volume,  Plate  III.  Fig.  11. 


100  J.  MURRAY 

The  animal  is  strongly  pigmented,  of  the  characteristic  colour,  and  is  smooth  all 
over,  not  papillose  as  in  many  examples  from  tropical  regions. 

GENUS — Diphascon,  Plate  (23) 
Diphascon  alpinum,  Murray  (14)  (Plate  XIV.  Fig.  3) 

It  has  been  pointed  out  by  Professor  Richters  that  the  southern  representative  of 
D.  alpinum  is  not  precisely  like  the  type  as  found  on  Ben  Lawers  in  Scotland.  The 
Antarctic  form  has  a  comma  in  the  pharynx,  in  addition  to  the  three  rods.  The 
comma  is  not  noticed  in  the  original  description  or  figure,  but  at  that  time  I  do  not 
think  the  comma  had  begun  to  be  taken  notice  of  as  a  serious  character. 

In  the  Antarctic  examples  the  three  rods  do  not  increase  in  size  so  much  from 
first  to  third  as  in  the  type,  and  the  claws  appear  to  be  relatively  larger  and  more 
slender.  All  these  differences  do  not  justify  the  separation  of  a  new  species  without 
fuller  study. 

At  Cape  Royds  D.  alpinum  was  much  less  common  than  M.  arcticus.  It  was 
present  in  a  good  many  of  the  lakes  and  ponds,  but  was  never  abundant,  perhaps 
most  so  in  Terraced  Lake,  Cape  Barne. 

It  was  first  found  in  Blue  Lake  on  March  27,  1908,  and  in  that  lake,  on 
July  17,  a  skin  with  three  smooth  oval  eggs,  very  probably  of  this  species,  was 
got  at  a  depth  of  15  feet,  on  a  thin  film  of  vegetation  which  covered  the  stones  on 
the  bottom. 

One  example  measured  200  /j.  in  length,  but  that  was  undoubtedly  a  small  one, 
though  I  have  no  measurements  of  any  larger.  The  type  was  250  /*  long,  and  some 
examples  from  the  South  Orkneys  were  360  /x  in  length. 

At  Cape  Royds  it  was  never  found  among  moss,  but  at  the  Stranded  Moraines  it 
did  occur.  There  also  three  eggs  were  found  in  a  skin. 

It  is  now  recorded  for  Spitsbergen  and  Canada.  There  are  no  notes  as  to 
the  "  comma  "  in  these  countries. 


Diphascon  (?),  sp.  (Plate  XIV.  Fig.  4) 

A  small  animal,  of  which  only  one  example  was  found,  is  referred  doubtfully  to 
the  genus  Diphascon,  to  which  it  technically  belongs,  having  a  slightly  elongated 
gullet,  and  claws  of  the  Diphascon  type. 

The  animal  is  smooth  and  hyaline.  It  measures  300  M  in  length.  The  teeth  are 
small,  and  curved  strongly  outwards  towards  the  furca.  The  gullet  is  of  moderate 
width.  It  is  about  twice  as  long  as  the  teeth.  The  pharynx  is  shortly  oval 
and  contains  two  rods  in  each  row  of  thickenings.  The  end  of  the  gullet  in  the 
pharynx  is  expanded  into  a  broad  flange,  to  which  the  apophyses  are  attached.  The 


ANTARCTIC  TARDIGRADA  10] 

first  rod  (nearest  the  gullet)  is  about  three  times,  the  second  about  twice  as  long  as 
broad.  There  is  no  "comma." 

The  claws  are  of  the  Diphascon  type,  but  the  longest  claw  is  less  in  excess  of 
the  others  than  usual.  The  lesser  pair  has  one  claw  considerably  longer  than  the 
other. 

The  eggs  are  unknown ;  eyes  were  not  seen ;  there  are  no  notes  about  the 
stomach  or  fat-cells. 

The  animal  is  not  sufficiently  studied  for  identification.  Although  technically  a 
Diphascon,  there  is  some  reason  to  think  that  it  is  a  sport  of  a  Macrobiotics.  It 
will  be  noticed  that,  apart  from  the  elongated  gullet,  the  teeth  and  pharynx  are  very 
like  those  of  M.  arcticus  (Fig.  26). 

As  that  species  also  has  claws  of  the  Diphascon  type,  there  is  little  to  separate  the 
two.  The  elongation  of  the  gullet  is  less  than  in  any  Diphascon  except  angustatum, 
and  the  portion  between  the  bearers  and  the  pharynx  did  not  appear  flexible. 

A  similar  slightly  elongated  gullet  is  known  in  an  animal  having  claws  of  the 
dispar  type,  and  therefore  certainly  no  Diphascon. 

Found  among  dried  vegetation,  probably  of  lake  origin,  which  also  contained 
M.  arcticus  and  its  eggs. 

REMARKS  ON  THE  ANTARCTIC  TARDIGRADE  FAUNA. 

The  Antarctic  is  defined  for  the  purposes  of  this  paper  as  comprising  the  whole 
Antarctic  Continent,  not  excepting  the  small  part  which  lies  outside  the  Antarctic 
Circle,  and  such  islands  lying  off  the  coast  as  enjoy  a  similar  frigid  climate  to  that  of 
the  continent  itself.  It  is  a  region  where  the  summer  temperature  of  the  air  is  never 
very  far  above  freezing-point.  The  sea  is  for  the  most  part  permanently  of  a  tem- 
perature somewhere  between  the  freezing-point  of  fresh  and  that  of  sea  water.  It 
is  a  desolate  and  inhospitable  region,  presenting  a  remarkable  contrast  to  the  North 
Polar  region,  which  has  a  relatively  genial  climate  in  latitudes  several  degrees  higher 
than  any  in  which  biological  studies  have  been  attempted  in  the  south. 

So  far  as  known  there  is  no  life  in  the  Antarctic  except  on  or  very  near  the  coast. 
The  remotest  living  thing  recorded  for  the  Antarctic  is  probably  the  Lichen  obtained 
by  Captain  Scott  at  an  altitude  of  5000  feet  in  the  Western  Mountains.  This  is  a 
remarkable  occurrence.  The  summer  climate  there  is  like  the  winter  polar  climate  on 
the  coast.  The  occurrence  of  Penguins  80  miles  from  the  sea  is  an  altogether  different 
case,  as  they  could  not  live  there.  Like  the  men  who  saw  them  they  were  provisioned 
and  clothed  for  a  journey  to  a  distance  from  their  base.  So  hardy  are  the  Lichens 
that  one  wonders  whether  there  may  not  be  some  on  the  bare  rocks  of  Mount  Hope  or 
the  Cloudmaker.  If  one  had  time  on  such  journeys  for  such  things,  and  if  a  keen- 
eyed  lichenologist  were  of  the  party,  it  is  not  unlikely  that  he  would  detect  some 
stains  which  no  one  else  would  recognise  for  Lichens. 


102  J.  MURRAY 

I 

Tardigrada  we  would  not  expect  far  inland.  As  far  as  moss  could  exist  water- 
bears  might  be  expected.  At  present  none  is  known  south  of  latitude  78°. 

So  few  are  the  Tardigrada  of  Victoria  Land  that  it  is  hardly  worth  while  entering 
into  any  discussion  of  general  questions  concerning  their  origin  and  relationships. 

Taken  in  conjunction  with  the  Tardigrada  of  other  parts  of  the  Antarctic,  altogether 
making  the  modest  total  of  sixteen  identified  species,  it  may  be  better  worth  while  to 
discuss  such  questions. 

The  whole  circuit  of  the  Antarctic  Coast  has  only  been  touched  (for  purposes  of 
biological  study)  at  three  points  in  its  many  thousands  of  miles  :  at  Graham  Land,  at 
the  Gaussberg,  and  at  South  Victoria  Land.  The  Graham  Land  region,  including  the 
Islands,  lies  entirely  outside  the  Antarctic  Circle  ;  the  Gaussberg  is  almost  on  the 
Circle ;  Victoria  Land  is  far  to  the  south.  The  region  round  Graham  Land  is  best 
known.  Some  half-dozen  expeditions  have  visited  it,  but  only  the  Scottish  and 
Swedish  have  published  reports  on  the  Tardigrada. 

It  is  hoped  that  Dr.  Charcot's  recent  expedition  will  afford  material  for  further 
study  of  the  Tardigrada  of  this  region. 

There  is  undoubtedly  a  fairly  rich  Tardigrade  fauna  in  the  region  lying  south  of 
Cape  Horn.  The  other  two  points  of  the  continent  examined  are  very  poor  in 
Tardigrada.  In  Victoria  Land,  Ross  Island  is  reckoned  as  part  of  the  continent. 
Though  technically  an  island,  permanent  ice  or  snow  joins  it  with  the  mainland. 

In  the  following  table  a  list  is  given  of  all  known  Antarctic  species,  with  their  distri- 
bution in  the  three  Antarctic  localities,  and  their  general  distribution  over  the  world. 

The  list  includes  sixteen  species,  but  many  others  are  known  to  exist,  at  least  in 
the  islands.  There  are  three  species  of  Echiniscus,  one  of  Milnesium,  nine  ofMacroliotus, 
and  three  of  Diphascon. 

Seven  of  these  species  are  known  to  be  widely  distributed  over  the  world  :  they  are, 
E.  arctomys  (?),  M.  tardigradum,  M.  echinogenitus,  M.  oberhausen,  D.  chilenense, 

D.  alpinum,  and  D.  scoticum. 

Three  species  are  not  yet  known  outside  the  Antarctic,  but  the  adjacent  lands  are 
too  little  known  to  permit  us  to  build  anything  on  the  restriction.  The  species  are 

E.  meridionalis,  M.  meridionalis,  and  M.  poZorts. 

Two  species  are  only  known  in  the  southern  hemisphere.  M.  furciger  is  common 
in  the  Antarctic  region  south  of  Cape  Horn,  and  in  the  adjacent  sub- Antarctic  localities 
of  Tierra  del  Fuego  and  South  Georgia.  On  the  other  side  of  the  world  it  occurs  in 
New  Zealand,  where  it  is  found  in  both  the  principal  islands,  and  in  the  North  Island 
attains  to  a  sub-tropical  latitude.  M.  asper  is  only  found  in  the  Antarctic  to  the 
south  of  Cape  Horn  and  in  the  neighbouring  South  Georgia. 

Three  species  appear  to  have  a  bi-polar  distribution.  E.  wendti  is  in  both  polar 
regions,  and  is  also  recorded  for  Germany  and  doubtfully  for  Scotland.*  M.  arcticus 
is  in  both  polar  regions,  and  is  also  doubtfully  recorded  for  New  Zealand,  Australia, 
*  It  has  now  been  found  (September  1910)  on  the  summit  of  Snowdon,  in  Wales. 


ANTARCTIC  TARDIGRABA  108 

Africa,  Scotland,  and  Canada.  M.  antarcticus  is  in  the  South  Polar  region,  and  though 
not  yet  known  in  the  Arctic,  it  comes  pretty  near  to  it  in  Sweden,  where  it  has 
recently  beeii  found  by  Carlzon  (1).  The  other  six  bi-polar  species  are  cosmopolitan, 
or  very  widely  distributed. 


DISTRIBUTION  :    LOCAL  AND  GENERAL,,  OF  ALL  KNOWN 
ANTARCTIC  TARDIGRADA. 


Antarctic 


Sub-Antarctic 


a 

?  rc 

H 

CQ 

Q 

B 

o 

^    Q 

o 

^ 

• 

43 

^ 

w 

^ 

« 

-^    , 

^    'f:. 

H4 

o 

o 

u 

00 

3 

J 

a 

"^    *£ 

<J    Q 

a 

o 

1 

^ 

*"J 

2 

3 

J 

d 

C3 

tf 

u 

H 

II 

H 

CQ 

3 

o 

• 

CQ 

«1 

is 

o  2 

§3 

&S 

o 
• 

o 

• 

s 

o 
a 

s 

1 

3 

ftj 

K 

s 
< 

• 

•< 

2 
g 

1—  t 

o 

z 

H 
o 

H 

^ 

O 

M  2 

K 

»2 

55 

ty^ 

tn 

D 

£ 

o  •" 

cc 

I 

•   Echiniscns  arctnmys  (?)  (see  p.  1  2C) 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

— 

— 

X 

X 

X 

K.  wendti  . 

— 

— 

X 

•  — 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

•  — 

— 

X 

E.  meridionalis  . 

— 

— 

X 

Milnesiwn  tardigradum 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

Macrobiotus  furciyer 

— 

— 

X 

X 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

3[.  echinoyenitits 

— 

— 

X 

— 

•  — 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

— 

X 

X 

X 

^f.  meridionalis  . 

X 

M.  polaris  . 

X 

M.  oberhciiiseri    . 

X 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

— 

X 

X 

M.  arcticws 

X 

— 

—  . 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

X 

— 

X 

— 

X 

J/.  asper    . 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

M.  iiuirrayi 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

•  — 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

M.  aitlarcticiis    . 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

. 

DipJutscon  cluleiiense 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

X 

X 

—  . 

X 

X 

X 

—  . 

X 

1).  alpinum 

X 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

— 

X 

D.  scoticum 



X 

X 



X 

X 

— 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

The  local  distribution  within  the  Antarctic  is  very  remarkable.  In  the  three 
portions  of  the  Antarctic  from  which  Tardigrada  are  known  the  species  are  all 
different  in  each  locality,  with  the  single  exception  of  D.  alpinum,  which  occurs  in 
both  Victoria  Land  and  the  Graham  Land  region.  From  the  uniformity  of  the 
conditions  round  the  Antarctic  coast  it  would  be  expected  that  the  fauna  would 
be  uniformly  distributed.  It  is  true  that  there  is  a  great  difference  in  latitude, 
amounting  to  not  far  short  of  1000  miles,  between  the  regions  studied  in  East  and  in 
West  Antarctica.  The  climatic  conditions  do  not  correspond  to  this  great  difference 
of  latitude,  though  the  Graham  Land  region  is  somewhat  warmer. 

It  might  be  suggested  that  the  Tardigrada  have  peopled  the  different  districts 
independently  by  migration  from  the  nearest  lands  to  the  north.  A  glance  at  the 
map  will  show  how  improbable  this  is.  Migration  across  those  broad  oceans  must  be 
excessively  difficult  for  Tardigrada,  even  considering  the  few  small  islands  which 
afford  intermediate  resting-places.  Migration  of  such  animals  is  involuntary,  and 


104  J.   MURRAY 

can  scarcely  be  effected  by  any  other  agency  than  the  winds.  The  prevalent  storm 
winds  on  the  Antarctic  coast  are  southerly.  The  Tardigrada  of  the  different  regions 
do  not  correspond  more  closely  with  the  nearest  northern  lands  than  with  other 
regions,  except  to  some  small  extent  to  the  south  of  Cape  Horn,  where  access  to  the 
Antarctic  from  the  north  is  easiest.  In  Victoria  Land  all  the  species  of  Tardigrada 
yet  found  are  unknown  in  New  Zealand,  with  the  one  exception  of  D.  alpinum,  and 
M.  furciger,  an  Antarctic  species  found  in  New  Zealand,  is  absent  from  Victoria 
Land. 

Undoubtedly  migration  along  the  Antarctic  coast  is  easier  than  migration  to  it 
from  the  north.  In  that  case  the  birds,  such  as  the  Skua  gulls,  could  assist  in  the 
process.  If  the  Antarctic  has  been  peopled  from  the  north,  the  Cape  Horn  to 
Graham  Land  route  is  the  likeliest  to  have  been  followed,  and  the  numerous  islands 
would  make  it  easier. 

There  is  little  evidence  that  any  species  have  been  developed  through  long 
isolation  in  the  Antarctic.  M.  furciger  and  M.  asper  might  have  originated  thus 
and  spread  to  the  north,  but  it  is  quite  as  likely  to  have  been  the  other  way  round. 
There  are,  of  course,  the  three  species  peculiar  to  the  Antarctic,  but  they  may  any 
day  be  found  on  the  other  side  of  the  world,  as  happened  with  M.  antarcticus. 

Contrasting  the  Antarctic  Tardigrada  with  the  Rotifera  of  the  same  region,  we 
arrive  at  the  following  considerations.  In  both  groups  there  are  about  the  same 
number  of  Antarctic  species  known.  In  the  Tardigrada  the  few  peculiar  species  are 
not  very  peculiar,  and  their  modifications  do  not  appear  to  render  them  better  fitted 
for  the  conditions  than  other  species.  None  of  them  is  strikingly  abundant  in  the 
region.  If  there  is  a  dominant  species  in  any  region  it  is  M.  arcticus.  The  peculiar 
species  of  Bdelloid  Rotifera  are  more  peculiar,  and  their  peculiarities  seem  more 
likely  to  have  arisen  through  long  isolation,  in  adaptation  to  the  conditions,  and  the 
extraordinary  abundance  of  some  of  them  (e.g.,  Philodina  gregaria  and  Adineta 
grandis]  bear  this  out. 

The  different  life-conditions  of  these  two  groups  must,  however,  be  borne  in  mind. 
The  Bdelloids  reproduce  only  parthenogenetically,  so  that  there  is  no  check  by  cross- 
breeding to  variation.  The  Tardigrada  are  sexual,  so  that  if  fresh  migrants  arrived, 
even  at  long  intervals,  the  development  of  new  forms  would  be  retarded. 

One  of  the  most  curious  features  in  the  Antarctic  Tardigrade  fauna  is  the  absence 
of  the  genus  Echiniscus  from  the  Antarctic  Continent.  No  Echiniscus  is  yet  known 
on  the  continent,  or  anywhere  south  of  the  Antarctic  Circle.  In  the  North  Polar 
region  there  are  at  least  a  dozen  species  found  within  the  Arctic  Circle,  and  almost  as 
many  even  in  Spitsbergen  and  Franz- Josef  Land,  in  latitude  80°  or  higher.  Is  it 
that  the  Ecliinisci  are  less  resistant  to  cold  than  the  Macrobioti  1  In  the  Antarctic 
Islands,  the  South  Orkneys  and  South  Shetlands,  &c.,  there  are  many  species  of 
JEchiniscus. 

The  relation  of  the  Antarctic  Tardigrade  fauna  to  that  of  other  regions  of  the 


ANTARCTIC  TARDIGRADA  105 

earth  is  indicated  in  the  Table  by  the  following  figures.  Of  the  16  species,  10  occur 
also  in  Europe,  9  in  the  Arctic,  8  in  Australasia,  8  also  in  the  sub-Antarctic  islands, 
7  in  North  America,  5  in  Asia,  Africa,  and  Oceanic  Islands,  and  4  in  South  America 
(excluding  Tierra  del  Fuego,  which  is  taken  into  the  sub- Antarctic  region). 

These  figures  are  of  little  value,  on  account  of  the  paucity  of  our  knowledge.  As 
they  stand,  they  indicate  the  closest  affinity  with  Europe,  and  after  that  with  the 
Arctic,  the  sub-Antarctic  islands,  and  Australasia,  - 

The  Antarctic  species  which  extend  into  Europe  and  the  Arctic  are  identical  in 
these  two  regions,  with  the  addition  of  M.  antarcticus  to  the  European  list. 

Of  the  eight  species  in  the  sub- Antarctic  region,  and  the  eight  in  Australasia, 
there  are  five  which  are  common  to  the  two  regions. 


BEIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.   1907-9.       VOL.  I. 


TARDIGRADA  OF  NEW  ZEALAND 

Collecting  in  New  Zealand. — Tardigrada  were  collected  in  a  great  number  of 
localities — fairly  representative  of  all  the  varied  climates  of  the  country — in  both  of 
the  large  islands  :  in  the  moist  sub-tropical  bush  of  the  extreme  North,  beyond 
Auckland — in  the  volcanic  district  of  Rotarua — in  the  cold  lake  district  of  the  South 
Island — and  among  the  Alpine  ranges  of  Mount  Cook. 

New  Zealand  stretches  from  nearly  34°  S.  latitude  to  nearly  47°  S.,  and  Stewart 
Island  passes  the  47th  parallel  by  a  few  miles.  The  districts  visited  stretched 
between  36°  and  47°  S. 

On  the  arrival  of  the  Nimrod  in  the  end  of  1907  there  was  one  month  available 
for  work  in  New  Zealand.  After  a  day  or  two  spent  in  the  neighbourhood  of 
Christchurch  a  party  set  out  for  the  Hermitage  at  Mount  Cook.  Dr.  Mackay  was 
bent  on  mountain-climbing :  Dr.  Michell  assisted  me  in  collecting. 

From  the  railway  terminus  at  Fairlie  two  days  were  occupied  in  getting  to  the 
Hermitage.  The  first  day's  journey  was  made  on  foot,  ending  at  a  guest-house 
on  the  shore  of  Lake  Tekapo,  whose  green,  milky  water  made  a  strange  outlandish- 
looking  landscape.  The  chalky  water  was  examined  for  pelagic  animals,  which  were 
present  but  not  abundant. 

Next  day  we  went  by  motor-coach  to  the  Hermitage.  The  hostel  stands  at  an 
elevation  of  more  than  2000  feet  above  sea-level.  The  valley  bottoms  of  the  Tasman 
and  Hooker  Rivers  had  the  aspect  of  Scottish  Moorland,  and  abounded  in  similar 
mosses,  peat-mosses  and  others,  albeit  the  flowering  plants  were  very  different.  No 
Scotch  thistle  is  so  formidable  a  foe  as  a  New  Zealand  "  Spaniard." 

The  home-like  character  of  this  moorland  was  only  disturbed  by  the  wide 
desolate  beds  of  the  glacial  rivers,  miles  across  at  places,  a  vast  stony  waste, 
intersected,  now  when  the  rivers  were  low,  by  innumerable  branching  channels. 

The  moorlands  of  Mount  Cook  were  not  nearly  so  prolific  in  forms  of  microscopic 
life  as  similar  places  in  Scotland  would  be,  although  this  district  yielded  the  greater 
part  of  our  New  Zealand  species.  The  Sphagnum  was  particularly  unproductive. 
This  may  be  due  to  the  fact  that  the  mosses  have  to  endure  much  greater  heat,  and 
are  dried  up  for  longer  periods. 

While  I  collected  in  the  valley  and  at  moderate  elevations,  my  companions 
climbed  some  of  the  peaks  in  the  neighbourhood,  and  they  were  always  mindful  to 

107 


108  J.  MURRAY 

bring  mosses  from  the  highest  points  at  which  they  grew.  Together  they  climbed 
Mount  Wakefield,  over  6000  feet  high,  and  got  moss  near  the  top.  Dr.  Michell 
ascended  to  a  similar  height  on  the  Sealy  Range. 

Dr.  Mackay  made  the  first  ascent  of  the  hitherto  maiden  peak  of  the  Nun's  Veil, 
just  under  9000  feet  in  height.  From  that  trip  we  got  the  most  interesting  biological 
results  of  our  whole  work  in  New  Zealand.  Dr.  Mackay  got  some  moss  at  about 
6000  feet,  and  some  lichen  near  the  top.  The  moss  was  a  little  scrap  of  a 
Dicranum,  and  I  am  told  that  it  is  a  previously  unknown  species.  In  the  axils  of  its 
leaves  there  were  several  species  of  water-bears,  two  of  which  are  new  to  science 
and  are  the  only  peculiar  species  obtained  in  New  Zealand. 

Lake  Wakatipu  was  next  visited.  The  microfauna  was  much  the  same  as  in  the 
Mount  Cook  district.  The  water  of  this  lake  was  not  milky,  but  beautifully  clear 
and  cold.  In  the  plankton  of  the  lake  a  species  of  the  rotifer  Pedalion  was  found. 

A  journey  was  made  by  coach  through  the  beautiful  Otira  Gorge  to  the  west 
coast.  As  soon  as  we  crossed  the  pass  and  got  on  to  the  western  slope  we  found 
ourselves  in  a  different  world.  The  whole  country  was  densely  wooded,  the  tree-ferns 
giving  a  tropical  and  unfamiliar  look  to  the  bush.  Everything  was  festooned  with 
luxuriant  moss.  Incidentally,  the  torrential  rains  which  promote  the  luxuriance  of 
the  vegetation  poured  upon  us  all  the  time  that  we  stayed  on  the  coast. 

There  was  little  opportunity  for  studying  the  moss  fauna  on  the  spot,  though  a 
light  microscope  was  carried  with  us.  The  fauna  was  poor,  especially  in  Tarcligrada, 
but  .one  or  two  rotifers  were  got  which  are  peculiar  to  New  Zealand. 

The  available  time  being  short,  we  set  out  on  a  coasting  steamer  for  Wellington. 
At  every  port  we  visited,  from  Hokotika  to  Nelson,  we  had  a  few  hours  ashore,  and 
spent  them  in  the  bush,  picking  mosses  from  the  trees.  No  attempt  could  now  be 
made  to  examine  them,  and  they  were  sent  off  from  time  to  time  by  mail  for  future 
study. 

Foggy  weather  delayed  us,  and  when  we  reached  the  North  Island  our  time  was 
almost  spent.  In  the  few  days  remaining  it  was  desired  to  get  as  far  north  as 
possible,  so  as  to  include  in  our  study  of  the  fauna  as  great  a  range  in  latitude  as 
might  be.  We  went  to  Auckland,  and  on  the  advice  of  Mr.  Cheeseman,  of  the 
Auckland  Museum,  proceeded  to  the  Waitakerei  Range,  a  short  distance  to  the 
north-west  of  the  town.  Here  we  found  the  bush  of  similar  character  to  that  of  the 
South  Island  at  Hokotika,  but  if  anything  moister  and  still  more  abounding  in  ferns. 

It  was  a  happy  hunting-ground  for  the  student  of  mosses  and  moss  faunas, 
but  we  were  not  permitted  to  linger  hunting  there.  In  our  limited  time  we. 
collected  half  a  dozen  kinds  of  water-bears,  which  had  all  been  previously  obtained 
in  the  South  Island. 

When  the  Nimrod  came  back  out  of  the  south  the  first  green-clothed  land  we 
came  to  was  Stewart  Island.  We  had  a  whole  day  ashore  there.  The  bush  in  that 
uninhabited  region  was  almost  impenetrable,  and  after  spending  some  hours  and 


TARDIGRADA:    NEW  ZEALAND  109 

getting  only  a  few  hundred  yards  through  it,  without  encountering  any  tnoss  worth 
collecting,  I  came  out  on  the  shore  again.  There  was  a  little  islet  with  precipitous 
sides,  cut  off  from  the  main  island  at  high  water.  On  the  summit  of  the  islet  there 
was  only  some  scrubby  bush  and  deep  cushions  of  some  large  mosses.  These  were 
not  of  sorts  usually  favourable  to  microscopic  life  (they  were  large  Dicrana,  and 
Hylocomium  and  the  like),  and  we  did  find  them  very  unproductive,  but  among  other 
things  we  got  five  kinds  of  Tardigrada. 

No  collecting  was  done  in  the  South  Island  during  the  second  visit,  in  1909,  but 
a  week  was  spent  in  the  volcanic  region  of  Rotorua,  in  the  North  Island.  The 
country  had  the  look  of  being  habitually  parched  and  dusty,  and  was  not  mossy, 
though  there  were  mosses  enough  in  shady  nooks  by  springs  and  waterfalls.  Hot 
springs  and  cold  springs  were  examined,  the  lakes  were  netted,  and  the  mosses  were 
washed,  but  no  water- bear  of  any  genus  appeared  to  reward  our  exertions. 

Two  members  of  the  Expedition,  Mawson  and  Mackintosh,  fetched  me  moss  from 
a  considerable  elevation  on  the  slopes  of  the  volcano  Ngauruhoe,  but  this  also  was 
unproductive. 

Summary  of  previous  knoivledge. — Scarcely  anything  is  known  of  the  Tardigrada 
of  New  Zealand.  Captain  Hutton's  Index,  1904  (10),  makes  no  mention  of  the 
group.  The  only  paper  I  know  on  the  subject  is  Professor  Ric liters'  "  Moosfauna 
Australiens  "  (37),  in  which  three  species  are  noted  from  the  North  Island,  and  from 
Bare  Island,  a  little  islet  near  Napier,  on  the  east  coast.  They  are  Echiniscus 
gladiator,  E.  novaizeelandice  and  Macrobiotus  hufelandii. 

We  found  all  these  species  again,  but  curiously  enough  we  did  not  get  the  type  of 
E.  gladiator,  but  only  the  spineless  variety  exarmatus,  hitherto  unknown  outside  of 
Scotland. 

In  February  1907  Mr.  D.  J.  Scourfield  gave  me  some  moss  which  he  had  received 
from  Gisborne,  N.Z.  In  this  I  found  a  single  example  of  Macrobiotus  nodosus,  a 
species  discovered  shortly  before  in  Africa.  The  species  did  not  occur  in  our 
collections  from  New  Zealand,  but  it  was  obtained  by  Captain  Davis,  when  the 
Nimrod  called  at  the  Macquarie  Islands  on  the  homeward  voyage. 

LIST  OF  SPECIES  FOUND 

Hchinismts  muiabilis,  Murray.  M.  dispar,  Murray. 

E.  novcezeelandice,  Richters.  M.  arcticus,  Murray  ? 

E.  gladiator,  Murray.  M.  nodosus,  Murray. 

E.  velamimis,  sp.  n.  M.  sattleri,  Bichters. 

Milnesium  tardigradum,  Doyere  M.  papillifer,  Murray. 

Macrobiotus  hufelandii,  Schultze.  M.  ornatus,  Richters. 

M.furciger,  Murray.  M.  annulalus,  Murray. 

M.  echinogenitus,  liichters.  Dipbascon  chilenense,  Plate. 

M.  harmsworthi,  Murray.  D,  alpinum,  Murray. 

M.  montamis,  sp.  n.  D.  scoticum,  Murray. 
M  intermedius,  Plate. 

Four  Species  not  identified  (3  Echiniscus,  1  Mctcrobiolus). 


110  J.  MURRAY 

NOTES  ON  THE  SPECIES 

Genus — Echiniscus,  Schultze 

A  :  SPECIES  HAVING  SEGMENTS  V.  AND  VI.  DISTINCT 
Echiniscus  mutabilis,  Murray 

The  commonest  Echiniscus  in  New  Zealand,  occurring  in  many  localities  in  both 
of  the  large  islands,  but  not  in  Stewart  Island,  the  Aucklands,  or  the  Macquaries. 

I  was  formerly  inclined,  relying  on  second-hand  descriptions  of  E.  arctomys, 
Ehr.,  to  believe  that  E.  mutabilis  was  closely  related  to  that  species.  Reference  to 
Ehrenberg's  original  figure  (4)  and  description  (3)  shows  that  they  have  nothing  in 
common.  They  even  belong  to  different  sections  of  the  genus,  which  will  probably 
become  distinct  genera  eventually.  E.  arctomys  has  segments  V.  and  VI.  (Richters) 
completely  fused,  and  E.  mutabilis  has  these  segments  distinct.  Any  records  which 
I  have  made  of  E.  arctomys  in  previous  papers  are  erroneous — they  all  refer  to 
E.  mutabilis  (see  p.  126,  footnote). 

Echiniscus  novwzeelandice,  Richters  (37)  (Plate  XV.  Fig.  5) 

Specific  characters. — Segments  V.  and  VI.  separate,  V.  a  pair,  obscurely  divided, 
bearing  two  stout  dorsal  processes  somewhat  near  the  median  line :  first  and  second 
median  plates  divided  by  transverse  line  :  all  finely  dotted  :  no  fringe  on  the 
fourth  legs. 

Description. — Professor  Richters  contents  himself  with  a  rather  brief  diagnosis,  so 
a  fuller  one  is  given  here.  The  animal  varies  considerably,  in  size  and  other  respects. 
It  is  the  closest  relative  of  E.  mutabilis,  and  it  is  doubtful  if  they  could  be 
distinguished,  except  by  the  characteristic  spines  on  V.  The  colour  varies  from 
brick-red  to  yellow.  The  number  of  plates  is  difficult  to  state,  on  account  of  the 
obscure  separation  of  some  of  them,  and  the  sub-division  of  others.  I  prefer  to 
regard  those  sub-divisions  as  not  constituting  distinct  plates,  and  thus  consider  a 
typical  animal  in  which  V.  and  VI.  are  distinct  as  having  twelve  plates,  of  which 
three  are  median,  and  there  are  three  pairs.  There  are  species  in  which  the  plates 
of  the  third  pair  (segment  V.)  are  completely  fused. 

Apart  from  the  ten  processes  on  the  head,  which  appear  to  be  common  to  all 
Echinisci*  there  are  usually  no  processes  on  the  body  of  E.  nonezeelandice  except 
the  two  stout  spines  on  V.  These  vary  greatly  in  size,  sometimes  reaching  almost 
as  far  as  the  posterior  border  of  plate  VI.,  sometimes  reduced  to  short  cones.  In 
one  example  they  measured  30  n  in  length. 

These  processes  are  often  forked.  There  are  often  short  cones  at  the  postero- 
lateral  margins  of  the  plates  of  the  second  pair  (d  Richters).  There  may  be  rudi- 

*  Except  only  E.  ImberUs,  which  is  said  by  Prof,  Richters  (38)  to  lack  the  six  processes  near  the  mouth 


TARDIGRADA:    NEW  ZEALAND  111 

ments  of  similar  cones  at  the  angles  of  the  preceding  segments  (b  and  c  Richters). 
There  is  a  slender  spine  on  the  first  leg,  and  a  blunt  palp  near  the  base  of  the  fourth, 
as  in  many  other  species.  Seta  a  at  the  base  of  the  head  is  generally  nearly  straight 
— the  auricle  at  its  base  is  fairly  large.  The  legs  are  long.  No  barbs  were  detected 
on  the  inner  claws  of  the  fourth  leg,  but  they  would  be  readily  overlooked  if  as  small 
as  in  E.  mutabilis. 

It  is  usually  a  small  species,  but  attains  to  a  length  of  280  //  or  more,  exclusive  of 
the  fourth  legs.  The  eggs  are  two  to  four  in  number.  Two  have  been  seen  in  a  skin 
which  measured  only  100  M>  so  that  the  species  evidently,  like  E.  mutabilis,  grows 
after  attaining  to  maturity.  The  eggs  measured  50  ^  in  length. 

The  species  was  described  by  Richters  (37)  in  the  same  year  (1907)  in  which  we 
collected  it.  It  was  only  known  in  New  Zealand  till  1909,  when  I  obtained  it  in 
Australia,  and  later  a  variety  in  Hawaii.  This  ^variety  (see  p.  151  and  Plate  XIX. 
Fig.  35)  completely  links  E.  novcezeelandice  with  E.  mutabilis,  as  the  dorsal 
processes  on  V.  are  reduced  to  mere  angles  on  the  posterior  margins  of  the  plates. 

The  figure  (Plate  XV.  Fig.  5)  shows  the  forked  process  and  little  lateral  cones  (d), 
although  these  peculiarities  were  not  observed  in  New  Zealand.  The  figure  is  from 
an  Australian  specimen. 

Habitat. — North  Island,  Waitakerei  Range,  north-west  of  Auckland ;  South 
Island,  Mount  Cook  district,  elevation  2000  to  3000  feet ;  shore  of  Lake  Wakatipu 
at  Kingston. 

There  are  only  about  a  dozen  species  in  that  section  of  the  genus  which  has 
segments  V.  and  VI.  separate.  It  is  only  necessary  to  compare  E.  novcezeelandice 
with  those  which  have  processes  on  the  posterior  border  of  V.  (third  pair).  Of  these 
there  are  three :  E.  islandicus  and  E.  borealis  have  numerous  spines  and  seise, 
E.  imberbis  has  a  long  seta  at  d,  and  a  dorsal  spicule  over  c. 

A  species  from  the  Canary  Islands,  figured  but  not  named  by  Heinis  (8)  has  the 
spines  of  V.  precisely  like  those  of  E.  novcezeelandice,  but  it  has  setse  c,  d,  and  e. 


•B:  SPECIES  HAVING  SEGMENTS  V.  AND  VI.  COALESCED 
Echiniscus  gladiator,  Murray  (12) 

We  did  not  find  the  type  of  the  species,  but  the  variety  exarmatus,  Murray  (18),  was 
got  in  moss  brought  by  Drs.  Mackay  and  Michell  from  an  elevation  of  about  5000  feet 
on  Mount  Wakefield,  in  the  Mount  Cook  district  of  the  South  Island.  This  spineless 
variety  was  previously  known  only  in  the  Shetland  Islands. 

Professor  Richters  got  the  type  from  Bare  Island,  close  to  the  coast  of  the  North 
Island. 

There  is  one  character,  by  which  E.  gladiator  and  its  variety  exarmatus  may  be 
distinguished  from  all  other  species,  which  has  not  been  referred  to  in  the  descriptions 


J.  MURRAY 

or  shown  in  the  figures.  The  paired  plates  meet  in  the  middle  line  only  close  to  the 
anterior  border,  and  gape  behind.  A  pair  of  plates,  showing  the  gap,  is  figured 
among  Canadian  Tardigrada  below  (Plate  XX.  Fig.  51). 

Echiniscus  velaminis,  sp.  n.  (Plate  XV.  Fig.  6) 

Specific  characters. — Size  moderate  ;  plates  nine,  two  pairs,  two  median,  surface 
with  fine  irregular  pits,  very  large  on  the  last  (lumbar)  plate  ;  c,  d,  and  e  are  setae, 
d  shorter,  e  very  long ;  dorsal  setse  over  c  and  d  ;  fringe  of  few  large  blunt  processes  ; 
claws  all  without  barbs. 

General  description. — Length  270  ^  seta  a  75  n,  c  125  /x,  d  80  M,  e  250  /* ;  setee  d 
has  sometimes  a  short  curved  spine  at  its  base.  None  of  the  plates  has  the  surface 
markings  interrupted  by  lines  or  bands.  The  markings  are  fine  on  all  the  plates 
except  the  last,  where  they  are  very  coarse.  They  are  very  unequal  in  size,  and  look 
like  perforations.  The  teeth  of  the  fringe  are  very  few  in  number  (5  or  6),  and 
are  large  and  very  obtuse.  There  is  a  blunt  palp  at  the  base  of  the  fourth  leg. 

Habitat. — Among  mosses  from  the  Nun's  Veil  Mountain,  Mount  Cook  district, 
elevation  about  6000  feet ;  collected  by  Dr.  Mackay. 

Remarks. — E.  velaminis  belongs  to  that  group  of  species  which  have  segments  V. 
and  VI.  (Kichters)  united,  and  which  possess  one  or  more  long  lateral  setae  in 
addition  to  the  one  (a)  at  the  base  of  the  head,  which  is  present  in  all  known  species. 
Though  there  are  no  species  in  that  group  so  near  as  to  require  careful  discrimination, 
it  will  be  necessary  to  compare  it  with  a  considerable  number  of  species,  many  of 
which  are  very  insufficiently  described.  Several  species  have  the  same  number  of 
lateral  setae,  but  they  are  differently  arranged,  and  there  are  other  distinctions. 
E.  testudo  has  the  setae  a,  b,  c,  and  e,  the  dorsal  setae  over  c  is  lacking,  and  the 
"  fringe  "  has  many  smaller  teeth.  E.  blumi  has'setae  a,  b,  c,  and  d,  and  the  outer 
claws  are  barbed.  E.  crassus  has  setae  a,  b,  c,  and  d,  e  is  a  blunt  process,  the  fringe 
has  small  blunt  teeth,  and  the  surface  is  coarsely  granular.  E.filamentosus  has  setre 
a,  b,  c,  and  e  (as  in  testudo),  and  on  each  side,  according  to  Plate,  two  dorsal  spines 
over  the  second  and  one  over  the  third  leg.  E.  muscicola  has  setae  also,  a,  b,  c,  and  e, 
and  there  is  a  long  dorsal  seta  over  c,  but  none  over  d. 

Several  species  have  one  lateral  seta  more  than  velaminis,  besides  other  differences. 
E.  creplini  has  small  spines  near  the  bases  of  setae  b,  c,  and  d  ;  E.  quadrispinosus  and 
E.  scrofa  have  some  of  the  plates  sub-divided,  and  the  fringe  with  many  sharp  teeth. 

A  number  of  species  have  one  seta  less  than  velaminis,  and  differ  in  other  respects. 
E.  bellermanni  has  small  spines  at  the  postero-lateral  angles  of  the  segments ; 
E.  merokensis  has  the  outer  claws  barbed ;  E.  longispinosus  lacks  seta  e,  and  has  the 
fringe  of  slender  spines ;  E.  meridionalis  has  d  a  spine,  and  a  dorsal  spine  over  it ; 
E.  granulatus  has  the  dots  real  granules. 

The  forked  or  double  seta  of  velaminis  is  reminiscent  of  E.  aculeata  (23),  but 


TARDIGRADA:    NEW  ZEALAND  113 

according  to  Plate  the  forked  process  should  be  c,  there  are  no  lateral  setae  except  a, 
and  there  is  no  mention  of  fringe.  I  do  not  consider  forked  processes  as  of  any  specific 
importance.  They  occur  as  "  sports  "  in  various  species,  and  very  often  only  the 
process  of  one  side  is  forked.  The  lateral  processes,  c  and  d,  are  those  most  commonly 
forked. 

Echiniscus,  sp.  ?  (Plate  1TV.  Fig.  7) 

Size  moderate,  220  ^  in  length  ;  plates  nine,  V.  and  VI.  joined,  two  pairs,  two 
median.  Lateral  processes,  a,  c,  d,  e — a  a  seta  120  M  long,  c  a  seta  of  90  M,  d  and  e 
short  curved  spines  of  20  n.  Dorsal  processes,  over  c  a  seta  of  90  n. 

Lack  of  information  about  surface  texture,  fringe  and  claws,  makes  identification 
impossible. 

Habitat. — Among  the  moss  Thuidium  at  the  Hermitage,  Mount  Cook. 

No  affinity  with  any  known  species  can  be  suggested.  There  is  no  species  which 
has  c  a  long  seta,  and  d  and  e  short  spines. 

Echiniscus,  sp.  ?  (Plate  XV.  Fig.   8) 

Very  small,  length  130  M  ;  plates  nine,  V.  and  VI.  joined,  two  pairs,  two  median. 
Lateral  processes,  a,  c,  d,  e — a  a  curved  seta,  50  p.  long,  with  a  small  blunt  "auricle" 
at  its  base,  c  and  d  short  curved  spines  of  10  and  15  M,  e  a  curved  seta  of  70  M.  The 
fringe  of  the  fourth  legs  has  short  blunt  processes.  The  claws  were  not  seen. 

The  surfase  markings  were  small  and  regular,  but  could  not  be  definitely  stated 
to  be  either  pits  or  papillae.  The  posterior  borders  of  the  second  paired  plates  and  of 
plate  VI.  between  the  slits,  showed  an  undulation  like  that  of  E.  perarmatus  (20)  so 
that  in  all  likehood  the  dots  are  papillae. 

This  little  animal  has  a  very  distinctive  form.  The  paired  plates  have  an 
anterior  narrow  portion  forming  a  distinct  roll,  which  shows  on  the  outline,  and  the 
posterior  edge  diverges  widely  laterally.  No  other  species  besides  perarmatus 
shows  the  dots  on  the  edge  of  some  of  the  plates. 

It  is  very  probably  a  distinct  species,  but  the  small  size  indicates  that  it  may  be 
a  larva,  and  as  the  claws  were  not  seen  the  study  cannot  be  completed. 

Habitat. — Among  New  Zealand  moss,  note  of  the  locality  lost. 

There  is  no  close  relationship  to  any  known  species.  In  this  section  of  the  genus 
there  is  none  which  has  a  and  e  long  setae,  and  c  and  d  short  spines. 

Echiniscus,  sp.  ?  (Plate  XV.  Fig.  9) 

Small,  length  ISO/*;  plates  nine,  V.  and  VI.  united,  two  pairs,  two  median. 
Lateral  processes,  a,  c,  d,  andV- «  a  curved  seta  of  70  M,  c  a  long  slender  spine  of 
50  M  with  bulbous  base,  d  a  short  curved  spine  of  25  /&,  e  a  seta  of  65  /*•  Dorsal 

BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.   1907-9.       VOL.  I.  Q 


J.  MURRAY 

processes — over  c  a  broad -based  curved  spine  of  35  /j. — over  d  triangular  process 
12  /a.  long  and  6  M  across  the  base. 

There  are  no  notes  as  to  surface  markings,  fringe,  or  claws,  and  so  the  species 
cannot  be  identified. 

Habitat. — Among  moss  from  the  hills  at  Lyttelton,  South  Island. 

The  animal  has  a  certain  resemblance  to  E.  oihonncB.  The  relative  proportions 
of  the  processes  a,  c,  d,  and  e  are  similar,  and  the  dorsal  processes  correspond.  It 
differs  in  lacking  process  b  and  the  small  spicules  at  the  angles  of  the  plates. 

Milnesium  tardigradum,  Doyere  (2) 

Found  in  several  localities  in  the  three  principal  Islands  (North,  South  and 
Stewart  Island).  The  short  claws  of  several  examples  which  were  studied  had  three 
points  each,  except  those  of  the  first  legs,  which  had  two  points  each.  The  cyst  was 
found  in  Mount  Cook  district.  It  was  of  oblong  form,  with  rounded  ends,  and 
measured  230  ^  in  length.  The  gullet  and  pharynx  were  present,  but  no  claws  or 
other  recognisable  organs. 

One  specimen  from  the  Lyttelton  Hills  had  the  thick  claws  of  the  first  legs 
unbranched,  those  of  the  last  legs  three-pointed,  and  of  the  second  and  third  legs 
some  with  two  and  some  with  three  points. 

Ascends  to  an  altitude  of  5000  feet  on  Mount  Wakefield,  Mount  Cook  district. 

Genus — Macrobiotus,  Schultze  (42) 

A:  SPECIES  WHICH  LAY  ROUGH  EGGS,  FBEE 

Macrobiotus  hufelandii,  Schultze  (42) 

The  commonest  species  in  New  Zealand,  as  in  most  other  countries.  It  occurred 
in  all  three  islands. 

Wherever  I  have  recorded  M.  hufelandii  it  is  on  the  authority  of  Professor 
Richters,  who  has  established  Schultze's  name  for  the  water-bear  which  is  commonest 
in  Europe,  and  apparently  almost  everywhere  else. 

Schultze's  own  description  is  insufficient  to  allow  of  the  identification  of  the 
animal  with  any  certainty. 

The  characteristic  egg  has  been  regarded  as  the  best  character  for  identifying 
Richters'  hufelandii,  but  it  is  now  known  that  other  species  have  similar  eggs 
(M.  hufelandioides,  see  p.  138). 

Macrobiotus  furciger,  Murray  (15) 

Habitat. — Near  Auckland,  North  Island;  shores  of  Lake  Wakatipu,  South 
Island.  Identified  by  the  eggs. 


TARDIGRADA:    NEW  ZEALAND  115 

This  is  one  of  the  most  interesting  species  found  in  New  Zealand.  Its  distribution 
is  peculiar.  So  far  as  our  knowledge  goes  it  is  solely  a  southern  species.  It  is  found 
in  a  number  of  islands  in  the  Cape  Horn  region,  from  Tierra  del  Fuego  to  the 
Antarctic  Continent  at  Graham  Land  (Richters,  38).  It  was  discovered  by  the 
Scottish  Expedition  in  the  South  Orkneys.  New  Zealand  is  the  lowest  latitude 
recorded  for  it.  Its  known  range  is  from  about  36'30°  S.  (near  Auckland,  N.Z.) 
almost  to  the  Antarctic  Circle. 

It  has  been  considered  as  a  southern  representative  of  M.  hufelandii.  In  most 
of  the  localities  it  is  not  associated  with  that  species — it  takes  its  place — only  in 
New  Zealand  and  Tierra  del  Fuego  have  the  two  species  been  found  together.  A 
peculiarity  in  its  distribution  is  its  absence  from  the  Victoria  Land  region  of  the 
Antarctic,  though  it  is  so  abundant  on  the  other  side  of  the  continent. 

Macrobiotus  echinogenitus,  Richters  (27) 

In  the  South  Island  only.  As  we  learn  more  about  Tardigrada  it  appears  that 
there  are  several  species  which  have  stellate  eggs,  more  or  less  resembling  those  of 
M.  echinogenitus,  some  of  them  probably  not  to  be  distinguished  from  them  unless 
they  contain  well  grown  embryos.  The  separation  of  some  of  these  (for  example, 
M.  areolatus  and  M.  harmsivorthi)  makes  it  easier  to  understand  M.  echinogenitus 
itself,  which  formerly  seemed  to  vary  to  such  an  extent  that  it  was  difficult  to  get  a 
clear  conception  of  it.  M.  areolatus,  and  some  related  species  not  yet  described, 
have  eggs  the  surface  of  which  is  reticulate.  The  shells  are  double-skinned  and  the 
space  between  is  divided  by  septa  into  hexagonal  chambers.  From  these  hexagons 
the  processes  spring,  at  such  distance  apart  that  they  are  always  separated  by  the 
width  of  one  cell. 

M.  harmsivorthi  has  the  egg  processes  close  together,  and  the  claws  united  as 
in  M.  hufelandii  (Richters).  The  true  M.  echinogenitus  has  the  egg-shell  without 
reticulation,  the  conical  processes  almost  or  quite  close  together,  and  the  claws 
joined  at  the  bases  only.  Further  study  is  necessary  to  clear  up  the  whole  group 
satisfactorily  (see  p.  89,  footnote). 

Macrobiotus  harmsworthi,  Murray  (19) 

South  Island  and  Stewart  Island.  The  egg  cannot  be  distinguished  from  some 
forms  of  those  of  M.  echinogenitus.  In  examples  from  the  Mount  Cook  district  the 
identity  was  established  by  finding  eggs  in  the  body,  which,  when  freed  from  the 
enclosing  membrane,  showed  the  dose-set  acuminate  processes. 


116  J.   MURRAY 


Macrobiotus  montanus,  sp.  n.  (Plate  XV.  Figs.  lOa-lCkZ) 

Specific  characters. — Large,  brown  ;  gullet  wide  ;  pharynx  with  three  short  rods 
and  a  "  comma  "  ;  claws  of  hufelandi  type,  united  for  half  their  length,  those  of  each 
pair  equal  and  placed  side  by  side,  but  only  one  with  a  strong  supplementary  point ; 
egg  spherical,  covered  with  hemispherical  processes,  which  almost  meet  at  their  bases. 

Detailed  description. — Length  about  500  M  and  upwards :  diameter  of  egg,  over 
the  processes,  75  to  80  M.  Old  examples  are  deeply  coloured  with  a  dull  brown 
pigment  similar  to  that  of  M.  hufelandii.  The  claws  are  thick  and  strong,  and  are 
nearly  equal :  in  most  species  of  the  hufelandi  group  they  are  more  or  less  unequal, 
often  markedly  so.  The  gullet  is  wide,  and  the  teeth  strong  and  curved  ;  the  end  of 
the  gullet  in  the  pharynx  expands  into  a  prominent  flange,  beyond  which  the 
apophyses  are  fixed.  The  three  thickenings  in  the  pharynx  are  just  about  equal 
in  size  ;  they  are  twice  as  long  as  broad,  and  are  rounded  at  the  ends  ;  the  "  comma  " 
is  rather  an  obscure  one. 

Habitat. — Among  moss  gathered  by  Dr.  Mackay  on  the  Nun's  Veil  Mountain, 
in  the  Mount  Cook  district,  South  Island,  at  an  elevation  of  about  GOOO  feet,  on  the 
occasion  when  that  peak  was  ascended  for  the  first  time,  December  1907. 

Remarks. — M.  montanus  is  one  of  a  large  group  of  species,  closely  related  to 
M.  hufelandii.  All  of  them  possess  wide  gullets  and  strong  teeth.  The  pharynx 
has  either  three  distinct  rods,  or  the  two  next  the  gullet  are  united,  usually  showing 
traces  of  their  component  rods.  The  claws  are  united  for  a  considerable  distance, 
usually  half-way  or  more,  and  one  of  each  pair  has  one  or  two  supplementary  points. 
The  eggs  are  spherical  and  are  ornamented  with  processes  of  various  form. 

The  majority  of  the  species  have  eggs  very  different  from  those  of  M,  montanus. 
It  is  only  necessary  to  compare  it  critically  with  one  or  two  species  which  approach  it 
very  closely.  Those  are  M.  meridionalis,  Richters  (40),  and  M.  polaris,  Murray  (see 
the  preceding  section  on  Antarctic  Tardigrada  in  this  paper,  p.  98). 

According  to  Professor  Richters,  M.  meridionalis  has  the  processes  on  the  egg 
nipple-shaped,  which  he  explains  in  a  letter  as  being  a  hemispherical  base  surmounted 
by  a  narrower  portion.  This  form  of  egg  I  know  from  the  Scottish  mountains,  though 
we  did  not  find  it  in  the  Antarctic. 

The  egg  of  M.  polaris  differs  markedly  from  both.  The  surface  of  the  shell  is 
reticulate,  like  that  of  M.  areolatus  (see  Canadian  Tardigrada,  p.  167  of  this  paper). 
The  double  shell  encloses  a  series  of  compartments,  showing  as  polygons  at  the 
surface.  From  certain  polygons  arise  the  processes,  at  such  distance  apart  that  they 
are  separated  always  by  one  polygon.  The  processes  vary  from  round  to  acuminate. 
The  polygons  are  relatively  much  smaller  than  in  M.  areolatus.  M.  polaris  has 
moreover,  much  more  slender  and  very  unequal  claws,  and  the  gullet  is  relatively 
narrower.  M.  montanus  was  found  to  be  alive  after  the  moss  containing  it  had  been 


TARDIGRADA:    NEW  ZEALAND  117 

dry  for  two  and  a  half  years.  Only  a  small  proportion  of  the  individuals  revived  when 
the  moss  was  moistened.  The  relation  of  the  egg  to  the  animal  was  demonstrated  by 
the  presence  in  some  of  them  of  young  in  which  the  pharynx  and  claws  could  be  seen. 

Eggs  of  Macrobiotus  having  close-set  processes,  nearly  or  quite  hemispherical, 
have  been  figured  by  Richters  and  myself.  In  his  "  Eier  der  Tardigraden  "  (32), 
Plate  V.  Fig.  4,  Richters  figures  one  such  as  apparently  a  variety  of  M.  echinogenitus. 
In  "Scottish  Alpine  Tardigrada"  (14),  Plate  IH. -Fig.  10,  I  show  an  egg  which  in 
all  probability  is  that  of  M.  nwntanus.  A  similar  egg  occurred  in  Nova  Zembla, 
and  is  figured  in  "Arctic  Tardigrada"  (19),  Plate  XLV.  Fig.  4. 

According  to  Doyere  (2),  confirmed  recently  by  Richters  in  a  letter,  M.  ober- 
hiiuseri  has  an  egg  of  similar  form,  with  rounded  processes. 

Macrobiotus  intermedius,  Plate  (23) 

In  many  localities  in  the  South  Island  ;  Hills  at  Lyttelton,  Otira  Gorge,  near  Lake 
Wakatipu ;  Mount  Cook  district,  at  an  altitude  of  5000  feet  on  Mount  Wakefield  ; 
near  Auckland,  North  Island. 

The  eggs  were  found  near  Lyttelton.  They  had  not  the  typical  top-shaped 
processes,  expanded  upwards.  They  were  narrower  at  the  top,  like  truncate  cones, 
of  a  height  equal  to  the  breadth  of  base,  and  with  a  very  slight  indication  of 
expansion  at  the  top.  The  processes  were  separated  by  spaces  rather  greater  in 
diameter  than  their  bases.  The  exposed  surface  of  the  shell  between  the  processes 
was  finely  papillose. 

Professor  Richters  informs  me  in  a  letter  that  he  knows  a  variety  of  M.  inter- 
medius which  has  processes  very  like  those  of  M.  hufelandii.  This  variety  I  have 
also  seen  (see  Australian  Tardigrada,  p.  139,  in  this  paper).  The  variety  from 
Lyttelton  is  like  it,  but  the  processes  are  shorter,  and  not  expanded  into  a  disc 
above. 

Macrobiotus  dispar,  Murray  (16) 

Habitat. — Many  localities  in  the  South  Island ;  a  pond  on  the  Moraine  of  the 
Miiller  Glacier ;  on  the  Vegetable  Sheep  (Haastia),  Mount  Wakefield,  elevation 
about  5000  feet;  on  the  Nun's  Veil  peak,  elevation  6000  feet  (collected  by 
Dr.  Mackay) ;  among  tree-moss  from  the  moist  bush  of  the  west  coast.  The  simplex 
condition  also  occurred. 

It  is  curious  that,  though  usually  dwelling  in  ponds,  the  species  occurred  only 
once  in  a  pond  in  New  Zealand.  In  all  other  instances  it  was  got  among  moss,  or 
moss-like  vegetation  (Haastia). 

The  examples  from  the  Nun's  Veil  had  the  two  dorsal  processes  of  the  type, 
which  are  often  lacking. 


118  J.   MURRAY 

B  :  SPECIES  WHICH  LAY  THICK-SHELLED  EGOS,  WITH  EMBEDDED  RODS 
Macrobiotus  an- liens,  Murray  ?  (19) 

Habitat. — Mount  Cook  district,  South  Island. 

In  the  absence  of  the  egg  there  is  some  doubt  about  the  identification.  The 
claws  are  of  the  Diphascon  type.  Apart  from  M.  oberhduseri,  which  is  easily 
distinguished  by  the  colour  and  the  pharynx,  there  are  very  few  species  having  claws 
of  this  type,  and  M.  arcticm  is  the  commonest  of  them. 

C  :  SPECIES  WHICH  LAY  SMOOTH  EGGS  IN  THE  CAST  SKIN 
Macrobiotus  nodosus,  Murray  (20) 

Habitat. — Near  Gisborne,  North  Island  ;  Macquarie  Islands. 

The  species  was  collected  by  the  expedition  in  the  Macquaries,  but  it  had  been 
previously  found  in  moss  from  Gisborne,  given  to  me  by  Mr.  D.  J.  Scourfield.  Its 
distribution  is  peculiar.  It  is  known  in  Africa,  New  Zealand,  the  Macquaries, 
and  Fiji. 

Macrobiotus  sattleri,  Bichters  (26) 
Habitat. — Hills  beside  Lake  Wakatipu,  South  Island. 

Macrobiotus  papillifer,  Murray  (12) 

Habitat. — On  Myriophyllam  in  a  torrent  fed  by  melting  snow,  Black  Birch 
Creek,  Mount  Cook  district,  South  Island. 

Macrobiotus  ornatus,  Richters  (24) 

Habitat. — Among  bog-mosses,  near  Birch  Hill  Creek,  and  Myriophyllum,  Black 
Birch  Creek,  Mount  Cook  district.  In  the  latter  place  a  cyst  was  found. 

Macrobiotus  annulatus,  Murray  (12) 

Habitat. — Birch  Hill  Creek,  and  in  the  bush  of  the  west  coast,  near  Westport, 
South  Island.  At  Birch  Hill  Creek  it  was  abundant,  but  it  was  never  seen  carrying 
the  eggs  in  the  characteristic  way.  The  examples  from  Westport  had  the  papillae 
very  small. 

Macrobiotus,  sp.  ?  (Plate  XV.  Fig.  12) 

Macquarie  Islands.  A  large  species  with  claws  of  the  Diphascon  type.  It  could 
not  be  identified  because  it  was  in  the  condition  known  as  simplex  (i.e.,  it  had  no 


TARDIGRADA:    NEW  ZEALAND  119 

teeth  and  no  rods  in  the  pharynx).  It  is  pretty  certain  that  it  is  distinct  from 
all  known  species.  The  position  of  the  pharyngeal  bulb  indicates  that  it  is  a 
Macrobiotus,  not  a  Diphascon.  There  are  only  a  few  species  having  claws  of  the 
Diphaacon  type,  and  none  of  them  have  such  strong  claws  as  this  animal.  They 
more  resemble  those  of  some  of  the  larger  northern  species  of  Diphascon,  such  as 
D.  spitzbergense  (27).  The  length  was  550  /*. 

Diphascon  chilenense,  Plate  ?  (23)  (Plate  XV.  Figs.  11«,  lib) 

This  species  is  noted  from  the  Mount  Cook  district  and  from  Stewart  Island.  It 
is  recorded  as  doubtfully  D.  chilenense  on  account  of  the  characters  of  the  claws, 
which  appear  to  be  intermediate  between  the  true  Diphascon  and  the  hufelandi 
types.  The  two  pairs  are  not  very  unequal  in  size,  and  the  claws  of  each  appear  to 
be  united  for  some  distance  above  the  base.  As  the  animal  was  a  very  small  one, 
and  the  claws  relatively  very  small,  it  could  not  be  satisfactorily  determined  whether 
the  structure  of  the  larger  pair  was  essentially  that  of  the  Diphascon  type,  which  is 
shown  in  Fig.  12  on  the  same  plate. 

The  pharynx  (Fig.  lla)  has  four  round  nuts  in  each  row  of  thickenings,  besides 
the  apophyses  on  the  end  of  the  gullet.  This  seems  to  be  one  more  than  in  any 
other  Tardigrade,  unless  we  regard  the  fourth  nut  as  homologous  with  the  "  comma." 
Plate  figures  four  nuts,  but  does  not  show  the  apophysis. 

The  example  here  figured  was  obtained  by  Dr.  Mackay  from  a  height  of  about 
6000  feet  on  the  Nun's  Veil,  a  peak  nearly  9000  feet  high. 

Diphascon  alpimtm,  Murray  (14) 

South  Island  only  (Otira  Gorge).  Though  discovered  in  Scotland,  the  species  is 
best  known  as  a  southern  and  Antarctic  species.  It  occurs  on  both  sides  of  the 
Antarctic,  on  the  Continent  at  Graham  Land,  on  the  adjacent  islands,  and  also  in 
Victoria  Land. 

Diphascon  scoticum,  Murray  (11) 

In  Stewart  Island  only.  The  species  is  found  in  both  Polar  Regions  and  in 
several  places  between.  In  the  north  it  attains  a  high  latitude  in  Spitsbergen  and 
Franz- Josef  Land.  In  the  south  Richters  has  found  it  in  Possession  Island  (recorded 
as  D.  crozetense),  and  in  the  South  Shetlands.  It  is  also  in  Australia,  Hawaii,  and 
Canada. 

REMARKS  ON  THE  TARDIGRADE  FAUNA  OF  NEW  ZEALAND 

Its  composition. — For  a  country  of  such  extent,  so  isolated,  and  offering  such  a 
variety  in  climate  and  conditions,  the  Tardigrade  fauna  appears  poor  in  species,  and 


120 


J.  MURRAY 


remarkably  deficient  in  peculiar  forms.  It  cannot,  of  course,  be  supposed  that  our 
knowledge  of  the  fauna  is  nearly  adequate  to  permit  of  definite  conclusions  on  such 
points,  but  it  might  be  expected  that  in  an  examination  extending  over  two  months, 
during  which  a  great  variety  of  localities  were  visited,  we  would  have  detected  signs 
of  a  rich  fauna  or  of  peculiar  forms,  if  the  fauna  were  rich  or  peculiar.  Further  work 
may  yet  bring  such  forms  to  light. 

Altogether  25  species  were  observed,  of  which  21  were  identified.  These  were 
4  species  of  Echiniscus,  13  of  Mctcrobiotits,  1  of  Milnesium,  and  3  of  Diphascon. 
The  unidentified  species  were  3  of  Echiniscus  and  1  Macrobiotus.  Two  species,  an 
Echiniscus  and  a  Macrobiotus,  are  described  as  new  species. 

About  one-half  of  the  species  are  common  and  widely  distributed.  The  others 
are  in  varying  degrees  local,  and  several  have  a  very  peculiar  distribution. 

The  accompanying  table  of  local  and  general  distribution  shows  the  relation  of 
the  Tardigrade  fauna  to  that  of  other  parts  of  the  world. 


DISTRIBUTION  :  LOCAL  AND  GENERAL 


Australasia 


New  Zealand 


05 

5 

OQ 
HI 

02 

03 

t—  t 

m 

Ed 

d 

3 

j 

Ed 

, 

0 

0 

o 

d 

H 

*""* 

E-i 

K 

JH 

w 

AH 

«jj 

o 

s 

w 

o 

EC 

M 

tf 

o 

Ed 

Ed 

H 

K 

EH 

I 
O 

H 

0 

Si 

Ed 

<y 

u 

i 

O 

*H 

1 

s 

K 

3 

s 

< 

» 

i 

« 

^ 

EC 

02 

S 

«! 

i 

fe 

02 

0 

Echiniscus  mutabilis 

X 

X 





X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

— 

— 

X 

— 

K.  novcezedandice 

X 

X 

— 

.  — 

X 

X 

— 

— 

— 

•  —  • 

— 

— 

— 

E.  gladiator     . 

X 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

Milnesium  tardigradnm 

X 

X 

X 



X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

Macrobiotus  hufelandii 

X 

X 

X 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

— 

M.  furciger 

X 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

M.  echinogenilits 

X 

X 

.  — 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

M.  harmsivorthi 

— 

X 

X 

—  . 

X 

X 

X 

— 

X 

X 

— 

X 

— 

!</    'ntfmfrt'nrHji 

X 

M.  inlermedins 

X 

X 

— 



X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

—  . 

M.  dispar 

— 

X 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

X 

X 

— 

M.  arcticus 

.  —  - 

X 

— 

—  , 

X 

— 

X 

— 

X 

X 

— 

X 

X 

M.  nodosus 

X 





X 



X 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

M.  sattleri 

— 

X 





X 

X 

X 

X 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

M.  papillifer 

— 

X 

—  . 

.  —  . 

X 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

M.  ornatus 

— 

X 







— 

X 

__ 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

M.  annulatus 



X 









X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

Diphascon  chilenens 

— 

X 

X 



X 

— 

X 

X 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

D.  alpinum 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

D.  scoticum      , 



— 

X 

— 

X 

X 

X 





X 

X 

X 

X 

TARDIGRADA:    NEW  ZEALAND  121 

The  foregoing  table  shows  the  distribution  of  the  New  Zealand  species  over  the 
world.  For  this  purpose  the  surface  of  the  globe  is  divided  into  nine  great  areas, 
being  one  for  each  of  the  continents,  for  the  Arctic  and  Antarctic  regions,  and  for 
Australasia.  The  islands  adjacent  to  the  continents  are  included  with  them,  New 
Zealand  is  included  with  Australia,  but  Oceanic  Islands  have  a  column  to  themselves. 
The  group  of  the  "  Oceanic  Islands  "  is  unsatisfactory,  as  the  only  character  which 
they  have  in  common  is  their  isolation.  The  group  is  formed  to  gather  up  some  odds 
and  ends  of  Tardigrade  records  from  all  over  the  world. 

For  the  local  distribution  the  Australasian  column  is  subdivided  into  five  sub- 
ordinate columns. 

In  compiling  the  table  I  have  used  the  published  papers  of  Richters,  Plate,  and 
others,  and  for  some  regions  (S.  America,  Africa)  I  have  used  unpublished  notes 
of  my  own.  Many  records  may  have  been  overlooked,  but  in  any  case  the  whole 
aspect  of  the  facts  is  liable  to  be  changed  at  any  moment  by  fresh  work  in  any  of 
the  regions. 

As  our  knowledge  stands,  it  appears  that  of  the  21  identified  species  16  are  also 
found  in  Europe,  13  in  Australia  and  the  Arctic  Region,  11  in  N.  America,  9 
in  S.  America,  10  in  the  Oceanic  Islands,  8  in  Africa,  7  in  the  Antarctic  and 
Asia. 

These  proportions  indicate  probably  rather  the  amount  of  work  done  in  the 
different  regions  than  actual  facts  in  distribution.  This  is  especially  likely  to  be 
true  in  the  case  of  Europe,  where  water-bears  were  first  studied,  and  most  of  the 
species  discovered. 

Nevertheless,  for  what  the  facts  are  worth,  the  table  shows  that  temperate  New 
Zealand  has  a  closer  correspondence  with  temperate  Europe  than  with  any  other 
country.  In  has  as  much  affinity  with  the  Arctic  Region  as  with  its  nearest  neigh- 
bour Australia.  It  has  least  in  common  with  the  adjacent  Antarctic  (which  doubtless 
means  that  the  Antarctic  is  poor  in  species)  and  with  Asia  (which  is  very  little  known). 

All  the  species  which  are  common  to  New  Zealand  and  the  Arctic  are  also  found 
in  Europe.  Of  the  New  Zealand  species  which  are  also  in  Australia  and  in  the 
Arctic,  there  are  10  species  which  are  common  to  these  two  regions. 

The  range  of  the  various  New  Zealand  species  works  out  as  follows.  Milnesium 
and  M.  echinogenitus  are  in  all  9  columns,  M.  hufelandii  and  M.  intermedivs  in 
8,  D.  chilenense  and  D.  scoticum  in  7,  E.  mutabilis  and  M.  arcticus  in  6, 
M.  harmsworthi,  M.  sattleri,  and  D.  alpinum  in  5.  The  others  must  be  considered 
local. 

E.  novcezeelandice  is  known  only  in  the  three  localities,  New  Zealand,  Australia, 
and  Hawaii,  all  widely  separated.  M.  furciger  is  a  southern  species,  occurring  in 
New  Zealand,  S.  America,  and  the  Antarctic.  Several  others  have  no  continuity 
in  their  range,  as  at  present  known.  M.  nodosus  is  in  New  Zealand,  Fiji,  and 
Africa;  E.  gladiator  in  New  Zealand,  Europe,  and  N.  America;  M. papillifer  in 

BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.   1907~9.       VOL.  I.  R 


J.  MURRAY 

New  Zealand,  Australia,  and  Europe  ;  M.  ornatus  and  M.  annulatus  in  New  Zealand, 
Europe,  and  the  Arctic.  Two  species  only,  E.  velaminis  and  M.  montanus,  are  not 
known  except  in  New  Zealand. 

Any  considerations  which  might  be  offered  as  to  the  possible  origin  and  history 
of  the  New  Zealand  Tardigrade  fauna  will  be  reserved  for  the  paper  on  Geographical 
Distribution,  in  a  later  number  of  this  publication. 


AUSTRALIAN  TARDIGRADA 

On  collecting  in  Australia,. — On  the  return  of  the  Nimrod  from  the  Antarctic 
in  the  spring  of  1909  nearly  a  month  was  spent  in  Australia  in  the  collection  of 
various  fresh-water  microscopic  animals,  chiefly  Rotifera  and  Tardigrada. 

In  this  work  I  was  greatly  assisted  by  some  good  friends  in  Sydney,  Mr.  E.  G. 
Goddard,  Mr.  S.  Johnston  and  Mr.  T.  Whitelegge,  who  guided  me  on  excursions 
to  various  likely  collecting-grounds  in  the  neighbourhood.  Without  this  friendly 
assistance  the  time  might  have  been  to  a  large  extent  wasted,  as  in  a  country  so 
generally  parched  us  "Australia  seems  to  be,  mosses  are  not  so  much  in  evidence  as 
in  moister  countries  like  New  Zealand. 

Only  two  of  the  Australian  States  were  visited,  New  South  Wales  and  Queens- 
land. The  immediate  neighbourhood  of  Sydney  was  not  very  productive.  There  is 
usually  very  little  moss  in  the  Eucalyptus  bush,  and  when  some  is  found  it  often 
yields  few  microscopic  animals,  or  none.  Some  water-bears  were  got  in  moss  from 
the  National  Park,  near  Sydney,  and  in  the  ponds  in  the  Botanic  Gardens  some  of 
the  purely  aquatic  species  were  collected. 

It  was  only  in  the  mountain  ranges,  where  a  moister  climate  prevails,  and  mosses 
are  more  abundant,  that  many  Tardigrada  were  obtained.  Two  mountainous 
regions  in  New  South  Wales  were  visited — the  Australian  Alps  near  the  Victorian 
border,  and  the  Blue  Mountains  near  Sydney. 

On  the  journey  to  the  Alps,  the  last  stage  of  which  was  by  coach,  although  the 
road  ran  at  a  considerable  elevation,  and  the  air  was  cool,  the  country  still  seemed 
arid.  The  hard  baked  earth  showed  everywhere  among  the  gum-trees,  and  no  moss 
was  visible.  At  the  guest-house  of  "  the  Creel,"  altitude  about  3000  feet,  on  the 
Snowy  River,  there  was  scarcely  any  moss  except  on  the  banks  of  the  river.  This 
moss  was  as  unproductive  as  that  gathered  near  Sydney,  probably  because  it  is  dried 
for  too  long  at  a  time. 

With  Dr.  Mackay  an  ascent  was  made  to  the  Hospice,  a  government  guest-house 
in  course  of  erection  on  the  road  to  Mount  Kosciusko,  at  an  altitude  of  about 
5000  feet.  As  we  ascended  from  3000  to  5000  feet  the  climatic  changes  which  we 
passed  through  were  surprisingly  great  for  such  a  small  difference  of  level.  The  first 
part  of  the  way,  from  3000  to  4000  feet,  was  through  bush,  which  was  dry  and 
barren,  the  pasturage  for  the  few  sheep  which  we  saw  consisting  of  little  isolated 
tufts  of  grass,  separated  by  yards  of  bare  earth. 

123 


J.  MURRAY 

The  bush  was  cheerful  with  the  whistling  and  chattering  of  parrots  of  many 
sorts  and  sizes,  and  of  crows  and  magpies.  Sometimes  an  isolated  gum-tree  would 
be  seen  loaded  with  white  cockatoos,  looking  at  a  distance  like  blossom.  As  we 
approached  the  5000  feet  level  the  signs  of  a  moister  climate  gradually  increased. 
Mosses  appeared,  and  became  increasingly  plentiful.  As  we  topped  the  rise,  at  some- 
what over  5000  feet,  we  came  out  on  a  stretch  of  moorland,  apparently  covered  with 
heather  and  familiar  heath-plants  and  mosses.  Dr.  Mackay  ran  down  and  gathered 
some  of  the  seeming  heather  and  other  plants.  They  were  all  strange  and  foreign, 
as  was  only  to  be  expected.  The  purple-tipped  heather  was  not  a  plant  in  bloom 
at  all,  but  was  something  like  Vaccinium  with  the  young  leaves  purplish  brown. 
The  peat-mosses  (Sphagnum)  were  genuine  and  proved  that  we  had  reached  a 
temperate  clime,  where  a  rich  harvest  of  water-bears  and  other  animals  was  to  be 
looked  for,  and  this  anticipation  was  not  disappointed. 

Dr.  Mackay  went  on  and  ascended  Mount  Kosciusko  itself,  but  as  the  journey 
was  made  on  horseback  there  was  no  chance  to  gather  moss  on  the  highest  point  of 
land  on  the  Australian  Continent.  A  great  deal  of  moss  was  collected  on  lesser 
peaks,  between  5000  and  6000  feet  in  height.  The  mosses  afterwards  yielded  many 
water-bears,  including  two  interesting  species  which  are  new  to  science  (Echiniscus 
jmlcher  and  Macrobiotics  aculeatus). 

On  the  trip  to  the  Blue  Mountains  Mr.  Goddard  kindly  accompanied  me  as 
guide.  It  was  a  hurried  visit,  as  only  two  days  could  be  given  up  to  it.  At 
Katoomba,  where  we  stayed,  at  an  elevation  of  something  like  3000  feet,  the  air 
was  invigorating,  but  the  sun  was  hot,  the  earth  was  scorched,  and  no  moss  was  to 
be  seen.  But  Mr.  Goddard  had  good  reason  for  selecting  Katoomba.  It  lies  close- 
to  the  edge  of  the  wonderful  sunken  valley,  between  1000  and  2000  feet  in  depth, 
bounded  by  vertical  precipices.  Little  gullies,  leading  to  the  valley  bottom,  have 
been  utilised  for  the  making  of  stairways,  by  which  access  is  now  easy.  In  these 
shady  gullies  there  are  trickles  of  water  and  plenty  of  moss,  including  even 
Sphagnum  and  Laucobryum  (or  a  plant  which  looks  like  it). 

On  the  day  of  our  arrival  we  descended  one  of  the  stairways,  some  2000  steps, 
and,  after  traversing  a  part  of  the  bush  in  the  valley,  ascended  near  the  Falls  of 
Leura.  The  trees  in  the  valley,  as  well  as  boulders  and  rocks,  were  often  festooned 
with  slender  hanging  branches  of  a  pleurocarpous  moss.  Returning  home,  a  first 
examination  of  the  moss  was  made.  On  glancing  at  the  field  of  the  microscope  there 
immediately  met  the  eye  a  very  remarkable  Bdelloid  rotifer  (Callidina  mirabilis, 
described  in  a  subsequent  number  of  this  publication)  and  several  other  strange 
beasts  were  discovered  on  this  cursory  examination,  including  some  water-bears.  It 
was  an  index  of  what  we  were  to  expect  from  the  Katoomba  collections.  We  had 
reached  our  best  collecting-ground  in  Australia.  For  long  afterwards  the  moss 
continued  to  produce  good  things  whenever  examined,  and  it  was  a  year  afterwards 
that  the  best  find  of  all  was  made,  a  new  generic  type  of  Tardigrade,  which  has  been 


TARDIGRADA:    AUSTRALIA  125 

named  Oreella.  It  is  essentially  an  Echiniscus  which  lacks  the  armature  of  protec- 
tive plates,  and  has  a  soft  body  like  Macrobiotus. 

In  Queensland  there  was  only  one  day  available  for  collecting.  By  the  advice  of 
Mr.  Bailey,  the  veteran  botanist,  it  was  spent  in  the  bush  at  the  quiet  little  station 
of  Eumuudi,  some  distance  north  of  Brisbane.  The  weather  was  very  hot,  and  the 
bush  was  very  dry.  The  prickly  wires  of  the  Rattan,  as  they  sawed  lines  in  the 
face,  sometimes  several  at  one  time,  were  rather  dangerous  to  the  eyes,  and  often 
required  a  pause  of  several  minutes  as  they  were  carefully  picked  off,  one  by  one, 
before  progress  could  be  resumed.  But  here  and  there  pendent  pleurocarpous  mosses 
hung  from  the  trees,  and  with  these  I  filled  my  pockets.  In  some  little  gullies, 
where  a  few  pools  of  water  indicated  the  existence  of  a  stream  in  rainy  weather, 
there  were  tufts  of  various  mosses. 

These  mosses  afterwards  proved  fairly  productive,  both  of  water-bears  and 
rotifers.  The  experience  with  these  Queensland  mosses  illustrates  how  local 
water-bears  are  in  their  distribution,  and  the  capriciousness  of  the  method  of 
collecting  from  mosses.  For  a  long  time  the  mosses  from  Queensland  gave  very 
meagre  results,  and  at  last,  a  year  after  gathering,  a  tuft  in  no  way  different-looking 
from  the  rest,  produced  water-bears  enough  to  make  up  quite  a  fair  list  for  Queens- 
land, including  two  interesting  new  species  of  Echiniscus. 

Since  my  return  to  England,  Mr.  S.  Johnston  of  Sydney  has  been  good  enough  to 
send  me  freshly  gathered  mosses,  which  have  afforded  an  opportunity  of  continuing 
the  study  of  the  Australian  water-bears  and  other  animals. 

The  region  examined  in  Australia  extends  over  about  10  degrees  of  latitude,  from 
27°  S.  in  Queensland  to  37°  S.  on  the  borders  of  New  South  Wales  and  Victoria. 

Previous  knowledge  of  Australian  Tardigrada. — There  is  very  little  known 
of  Australian  water-bears.  Whitelegge's  "Invertebrate  Fauna,"  1889  (46),  has  no 
reference  to  the  group.  The  only  record  I  have  been  able  to  find  is  in 
Ilichters'  "  Moosfauna  Australiens,"  1908  (37),  in  which  he  mentions  the  ubiquitous 
M.  hufelandii  as  found  at  Katoomba,  in  the  Blue  Mountains. 

LIST  OF  THE  SPECIES  COLLECTED 

Echiniscus  mutabilis,  Murray.  Milnesium  tardiyradwm,  Doyere. 

E.  nwcezeelandice,  Richters.  Maerobiofus  hufelandii,  Schultze. 

E.  pulcher,  sp.  n.  M.  echinogenitus,  Richters. 

E.  arctomys,  Ehrenberg.  M.  areolatus,  Murray. 

E.  kerguelensis,  Ricbters.  M.  harmsworthi,  Murray. 

E.  tessellatus,  sp.  n.  M.  hufelandioides,  sp.  n. 

E.  intermedius,  sp.  n.  M.  occidentalis,  Murray. 

E.  spiniyer,  Richters.  M.  intermedius,  Plate. 

E.  duboisi,  Richters.  M.  crassidens,  Murray. 

E.  blumi,  Richters.  M.  acideatus,  sp.  n. 

E.  oihonme,  Richters.  M.  dispar,  Murray. 

Oreella  inollis,  gen.  n.,  sp.  n.  M.  arclicus,  Murray. 


126  J.  MURRAY 

M.  sattieri,  Eichters.  M.  virgatus,  Murray. 

M.  pupillifer,  Murray.  Diphascon  chilcnense,  Plate. 

M.  rubens,  Murray.  D.  scoticum,  Murray. 

M.  augusti,  Murray. 

Seven  species  not  identified  (5  Echiniscus,  2  Macroliotus). 

NOTES  ON  THE  SPECIES 

Genus — Echiniscus,  Schultze  (43) 

A:  SPECIES  HAVING  SEGMENTS  V.  AND  VI.  DISTINCT 

Echiniscus  mutabilis,  Murray  (12) 

Common  in  all  the  localities  visited,  both  in  New  South  Wales  and  Queensland. 

It  is  desirable  that  a  correction  should  be  made  in  this  place  in  regard  to  all 
records  which  I  have  made  heretofore  of  E.  arctomys  in  various  countries.  All 
these  records  must  be  taken  as  referring  to  E.  mutabilis.  The  error  arose  from  a 
misunderstanding  of  E.  arctomys,  Ehr.  That  species  was  supposed  by  Richters  to 
have  segments  V.  a,nd  VI.  separate,  but  V.  was  described  as  being  a  half-ring,  not 
a  pair,  and  there  were  no  spines  on  the  inner  claws.  E.  mutabilis  has  V.  paired, 
and  there  are  small  barbs,  easily  overlooked,  on  the  inner  claws.  The  differences 
are  slight,  as  the  separation  of  the  third  pair  (segment  V.)  of  plates  in  E.  mutabilis 
is  very  obscure.  If  it  is  conceded  that  these  differences  are  not  of  specific  value, 
then  Richters'  records  of  E.  arctomys  may  also  refer  to  E.  mutabilis,  Murray.* 

The  true  E.  arctomys,  Ehr.  ["  Mikrogeologie,"  1854  (4)],  is  quite  a  different  animal. 
It  has  segments  V.  and  VI.  united  (see  p.  128). 

If  it  is  sought  to  identify  E.  mutabilis  with  any  of  Ehrenberg's  species  it  must  be 
with  E.  suillus.  The  figure  of  that  species  is  only  a  profile,  and  therefore  not  very 
satisfactory  for  identification.  It  is  not  clear  if  the  last  line  crossing  the  trunk  is 
the  separation  of  V.  and  VI.  or  only  one  slit  of  the  ordinary  trefoil.  If  it  is  supposed 
that  V.  and  VI.  are  separate,  there  remains  another  difference.  Ehrenberg  figures 
on  the  near  fourth  leg  one  very  large  curved  spine  at  the  base  of  the  claws.  This 
may  represent  the  barb  of  the  inner  claws,  though  if  so  it  is  incorrectly  drawn.  In 
any  case  it  is  different  from  anything  in  E.  mutabilis.  A  skin  of  150  M  contained 
three  eggs  of  50  M  by  42  M. 

Echiniscus  novcezeelandice,  Richters  (37)  (Plate  XV.  Fig.  5) 

Near  Sydney  and  at  Katoomba,  in  the  Blue  Mountains,  pretty  frequent. 
The  figure  on  Plate  XV.  is  drawn  from  an  Australian  example,  in  order  to  show 
some  peculiarities  which  are  commoner  in  that  country.     These  are — the  forking  of 

*  Prof,  llichters  informs  me  in  a  letter  that  all  his  records  under  the  name  E.  arctomys  should  be 
E.  suilhis,  Ehr.  The  relationship  of  E.  'Mutabilis  to  E.  saillus  requires  further  investigation. 


TARDIGRADA:    AUSTRALIA  127 

the  dorsal  spine,  and  the  presence  of  little  conical  processes  at  thep  ostero-lateral 
angles  of  IV.     Occasionally  these  little  cones  occur  also  at  segments  II.  and  III. 
Examples  of  175  and  140  AI  had  eggs,  which  measured  56  M  by  40  «. 

Echiniscus  pulcher,  sp.  n.  (Plate  XVIII.  Fig.   34) 

Specific  characters. — Large,  red;  V.  and  VL^  separate ;  three  median  plates; 
V.  a  narrow  half-ring ;  pairs  obscurely  divided  ;  lateral  processes — a  a  seta,  b,  c,  d, 
conical  knobs,  e  a  long  seta ;  no  fringe  on  fourth  legs,  inner  claws  with  small  barbs. 

General  description. — Length  300  M,  seta  e  100  /x.  The  four  cirri  near  the 
mouth  have  conspicuous  conical  bases,  the  palps  beside  them  are  very  large ;  seta  a 
measures  about  75  M,  and  has  a  palp  or  auricle  at  its  base.  The  plates  may  be 
regarded  as  eleven  in  number  (the  normal  number  is  twelve  in  that  section  of  the 
genus  which  has  V.  and  VI.  separate),  but  many  of  the  divisions  are  obscure.  The 
head  and  shoulder  plates,  and  V.  and  VI.,  are  quite  distinct.  The  three  median 
have  the  posterior  edge  distinct  and  rounded.  The  second  and  third  median  are 
divided  by  a  median  line  ;  their  anterior  edge  is  faintly  marked,  and  between  it  and 
the  pairs  there  is  an  area  whioh  may  be  regarded  as  belonging  to  either.  V.  is  a 
very  narrow  band,  with  no  sign  of  being  a  pair,  and  sharply  separated  from  the 
plates  before  and  behind.  VI.  is  not  distinctly  trefoliate,  but  there  are  obscure  lines 
where  the  cut  of  the  trefoil  would  be,  and  those  of  the  opposite  sides  appear  to  be 
joined.  Seta  e  springs  not  from  the  very  edge  of  the  plate  but  a  little  way  up  on 
the  dorsal  surface. 

The  animal  is  much  flattened  dorso-ventrally.  The  plates  are  very  finely  dotted 
with  pellucid  dots.  The  claws  are  slender  and  the  small  barb  is  very  near  the  base. 
The  legs  are  short. 

The  larva  is  unusually  large,  measuring  175  /*.  It  has  two  claws,  and  differs  in 
no  other  respect  from  the  adult.  Eggs  up  to  the  number  of  nine  have  been  seen  in 
the  cast  skin,  by  far  the  largest  number  I  have  seen  in  an  Echiniscus. 

Habitat. — Among  moss  from  the  summit  of  a  mountain,  Pretty  Point,  in  the 
Australian  Alps  near  Mount  Kosciusko,  6000  feet,  April  1909.  Very  abundant  in 
the  tufts  of  one  kind  of  moss,  which  has  not  been  identified.  Not  known  elsewhere. 
The  skins  with  eggs  were  common,  and  a  number  of  larvse  were  seen. 

There  are  about  a  dozen  species  in  the  section  of  the  genus  to  which  E.  pulcher 
belongs.  They  have  segments  V.  and  VI.  distinct.  None  of  these  species  come  near 
enough  to  pulcher  to  cause  any  difficulty  in  discriminating  them.  Only  two  of  them 
possess  seta  e  (E.  borealis  and  E.  islandicus)  and  they  differ  conspicuously,  having 
numerous  long  spines,  lateral  and  dorsal,  on  the  body. 

E.  imberbis  (38)  is  most  like  E.  pulcher,  but  the  long  seta  is  d,  and  segment  V. 
is  a  pair  and  bears  two  dorsal  spines.  E.  pulcher  is  the  only  species  known  to  me 
which  has  plate  V.  decidedly  as  a  half-ring,  and  not  paired. 


128  J.  MURRAY 

B :  SPECIES  HAVING  V.  AND  VI.  FUSED 
fJchiniscus  arctomys,  Ehrenberg  (3) 

On  technical  grounds  I  identify  an  Australian  species  as  Ehrenberg's  arctomys, 
although  not  quite  sure  that  it  is  mature.  Ehrenberg's  very  meagre  description, 
as  far  as  it  goes,  fits  the  Australian  animal.  There  are  nine  coarsely  punctate  plates, 
the  seta  a  is  of  moderate  length,  there  are  no  other  setse  or  spines  on  the  body,  and 
no  fringe  on  the  last  legs,  or  barbs  on  the  claws. 

The  dots  in  our  animal  appear  to  be  pits.  The  lumbar  plate  is  strongly  faceted, 
having  a  central  panel,  two  lateral,  and  one  posterior,  the  lateral  and  posterior  facets 
being  separated  by  the  clefts  which  make  the  trefoil. 

The  length  of  the  animal  is  about  230  /x,  exclusive  of  the  fourth  legs ;  seta  a 
measures  about  50  n,  and  the  claws  12  to  15  M. 

Habitat. — Katoomba,  Blue  Mountains  ;  fairly  plentiful. 

As  already  pointed  out  (pp.  110  and  126),  all  my  previous  records  under  the 
name  of  E.  arctomys  are  erroneous,  and  really  refer  to  a  form  of  E.  mutabilis.  This 
is  the  first  record  I  have  made  of  the  true  arctomys,  agreeing  with  Ehrenberg's 
description  and  figure. 

According  to  the  records  E.  arctomys  is  one  of  the  most  cosmopolitan  of 
Tardigrada,  but  it  is  doubtful  whether  many  of  them  refer  to  the  true  arctomys 
of  Ehrenberg. 

Echiniscus  kerguelensis,  Richters  (31)  (Plate  XVI.  Fig.  13) 

Professor  Richters,  unfortunately,  gives  no  figure  of  this  species.  From  his 
description  it  appears  to  be  distinguished  from  E.  arctomys  by  the  presence  of  a 
fringe  on  the  fourth  leg,  and  by  the  weaker  granulation. 

As  in  the  absence  of  a  figure  of  the  species  the  identity  is  not  quite  certain,  I 
here  figure  and  describe  fully  the  Australian  form. 

Description. — Total  length,  exclusive  of  legs,  225  M,  seta  a  about  80  M  long 
(which  is  longer  than  that  of  the  Australian  arctomys,  but  shorter  than  that  of 
tvendti).  Plates  nine,  coarsely  punctate  with  apparent  perforations.  The  auricles  at 
the  bases  of  setse  a  are  prominent  and  somewhat  elongate.  The  mouth  cirri  and 
palps  are  normal.  The  plates  of  the  pairs  are  each  divided  into  two  parts  by  a  line 
which  cuts  off  a  narrow  zone  parallel  with  the  anterior  border.  There  are  two 
median  plates.  The  lumbar  plate  is  trefoliate  and  is  not  faceted.  The  fourth  legs 
are  fairly  long,  and  each  has  a  blunt  palp  near  its  base.  The  fringe  consists  of 
narrow  sharp  spines.  The  inner  claws  have  decurved  barbs.  The  colour  is  red. 

Habitat. — The  Australian  Alps  of  New  South  Wales,  near  the  Victorian  border, 
altitude  5000  to  6000  feet. 

The  occurrence  of  this  Kerguelen  species  in  Australia,  one  of  the  nearest  masses 


TARDIGRADA:    AUSTRALIA  129 

of  continental  land,  is  not  at  all  surprising,  and  at  the  high  elevation  at  which 
it  lived  the  climatic  conditions  might  approximate  nearly  to  those  of  the  bleak 
southern  island. 

Echiniscus  tessellatus,  sp.  n.  (Plate  XVI.  Fig.  15) 

Specific  characters. — Small,  yellow,  plates  nine,  Y.  and  VI.  joined,  coarsely  papil- 
lose. Seta  a  at  base  of  head,  very  long.  Shoulder  plate  divided  into  ten  papillose  facets, 
separated  by  plain  bands ;  lumbar  plate  divided  into  six  similar  facets ;  the  paired 
plates  divided  into  three  portions  each  by  lines  merely ;  two  pairs,  lumbar  plate 
trefoliate.  The  lateral- ventral  margins  of  the  principal  plates  with  a  non-granular 
band,  which  in  empty  skins  forms  a  glassy  clear  zone  round  the  whole  animal  like  a 
nimbus.  Last  leg  with  a  spiny  fringe,  claws  without  barbs. 

General  description. — Length  200  M,  seta  a  150  /«.  The  form  is  short  and  broad, 
relatively  broader  in  the  empty  skin.  The  plain  lateral  marginal  band  of  the 
shoulder,  paired,  and  lumbar  plates  appears  to  be  free  from  the  body,  forming  a 
kind  of  projecting  flange,  which  can  sometimes  be  seen  in  the  living  animal,  but  is 
more  pronounced  in  the  empty  skin.  The  papillae  are  large  hemispherical  knobs,  the 
coarsest  known  in  an  Echiniscus.  The  subdivisions  of  the  shoulder  and  lumbar 
plates  are  not  to  be  regarded  as  distinct  plates ;  they  are  panels  ornamenting  the 
surface.  The  lumbar  plate  is  faceted,  having  four  surfaces,  which  meet  at  an  angle 
—a  central  one,  two  lateral,  and  one  posterior. 

The  papillae  are  seen  on  the  posterior  margins  of  most  of  the  plates,  showing  that 
the  skin  is  there  bent  over. 

The  two-clawed  larva  is  known,  and  skins  with  one  or  two  eggs  have  been  seen. 

Many  species  of  Echiniscus  have  the  plates  more  or  less  subdivided.  The  plates 
most  commonly  divided  are  the  pairs,  which  are  often  crossed  by  one  or  two  plain 
bands,  separating  the  plates  into  two  or  three  papillose  portions.  Sometimes  the 
median  plates  are  divided.  There  is  no  other  species  known  which  has  such  clear 
divisions  of  the  shoulder  and  lumbar  plates.  This  character  alone  distinguishes  it 
from  all  other  Echinisci.  Other  good  characters  are  the  hyaline  margin  to  the  plates, 
the  very  long  head  setae,  and  the  very  coarse  granules. 

Habitat. — Among  moss  from  trees  in  the  bush  at  Eumundi,  Queensland,  May 
1909.  Abundant  in  one  tuft  of  moss. 


Echiniscus  intermedius,  sp.  n.  (Plate  XVI.  Fig.  17) 

Specific  characters. — Small,  hyaline  or  greyish.  Mouth  cirri  with  large  conical 
bases.  Seta  a  long  ;  no  other  processes  on  the  body.  Plates  nine  ;  V.  and  VI.  united  ; 
two  pairs  ;  three  median  ;  each  divided  by  transverse  line  into  two  portions  ;  lumbar 
plate  not  trefoliate.  Plates  covered  with  very  wide  shallow  depressions,  the  margins 

BKIT.  ANTAKCT.  EXPED.   1907-9.       VOL.  I.  S 


130  J.  MURRAY 

of  which  make  a  regular  reticulation.     No  fringe  on  the  fourth  leg  :  a  blunt  palp  at 
the  base  of  the  fourth  leg ;  no  barbs  on  the  claws. 

Detailed  description. — Length,  exclusive  of  fourth  legs  and  head,  about  150  /x  ; 
seta  a  40  /*•  There  is  no  trace  of  the  red  colour  so  generally  characteristic  of  Ecliinisci. 
The  plates  are  the  usual  nine.  The  first  and  second  median  plates  are  each  divided 
into  two  portions,  of  which  the  anterior  is  larger  and  has  a  rounded  posterior  border. 
The  third  median  has  a  similar  appearance,  but  the  second  portion  is  so  obscurely 
separated  from  the  lumbar  plate  that  it  may  be  reckoned  as  part  of  it.  Under 
pressure  there  is  no  trace  of  division  of  the  lumbar  plate  into  a  trefoil.  This  is  a  very 
unusual  character.  Though  a  number  of  species  are  figured  without  the  slits,  it  is 
suspected  that  they  may  have  been  sometimes  overlooked.  They  are  often  not 
visible  in  a  dorsal  view  when  the  body  is  drawn  together.  The  eyes  are  red. 

Habitat. — Eumundi,  Queensland  ;  two  examples. 

Very  similar  animals  in  Hawaii  and  Canada  show  an  interesting  series  of  changes 
in  the  markings  of  the  plates.  In  the  type  the  reticulation  is  relatively  large,  the 
hexagons  measuring  5  or  6  /*  in  diameter ;  in  the  Hawaiian  variety  they  are  only 
2  or  3  M  in  diameter  ;  in  the  Canadian  form  no  depressions  or  reticulation  can  be 
detected,  but  the  plates  are  marked  by  extremely  fine  pellucid  dots.  These  differences 
are  of  some  importance,  and  probably  indicate  that  the  three  forms  have  been  long 
isolated. 

In  Queensland  neither  eggs  nor  larva?  were  found.  It  would  have  been  impossible 
to  decide  whether  the  specimens  were  mature,  and  the  very  small  size  would  have  led 
to  the  supposition  that  they  were  young.  The  Canadian  and  Hawaiian  examples 
supplied  what  was  lacking  in  our  knowledge.  In  Canada  the  species  was  plentiful. 
Though  no  eggs  were  found,  there  were  a  number  of  larvre.  These  have  a  distinctive 
form,  especially  of  the  head  and  the  lumbar  plates,  which  are  quite  different  from 
those  of  other  species,  but  more  easily  understood  from  the  figure  than  from 
descriptions  (Plate  XX.  Fig.  52l>).  In  Honolulu  the  eggs  were  found.  Skins  with 
eggs  were  even  smaller  than  the  Australian  examples,  so  it  may  be  supposed  that 
these  were  full-grown. 

The  peculiar  faceting  of  the  lumbar  plate,  so  well  marked  in  Canada  and  Hawaii, 
was  not  observed  in  Australia,  but  the  two  specimens  studied  were  not  in  favourable 
condition  for  observing  such  characters. 

The  species  may  be  easily  distinguished  from  all  others  yet  known  by  the  small 
size,  large  seta  a,  divided  median  plates,  lack  of  red  colour,  and  of  trefoil. 

The  name  intermedius  does  not  indicate  that  the  animal  is  supposed  to  be  truly 
intermediate  between  the  two  great  divisions  of  the  genus  (those  having  V.  and  VI. 
fused,  and  those  having  them  separate).  It  shares  some  of  the  characters  of  both, 
without  being  genetically  intermediate. 

E.  intermedius  belongs  to  a  small  group  of  species  which  have  no  dorsal  or  lateral 
processes  after  the  seta  a  at  the  base  of  the  head.  There  are  about  a  dozen  forms  in 


TARDIGRADA:    AUSTRALIA  131 

the  group.  All  of  them  differ  conspicuously  and  need  not  be  compared  in  detail.  It 
is  enough  to  say  that  no  one  of  them  has  the  median  plates  transversely  divided, 
except  the  variety  exarmatus  of  E.  gladiator.  That  has  large  barbs  on  the  inner 
claws  of  the  fourth  leg,  the  paired  plates  gape  behind,  and  there  are  other  points  of 
difference. 

Echiniscus  spiniger,  Richters  (28)  (Plate  XVII.  Fig.  24) 

Habitat. — Among  moss  from  the  bush  at  Eumundi,  Queensland. 

This  Australian  animal  is  identified  with  Richters'  species,  despite  some  small 
differences,  which  do  not  appear  to  be  very  important.  Richters'  type  has  the  four 
lateral  spines,  b,  c,  d,  and  e,  nearly  equal,  and  from  30  to  36  p.  in  length  ;  the  dorsal 
process  over  c  is  a  seta  of  51  M,  and  that  over  d  a  curved  spine  of  48  M. 

The  Australian  form  has  the  spine  b  shorter,  of  8  to  10  /j.  in  length  ;.  c,  d,  and  e  of 
about  30  M  ;  the  dorsal  spines  over  c  and  d  are  short,  of  only  10  to  15  /«.  The  dorsal 
processes  vary  greatly  in  size,  and  may  be  absent.  Many  species  vary  in  the  same 
respect. 

The  teeth  or  spines  of  the  fringe  on  the  fourth  legs  are  obtuse.  The  barbs  of  the 
inner  claws  of  the  fourth  legs  are  very  strong,  and  are  placed  farther  from  the  base 
than  in  most  species,  resembling  those  of  E.  gladiator.  The  plates  are  marked  with 
very  fine  pellucid  dots.  Richters  says  nothing  as  to  the  granulation. 

Unfortunately  Richters  gives  no  figure  of  his  species,  but  his  description  is  such 
that  the  positions  of  the  spines  and  setse  can  be  definitely  known,  and  a  diagram  of 
the  animal  can  be  constructed  from  it. 

Echiniscus  duboisi,  Richters  (25)  (Plate  XVII.  Figs.  19-20) 

Two  varieties  of  this  species  occurred  in  Australia,  neither  of  them  agreeing 
closely  with  the  type.  That  has  the  four  lateral  spines,  b,  c,  d,  and  e,  short,  nearly 
equal,  and  finely  spinulose ;  the  dorsal  spines  smooth. 

Description  of  the  Australian  varieties.  Variety  1  (Fig.  19). — Size  moderate, 
length  about  250  M,  exclusive  of  the  legs.  Seta  a  is  80  ^  in  length,  and  the  "  auricle  " 
at  its  base  is  elongate  (about  15  n  in  length).  The  four  lateral  spines  are  of  different 
lengths — b  is  25/u  long,  c  46  n,  d  50  M,  and  e  40  M,  but  they  vary  considerably  in  different 
individuals.  The  dorsal  spine  over  c  is  very  short  (12  M),  and  is  smooth.  It  is  inserted 
nearer  the  median  line  of  the  body  than  the  postero -dorsal  angle  of  the  plate.  The 
spine  over  d  is  50  M  long,  flat,  and  serrate  on  both  margins. 

There  are  two  median  plates,  and  a  dotted  band  behind  the  second  pair,  which 
may  be  reckoned  as  a  plate  or  not.  The  dots  on  the  plates,  which  Ricliters  describes 
as  coarse  granules,  seem  in  our  specimens  to  be  pits  or  perforations,  irregular  in  size, 
and  some  very  large.  Each  plate  of  the  pairs  is  divided  into  two  parts  by  a  broad 
plain  baud,  ou  which  there  are  no  dots.  The  spines  of  the  fringe  on  the  fourth  leg 


J.  MURRAY 

are  narrow,  acute,  curved,  and  are  separated  at  their  bases.     There  are  no  outer  or 
inner  barbs  on  the  claws. 

Variety  2. — Smaller,  length  190  M.  Seta  a  not  seen  (only  dead  skins  were 
examined).  The  three  lateral  spines  (b  is  absent)  are  nearly  equal,  of  30  to  40  M. 
They  are  usually  strongly  curved,  and  they  bear  few  (three  or  four)  large  spinules, 
which  are  also  curved.  The  dorsal  spines  over  c  and  d  are  of  similar  length  to  the 
lateral  spines.  They  are  broad  and  flat,  and  are  irregularly  serrate  or  merely  erose 
on  the  margins.  The  dots  on  the  plates  are  like  those  of  variety  1.  There  is  no 
note  of  the  crossing  of  the  paired  plates  by  a  plain  band.  Fringe  and  claws  were 
not  seen. 

The  middle  lobe  of  the  trefoil  of  the  lumbar  plate  seems  marked  off  from  the 
anterior  portion  by  a  narrow  band,  interrupting  the  granules.  This  may  be  merely 
optical,  as  it  often  happens,  when  this  part  of  the  plate  forms  a  panel  set  at  an  angle 
to  the  rest  of  the  plate,  that  the  thickness  of  the  plate  is  seen  in  optical  section, 
marked  by  two  parallel  lines. 

Habitat. — Variety  1  common  in  the  Blue  Mountains  and  in  Queensland ;  variety 
2  Queensland. 

The  Australian  varieties  differ  from  the  type  in  having  the  dorsal  processes  also 
serrate.  Variety  1  is  nearer  the  type  ;  variety  2  lacks  spine  b. 

Echiniscus  blumi,  Eichters  (27)  (Plate  XVI.  Fig.  14) 

Habitat. — Australian  Alps,  several  examples. 

Agreeing  in  the  main  with  Eichters'  figure,  there  are  some  small  differences  of  no 
great  importance.  I  saw  no  third  median  plate,  but  that  may  often  be  hidden  by 
:he  pair  in  front.  The  dots,  which  appear  to  be  granules,  are  smaller  and  closer. 
Che  lumbar  plate  is  not  divided  right  across,  as  in  Eichters'  figure,  but  simply  divided 
by  two  slits  into  a  trefoil.  In  this  respect  I  believe  Professor  Eichters  now  agrees 
with  my  interpretation. 

Some  of  the  setae  in  the  example  figured  have  little  curved  branches,  which  I 
have  seen  in  no  other  species  except  an  undescribed  Antarctic  one.  The  straight 
spines  on  the  outer  claws  of  the  fourth  legs  vary  from  one  to  three  in  number,  as  I 
have  previously  observed  in  E.  granulatus.  The  largest  example  measured  400  M  in 
length,  exclusive  of  the  fourth  legs. 

Echiniscus  oihonnce,  Eichters  ?  (27)  (Plate  XVII.  Fig.  21) 

There  are  several  points  of  difference  from  Eichters'  type  which  render  this 
identification  more  than  doubtful.  The  lateral  process  c  is  reduced  to  a  long  spine  : 
the  dorsal  process  over  d  is  elongated  into  a  sharp  spine  of  moderate  length  ;  the 
spicules  at  the  bases  of  b,  c,  d,  and  e,  were  not  observed.  In  the  aggregate  these 
characters  are  of  some  weight,  but  the  most  important  one  (the  lack  of  spicules)  is 


TARDIGRADA:    AUSTRALIA  133 

very  difficult  to  be  sure  about,  and  I  do  not  feel  justified  in  separating  a  new  species 
on  a  mere  difference  in  the  relative  proportions  of  two  processes. 

In  a  subsequent  chapter  in  this  paper,  on  Canadian  Tardigrada  (p.  163)  another 
form  is  recorded  doubtfully  as  E.  oihonnce.  Its  divergence  from  the  type  has  taken 
quite  another  direction.  On  any  estimate  of  specific  values  these  two  extreme  forms 
(the  Canadian  and  the  Australian)  cannot  be  regarded  as  one  and  the  same  species, 
but  we  must  learn  more  about  the  extent  and  the^  limits  of  variation  among  Ecliinisci 
before  we  shall  know  what  to  make  of  them. 

Description. — Length  250  ,«,  exclusive  of  legs;  seta  a  130  M,  &  36  M,  c  50  M, 
d  60  M,  e  150  M.  Mouth  cirri  long  and  palps  large.  Dorsal  processes,  over  c  a  seta  of 
120  M,  over  d  one  of  30  n.  Plates  nine,  two  pairs,  two  median.  The  dots  are  of  moderate 
size,  and  appear  to  be  pits.  They  are  uniform  in  size  and  regularly  spaced.  The 
lumbar  plate  is  trefoliate  and  divided  into  four  facets,  of  which  the  posterior  one 
shows  obscure  subdivision  into  two.  The  spines  of  the  fringe  are  triangular  and  acute. 
The  claws  are  large  (actual  measurement  not  noted)  and  the  inner  ones  have  de- 
curved  spines  (barbs)  a  little  way  above  the  base. 

Habitat. — Among  moss,  Australian  Alps  near  the  southern  border  of  New  South 
Wales,  altitude  5000  to  6000  feet. 


Echiniscus,  sp.  ?  (Plate  XVI.  Fig.  18) 

A  large  red  animal  (the  figure  is  drawn  from  a  small  individual)  with  no  dorsal 
processes.  Plates  nine,  V.  and  VI.  united,  two  pairs,  two  median.  Lateral  processes 
four  setse,  a,  c,  d,  and  e,  each  100  M  to  150  M  or  even  more  in  length.  Auricle  at 
base  of  seta  a  exceptionally  long  (about  15  M),  palp  near  mouth  very  large.  The 
markings  on  the  plates  are  larger  and  smaller  dots,  which  look  like  perforations. 
Each  of  the  paired  plates  is  divided  into  two  dotted  areas,  separated  by  a  plain 
undotted  band.  The  fourth  legs  have  a  fringe  of  sharp  spines,  and  the  inner  claws 
have  small  decurved  barbs. 

The  texture  of  the  plates,  and  the  interruption  of  the  paired  plates  by  a  plain 
band,  are  exactly  as  in  E.  duboisi  (Plate  XVII.  Fig.  19)  and  E.  spinulosus  (Plate 
XIX.  Fig.  38).  These  characters  may  be  common  to  many  species  of  Echiniscus, 
but  species  have  not  usually  been  examined  with  sufficient  attention  to  the  markings 
of  the  plates.  The  absence  of  dorsal  processes  is  probably  not  a  constant  character. 

Habitat. — Australian  Alps,  New  South  Wales,  altitude  5000  to  6000  feet. 

The  lateral  setse  are  the  same  in  number  as  in  E.  testudo  and  some  related 
species,  but  they  are  ft,  c,  d,  e,  instead  of  a,  b,  c,  e.  E.  velaminis  has  exactly  the  same 
seta;  (Plate  XV.  Fig.  6),  but  differs  in  having  two  dorsal  setoe  at  each  side,  in  not 
having  the  paired  plates  divided  into  two  dotted  areas,  in  having  the  auricles  small, 
and  no  barbs  on  any  claws. 


J.   MURRAY 

EcUniscus  sp.  ?  (Plate  XVII.  Fig.  25) 

A  small  animal  resembling  that  figured  on  Plate  XVI.  Fig.  18,  and  having  the 
same  number  of  lateral  processes,  but  having  also  one  dorsal  seta  on  each  side.  The 
lateral  setae  are  a,  c,  d,  and  e.  They  differ  greatly  in  length.  The  seta  a  is  50  /x  in 
length,  c  is  30  n,  d  150  M  (equal  to  the  whole  length  of  the  body),  e  70  /*.  The  dorsal 
seta  is  over  c  and  measures  50  M. 

The  plates  are  marked  with  obscure  dots,  the  nature  of  which  could  not  be  made 
out.  The  fourth  legs  have  a  fringe  of  sharp  spines,  and  the  inner  claws  have 
decurved  barbs  of  moderate  size,  which  are  farther  from  the  base  than  usual. 
Colour  pink. 

Habitat. — Australian  Alps,  New  South  Wales,  altitude  5000  to  6000  feet. 

This  animal  has  some  resemblance  to  E.  oihonnce,  but  it  lacks  the  process  b,  and 
it  has  c  a  spine  and  d  a  long  seta,  whereas  oihonnce  has  c  the  seta  and  d  the  spine. 
It  also  lacks  the  lateral  spicules  of  oihonnoe,. 

EcUniscus,  sp.  ?  (Plate  XVII.  Fig.  22). 

A  large  animal  with  two  very  long  setae  on  each  side,  in  addition  to  seta  a  on  the 
head.  There  are  nine  plates,  V.  and  VI.  united,  two  pairs  and  two  median.  The 
dots  are  large  circles  of  uniform  size  and  close  together.  The  lateral  setae  are  a,  b, 
and  c  ;  b  and  c  are  about  170  /x  in  length.  Over  c  there  is  a  dorsal  seta  also  of 
170  n ;  over  d  there  is  a  flat  spine  of  25  M  in  length  by  6  to  9  M  across  the  base. 
An  empty  skin  measured  270  /u  in  length  by  140  M  in  breadth. 

The  fringe  has  six  to  eight  blunt  rounded  processes.  There  are  no  barbs  on  any 
claws. 

This  animal  may  be  compared  with  E.  muscicola,  Plate,  and  E.  spitsbergensis, 
Scourfield.  Plate's  description  (23)  is  very  meagre,  and  takes  no  account  of  the 
fringe,  the  barbs  of  the  claws,  or  the  surface  texture  of  the  plates.  The  setae  are 
a,  b,  c,  and  e,  and  over  c  there  is  a  long  dorsal  seta.  Our  animal  lacks  seta  e, 
and  has  an  additional  spine  over  d. 

Eichters  (35)  adds  to  Plate's  description,  noting  the  nature  of  the  granulation, 
and  that  the  inner  claws  are  barbed.  His  description  of  the  granulation  fits  our 
animal.  When  you  focus  high  on  the  dots  they  appear  as  circles  with  central 
points ;  when  you  focus  deeper  they  become  hexagons. 

Scourfield's  description  of  E.  spitsbergensis  (45)  is  better,  and  he  gives  a  figure. 
It  has  four  seise,  a,  b.  c,  and  d ;  it  has  a  flat  triangular  process  over  d ;  the  inner 
claws  are  barbed,  and  there  is  a  fringe  of  rounded  processes. 

This  Australian  animal  stands  near  to  both  E.  muscicola  and  E.  spitsbergensis, 
from  the  latter  of  which  it  only  differs  by  one  pair  of  setfe  and  the  lack  of  barbs  on 
the  inner  claws. 

Habitat. — Australian  Alps,  New  South  Wales,  altitude  5000  to  GOOO  feet. 


TARDIGRADA:    AUSTRALIA  135 

Echiniscus,  sp.  ?  (Plate  XVI.  Fig.  1C) 

Small;  plates  nine,V.  and  VI.  joined,  two  pairs,  two  median.  Lateral  processes — a 
a  curved  seta  of  50  /x ;  d,  a  strong  curved  spine  of  50  n.  Dorsal  processes — over  c  a 
strong  curved  spine  of  30  /*.  Dots  of  moderate  size,  regularly  spaced.  Fringe 
dentate,  with  few  small  points.  Inner  claws  with  somewhat  strong  decurved  barbs. 

The  length  is  200  ju,  exclusive  of  the  legs.  -  The  nature  of  the  dots  is  not 
apparent,  whether  granules  or  pits.  The  colour  is  red. 

Habitat. — Australian  Alps,  New  South  Wales,  altitude  5000  to  6000  feet. 

It  is  unlike  any  known  species,  but  it  is  probably  immature  and  might  acquire 
other  processes  as  it  grows. 

Echiniscus,  sp.  ? — larva  (Plate  XVII.  Fig.  23) 

Description — Small,  length  120  p.,  exclusive  of  legs.  Plates  9,  V.  and  VI. 
united,  two  pairs,  two  median.  Dots  of  moderate  size,  very  regular,  and  appearing 
to  be  granules. 

Lateral  processes — a  and  e,  a  a  seta  of  36  p.,  e  a  curved  spine  of  18  M.  Dorsal 
process — a  short  curved  spine  of  8  M  over  d.  There  is  a  fringe  of  small  triangular 
teeth,  and  the  claws  of  the  fourth  legs  have  large  decurved  barbs. 

Habitat. — Among  moss  from  the  bush  at  Eumundi,  Queensland. 

It  is  usually  impossible  to  assign  a  larva  of  Echiniscus  to  the  species  to  which  it 
belongs,  although  when  a  species  occurs  abundantly,  without  admixture  of  other 
species,  and  larvae  are  found  with  it,  there  is  a  presumption  that  they  belong  to  it. 
Some  larvae  of  species  having  very  distinct  characters  (such  as  E.  gladiator  and 
E.  reticidatus)  can  be  recognised  without  difficulty.  In  this  case  no  suggestion  can 
be  made  as  to  the  species. 

Oreella,  gen.  nov.  (Plate  XVIII.  Fig.  26) 

Generic  characters. — Head  with  ten  processes,  as  in  Echiniscus ;  body  soft,  not 
protected  on  back  and  sides  by  plates ;  teeth,  pharynx,  and  claws  as  in  Echiniscus. 

Oreella  has  the  soft  body  of  a  Macrobiotus,  with  the  teeth,  pharynx,  claws,  and 
processes  on  the  head  as  in  Echiniscus.  Minor  differences  from  typical  Echiniscus 
may  be  of  merely  specific  value,  and  will  be  noted  in  the  description  of  the  only 
species  at  present  known. 

Oreella  mollis,  sp.  n.  (Plate  XVIII.  Fig.  26) 

Specific  characters. — Small,  hyaline,  back  and  sides  papillose  ;  setae  at  base  of 
head  long,  springing  from  the  summits  of  large  narrow  conical  processes,  which  also 
bear  a  little  below  the  summit  long  narrow  palps  ;  cirri  near  mouth  with  small 
conical  bases  ;  anterior  pair  of  processes  narrow  cones ;  the  palps  reduced  to  small 


136  J.  MURRAY 

hemispherical  papillne ;  no  eyes ;  trunk  terminating  posteriorly  in  little  median 
process ;  legs  long,  obscurely  three-jointed ;  without  fringe ;  claws  all  similar, 
without  barbs  ;  stomach  brownish. 

General  description. — Length,  up  to  230  M  ;  the  teeth  are  very  short,  and  the 
pharynx  nearly  as  broad  as  long.  The  processes  on  the  head  and  mouth  correspond 
in  number  and  position  with  those  which  characterise  Echiniscus,  but  they  differ 
in  several  respects.  In  Echiniscus  each  of  the  principal  sette  (or  horns)  of  the  head 
has  at  its  base  a  separate  triangular  or  oblong  palp  (or  auricle).  In  Oreella  this  palp 
is  borne  near  the  summit  of  the  papilla  from  which  the  seta  springs.  In  Echiniscus 
the  four  processes  near  the  mouth  are  all  alike  cirri,  with  minute  conical  bases  ;  in 
Oreella  the  anterior  pair  are  not  cirri,  but  narrow  cones.  The  palps  seen  in  dorsal 
view  between  the  two  pairs  of  cirri  are  here  reduced  to  very  small  papillae.  The 
body  papillee  are  low  and  rounded.  They  might  be  regarded  as  the  rudiments  of 
the  armour-plating,  but  they  are  not  confined  to  definite  areas,  except  that  they  do 
not  extend  on  to  the  ventral  surface.  Each  leg  consists  of  three  joints,  of  which  the 
first  and  third  are  short,  and  the  middle  one  longer.  The  feet  are  slightly  webbed, 
a  membrane  joining  the  bases  of  the  claws.  Beneath  the  skin  an  obscure  irregular 
areolation  is  seen.  The  stomach  consists  of  a  few  large  cells,  which  contain  darker 
brown  spots.  No  mature  eggs  have  been  seen,  but  in  some  examples  there  appear 
to  be  two  very  young  eggs,  with  granular  contents. 

Though  in  all  essential  features  except  the  armour-plates  very  close  to  Echiniscus, 
there  are  several  little  points  in -which  it  differs  from  all  known  species  of  that  genus. 
These  are,  the  modification  of  the  anterior  pair  of  processes  near  the  mouth,  the 
elevation  of  the  auricle  on  the  same  papilla  which  bears  the  seta  a  at  the  base  of  the 
head,  the  absence  of  eyes,  and  the  little  median  "  tail"  which  terminates  the  body. 

Its  movements  are  very  slow. 

Habitat.— Katoomba,  in  the  Blue  Mountains  of  New  South  Wales,  altitude  about 
3000  feet.  It  was  found  in  moss  which  had  been  dry  for  about  a  year.  When 
moistened  about  fifteen  examples  were  found,  of  which  only  a  few  regained  activity. 

Most  of  the  genera  of  Tardigrada  are  closely  related  to  the  genus  Echiniscus. 
Though  no  other  genus  may  have  the  elaborate  armour-plating  which  protects 
Echiniscus,  all  of  them  but  Macrobiotus  and  Diphascon  possess  some  of  the  numerous 
palps  and  cirri  which  adorn  the  head  of  Echiniscus.  Several  genera  (Halechiniscus, 
Battilipes,  Oreella)  have  the  armature  of  the  head  almost  identical  with  that  of 
Echiniscus.  Other  genera  have  the  processes  more  or  less  modified,  or  reduced  in 
number  (Microlyda  [  =  Lydelld],  Echiniscoides,  Tetrakentron,  Milnesium). 

Milnesium,  which  departs  furthest  from  Echiniscus,  has  eight  palps  on  the  head 
which  may  be  regarded  as  homologous  with  eight  of  the  ten  processes  of  Echiniscus. 
In  Echiniscus  itself  the  processes  may  be  reduced  in  number,  though  any  departure 
from  the  normal  number  is  very  rare. 

All  the  exclusively  marine  genera,  five  in  number,  are  related  to  Echiniscus.     All 


TARDIGRADA:    AUSTRALIA  137 

of  these  have  some  spines  on  the  body  which  may  be  homologous  with  the  lateral  and 
dorsal  processes,  especially  two  at  the  posterior  extremity  which  appear  to  be  the 
most  constant,  and  are  probably  homologous  with  seta  e  of  Echiniscus.  Even  in  the 
genus  Macrobiotus  certain  species  (M.  dispar,  M.  aculeatus,  and  perhaps  the  group  of 
species  related  to  J/.  tuberculatus)  have  dorsal  processes  in  pairs,  which  may  be 
homologous  with  those  of  Echiniscus. 

Oreella  is  nearer  to  Echiniscus  than  any  of_the  other  genera.  It  has  all  the  ten 
processes  occupying  the  same  positions,  and  only  slightly  modified  in  detail.  The 
teeth,  pharynx,  and  claws  are  all  as  in  Echiniscus.  The  only  important  difference  is 
the  lack  of  the  armour-plates. 

GENUS — Milnesium,  Doyere  (2) 
Milnesium  tardigradum,  Doyere  (2) 

Common  in  all  the  districts  visited,  in  New  South  Wales  and  Queensland. 
Milnesium  is  the  most  thoroughly  cosmopolitan  of  all  Tardigrada. 
In  the  Australian  Alps  a  skin  was  found  which  contained  ten  eggs,  each  measuring 
104  n  in  length. 

GENUS — Macrobiotus,  Schultze  (42) 
A  :  SPECIES  WHICH  LAY  ROUGH  EGGS,  FREE 
Macrobiotus  hufelandii,  Schultze  (42) 

The  commonest  Tardigrade  here  as  in  most  other  places.  Found  in  all  the 
localities  visited  ;  eggs  equally  common. 

Macrobiotus  echinogenitus,  Richters  (27)  (Plate  XVIII.  Fig.  30) 
At  Katoomba  in  the  Blue  Mountains,  elevation  2000  to  3000  feet. 

Macrobiotus  areolatus,  Murray  (19) 

At  Katoomba  in  the  Blue  Mountains ;  only  eggs  seen.  This  species,  which  was 
regarded  as  a  variety  oi'M.  echniogenitus,  is  described  as  a  species  among  the  Canadian 
Tardigrada  in  this  paper,  as  in  Canada  material  was  got  for  a  study  of  the  egg,  the 
young,  and  the  adult.  It  can  be  identified  from  the  egg  alone. 

Macrobiotus  harmsworthi,  Murray  (19)  (Plate  XVIII.  Fig.  31) 

In  the  Australian  Alps,  near  Mount  Kosciusko,  altitude  5000  to  6000  feet.  Not 
to  be  identified  with  certainty  from  the  adult  alone  or  from  the  egg  alone.  It  is 
necessary  to  find  an  egg  containing  a  well-grown  young,  or  an  adult  with  ripe  eggs 
in  the  body.  In  this  instance  the  young  was  found  in  the  egg. 

BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.   1907-9.       VOL.  I.  T 


138  J.  MURRAY 

Macrobiotus  hufelandioides,  sp.  n.  (Plate  XVIII.  Figs.  29a-29c) 

Specific  characters. — Small.  Claws  of  hufelandi  type,  very  thick,  the  larger  one 
of  each  pair  with  two  strong  supplementary  points.  Teeth  slender,  curved  or  bent. 
Gullet  slender.  Pharynx  shortly  oval,  with  three  short  rods  in  each  row  of  thicken- 
ings. Egg-processes  conical  with  expanded  discoid  tops. 

Detailed  description. — Length,  350  /"  and  upwards.  No  figures  noted  for  larger 
examples.  The  teeth  are  slender,  and  taper  very  gradually.  They  are  bent  at  a  very 
obtuse  angle  just  after  emerging  from  the  guides,  and  again  more  abruptly  near 
the  furca.  The  gullet  is  scarcely  more  than  one-third  of  the  relative  width  of  that 
of  hufelandii.  The  three  rods  in  the  pharynx  are  about  twice  as  long  as  broad, 
and  have  rounded  ends.  They  are  of  nearly  equal  size.  The  first  one,  though 
clearly  distinguishable  from  the  apophysis,  is  apparently  closely  attached  to  the  end 
of  the  gullet.  There  is  no  comma,  or  a  very  small  and  obscure  one. 

The  stomach  is  brown,  with  darker  brown  patches.  The  fat-cells  are  8  to  10  M  in 
diameter.  There  are  two  dark  eyes.  The  claws  are  very  stout  and  strong ;  the 
lesser  one  considerably  shorter  than  the  other. 

Eggs  were  found  in  the  body  which,  when  squeezed  out  and  freed  from  the 
surrounding  membrane,  were  found  to  have  processes  like  those  of  the  typical 
hufelandii  egg.  The  processes  taper  from  a  broad  base,  which  is  surrounded  by  a 
circlet  of  dots,  and  are  abruptly  expanded  at  the  summit  into  flat  discs.  No  eggs 
were  found  which  contained  embryos,  but  the  establishment  of  the  relation  of  the  egg 
to  the  animal  was  made  in  the  more  satisfactory  way.  If  an  embryo  with  a  slender 
gullet  were  found  in  an  egg,  apparently  of  hufelandii,  it  might  be  supposed  that  the 
young  of  that  species  had  the  gullet  more  slender  (although  I  believe  this  is  not  so). 
When  the  eggs  are  got  in  a  mature  adult,  however,  there  is  no  such  doubt.  The 
species  occurred  in  two  localities  in  the  same  district,  confirming  the  first  observations. 

Habitat. — Australian  Alps,  near  the  southern  border  of  New  South  Wales ;  at 
the  Creel,  altitude  about  3000  feet,  and  on  the  summit  of  a  peak  near  the  Hospice 
on  the  road  to  Mount  Kosciusko,  altitude  5000  to  6000  feet. 

The  combination  of  an  egg  exactly  like,  and  claws  sufficiently  like,  those  of 
M.  hufelandii,  with  slender  teeth  and  gullet,  distinguishes  the  species  from  all  others. 
It  is  impossible  to  say  whether  it  is  really  very  close  to  M.  hufelandii,  or  has  acquired 
the  characters  in  which  it  resembles  it  independently.  All  the  closest  relations  of 
M.  hufelandii  have  very  wide  gullets  and  thick  powerful  teeth.  One  form  of  M.  inter- 
medius,  which  is  not  at  all  closely  related  to  M.  hufelandii,  has  similar  egg-processes. 

It  has  been  known  that  some  forms  of  M.  hufelandii  could  not  be  positively 
distinguished  from  allied  species,  and  the  egg  had  to  be  relied  upon  for  their 
separation.  It  was  supposed  that  the  egg,  with  its  disc-topped  processes  with  their 
basal  circlets  of  dots,  was  unmistakable. 


TARDIGIiADA:    AUSTRALIA  189 

There  must  now  be  added  this  additional  worry  to  the  troubles  ot  the  student  of 
water-bears,  that  when  he  finds  an  egg  of  the  hufelandi  type,  he  must  get  an 
embryo  in  order  to  complete  the  identification. 

Macrobiotus  occidentalis,  Murray  ?  (Plate  XXI.  Figs.   54a-54e) 
(See  Canadian  Tardigrada,  p.  169  in  this  paper) 

In  the  Australian  Alps  there  occurred,  at  an-  elevation  of  between  5000  and  6000 
feet,  an  animal  closely  related  to  that  which  is  described  under  the  above  name  in  a 
later  section  of  this  paper,  if  it  is  not  identical  with  it. 

It  is  a  large  animal  of  yellow  colour,  with  dotted  skin.  The  skin  is  double,  with 
a  clear  fluid  circulating  between  the  layers.  In  the  type  this  fluid  contains  numerous 
thin,  hyaline  rectangular  plates,  which  are  absent  from  the  Australian  form.  There 
is  a  comma  in  the  pharynx. 

The  species  was  described  among  the  Canadian  Tardigrada,  as  the  eggs  were 
found  there,  and  the  stud)'  completed. 

No  eggs  like  the  Canadian  ones  were  found  in  Australia. 

An  identical  water-bear  was  got  in  Hawaii  (see  p.  155  and  Plate  XIX.  Fig.  39.) 

The  curious  distribution  will  be  discussed  in  the  Canadian  section  of  this  paper. 

Macrobiotus  intermedius,  Plate  (23) 

Habitat. — Eumundi,  Queensland. 

This  species  is  one  of  a  group  of  three,  very  closely  related,  and  most  readily 
distinguished  by  their  eggs.  M.  intermedius  has  an  egg  with  short  blunt  processes. 
In  the  typical  form  these  are  expanded  from  narrow  bases,  and  are  thus  somewhat 
top-shaped.  Another  form  of  egg  is  like  a  miniature  of  that  of  M.  hufelandii.  The 
processes  taper  from  the  base  and  are  surmounted  by  disc-shaped  or  saucer-shaped 
expansions. 

The  egg  of  M.  crassidens  has  very  long  slender  processes,  that  of  M.  aculeatus 
has  somewhat  similar,  but  thinner  and  more  scattered,  processes.  That  animal  is 
distinguished  by  the  dorsal  processes. 

Sometimes  the  processes  of  the  variety  having  eggs  of  the  hufelandi  type  are 
irregularly  furcate  at  the  tips,  recalling  those  of  M.  furciger  and  M.  orcadensis. 

Macrobiotus  crassidens,  Murray  (20). 

At  Katoomba  in  the  Blue  Mountains,  New  South  Wales,  altitude  2000  to 
3000  feet. 

Macrobiotus  aculeatus,  sp.  n.  (Plate  XVIII.  Figs.  27a-27e) 

Specific  characters. — Size  moderate ;  old  examples  densely  pigmented ;  skin 
bearing  2-6  soft  white  conical  dorsal  processes  in  pairs  on  the  segments  over  the 


140  J.   MURRAY 

second,  third,  and  fourth  pairs  of  legs;  teeth  slender,  curved,  gullet  narrow,  expanded 
in  the  pharynx ;  pharynx  nearly  round,  containing  apophysis,  three  very  broad 
nuts,  and  an  obscure  "comma"  in  each  row.  Claws  of  the  hufelandi  type, 
slender,  unequal  in  each  pair,  and  united  for  half  the  length  of  the  longer  one. 
Egg  small,  covered  with  very  slender  undulate  or  curved  processes,  which  spring 
from  small  conical  bases,  and  are  separated  by  interspaces  greater  than  their  own 
diameter. 

General  description. — Considered  as  one  of  the  smaller  Macrobioti,  though 
individuals  occasionally  attain  to  a  very  considerable  size.  Length  of  an  ordinary 
example  about  300  /u.  Only  the  very  large  individuals  are  strongly  pigmented  ; 
those  of  moderate  size  are  generally  nearly  colourless  except  in  the  stomach.  The 
pigment  is  not  in  bands.  There  are  usually  two  small  dark  eyes,  but  they  are 
sometimes  absent.  The  nuts  in  the  pharynx  are  often  broader  than  long.  The  first 
appears  to  be  closely  united  to  the  gullet,  though  distinct  from  the  apophysis.  The 
dorsal  processes  can  be  seen  in  the  young  squeezed  out  of  the  ripe  egg. 

M.  aculeatus  is  very  closely  related  to  M.  crassidens,  Murray  (20),  and  to 
M.  intermedius,  Plate  (23).  The  spines  distinguish  it  from  these  species.  It  has  no 
close  affinity  with  M.  papillifer,  Murray  (12),  and  M.  sattleri,  Eichters  (26),  which 
have  somewhat  similar  spines.  They  belong  to  a  different  section  of  the  genus. 
The  close  relationship  to  M.  crassidens  is  further  indicated  by  the  similar  egg. 
They  are  of  almost  identical  size,  but  that  of  M.  crassidens,  which  has  been  recently 
discovered  in  Africa,  has  spines  with  larger  bases  and  no  spaces  between  them. 

Habitat. — Among  moss ;  the  type  with  six  spines  in  the  Australian  Alps  near 
Mount  Kosciusko,  at  an  elevation  of  5000  to  6000  feet ;  a  variety  with  only  the  last 
pair  of  spines  (Fig.  27e)  at  Katoomba  in  the  Blue  Mountains  of  New  South  Wales. 


Macrobiotus  dispar,  Murray   (16) 

Habitat. — Ponds  in  the  Botanic  Gardens,  Sydney.  One  of  the  two  aquatic 
species  obtained,  the  other  being  M.  augusti. 

B:  EGGS  WITH  THICK  SHELLS,  ENCLOSING  EODS 
Macrobiotus  arcticus,   Murray?   (19) 

Habitat. — Katoomba,  in  the  Blue  Mountains. 

Without  the  egg  the  identification  of  M.  arcticus  cannot  be  absolutely  certain, 
but  the  animal  agreed  in  all  other  characters  with  this  species. 

It  measured  300  P.  in  length,  the  claws  were  of  the  Diphascon  type,  the  gullet 
was  slender  and  expanded  in  the  pharynx,  which  contained  two  rods  of  nearly  equal 
length  and  about  2|-  times  as  long  as  broad,  and  no  "  comma." 


TARDIGRADA:    AUSTRALIA  141 

C  :  SMOOTH  EGGS  LAID  IN  THE  CAST  SKIN 
Macrobiotus  sattlcri,   Richters  (26) 

Habitat, — Tree-moss,  Eumundi,  Queensland. 

Professor  Richters  neither  describes  nor  figures  the  pharynx  of  this  species.  He 
probably  found  it  in  the  "  simplex "  condition.  The  structure  of  the  skin  is  very 
distinctive,  and  taken  in  conjunction  with  the  divergent  claws  there  would  seem  to  be 
little  difficulty  in  recognising  the  species,  without  considering  the  pharynx.  There  is 
reason,  however,  to  believe  that  more  than  one  form  has  skin  like  sattleri  and  also 
divergent  claws.  One  of  them  is  figured  in  Scottish  Tardigrada  (18)  Plate  IV. 
Fig.  2G/;. 

The  Australian  form  has  a  different  pharynx.  There  are  two  rods — the  one  next 
the  gullet  about  two  and  a  half  times  as  long  as  broad,  and  slightly  constricted  in  the 
middle,  making  two  equal  lobes  ;  the  second  about  twice  as  long  as  broad.  There  is 
no  "  comma."  The  claws  are  unequal,  and  are  joined  at  the  bases  only.  They  diverge 
at  less  than  a  right  angle.  The  long  claw  of  one  pair  is  longer  than  that  of  the  other, 
and  has  a  small  supplementary  point.  Eyes  are  present. 

Macrolnotus  papillijer,  Murray  (12) 

Habitat. — Among  moss  from  the  Australian  Alps,  altitude  5000  feet,  New  South 
Wales. 

Macrobiotus  rubcns,  Murray  (17) 

Habitat. — At  Katoomba,  in  the  Blue  Mountains,  altitude  between  2000  and 
3000  feet,  abundant. 

It  was  not  seen  alive.  The  fat-cells  still  retained  the  red  colour.  The  largest 
example  measured  450  ju  in  length.  No  comma  was  seen  in  the  pharynx,  but  it  is  often 
difficult  to  see  in  dead  animals. 

The  distribution  of  the  species,  so  far  as  known,  is  peculiar.  Discovered  in  India 
(17)  at  an  elevation  of  6000  feet,  Professor  Richters  afterwards  found  it  in  Ascension 
and  Sumatra  (39).  It  now  reappears  in  Australia,  where  the  eggs  as  well  as  the 
adults  were  found. 

Macrobiotus  augusti,  Murray  (18) 
Habitat. — Ponds  in  the  public  parks,  Sydney 


142  J.   MURRAY 

D :  EGGS  UNKNOWN 

Macrobiotus  virgatus,  Murray  ?  (Plate  XVIII.  Fig.  28) 
See  description  in  Canadian  Tardigrada,  p.  173,  and  figure  (Plate  XXI. 

Figs.  55a-55c). 

The  Australian  form  is  not  fully  studied,  but  it  agrees  with  the  type  in  the 
important  characters  of  the  pharynx  and  claws.  The  teeth  are  straight  for  three- 
quarters  of  their  length,  then  very  abruptly  bent  outwards.  There  is  some  individual 
variation  in  this  respect.  The  pharynx  possesses  a  minute  comma,  which  is  not  noted 
for  the  type.  There  are  no  eyes,  while  the  type  has  eyes.  There  are  no  notes  as  to 
the  colour  of  the  Australian  examples. 

Habitat. — Katoomba,  in  the  Blue  Mountains,  New  South  Wales. 

Macrobiotus,  sp.  ?  (Plate  XVIII.  Figs.  32o-32c) 

Description. — Large,  450  M  in  length.  Gullet  slender  ;  teeth  slender,  abruptly  bent 
towards  the  furca.  Pharynx  shortly  oval,  with  two  rods  in  each  row,  and  no 
comma.  The  first  rod  is  twice  as  long  as  the  second,  and  about  four  times  as  long  as 
broad.  The  claws  are  V's,  or  more  properly  U's,  united  at  the  base  only.  The  pairs 
are  unequal,  and  one  claw  of  each  pair  is  longer.  The  longer  claws  have  two  fine 
supplementary  points.  Each  foot  has  a  prominent  boss  near  the  extremity.  The  skin 
is  finely  granular. 

Habitat. — Katoomba,  Blue  Mountains,  New  South  Wales. 

This  appears  to  be  a  very  distinct  specieSj  but  till  more  specimens  are  examined, 
and  the  eggs  found,  it  is  not  desirable  to  name  it.  Plate  figures  such  bosses  on 
the  legs  of  M.  oberhauseri. 

Macrobiotus,  sp.  ?  (Plate  XVIII.  Figs.  33a-33c) 

A  small  animal,  resembling  M.  hufelandii  in  claws  and  pharynx,  yet  with  several 
points  of  difference. 

Description. — Very  small ;  the  example  studied  measured  only  120  /m  in  length. 
The  gullet  is  wide,  and  has  a  very  prominent  rim  on  the  end  in  the  pharynx.  The 
teeth  are  strongly  curved.  The  pharynx  is  shortly  oval,  and  has  two  rods  in  each 
row  and  no  "  comma."  The  rod  next  the  gullet  is  about  three  times  as  long  as  broad, 
the  second  rod  about  twice  as  long  as  broad.  The  claws  are  slender,  and  are  united 
for  rather  more  than  half  their  length.  The  two  claws  of  each  pair  are  slightly 
unequal.  Eyes  are  present. 

Habitat. — Eumundi,  Queensland. 

Although  very  similar  to  M.  hufelandii,  the  characters  of  the  pharynx  are  01  some 
value.  It  would  be  necessary  to  find  the  egg  in  order  to  settle  the  position  of  the 
animal. 


TARDIGRADA:    AUSTRALIA  143 

Genus — Diphascon,  Plate  (23) 
Diphascon  chilenense,  Plate  (23) 

In  the  Australian  Alps  near  the  borders  of  New  South  Wales  and  Victoria, 
altitude  5000  to  6000  feet. 

Diphascon  scoticum,  Murray"  (11) 

Synonym. — D.  crozetense,  Richters  (35). 

At  Katoomba,  in  the  Blue  Mountains,  elevation  2000  to  3000  feet,  frequent. 

REMARKS  ON  THE  AUSTRALIAN  TARDIGRADE  FAUNA 

Its  composition. — Thirty-one  species  have  been  recognised  and  named,  but  a  good 
many  others  have  been  observed,  though  they  could  not  be  named.  The  list  includes 
eleven  species  of  Echiniscus,  one  of  Milnesium,  two  of  Diphascon,  sixteen  of 
Macrobiotus,  and  Oreella,  a  new  genus. 

This  Tardigrade  fauna  shows  many  peculiarities.  It  is,  of  course,  very  imperfectly 
known,  but  taking  the  facts  as  they  stand,  the  following  are  points  of  interest. 
Though  much  less  carefully  worked  than  New  Zealand,  the  Australian  list  is  longer 
than  the  New  Zealand  one. 

It  presents  much  greater  peculiarity.  Only  about  half  the  species  are  common 
or  widely  distributed.  There  is  one  interesting  generic  type,  somewhat  intermediate 
between  Echiniscus  and  Macrobiotus,  at  present  unknown  elsewhere.  There  are  six 
new  species,  of  which  five  are  as  yet  only  known  in  Australia,  and  there  are  several 
the  distribution  of  which  is  very  restricted  or  very  peculiar. 

The  list  is  the  longest  one  compiled  for  any  one  country  during  the  expedition. 
In  Australia  we  got  38  species,  of  which  31  were  identified.  Canada  comes  next 
with  31  species  (23  identified),  then  New  Zealand  with  25  species  (21  identified). 

The  subjoined  table  shows  the  distribution  of  the  Australian  water-bears  over 
the  world,  in  13  columns,  4  for  the  principal  localities  visited  in  Australia,  and  9  for 
the  rest  of  the  world. 

The  local  distribution  is  remarkable  on  account  of  the  very  little  indication  there 
is  that  the  species  are  to  any  extent  generally  distributed  in  Australia.  No  fewer  than 
twenty-three  out  of  the  thirty-one  species  occurred  in  only  one  of  the  four  localities 
visited.  Those  localities  certainly  offer  very  different  climatic  conditions.  The 
contrast  between  the  cool  moist  mountain-tops  of  the  Alpine  region  at  elevations  of 
from  5000  to  GOOO  feet  above  the  sea,  and  the  low-lying  parched  bush  of  sub- 
tropical Queensland,  is  very  great.  The  Blue  Mountain  region  is  of  intermediate 
character,  and  it  was  in  it  that  the  greater  number  of  the  species,  and  the  most 
peculiar  species,  were  obtained.  That  the  distribution  is  very  local,  even  in  any  one 
district,  is  clearly  shown  by  our  experience  in  washing  the  moss.  For  a  long  time 


144 


J.  MUMRAY 


DISTRIBUTION  :  LOCAL  AND  GENERAL 

Australia 


a 

Q 

SH 

•4 

H 

£ 

'{, 

5 

s 

J 

o 

M 

0 

ti 

4 

o 

d 

H 

M 

J^ 

^ 

3 

3 

en 

M 

3 

CM 

^ 

o 

o 

Q 
X 

0 

g 

1 

m 

H 

a 

H 

t—  i 
o 

X 

™ 

i 

o 

BD 

-rj 

o 
9 

H 

2 

02 

<} 

H 

^, 

z 

^ 

H 

"s 

M 

M 

< 

b 
9 

* 

5 

"A 

co 

5 

O 

Echiniscus  mutabilis 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

— 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

— 

E  .Tjiovcezeelandice     .... 

X 

X 

— 

—  • 

X 

X 

— 

— 

—  • 

—  • 

— 

— 

— 

E.  pufoher        ; 

— 

—  • 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

E.  arclomys  '(?)*. 

•  —  • 

X 

— 

— 

— 

X 

•  —  • 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

E.  kerguelensis          .... 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

X 

—  • 

— 

— 

— 

•  — 

— 

—  • 







X 





^_ 













E.  intermedius          .... 

— 

X 

— 

X 

— 

X 

X 

.  —  . 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

E.  spiniger       ..... 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

E.  duboisi        

— 

X 

— 

X 

— 

—  • 

— 

— 

— 

X 

X 

•  — 

— 

E.  blumi           ..... 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

X 

— 

E.  oihonnce      ..... 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

— 

— 

X 

— 

f\         77                77  * 

Ureeaa  tnowis  ..... 

Milnesium  tardigradum  . 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X. 

X 

Macrobiotus  hufelandii     -. 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

—  • 

M.  echinogenilus       .... 

— 

X 

— 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

M.  areolatus    ..... 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

X 

X 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

— 

M.  harmsworthi       .... 

— 

X 

X 

— 

X 

X 

X 

— 

X 

— 

X 

X 

— 

M.  hufelandioides    .... 

— 

.  — 

X 

— 

— 

— 

—  . 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

jl/.  occidentalis          .... 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

X 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

J/.  intermedius         .... 

— 

X 

— 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

J/.  crassidens  .         .         .         .         , 

.  — 

X 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

—  . 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

M.  aculeatus    ..... 

— 

X 

X 

— 

— 

— 

—  . 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

JJ/.  dispar         ..... 

X 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

X 

X 

X 

— 

X 

— 

3/.  arcticus      ..... 

— 

X 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

X 

— 

X 

X 

X 

J/.  sattle>-i        ..... 

—  - 

— 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

— 

X 

X 

— 

— 

— 

.J/.  papillifer    ..... 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

jTf.  rubens         ..... 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

X 

X 

— 

— 

.if.  august!       .         .         . 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

X 

— 

M.  virgatiis  (?)           .... 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

X 

•  — 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

Diphascon  chileneit&e 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

— 

X 

X 

D.  scolicum      ..... 

~ 

X 

~ 

~ 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

~ 

~ 

X 

X 

there  was  very  little  got  in  the  Australian  moss,  and  then,  a  year  after  gathering 
some  little  tufts  proved  very  productive. 

About  a,  dozen  of  the  species  are  widely  distributed  or  cosmopolitan.  These  occur 
in  six  or  more  of  the  principal  columns  in  the  table.  Some  are  more  local,  and  a  few 
have  a  very  restricted  range.  E.  novcezeelandice  is  at  present  only  known  from 
Australia,  New  Zealand,  and  Hawaii,  E.  kerguelensis  occurs  only  in  Australia  and 
Kerguelen.  Two  species,  E.  intermedius  and  M.  occidentalis,  are  on  both  sides  of  the 
Pacific,  in  Australia  and  British  Columbin,  and  also  on  islands  in  mid-Pacific. 
E.  bin-mi  is  found  in  Australia,  Europe,  and  the  Arctic,  E.  oi/io/titfr  in  the  same  three 
*  All  the  records  of  E.  arctomys  are  wrong,  except  for  Australia  (see  p.  120  and  footnote). 


TARDIGRADA:    AUSTRALIA  145 

regions,  and  also  in  Canada.  M.  crassidens  is  only  known  in  Australia,  the  Pacific 
Islands,  and  Africa  ;  M.papillifer  in  Australia,  New  Zealand  and  Europe  ;  M.  virgatus 
in  Australia  and  Canada ;  M.  rubens  in  Australia,  India,  and  some  islands. 

The  list  of  Australian  Tardigrada  corresponds  with  those  of  other  regions  in  the 
following  proportions:  Of  the  31  species,  18  are  known  also  in  Europe,  16  in  the 
Oceanic  Islands,  15  in  the  Arctic,  14  in  N.  America,  13  in  New  Zealand,  12  in 
Asia  and  Africa,  7  in  S.  America  and  the  Arctic. 

That  there  is  so  nearly  the  same  degree  of  correspondence  with  such  diverse 
regions  as  New  Zealand,  Canada,  Asia,  and  Africa,  is  an  indication  of  how  little 
proximity  counts  in  determining  relationship,  and  the  number  of  rare  species  which 
are  common  to  Australia  and  various  distant  countries  gives  some  idea  of  the  com- 
plexity of  the  problem  of  the  origin  of  the  Tardigrade  fauna  of  any  one  land. 

One-sixth  of  all  the  species  are  peculiar  to  Australia.  This  is  a  large  proportion, 
but  a  greater  number  of  species,  and  a  much  higher  proportion  of  them,  are  peculiar 
to  Canada.  The  degree  of  peculiarity  is  much  higher  in  Australia  than  in  Canada, 
as  the  list  includes  one  new  genus,  and  the  species  are  more  strongly  marked  ones. 
It  is  evident  that  at  the  present  time  we  know  far  too  little  to  come  to  any  definite 
conclusions  as  to  the  origin  of  the  Australian  Tardigrada,  and  their  interrelationships 
with  those  of  other  countries. 


BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPBD.   1907~9.      VOL.  I. 


TARDIGRADA  OF  SOME  PACIFIC  ISLANDS 

FIJI :   ISLAND  OF  VITI  LEVU 

On  collecting  in  Fiji. — The  collecting  in  Fiji  was  done  tinder  unfavourable 
conditions.  The  steamer  stayed  only  for  a  few  hours,  and  there  was  no  time  to  get 
advice  as  to  the  most  suitable  localities  in  the  neighbourhood  of  Suva.  It  was 
oppressively  hot,  and  everything  seemed  burnt  up  by  the  sun.  I  first  tried  the  shore 
road,  skirting  a  mangrove  swamp  for  some  distance,  but  found  no  moss  or  similar 
plant.  Then  I  made  a  short  tour  inland,  passing  through  some  banana  plantations, 
and  visiting  the  reservoir.  No  moss  was  found  in  all  this  round,  although  some 
patches  of  wood  were  examined.  Then,  returning  disappointed  by  one  of  the  main 
roads,  I  came  on  a  little  ditch  and  a  small  trickle  of  water  connected  with  it.  A  few 
tufts  of  unpromising  moss,  silted  up  with  gritty  mud,  were  got  alongside  the  ditch, 
and  in  some  scrubby  bush  bordering  the  streamlet  there  were  some  mosses  on  fallen 
trees.  This  last  was  the  only  likely  moss  for  the  kind  of  animals  I  was  seeking,  and 
it  was  very  little  in  quantity.  The  moss  from  the  ditch  was  very  different  from  the 
"  dry  "  moss  which  is  the  happy  hunting-ground  of  the  student  of  "  Moosbewohner  " 
(moss-dwellers) ;  it  was  likely  to  contain  only  those  truly  aquatic  species  which  are 
not  accustomed  to  being  dried  up  periodically,  and  which  were  therefore  unlikely  to 
survive  the  long  journey  which  had  to  be  made  before  they  could  be  examined. 
Nevertheless,  when  moistened  and  examined  some  months  later,  these  unpromising 
mosses  were  found  to  harbour  a  considerable  number  of  microscopic  animals.  These 
were  chiefly  Bdelloid  Rotifera ;  of  these  were  about  as  many  species  as  we  got  in 
Hawaii.  There  were  very  few  Tardigrada,  only  two  species  being  identified. 

The  Fiji  Islands  are  situated  in  the  Tropics,  16°  south  of  the  Equator,  and  due 
north  of  New  Zealand,  which  is  distant  about  1200  miles.  The  nearest  part  of 
Australia  is  about  1500  miles  distant.  Though  so  far  separated  from  these  nearest 
considerable  masses  of  land,  there  are  numerous  intervening  islands  which  would 
assist  migration,  so  that  some  correspondence  with  the  microfauna  of  Australia  and 
New  Zealand  would  not  be  surprising.  The  Tardigrada  of  Fiji  are  almost  unknown. 
We  identified  only  two  species,  the  cosmopolitan  M.  areolatus  (a  doubtful  identifica- 
tion), and  M.  nodosus,  a  species  found  in  New  Zealand. 

Previous  knowledge. — I  can  learn  of  no  previous  work  on  the  Tardigrada  of  Fiji. 

147 


148  J.  MURRAY 

LIST  OF  SPECIES 

Macrobiotus  areolatus,  Murray  ? 
M.  nodosus,  Murray. 
Macrobiotus,  sp.  ? 

Macrobiotus  areolatus,  Murray  ?  (19)  (Plate  XIX.  Fig.  40) 
See  description  of  M.  areolatus  on  p.  167  of  this  paper 

The  identification  rests  on  the  egg  only,  and  as  the  egg  is  by  no  means  typical 
there  is  much  room  for  doubt  as  to  the  species.  The  egg  is  considerably  smaller, 
measuring  only  about  70  /*  in  diameter,  exclusive  of  the  spines.  M.  areolatus 
measures  about  100  n  without  the  spines.  The  processes  also  differ  in  form,  being 
ovate  and  subobtuse,  while  those  of  areolatus  type  are  conical  and  acuminate.  They 
measure  only  about  12  n,  while  those  of  the  type  attain  to  50  n  in  length. 

The  surface  of  the  shell,  between  the  processes,  is  marked  by  chambers  or  areoltc 
like  those  from  which  the  type  was  named,  but  these  are  more  rounded  and  scarcely 
polygonal  at  all.  It  is  on  this  character  that  the  provisional  identification  is  made. 
It  is  more  probable  that  the  egg  belongs  to  a  related  species  not  yet  recognised, 
perhaps  to  that  found  associated  with  it,  and  described  below  (figured  on  Plate  XIX. 
Fig.  43). 

Macrobiotus  nodosus,  Murray  (20) 

The  only  abundant  species  in  the  collection  from  Fiji.  Young  and  old  were  seen, 
and  skins  containing  the  reddish  brown  eggs.  One  of  these,  containing  three  eggs, 
measured  400  n,  the  eggs  68  /".  The  largest  animals  were  as  large  as  African 
specimens  (500  n  and  upwards).  The  claws  were  30  A*  in  length. 

The  newly  hatched  young  of  160  ju  in  length  were  hyaline  and  colourless,  or  very 
faintly  yellow.  The  characteristic  knobs  were  not  developed,  and  the  papillae  were 
wide  but  very  obscure.  The  pharynx  has  the  thickenings  much  shorter  than  in 
the  adult.  They  are  as  broad  as  long,  and  somewhat  quadrate. 

The  empty  skins  lose  the  papillae,  but  show  their  position  by  a  regular  reticulation. 
Seven  eggs  were  seen  in  one  skin. 

The  occurrence  of  M.  nodosus  in  mid-Pacific  is  very  interesting.  The  species  is  at 
present  known  in  Africa,  New  Zealand,  and  the  Macquarie  Islands. 


Macrobiotus,  sp.  ?  (Plate  XIX.  Figs.  43a, 

A  fairly  large  animal,  nearly  500  n  in  length.  It  is  pigmented  with  a  dull  brown 
colour  like  that  of  M.  Imfelandii.  The  teeth  are  stout  and  the  gullet  wide.  The 
pharynx  is  shortly  oval,  and  contains,  besides  the  apophyses,  three  short  thick  rods 
in  each  row,  and  a  large  comma.  The  middle  rod  is  a  little  shorter  than  the  two 


TARDIGRADA:    PACIFIC  ISLANDS  149 

others.     The  claws  are  in  pairs,  united  at  the  bases  only.     One  claw  of  each  pair  is 
larger.     No  supplementary  points  were  seen.     There  are  no  eye-spots. 

The  pharynx  is  40  /*  long  by  30  /u  wide.  Having  points  of  affinity  with  several 
species  (M.  echinogenitus,  M.  areolatus,  &c.),  the  recognition  of  the  egg  is  necessary  for 
its  identification.  The  strong  comma  distinguishes  it  from  areolatus,  but,  as  Richters 
has  pointed  out,  we  are  not  yet  sure  of  the  constancy  of  the  "comma."  The  slight 
shortening  of  the  middle  rod  may  show  some  degree  of  relationship  to  M.  virgatus,  a 
Canadian  species  (see  p.  173  and  Plate  XXI.  Fig.  55). 


HAWAII:  ISLAND  OF  OAHU 

Collecting  in  Ilaivaii. — At  Honolulu  we  remained  for  twenty-four  hours,  so  that 
there  was  a  much  better  opportunity  for  collecting  than  we  had  in  Fiji.  As,  how- 
ever, we  arrived  at  5  P.M.  it  was  impossible  to  get  clear  of  the  town  before  sunset, 
and  serious  collecting  had  to  be  deferred  till  next  day.  The  remaining  daylight  of 
the  first  evening  was  occupied  in  making  a  journey  by  street-car  to  the  Aquarium. 
On  the  way  some  irrigation  ditches  were  seen,  and  these  were  visited,  and  a  net 
thrown  in  to  collect  the  aquatic  rotifers,  with  lively  hopes  of  getting  Trochosphcera, 
and  who  knows  what  else  ?  A  few  sweeps  of  the  net  filled  it  with  a  delightful  green 
slime,  of  endless  possibilities,  but  alas !  in  drawing  it  out  it  caught  on  some  spiny 
twig  and  was  torn,  and  the  contents  lost. 

Next  day  a  start  was  made  in  the  cool  of  the  morning,  before  sunrise.  Even  at 
that  early  hour  (5  A.M.)  a  cafe  was  found  open,  and  by  the  time  breakfast  was  over 
the  street-cars  were  running.  Knowing  nothing  of  the  geography  of  the  country,  an 
electric  tram  was  boarded,  which,  as  luck  would  have  it,  conveyed  me  five  miles  out, 
to  the  foot  of  a  valley  on  the  east  of  the  city.  For  a  mile  or  two  the  road  ran 
through  the  level  valley,  among  farms.  A  very  little  stream  ran  in  this  valley.  It 
would  be  only  two  or  three  feet  across  and  a  few  inches  deep.  None  of  the  water 
was  wasted,  each  farm  or  garden  using  it  for  irrigation,  and  letting  the  overflow  pass 
on  to  the  next.  No  mosses  were  seen  in  this  valley  till  the  last  of  the  houses  was 
left  behind,  when  some  tufts  growing  on  clay  were  got  on  the  banks  of  the  stream. 

The  stream  was  now  left  and  I  began  to  climb  up  a  long  spur  rising  gradually 
towards  a  ridge  which  formed  the  watershed  at  the  head  of  the  valley.  The  country 
was  open,  with  deep  grass  and  occasional  bushes.  Here,  at  some  little  elevation, 
moss  of  a  likely  kind  began  to  appear,  first  on  stones,  then  on  the  stems  of  trees  and 
bushes.  Everything  was  dry  and  scorched  by  the  sun. 

As  I  advanced  the  bushes  became  denser  and  rather  troublesome.  The  moss  also 
became  quite  abundant  and  my  pockets  were  bulging  with  it.  There  were  many 
kinds  of  it,  but  one  was  dominant.  It  formed  large  sheets  of  a  vivid  green,  with 
rich  autumnal  browns  in  the  withered  parts.  It  had  all  the  habit  of  a  pleurocarpous 


150  J.  MURRAY 

moss,  but  the  hairy  calyptra  of  the  capsules  showed  it  to  be  a  relative  of  the  Ortho- 
tricum  family. 

It  was  my  intention  to  go  on  to  the  top  of  the  ridge,  which  seemed  but  a  little 
way  in  front,  and  to  descend  into  the  Pali  road,  which  I  knew  was  only  a  little  way 
down  on  the  other  side.  Nature  did  not  permit  this.  As  I  advanced  the  bushes 
became  very  dense  and  I  got  into  a  zone  of  ferns.  The  spur  had  become  high  and 
narrow,  with  very  steep  sides  and  scarcely  walking  room  on  the  summit. 

Though  there  were  few  prickly  bushes  the  long  trailing  branches  of  some  of  them 
were  very  tough  and  difficult  to  negotiate.  The  fern  got  so  dense  that  it  was 
difficult  to  part  it.  This  innocent-looking  fern  appears  to  be  a  bracken,  not  unlike 
the  British  kind,  which  can  be  obstructive  enough  on  a  hill-side.  It  was  all  dry  and 
withered,  and  the  pinnules  were  mostly  broken  off,  leaving  only  about  an  eighth  of 
an  inch  of  the  base.  These  fragments  of  pinnules  were  strong  and_hard,  and  with 
their  ragged  edges  they  caught  and  tore  the  clothing  as  Smilax  prickles  would  do. 

At  last,  not  many  hundreds  of  yards  from  the  ridge  towards  which  I  was  making, 
the  fern  was  so  dense  that  I  never  set  foot  to  ground  at  all,  but  walked  on  the 
entangled  fern,  a  yard  or  more  above  ground.  It  was  evident  that,  at  the  rate  at 
which  I  was  progressing,  if  I  held  on  till  I  gained  the  Pali  road  I  would  miss  the 
steamer,  so  I  turned  back  by  the  way  I  had  come.  On  descending  from  the  spur  I 
struck  the  stream  at  a  point  farther  up  the  valley  than  where  I  had  left  it,  and 
crossed  some  boggy  places  where  there  were  plenty  of  bog  Hypna  and  even 
Sphagnum.  Had  it  been  possible  to  examine  these  while  fresh  there  would  doubt- 
less have  been  interesting  additions  to  the  list  of  species. 

The  trip  was  successful,  judging  by  the  quantity  of  moss  collected,  and  for  more 
than  a  year  afterwards  it  continued  to  yield  plenty  of  microscopic  animals.  Among 
them  there  were  more  than  a  dozen  species  of  Tardigrada. 

The  Sandwich  Islands  are  situated  in  the  Tropics,  Honolulu,  on  the  Island  of 
Oahu,  being  22°  north  of  the  Equator.  It  is  the  most  isolated  land  visited.  The 
nearest  land  mass  is  N.  America,  the  nearest  point  being  2000  miles  distant. 
Although  the  numberless  islands  of  Polynesia  lie  to  the  southward,  there  are  few 
islands  near  the  Hawaiian  group  which  could  facilitate  migration.  The  microfauna  of 
the  group  may  thus  be  expected  to  be  of  great  interest. 

Previous  knoidedge  of  Haivaiian  Tardigrada. — The  only  reference  to  Hawaiian 
Tardigrada  with  which  I  am  acquainted  is  in  Richters'  "  Moosfauna  Australiens " 
(37).  In  moss  from  Oahu  and  Hawaii,  collected  by  Professor  Schauiiisland  in 
1896-7,  Richters  found  E.  arctomys  and  M.  hufelandii,  both  in  Oahu,  the  latter 
also  in  Hawaii.  We  found  the  Macrobiotus  again,  but  not  E.  arctomys,  unless  the 
record  of  that  species  refers  to  the  same  animal  which  I  identify  as  E.  mutabilis. 
The  matter  requires  clearing  up, 


TARDIGRADA:    PACIFIC  ISLANDS  151 

LIST  OF  SPECIES 

Echiniscus  mutabilis,  Murray.  Macrobiotus  hufelandii,  Schultze. 

E.  novazeelandice,  Richters.  M.  occidentalis  (?),  sp.  n. 

E.  intermedius,  sp.  n.  M.  intermedius,  Plate. 

E.  viridis,  sp.  n.  M.  crassidens,  Murray. 

E.  spimdosus,  Doyere.  M,  oberMuseri,  Doyere. 

E.  perarmatus,  Murray.  Diphascon  scoticum,  Murray. 

Milnesium  tardigradum,  Doyere. 

Three  species  not  identified  (1  Echiniscus,  2  Macrobiotus) 

Genus — Echiniscus 
A :  SEGMENTS  V.  AND  VI.  SEP  ABATE 
Echiniscus  mutabilis,  Murray  (12) 

The  commonest  species  in  Hawaii.  The  form  of  Echiniscus  recorded  below  as 
E.  novcezeelandioi  has  the  characteristic  dorsal  processes  so  reduced  in  size  that  it 
may  be  questioned  whether  it  should  not  rather  be  regarded  as  a  form  of  E.  mutabilis. 
At  any  rate  it  is  a  transitional  form  from  the  one  species  to  the  other,  and  indicates 
how  closely  related  they  are,  although  their  types  differ  so  conspicuously. 

Echiniscus  novazeelandice,  Richters  (37)  (Plate  XIX.)  Fig.  35 

The  form  of  this  species  which  occurred  in  Hawaii  differs  from  the  typical 
examples  found  in  New  Zealand  and  Australia  in  the  extreme  reduction  of  the  dorsal 
processes  on  the  third  pair  of  plates.  They  are  mere  knobs  or  sometimes  only  angles 
of  these  plates. 

Only  a  few  examples  were  seen.  They  measured  about  240  /*  in  length,  exclu- 
sive of  the  legs.  The  setse  a  were  more  widely  spreading  than  usual,  and  were  60  n 
long. 

B:  SEGMENTS  V.  AND  VI.  UNITED 

Echiniscus  intermedius,  Murray  (Plate  XIX.  Figs.  36c,  36d) 
See  description  in  Australian  Tardigrada,  p.  129  of  this  volume,  also  in  Canadian 

Tardigrada,  p.  161 

This  most  interesting  little  species  occurs  in  Hawaii  as  a  peculiar  variety.  The 
type  as  found  in  Queensland  and  the  variety  found  in  Canada  differ  so  much  that 
they  would  be  considered  as  distinct  species,  were  it  not  for  the  Hawaiian  variety, 
which  is  intermediate  between  them.  The  type  has  the  plates  marked  with  large  but 
very  faint  hexagons,  the  Canadian  variety  has  very  fine  pellucid  dots ;  the  Hawaiian 
form  has  markings  of  intermediate  size,  but  they  are  depressions  like  those  of  the 


152  J.  MURRAY 

type.  It  is  a  question  whether  all  three  are  not  distinct  species.  There  is  no  other 
Echiniscus  which  shows  such  a  range  of  variation  of  the  surface  texture. 

Description. — Small,  length  about  190  to  220  M.  Plates  ten,  two  pairs,  three 
median.  All  the  median  divided  by  transverse  lines  into  two  nearly  equal  portions. 
Both  parts  of  the  first  median  are  dotted.  In  the  second  and  third  median  only  the 
front  portion  was  seen  to  be  dotted.  The  posterior  half  of  the  third  median  is  only 
separated  by  a  faint  line  from  the  lumbar  plate.  The  plates  of  the  pairs  are  each 
traversed  by  a  transverse  furrow,  separating  anterior  and  posterior  convex  portions. 
It  is  uncertain  if  the  dots  cease  in  the  furrow.  The  lumbar  plate  is  not  trefoliate.  It 
is  faceted,  having  a  median  and  two  lateral  panels. 

The  surface  of  the  plates  is  marked  with  a  fine  reticulation,  regularly  hexagonal. 
This  is  formed  by  the  margins  of  contiguous  shallow  pits,  as  in  E.  reticulatus.  These 
are  much  smaller  than  in  the  Australian  form  of  the  species.  It  must  be  understood 
that  these  pits  are  extremely  difficult  to  observe.  To  show  them  by  lines  in  the 
drawing  exaggerates  their  apparent  importance. 

The  seta  a,  at  the  base  of  the  head,  is  relatively  long.  The  smallest  example 
observed,  190  M  in  length,  contained  two  nearly  round  eggs  40  p.  in  diameter.  An 
example  of  21 0  i«  contained  one  narrow  egg  of  50  n  by  32  /*. 

Echiniscus  viridis,  sp.  n.  (Plate  XIX.  Figs.  36a,  366) 

Specific  characters. — Large,  stout ;  plates  ten,  three  median,  two  pairs,  V.  and 
VI.  joined  ;  colour  of  plates  olive-green,  dots  darker  green,  regularly  spaced,  largest 
in  the  centre  of  the  body,  and  diminishing  to  the  sides ;  seta  a  very  short,  springing 
from  large  conical  papilla ;  fringe  of  small  teeth ;  claws  very  large,  inner  with  small 
barbs  ;  small  spine  on  first  leg. 

General  description. — Length,  250  M,  exclusive  of  the  large  stout  legs,  claws  25  n 
long.  The  plates  are  very  distinct,  with  clearly  marked  edges.  Only  the  plates  are 
coloured  green ;  the  interior  of  the  body  is  of  the  usual  Eclviniscus  red.  The  colour 
does  not  affect  the  bands  of  skin  connecting  the  plates,  but  it  does  extend  into  the 
fourth  leg  as  far  as  the  fringe ;  beyond  that  is  clear.  The  dots  do  not  appear  as 
either  pits  or  papillae,  but  simply  as  darker  patches.  They  are  very  regularly 
spaced,  and  are  separated  by  spaces  of  about  the  same  diameter  as  themselves. 

None  of  the  plates  is  distinctly  subdivided,  but  each  plate  of  the  pairs  is  divided 
into  three  bands,  the  anterior  and  posterior  darker,  and  the  one  between  lighter,  with 
smaller  dots.  The  first  median  is  far  separated  from  the  shoulder  plate,  and  near  the 
first  pair.  The  third  median  is  somewhat  obscure,  being  little  more  than  a  dotted 
area  with  obscure  margins,  close  to  the  second  pair. 

The  claws  are  unusually  large,  being  about  one-tenth  of  the  length  of  the  body, 
but  there  are  species  in  which  they  are  still  longer  (relatively).  There  is  a  palp  near 
the  base  of  the  fourth  leg,  and  a  very  short  spine  on  the  first  leg. 


TARDIGKADA:    PACIFIC  ISLANDS  158 

E.  viridis  has  been  known  for  many  years.  The  first  specimens  seen  were  empty 
skins,  and  it  was  considered  unsafe  to  put  any  importance  on  the  colour  of  the  dead 
animals.  The  colour  alone  could  not  be  considered  of  specific  value,  as  it  might  be 
due  to  disease,  and  could  only  be  regarded  as  having  any  weight  if  the  animal 
showed  other  peculiarities.  These  we  find  in  the  nature  of  the  dots,  the  very  short 
head  setae,  and  the  very  large  claws. 

The  animal  was  first  found  alive  in  Hawaii,  and  it  was  seen  that  the  plates  had 
the  distinctive  colour  in  life,  and  possessed  the  other  peculiarities  which  had  been 
noticed  in  the  green  skins  previously  observed. 

It  appears,  then,  to  be  a  good  species,  and  the  olive  colour  seems  to  be  constant 
and  characteristic.  Disregarding  the  green  colour  there  is  no  species  with  which  it 
could  be  united.  There  are  but  few  species  having  V.  and  VI.  joined,  and  no 
processes  after  seta  a.  E.  wendti  and  E.  reticulatus  have  the  seta  a  very  long,  and 
the  latter  has  the  surface  reticulate  and  the  spine  on  the  front  leg  very  long. 
E,  arctomys  has  no  fringe.  E.  kerguelensis  and  E.  sylvamis  have  very  fine  dots  on 
the  plates.  E.  macronyx  (38),  which  has  similar  large  claws,  has  the  surface  finely 
punctate,  and  there  are  no  barbs  on  the  claws.  The  other  species  of  the  group  differ 
conspicuously,  and  need  not  be  compared. 

Habitat. — Among  moss  from  the  bush  near  the  City  of  Honolulu,  Island  of 
Oahu,  Sandwich  Islands.  Previously  found  at  the  margins  of  two  Scottish  lochs 
(Ness  and  Morar). 

The  dots  on  the  plates  vary  somewhat  in  size,  though  always  large ;  the  figure 
shows  them  of  the  largest  size. 

Echiniscus  spinulosus,  Doyere  (2)  (Plate  XIX.  Fig.  38) 

Although  differing  from  Doyere's  species  in  one  important  point,  viz.,  that  the  two 
dorsal  processes,  over  c  and  d,  are  small  spicules  instead  of  long  spines,  I  do  not 
feel  justified  in  making  this  Hawaiian  form  a  distinct  species.  The  dorsal  processes 
vary  more  than  any  others  in  relative  size.  In  a  large  series  of  specimens  of 
E.  duboisi,  a  species  closely  related  to  this  one,  and  like  it  having  only  spines  on  the 
body,  I  have  seen  the  dorsal  processes  vary  from  spicules  to  long  spines.  As  the 
Hawaiian  examples  have  some  distinct  characters,  not  noticed  in  Doyere's  description, 
a  full  description  is  here  given.  These  are  in  the  surface  texture  of  the  plates,  and 
have  been  insufficiently  attended  to  in  descriptions  of  species. 

Description. — Size  moderate,  length  250ft  exclusive  of  the  legs.  Plates  nine,  two 
pairs,  two  median.  The  surface  texture  is  very  striking.  The  dots  appear  very 
distinctly  as  perforations,  some  large  and  some  small,  with  irregular  wide  spaces 
between.  On  each  plate  of  the  pairs  the  dots  are  confined  to  two  areas,  separated 
by  a  plain  band  on  which  there  are  no  dots.  The  anterior  area,  along  the  border  of 
the  plate,  is  narrow,  the  posterior  area  occupies  more  than  half  the  plate. 

BK1T.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.   1907-9.       VOL.  I.  X 


154  J.  MURRAY 

In  front  of  the  second  median  plate,  from  which  it  is  separated  by  a  plain  band, 
and  close  to  the  edge  of  the  first  pair,  there  is  a  narrow  dotted  band.  There  is  a 
similar  band  behind  the  second  pair  of  plates,  which  I  have  not  considered  as  a 
median  plate.  These  bands,  and  the  separate  dotted  areas  on  the  paired  plates, 
recall  the  intercalary  plates  of  Bichters'  E.  scrqfa  and  E.  quadrispinosa  (26)  and 
are  doubtless  of  similar  value. 

The  lumbar  plate  is  trefoliate  and  faceted,  having  four  principal  panels  of  which 
the  posterior  one  is  obscurely  divided  in  two.  The  spines  of  the  fringe  on  the  fourth 
leg  are  short  triangles.  The  decurved  spine  of  the  inner  claws  is  somewhat  large 
and  far  from  the  base  of  the  claw. 

The  oval  eggs  are  about  80  M  long,  by  60  f*  wide.  Two  or  three  are  laid  in 
the  skin. 

Australian  varieties  of  E.  duboisi  have  precisely  the  same  surface  texture,  and 
the  same  subdivision  of  the  dotted  area  of  the  paired  plates.  This  confirms  the 
close  affinity  of  the  two  species.  Such  peculiarities  of  surface  texture  must  not  be 
given  too  much  weight  in  separating  new  forms  from  old,  as  there  can  be  little  doubt 
that  they  have  been  generally  overlooked. 

Echiniscus  perarmatus,  Murray  ?  (20) 

Identified  from  a  mutilated  skin,  having  none  of  the  spines  or  setse.  The  plates 
with  dots  of  two  kinds,  the  broad  plain  band  at  the  posterior  margin  of  the  paired 
plates,  and  the  papillae  showing  on  the  very  edge  of  the  lumbar  and  median  plates, 
are  all  characters  unknown  in  any  other  species,  or  at  any  rate  not  combined  in 
any  species. 

Echiniscus,  sp.  ?  (Plate  XIX.  Fig.  37) 

A  small  animal,  probably  immature,  which  could  not  be  identified.  Several 
examples  were  seen. 

Description. — Length  125  p,  exclusive  of  the  legs.  Plates  nine,  two  pairs,  two 
median  ;  dots  fine,  regular,  nature  doubtful.  Lateral  processes — a  and  e,  a  a  seta 
of  50  ,  e  a  curved  spine  of  12  n,  sometimes  lacking.  Dorsal  process — over  d  a  short 
curved  spine  of  6  /*.  On  fourth  leg  a  fringe  of  small  blunt  teeth.  All  claws  without 
barbs.  Lumbar  plate  trefoliate. 

It  is  needless  to  make  any  comparison  with  other  species,  as  the  animal  appears  to 
be  young  and  incompletely  developed. 

Genus — Milnesium,  Doyere  (2) 
Milnesium  tardigradum,  Doyere  (2) 
The  branched  claws  had,  some  three,  some  two  points. 


TARDIGRADA:    PACIFIC  ISLANDS  155 

Genus — Macrobiotus,  Schultze  (42) 

A :  SPECIES  HAVING  KOUGH  EGGS 

Macrobiotus  intermedium,  Plate  (23) 

Identified  from  an  egg  which  contained  a  well-developed  young.  The  egg  had 
the  typical  top-shaped  processes.  It  was,  however,  not  spherical  but  shortly  oval, 
measuring  60  by  50  n  over  the  spines.  The  pharnyx  contained  three  quadrate 
nuts  in  each  row,  the  first  apparently  united  to  the  gullet,  but  distinct  from  the 
apophysis. 

Another  elliptical  spiny  egg  occurred  in  Hawaii  (Plate  XIX.  Fig.  416). 

Macrobiotus  crassidens,  Murray  (20) 

As  the  egg  was  not  found  there  is  some  little  doubt  about  this  record.  It  is 
distinguished  from  the  preceding  by  the  greater  relative  breadth  of  the  nuts  in  the 
pharynx,  which  are  even  broader  than  long. 

Macrobiotus  oberhduseri,  Doyere  (2) 

The  Hawaiian  form  of  this  species  was  papillose  all  over,  as  in  Central  African 
examples,  but  the  papillae  were  smaller.  The  bands  of  colour  were  faint.  The 
pharynx  contained  two  nuts  in  each  row. 

It  is  likely  that  this  all-papillose  species  will  prove  to  be  distinct  from  Doyere's 
type.  The  eggs  of  the  various  forms  of  this  species  are  not  yet  sufficiently  known. 

Macrobiotus  occidentals  (?),  Murray  (Plate  XIX.  Figs.  39a-39c) 

This  Macrobiotus,  differing  in  some  respects  from  the  type  of  M.  occidentalis,  and 
probably  a  distinct  insular  race  or  species,  cannot  be  assigned  its  final  place  till  the 
egg  is  known. 

Description. — Small,  hyaline  or  very  pale  yellow.  Length  300  /*.  Skin  thin, 
dotted.  In  all  the  examples  seen  there  was  never  the  double  skin,  enclosing  a  clear 
fluid  filled  with  thin  hyaline  rectangular  plates,  as  in  the  type.  Teeth  small,  not 
widely  spreading,  abruptly  bent  outwards  beyond  the  middle.  Gullet  narrow ; 
pharynx  with  apophysis  and  two  short  rods  in  each  row,  the  first  (next  the  gullet) 
more  than  twice  as  long  as  the  second,  which  is  shortly  oval ;  a  small  comma.  Small 
black  eyes.  Fat-cells  very  large,  10  to  15  ^  in  diameter,  hyaline. 

A  large  (old)  example  measured  450  /j.  in  length,  and  was  pigmented  like 
M.  hufelandii.  The  claws  are  slender,  and  united  less  than  half-way. 

The  points  of  difference  from  the  type  are  :  the  smaller  size,  lack  of  colour  in  the 
fat-cells,  lack  of  double  skin,  abruptly«bent  teeth,  and  comma  in  the  pharynx.  These 
are  points  of  unequal  value,  in  the  aggregate  of  considerable  importance.  The  pale 


156  J.  MURRAY 

colour  might  be  associated  with  youth,  but  even  the  eggs  of  the  type  have  dull 
reddish  contents.  The  double  skin,  with  enclosed  fluid  and  plates,  is  not  regarded  as 
a  specific  character,  although  all  the  Canadian  examples  had  it.  It  is  possibly 
pathological.  The  comma  is  also  of  uncertain  value,  though  I  believe  generally 
constant  in  a  species.  It  remains  for  the  discovery  of  the  egg  to  decide  the  position  of 
the  form.  Although  pretty  abundant  no  eggs  were  found  which  might  belong  to  it. 
An  almost  identical  form  was  found  in  Australia. 

Macrobiotus,  sp.  ?  (Plate  XIX.  Figs.  41a,  416) 

An  elliptical  egg,  with  processes  of  the  hufelandi  type,  and  containing  a  young 
with  well-grown  pharynx.  The  egg  measures  90  M  by  65  M  over  the  processes,  which 
are  about  6  /u  in  length.  The  processes  are  of  the  typical  hufelandi  form,  but  many 
of  them  are  divided  at  the  ends,  as  in  furcigir,  orcadensis,  and  a  variety  of 
intermedius. 

Teeth  slender,  curved  outwards  about  the  middle  ;  gullet  of  moderate  width  ; 
pharynx  shortly  oval,  with  apophysis  and  two  rods  in  each  row,  the  first  twice  as  long 
as  the  second.  The  claws  were  not  seen. 

B :  EGGS  UNKNOWN. 
MacroUotus,  sp.  ?  (Plate  XIX.  Figs.  42«,  426). 

A  hyaline  form,  of  which  the  egg  is  unknown.  The  claws  are  of  the  hufelandi 
type,  but  they  are  only  joined  for  a  short  way  above  the  base,  and  one  of  each  pair 
is  much  shorter  than  the  other. 

The  gullet  is  narrower  than  in  hufelandii  and  has  a  prominent  rim  at  its  end  in  the 
pharynx.  The  pharynx  is  shortly  oval  and  has  two  rods  and  a  comma  in  each  row  of 
thickenings.  The  first  rod  is  more  than  twice  as  long  as  the  second,  and  has  a 
rounded  projection  near  its  base.  The  comma  is  very  small.  The  apophysis  was  not 
observed.  Eyes  present.  Length  350  M- 

Without  the  egg  the  species  cannot  be  identified.  It  has  some  affinity  with 
hufelandii,  but  has  the  claws  united  for  a  shorter  distance,  narrower  gullet,  and  weaker 
teeth.  The  form  of  the  first  rod  seems  distinctive. 

Macrobiotus,  sp.  ?  (Plate  XIX.  Figs  43«,  436). 

Pharynx  like  that  of  M.  virgatus  (p.  173),  but  with  a  comma.     Claws  different, 
united  at  base  only,  unequal. 

REMARKS  ON  THE  TARDIGRADE  FAUNA  or  THE  PACIFIC  ISLANDS 

The  interest  of  the  Tardigrade  fauna  of  these  islands  is  chiefly  geographical. 
They  have  not  yet  yielded  any  peculiar  insular -forms  in  this  group,  although  in  some 
cases  varieties  may  indicate  peculiar  insular  races. 


TARDIGRADA:    PACIFIC  ISLANDS  157 

Our  knowledge  is  as  yet  far  too  scanty  to  permit  of  any  useful  discussion  even  of 
geographical  distribution.  All  the  collections  have  been  hurriedly  made  in  the  most 
unlikely  localities,  viz.,  in  the  immediate  neighbourhood  of  the  various  ports  of  call. 
The  entire  interior  of  the  islands,  with  all  their  variety  of  climate  and  physical  features, 
is  untouched. 

No  doubt  the  right  kind  of  work  would  result  in  greatly  extending  the  number  of 
species.  The  great  apparent  difference  in  the  productiveness  of  Fiji  and  Hawaii  is 
doubtless  due  to  nothing  else  than  the  fact  that  there  was  no  suitable  collecting- 
ground  within  reach  at  Fiji. 

All  that  can  at  present  be  done  is  to  indicate  the  general  distribution  of  the  few 
species  yet  collected. 

In  the  following  table  I  have  included  Professor  Richters'  records  for  Samoa  and 
the  Hawaiian  group  (37).  These  include  one  species  (M.  samoanus)  which  we  did  not 
get,  and  the  only  species  which  is  not  known  anywhere  else  than  in  the  Pacific 
Islands.  It  exhibits  the  distribution  in  four  columns  for  the  islands,  and  nine  for  the 
rest  of  the  world. 


DISTRIBUTION  :  LOCAL  AND  GENERAL 


Pacific  Islands 


Q 

b 

£ 

i-l 

H 

IH 

SAMOA. 

OAHU. 

HAWAII. 

USTRALIA. 

w  ZEALAN 

EUROPE. 

en 

AFRICA. 

.  AMERICA 

AMERICA. 

ARCTJC. 

NTARCTIC. 

^ 

•^3 

m 

^ 

oj 

<3< 

X 

Echiniscus  mutabilis 



— 

X 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

— 

—  . 

X 



E.  noi-cezeelandia 



— 

X 

— 

X 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 



E.  arctomys  (?)  * 



— 

X 

— 

X 

— 

X 

X 

X 

— 

— 

X 

X 

E.  intermedius 



— 

X 

— 

X 

— 

— 

—  • 

— 

X 

— 

-  — 

— 

E.  viridis 



— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

E.  spinulosus  . 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

—  • 

— 

X 

— 

E.  perarmatus 



— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

—  • 

— 

— 

Milnesium  tardiyrudmn 



— 

X 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

Jfacrobiottis  hufelandii 



— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

— 

M.  areolatus    . 

X 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

— 

X 

-  — 

M,  occidentalis 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

M.  intermedius 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

— 

M.  crassidens  . 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

M.  oberfuiuseri 

J.YL  >  SUlTtfOCt/TtlfiS  , 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

M.  nodosus 

X 







X 





X 

, 







Diphascon  scoticum 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

X 

X 

— 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

Nineteen  species  were  collected  in  the  islands,  3  in  Fiji  and  16  in  the  Hawaiian 
group    (Sandwich    Isles),    but    only    15   were    identified.       Adding    M.    samoanus, 

*  All  these  records,  except  the  Australian  one,  are  wrong  ;  the  animals  recorded  as  E.  arctomys  are 
either  E.  iiiutabilis  or  E.  suillus  (see  p.  126  and  footnote). 


158  J.  MURRAY 

discovered  by  liichters  in  Samoa,  and  E.  arctomys,  recorded  by  him  for  Oahu,  we 
have  17  species  known  from  the  Pacific  Islands. 

The  only  instance  of  a  species  known  to  be  common  to  two  islands  is  M,  hufelandii 
in  Oahu  and  Hawaii.  This  fact  is  of  no  importance,  as  only  Oahu  is  at  all  well 
known. 

There  are  7  species  of  Echiniscus  (besides  1  not  identified)  all  from  Oahu.  No 
Echiniscus  is  known  in  the  other  islands.  There  are  8  identified  species  of  Macro- 
biotus,  5  from  Oahu,  2  from  Fiji,  and  1  from  Samoa,  the  ubiquitous  Milnesium,  and 
Diphascon  scoticum. 

There  are  eight  of  the  species  which  are  almost  cosmopolitan  in  distribution,  and 
which  are  therefore  of  little  importance  in  the  study  of  island  faunas.  They  indicate 
that  migration  to  these  remote  islands  is  not  difficult. 

The  other  nine  species  are  of  very  restricted  range.  None  of  them  is  known  in 
more  than  three  of  the  regions,  though  only  M.  samoanus  is  confined  to  the  islands. 
E.  novcezeelandiai  occurs  in  Oahu,  Australia,  and  New  Zealand ;  E.  intermedius 
in  Oahu,  Australia,  and  Canada  ;  E.  viridis  in  Oahu  and  Scotland ;  E.  spinulosus  in 
Oahu,  Europe,  and  the  Arctic ;  E.  perarmatus  in  Oahu  and  Africa  ;  M.  occidentals 
in  Oahu,  Australia,  and  Canada  ;  M.  crassidens  in  Oahu,  Australia,  and  Africa  ; 
M.  nodosus  in  Fiji,  New  Zealand,  and  Africa. 

The  proportion  of  the  island  species  found  in  other  countries  is  as  follows  :  Of  the 
17  species,  there  are  11  in  Australia,  10  in  Europe  and  Africa,  9  in  the  Arctic,  8 
in  N.  America,  7  in  New  Zealand  and  Asia,  5  in  S.  America,  and  4  in  the  Antarctic. 

While  the  indicated  affinity  is  closest  with  Australia,  it  is  scarcely  less  with  the 
distant  Europe  and  Africa.  The  presence  of  so  many  species  in  common  with  such 
diverse  and  distant  lands,  and  the  scarcity  of  peculiar  species,  show  the  population  of 
these  islands  to  be  a  heterogeneous  lot,  recruited  by  casual  immigration  from  all  sorts 
of  places. 

Our  information  is  too  scanty  to  allow  of  even  this  conclusion  being  made  with 
any  confidence,  as  it  is  quite  possible  that  further  work  may  bring  to  light  a  peculiar 
insular  fauna  of  water-bears.  At  present  there  is  no  indication  of  such,  except  the 
solitary  M.  samoanus. 


CANADIAN  TARDIGEADA 

Collecting  in  Canada. — The  only  opportunities  which  offered  for  collecting  in 
Canada  were  the  pauses  in  a  hurried  journey  across  the  continent.  At  Victoria, 
British  Columbia,  where  the  steamer  called  for  a  few  hours,  plenty  of  moss  was  found 
on  the  sea-shore,  close  by  the  wharf.  This  proved  afterwards  to  be  the  most 
productive  got  in  Canada.  At  Vancouver  a  whole  day  was  spent,  but  the  time 
available  was  not  sufficient  to  go  farther  afield  than  the  Stanley  Public  Park.  This 
park,  in  its  half-wild  state,  and  everywhere  clothed  in  moss,  was  very  suitable  for 
the  collection  of  microscopic  animals. 

Thereafter,  right  across  the  continent,  there  was  nothing  to  be  looked  for  but 
chance  collecting  at  any  stations  where  the  train  stopped  for  more  than  a  few 
minutes.  Through  the  Selkirks  and  the  Rockies,  at  all  the  stations  where  the  train 
stopped  long  enough  to  allow  time  for  meals,  I  generally  managed  to  get  my  pockets 
filled  with  moss. 

Accident  assisted  science.  Twice  on  the  journey  the  train  was  held  up  for  some 
time.  At  Sicamous,  floods  had  destroyed  a  little  bridge,  and  a  heavy  engine  had  got 
overturned.  While  a  new  loop  of  railway  was  being  built  round  the  obstruction 
there  were  two  days  available  for  collecting.  It  was  a  beautiful  spot,  on  the  shore 
of  a  lake,  and  moss  was  abundant,  but  somehow  it  proved  very  unproductive.  We 
were  afraid  to  make  long  excursions  up  the  neighbouring  hills,  as  we  did  not  know 
when  the  train  might  go  on. 

A  few  days  later,  after  crossing  the  Prairies  and  just  after  passing  the  Lake  of 
the  Woods,  there  was  a  train-wreck  in  front  of  us,  on  a  high  bank  between  two 
lakes.  This  delayed  us  for  several  hours.  The  microscope  was  again  got  out,  the 
dry  moss  was  washed  in  the  lake,  and  the  sediment  examined.  This  time  we  were 
luckier,  and  got  many  interesting  things. 

Half  a  day  was  spent  in  Ottawa,  and  much  moss  was  collected  in  the  public  parks 
and  roadsides.  This  also  proved  good. 

The  only  records  of  Canadian  Tardigrada  with  which  I  am  acquainted  are  in 
Richters'  "  Moosfauna  Australiens,  &c.,"  1908  (37).  He  records  three  species  from 
Vancouver :  Echiniscus  gladiator,  Milnesium  tardigradum,  and  Macrobiotus  hufe- 
landii.  For  the  whole  North  American  continent  I  only  know  one  other  record, 
Packard's  insufficiently  described  Macrobiotus  americanus  (21).  Some  half-dozen 
species  are  recorded  for  South  America. 

159 


160  J.  MURRAY 

LIST  OF  SPECIES  COLLECTED 

Hchiniscus  gladiator,  Murray.  M.  oberJtauseri,  Doyere 

E.  sylvanus,  sp.  n.  M,  intermedius,  Plate. 

E.  intermedius,  Murray.  M.  articus,  Murray? 

E.  canadensis,  sp.  n.  M.  sattleri,  Richters. 

E.  oihonnce,  Richters  ?  M.  tuberculatus,  Plate. 

E.  bisetosus,  Heinis?  M.  canadensis,  sp.  n. 

Milnesium  tardigradum,  Doy6re.  M.  virgatus,  sp.  n. 

Macrobiotus  hufelandii,  Schultze.  Dipfiascon  chilenense,  Plate. 

M.  echinoyenitus,  Richters.  D.  alpinum,  Murray. 

M.  areolatus,  sp.  n.  D.  scoticnm,  Murray. 

M.  harmsworthi,  Murray.  D.  canadense,  sp.  n. 
M.  occidentalis,  sp.  n. 

Eight  species  not  identified  (8  Echiniscus,  5  Macrobiotus). 

NOTES  ON  THE  SPECIES 
Genus— Echiniscus,  Schultze  (43) 

The  eight  species  collected  all  belong  to  that  section  of  the  genus  in  which 
segments  V.  and  VI.  are  completely  fused  into  one  plate.  It  is  rare  to  find  a 
district  possessing  so  many  species  without  including  one  in  which  V.  and  VI.  are 
separate.  E.  nmtabilis  is  the  commonest  species  in  that  section,  but  it  is  not  yet 
recorded  from  either  North  or  South  America. 

Echiniscus  gladiator,  Murray  (12)  (Plate  XX.  Fig.  51) 

Stanley  Park,  Vancouver,  British  Columbia.  Professor  Richters  had  previously 
found  it  in  moss  from  Vancouver  (37). 

The  British  Columbian  form  differs  from  the  type  in  that  the  plates  are  covered 
by  wide  but  very  low  bosses.  The  figure,  in  which  these  bosses  are  indicated  by 
black  lines,  inevitably  exaggerates  their  prominence,  but  it  shows  their  size  in 
relation  to  the  plates. 

The  paired  plates  of  E.  gladiator  and  its  variety  exarmatus  differ  from  those  of 
all  other  known  Echinisci  in  that  they  only  touch  in  the  middle  line  for  a  short 
distance  near  the  anterior  border,  and  diverge  behind,  as  shown  in  Fig.  51.  This 
character  has  not  been  indicated  in  previous  figures. 

Echiniscus  sylvanus,  sp.  n.  (Plate  XX.  Fig.  49) 

Specific  characters. — Size  moderate ;  colour  yellow ;  plates  nine,  two  pairs,  two 
median  ;  V.  and  VI.  joined  ;  seta  a  thick,  short ;  no  other  dorsal  or  lateral  processes, 
other  than  those  on  the  head  ;  dots  of  moderate  size,  and  seeming  to  be  perforations  ; 
each  plate  of  the  pairs  divided  in  two  by  lines  ;  lumbar  plate  faceted  and  trefoliate ; 
fringe  on  fourth  legs ;  inner  claws  barbed. 

Detailed  description, — Length  275  /*,  exclusive  of  fourth  legs.     The  palps  at  the 


TARDIGRADA:    CANADA  161 

mouth  are  prominent  and  the  cirri  short.  Seta  a  measures  about  50  M  in  length.  It 
is  thicker  than  in  any  known  species  except  E.  cornutus,  Richters,  but  it  scarcely 
tapers  at  all,  and  has  a  blunt  rounded  end.  The  "  auricle  "  at  its  base  is  large  and 
of  triangular  form.  The  first  median  plate  is  separated  from  the  plate  in  front  of  it 
by  a  broad  space.  The  second  median  is  divided  into  two  dotted  portions  by  a 
transverse  plain  band.  Each  plate  of  the  pairs  is  divided  into  two  unequal  parts  by 
a  line  which  runs  parallel  with  its  anterior  border,  the  narrow  part  in  front  forming 
a  prominent  roll  which  continues  round  the  side  and  shows  in  the  outline.  The 
granulation  is  of  the  sort  which  makes  the  plates  seem  cribrose.  The  dots  seem  to 
perforate  the  plate ;  they  are  unequal  in  size  and  are  separated  by  irregular  spaces. 
The  lumbar  plate  has  four  facets,  the  posterior  one  obscurely  divided  into  two. 

The  processes  of  the  fringe  are  few  (about  eight  to  ten) ;  they  are  narrow  and 
acute,  and  are  separated  by  small  spaces.  The  claws  are  large,  about  25  /u  in  length. 
The  inner  cla,ws  of  the  fourth  legs  have  small  decurved  barbs  near  their  bases. 

Habitat. — Among  dry  moss  from  the  woods  on  the  shore  of  the  Lake  of  the 
Woods,  Ontario. 

E.  sylvanus  belongs  to  a  group  of  species  of  which  E.  arctomys  may  be  taken  as 
the  type.  These  have  nine  or  ten  plates,  segments  V.  and  VI.  have  completely 
coalesced,  and  there  are  no  processes,  dorsal  or  lateral,  on  the  body,  after  seta  a. 
This  section  of  the  genus  includes  ten  forms  previously  known,  and  three  others,  in 
addition  to  E.  sylvanus,  are  described  in  this  paper.  Two  of  these  forms  (macromastix 
and  exarmatus)  were  described  merely  as  varieties. 

Most  of  these  species  differ  in  conspicuous  characters  from  E.  sylvanus.  The 
thick  seta  a  alone  separates  it  from  all  of  them.  Other  distinguishing  points  are 
here  given  briefly.  Four  species  have  seta  a  extremely  long  (macromastix,  wendti, 
reticulatus,  tessellatm],  four  species  have  no  fringe  (elegans,  intermedius,  arctomys, 
exarmatus),  two  species  have  totally  different  surface  markings  (spiculifer,  bigranu- 
latus).  There  remain  three  species  which  bear  a  closer  resemblance  to  E.  sylvanus. 
E,  viridis  and  E.  macronyx  have,  like  E.  sylvanus,  very  large  claws.  E.  viridis  has 
the  surface  dots  very  large,  and  seta  a  very  short  and  fine.  E.  macronyx  has 
extremely  fine  and  close  dots,  no  barbs  on  any  claws,  and  only  the  fourth  legs  have 
large  claws. 

E.  kerguelensis  is  nearest  to  E.  sylvanus.  It  has  shorter  claws  and  seta  a  is 
slender.  It  is  also  considerably  smaller  (165  n,  according  to  Richters,  but  Australian 
examples  larger,  225  n;  sylvanus,  275  /"). 

Echiniscus  intermedius,  Murray  (Plate  XX.  Figs.  52a,  526) 

Characters  of  Canadian  variety. — Small,  hyaline  or  greyish.  Mouth  cirri  with 
large  conical  bases ;  seta  a  long,  no  other  processes  on  body.  Three  median  plates, 
first  and  second  divided  into  two  equal  portions  by  transverse  lines.  Plates  finely 

BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.   1907-9.       VOL.  T.  Y 


162  J.  MURRAY 

dotbad  with  pjlluiid  d)ts.  Lumbar  plate  not  trefoliate,  faceted  in  three  panels,  the 
lines  separating  the  lateral  from  the  median  panels  going  right  up  to  the  third 
median  plate.  No  fringe  on  fourth  legs,  or  barbs  on  claws.  Red  eyes.  Larva  with 
two  claws,  otherwise  like  the  adult. 

General  description. — Length  175  M,  exclusive  of  the  legs,  larva  100  M,  seta  a  (of 
adult)  60  n.  The  anterior  portion  of  the  head  is  rounded,  and  more  like  a  head  of 
Macrobiotus  than  Echiniscus,  lacking  the  lateral  knobs  and  the  beak  usual  in  the 
genus.  The  base  of  the  head  is  wider  than  the  front  of  the  next  segment,  so  that 
there  is  a  slight  neck,  rather  more  pronounced  in  the  larva.  The  first  and  second 
median  plates  are  each  divided  into  two  portions,  as  is  common  in  that  section  of  the 
genus  which  has  V.  and  VI.  separate.  The  third  median  often  appears  to  be  divided 
in  exactly  the  same  manner,  but  the  second  portion  is  closely  joined  to  the 
lumbar  plate.  Both  parts  of  the  divided  median  plates  are  dotted.  The  plates 
of  each  pair  appear  to  be  divided  into  two  by  a  broad  band,  which  is,  however, 
dotted. 

E.  intermedius  is  a  very  distinct  species.  It  has  V.  and  VI.  united,  yet  has  the 
median  plates  transversely  divided,  which  is  only  usual  in  species  having  V.  and  VI. 
separate.  It  appears  to  consistently  lack  the  normal  red  colour  of  Echiniscus,  though 
that  is  not  a  safe  character.  The  faceting  of  the  lumbar  plate  is  unusual  in  that  the 
angle  of  junction  of  the  three  facets  continues  to  the  anterior  edge  of  the  plate.  The 
absence  of  a  trefoil  on  the  lumbar  plate  is  very  unusual.  I  know  of  no  other  species 
where  this  character  is  so  distinctly  marked.  Some  have  been  figured  without  the 
cuts  which  make  the  trefoil,  but  unless  the  authors  emphasise  the  absence  it  is  likely 
that  they  have  been  overlooked. 

The  eggs  have  only  been  seen  in  a  form,  probably  of  specific  value,  from  Hawaii 
(see  p.  151). 

Habitat. — Among  moss  from  the  sea-shore  at  Victoria,  British  Columbia, 
June  1909,  abundant. 

This  variety,  with  fine  pellucid  dots,  is  not  known  anywhere  else,  but  in  Queens- 
land there  occurs  the  type  in  which  the  plates  have  a  broad  reticulation  instead  of 
the  pellucid  dots  (see  p.  129).  Curiously  enough,  there  is  a  form  linking  these 
extremes  in  Hawaii.  It  is  reticulate,  like  the  Queensland  form,  but  the  reticulation 
is  smaller,  and  is  formed  by  the  edges  of  shallow  pits  (see  p.  151). 

Echiniscus  canadensis,  sp.  n.  (Plate  XX.  Fig.  47) 

Specific  characters. — Large,  red ;  plates  nine,  two  pairs,  two  median,  V.  and  VI. 
fused,  dots  round,  regular,  close  ;  no  lateral  processes  except  seta  «  ;  dorsal  processes 
— a  long  setse  over  c,  sometimes  a  shorter  seta  over  d ;  fringe  of  sharp  spines  on  the 
fourth  leg ;  inner  claws  with  decurved,  outer  with  straight,  spines  near  the  base. 

Detailed  description. — Length  300  M  and  upwards,  exclusive  of  the  fourth  legs ; 


TARDIGRADA:    CANADA  163 

seta  a  about  75  n,  dorsal  seta  over  c  about  100  to  150  M.  Body  very  thick 
dorso-ventrally.  The  dots  on  the  plates  are  of  moderate  size.  They  are  circles  which 
touch  at  their  edges,  and  which  often  show  a  central  dot.  They  look  like  very  flat 
granules.  The  paired  plates  are  each  divided  by  a  furrow  into  two  parts.  It  could 
not  be  seen  whether  the  dots  ceased  in  this  furrow.  Most  of  the  specimens,  even 
very  large  ones,  had  no  processes  on  the  body  except  the  dorsal  seta  over  c ;  only 
a  few  had  the  smaller  one  over  d.  The  lumbar  plate  is  obscurely  trefoliate.  The 
spines  of  the  fringe  are  triangular,  and  are  usually  separated  a  little  at  their  bases. 
The  two-clawed  larva  has  been  seen,  and  from  two  to  four  shortly  oval  eggs  in 
the  cast  skin.  The  barbs  of  the  inner  claws  are  fairly  large  and  high  up  on  the 
claw.  The  outer  claws  have  not  been  seen  with  more  than  one  straight  spine  near 
the  base. 

Habitat. — Among  moss  growing  on  the  sea-shore,  but  little  above  the  high-water 
mark,  Victoria,  British  Columbia.  Very  abundant  in  some  pieces  of  the  moss. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  compare  E.  canadensis  with  very  many  species  in  order  to 
discriminate  it.  There  are  very  few  species  known  which  have  straight  barbs  on  the 
outer  claws.  Among  them  there  are  none  which  are  destitute  of  lateral  processes 
(other  than  a).  Indeed  it  is  very  rare  for  any  species  to  have  dorsal  and  no  lateral 
processes. 

The  Echinisci  with  straight  barbs  on  the  outer  claws  are  four  in  number — 
E.  granulatus,  E.  blumi,  E.  oihonnce,  and  E.  merokensis.  The  types  of  E.  granulatus 
and  E.  oihonnce  are  not  described  as  having  outer  barbs,  but  the  barbs  have  been 
observed  in  Scottish  examples.  All  of  these  species  have  from  two  to  four  lateral 
processes  (exclusive  of  seta  a),  while  E.  canadensis  has  none.  The  dots  of  E. 
granulatus  are  distinct  papillse.  E.  merokensis  and  E.  blumi  have,  according  to 
Richters'  figures,  much  coarser  dots.  E.  oihonnce  has  four  lateral  spicules,  over  b,  c, 
d,  and  e,  in  addition  to  the  larger  spines  and  setae. 

Echiniscus  oihonnce,  Richters  ?  (27)  (Plate  XX.  Fig.  48) 

This  is  a  very  doubtful  identification,  and  the  Canadian  animal  is  only  provisionally 
united  with  oihonnce  because  we  know  so  little  as  to  the  limits  to  the  variation  in  the 
length  of  the  setse  and  spines.  There  are  points  of  striking  resemblance  to  oihonnce, 
as  well  as  important  differences. 

This  form  differs  from  oihonnce  in  lacking  seta  b,  and  in  the  great  elongation  of 
process  d  (which  is  a  spine  in  oihonnce).  It  resembles  it  in  having  all  the  correspond- 
ing processes  except  seta  b,  in  having  the  dorsal  process  over  d  a  broad  triangle,  and 
in  the  little  spicules  near  the  bases  of  the  lateral  seta3. 

Description. — Of  large  size  ;  length  300  p-  exclusive  of  head  and  foot.  Plates  nine, 
two  pairs,  two  median.  Surface  punctate  with  large  dots,  which  appear  to  be 
perforations,  and  are  separated  by  spaces  wider  than  themselves.  The  three  lateral 


164  J.  MURRAY 

setae  c,  d,  and  e  are  nearly  equal  to  one  another  and  about  200  p.  in  length.  The 
dorsal  seta  over  c  is  about  120  /x  long.  The  fringe  on  the  fourth  leg  consists 
of  short  triangular  teeth.  The  claws  measure  30  /t  in  length.  The  inner  ones 
have  small  decurved  barbs,  which  are  placed  very  high,  little  below  the  middle  of 
the  claw. 

Habitat. — Stanley  Park,  Vancouver,  British  Columbia. 

In  Scottish  examples  of  oihonncc,  which  are  typical  in  all  other  respects,  the  outer 
claws  of  the  fourth  legs  bear  straight  spines  near  their  bases,  although  Professor 
Richters  makes  the  absence  of  such  spines  one  of  his  specific  characters.  Although 
the  presence  of  these  spines  may  be  of  some  positive  value,  since  they  are  possessed 
by  very  few  species,  their  absence  cannot  be  relied  upon  as  a  specific  character.  In 
E.  granulatus  (or  the  animal  which  I  identify  as  that  species)  the  young  which  have 
j>assed  the  two-clawed  stage  have  no  outer  barbs,  which  are  acquired  at  later  moults, 
and  increase  in  number  to  three  in  large  examples.  The  same  progressive  develop- 
ment of  the  outer  barbs  occurs  in  E.  blumi,  which  may  also  have  as  many  as  three  of 
them  on  one  claw. 

The  character  is  thus  shown  to  be  a  mark  of  age,  but  as  the  great  majority  of  the 
species  do  not  have  them  at  any  age,  when  present  they  make  a  good  confirmatory 
character. 

The  Canadian  examples,  though  of  large  size,  had  no  barbs  on  the  outer  claws,  in 
this  respect  conforming  to  Richters'  type.  It  differs  mainly  in  lacking  seta  b,  and  in 
the  equalisation  of  the  lateral  processes  c,  d,  and  e. 

Echiniscus  bisetosus,  Heinis  ?  (7)  (Plate  XX.  Fig.  50) 

This  is  a  somewhat  doubtful  identification,  though  the  animal  is  certainly  very 
near  Heinis's  species.  The  differences  are  not  very  serious,  and  as  our  animal  was 
small,  and  therefore  probably  immature,  the  processes  which  it  lacks  might  be 
acquired  later. 

Description. — Colour  red;  length  175  M,  exclusive  of  legs.  Plates  nine,  two 
pairs,  two  median,  dots  obscure.  Lateral  process  one,  the  seta  a,  50  M  in  length. 
Dorsal  processes — over  c  a  seta  of  60  M,  over  d  a  small  curved  spine  of  8  /*.  Fringe 
of  small  triangular  teeth  on  fourth  leg.  No  barbs  seen  on  any  claws. 

Habitat. — Among  moss  from  the  sea-shore  at  Victoria,  British  Columbia,  one 
example  only. 

According  to  Heinis,  E.  bisetosus  has  also  a  short  spine  c,  and  decurved  barbs  on 
the  inner  claws.  His  figure  shows  a  minute  lateral  spicule  d,  of  which  I  find  no 
mention  in  the  text. 

It  might  be  suggested  that  this  small  animal  could  be  a  young  example  of 
E.  canadensis  (Fig.  47)  which  was  found  abundantly  at  the  same  place.  That 
species  has,  however,  at  all  ages  conspicuous  barbs. 


TARDIGRADA:    CANADA  165 

Echiniscus,  sp.  ?  (Plate  XX.  Fig.  44) 

Description. — Large,  red;  length  300  /u,  exclusive  of  legs.  Plates  ten,V.  and  VI. 
united,  two  pairs,  three  median.  Lateral  processes  four — a  a  seta  of  80  p.,  c  a  seta  of 
120  /u,  d  a  seta  of  70  n,  e  a  seta  of  90  M.  Dorsal  processes — over  c  a  curved  spine 
of  variable  length,  10  to  25  /a  and  upwai'ds — over  d  a  small  spicule.  The  mouth  palps 
are  large  and  stout,  and  the  cirri  short.  The  auricle  at  the  base  of  a  is  small  and 
rounded.  The  fringe  on  the  fourth  leg  is  crenate.  The  inner  claws  of  the  fourth  leg 
have  decurved  barbs  of  moderate  size.  The  dots  on  the  plates  are  very  fine,  and 
appear  to  be  granules.  An  example  of  210  M  in  length  had  claws  of  nearly  25  M. 

Skins  with  two  eggs  have  been  found.  The  larva  with  two  claws,  found 
associated  with  this  animal,  had  only  the  setae  a  and  c.  All  the  dorsal  processes 
may  be  lacking. 

Habitat. — Among  moss  from  the  sea- shore  at  Victoria,  British  Columbia,  several 
examples,  larva,  and  eggs. 

It  rarely  happens  that  an  Echiniscus  with  V.  and  VI.  united  has  three  distinct 
median  plates.  Sometimes  the  skin  between  IV.  and  V.  is  dotted,  but  there  are  no 
lines  marking  the  boundaries  of  a  plate.  In  this  animal,  and  another  figured  on  the 
same  plate  (Fig.  46),  the  third  median  is  distinct. 

The  lateral  setaj  are  the  same  in  number  as  in  E.  testudo,  E.  muscicola,  E.fila- 
mentosus,  &c.,  but  they  are  differently  arranged.  E.  velaminis  has  the  same  number 
of  setae,  and  their  positions  are  the  same,  but  it  has  the  dots  of  a  totally  different 
character,  no  barbs  on  the  claws,  and  much  larger  processes  on  the  fringe. 

Although  the  finding  of  eggs  shows  that  the  animal  is  mature,  it  cannot  be 
positively  identified  with  any  known  species,  nor  yet  accepted  as  distinct.  The 
variability  of  the  dorsal  processes  confirms  what  has  been  already  stated  as  to  the 
unreliability  of  that  character.  It  is  a  good  example  of  those  forms  which  may  be 
regarded  as  distinct  species,  but  which  lack  sufficiently  good  characters,  other  than 
the  arrangement  of  the  spines  and  setae. 

Echiniscus,  sp.  ?  (Plate  XX.  Fig.  46) 

Desertion. — Small,  red  ;  length  180  M,  exclusive  of  legs.  Plates  nine,  V.  and  VI. 
united,  two  pairs,  three  median.  Lateral  processes  four — a  a  seta  of  80  M,  6  a  seta  of 
40  M,  c  a  seta  of  100  p.,  d  a  seta  of  100  /".  Dorsal  processes — over  c  a  seta  of  40  /u, 
over  d  a  spine  of  15  p..  Mouth  palps  relatively  large,  and  cirri  long.  Lumbar  plate 
trefoliate.  Fringe  of  few  large  blunt  processes.  A  blunt  palp  at  the  base  of  the 
fourth  leg.  The  inner  claws  of  the  last  legs  with  small  decurved  barbs.  Dots  on 
the  plates  small  and  uniform,  apparently  granules. 

Habitat.  — Stanley  Park,  Vancouver,  British  Columbia. 

In  the  number  and  the  surface  texture  of  the  plates  this  animal  resembles  that 


166  J.  MURRAY 

figured  on  the  same  plate  (Fig.  44).     It  has  the  same  number  of  lateral  setae,  but 
they  are  a,  b,  c,  and  d,  instead  of  a,  c,  d,  e. 

It  has  a  close  resemblance  to  E.  blumi,  Richters  (27.)  The  lateral  setae  are  the 
same  in  position  and  relative  sizes.  The  differences  are — the  lack  of  barbs  on  the 
outer  claws,  the  finer  granulation,  and  the  blunt  processes  of  the  fringe.  The 
absence  of  barbs  on  the  outer  claws  is  of  little  importance  as  a  negative  character, 
since  it  varies  with  age.  There  is  no  indication  that  our  animal  is  mature.  Richters 
figures  E.  blumi  with  very  coarse  granulation,  and  with  the  fringe  of  sharp  spines. 
Many  examples  had  no  dorsal  processes. 

Echiniscus,  sp.  ?  (Plate  XX.  Fig.  45) 

Description. — Size  moderate;  length  212  /x.  Plates  nine,  V.  and  VI.  united,  two 
pairs,  two  median.  Dots  small,  some  appearing  as  perforations,  irregular,  of  two 
sorts,  a  larger  dark,  a  smaller  pellucid.  Lateral  processes  four — a  a  curved  seta  of  70  /«  ; 
c,  d,  and  e  long,  broad  spines  of  50,  50,  and  80  M  respectively.  Dorsal  processes — 
over  c,  a  flat  spine  of  40  /x — between  this  spine  and  the  lateral  one  a  spicule.  The 
lateral  and  dorsal  spines  are  all  rough.  There  is  a  fringe  of  obtuse  processes  on  the 
fourth  leg.  It  was  not  ascertained  if  there  were  barbs  on  any  claws. 

Habitat.-^-Among  moss  from  the  sea-shore  of  Victoria,  British  Columbia,  one 
example  only. 

This  appears  to  be  a  distinct  species,  but  it  is  not  sufficiently  known,  as  only  one 
example  was  observed,  and  that  might  not  be  mature.  There  is  no  species  known 
with  similar  roughened  spines.  In  E.  duboisi  they  are  spinulose,  not  rough,  and  the 
animal  is  otherwise  very  different. 

Genus — Milnesium,  Doyere  (2) 
Milnesium  tardigradum,  Doyere  (2) 

This,  the  most  generally  distributed  of  all  water-bears,  was  only  observed  in 
Ontario,  where  it  occurred  in  two  localities,  near  the  Lake  of  the  Woods  and  in 
Ottawa.  Length,  up  to  800  M.  Four  eggs  seen  in  the  body. 

Genus — Mctcrobiotus,  Schultze  (42) 

A :  SPECIES  HAVING  ROUGH  EGGS 

Macrobiotiis  hufelandii,  Schultze  (42) 

Abundant  in  all  the  Canadian  localities  visited  ;  eggs  also  plentiful.  In  the 
Rocky  Mountains  it  attained  a  length  of  1200  /.-,  being  the  largest  water-bear  I 
have  measured. 


TARDIGRADA:    CANADA  167 

Macrobiotus  echinogenitus,  Richters  ?  (27) 

This  identification,  being  made  from  the  egg  alone,  is  somewhat  uncertain.  The 
egg  (Plate  XXI.  Fig.  58)  is  like  that  of  M.  areolatus  (Fig.  53d),  but  is  smaller, 
and  the  spines  are  not  separated  by  any  space. 

Habitat. — British  Columbia  and  Ottawa. 

For  a  discussion  of  the  affinities  of  this  species  with  M.  areolatus  and  other 
related  species,  see  below,  under  M.  areolatus. 

Macrobiotus  areolatus,  sp.  n.  (Plate  XXI.  Figs.  53a-53e) 
Synonym  :  M.  echinogenitus,  Richters,  var.  areolatus,  Murray  (19) 

Specific  characters. — Large,  dark  brown  ;  gullet  wide  ;  teeth  strong,  bent  near  the 
furca  ;  pharynx  shortly  oval,  with  apophyses,  three  narrow  equal  rods,  and  no  comma  ; 
egg  large,  bearing  very  large  conical  processes,  which  are  separated  at  their  bases, 
the  surface  between  marked  with  irregular  polygons  which  form  a  symmetrical 
pattern. 

General  description. — The  largest  example  measured  was  700  ^  in  length.  The 
egg  measures  about  100  /u.  without  the  spines,  200  n  over  the  spines,  which,  however, 
vary  considerably  in  length.  Old  individuals,  as  in  most  large  species  of  the  genus, 
are  strongly  pigmented  with  a  dingy  brown  colour,  which  is  not  disposed  in  such 
regular  bands  as  in  M.  oberhciuseri,  but  which  still  falls  into  obscure  bands,  prob- 
ably caused  by  the  disposition  of  the  muscles  and  other  structures  in  the  skin. 
The  young  are  colourless  and  transparent.  The  gullet  is  somewhat  constricted 
towards  the  mouth  and  enlarged  towards  the  pharynx,  and  bears  the  usual  apophyses 
on  its  end.  The  three  linear  rods  are  slightly  curved  and  are  nearly  equal  in  length. 
The  stomach  consists  of  few  large  cells.  There  is  a  pair  of  dark  eyes.  The  claws 
are  in  two  similar  pairs,  which  are  united  at  the  bases  only,  and  diverge  widely. 
One  claw  of  each  pair  is  longer,  and  has  supplementary  points. 

Four  unripe  eggs  have  been  seen  in  the  body  together.  The  shell  of  the  egg  is 
thick,  and  of  two  layers.  The  reticulation  which  appears  on  the  surface  is  produced 
by  the  edges  of  septa  which  cross  the  space  between  the  two  layers.  The  areolation 
appears  to  be  originally  regular  hexagons,  of  which  alternate  ones  bear  processes, 
The  intermediate  hexagons  are  each  divided  by  a  transverse  septum,  producing  two 
irregular  pentagons.  The  turgidity  of  the  processes  further  distorts  and  obscures 
the  regularity  of  the  original  hexagons. 

The  areolation  varies  considerably.  In  one  variety  (Fig.  53f)  the  intermediate 
hexagons  are  undivided  and  equal  the  processes  in  basal  area.  Some  forms  have  all 
the  areolue  rounded,  and  circular  or  elliptical. 

Owing  to  imperfect  understanding  of  M.  echinogenitus  this  species  was  at  first 


168  J.  MURRAY 

united  to  it  as  a  variety.  Subsequent  experience  of  the  animal  in  many  parts  of  the 
world  established  confidence  in  the  constancy  of  its  peculiarities.  The  absence  of  a 
"  comma  "  in  the  pharynx  cannot  be  considered  an  important  specific  character,  but 
when  we  find  it  constantly  associated  with  an  areolated  egg,  while  M.  echinogenitus 
has  a  conspicuous  comma,  and  non-areolated  egg,  the  character  adds  weight  to  the 
other  specific  distinctions. 

Habitat. — Among  moss,  Kooky  Mountains,  British  Columbia,  and  Ottawa, 
June  1909.  Widely  distributed  over  the  world — recorded  from  Spitsbergen,  Scotland, 
India,  Tropical  and  South  Africa,  Australia,  New  Zealand,  &c.  Richters  (39)  has 
recorded  it  from  Ascension  and  Comoro. 

Arctic  examples  have  attained  to  a  larger  size,  but  the  Canadian  eggs  are  the 
largest  yet  seen. 

The  rods  in  the  pharynx  are  relatively  shorter  and  broader  in  the  young 
(Fig.  53  is  drawn  from  a  young  hyaline  example).  In  the  adult  they  are  linear  and 
curved. 

The  characters  of  the  egg  sufficiently  distinguish  the  species  from  all  others 
hitherto  described.  There  are  some  species,  not  yet  described,  which  have  the 
surface  areolate  in  the  same  manner,  but  the  processes  of  different  form. 

If  the  egg  is  not  found,  the  identification  is  less  certain.  The  presence  of  three 
equal  linear  rods,  without  a  comma,  and  of  divergent  claws,  united  at  the  base  only, 
differentiates  it  from  the  typical  forms  of  hufelandii,  harmsworthi,  and  other  related 
species.  According  to  Richters,  however,  M.  hufelandii  may  have  three  equal  rods, 
and  the  claws  may  be  joined  at  the  base  only.  The  other  species  probably  vary  in 
the  same  manner. 

Since  Richters'  original  diagnosis  of  M.  echinogenitus  was  evidently  too  compre- 
hensive, and  included  several  forms  which  we  are  now,  after  extended  experience, 
enabled  to  separate,  it  will  be  well  to  take  a  review  here  of  the  group  of  related 
species. 

Richters,  in  his  description,  recognised  two  forms  which  he  distinguished  as  a 
and  b,  but  he  did  not  bestow  separate  names  on  them ;  a  has  three  "  bacilla  "  and  a 
"  comma "  in  the  pharynx,  l>  has  two  equal  bacilla,  and  a  comma.  Both  have 
V-shaped  claws  and  the  eggs  are  exactly  similar  in  form,  but  that  of  a  is  much 
larger. 

M.  harmsworthi  was  at  first  separated  from  echinogenitus  on  account  of  the  form 
of  the  claws  alone,  which  were  joined  for  about  half  of  their  length,  as  in  M.  hufe- 
landi.  Richters  considers  that  the  claws  vary  in  the  amount  of  union,  just  as  those 
of  hufelandi  do,  but  assents  to  the  separation  of  M.  harmsworthi,  which  he  supposes 
to  be  his  echinogenitus  a,*  on  the  characters  of  the  pharynx. 

M.  areolatus  is  also  supposed  by  Richters  to  be  included  in  echinogenitus  a,  but 

*  See  Richters'  "Tardigraden  aus  den  Karpathen,"  Zool.  Anzeiy.,  Bd.  3C,  July  1910,  p.  7.  This 
paper  appeared  after  our  Bibliographical  List  was  completed,  so  could  not  be  included  in  its  proper  place. 


TARDIGRADA:    CANADA  169 

that  has  a  "  comma  "  in  the  pharynx,  and  the  egg  is  figured  with  the  processes  close 
together  at  their  bases,  so  that  there  is  no  room  for  the  "  areolation." 

There  remains  M.  echinogenitus  b,  which,  with  the  separation  of  a,  becomes  the 
type  of  the  species.  It  has  the  two  bacilla  equal,  a  not  very  common  arrangement, 
and  the  claws  united  at  the  base  or  for  a  short  way  above  the  base ;  the  surface  of 
the  egg  is  not  "  areolate."  A  great  many  of  the  records  of  this  species  must  be 
regarded  as  doubtful.  Many  of  these  were  made  before  the  related  species  areolatiis 
and  harmsworthi  were  discriminated,  so  that  unless  details  of  the  pharynx  are  given 
it  cannot  be  known  to  which  form  a  record  refers.  It  was  till  recently  supposed  that 
the  eggs  of  echinogenitus  and  harmsworthi  could  be  distinguished.  The  original 
specimens  of  the  eggs  of  harmsworthi  had  processes  much  more  shortly  acuminate  than 
those  of  the  typical  echinogenitus,  but  some  have  recently  been  seen  with  points 
almost  as  long.  Records  of  echinogenitus  have  been  commonly  made  (at  any  rate  in 
my  papers)  on  the  strength  of  finding  the  egg  alone.  Although  the  eggs  with  short 
points  may  be  usually  harmsworthi  and  those  with  long  points  echinogenitus,  there 
will  always  be  doubt  about  these  records  unless  the  eggs  are  so  ripe  as  to  show 
pharynx  and  claws  (see  p.  89,  footnote). 

M.  polaris  has  the  surface  of  the  egg  "areolate  "  in  the  same  manner  as  in  one 
form  of  areolatus  (Fig.  53e),  and  the  processes  may  be  of  the  same  form.  It  is, 
nevertheless,  a  totally  different  egg,  being  much  smaller,  and  with  the  polygons 
relatively  much  smaller,  and  therefore  more  numerous. 

Macrobiotus  harmsivorthi,  Murray  (19) 

Habitat. — Near  the  Lake  of  the  Woods,  and  in  the  public  parks,  Ottawa. 

The  identification  was  made  from  eggs  which  contained  young  in  which  the 
pharynx  and  claws  could  be  seen.  The  egg  measured  60  /a.  without  the  processes, 
and  80  n  over  the  processes.  These  were  even  shorter  than  in  the  type,  being 
considerably  broader  than  long.  The  claws  of  a  pair  were  unequal,  and  united  for 
about  half  the  length  of  the  larger  one. 

A  very  similar  egg,  but  of  larger  size,  was  got  in  Ottawa.  It  measured  80  /*, 
without  the  spines,  and  120  n  over  the  spines.  The  pharynx  and  claws  were 
not  seen. 

Macrobiotus  occidentalis,  sp.  n.  (Plate  XXL  Figs.  54a-54e) 

Specific  characters. — Large,  orange-red ;  stomach  and  eggs  darker  red  ;  skin 
hyaline,  dotted  ;  gullet  narrow ;  teeth  moderately  slender,  curved ;  pharynx  shortly 
oval,  with  apophyses  and  two  rods,  the  second  shorter,  and  no  "  comma."  Claws  of 
hufelandi  type,  united  half-way.  Egg  spherical,  covered  with  slender  tapering 
curved  processes,  which  are  separated  at  their  bases. 

General  desertion. — Total   length    up   to    800  p,  pharynx   of  small   example, 

BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.   1907-9.      VOL.  I.  7, 


170  J.  MURRAY 

42  fi  long,  claws  20  M-  Eyes  dark.  The  dots  on  the  skin  are  irregularly  placed, 
but  at  very  nearly  equal  spaces.  They  are  not  pigment  spots,  but  appear  to  be 
minute  elliptical  pieces  of  the  same  nature  as  the  skin,  set  into  it  like  buttons  in  a 
cushion,  and  looking  dark  from  the  different  refraction  of  the  light.  The  reddish 
colour  is  confined  within  the  body  fluid,  and  is  resident  chiefly  in  the  fat-cells, 
though  the  fluid  is  also  more  or  less  coloured.  There  are  two  layers  of  skin, 
between  which  there  is  enclosed  a  colourless  fluid,  in  which  float  numerous  thin 
hyaline  oblong  plates.  This  may  be  a  pathological  condition,  but  it  is  noteworthy 
that  it  occurred  in  all  the  individuals  examined,  old  and  young,  and  in  none  of  the 
other  species  present. 

The  claws  are  like  those  of  hufelandii,  but  more  slender.  Those  of  each  pair  are 
unequal  in  length,  and  are  united  for  half  the  length  of  the  larger  one,  which  bears 
the  usual  two  supplementary  points. 

The  basal  ridge,  which  in  M.  coronifer  bears  the  "  corona  "  of  little  spines,  is 
in  this  species  irregularly  dentate. 

The  processes  of  the  egg  are  separated  by  interspaces  greater  than  their  own 
diameter  at  the  base.  They  have  narrow  conical  bases,  and  taper  to  slender  points 
which  are  curved  over. 

The  gullet  is  about  4  n  in  width,  but  is  rather  narrower  below  and  expanded 
towards  the  pharynx.  The  rod  next  the  gullet  is  about  three  times  as  long  as 
broad,  the  second  about  twice  as  long  as  broad. 

Habitat. — Among  moss  from  the  sea-shore,  little  above  high-water  level,  at 
Victoria,  British  Columbia  ;  very  abundant,  eggs  also  abundant. 

M.  occidentalis  appears  to  have  its  closest  affinities  with  that  group  of  northern 
species  of  which  M.  coronifer  may  be  regarded  as  the  type.  Several  of  these  species 
have  a  spinose  ridge  in  front  of  the  claws,  most  distinct  on  the  fourth  legs.  In 
M.  coronifer  and  M.  granulatus  the  ridge  bears  spines — in  M.  crenulatus  it  is 
wrinkled — in  M.  harms^vorth^  it  is  crenate  or  plain.  In  large  examples  of  M. 
occidentalis  the  ridge  is  dentate  (Fig.  54d). 

Several  of  the  northern  species  have  distinctive  colouring,  resident  in  the  fat-cells. 
M.  coronifer  and  M.  islandicus  are  bright  yellow.  The  colour  of  M.  occidentalis 
is  more  inclined  to  red.  As  in  M.  coronifer,  the  colour  is  present  even  in  the  egg. 
In  the  egg  it  is  darker,  and  more  distinctly  red.  It  cannot  then  be  resident  in  the 
fat-cells.  The  body  fluid  itself  is  in  old  animals  of  a  yellowish  colour. 

The  processes  of  the  egg  have  some  resemblance  to  those  of  M.  coronifer  and 
M.  islandicus.  The  egg  of  coronifer  is  elliptical,  and  the  spines  are  straight ; 
that  of  islandicus  is  round,  but  it  has  two  sorts  of  processes,  spines  like  those  of 
coronifer  and  processes  like  those  of  granulatus.  M.  occidentalis  has  longer  and 
more  slender  spines  than  either,  and  they  are  variously  bent  and  turned  over  at 
the  ends. 

The  pharynx  is  quite  like  those  of  coronifer  and  islandicus.     On  the  whole  the 


TARDIGRADA:    CANADA  171 

species  is  nearest  to  islandicus,  from  which  it  is  distinguished  by  the  ridge  without 
spines,  by  the  different  egg-spines,  and  by  the  dotted  skin. 

In  Australia  and  Hawaii  there  is  a  form,  apparently  belonging  to  this  species, 
agreeing  with  it  in  most  characters,  but  not  yet  fully  studied.  The  colour  is  a  paler 
yellow.  The  skin  is  dotted  as  in  the  type,  but  the  specimens  lacked  the  clear  fluid 
circulating  between  two  layers  of  skin,  and  containing  numerous  hyaline  plates.  The 
eggs  were  not  seen  in  these  countries. 

Macrobiotus  intermedius,  Plate  (23) 

Habitat. — Near  the  Lake  of  the  Woods,  Ontario. 

The  egg  had  the  typical  top- shaped  processes.  It  measured  50  ^  without  the 
processes,  58  n  over  them.  The  young  squeezed  out  of  the  egg  was  120  n  in  length, 
and  the  round  pharynx  was  15  n  in  diameter.  The  processes  of  the  egg  were 
separated  by  spaces  greater  than  their  own  diameter,  and  the  surface  between  them 
was  covered  with  regular  pellucid  dots. 

Macrobiotus  oberhauseri,  Doyere  (2) 

Habitat. — Vancouver,  British  Columbia. 

American  examples  were  not  papillose,  as  is  so  often  the  case  in  Africa. 

B  :  SPECIES  HAVING  THICK-SHELLED  EGGS  WITH  EMBEDDED  RODS 
Macrobiotus  arcticus,  Murray  ?  (19) 

Habitat. — Vancouver,  Rocky  Mountains,  Lake  of  the  Woods. 

No  eggs  were  found  in  Canada,  and  without  them  there  is  some  doubt  about  the 
identification.  The  animal  found  in  three  of  the  localities  visited  agrees  with 
M.  arcticus  in  having  a  narrow  gullet,  two  short  "  bacilla  "  in  the  pharynx,  and  claws 
of  the  Diphascon  type. 

The  only  other  species  known  which  has  similar  eggs  is  H.  hastatus,  Murray  (18), 
v.'hich  was  not  observed  in  Canada. 

C  :  SPECIES  HAVING  SMOOTH  EGGS 
Macrobiotus  canadensis,  sp.  n.  (Plate  XXI.  Figs.  6la-6ld) 

Specific  characters. — Small,  hyaline  ;  gullet  slender ;  teeth  abruptly  enlarged 
about  the  middle ;  pharynx  nearly  round,  with  three  short  nuts,  increasing  in  size 
from  first  to  third,  comma  very  obscure  or  none ;  claws  widely  divergent,  but 
approaching  the  Diphascon  type ;  one  claw  of  each  pair  is  longer  and  thinner  than 
the  other,  and  that  of  one  pair  is  very  long  and  slender;  eggs  narrowly  oblong, 
smooth,  laid  in  the  skin  at  the  moult. 

General  description. — Length  225  M.     A  pair  of  small  dark  ejes.     The  teeth  are 


172  J.  MURRAY 

straight  for  somewhat  more  than  half  their  length  from  the  points.  They  are  then 
enlarged  and  curved  outwards  to  the  furca.  The  pharynx  is  a  little  longer  than 
broad.  The  end  of  the  gullet  bears  the  apophyses.  The  nut  next  the  gullet  is 
scarcely  longer  than  broad ;  the  second  is  a  little  longer,  and  the  third  a  little  longer 
still.  The  first  is  nearest  the  middle  line,  and  the  second  and  third  diverge  successively 
farther  from  it. 

The  stomach  is  oblong  and  very  slightly  coloured.  Its  separate  cells  are  not 
conspicuous. 

One  egg  measured  70  M  by  36  M,  but  others  were  rather  shorter.  The  newly 
hatched  young  was  100  /u.  in  length. 

There  are  few  species  with  which  it  is  necessary  to  compare  M.  canadensis  very 
carefully.  The  Macrobioti  which  lay  smooth  eggs  are  not  so  numerous  as  those  which 
lay  rough  eggs.  There  are  two  principal  groups  of  them,  one  comprising  species 
which  have  warts  or  spines  or  distinct  papillae  on  the  body,  the  other  species  which 
are  smooth  or  very  finely  papillose.  In  the  former  group  there  are  several  which 
have  three  short  nuts  in  the  pharynx  ;  in  the  second  group,  to  which  M.  canadensis 
belongs,  there  are  only  two  which  have  the  pharynx  of  this  type. 

M.  tetradactyloides,  Richters  (35),  and  M.  schaudinni,  Richters,*  are  very  similar 
to  M.  canadensis.  Both  are,  however,  much  larger  and  more  robust  animals. 
Richters  himself  considers  the  size  important  in  distinguishing  M.  tetradactyloides 
from  M.  tetradactylus.  M.  schaudinni  is  nearly  twice  as  long  as  M.  canadensis,  and 
M.  tetradactyloides  is  larger  still.  It  is  pretty  certain  that  M.  canadensis  is  really  a 
small  animal,  although  some  water-bears  vary  greatly  in  size.  It  was  very  common 
in  some  parts  of  Canada,  and  yet  it  was  uniformly  small.  The  largest  measured  was 
only  225  n  in  length,  and  many  mature- looking  animals,  with  eggs  in  the  body,  were 
less  than  200  M. 

M.  canadensis  may  be  distinguished  from  M.  tetradactyloides  by  the  unequal 
pairs  of  claws  and  by  the  greater  inequality  of  the  claws  of  each  pair.  It  is  more 
difficult  to  separate  from  M.  schaudinni,  which  has  the  pairs  unequal.  Richters 
figures  his  species  with  much  robuster  claws. 

In  M.  canadensis  the  claws  are  intermediate  between  the  Diphascon  type  and  the 
V  type.  The  long  claw  of  each  pair  is  very  slender,  and  that  of  the  larger  pair  is 
almost  bristle-like,  as  in  M.  oberhauseri.  The  bristle-like  claw  is  set  on  to  the  lesser 
claw  of  the  same  pair  in  the  same  manner  as  in  Diphascon,  but  nearer  to  the  base. 
The  two  claws  diverge  very  widely. 

While  usually  smooth,  it  sometimes  happens  that  the  body  is  finely  papillose  on 
the  posterior  half,  or  more  than  half,  though  never  all  over. 

The  nuts  of  the  pharynx  are  only  slightly  rounded  at  the  ends,  not  enough  to 
destroy  their  quadrate  character. 

Habitat. — Victoria,  British  Columbia,  and  the  Rocky  Mountains,  abundant. 
*  "  Tardigraden-Studien,"  Ber.  Senckbg.  Nnturf.  Ges.,  1909,  p.  32. 


TARDIGRADA:    CANADA  173 

Macrobiotus  tuberculatus,  Plate  (23) 

Habitat. — Victoria,  British  Columbia. 

The  examples  were  rather  larger  than  the  average,  but  not  so  large  as  M.  nodosus. 
They  were  colourless,  and  the  knobs  did  not  show  on  the  outline  in  dorsal  view. 

Macrobiotus  sattleri,  Richiers  (26) 

Habitat. — Rocky  Mountains. 

M.  sattleri  is  either  variable  in  the  characters  of  the  pharynx,  or  there  are  several 
forms  which  have  the  same  peculiar  skin-markings. 

One  form  has  three  short  rods  in  the  pharynx.  The  Australian  form  (see  p.  141) 
has  two  unequal  rods.  The  Canadian  form  has  two  equal  rods,  each  about  four  times 
as  long  as  broad.  No  comma  was  seen.  The  pairs  of  claws  are  unequal,  and  the 
claws  of  the  larger  pair  are  united  for  a  short  distance  above  the  base. 

Macrobiotus,  sp.  ? 

Four  eggs  in  a  skin  of  200  M  in  length.  Eggs  smooth,  of  about  GO  n  by  45  M.  Claws 
Vs,  equal  pairs  of  equal  claws,  joined  at  the  base  only. 

Without  knowledge  of  the  pharynx  identification  is  not  possible.  It  is  certainly 
different  from  any  of  the  species  recognised.  The  claws  prove  that  it  is  not  a 
Diphascon. 

D  :  EGGS  UNKNOWN 
Macrobiotus  virgatus,  sp.  n.  (Plate  XXI.  Figs.  55a-55c) 

Specific  characters. — Large  and  robust ;  pigmented  with  a  warm  brown  colour 
arranged  in  longitudinal  bands ;  gullet  very  wide,  and  teeth  strong ;  pharynx 
shortly  oval,  with  apophysis,  and  two  rods  and  a  nut  in  each  row,  the  nut  between 
the  two  rods  ;  dark  eyes ;  claws  very  thick,  of  the  hufelandi  type,  very  unequal, 
united  for  half  the  length  of  the  longer  one,  which  bears  two  thick  supplementary 
points. 

Detailed  description. — Length,  up  to  750  /j..  The  colour  is  a  warm  brown,  not 
unlike  that  of  M.  oberhciuseri,  but  less  inclined  to  purple.  It  is  arranged  in  three 
principal  longitudinal  bands,  one  median  and  two  lateral.  These  latter  may  be 
subdivided  into  narrower  bands,  and  there  are  some  thin  transverse  bands. 

The  gullet  is  as  much  as  9  or  10  M  in  diameter.  The  teeth  penetrate  its  wall  at 
about  the  middle  of  its  length.  The  end  of  the  gullet  in  the  pharynx  has  a  slight 
projecting  rim.  The  rods  are  of  unusual  proportions — the  first  and  third  are  about 
four  times  as  long  as  broad,  the  second  varies  from  little  longer  than  broad  to  twice 
as  long  as  broad. 


174  J.  MURRAY 

The  claws  are  quite  like  those  of  hufelandii,  but  they  are  more  unequal  and  even 
thicker.  The  egg  is  unknown. 

Habitat. — Victoria,  British  Columbia  ;  Ottawa,  Australia  (?),  Franz- Josef  Land  (?). 

The  records  for  Australia  and  Franz-Josef  Land  are  very  uncertain,  as  they 
depend  on  the  characters  of  the  pharynx  only.  There  were  claws  on  the  only 
specimen  from  Franz-Josef  Land,  but  as  they  were  only  seen  in  profile,  little  can 
be  said  about  them.  They  do  not  appear  to  be  so  thick  or  so  far  united  as  in 
M.  virgatus. 

If  the  Franz-Josef  Land  specimen  is  M.  virgatus,  then  the  eggs  are  smooth  and 
are  laid  in  the  skin.  Judging  from  the  characters  of  the  teeth,  gullet,  and  claws,  it 
might  be  expected  that  the  animal  would  prove  to  belong  to  the  hufelandi  group, 
with  rough  eggs.  There  are  very  few  species  which  combine  the  characters  of 
smooth  eggs  and  hufelandi  claws.  M.  rubens  is  the  best  instance  known  to  me. 

The  peculiar  proportions  of  the  "  bacilla"  in  the  pharynx,  one  short  between  two 
long,  distinguish  M.  virgatus  from  all  related  species.  Only  M.  augusti,  which  is  not 
closely  related,  has  a  rather  shorter  middle  rod. 

It  is  rarely  permissible  to  describe  a  Macrobiotus  of  which  the  egg  is  unknown. 
In  this  case  the  association  of  so  many  distinct  characters — the  colour,  the  pharynx, 
the  claws — seemed  to  justify  a  breach  of  the  rule.  When  the  eggs  are  found  there 
should  be  no  difficulty  in  demonstrating  their  connection  with  this  species. 

Macrobiotus  sp.  ?  (Plate  XXI.  Fig.  60) 

Description. — Size  moderate,  length  300  M.  Colour  grey ;  no  eyes.  Gullet  of 
moderate  width.  Teeth  strongly  curved,  with  large  furca.  Pharynx  shortly  oval, 
with  conspicuous  apophysis,  and  two  "bacilla"  in  each  row.  The  first,  next  the 
gullet,  is  three  times  as  long  as  broad.  It  is  divided  by  a  constriction  into  two 
equal  parts.  The  second  is  not  quite  twice  as  long  as  broad.  There  is  no  comma. 

The  claws  resemble  exactly  those  of  M.  canadensis  (Fig.  61c).  The  pairs  are 
unequal  and  diverge  widely.  Each  pair  has  one  claw  longer  than  the  other,  and  the 
long  claw  of  the  larger  pair  is  very  slender,  almost  bristle-like.  The  long  claw  is 
attached  to  the  shorter  claw  near  its  base,  showing  a  slight  approach  to  the 
Diphascon  type. 

The  association  of  several  distinct  characters  marks  this  as  a  distinct  species,  but 
as  only  one  example  was  seen,  and  the  egg  is  unknown,  it  is  left  in  the  meantime 
unnamed. 

Habitat. — Rocky  Mountains 


TARDIGRADA:    CANADA  175 

E :  UNIDENTIFIED  EGGS. 
Macrobiotics,  sp.  ?  (Plate  XXL  Fig.  57) 

A  large  egg,  measuring  105  n  over  the  processes,  which  are  low  cones,  rounded 
at  the  ends,  and  papillose  all  over.  The  processes  stand  close  together,  without  any 
interspaces. 

This  closely  resembles  an  egg  figured  by  Eichters  in  the  "  Moosrasen  des 
Gaussbergs  "  (35),  Plate  XX.  Fig.  7,  as  probably  related  to  M.  echinogenitus.  It  is 
probably  a  distinct  species. 

Macrobiotus,  sp.  ?  (Plate  XXI.  Fig.  56) 

A  large  egg,  measuring  100  M  over  the  processes,  80  M  without  the  processes. 
These  are  narrow  conical  pegs,  rounded  at  the  ends.  They  are  separated  by  spaces 
about  equal  to  the  diameter  of  the  pegs  at  the  base. 

A  similar  egg  is  figured  in  "  Tardigrada  of  the  South  Orkneys  "  (15),  Plate  IV. 
Fig.  14,  as  perhaps  a  form  of  M.  echinogenitus.  Another  somewhat  like  it  is  figured 
in  "Arctic  Tardigrada"  (19)  Plate  XLV.  Fig.  2,  as  perhaps  M.  islandicus,  Richters. 
The  processes  are  not  rounded,  but  many  are  a  little  expanded  at  the  tip,  showing  an 
approach  to  hufelandii. 

The  Canadian  egg  is  probably  a  distinct  species. 

Macrobiotus,  sp.  ?  (Plate  XXL  Fig.  59) 

A  small  egg,  80  M  over  the  spines,  68  /«  without  them.  The  processes  are  small 
cones,  slightly  acuminate,  acute.  They  are  separated  by  spaces  rather  less  than  the 
diameter  of  the  processes  at  the  base.  The  surface  exposed  between  the  processes  is 
marked  by  regular  pellucid  dots. 

Several  species  have  eggs  like  this,  and  they  cannot  be  distinguished  with  any 
certainty  unless  they  are  found  containing  young. 

M.  dispar  has  such  an  egg,  but  rather  larger  ;  that  of  M.  pullari  is  somewhat 
smaller.  The  egg  of  M.  ascensionis  is  considerably  smaller,  and  has  the  processes 
more  closely  set. 

Genus — Diphascon,  Plate  (23) 
Diphascon  chilenense,  Plate  (23) 
Habitat. — Rocky  Mountains. 

Diphascon  alpinum,  Murray  (14) 
Habitat. — Rocky  Mountains  :  near  the  Lake  of  the  Woods,  Ontario. 


176  J.  MURRAY 

Diphascon  scoticum,  Murray  (11) 
Habitat. — Stanley  Park,  Vancouver  :  Rocky  Mountains. 

Diphascon  canadense,  sp.  n.  (Plate  XXI.  Figs.  62o-62c) 

Specific  characters. — Small,  without  eyes,  hyaline.  Gullet  long,  slender. 
Pharynx  round,  with  apophysis,  two  rods  and  a  "  comma "  in  each  row,  the  first 
about  twice  as  long  as  broad,  the  second  about  as  long  as  broad.  Claws  typical  for 
the  genus. 

Detailed  description. — Length  up  to  250  M.  Form  narrow  and  elongate. 
Pharynx  25  M  in  diameter.  Gullet  50  to  60  p.  in  length,  very  slender,  little  over  1  /* 
in  diameter.  The  largest  pair  of  claws  is  about  12  to  15  M  in  length.  The  long 
claw  is  very  slender,  the  short  one  somewhat  thick.  Both  claws  of  the  smaller  pair 
are  slender — they  are  unequal  and  joined  at  the  base  only.  The  eggs  were  not 
seen. 

Habitat. — Moss  from  the  sea-shore  at  Victoria,  British  Columbia,  fairly  abundant. 

Among  species  having  the  gullet  slender  and  the  pharynx  short  it  is  only 
necessary  to  compare  D.  canadensis  with  D.  oculatum  (13),  to  which  it  is  closely 
related.  It  was  at  first  supposed  to  be  a  blind  form  of  oculatum,  till  other  slight 
differences  were  noticed. 

D.  oculatum  is  larger,  and  has  a  pair  of  dark  eyes.  The  pharynx  is  not  so 
nearly  round,  and  the  two  thickenings  in  each  row  are  equal,  and  scarcely  longer 
than  broad.  The  claws  of  the  shorter  pair  are  shorter  and  thicker. 

The  eye-spots  are  not  considered  to  be  trustworthy  as  specific  characters,  though 
I  know  of  no  variation  in  the  genus  Diphascon.  When,  however,  we  consider  the 
slight  but  constant  differences  in  the  pharynx  and  claws,  the  species  appears 
sufficiently  distinguished  from  D.  oculatum. 

REMARKS  ON  THE  CANADIAN  TARDIGRADE  FAUNA 

Its  composition. — Of  the  31  species  studied  23  were  identified — the  other  8 
require  further  study.  There  are  9  species  of  Echiniscus,  17  of  Macrobiotus,  4  of 
Diphascon,  and  1  Milnesium.  Seven  species  are  considered  to  be  new  to  science 
(2  Echiniscus,  4  Macrobiotus,  and  1  Diphascon}. 

The  list  is  such  a  one  as  might  be  expected  as  the  result  of  a  very  limited  amount 
of  work  on  any  continental  area.  The  different  genera  arc  represented  in  about  the 
average  proportions,  and  there  are  no  very  peculiar  forms.  The  most  curious  fact  in 
the  composition  of  the  list  is  the  total  absence  from  it  of  species  of  Echiniscus  of 
that  section  of  the  genus  which  has  plates  V.  and  VI.  quite  separate.  As  E.  muta- 
bilis  is  one  of  the  most  cosmopolitan  water-bears  the  absence  from  our  collections 
must  be  considered  as  accidental. 


TARDIGRADA:    CANADA  177 

In    the    accompanying   table  the  distribution  of  the  Canadian  species,   both    in 
Canada  and  over  the  world,  is  shown  in  thirteen  columns. 


DISTRIBUTION  :  LOCAL  AND  GENERAL 

Canada. 


02 

pa 

a 

a 

P 

H 

*i 

<i 

Jz; 

K 

o 

S 

CO 

J 

0 

ri 

J 

M 

3 

^ 

J 

o" 

£j 

E 

r      2 

£ 

03 

M 

*"'" 

0 

9 

OJ 

o 

O 
O 

* 

0 

O  0 

£ 

B  — 

a 

-O 

*3* 

3 

» 

H 

g 

tsi 

D 

o 

• 

1 

• 

o 

•I 

tJ 

^N 

• 

^ 

H 

<1 

M 

-^  ^ 

o 

H 

^ 

s> 

fe 

5 

<IJ 

3 

02 

^ 

^ 

o 

* 

o 

Echiniscus  gladiafor 

X 

— 

.  — 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

E.  sylranus  ... 

— 

— 

X 

— 



— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

E.  intermedius 

X 

— 

— 

— 



— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

— 

— 

7-T                            J               • 

&.  cannctensi-s 

E.  oihonnce    ... 

X 

— 

— 

— 



X 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

X 

— 

E.  bisetosus  ... 

X 

— 

— 

— 



X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Milnesium  tardigradiim 

— 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

Macrdbiotus  hufelandii  . 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

— 

if.  echinogenitus     . 

X 

— 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

M.  areolatus. 

X 

X 

— 

X 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

— 

X 

X 

— 

M.  harmsiuorthi 

— 

— 

X 

X 

— 

X 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

— 

M.  occidentalis 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

— 

— 

M.  intermedius 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

— 

M,  oberhciuseri 

X 

— 

— 

.  — 

X 

X 

X 

X 

— 

— 

X 

X 

X 

M.  arcticus    ... 

X 

X 

X 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

X 

X 

— 

X 

X 

M.  tuberculatus 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

M.  sattleri     ... 

X 

— 

— 

— 

X 

X 

— 

X 

X 

X 

— 

— 

M.  virgatus  ... 

X 



X 









X 





X 



Diphascon  chilenense 

— 

X 

— 

— 

X 

X 

X 

— 

X 

X 

— 

X 

X 

D.  alpinum   ... 

— 

X 

X 

— 

X 

X 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

X 

D.  scoticum  ... 

X 

X 

— 

— 

X 

X 

— 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

D.  canctdense. 

The  table  brings  out  some  interesting  facts  in  distribution.  About  nine  of 
the  species  are  cosmopolitan,  or  very  widely  distributed.  These  are  Milnesium,  M. 
hufelandii,  M.  echinogenitus,  M.  areolatus,  M.  intermedius,  M.  oberhauseri,  M. 
arcticus,  D.  chilenense,  and  D.  alpinum.  These  occur  in  six  or  more  of  the  nine 
great  regions  into  which  the  surface  ol  the  earth  has  been  divided  for  the  purpose  of 
this  comparison. 

The  others  are  more  restricted  in  their  range.  The  seven  new  species  described 
in  this  paper  are  not  all  confined  to  Canada ;  three  of  them  are  already  known  else- 
where. M,  areolatus  (which  was  described  some  years  ago  as  a  variety  of  M.  echino- 
genitus} is  even  among  the  cosmopolitan  species.  M.  occidentalis,  though  discovered 
and  fully  studied  in  Canada,  appears  to  have  a  "  Pacific"  distribution,  as  it  has  since 
been  found  in  Honolulu  and  Australia.  Another  species  having  the  identical  range 
is  Echiniscus  intermedius,  first  discovered  in  Australia,  and  subsequently  in  Hono- 
lulu and  Canada.  In  this  case  the  species  appears  under  a  slightly  different  form  in 
all  three  localities. 

BEIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.   1907-9.       VOL.  I.  2  A 


178  J.  MURRAY 

The  relation  of  the  Canadian  Tardigrade  Fauna  to  that  of  other  regions  is  shown 
in  the  following  figures.  Canada  has  16  species  which  occur  also  in  Europe,  14  in 
Australia,  14  in  the  Arctic,  8  in  the  Pacific  Islands,  New  Zealand,  and  Asia,  9  in 
Africa,  7  in  the  Antarctic,  and  6  in  S.  America.  From  these  figures  it  would  seem 
as  if  the  relation  with  Europe  were  closest,  and  with  S.  America  most  distant,  but  it 
is  scarcely  necessary  to  point  out  that  these  figures  probably  indicate  the  condition 
of  our  knowledge  of  the  different  regions  rather  than  the  real  affinities.  Of  course, 
since  the  part  of  Canada  explored,  and  the  part  of  Europe  of  which  the  Tardigrada 
are  best  known,  are  both  in  the  north  temperate  zone,  we  might  expect,  and  there 
may  really  be,  a  close  affinity  between  the  Tardigrada  of  the  two  regions.  The 
occurrence  of  seven  species  in  Canada  which  are  as  yet  unknown  in  Europe  suggests 
that  the  affinity  is  not  very  close.  No  confirmation  •  of  this  can  be  drawn  from  the 
large  number  of  European  species  which  are  unknown  in  Canada,  as  Canada  is  an 
almost  unexplored  country. 

In  Canada  the  productiveness  of  British  Columbia  in  relation  to  the  other  districts 
visited  is  very  striking.  All  the  collecting  was  hurriedly  done,  in  Victoria  no  less 
than  elsewhere,  yet  the  moss  from  the  sea-shore  there  yielded  sixteen  out  of  the 
twenty-three  species  noted  for  Canada. 


SUMMARY  OF  RESULTS 

THE  work   of  the  Expedition   on  Tardigrada  has  resulted  in  the   enumeration  of 
fifty  species,  distributed  in  five  genera.     This  may  seem  a  small  number,  considering 
how  many  countries  were  visited,  and  the  great  range  of  climatic  conditions  which 
they  present,  from  tropical  heat  to  polar  cold. 

These  fifty  species  are,  however,  about  half  of  the  known  Tardigrada,  and 
considerably  more  than  half  of  the  land  and  fresh-water  species.  And  in  addition  to 
the  fifty  species  identified,  a  considerable  number  more  (something  like  twenty-three 
species)  were  observed  and  described,  which,  while  not  sufficiently  known  to  be 
identified  or  pronounced  to  be  new,  are  recognised  as  distinct  from  any  of  the  species 
in  the  list. 

It  must  be  remembered,  too,  that  it  is  only  within  the  last  few  years  that 
naturalists  have  begun  to  discriminate  the  species  of  Tardigrada  carefully,  and  to 
realise  that  they  are  fairly  numerous.  For  half  a  century  after  the  discovery  of  the 
first  water- bear  by  Go'ze  in  1773  naturalists  supposed  that  there  was  only  one,  or  at 
most  two,  species.  From  Schultze's  time  (1834),  when  Tardigrada  began  to  be  more 
carefully  looked  at,  for  another  half- century,  scarcely  a  dozen  species  were  dis- 
tinguished. Even  in  1888  Plate's  monograph  (23)  admitted  only  twenty-five  species, 
in  six  genera.  Eight  of  the  species  and  two  of  the  genera  were  Plate's  own 
discoveries.  One  of  his  genera,  and  at  least  four  of  his  species,  would  now  be 
disallowed. 

Only  with  the  arrival  of  Richters  in  the  beginning  of  the  present  century  were 
the  Tardigrada  looked  at  with  sufficient  care,  and  satisfactory  diagnoses  inaugurated. 
About  the  same  period  it  began  to  be  appreciated  what  great  facilities  were  afforded 
by  mosses  for  the  collection  and  study  of  microfaunas,  and  in  consequence  the 
Tardigrada  and  other  microscopic  animals  of  distant  countries  became  known. 

Among  the  Tardigrada  collected  by  the  Expedition  there  are  seventeen  species 
recognised  as  new  to  science,  and  one  new  generic  type  was  found  in  Australia. 

In  the  accompanying  table  is  given  a  list  of  all  the  species  collected,  and  their 
distribution  is  shown  in  all  the  countries  visited,  and  also  the  distribution  over  the 
world. 

Distribution. — An  analysis  of  the  list  brings  out  some  interesting  facts.  There 
were  observed  in  all  73  species,  of  which  33  were  identified  as  known  species,  17  are 

179 


180  J.  MURRAY 

DISTRIBUTION  OF  ALL  SPECIES  COLLECTED  BY  THE  EXPEDITION. 


ANTARCTIC. 

NEW  ZEALAND. 

AUSTRALIA. 

PACIFIC  ISLANDS. 

CANADA. 

S.  AMERICA. 

EUROPE. 

•J 

eB 

<! 

AFRICA. 

ARCTIC. 

ISLANDS. 

Echiniscus  mutabilis,  Murray      .... 

— 

X 

X 

X 

— 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

— 

E.  novcezedandice,  Richters         .... 

— 

X 

X 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

E.  pulcher,  sp.  n.        . 

—  • 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

-  E.  arctomys,  Ehrenberg  ?  * 

X 

— 

X 

X 

— 

— 

X 

X 

X 

X 

—  - 

E.  kerguelensis,  Richters    ..... 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

X 

K.  sylvanus,  sp.  n. 

— 

— 

— 

— 

X 

—  • 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

E.  viridis,  sp.  n.         ...... 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

E.  tessellatus,  sp.  n.    . 

— 

— 

X 

—  I 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

E.  gladiator,  Murray          ..... 

•  —  • 

X 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 





x 

x 

x 













E.  canadensis,  sp.  n. 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 



— 

— 

E.  bisetosus,  Heinis   ...... 

— 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

E.  spinulosus,  Doyere         ..... 







x 





x 



x 



E.  spiniger,  Richters          ..... 

— 



X 





X 







K.  duboisi,  Richters  ...... 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

X 

X 

— 

— 

K.  perarmatvA,  Murray       ..... 

— 

—  . 

—  . 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

E.  blumi,  Richters    ...... 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

X 

— 

— 

X 

— 

E.  velaminis,  sp.  n.    . 

— 

X 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 





— 

E.  oihonnce,  Richters          ..... 

— 



X 



X 



X 





X 



Oredla  niollis,  gen.  n.,  sp.  n.       .          . 

— 



X 















-Milnesium  tardigradum,  Doyere 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

Macrobiotus  hufelcmdii,  Schultze 



X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

x 

M.  echinogenitus,  Richters           .... 

X 

X 

X 



X 

_ 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

M.  areolatus,  sp.  n.   . 

— 



X 

X 

X 



X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

M.  harmsworthi,  Murray   ..... 



X 

X 

X 



X 

X 

M.  montanus,  sp.  n.  . 



X 















M.  occidentalis^  sp.  n. 

_ 

X 

X 

X 

M.  intermedius,  Plate         ..... 



X 

X 

X 

X 

x 

X 

X 

x 

x 

x 

M.  crassidens,  Murray        ..... 



X 

X 

x 

M.  aculeatus,  sp.  n.    . 

x 

5 

s 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

M.  arcticu,s,  Murray  

•~*S 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

M.  tuberculatus,  Plate        ..... 

x  / 

X 

X 

x 

x 

X 

x 

X 

x 

M.  nodosus,  Murray  ...... 

x 

x 

x 

M.  sattleri,  Richters  . 

X 

X 

x 

X 

X 

X 

M.  ornatus,  Richters 

X 

X 

X 

M.  rubens,  Murray    ..... 
M.  annulatus,  Murray       .... 

— 

X 

x 

X 

— 

— 

— 

X 

x 

X 

X 

X 

X 

M.  canadensis,  sp.  n.           .         , 

M.  augusti,  Murray  ..... 

x 

x 

x 

M.  virgatus,  sp.  n. 

Diphascon  chilenense,  Plate         .... 
D.  alpinum,  Murray  . 
D.  scoticum,  Murray  . 
D.  canadense,  sp.  n.   . 

X 
X 
X 

X 
X 
X 

_ 

X 
X 

X 

X 
X 
X 
X 

X 
X 

X 
X 
X 

X 

— 

X 
X 
X 

X 

Twenty -three  species  not  identified— 1 2  of  Echiniscus,  10  of  Macrobiotus,  and  1  doubtful,  MacrMntHK  or 

Dipfuwoon,     Total,  73  species. 
*  All  these  records  of  E.  arctomys,  except  for  Australia,  are  wrong  (see  p.  126  and  footnote). 


TARDIGRADA  181 

described  as  new  species,  and  23  could  not  be  identified.  Of  the  50  named  species 
26  were  got  in  one  only  of  the  countries  visited  ;  14  of  these  26  are  known  in  other 
parts  of  the  world,  while  12  are  as  yet  unknown  except  in  the  one  locality  for  each 
here  recorded.  These  last  are,  of  course,  among  the  new  species  collected  by  the 
Expedition.  Five  of  the  new  species  were  found  in  more  than  one  country,  or  were 
previously  known  elsewhere,  though  they  had  not  been  described. 

Australia  has  most  species,  viz.,  38  (31  identified),  Canada  comes  next  with  31 
(23  identified),  New  Zealand  has  25  (21  identified),  the  Pacific  Islands  18  (15 
identified),  and  the  Antarctic  5  (4  identified). 

Canada  has  7  of  the  new  species,  Australia  6  (and  1  new  genus),  New  Zealand  2, 
the  Pacific  Islands  1,  and  the  Antarctic  1. 

It  is  noticeable  how  much  richer  the  continental  areas  are  than  the  islands,  both 
in  the  number  of  species  and  the  proportion  of  peculiar  species.  The  isolation  of 
New  Zealand,  Fiji,  and  Hawaii  does  not  appear  to  have  led  to  the  development 
of  many  new  forms. 

As  the  Tardigrada  of  Europe  are  much  more  fully  known  than  those  of  any  other 
part  of  the  world,  the  list  of  European  species  may  be  used  as  a  standard,  and  it  may 
be  instructive  to  compare  the  lists  of  species  from  the  various  countries  with  it,  and  to 
note  how  much  they  have  in  common.  Canada  has  16  species  in  common  with 
Europe,  Australia  17  species,  New  Zealand  16  species,  Pacific  Islands  9  species,  and 
Antarctic  3  species.  Taking  the  ratios  of  these  numbers  to  the  totals  for  each 
country,  it  appears  that  subtropical  Australia  has  in  its  Tardigrade  Fauna  nearly 
as  much  correspondence  with  that  of  Europe  as  has  temperate  Canada,  where  the 
climatic  conditions  are  so  similar  to  those  of  northern  Europe.  New  Zealand  and  the 
Antarctic  have  more  correspondence  than  either.  For  what  those  figures  are  worth, 
New  Zealand  is  most  like  Europe,  the  Antarctic  comes  next,  then  Canada,  Australia, 
and  last  of  all  the  Pacific  Islands.  But  there  is  little  to  choose  between  them,  and 
the  figures  are  not  worth  much,  as  they  would  be  liable  to  change  whenever  further 
work  is  done  in  these  countries. 

The  peculiarity  of  the  Australian  Tardigrade  Fauna  is  greater  than  we  would 
suppose  from  a  mere  consideration  of  the  number  of  peculiar  species.  Not  only  is  there 
a  distinct  generic  type  (Oreella),  but  most  of  the  species  (E.  pulcher,  E.  tessellatus, 
E.  interniedius),  are  conspicuously  different  from  their  nearest  relatives.  Even 
M.  aculeatus,  though  differing  from  the  African  M.  crassidens  mainly  by  one  external 
character,  is  of  great  interest.  The  six  spines,  occupying  definite  positions  as  they 
do  on  the  segments  which  bear  the  second,  third,  and  fourth  pairs  of  legs,  may 
possibly  be  the  homologues  of  the  dorsal  processes  of  Echiniscus.  If  this  were 
the  case  the  occurrence  of  this  species,  and  of  the  genus  Oreella,  would  be  of 
great  importance  in  elucidating  the  affinities  of  fhe  genera  Macrobiotus  and 
Echiniscus, 

The  existence  of  these  various  peculiar  forms  in  Australia  serves  to  indicate  that 
the  Australian  native  Tardigrada  are  partly  at  least  of  very  ancient  origin,  although 


182  J.   MURRAY 

on  account  of  the  comparative  facility  of  immigration,  such  facts  have  less  weight  in 
this  group  than  in  the  Vertebrata. 

The  further  study  of  the  Tardigrada  of  continental  and  insular  areas,  in  which 
cognisance  would  be  taken  of  all  known  species,  is  alluring,  but  beyond  the  scope  of 
this  work. 

Natural  History. — There  is  in  this  paper,  unfortunately,  too  little  study  of  pure 
biology,  or  the  natural  history  of  the  water-bears,  except  in  the  wide  sense  that  the 
form  of  every  organism  is  a  manifestation  of  life.  In  this  sense,  every  trifling 
variation  of  form  could  throw  some  light  on  the  nature  of  the  living  force  which 
produces  it,  although  we  may  be  unable  to  trace  its  meaning. 

The  conditions  under  which  the  work  was  done  prevented  much  attention  being 
given  to  the  study  of  living  animals.  Nearly  all  of  the  species  were  seen  alive,  so 
that  the  material  for  the  investigation  of  life-histories  was  available,  yet  we  know 
nothing  as  to  such  points  as  the  duration  of  life,  the  time  taken  to  grow  up,  the 
changes  that  occur  during  growth,  the  relations  of  the  sexes,  the  time  required  for 
the  eggs  to  hatch,  and  a  host  of  others. 

The  observation  of  the  living  animals  so  closely  as  to  elucidate  any  of  these 
points,  while  fascinating  to  the  naturalist,  is  too  tedious,  or  if  not  tedious  yet  takes 
far  too  long,  to  be  compatible  with  the  compilation  of  a  series  of  reports  on  the 
collections  of  an  expedition. 

There  is  no  suggestion  made  as  to  the  meaning  of  the  peculiarities  of  species  in 
their  relation  to  their  surroundings.  The  value  of  specific  peculiarities  to  their 
possessors  is  generally  very  obscure,  so  much  so  that  in  an  earlier  chapter  dealing 
with  the  Value  of  Species  (p.  92)  I  have  suggested  that  many  of  the  specific 
characters  are  "  fortuitous."  Fortuitous  in  the  ordinary  sense  they  cannot  be,  but 
they  may  be  so  described  in  the  restricted  sense  that  they  are  of  no  definite  use  to 
the  species.  They  may  have  been  produced  by  the  interaction  of  the  conditions  and 
the  living  force,  without  leading  to  more  complete  adaptation  to  the  conditions. 
This  must  be  understood  as  applying  only  to  certain  characters,  since  constant 
adaptation  must  have  gone  on  as  well. 

We  can  understand  or  guess  at  the  reasons  why  it  is  advantageous  to  some 
species  to  deposit  smooth  eggs  in  the  skin  at  the  moult,  while  others  lay  rough  eggs 
without  the  protection  of  the  skin — we  can  imagine  benefits  from  the  strange 
simplification  and  encystment  of  water-bears.  These  things  are  obviously  important, 
whether  we  fully  understand  them  or  not. 

There  are,  however,  many  little  peculiarities  of  outward  form,  those  things  which 
supply  the  specific  characters  generally,  in  which  it  is  difficult  to  see  any  advantage. 
They  may,  of  course,  have  a  value  which  is  hidden  from  our  eyes.  Such  are  the 
spines  and  setee  of  Echiniscus.  It  seems  a  reasonable  supposition  that  such  spines 
are  protective  :  they  may  deter  an  enemy  from  making  a  meal  of  their  possessor. 
But  there  are  species  with  the  processes  quite  soft  and  weak,  such  as  the  acicular 


TARDIGRADA  183 

spines  of  E.  africanus,  and  these  cannot  be  protective  ;  while  the  commonest  of  all 
species  have  no  spines. 

In  one  direction  the  study  of  the  variations  of  form  among  the  Tardigrada  is 
important,  although  we  may  not  see  the  causes  of  the  variation  or  its  value  to  the 
animals.  Through  the  various  forms  we  can  learn  the  affinities  of  the  species,  and 
we  may  thus  gain  some  knowledge  of  the  history  of  the  development  of  the  group. 
Thus  the  Tardigrada  are  brought  into  geological  history,  although  their  remains  may 
be  scarcely  known  in  the  strata  of  the  earth. 

It  is  an  interesting  fact  in  itself  that  so  many  Tardigrada  have  been  obtained 
alive  from  dried  mosses.  Although  a  few  were  studied  while  the  mosses  were  fresh, 
the  great  majority  of  the  fifty  species  were  got  from  mosses  which  had  been  dried  for 
a  longer  or  shorter  period,  varying  from  a  month  or  two  to  nearly  three  years. 
This  brings  out  strongly  the  power  possessed  by  habitual  moss-dwellers  of  sur- 
viving long  periods  of  drought.  After  being  kept  for  a  year  perfectly  dry  the 
number  of  animals  which  revive  on  being  moistened  seems  no  less  than  when  the 
moss  has  only  been  a  short  time  dry.  After  a  year  the  vitality  rapidly  diminishes — 
after  three  years  a  very  small  proportion  of  the  animals  survive.  The  duration 
of  their  vitality  is  greatly  affected  by  conditions.  If  there  is  a  suspicion  of 
moisture,  if  enough  to  produce  mildew,  or  even  merely  to  cause  a  musty  smell, 
they  will  not  live  long. 

In  the  Antarctic  some  experiments  were  made  in  order  to  test  the  limits  to  the 
vitality  of  water-bears.  These  are  detailed  briefly  under  the  account  of  Macrobiotus 
arcticus. 

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL  LIST  OF  WORKS  REFERRED  TO  IN  THE  TEXT 

Several  others,  which  came  too  late  to  be  inserted  in  their  proper  places,  will  be  found  in  footnotes. 
In  the  text  the  references  to  this  list  are  made  in  figures  in  heavy  type,  enclosed  in  parentheses. 

1.  CARLZON,  0.,  "  Schwedische  Tardigraden,"  Zool.  Anzeig.,  Bd.  34,  1909,  p.  137. 

2.  DoYiRE,  M.  T.,  "Memoire  sur  les  Tardigrades,"  Ann.  des  sci.  nat.,  Ser.  2,  Tom.  14,  1840,  p.  269. 

3.  EHBENBERG,  C.  G.,  "  Diagnoses  novarum  formarum,"  Verh.  K.  Akad.  Wiss.  Berl.,  1853,  p.  530. 

4.  „  „       "  Mikrogeologie,"  Atlas,  Taf.  35u,  1854. 

5.  „  „       "  Mikroscopischen  Lebens  in  bis  20,000  Fuss  Alpenhb'he,"  Abhand.  K.  Akad.  Wiss 

Berl.  (aus  dem  Jahre  1858),  1859,  p.  429. 

6.  HAY,  W.  P.,  "A  Bear-Animal  renamed,"  Proc.  Biol.  Soc.  Washington,  xix.,  1907,  p.  46. 

7.  HEINIS,  Fr.,  "Tardigraden  der  Schweiz,"  Zool.  Anzeig.,  Bd.  32,  1908,  p.  633. 

8.  „         „     "Moosfauna  der  kanarischen  Inseln,"  Zool.  Anzeig.,  Bd.  33,  1908,  p.  711. 

9.  ,.         ,.     "  Moosbewohnenden  Rhizopoden,  Rotatorien,  und  Tardigraden,"  Arch,  fur  Ilydrobiol. 

und  Planktonkunde,  Bd.  5,  1910. 

10.  HUTTON,  F.  W.,  "Index  Faunae  Novae  Zealandia:,"  London,  1904. 

11.  MUKEAY,  J.,  "  Tardigrada  of  the  Forth  Valley,"  Ann.  Scot.  Nat.  Hist.  1905,  p.  160. 

12.  „         „     "The  Tardigrada  of  the  Scottish  Lochs,"  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Edin.,  vol.  xli.,  1905,  p.  677. 

13.  „     "Tardigrada  of  the  Forth  Valley,"  2nd  paper,  Ann.  Scot.  Nat.  Hist.,  1906,  p.  214. 

14.  „         „    "Scottish  Alpine  Tardigrada,"  Ann.  Scot.  Nat.  Hist.,  1906,  p.  25. 

15-         ,,        „    "  Tardigrada  of  the  South  Orkneys,"  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Edin.,  vol.  xlv.,  1906,  p.  323. 


184  J.  MURRAY 

16.  MURRAY,  J.  "The  Encystment  of  Macrobiotus,"  The  Zoologist,  1907,  p.  1. 

17.  „         „     "  Some  Tardigrada  of  the  Sikkim  Himalaya,"  Journ.  Roy.  Micr.  Sac.,  1907,  p.  20!). 

18.  ,,         „     "Scottish  Tardigrada,  collected  by  the  Lake  Survey,"  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Edin.,  vol.  xlv., 

1907,  p.  041. 

19.  „         „     "Arctic  Tardigrada,  collected  by  Wm.  S.  Bruce,"  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Edin.,  vol.  xlv., 

1907,  p.  GC9. 

20.  „         „     "Some  South  African  Tardigrada,"  Journ.  Roy.  Micr.  Soc.,  1907,  p.  515. 

21.  PACKARD,  A.  S.,  "  Discovery  of  a  Tardigrade,"  Amer.  Naturalist,  vol.  vii.,  1873,  p.  740. 

22.  PERTY,  M.,  "Die  Familie  Xenomorphidse,"  Okens  Ms  (Jahrg.  1834),  p.  1241,  1835. 

23.  PLATE,  L.  H.,  "  Naturgeschichte  der  Tardigraden,"  Zool.  Jahrb.,  Abt.  f.  Anat.  Bd.  3,  1888,  p.  4«7. 

24.  RICHTERS,  F.,  "Fauna  der  Umgegend  von  Frankfurt-a.-M.,"  Her.  Senckbg.  Naturf.  Ges.,  1900. 

25.  ,,  ,,  "Neue  Moosbewohner,"  Ber.  Senckbg.  Naturf.  Ges.,  1902. 

26.  „  „  "  Fauna  der  Umgebung  von  Frankfurt-a.-M.,"  Ber.  Senckbg.  Naturf.  Ges.,  1902. 

27.  „  „  "  Nordische  Tardigraden,"  Zool.  Anzeig.,  Bd.  27,  1903,  p.  168. 

28.  „  „  "  Verbreitung  der  Tardigraden,"  Zool.  Anzeig.,  Bd.  28,  1904,  p.  347. 

29.  „  ,,  "Echiniscus  conifer,"  Ber.  Senckbg.  Naturf.  Ges.,  1904,  p.  73. 

30.  „  „  "  Islandische  Tardigraden,"  Zool.  Anseig.,  Bd.  28,  1904,  p.  373. 

31.  „  „  "  Antarktische  Moosfauna,"  Verh.  deutsch.  Zool.  Ges.,  1904,  p.  236. 

32.  „  „  "DieEier  der  Tardigraden,"  Ber.  Senckbg.  Naturf.  Ges.,  1904,  p.  59. 

33.  „  „  "  Arktische  Tardigraden,"  Fauna  Arctica,  Bd.  3,  Jena  1904,  p.  495. 

34.  ,,  „  "Zwei  neue  Echiniscus- Arten,"  Zool.  Anzeig.,  Bd.  31,  1907,  p.  197. 

35.  ,,  ,,  "Fauna  der  Moosrasen  des  Gaussbergs,  &c.,"  Deut.  Siidpol.  Exped.,  1901-3,  Bd.  9 

Zool.  1907,  p.  261. 

36.  „  „     "  Antarktische  Tardigraden,"  Zool.  Anzeiy.,  Bd.  31,  1907,  p.  915. 

37.  „  ,,     "  Moosfauna  Australians,  &c.,"  Zool.  Jahrb.,  Bd.  26,  Abt.  fiir  Syst.  1908,  p.  196. 

38.  „  „     "Moosbewohner,"  Wiss.  Ergebn.  Schwed.  siidjwl.  Exped.,  1901-3,  1908. 

39.  „  „     "  Moosfauna-Studien,"  Ber.  Senckbg.  Naturf.  Ges.,  1908,  p.  14. 

40.  „  „     "Tardigraden  unter  77°  S.  Er.,"  Zool.  Anzeig.,  Bd." 34,  1909,  p.  604. 

41.  SCHAUDINN,  F.,  "  Die  Tardigraden,"  Fauna  Arctica,  Bd.  2,  1901,  p.  187. 

42.  SCHULTZE,  C.  A.  S.,  "Macrobiotus  hufelandii,"  Okens  Isis.,  1834,  p.  708. 

43.  „  „         "  Echiniscus  bellermanni,"  Berlin,  1840. 

44.  „  »          "Echiniscus  creplini,"  Gryphire,  1861. 

45.  SCOUKFIELD,    D.    J.,    "Non-Marine    Fauna    of   Spitsbergen."     Part   I. — Rhizopoda,   Tardigrada 

Entomostraca,  &c.,  Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  London,  1897,  p.  790. 

46.  WHITELEGGE,  T.,  "  Invertebrate  Fauna  of  Port  Jackson  and  neighbourhood,"  Journ,  and  Proc.  Roy. 

Soc.N.S.W.,  1889,  p.  163. 


TAUDKiKADA 


1.S.3 


INDEX  TO  SPECIES 


JJiphascon   alpiniim,    Murray,    100,    119, 

175 

D.  canadense,  sp.  n.,  176 
D.  chilenense,  Plate,  119,  143,  175 

D.  scoticum,  Murray,  119,  143,  176 
Echiniscus  arctomys,  Ehrenberg,  128 

E.  bisetosus,  Heinis,  164 
E.  blumi,  Richters,  132 
E.  canadensis,  sp.  n.,  162 
E.  duboisi,  Richters,  131 

E.  gladiator,  Murray,  111,  160 

E.  intermedius,  sp.  n.,  129,  151,  161 

E.  kerguelensis,  Richters,  128 

E.  mutabilis,  Murray,  110,  126,  151 

E.  novc'zeelandia;,  Richters,  110,  126,  151 

A',  oihonnii',  Riolitcrs,  132,  103 

E.  perarmatus,  Murray,  154 

K.  pidcfter,  sp.  n.,  127 

E,  spiniyer,  Richtei's,  131 

E.  spinulosus,  Doyere,  153 

E.  sylvanus,  sp.  n.,  160 

E.  tessellatus,  sp.  n.,  129 

E.  vela-minis,  sp.  n.,  112 

E.  viridis,  sp.  n.,  152 

Macrobiotus  aculeatus,  &p  n.,  139 

J/.  annulatus,  Murray,  118 


M.  arctious,  Murray,  96,  118,  140,  171 
M.  areolatus,  sp.  n.,  137,  148,  167 
M.  augusti  Murray,  141 
M.  canadensis,  sp.  n.,  171 
M.  crassidens,  Murray,  139,  155 
~~M~dispar,  Murray,  117,  140 
M.  eckinoyenitus,  Richters,  115,  137,  167 
M.furtiger,  Murray,  114 
M.  harmsworthi,  Murray,  115,  137,  169 
M.  hufdandii,  Schultze,  114,  137,  166 
M.  hufelandioides,  sp.  n.,  138 
M.  intermedius,  Plate,  117,  139,  155,  171 
M.  montanus,  sp.  n.,  116 
M.  iwdosiis,  Murray,  118,  148 
M.  oberhfiuseri,  Doyere,  99,  155,  171 
M.  occidentalis,  sp.  n.,  139,  155,  169 
M.  ornatus,  Richters,  118 
M.papittifer,  Murray,  118,  141 
M.  polaris,  sp.  n.,  98 
M.  rubens,  Murray,  141 
M.  sattleri,  Richters,  118,  141,  173 
M.  tuberculatus,  Plate,  173 
M.  virgatus,  sp.  n.,  142,  173 

Milnesium   tardiijradum,   Doyere,  114,   137, 

154,  166 
Oreella  mollis,  gen.  n. ;  sp.  n  ,  135 


B1UT.  AXTAUCT.  EXPED.   1907-D.       VOL.  I. 


•1  15 


PLATE  XI V 


PLATE  XIV 

ANTARCTIC  TARDIGRADA 

PAGE 

FIGURE  la. — Macrolnotm  polaris,  sp.  n.,  adult        .         .          .          .          x  300       98 

FIGURE  16. — The  same,  teeth  and  pharynx 

FIGURE  lo. — The  same,  young  emerging  from  the  egg  x   300 

FIGURE  Id. — The  same,  variety  of  the  egg      .....          x  300 

FIGURE  le. — The  same,  claws 

FIGURE  2«. — Macrobiotus  arcticus,  Murray,  adult  .         .         .         .          x  300       96 

FIGURE  26. — The  same,  teeth  and  pharynx  of  adult 

FIGURE  2e. — The  same,  thick-shelled  egg x  300 

FIGURE  2d. — The  same,  claws  of  adult 

FIGURE  2e. — The  same,  young  just  hatched     .....          x  300 

FIGURE  2f. — The  same,  teeth  and  pharynx  of  young 

FIGURE  3. — Diphascon  alpinum,  Murray,  Antarctic  variety    .         .          x  300     100 

FIGURE  4. — Diphascon  or  Macrobiotus  (?).    A  doubtful  intermediate  100 

form.    Teeth  and  pharynx,  showing  shortly  elongated 
gullet.     The  claws  are  like  Fig.  2d  on  this  plate. 


Brit  Antarct  Exped  1907-9.  Vol.  I.  Plate  XIV 

MURRAY   ANTARCTIC  TARDIGRADA. 


i  POLARIS,  sp.n.     2.M.ARCTICUSMURRAY.    3.  D IPHASC  0  N  ALPINUM  MURRAY    4.DlPHASCONor  MACROBIOTUS. 

Murray  del.  ad  nat 


PLATE  XV 


PLATE  XV 

TARDIGRADA  OF  NEW  ZEALAND 

PAGE 

FIGURE  5. — Ecliiniscus  novcezeelandice,  Richters  x  300J 

I   126 

FIGURE  6. — Echiniscus  velaminis,  sp.  n.          .....          x  300     112 

FIGURE  7. — Echiniscus,  sp.  ?  .         .         .         .         .         .         .          x  300     113 

FIGURE  8. — Echiniscus,  sp.  ?  . x  300     113 

FIGURE  9. — Echiniscus,  sp.  ? x300113 

FIGURE  10a. — Macrobiotus  montanns,  sp.  n x  300     11 G 

FIGURE  10&. — The  same,  claws 

FIGURE  lOc. — The  same,  teeth  and  pharynx 

FIGURE  lOd. — The  same,  egg x  300 

FIGURE  lla. — Diphascon  chilenense,  Plate  ? — teeth  and  pharynx    .  119 

FIGURE  116. — The  same,  claws 

FIGURE  12. — Macrobiotus,  sp.  ? — Macquarie  Islands       ...  118 


Brit  Antaret  Exped  1907-9.  Vol   I.  Plate  XV 

TARDIGRADA    OF  NEW  ZEALAND 


5.  ECHINISCUS  NOVAEZEELANDIAE  RlCHTERS.        6.-E  VELAMINIS  sp.n        7  8  &9.  ECHINISCUS   SPECIES.7 

10.  MACROBIOTUS  MONTAKUS. spn.      1.2.  MACROBIOTUS  SPECIES'      11.  DIPHAS CON  CHILENENSE  PLATE 

Murray  del    ad  nat 


PLATE  XVI 


PLATE  XVI 

AUSTRALIAN  TARDIGRADA 


PAGE 


FIGURE  13. — Echiniscus  kerguelensis,  Richters  x  300  128 

FIGURE  14. — Echiniscus  blumi,  Richters x  300  132 

FIGURE  15. — Echiniscus  tessellatus,  sp.  n.         .....  x  300  129 

FIGURE  16. — Echiniscus,  sp.  ? x  300  135 

FIGURE  17. — Echiniscus  intermedius,  sp.  n.,  type  with   reticulate 

surface ;  x  300  129 

FIGURE  18. — Echiniscus,  sp.  ? x  300  133 

FIG.  14. — E.  blumi  is  marked  to  indicate  the  segments  I.  to  VI.  (Richters),  and  the 
lateral  processes  a,  b,  c,  and  d.  Those  four  processes  are  seise,  but  e  is  lacking  in  this 
species.  At  the  base  of  a  is  the  "  auricle."  Segments  V.  and  VI.  having  completely 
coalesced,  the  single  segment  resulting  is  referred  to  as  V. +  VI.  The  figure  shows 
also  a  little  sharp  spine  on  the  first  leg,  a  blunt  palp  at  the  base  of  the  fourth  leg, 
the  "fringe"  of  sharp  teeth,  and  the  "  barbs  "  of  the  outer  and  inner  claws. 


Brit  Antarct  Exped  1907-9.  Vol   I.  Plate  XVI 

MURRAY-    AUSTRALIAN  TARDIGRADA. 


17 


18 


13.ECHINISCUS  KERGUELENSIS  RlCHTERS.    14-.  E.BLUMI  RlCHTERS.  15.  E.  TESSELLATUS.  sp  n 

17.  E  INTERMEDIUS  spn        16.  &  18.ECHINTSCUS  SPECIES.? 
•J  Murray  del    ad.  naL 


PLATE  XVII 


BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.  1907-9.      VOL.  I.  2  C 


PLATE  XVII 

AUSTRALIAN  TARDIGRADA 


PAGE 


FIGURE  19. — Echiniscus  duboisi,  Richters,  variety  x  300  131 

FIGURE  20. — The  same,  another  variety x  300  132 

FIGURE  21. — Echiniscus  oihonnce,  Richters      .....  x  300  132 

FIGURE  22. — Echiniscus,  sp.  ? x  300  134 

FIGURE  23. — Echiniscus,  sp.  ? — larva x  400  135 

FIGURE  24. — Echiniscus  spiniger,  Richters,  variety          .         .         .  x  300  131 

FIGURE  25. — Echiniscus,  sp.  ?          ....  x  300  134 


Brit  Antarct  Exped  1907-9. 


Vol.  I.  Plate  XVII 


AUSTRALIAN  TARDTGRADA.. 


22. 


19.&  20.  ECHINISCUSDUBOISI  RlCHTERS.      21.  E.OIHONNAE  RlCHTERS.     24.E.  SPINIGERRlCHTERS. 

22.23.k25.  ECHINISCUS.  SPECIES? 
J  Murray  del.  ad  nat 


PLATE  XVIII 


PLATE  XVIII 

AUSTRALIAN  TARDIGRADA 

PAGE 

FIGUEE  26. — Oreella,  gen.  n.,  mollis,  sp.  n x  300     135 

FIGURE  27a. — Macrobiotus  aculeatus,  sp.  n x  300     139 

FIGURE  27b. — The  same,  teeth  and  pharynx 

FIGURE  27c. — The  same,  egg  .         ...  x  300 

FIGURE  27d. — The  same,  claws 

FIGURE  27e. — The  same,  variety  with  only  two  spines  x  300 

FIGURE  28. — Macrobiotus  virgatus  (?) 142 

FIGURE  29«. — Macrobiotus  hufelandioides,  sp.  n.  .         .         .  138 

FIGURE  29b. — The  same,  three  processes  of  the  egg 

FIGURE  29c. — The  same,  claws 

FIGURE  30. — Macrobiotus  echinogenitus  (?) — egg  x  300     137 

FIGURE  31. — Macrobiotus  harmsworthi  (?) — egg  x  300     137 

FIGURE  32«. — Macrobiotus,  sp.  ? — foot,  showing  knob     ...  142 

FIGURE  32&. — The  same,  claws 

FIGURE  32c. — The  same,  teeth  and  pharynx 

FIGURE  33a. — Macrobiotus,  sp.  ? x  300     142 

FIGURE  336. — The  same,  claws 

FIGURE  33c. — The  same,  teeth  and  pharynx 

FIGURE  34. — Echiniscus  pidcher,  sp.  n x300127 

This  figure  is  marked  to  indicate  the  segments  I.  to  VI.  (Richters),  and  the 
lateral  processes  a,  b,  c,  d,  and  e.  In  this  species  a  and  e  are  setse  and  ?>,  c,  d  are 
little  cones.  At  the  base  of  a  is  the  "  auricle"  Segments  V.  and  VI.  are  separate. 


Brit  Antarct  Exped  1907-9. 


AUSTRALIAN  TARDIGRADA.. 


Vol.  I.  Plate  XVHI 


33c. 


27e. 


26. ORBELLA  .„  gen  MOLLIS  n.sp.     27MACROBIOTUS  ACULEATUS  sp  ,->      28.M.viRCATUs  MURRAY:  ? 

29.M  HUPLLANDIOlDESspn       SO.M.ECHINO&ENITUSRlCHTERS.  31.M.HARMSWDRTHI  MURRAY:   34-.ECHINTSCUSPULCHER.spn 

J.  Murray  del.  ad  nat.  32  ^3.MACRDBiOTrjs.  SPECIES  ? 


PLATE  XIX 


PLATE  XIX 

TARDIGRADA  OF  PACIFIC  ISLANDS 

PAGE 

FIGURE  35. — Echiniscus  novc&zeelandice,  Richters  x  300     151 

FIGURE  36a. — Echiniscus  viridis,  sp.  n. x  300     152 

FIGURE  366. — The  same,  inner  claw 

FIGURE  36c. — Echiniscus  intermedius,  Murray        .         .         .         .          x  300     151 
FIGURE  36d — The  same,  portion  of  reticulated  surface,  more  highly 
magnified 

FIGURE  37. — Echiniscus,  sp.  ? x  600     154 

FIGURE  38. — Echiniscus  spinulosus,  Doyere,  variety        .         .         .          x  300     153 

FIGURE  39a. — Macrobiotus  occidentalis,  Murray  x  300     155 

FIGURE  396. — The  same,  teeth  and  pharynx 

FIGURE  39c. — The  same,  claws 

FIGURE  40. — Macrobiotus  areolatus  (?) — egg  .         .         .         .         .          x  300     148 

FIGURE  4 la. — Macrobiotus,  sp.  ? — teeth  and  pharynx     ...  156 

FIGURE  416. — The  same,  elliptical  egg     ...  x  300 

FIGURE  42«. — Macrobiotus,  sp.  ? — teeth  and  pharynx     ...  156 

FIGURE  426. — The  same,  claws 

FIGURE  43a. — Macrobiotus,  sp.  ? — teeth  and  pharynx      ...  148 

FIGURE  436. — The  same,  claws 


Brit  Antarct  Exped  1907-9. 


Vol   I.  Plate  XTK 


TARDIGRADA    OF  PACIFIC  ISLANDS. 


35 


41  a. 


416. 


39c 


4-26. 


.38 


3  S.ECHINISCUS  NOVAEZEELANDIAE  RlCHTERS.  36A  E  VIRIljlS  spn.  36?E.nNTTERMEDJUS  MlTRRAY  38E.SPINULOSUS  DOYERE. 
37ECHINISCUS.sp?  39.MACROBIOTUS   OCCIDENTALIS  MURRAY  40.T043.MACB.OBIOTUS  sp .? 

J  Murray  del.  ad  nat 


PLATE  XX 


PLATE  XX 

CANADIAN  TARDIGRADA 

PAGE 

FIGURE  44. — Echiniscus,  sp.  ? x  260  165 

FIGURE  45. — Echiniscus,  sp.  ? x  260  166 

FIGURE  46. — Echiniscus,  sp.  ? x  260  165 

FIGURE  47. — Echiniscus  canadensis,  sp.  n.     .         .         .         .         .  x  260  162 

FIGURE  48. — Echiniscus  oihonnce,  Bichters  ?.....  x  260  163 

FIGURE  49. — Echiniscus  sylvanus,  sp.  n.           .....  x  260  160 

FIGURE  50. — Echiniscus  bisetosus,  Heinis  ?.....  x  260  164 

FIGURE  51. — Echiniscus  gladiator,  Murray,  one  pair  of  plates        .  160 

FIGURE  52e*. — Echiniscus  intermedius,  Murray,  American  variety  .  x  260  161 

FIGURE  526. — The  same,  larva  with  two  claws  x  260 


Brit  Antarct  Exped  1907-9.  Vol.  I.  Plate  XX 

MURRAY     CANADIAN    TARDIGRADA. 


47  ECHINISCUS  CANADENSIS.sp  n.      48.  E.  OIHON1LE  HlCHTERS.7       49.E.SYLVA2STUS.sp.  n.       50.  E.  BISETOSUS  HEINIS.? 

51.  E  GLADIATOR  MURRAY    52.  E.INTERMEDIUS  MURRAY     44-.  TO  £6.  ECHINISCUS  SPECIES.  ? 

J  Murray  del.  ad  nat 


PLATE  XXI 


BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.  1907-9.      VOL.  I.  2  D 


PLATE  XXI 

CANADIAN  TARDIGRADA 

PAGE 

FIGURE  53«. — Macrobiotus  areolatus,  Murray         .  .          x  260     167 

FIGURE  536. — The  same,  teeth  and  pharynx 

FIGURE  53c  — The  same,  claws 

FIGURE  53d. — The  same,  egg  .....  x  260 

FIGURE  53e. — The  same,  variety  of  egg  ?          .....          x  260 

FIGURE  54a. — Macrobiotus  occidentalis,  sp.  n.  .         .         .          x  260     169 

FIGURE  546. — The  same,  teeth  and  pharynx 

FIGURE  54c. — The  same,  egg x  260 

FIGURE  54c£. — The  same,  claws 

FIGURE  54e. — The  same,  double  skin  with  dots  and  plates 

FIGURE  55«. — Macrobiotus  virgatus,  sp.  n.  .         .         .         .          x  260     173 

FIGURE  55b. — The  same,  teeth  and  pharynx 

FIGURE  55c. — The  same,  claws 

FIGURE  56. — Egg  of  unknown  Macrobiotus     ....  x  260     175 

FIGURE  57. — Egg  of  unknown  Macrobiotus     .         .         .         .         .         x  260     175 

FIGURE  58. — Egg  of  M.  echinogenitus,  variety  x  260     167 

FIGURE  59. — Egg  like  that  of  M.  dispar,  &c.  x  260     175 

FIGURE  60. — Macrobiotus,  sp.  ? — teeth  and  pharynx        ...  174 

FIGURE  61«. — Macrobiotus  canadensis,  sp.  n.          ....         x  260     171 

FIGURE  616. — The  same,  teeth  and  pharynx 

FIGURE  61c. — The  same,  claws 

FIGURE  61d — The  same,  egg x  260 

FIGURE  62«. — Diphascon  canadense,  sp.  n x  260  '   176 

FIGURE  626. — The  same,  teeth,  gullet,  and  pharnyx 
FIGURE  62r. — The  same,  claws 


Brit  Antarct  Exped  1907-9.  Vol   I.  Plate  XXI 

MURRAY     CANADIAN    TAJ*DIGRADA. 


53.MACRQBIOTUS  AB.EOLATTJS  MURRAY      5  4-.M.OcCIDENTALIS.sp.n.      55.M.V1RGATUS  sp  n       58.M.ECHINOGENITUS  RlCHTERS. 
61  M  CANADENSIS.spn.          620lPHASCON  CANADENSIS.       56.  57  59  &60  MACROBIOTUS  SPECIES.? 

J  Murray  del.  ad  nat 


BRITISH  ANTARCTIC  EXPEDITION  1907-9 

UNDER  THE  COMMAND  OF  SIR  E.  H.  SHACKLETON,  C.V.O. 

REPORTS  ON   THE   SCIENTIFIC   INVESTIGATIONS 


VOL.   I 

BIOLOGY 

EDITOR    -    -    JAMES  MURRAY 
PART  VI 

RHIZOPODES  D'EAU   DOUCE 

BY    EUGENE   PENARD,   DR.    ES   SCIENCES 


(WITH  TWO  PLATES) 


LONDON 
PUBLISHED  FOR  THE  EXPEDITION  BY  WILLIAM  HEINEMANN 

21    BEDFORD  STREET,   W.C. 

1911 

ISSUED   SEPARATELY,    JANUARY    1!)11 
PRICE  THREE  SHILLINGS  NET 


REPORTS  ALREADY  ISSUED 

VOL.   I.  PART  I.,  ON  COLLECTING  AT  CAFE  ROYDS 

BY  JAMES  MURRAY  PRICE  Is.  6cl. 

VOL.  I.  PART  II.,  ON  MICROSCOPIC  LIFE  AT  CAPE  ROYDS 

BY  JAMES  MURRAY  PRICE  .is.  Ocl. 

VOL.  I.  PART  III.,  ANTARCTIC  ROTIFERA 

BY  JAMES  MURRAY  PRICE  5s.  Od. 

VOL.  I.   PART  IV.,  MUSCI 

BY  JULES  CARDOT  PRICE   Is.  Od. 

VOL.  I.   PART  V.,  TARDIGRADA 

BY  JAMES   MURRAY  PRICE   10s.  Od. 


PART    VI 

SARCODINA 

RIIIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE 
PAK  EUGENE  PENARD,  DK.  ES  SCIENCES 

(AVEC  LES  PLANCHES  XXII.,  XXIII.) 

LES  collections  que  M^r.  J.  Murray  a  bien  voulu  m'envoyer,  pour  1'examen  des 
Rhizopodes  d'eau  douce  rapportds  par  FExpedition  antarctique  du  Nimrod,  me 
sont  parvenues  sous  la  forme  soit  de  paquets  de  mousses  ou  autres  vegetaux  a 
1'etat  sec,  soit  de  sediments  conserves  dans  la  formaline. 

En  rendant  compte  aujourd'hui  du  resultat  de  mes  recherches,  il  me  semble 
utile  d'envisager  ces  collections  comme  formant  deux  groupes  speciaux,  et  necessitant 
par  la  une  distinction  en  deux  chapitres  nettement  separes. 

Le  premier  groupe,  represente  dans  les  collections  par  six  flacons  de  re"sidu 
a  la  formaline  et  cinq  petits  paquets  de  mousses  rases,  minuscules,  feutrees,  frag- 
mentaires  et  reduites  pour  ainsi  dire  a  leur  plus  simple  expression,  concerne  les 
terres  antarctiques  proprement  dites,  File  Eoss  avec  le  Cap  Royds  et  ses  petits  lacs, 
Hut  Point  ou  dans  une  expedition  precedente  hiverna  la  Discovery,  et  les 
Moraines  echouees  du  continent. 

Avec  le  second  groupe,  nous  aurons  a  nous  occuper  des  Rhizopodes  recueillis 
lors  du  voyage  de  retour,  et  qui  me  sont  arrives  sous  la  forme  de  dix-neuf  paquets 
de  mousses  seches  et  de  quinze  flacons  renferrnant  du  sddiment. 

Mais  ce  second  chapitre,  a  son  tour,  comporte  un  certain  nombre  de  sub- 
divisions :  Ties  meridionales  du  Pacifique,  Nouvelle  Zelande,  Australie,  lies  du 
Pacifique  en  general,  Vancouver  et  le  Canada. 

Un  tableau  general  des  especes  rencontrees  aura  son  utilite,  en  permettant  un 
coup  d'ccil  d'ensemble  sur  la  distribution  des  especes.  Ces  dernieres,  enfin,  seront 
reprises  une  k  une  et  donneront  lieu  a  quelques  observations  d'interet  general. 


BIUT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED,   1907-9.     VOL.  I.     PAKT  6,  ISSUED  SEPAEATELY  1911 

/3 


204  E.   PENARD 


CHAPITRE    I 

ANTARCTIQUE 
1.  Cape  Royds,  mare  a  sec  (dried  tarn) 

Le  materiel  recolte  dans  cette  localite,  en  Avril  1908,  par  Mr.  J.  Murray, 
consistait  exclusivement  en  fragments  jaunatres  de  "  weed,"  de  cette  matiere 
organique  que  les  explorateurs  ont  trouvt$e  en  abondance  dans  les  environs  du  Cap 
Royds,  et  sur  la  nature  de  laquelle  on  n'est  pas  encore  au  clair. 

Aucun  rhizopode  ne  s'est  montre  dans  cette  "  herbe,"  sauf  peut-etre  une  Corycia, 
genre  auquel  paraissaient  devoir  se  rapporter  deux  enveloppes  vides  et  en  mauvais  etat. 

2.   Cape  Royds,  mousses  recoltees  par  J.  Murray,  le  26  Janv.  1909 

Ces  quelques  petits  fragments  d'une  mousse  courte  et  feutree  se  sont  trouvds 
renfermer,  avec  une  abondance  relative,  la  Corycia  flava  de  GREEFF,  representee  ici 
par  une  forme  un  peu  speciale,  de  faible  taille,  et  dont  1'enveloppe,  d'une  teinte  claire 
et  d'une  transparence  toute  particuliere,  a  permis  des  observations  biologiques  qui 
n'avaient  pu  6tre  faites  auparavant.1  Ces  rhizopodes,  en  effet,  etaient  vivants,  et  se 
sont  montres  tels  apres  un  temps  relativement  tres  court,  une  lieure  ou  deux  d'immer- 
sion ;  il  m'a  ete  possible  de  les  conserver  plus  de  huit  jours. 

Outre  cette.  espece,  les  mousses  du  Cap  Iloyds  ont  fourni : 

Euglyplia  laevis,  plusieurs  exemplaires,  coquilles  vides. 

Assulina  muscorum,  une  seule  enveloppe  vide. 

Centropyxis  aculeata,  une  petite  enveloppe  vide,  de  95  M  de  diametre,  et  qui 
se  rapportait  a  cette  forme  decrite  par  CASH  comme  var,  spinosa,  particuliere  aux 
sphagnum  et  aux  mousses. 

Arcella  arenaria,  une  enveloppe  vide. 

Heleopera  petricola,  une  coquille  vide,  tres  vieille  et  en  mauvais  etat,  mais  qui 
montrait  bien  les  caracteres  de  1'espece,  et  revetait  encore  cette  teinte  Idgerement 
violette  que  1'on  observe  frequemment  dans  cet  organisme. 

Dans  cette  station  du  Cap  Iloyds,  se  trouvait  enfin  certainement  Trinema 
enchelys,  &  en  juger  d'apres  un  croquis  que  Mr.  Murray  m'a  envoye,  et  qui  ne 
peut  laisser  aucun  doute  sur  1'espece. 

1  Ces  observations  trouveront  leur  place  dans  un  m^moire  qui  sera  public  prochainement,  dans  la  Revue 
Suisse  de  Zoologie  (Tome  19,  1911). 


RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE  205 

3.  Substance  organique,  remplissant  des  poches  (Vegetation  in 
pockets,  Murray)  souterraines,  Cape  Royds,  12  Mars  1908 

Encore  la  me  me  "  vegetation "  problematique,  feuilletee,  ici  d'un  blanc  sale 
et  sans  elements  figures  clairement  reconnaissables.  Aucuu  rhizopode  ne  s'y  est 
rencontre. 

4.  Coast  Lake,  Janvier  1909 

(a)  a  sec 

(b)  sediment  dans  la  formaline 

A  part  deux  exemplaires  de  Corycia  penardi,  en  mauvais  e"tat  mais  nettement 
reconnaissables  encore,  et  dans  lesquels  il  fut  possible  de  colorer  le  noyau,  le  seul 
Rhizopode  que  parut  renfermer  ce  petit  lac  a  e"te  la  Quadrula  irregularis,  Archer, 
une  tres  petite  forme,  arrondie,  et  qui  n'e'tait  relativement  pas  tres  rare.  Elle  s'est 
rencontree  aussi  bien  dans  le  sediment  conserve  au  formol  que  dans  les  "herbes"  a 
sec,  oil,  la  aussi,  on  ne  la  voyait  qu'a  1'etat  de  coquilles  vides. 

Mr.  Murray  avait,  du  reste,  pu  examiner  sur  place  ce  llhizopode  a  l'e"tat  vivant, 
comme  le  montre  une  microphotographie  qu'il  a  bien  voulu  m'envoyer. 

Cette  espece,  tres-cosmopolite,  aquatique  en  general  mais  qui  se  rencontre  egale- 
ment  parfois  dans  les  mousses,  varie  passablement  d'une  localite  a  une  autre,  sous  le 
rapport  de  la  compression  de  1'enveloppe.  Tantot  fortement  aplatie,  tantot  presque 
ronde  en  section  transversale,  elle  se  montre  ou  disco'ide  ou  globuleuse ;  c'est  sous 
cette  derniere  forme,  par  exemple,  qu'on  la  trouve  au  fond  des  lacs  suisses  (var.  globulosa 
PENARD)  ;  et  c'est  comme  telle  egalement  qu'on  la  rencontrait  au  Cap  Rbyds ;  beaucoup 
plus  petite  cependant,  la  forme  de  Coast  Lake  mesurant  23  M,  en  regard  de  30-40  M 
qu'elle  atteint  dans  le  lac  de  Geneve.  Au  Spitzberg,  dans  les  mousses,  on  en  a  trouve" 
une  variete  tres  pen  comprime'e  egalement. 

C'est  dans  ce  meme  Coast-Lake  que  Mr.  Murray  a  constate  la  presence  d'un 
heliozoaire,  Acanthocystis  spec.,  qu'il  figure  a  la  PI.  VIII.  du  fascicule  "  on  micro- 
scopic life  at  Cape  Royds,"  mais  que  malgre  toutes  mes  recherches  je  n'ai  pas  rdussi  a 
retrouver.  D'apres  Murray,  cette  espece  etait  abondante  en  Avril  1908  ;  la  recolte  que 
j'ai  examinee  e"tait  de  Janvier  1909. 

5.  Clear  Lake,  Fevrier  1908 

Malgre  la  presence  d'une  abondante  vegetation  microscopique  (conferves,  algues, 
diatomees  minuscules),  comme  aussi  de  rotiferes  et  de  quelques  infusoires,  aucun 
rhizopode  ne  s'est  rencontre  dans  cette  recolte. 


206  E.  PENARD 

6.  Blue  Lake 

(a)  ve'ge'tation  a  sec 

(l>)  sediment  dans  la  formaline 

Recolte  de  J.  Murray,  en  Septembre  1908,  a  3  pieds  de  profondeur,  dans  la 
partie  resserree  (narrows)  du  lac. 

La  Quadrula  irregular  is  s'est  retrouvee  ici,  plus  abondante  meme  qu'a  Coast 
Lake,  et  peut-e"tre  avec  une  taille  legerement  superieure ;  d'ailleurs  parfaitement 
typique,  et,  elle  aussi,  presque  ronde  en  section  trail sver sale. 

Dans  ce  meme  petit  lac  se  trouvait  Corycia  flava  (un  seul  individu),  et 
Amoeba  terricola.  Mais  pour  cette  derniere,  je  ne  puis  certifier  d'une  identi- 
fication absolue ;  les  deux  ou  trois  organismes  qui,  d'apres  leur  apparence  generale 
et  leur  noyau  ovo'ide,  m'ont  paru  pouvoir  se  rapporter  a  cette  espece,  etaient 
enkystes,  entoures  d'une  enveloppe  speciale,  membraneuse,  souple  et  relativement 
epaisse,  telle  qu'on  ne  la  connait  pas  dans  cette  espece,  laquelle  d'ailleurs,  en 
Europe,  n'a  jamais  montrd  de  phenomenes  ve'ritables  d'enkystement. 

Probablement  est-ce  dans  ce  Blue  Lake  que  Murray  a  trouve  la  Nebela  vas, 
cette  espece  si  largement  repandue  dans  I' hemisphere  austral,  et  qui  parviendrait 
ainsi  jusqu'a  1'extreme  sud.  Mais  elle  y  serait  en  tout  cas  tres  rare,  car  il  m'a 
ete  impossible  d'en  retrouver  le  moindre  vestige. 

7.   Terraced  Lake,  Cape  Barne 
Recolte  de  J.  Murray,  27  Septembre  1908 

Dans  les  sediments  provenant  de  ce  lac,  il  ne  s'est  montre,  en  fait  de 
Rhizopodes,  qu'une  enveloppe  vide  de  Corycia,  en  trop  mauvais  etat  pour  qu'il 
fut  possible  de  la  determiner  avec  certitude,  mais  qui  m'a  paru  pourtant  devoir  se 
rapporter  a  C.  penardi. 

Ces  memes  sediments,  pour  le  dire  en  passant,  etaient  rendus  interessants  par 
la  presence  de  nombreux  fragments  d'obsidienne,  poussieres  volcaniques  lancees  sans 
doute  par  1'Erebus ;  puis  de  fibres  vegetales,  appartenant  a  des  plantes  phanerogames 
(meme  une  fois  &,  un  conifere),  et  qui  sans  doute  avaient  ete  apportees  de  bien  loin 
par  les  vents. 

8.  Moraines  echouees  (stranded  moraines) 
Recolte  de  R.  Priestley,  Novembre  1908 

Les  quelques  petits  fragments  de  mousses,  recoltes  par  Mr.  Priestley  dans  les 
"  moraines  echouees,"  sur  la  cote  du  Continent  et  a  quelque  30  kilometres  au  sud  du 
Cap  Royds,  ont  fourni  1'une  des  meilleurs  recoltes  de  rhizopodes  qui  aient  e"te  faites 
dans  1'Antarctique. 


RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE  207 

Outre  la  petite  Arcelle  des  mousses,  Arcella  arenaria,  relativement  assez  com- 
mune, et  la  Difflugia  lucida  qui  n'etait  pas  tres  rare,  on  trouvait  la  un  representant 
du  genre  Diploclilamys,  D.  timida,  nettement  caracteristique,1  puis  Euglypha 
compressa,  representee,  a  1'etat  de  coques  vides,  par  deux  ou  trois  individus  de 
tres  faible  taille  ;  enfin  Corycia  flava.  Comme  toujours  et  partout,  cette  demiere 
espece  n'a  exige  que  quelques  instants,  une  fois  les  mousses  humecte'es,  pour 
reprendre  vie. 

9.  Hut  Point 
Recolte  de  R.  Priestley,  Novembre  1908 

Daus  cette  recolte,  et  en  depit  d'un  examen  pousse  tres  a  fond,  pas  un  rhizopode 
]ie  s'est  montre.  Les  seuls  organismes  observes  ont  ete  quelques  rotiferes  enkystes. 
Des  spicules  de  spongiaires,  nombreuses,  attestaient  le  voisinage  de  la  mer. 

RECAPITULATION    GENERALE 


so 

a 

a 

M 

co  -^> 

02            I       00     C3  ,  —  , 

w 

M               H 

<] 

|q 

fl    § 

p              O  *73    03 

3 

3 

M 

M 

C   co 

3   H 

£-* 

1 

Ill 

w 

^J 

B 

o  £ 

5  5 

O 

PH 

^T     p\ 

(—  1                        pH     -2 

E 

M 

H 

O 

fjg 

H 

H 

P 

&•&• 

K 

o 

a 

3 

o 

ffi 

H 

02  ^ 

M 

H 

Amoeba  terricola 

1 

Arcella  arenaria    .... 

— 

+ 

— 

— 





— 

4. 

— 

Assulina  muscorum 

— 

4- 









— 





Centropyxis  aculeata    . 

— 

+ 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Corycia  flava        .... 

? 

+ 

— 

— 

— 

+ 

— 

+ 

— 

Corycia  penardi    .... 

— 

— 

— 

+ 

— 



I 

— 

— 

Difflugia  lucida     .... 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 



— 

+ 

— 

Diplochlamys  timida 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 



— 

+ 

— 

Euglypha  compressa 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 



— 

4. 

— 

Euglypha  laevis   .... 

— 

+ 

— 

— 

— 



— 

— 

— 

Heleopera  petricola 

— 

+ 

— 

— 

— 



— 

— 

— 

*Nebela  vas          .... 

— 

— 

— 





+ 





— 

Quadrula  irregularis 

— 

— 

— 

4- 

— 

+ 

— 

— 

— 

*Trinema  enchelys 

— 

+ 

— 

— 

— 



—  . 

— 

— 

*Acanthocystis  spec 

— 

—              — 

+ 

— 



— 

— 

— 

Les  especes  marquees  *  n'ont  etc  trouve'es  que  par  Mr.  Murray. 

Le  tableau  qui  vient  de  recapituler  les  paragraphes  precedents,  ne  sera  pas 
sans  doute  depourvu  de  quelque  intdret,  en  permettant  d'envisager  d'un  coup  d'oeil 
les  resultats  obtenus. 


1  Tres  probablement,  la  D.  fracjilis   se   trouvait  egalement   representee ;   mais  les   quelques   specimens 
rencontres  etaient  en  si  mauvais  etat  que  le  fait  ne  peut  etre  donn6  cornme  certain. 


208  E.  PENARD 

Dans  cette  liste  gene'rale,  j'ai  cru  devoir  faire  entrer,  aussi  bien  que  les  autres,  les 
stations  qui  se  sont  montrees  vierges  de  tout  Sarcodine.  Peut-etre  ces  colon nes  vides 
seront-elles  tout  aussi  significatives,  en  faisant  ressortir,  par  le  fait  me'me  qu'elles  n'ont 
rien  a  montrer,  la  pauvrete  vraiment  extraordinaire  des  terres  antarctiques  en  rhizo- 
podes  d'eau  douce. 

Ces  parages  sont  tres  pauvres  en  effet.  Peut-etre,  au  premier  coup-d'ceil  jete  sur 
ces  quinze  noms  d'especes  e'numere's  les  uns  au-dessous  des  autres,  sera-t-on  tente  de 
trouver  a  redire  a  cette  qualification  de  "  pauvres,"  de  considerer  meme  le  nombre 
obtenu  comme  un  resultat  auquel  on  n'aurait  guere  pu  s'attendre,  alors  que  sous 
les  me'mes  latitudes  on  n'avait  signale  jusqu'ici  que  trois  Rhizopodes,  Amoeba 
terricola  et  Corycia  flava,  trouves  par  RICHTERS  dans  les  mousses  du  Gaussberg,1  puis 
Arcella  arenaria,  observes  par  le  meme  auteur  dans  des  mousses  du  Victoria-Land.2 

Mais  ce  que  la  liste  ne  pouvait  pas  dire,  c'est  que  cette  penurie  d'organismes  reside 
non  pas  tant  dans  le  nombre  des  especes  que  dans  celui  des  individus. 

Pour  qui  a  quelque  experience  dans  la  recherche  de  ces  Sarcodines  bryophiles,  les 
mousses  de  1'Antarctique  sont  en  effet  un  etonnement.  Si  Ton  excepte  la  Corycia 
flava,  qui  dans  deux  localitcs  (Cape  Royds  et  Stranded  moraines)  se  montrait  avec 
une  proportion  d'individus  h,  peu  pres  comparable  a  ce  qu'on  pourrait  s'attendre  a 
trouver  en  Europe,  tout  est  extremement  rare.  Meme  Arcella  arenaria,  Difflugia 
lucida,  que  j'indique  comme  relativement  communes,  ne  se  rencontraient  que  de  temps 
ft  autre ;  et  quand  aux  autres  especes,  on  peut  dire,  j'en  suis  sur,  que  si  les  precedents 
observateurs  ne  les  ont  pas  trouvees,  c'est  qu'il  fallait  pour  cela  un  specialiste  disposant 
de  tout  son  temps,  habitue  a  la  patience,  et  surtout  bien  decid^  a  ne  s'attaquer  qu'aux 
seuls  Rhizopodes  pour  laisser  de  cote  tout  le  reste,  et  a  ne  considerer  Rotiferes, 
Tardigrades,  Acariens  et  Nernatodes  que  comme  des  quantites  negligeables. 

La  plus  grande  partie,  en  effet,  des  especes  cities,  se  sont  montrees  repre- 
sentees  par  quelques  individus  seulement,  peniblement  obtenus  apres  de  longues 
heures  de  recherches,  et  eux-memes  en  mauvais  etat,  sous  la  forme  de  coquilles 
vides,  deformees,  et  quelquefois  brisees. 

On  serait  meme  en  droit,  semble-t-il,  de  se  demander  si  ces  individus  appar- 
tenaient  bien  a  la  faune  de  1'Antarctique,  s'ils  n'avaient  pas  ete  apportes  la  deja 
sans  vie,  et  au  meme  titre  que  les  fibres  de  ve'getaux  phaneroganiiques  qu'on  a 
rencontres  dans  les  lacs,  par  les  vents  du  nord  ou  par  les  pattes  des  oiseaux  au 
retour  de  leurs  quartiers  d'hiver. 

Mais  il  ne  faut  pas  nous  arreter  longtemps  a  cette  idee.  Tout  en  admettant 
que  chaque  espece  ait  a  1'origine  e'te  introduite,  et  cela  dans  un  passe  plus  ou 
moins  recule,  il  faut  reconnaitre  que  ces  Rhizopodes  faisaient,  au  moment  de  la 
recolte,  partie  integraute  de  la  faune  locale.  L'aspect  special  des  enveloppes,  les 
debris  que  les  animaux  avaient  pu  y  incorporer,  tout  cela  le  montrait  deja  claire- 


1  Deutsche  Siidpol.  Exped.  1901-3.     Vol.  9.     Zool. 

2  Zool.  Anzeiger,  Juillet  1909,  p.  604. 


HHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE  209 

ment ;  et  puis,  toute  cette  faune  (a  1'exception  de  Quadrula  irregularis,  qui  se 
trouve,  elle,  bien  et  clument  etablie  dans  les  lacs)  est  une  faune  spe"ciale,  caracte"- 
ristique  des  mousses,  et  Ton  ne  peut  concevoir  que  les  vents  ou  les  oiseaux  aient 
fait  un  choix,  et  n'aient  pas  su  apporter  des  coquilles  ce  difflugies,  d'arcelles,  et 
tant  d'autres,  qu'ils  eussent  tout  aussi  bien  pu  trouver. 

A  mon  avis,  c'est  avant  tout  dans  les  conditions  climateriques  qu'il  faut 
chercher  Fexplication  de  cette  penurie  de  Sarcodines ;  dans  le  climat,  et  aussi,  si 
Ton  veut,  dans  les  mousses  elles-memes.  Ces  dernieres,  en  effet,  n'arrivent  qu'a 
grand  peine,  dans  ces  regions  du  Cap  Royds,  a  trainer  leur  maigre  existence ; 
bien  loin  d'egaler  en  vigueur  les  mousses  du  Spitzberg,  ou  Ton  peut  les  recolter 
en  touffes  splendides,  ce  ne  sont  plus  ici  qui  des  vegetaux  rabougris,  dont  les 
tiges  serrees  ne  forment  qu'un  feutre  mince  et  dur ;  et  dans  des  conditions 
semblables,  au  Pole  antarctique  comme  sur  les  rochers  des  hautes  Alpes,  la 
faune  microscopique  est  toujours  pauvre. 

Cependant,  c'est  le  climat  par  lui-meme  qui  doit  ici  jouer  le  role  le  plus 
direct ;  il  est  decidement  trop  rude ;  s'il  ne  1'dtait,  il  y  aurait  place  encore,  dans 
ces  mousses  si  courtes  soient-elles,  pour  une  faune  rhizopodique  bien  plus  abon- 
dante  qu'elle  ne  Test  en  re"alite.  Dans  les  lacs,  ^galement,  si  riches  en  Algues,  en 
Rotiferes,  Tardigrades,  Nematodes  et  meme  Infusoires,  on  ne  trouve — a  part  de  temps 
a  autre  une  Corycia  qui  semble  s'etre  egaree  la — que  la  Quadrula  irregularis. 

Dans  une  lettre  qu'il  m'ecrivait  tout  dernierement,  Mr.  Murray  clisait :  "  Of 
all  the  moss-dwellers,  I  find  the  Rhizopods  least  willing  to  come  alive  after  being 
for  a  long  time  dried."  La  conclusion  du  biologiste  du  Nimrod  est  celle-la  meme 
a  laquelle  mes  etudes  m'avaient  depuis  longtemps  amend,  et  que  les  recoltes  de  la 
derniere  expedition  antarctique  vienuent  une  fois  de  plus  confirmer.  Partout  les 
memes  faits  se  repetent:  Acariens,  Ndmatodes,  Tardigrades  et  Rotiferes  recom- 
mencent  a  courir  alors  que  les  Rhizopodes  gardent  encore  un  repos  absolu,  ou 
reprennent  vie  alors  que  ces  derniers  ne  le  pourront  jamais  plus. 

Les  Rhizopodes,  d'une  maniere  generale,  sont  moins  resistants  que  les  orga- 
nismes  qui  vienuent  d'etre  cites ;  mais  il  ne  faudrait  pas  envisager  cette  donnee 
comme  absolument  generale.  Parmi  les  Sarcodines  des  mousses,  il  en  est  quel- 
ques-uns  qui  constituent  une  exception  bien  nette  a  la  regie ;  je  citerai  par 
exemple  Diffluyia  arcula,  puis  Bullinula  indica,  qui  rivalisent  sous  ce  rapport 
avec  les  Kotiferes  les  plus  endurants  (et  pourtant  manquaient  au  Cap  Royds,  pour 
des  raisons  speciales  sans  doute) ;  puis  surtout  la  Corycie,  Corycia  flava,  qui,  elle, 
est  d'une  resistance  incroyable,  et  dans  cet  ordre  de  faits  tient  peut-etre  le  record 
dans  toute  la  serie  des  organismes  animaux. 

En  resume,  les  collections  rapportees  de  1'Antarctique,  et  qui  ont  donne  a 
Mr.  J.  Murray  de  si  interessants  re"sultats  pour  les  groupes  qu'il  a  etudies,  en  ont 
fourni  de  quelque  valeur  egalement  pour  les  Sarcodiues.  Elles  ont  montrd  que  ces 
organismes  se  trouvent,  en  fait,  representes  la-bas  par  les  memes  especes  que 


210  E.  PENARI) 

partout    ailleurs;    que    ces    especes    y    sont,    mais    representees    par   uue    tres    petite 
quantite  d'individus. 

Toute  cette  faune  est  arrivee,  sans  doute,  tout  pres  de  la  limite  au-dela  de 
laquelle  la  vie  lui  reste  ferme'e  au  sud ;  mais  cette  limite,  1'homme  1'a  depassee, 
Shakleton  et  ses  compagnons,  pour  aller  planter  a  deux  pas  du  Pole  le  pavilion  du 
Royaume  Uni. 


CHAPITRE    II 

COLLECTIONS   RECUEILLIES   PENDANT   LE    VOYAGE    DE   RETOUE 

A.  ILES  DU  PACIFIQUE  SUD 

1.  lie  Macquarie 

Recolte  effectuee  par  Capt.  J.  K.  Davis  a  Lusitania  Bay, 
pres  d'un  marecage.     Mai  1909 

(a)  Une  touffe  d'une  mousse  longue  et  serree,  et  un  paquet  de  conferves. 

(b)  Sediment  dans  la  formaline. 


Amoeba  terricola. 
Arcella  arenaria. 
„       vulgaris. 
Assulina  inuscorum. 
Bullinula  indica. 
Corythion  dubium. 
Difflugia  arcula. 

„         constricta. 
Euglypha  alveolata. 
„         ciliata. 
„        compressa. 
laevis. 


Heleopera  petricola. 

sphagni. 
„         sylvatica. 
Nebela  caudata. 
„       dentistoma. 
„       lageniformis. 
„       martiali. 

vas. 

Phryganella  hemisphaerica. 
Sphenoderia  dentata. 
Trinema  enchelys. 


2.  lies  Auckland 

Fragment  de  mousse  re'colte'e  par  le  Dr.  Cockayne,  botaniste  du 
Gouvernement  de  la  N1Ie  Zelande.     1907 

Cette  mousse  tapissait  le  tronc  d'un  "Eata,"  Metrosideros  lucida 


Assulina  muscorum. 
Difflugia  arcula. 

„         constricta. 
BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.  1907-9     VOL.  I. 


Euglypha  compressa. 
Hyalosphenia  cockayni. 
Nebela  tincta. 


B 


E.  PENARD 


B.  NOUVELLE  ZELANDE 

1.  lie  Stewart 
Re"colte  de  J.  Murray,  au  sommet  d'un  petit  ilot.     Mars  1909 


Amoeba  terricola. 
Arcella  arenaria. 
Assulina  muscorum. 
„         seminuluni. 
Bullinula  indica. 
Centropyxis  horrida. 
Corythion  dubium. 
Difflugia  arcula. 

constricta. 


(a)  Mousses  seches,  en  petite  quantity. 
(6)  Sediment  dans  la  formaline. 

Diplochlamys  fragilis. 
Euglypha  ciliata. 

„          compressa. 

„          laevis. 
Heleopera  sylvatica. 
Nebela  lageniformis. 
Phryganella  hemisphaerica. 
Plagiopyxis  callida. 
Trinema  enchelys. 


2.  District  du  Mont  Cook,  He  du  Sud 

*  Recoltes  de  J.  Murray,  sur  diffe'rents  points,  de  3000  a  6000  pieds  d'altitude, 
et  sur  un  espace  de  plusieurs  milles.     Dccembre  1907 

(a)  Mousses  diverses,  avec  une  belle  touffe  de  sphagnum. 
(6)  Sediment  dans  la  formaline. 


Amoeba  sphaeronucleolus. 

„        terricola. 
Arnphizonella  violacea. 
Arcella  arenaria. 
Assulina  muscorum. 

„        seminulum. 
Bullinula  indica. 
Centropyxis  aculeata. 
Corycia  penardi. 
Corythion  dubium. 
Cyphoderia  ampulla. 
Difflugia  arcula. 

„        constricta. 

„        lucida. 

„         manicata. 

„         pyriformis,  var.  bryophila. 
Diplochlamys  timida. 
Euglypha  alveolata. 
ciliata. 


Euglypha  compressa. 
Heleopera  petricola. 
sphagni. 

Hyalosphenia  cockayni. 
Nebela  collaris. 
„       dentistoma. 
„       lageniformis. 
„       longicollis. 
„       tincta. 

vas. 
Phryganella  hemisphaerica. 

„          nidulus. 
Pontigulasia  bryophila. 
„  compressa. 

Sphenoderia  dentata. 

„  fissirostris. 

Trinema  enchelys. 
lineare. 


RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE 


213 


**Re"colte  du  Dr.  Mackay,  stir  un  seul  point,  a  Nun's  Veil, 
5000  pieds.     Decembre  1907 


Arcella  arenaria. 
Bullinula  indica. 
Difflugia  arcula. 

„         constricta. 
Euglypha  ciliata. 


Euglypha  laevis. 
Nebela  lageniformis. 

vas. 
Phryganella  hemisphaerica. 


3.    Waiata-Eua,  Cote  occidentals,  He  du  Nord 

Recolte  de  J.  Murray,  dans  le  "bush,"  pres  des  chutes -du  Nihotupo. 
Mousses  diverses,  en  petite  quantite.     Decembre  1907 


Amoeba  terricola. 
Assulina  muscorum. 

„        seminulum. 
Bullinula  indica. 
Corythion  dubium. 
Difflugia  arcula. 

„       constricta. 

„        lucida. 
Diplochlamys  fragilis. 
Euglypha  ciliata. 

„          compressa. 


Euglypha  strigosa. 
Heleopera  sphagni. 
Nebela  collaris. 

,,       lageniformis. 

„      longicollis. 

„       tincta. 

„      vas. 

Phryganella  hemisphaerica. 
Plagiopyxis  callida. 
Pontigulasia  compressa. 
Trinema  enchelys. 


4.  Ngauruhoe,  volcan,  He  du  Nord 

Recolte  du  Dr.  Mawson,  dans  une  seule  region,  a  4-5000  pieds 

d'altitude.     Avril  1909 


(a.)  Mousses  diverses,  a  sec. 
(6)  Sediment  dans  la  formaline. 


Assulina  rnuscorum. 

„        seminulum. 
Bullinula  indica. 
Centropyxis  laevigata. 
Corythion  dubium. 
Difflugia  arcula. 

„         constricta. 

„         lucida. 
Euglypha  ciliata. 

,,         compressa. 


Heleopera  sphagni. 
Nebela  caudata. 

„       collaris. 

„       lageniformis, 

„       martiali. 

„       militaris. 

vas. 

Phryganella  hemisphaerica. 
Trinema  enchelys. 


214 


E.  PENARD 


5.  Rotorua,  He  du  Nord 
Recolte  de  J.  Murray,  dans  le  "bush."     Avril  1909.     Mousses  diverses 


Amoeba  terricola. 
Arcella  arenaria. 
Bullinula  indica. 
Centropyxis  laevigata. 


Difflugia  constricta. 
Euglypha  ciliata. 
Nebcla  lageniformis. 
Phryganella  hemisphaerica. 


C.   AUSTRALIB 


1.  Sydney,  Nouvelle  Galles  du  Sud 


Mousses  diverses,  recoltees  par  J. 
puis  dans  les  environs  de 


Amoeba  muralis. 

„        radiosa. 

„        terricola. 
Assulina  muscoruin. 

„         seminulum. 
Bullinula  indica. 
Corycia  flava. 
Corythion  dubium. 
Difflugia  arcula. 

„         constricta. 

„         fallax. 
Euglypha  ciliata. 

„          compressa. 

„         laevis. 
Heleopera  petricola. 


Murray,  au  National  Park, 
Sydney.     Avril  1909 

Heleopera  sordida. 

„  sylvatica. 

Hyalosphenia  cockayni. 
Nebela  certesi. 
„        collaris. 
„       lageniformis. 
„       martiali. 
„        tincta. 

vas. 

Parmulina  cyathus. 
Phryganella  hemisphaerica. 
Plagiopyxis  callida. 
„  labiata. 

Trinema  complanatum. 
„        enchelys. 


2.  Alpes  australiennes,  Nouvelle  Galles  du  Sud 
Recoltes  de  J.  Murray.     Avril  1909 

(a)  Region  tourbeuse  pros  de  1'Hospice,  5000  pieds ;  mousses  et  sphagnum. 
(6)  "The  Creel,"  3000  pieds,  mousses,  belles  et  longues. 
(c)   Sddiment  dans  la  formaline. 


Amoeba  terricola. 
Amphizonella  violacea. 
Arcella  arenaria. 


Assulina  muscoruin. 
Bullinula  indica. 
Corycia  flava. 


RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE 


215 


Corythion  dubium. 
Difflugia  arcula. 

„        constricta. 

„        fallax. 
Diplochlamys  fragilis. 
Euglypha  alveolata. 

„          ciliata. 

„         compressa. 

„          filifera. 

„         laevis. 

„          strigosa. 
Heleopera  petricola. 
„         sylvatica. 


Lieberkiihnia  wageneri. 
Nebela  caudata. 
„       lageniformis. 
„       martial! . 

vas. 

Phryganella  hemisphaerica. 
Plagiopyxis  callida. 
„  labiata. 

Quadrula  symmetrica. 
Sphenoderia  dentata. 
Trinema  complanatum. 
lineare. 


3.  Katoomba,  Montagnes  bleues,  Nllc   Galles  du  Sud 

llecoltes  de  J.  Murray,  dans  trois  petites  gorges  (gullies)  qui  menent  a  la 
"Sunken  Valley,"  et  sur  un  territoire  de  2  milles.     Mai  1909 

(a)  Mousses  diverses,  avec  une  touffe  de  sphagnum. 
(&)  Sediment  dans  la  formaline. 


Amoeba  sphaeronucleolus. 

„        terricola. 
Amphitrema  stenostoma. 
Amphizonella  violacea. 
Arcella  arenaria. 
Assulina  muscorum. 

„        seminulum. 
Bullinula  indica. 
Centropyxis  horrida. 

„  laevigata. 

Corycia  flava. 
Corythion  dubium. 
Difflugia  arcula. 

„        constricta. 

„         lucida. 
Diplochlamys  fragilis. 
„  vestita. 

Euglypha  compressa. 


Euglypha  cristata. 
„         laevis. 
„          strigosa. 
Heleopera  sylvatica. 
Nebela  certesi. 
„        collaris. 
„        griseola. 
„        lageniformis. 
„        longicollis. 
„        martiali. 
„        militaris. 
„        tincta. 

vas. 

Phryganella  hemisphaerica. 
Plagiopyxis  callida. 
Trinema  complanatum. 
„        enchelys. 
lineare. 


216 


E.  PENARD 


4.  Eumundi  Station,  Queensland 

Recolte  de  J.  Murray,  dans  le  "  bush,"  sur  un  territoire  de  deux  milles 

cane's  environ.     Mai  1909 

(a)  Paquet  de  mousses,  sans  sphagnum. 

(&)  Beau  paquet  de  mousses  varie"es,  quelquefois  sur  ecorce,  avec  un  petit  fragment  de 
sphagnum. 

(c)  Sediment  dans  la  formaline. 


Amoeba  sphaeronucleolus. 

„        terricola. 
Arcella  arenaria. 
Assulina  muscorum. 
Bullinula  indica. 
Centropyxis  aculeata. 

„  delicatula. 

Corycia  flava. 
Corythion  dubium. 
Difflugia  arcula. 

„        constricta. 

„        lucida. 

„        pyriformis,  var.  bryophila. 


Diplochlamys  timida. 
Euglypha  ciliata. 
„          compressa. 
„          laevis. 
Heleopera  sphagni. 
Hyalosphenia  subflava. 
Nebela  caudata. 

„        collaris. 

,,       lageniformis. 
Phryganella  hemisphaerica. 
Plagiopyxis  callida. 
Trinema  complanatum. 

„         enchelys. 


D.  ILES  DU  PACIFIQUE 
1.  Suva,  Fiji 

K,e"colte  de  J.  Murray,  pres  du  rivage,  au  bord   d'un   marecage  a  paletuviers,  puis 

dans  1'interieur,  a  un  mille  ou  deux  de  la  cote,  dans  les  fosses 

au  bord  de  la  route.     Mai  1909 

(a)  Mousses  tres-courtes,  avec  beaucoup  de  terre. 

(b)  Sediment  dans  la  formaline. 


Amoeba  terricola. 
Bullinula  indica. 
Centropyxis  delicatula. 
Corycia  aculeata. 

„       penardi. 
Difflugia  arcula. 

„        constricta. 
lucida. 


Difflugia  pyriformis,  var.  bryophila. 

Euglypha  laevis. 

Heleopera  petricola. 

Nebela  vas. 

Phryganella  hemisphaerica. 

Quadrula  irregularis. 

Trinema  lineare. 


RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE 


217 


2.  Oahu,  Hawaii 

Recolte  de  J.  Murray,  aux  environs  d'Honolulu,  dans  une  vallde  ou  le  "  bush " 
devint  rapidement  impraticable  a  cause  de  la  densite  de  la  vegetation,  les 
fougeres  (Pteris)  couvrant  si  bien  le  sol  que  la  marche  s'efFectuait  h,  un  ou 
deux  yards  au-dessus  du  sol.  Mai  1909 

(a)  Belles  mousses,  1'une  d'elles  tres-claire,  longue  et  soyeuse. 

(b)  Sediment  dans  la  formaline. 


Amoeba  terricola. 
Assulina  seminulum. 
Bullinula  indica. 
Centropyxis  aculeata. 
Corycia  flava. 
Corythion  dubium. 
Cyphoderia  ampulla. 
Difflugia  arcula. 

„         constricta. 
Diplochlamys  gruberi. 
timida. 


Euglypba  ciliata. 
,,          compressa. 
„          laevis. 
Heleopera  sylvatica. 
Nebela  collaris. 

„        lageniformis. 

„       militaris. 

„        minor. 

Phryganella  hemisphaerica. 
Sphenoderia  dentata. 
Trinema  enchelys. 


E.  COLOMBIE  BEITANNIQUE  ET  CANADA 


1.    Victoria,  B.C. 

Rdcolte  de  J.  Murray,  parmi  les  plantes  du  rivage  (Sedum,  &c.),  puis 
dans  un  petit  bois,  non  loin  du  rivage  dgalement.     Juin   1909 


Amoeba  terricola. 
Arcella  arenaria. 
Assulina  muscorum. 
Bullinula  indica. 
Corytbion  dubium. 
Difflugia  constricta. 
Euglypha  ciliata. 


Euglypba  laevis. 

„          strigosa. 
Nebela  bigibbosa. 

„       caudata. 

Phryganella  hemispbaerica. 
Plagiopyxis  labiata. 
Trinema  enchelys. 


218 


E.  PENARD 


1*.    Vancouver,  B.C. 
Recolte  de  J.  Murray,   Stanley  Park.     Juin   1909 

(a)  Mousses,  avec  une  touffe  de  sphagnum. 
(1)  Sediment  dans  la  formaline. 


Arcella  arenaria. 
Assulina  muscorum. 

,,  seminulum. 
Centropyxis  aculeata. 
Corycia  flava. 

„      penardi. 
Cyphoderia  ampulla. 
Difflugia  arcula. 

„         bacillifera. 

„        constricta. 

„        lucida. 

„         pyriforrnis,  var.  bryophila. 
Diplochlamys  vestita. 
Euglypha  alveolata. 

„          brachiata. 

„          ciliata. 

„          compressa. 

„          strigosa. 
Heleopera  petricola. 
sordida. 


Lesquereusia 

Lieberkiihnia  wageneri. 
Nebela  bigibbosa. 

caudata. 
„        collaris. 
„        dentistoma. 
„        flabelluliiii). 
„        lageniformis. 
„        tincta. 
„       tubulosa. 

vas. 

Phryganella  hemisphaerica. 
Placocysta  jurassica. 

„          spinosa. 
Plagiopyxis  callida. 
Pontigulasia  bryophila. 
Quadrula  symmetrica. 
Trinema  complanatum. 
lineare. 


2.  Monts  Selkirk,  B.C.,  et  Montagues  Rocheuses,  Canada 

Recoltes  de  J.  Murray,  a  des  altitudes  de  3000  a  6000  pieds,  aupres  des  diverses 
stations  de  la  ligne  ou  le  train  s'arretait  plus  de  5  minutes  de  temps.     Juin  1909 

(a)  Mousses  diverses. 

(&)  Sediment  dans  la  formaline. 


Amoeba  sphaeronucleolus. 

„       terricola. 
Arcella  arenaria. 
Bullinula  indica. 
Corycia  flava. 
Difllugia  arcula. 

constricta. 


Euglypha  ciliata. 

„          compressa. 
Nebela  collaris. 

„        lageniformis. 
Phryganella  hemisphaerica. 
Plagiopyxis  callida. 


RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE 


219 


3.  Province  d' Ontario,  Canada 
+  Lake  of  the  W^oods 

Re"colte  de  J.  Murray,  dans  le  fourre,  au  bord  du  lac,  pendant 
un  arr6t  du  train.     Juin   1909 


(a)  Mousses  diverses. 

(&)  Sediment  dans  la  formaline. 


Amoeba  sphaeronucleolus. 

„        terricola. 
Arcella  arenaria. 
Assulina  muscoruin. 

„        seminulum. 
Bullinula  indica. 
Corythion  dubium. 
Difflugia  constricta. 


Euglypha  ciliata. 
„         compressa. 
„         laevis. 
Nebela  lageniformis. 

„        tincta. 

Phryganella  hemisphaerica. 
Trinema  enchelys. 
lineare. 


H 


Ottawa 


Recolte  de  J.  Murray,  dans  le  "  Public  Park,"  et  tout  aupres 
sur  le  bord  du  chemin.     Juin   1909 

(a)  Mousses  seches. 

(b)  Sediment  dans  la  formaline. 


Amoeba  terricola. 
Arcella  arenaria. 
Awerinzewia  cyclostoma. 
Corycia  flava. 

„       penardi. 
Difflugia  constricta, 

„         lucida. 
Diplochlamys  fragilis. 


Diplochlamys  timida. 
Euglypha  ciliata. 
„          laevis. 
Nebela  minor. 
Parmulina  cyathus. 
Phryganella  hemisphaerica. 
Trinema  complanatum. 
lineare. 


BEIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.  1907-9.     VOL,  I. 


E.  PENARD 


RECAPITULATION 


ANTARCTIQUE 

PACI- 

FIQUE 
SUD 

NLL"  ZELANDE 

AUSTRALIE 

PACI- 

FIQUE 

COLOMBIE 
ET 

CANADA 

ILE  MACQUARIE 

ILES  AUCKLANDS 

ILE  STEWART 

T3 

02 

3 
T3 
IB 

t—  I 

M 

o 
o 

a 

f4 

i~^ 

<! 

Tg 

o 
K 

s 
•n 

a) 
Fn 

•4 
& 

M 
•4 

H 
•j 

5 
f£ 

NGAURUHOE,  He  du  Nord 

"2 

o 

& 

a 
~a 

£ 

KH 

•f 
& 

« 

i 

o 

M 

K 

E 

a 
f 

cc 

ALPES  AUSTRALIENNES 

KATOOMBA 

EUMUNDI,  Queensland 

S 

•< 

> 

b 

02 

1 

W 

tT 
a 
•t 
O 

VICTORIA  ET  VANCOUVER 

MTS  SELKIRK,  MKS  ROCHEUSES 

ONTARIO 

Amoeba  muralis           .... 

„       sphaeronucleolus     . 
„       terricola          .... 
Amphitrema  stenostoma 
Ainphizonella  violacea 
Arcella  arenaria           .... 
„      vulgaris  ..... 
Assuliua  muscorum      .... 
„        seminulum     .... 
Aweriuzewia  cyelostoma 
Bullinula  indica           .... 
Centropyxis  aculeata  .... 
,,           delicatula 
,,           horrida    .... 
„           laevigata 
Corycia  aculeata           .... 
,,       flava       ..... 
„      penardi  ..... 
Corythion  dubiura        .... 
Cyphoderia  ampulla    .... 
Difflugia  areula  ..... 
,,        bacillifera      .... 
,,        constricta      .... 
„        fallax  ..... 
,,        lucida            .... 
,,        mauicata       .... 
,,        pyriformis,  var.  bryophila 
Diplochlamys  fragilis  .... 
„            gruberi  . 
,,            timida  .... 
,,            vestita  .... 
Euglypha  alveolata      .... 
„        brachiata     .... 
„        ciliata          .... 
,,        compressa    .... 
,,        ciistata        .... 
„         filifera          .... 
,,        laevis  ..... 
„        strigosa        .... 

1 

4- 

4- 

+ 
+ 

+ 

—  • 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 
4- 

4- 
4- 

+ 

+ 

+ 

4- 
4- 

4- 
4- 

+ 

+ 

+ 
+ 

4- 

+ 
+ 

— 

— 

4- 

— 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

+ 



— 

4- 

4- 

4- 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

4- 
4- 

4- 
4- 

— 

+ 
4- 

4- 

4- 
4- 

4- 



+ 

4- 

4- 

— 

4- 
4- 
4- 

4- 

4- 

+ 

+ 

| 

4- 
+ 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 
4- 
4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 
4- 

4- 

— 

— 

— 

— 

'      _j_ 

4- 

— 

— 

4- 

— 

— 

— 

— 

4- 

+ 

+ 



4- 

-t- 
+ 

+ 

4- 

— 

4- 
4- 

4- 

+ 

4- 
4- 

4- 
4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 
4- 
4- 

4- 

4- 
+ 
4- 
4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 
4- 

4- 

— 

4- 

4- 

4- 

+ 

4- 

4- 

— 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

+ 

+ 

+ 

4- 

+ 
4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 
4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4-  . 
4- 

4- 

f 

4- 

4- 

4- 
4- 

— 

— 

— 

4- 

+    • 

—    4- 

— 

— 

— 

4- 

4- 

4-     + 

4- 

— 

4- 

+ 

4- 

4, 

— 

+ 

4- 

4- 
+ 

4- 

4- 

+ 

4- 

4- 

4- 
4- 

4- 
4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 
4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 
4- 

4- 
4- 

4- 
4- 

4- 
4- 

4- 

+ 

— 

+ 

4- 

4- 

— 

— 

4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 
4- 

+     4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 

i 

i 

RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE 


RECAPITULATION  (suite) 


ANTARCTIQUE 

PACI- 

FIQUE 
SUD 

NMJ!  ZELANDE 

AUSTKALIE 

PACI- 

FIQUE 

OOLOMBIE 

ET 

CANADA 

ILE  MACQUARIE 

ILES  AUCKLANDS 

ILE  STEWART 

T3 

EC 

TS 
,2 
H 

M" 

8 
o 

H 
3 

3 
& 

•o 

9 

—  H 
«f 

& 

P5 
-i 

H 

jj 

^ 

NGAURUHOE,  He  du  Nord 

13 
t-t 
0 

K 

ff 
T3 

a 

HH 
•< 

I 

O 
H 
O 

PH 

SYDNEY 

ALPES  AUSTHALIENNES 

->! 
« 

S3 

<t 

M 

EUMUNDI,  Queensland 

5? 

4 

> 

o 

m 

:3 

r£ 

<s 

w 

cT 
i 

<i 
0 

VICTORIA  ET  VANCOUVEK 

MTS  SELKIRK,  MKS  ROCHEUSES 

ONTARIO 

Heleopera  petricola      .... 
„        sordida         .... 
„        sphagni        .... 
,,         sylvatica 
Hyalospheuia  cockayni 
,,           subflava 
Lesquereusia       ..... 
Lieberkiihnia  wageneri 
Nebela  bigibbosa         .... 
„      caudata  ..... 

+ 

4- 

— 

— 

+ 

— 

— 



+ 

+ 

— 

— 

+ 

— 

+ 

— 

— 

— 

+ 
+ 

+ 

+ 

4- 

4- 



+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

— 

+ 

— 

— 

i 

— 

+ 

— 

— 



— 

4- 

— 

_l_ 

+ 

-I- 

+ 

— 

— 

+ 

— 

— 

„      collaris    ..... 
,,      dentistoma       .... 
„      flabelluluin       .... 
,,      griseola  ..... 
„       lageniformis     .... 
„      longicollis        .... 
„      martial!  ..... 
,,      militaris           .... 
„       minor      . 
,,      tincta      ..... 
„      tubulosa           .... 
„       vas          
Pannnlina  cyathu.s      .... 
Phryganella  hemisphaerica  . 
,,           nidulus    .... 
Placocysta  jurassica     .... 
,,         spinosa       .... 
Plagiopyxi.s  callida      .... 

+ 

— 

— 

+ 

4- 

4- 



+ 



i 

+ 

— 

+ 

4 

4- 

— 

— 

-4- 
4- 

— 

4- 

4- 
4- 

4- 

4- 

4- 
4- 

4- 

4- 
4- 

+ 
+ 

+ 
+ 

+ 

+ 

— 

+ 

_L 

+ 

4- 

4- 

+ 

+ 

+ 
+ 

4- 

4- 

— 

— 

4- 

•  — 

+ 

4- 

— 

— 

+ 

— 

+ 

— 

— 

—  _ 

+ 

4- 

— 

— 

4- 

4- 

4- 

— 

4- 

+ 

+ 

— 

+ 

— 

4- 
4- 

— 

4 

— 

+ 

+ 

_i_ 

4- 

4- 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

4- 

4- 

— 

— 

— 

+ 

4- 

— 

— 

+ 
4- 

+ 
+ 

+ 

+ 

— 

— 

+ 
4- 

4- 

— 

Pontigulasia  bryophila 
„           compressa 
Quadrula  irregularis    .... 
„        symmetrica  .... 
Sphcnoderia  dentata    .... 
„           fissirostris 
Trinema  complanatum 
„       enchelys        .... 
„       lineare  ..... 
Acanthocystis      ..... 

4- 

— 

— 

— 

+ 

4- 

4. 

+ 

j_ 

4- 
4- 

+ 

— 

+ 

+ 

+ 

4- 

4- 

E 

4- 
4- 

+ 
+ 

+ 
+ 

+ 

+ 
+ 

+ 

+ 

4- 
4- 
4- 

— 

4- 
4- 
4- 

222  E.  PENARD 

CONSIDERATIONS    GENERALES   SUR   LES   ESPECES   RENCONTREES 

Amoeba  muralis.     PENARD 
Arch,  ftir  Protistenkunde,  B'1  17,  p.  267.      1909 

Cette  amibe,  de  faible  taille,  et  peu  apparente  en  elle-meme,  a  dfi  probablement 
se  trouver  dans  plusieurs  des  re'coltes ;  mais  ce  n'est  qu'a  1'etat  vivant  et  actif  qu'on 
pent  esperer  pouvoir  la  reconnaitre.  Dans  la  mousse  du  Pare  National,  &  Sydney, 
il  s'en  est  rencontre  un  individu,  bien  vivant,  qui  par  ses  principaux  caracteres, 
plasma  tres-dense,  opalescent  sur  les  bords,  prolongements  pseudopodiques  tres-courts 
rayonnant  sur  les  cote's,  noyaux  tres-petits  et  nombreux,  repondait  bien  a  ce  que 
nous  savons  de  cette  espece.  Les  noyaux,  pourtant,  montraient  une  structure  un 
peu  speciale ;  au  lieu  du  nucleole  central  et  unique  d^crit  dans  le  type,  on  en 
trouvait  plusieurs,  repartis  sans  ordre  dans  un  sue  nucleaire  tres-compact. 

Amoeba  radiosa.     EHRENBERG 

Abh.  K.  Akad.,  Berlin,  p.  39.      1830 
Podostoma  filigerum.     CLAP.  ET  LACHM.     Mem.  Inst.  Nat.  Genevois,  vol.  6,  p.  441.      1859 

Cette  amibe  n'est  apparue  qu'une  seule  fois,  dans  les  mousses  recoltees  aux 
environs  de  Sydney.  Elle  y  etait  represented  par  cette  forme  tres-petite,  a  pseudo- 
podes  droits  et  tres-fins,  d'une  longueur  extraordinaire,  pour  laquelle  Claparede  et 
Lachmann  ont  cree  le  nom  de  Podostoma  Jiligerum,  mais  que  1'on  s'accorde  en 
general  aujourd'hui  a  regarder  comme  une  simple  variete"  de  A.  radiosa. 

II  n'en  a  e"te  trouve  qu'un  seul  individu,  mais  typique,  vivant,  actif  et  largement 
ddploye.  Peut-etre  serait-on  en  droit  de  supposer  que  cette  amibe  se  trouvait  la 
en  qualite"  d'etrangere,  apportde  avec  1'eau  dans  laquelle  la  recolte  avait  ete  lavee. 
Je  crois  la  chose  a  peine  vraisemblable  ;  mais  le  fait  est  possible  pourtant. 

C'est  ici  du  reste,  pour  le  dire  en  passant,  la  seule  fois  que  je  croie  devoir 
indiquer  comme  douteuse  la  provenance  des  organismes  qui  font  1'objet  de  ce 
mdmoire. 

Amoeba  sphaeronucleolus.     GREEFF 
Biolog.  Centralbl',  Bd  11,  p.  639.      1891 

Les  Amoebiens  nus  ne  sont  guere  determinables  autrement  que  sur  le  vivant ; 
mais  il  faut  faire  une  exception  pour  les  amibes  terrestres,  ou  "  pelliculeuses,"  qui, 
dejk  mortes  ou  a  I'e'tat  de  vie  latente,  plissees,  informes,  montrent  cependant  encore 
d'une  maniere  tres-nette  les  caracteres  distinctifs  du  groupe  special  auquel  elles  se 


RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE  223 

rattachent.  Mais  quant  aux  caracteres  de  V  espece,  ils  restent  beaucoup  moins 
distincts,  et  dans  les  diverses  recoltes  ou  se  sont  trouvdes  des  amibes  a  pellicule, 
j'ai  dii  me  contenter,  pour  la  diagnose  "  sphaeronucleolus,"  de  constater  les  signes 
distinctifs  suivants :  taille  faible,  noyau  unique  et  arrondi. 

Dans  les  mousses  des  Montagues  Rocheuses,  les  individus  se  sont  parfois 
montres  vivants,  mais  jamais  actifs ;  ils  etaient  enkystes,  on  plutot,  ils  revetaient 
1'etat  special  qui  dans  ce  groupe  represente  1'errkystement ;  plasma  retracte,  arrondi, 
sous  la  protection  de  la  membrane  propre  ou  pellicule  caracteristique,  qui,  en  fait, 
a  la  valeur  d'une  enveloppe  veritable. 


Amoeba  terricola.     GEEEFF 
Arch,  fur  Mikrosk.  Anat.,  B'1  2,  p.  300.      1866 

Beaucoup  plus  nettement  reconnaissable  que  la  precedente,  1'Amoeba  terricola 
s'est  rencontree  dans  un  grand  nombre  de  stations,  souvent  morte,  ou  bien  aussi  sous 
cette  forme  retractee  qui  dans  cette  espece  represente  1'enkystement ;  plus  rarement 
elle  etait  vivante  (Montagues  Rocheuses,  Victoria),  mais  alors,  malades  en  apparence, 
les  animaux  n'ont  jamais  montre  les  signes  d'un  reveil  certain. 

Dans  un  individu,qui  semblait  vouloir  sortir  de  son  e"tat  de  repos  et  montrait 
deja  quelques  petites  vesicules  contractiles,  le  noyau  renfermait,  dissdmines  parmi 
les  nucleoles  caracteristiques,  un  certain  nombre  de  grains  d'excretion  brillants.  C'est 
la  un  fait  que  j'avais  constate  quelquefois  deja,  a  Geneve,  sur  des  individus  qui 
avaient  e"te  soumis  a  un  jeune  prolong^.1 


Amphitrema  stenostoma.     NUSSLIN 
Zeitsch.  fur  Wiss.  Zool.,  Bd  40,  p.  717.      1884 

Cette  espece,  caracte"ristique  des  tourbieres  a  sphagnum,  est  assez  rare  en  general ; 
mais  quand  on  la  rencontre,  c'est  presque  toujours  en  grandes  quantites.  Tel  etait  bien 
le  cas  a  Katoomba,  oil  ce  rhizopode  ne  s'est  montre  que  dans  une  petite  touffe  de 
sphagnum  jointe  aux  mousse  ordinaires.  Les  individus  etaient  nombreux,  encore 
verts  et  pourvus  des  zoochlorelles  caracteristiques  de  cette  espece,  morts  cependant,  ou 
peut-etre  seulement  enkystes.  Aucun  d'eux,  en  tout  cas,  n'est  revenu  a  la  vie  active.2 

1  Je  crois  avoir  aussi,  a  deux  reprises,  rencontre  Amoeba  alba,  qui  se  distingue  de  la  precedente  par  sa 
forte  taille  et  par  la  presence  de  noyaux  tres  petits  et  en  nombre  considerable.     Mais  il  ne  m'a  pas  ete  possible 
d'arriver  a  des  conclusions  certaines. 

2  Pendant  les  quelques  semaines  qu'a  dur6  mon  examen  de  ces  recoltes,  il  a  fait  tres-chaud,  et  les 
rhizopodes,  ou  bien  revenaient  a  la  vie  dans  les  quarante-huit  heures,  ou  bien  n'y  revenaient  pas  du  tout. 
De  plus,  ceux-la  meme  qui  reprenaient  vie  mouraient  tres-rapidement.     A  cette  regie,  il  y  a  eu  cependant  des 
exceptions. 


E.  PENARD 

Amphizonella  violacea.     GEEEFF 
Arch,  fur  Mikr.  Anat.,  Ba  2,  p.  323.      1866 

Cette  espece  s'est  montree  dans  trois  stations,  au  Mont  Cook,  dans  les  Alpes 
australiennes,  a  Katoomba.  Les  individus,  partout  rares,  etaient  morts,  reconnaissables 
pourtant  a  des  traits  certains ;  mais  pales,  jaunatres,  et  presque  entierement  de"pourvus 
de  la  teinte  violette  qui  caracttSrise  cet  organisme. 


Arcella  arenaria.     GREEFF 
Arch,  fiir  Mikr.  Anat.,  B'1  2,  p.  330.      1866 

» 

C'est  la  un  des  rhizopodes  les  plus  caracteristiques  des  mousses,  dans  lesquelles 
il  est  bien  rare  de  ne  pas  le  trouver.  II  manque  pourtant.  dans  quelques-unes  des 
recoltes ;  peut-etre  y  existe-t-il  en  fait,  et  a-t-il  passe"  inapercu ;  mais  eh  tout  cas, 
il  y  serait  fort  rare,  car,  lors  de  la  confection  de  mon  tableau  general,  etonn^  de  ne 
pas  avoir  a  1'indiquer,  j'ai  tenu  a  contr61er  le  fait  en  examinant  ce  qui  me  restait 
de  mousses,  mais  sans  rien  trouver  de  nouveau. 

Presque  partout  ce  rhizopode  se  trouvait  a  1'etat  de  coquilles  vides.  Dans  les 
Alpes  australiennes,  beaucoup  d'individus  vivaient,  mais  aucun  n'a  deploye  de  pseudo- 
podes.  A  I'lle  Macquarie,  cette  espece  se  trouvait  represented  par  une  variete  plus 
claire  et  plus  grande  que  le  type  habituel. 


Arcella  vulgaris.     EIIRENBERG 
Abh.  Kais.  Akad.  Wiss.,  Berlin,  p.  40.      1830 

Cette  espece  n'habite  pas  les  mousses,  ou  elle  est  normalement  remplact'e  par 
1'Arcella  arenaria.  Aussi  bien  n'est-ce  pas  dans  les  mousses  qu'elle  a  etc  recontree, 
mais  dans  un  paquet  de  Conferves  prises  dans  un  marecage,  et  qui  se  trouvaient 
jointes  aux  mousses  de  la  meme  station  (He  Macquarie). 

L 'Arcella  vulgaris  est  connue  par  un  grand  nombre  de  varietes ;  a  1'ile  Mac- 
quarie, c'etait  une  petite  forme,  de  75  p.  de  diametre,  dont  1'enveloppe,  tres-claire, 
couverte  de  dessins  alveolaires  bien  nets  et  reguliers,  dtait  relativement  peu  rennee, 
se  rapprocbant  par  la  de  V Arcella  discoides,  qui,  elle  aussi,  fait  le  desespoir  des 
naturalistes  par  ses  nombreuses  varietes. 

Les  individus,  qui  se  trouvaient  la  en  grand  nombre,  etaient  toujours  a,  1'etat 
de  coquilles  vides. 


RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE  225 

Assulina  muscorum.     GREKFF 
Sitzungsber.,  Marburg,  p.  117.      1888 

Cette  petite  espece,  caracteristique  avant  tout  des  mousses,  oil  elle  ne  manque 
presque  jamais,  s'est  en  effet  rencontree  un  peu  partout  dans  les  recoltes,  presque 
toujours  a  1'etat  de  coquilles  vides  et  souvent  de"colorees. 

Assulina  seminulum.     (EHRENBERG),  LEIDY 

Difflugia  seminulum.      EHRBG.     Monatsberichte  K.  Akad.  Wiss.,  Berlin,  p.  379.      1848 
Assulina  seminulum.     LEIDY.     Freshw.  Rhiz.  N.A.,  p.  225.      1879 

Ce  rhizopode  est  surtout  caracteristique  des  Sphagnum,  mais  on  le  trouve 
aussi,  frequemmeut,  dans  les  mousses  belles  et  bien  fournies  des  for6ts.  Sa  taille 
normale  est,  le  plus  souvent,  de  80  n  environ,  mais  il  arrive  a  de"passer  quelquefois  de 
beaucoup  cette  mesure.  A  Ngauruhoe,  par  exemple,  c'etait  une  grande  forme,  d'un 
brun-rouge  vif,  et  qui  mesurait  jusqu'h,  115  /u  en  longueur;  tl  Vancouver,  dans  les 
mousses,  la  forme  et  la  taille  etaient  normales,  mais  dans  les  Sphagnum,  on  y  trouvait 
cette  belle  et  grande  varidte  discoide,  de  110  ^  115  /",  et  a  dessins  particulierement 
bien  marques,  que  dans  le  temps  j'avais  cru  devoir  considerer  comme  une  espece 
speciale  (^4.  scandinavica). 

Aiverinzewia  cyclostoma.     (PENARD),  SCIIOUTEDEN 

Hdeopera  cyclostoma.     PENARD.     Faune  Rhizopodique  Leman,  p.  390.      1902 
Awerinzewia  cyclostoma.     SCHOUTEDEN.     Ann.  biol.  lacustre,  t.  i.  p.  357.      1906 

Quelques  individus  seulement,  a  1'dtat  de  coquilles  vides,  revetues  encore  de  leur 
teinte  caracteristique  d'un  violet  noiratre,  se  sont  montres  dans  la  rdcolte  de  Ottawa. 

Bullinula  indica.     PENARD  (emend) 
Bulinella  indica.      PENARD.     Journ.  R.  Micr.  Soc.,  p.  274.      1907 

La  premiere  mention  de  ce  Rhizopode,  Fun  des  plus  interessants  parmi  ceux  des 
mousses,  et  le  prototype  de  tout  un  groupe  special  voisin  du  genre  Diplochlamys,  ne 
date  que  de  trois  annees  a  peine,  et  son  histoire  est  assez  curieuse  en  elle-meme. 

Trouv(5  en  1906  par  J.  Murray,  dans  des  mousses  qui  provenaient  de  1'Himalaya, 
puis  de'crit  par  moi-meme  en  1907,  sur  la  demande  de  Mr.  Murray,  ce  rhizopode  sem- 
blait  devoir  rester  tres-rare ;  mais  a  peine  1'espece  venait-elle  d'etre  publiee,  que 
Mr.  Murray  la  retrouvait  dans  les  Sphagnum  de  1'Ecosse,  puis  dans  des  mousses  venant 


226  E.  PENARD 

de  1'Ouganda.  En  1909,  je  la  re*coltais  enfin  moi-meme,  en  grande  abondance,  dans 
une  tourbiere  du  Jura  suisse  (La  Pile),  et  alors  dans  un  etat  de  vie  et  de  fraicheur 
qui  me  permettait  d'en  faire  une  etude  biologique  qui  n'avait  pas  6t6  possible 
jusque  la.1 

Au  retour  de  1'Antarctique,  Mr.  Murray  a  re"colte  cette  espece  dans  toutes  les 
localites  visite"es ;  elle  ne  manque,  en  fait,  qu'aux  lies  Auckland,  lesquelles  d'ailleurs 
n'etaient  representees  dans  les  recoltes  que  par  quelques  fragments  d'ecorce  revetus  d'une 
mousse  rase. 

Partout  la  Bullinula  revetait  son  apparence  caracteristique,  mais  cependant  elle  se 
montrait  quelque  peu  differente  suivant  la  nature  des  particules  (paillettes  siliceuses 
plus  ou  moins  nombreuses,  petits  grains  de  quartz,  fibres  de  mousses,  diatomees)  qui 
recouvraient  1'enveloppe,  comme  aussi  sous  le  rapport  de  la  taille,  qui  dans  cette  espece 
varie  dans  une  mesure  assez  forte. 

Mais  a  cet  dgard,  il  est  un  detail  sur  lequel  il  me  faut  insister  un  instant,  et  sur 
lequel  Mr.  Murray,  en  1909,  et  a  propos  des  mousses  de  1'Ouganda,  attirait  deja  mon 
attention :  A  cote  de  la  forme  normale,  grande  et  relativement  allongee,  ellipsoidale,  de 
190  a  200  M  en  ge'ne'ral,  et  qui  arrive  jusqu'a  250  M  dans  des  cas  exceptionnels,  on  en 
trouve  parfois  une  autre,  presque  ou  meme  quelquefois  tout-a-fait  ronde,  et  beaucoup 
plus  petite,  de  130  a  170  p.  de  diametre  (Fig.  1). 

C'est  bien  la  e"galement  ce  que  montraient  les  recoltes  qui  font  1'objet  du  memoire 
actuel ;  la  petite  forme  ronde  s'est  retrouvee  dans  une  grande  partie  des  collections ; 
a  Katoomba,  a  Kotorua,  a  Oahu,  a  1'ile  Macquarie,  elle  etait  seule,  et  la  grande 
forme  manquait;  a  1'ile  Stewart,  dans  les  Alpes  australiennes,  a  Sydney,  les  deux 
formes  se  trouvaient  melangees ;  au  Queensland,  &  Ngauruhoe,  a  Victoria,  dans  les 
Montagues  Rocheuses,  seule  la  grande  forme  etait  representee. 

II  faut  voir,  semble-t-il,  dans  cette  petite  forme  ronde  une  variete  speciale ;  mais 
entre  cette  variete  et  le  type,  on  trouve,  dans  les  stations  ou  elles  vivent  ensemble, 
les  transitions  les  plus  diverses,  de  sorte  qu'on  peut  se  demander  s'il  n'y  aurait  pas 
la  une  espece  unique,  mais  assez  variable,  et  qui  tendrait  a  se  fixer  sous  deux 
formes  extremes. 

La  premiere  description  de  ce  Rhizopode  date  de  Juin  1907;  mais  d'apres  ce 
que  Mr.  Murray  m'apprend  aujourd'hui,  il  parait  que  ce  nom  de  Bullinella  a  ete  deja 
applique  a  un  genre  de  mollusques. 

II  faut  done  nous  hater,  pendant  que  cet  organisme  reste  encore  peu  connu, 
d'apporter  la  rectification  necessaire ;  et  peut-etre  la  denomination  generique  de 
BULLINULA  au  lieu  de  Bulinella  suffira-t-elle  pour  contenter  les  zoologistes. 

1  Cette  eiude  fera  1'objet  d'un  chapitre  dans  un  des  prochains  numoros  de  la  Revue  Suisse  de  Zoologie 
(Notes  sur  quelques  SarcodinOs,  3°  partie,  vol.  19,  1911). 


RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE  227 

Centropyxis  acaleata.     STEIN 
Sitzungsber.  Bohm.  Akad.  Wiss.,  B'1  10,  p.  43.      1857 

Cette  espece  est  toujours  rare  dans  les  mousses,  et  il  u'en  a  ete  trouve  que 
quelques  exemplaires  dans  quelques-unes  des  collections.  A  Vancouver  (Sphagnum] 
elle  etait  representee  par  cette  petite  forme  trcs-plate,  claire,  transparente  et  mem- 
braneuse,  dont  CASH  a  fait  une  variete  speciale,  var.  s-pinosa  (British  Freshw.  Rhizop., 
Vol.  I.  p.  135,  1905).  A  Oahu,  c'etait  egalement  une  petite  forme,  tres-rapprochee 
de  la  m6me  varie'te'. 


Centropyxis  delicatula.     PENARD 
Faune  Rhizopodique  Leman,  p.  308.      1902 

Quelques  exemplaires   seulement,  a  1'etat  de  coquilles  vides,  an  Queensland    et 
a  Fiji. 


Centropyxis  horrida,  spec,  nova 
Fig.  2,  a  et  b 

En  meme  temps  qu'il  m'envoyait  ses  re"coltes,  Mr.  Murray  attirait  mon  attention 
sur  une  Centropyxis  de  1'ile  Stewart,  qui  lui  paraissait  nouvelle,  et  qui  en  efFet  me 
semble  certainement  devoir  etre  decrite  comme  une  espece  a  part. 

L'enveloppe  elle-meme,  dans  son  ensemble,  n'a  rien  qui  doive  la  faire  distinguer 
de  la  Cent,  aculeata,  connue  d'ailleurs  par  de  nombreuses  varietes.  Aplatie  sur  son 
axe  dorso-ventral,  et  plus  fortement  a  sa  partie  anterieure  ou  se  trouve  1'ouverture 
buccale  excentrique  et  infere,  elle  est  jaunatre,  formde  d'une  chitine  relativement 
tres-claire  dans  laquelle  sont  empatees  des  paillettes  siliceuses,  minces,  tres  peu 
distinctes,  puis  souvent  aussi  des  particules  de  nature  organique,  et  des  filaments 
brunatres  arraches  aux  mousses. 

Mais  ce  qui  distingue  cette  forme  de  toutes  les  autres  du  meme  genre,  c'est 
1'existence,  non  pas  de  cornes  veritables,  mais  d'une  sorte  d'aile  ou  de  carene,  plate, 
dechiquetee,  creusee  de  lacunes  que  parfois  viennent  combler  des  fragments  siliceux, 
et  qui  borde  toute  la  peripherie  de  1'enveloppe,  a  1'exception  toutefois  de  la  partie 
anterieure,  qui  reste  lisse  aux  environs  de  la  bouche. 

De  distance  en  distance,  alors,  cette  carene  lamellaire  est  munie  de  prolongements, 
tantot  arrondis  a  leur  sommet,  sinueux,  lobes,  capricieux  dans  leur  forme,  tantot  (et 

BRIT.  ANTAIICT.  EXPED.   1907-9.     VOL.  I.  D 


228  E.  PENARD 

le  plus  souvent)  etires  en  longues  Opines  acerees,  droites  ou  recourbees ;  plus  rarement 
enfin,  les  Opines  sont  remplacees  par  de  simples  expansions  anguleuses  (Fig.  2b). 

Toute  cette  structure  donne  1'impression  d'une  exsudation,  qui  se  serait  figee 
apres  avoir  coule ;  il  semble  que  la  coquille  a  etc  collee  a  quelque  chose,  aux  feuilles 
des  mousses,  d'ou  la  pluie  ne  pourrait  alors  plus  la  detacher ;  et  peut-etre  cette 
impression  premiere  correspond-elle  a  la  realite ;  ce  qui  contribuerait  a  le  faire  croire, 
c'est  que  les  longues  epines  laterales,  au  lieu  d'etre  normalernent  dirigees  par  leur 
pointe  vers  la  partie  posterieure  de  la  coquille,  comme  c'est  le  cas  dans  les  autres 
Centropyxis  et  dans  les  Khizopodes  en  general,  montrent  des  directions  qnelconques, 
et  mSme  semblent  se  recourber  de  preference  vers  1'avant ;  c'est  la  en  tout  cas  un 
fait  anormal,  pen  en  rapport  avec  les  besoins  de  I'animal  a  1'etat  actif. 

La  Centropyxis  horrida  dtait  abondante  a  1'ile  Stewart.  La  seule  station  ou 
elle  se  soit  retrouve"e  a  e"te  Katoomba,  dans  les  Montagues  bleues,  ou  trois  individus 
seulement  se  sont  montres. 


Centropyxis  laevigata.     PENARD 
Faune  Rhizopodique  Leiuan,  p.  306.      1902 

Cette  espece  est  rare ;  il  n'en  a  ete  vu  qu'un  nombre  tres-restreint  d'individus, 
a  Rotorua,  a  Ngauruhoe,  et  a  Katoomba. 

Corycia  aculeata.     GREEFF 
Pseudochlamys  aculeata.     GREEFF.     Sitzungsber.,  Marburg,  p.  332.      1888 

Deux   exemplaires    seulement,    nettement   reconnaissables,    a    dents    relativement 
courtes,  ont  ete  trouves  a  1'ile  de  Suva,  Fiji. 


Corycia  flava.     GREEFF 
Amphizonella  flava.     GREEFF.     Arch.  f.  Mikr.  Anat.,  Bd  2,  p.  329.      1866 

Cette  espece,  en  general  commune,  surtout  sur  les  vieux  murs  ou  dans  les  mousses 
rases  qui  garnissent  les  troncs  des  arbres,  s'est  rencontree  dans  un  grand  nombre  de 
stations,  toujours  typique  dans  ses  caracteres,  mais  assez  variable  de  taille  suivant  les 
localites.  Dans  cette  espece,  1'enveloppe  mesure  de  80  a  100  M  en  general;  mais  a 
Katoomba,  elle  arrivait  a  145  M,  et  jusqu'a  150  M  dans  les  Montagnes  Rocheuses. 

Partout  les  animaux  ^taient  vivants,  mais  aucun  d'eux  n'a  montre  de  pseudopodes ; 
dans  le  genre  Corycia,  d'ailleurs,  on  ne  les  voit  presque  jamais. 


RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE  229 

Corycia  penardi.     PENARD,  AWERINZEW 

Cor.  Coronata,  var.  simplex.     PENARD.      Faune  Rhizop.  Leman,  p.  179.      1902 
Cor.  Penardi.     AWERINZEW.     Trudui  Petersb.  Ob.,  torn.  36,  p.  143.      1906 

Cette  espece,  pen  commune  en  general,  ne  s'est  montree  que  dans  pen  de  stations, 
et  toujours  represented  par  quelques  individus  settlement,  3  a  Vancouver,  1  a  Suva, 
1  au  Mont  Cook.  A  Ottawa,  elle  etait  pourtant  moins  rare. 

Corythion  dubium.     TARAKEK 
Abhand.  Kon.  Bohm.  Gesellschaft  (6),  B'1  2.      1882 

Ce  petit  Rhizopode  n'est  pas  rare  en  general  dans  les  mousses  et  les  Sphagnum ; 
mais  on  ne  le  reconnait  que  dimcilement,  par  suite  de  sa  ressemblance  presque  parfaite 
avec  une  vari^te  bryophile  de  Trinema  enchelys.  Dans  le  Corythion,  la  coquille  est 
formee  d'ecailles  toutes  petites,  de  3  a  4  /*  seulement  de  longueur,  elliptiques  ou 
vaguement  rectangulaires  avec  angles  arrondis,  et  disposees  sans  beaucoup  d'ordre  les 
unes  a  cote  des  autres ;  dans  le  Trinema,  les  ecailles  sont  beaucoup  plus  grandes, 
rondes,  et  imbriquees  dans  un  ordre  g^ometriquement  regulier ;  mais  comme,  dans 
ces  deux  formes,  les  elements  siliceux  ne  sont  que  tres-difficilement  visibles  un  a  un, 
la  distinction  n'est  pas  toujours  aise"e. 

A  1'lle  Macquarie,  comme  aussi  au  Mont  Cook,  cette  espece  revetait  une  forme 
speciale  (Fig.  3«),  tres-large,  arrondie  en  un  cercle  presque  parfait,  et  la  taille,  de  62 
a  63  M  de  longueur,  etait  de  beaucoup  superieure  a  celle  du  type  habituel,  laquelle  ne 
mesure  guere  que  35  a  40  M. 

A  Ngaurnhoe,  a  1'ile  Stewart,  a  Oahu,  au  Queensland,  on  trouvait  une  variete  plus 
curieuse  encore  (Fig.  3b) ;  1'enveloppe,  de  40  a  50  n  de  longueur,  tres-large,  a  forte 
ouverture  buccale,  se  montrait  revetue  sur  tout  son  pourtour  (sauf  a  la  bouche)  d'une 
rangee  reguliere  d'aiguillons  aceres.  Ces  aiguilles,  du  reste,  n'^taient  pas  siliceuses 
au  meme  titre  que  les  ecailles  de  la  coquille ;  elles  etaient  composees  de  cette  meme 
matiere  chitino'ide,  incolore,  qui  cimente  les  ecailles  entre  elles,  et  se  dissolvaient 
immediatement  dans  1'acide  sulfurique  concentre  bouillant. 

C'est  la,  me  semble-t-il,  une  varie'te  fixee,  et  que  Ton  pourrait  appeler  var. 
spicata. 

Cyphoderia  ampulla.     EHRENBERG 
Monatsberichte  K.  Akad.,  Berlin,  p.  199.      1840 

Cette  espece  n'est  pas  muscicole,  mais  on  la  rencontre  quelquefois  dans  les 
Sphagnum.  Au  Mont  Cook,  il  s'en  est  trouve*  deux  exemplaires,  typiques,  et  a  dessins 


230  E.  PENARD 

ardolaires  relativement  tres-grands,  3  M  environ ;  puis  a  Vancouver,  une  seule  coquille 
vide ;  dans  ces  deux  recoltes,  il  faut  le  remarquer,  il  y  avait  du  Sphagnum.  A  Oahu, 
par  centre,  ou  s'est  egalement  montre'e  une  coquille  vide,  le  sphagnum  manquait ;  mais 
on  y  voyait  de  belles  mousses  bien  fournies,  1'une  d'elles  tres-claire,  longue  et  soyeuse, 
et  dans  ces  conditions-Ik  les  mousses  renferment  quelquefois  des  organismes  sphagno- 
philes  en  general. 


Difflugia  arcula.     LEIDY 
Fresh w.  Rhiz.  N.  America,  p.  116.      1879 

Cette  difflugie,  —  qui  n'est  pas  une  difflugie  en  realite,  mais  un  Rhizopode 
tres-voisin  des  genres  Bullinula  et  Diplochlamys,1 — est  1'une  des  especes  les  plus 
caracteristiques  des  Sphagnum  et  des  mousses,  et  s'est  rencontree  dans  la  plupart  des 
recoltes  de  Mr.  Murray.  Tout  en  restant  toujours  bien  typique  dans  son  apparence 
generale,  elle  varie  passablement,  d'une  localite  a  une  autre  et  souvent  aussi  dans  une 
meme  localite,  sous  le  rapport  de  la  taille,  de  la  hauteur  comparee  a  la  largeur,  des 
elements  qui  recouvrent  1'enveloppe.  Quelquefois  aussi,  dans  une  meme  station,  on 
trouve  deux  formes  1'une  a  cote  de  1'autre,  une  grande  et  une  petite,  que  ne  relie 
aucune  transition.  Tel  a  ete  le  cas  a  Oahu,  a  1'ile  Macquarie,  comme  aussi  an 
Queensland. 

Dans  plusieurs  des  recoltes,  les  animaux  se  sont  montrds  vivauts.  Ce  rhizopode, 
en  effet,  est  done"  d'une  resistance  tout-a-fait  remarquable ;  mais  jamais  aucun  individu 
n'a  ddploye  de  pseudopode.  Le  contraire,  du  reste,  eut  ete"  tres-dtonnant,  car  dans 
cette  espece,  les  pseudopodes,  quelquefois  mentionne's  par  suite  d'une  confusion  avec 
un  autre  organisme  (Centropyxis  laevigata),  n'ont  jamais  ete  vus  en  re"alite,  et  parais- 
sent  decide"ment  manquer. 


Difflugia  bacilli/era.     PENARD 
Me"m.  Soc.  Phys.  Hist.  Nat.,  Geneve,  vol.  31,  p.  146.      1890 

Seulement  trois  coquilles  vides,  a  Vancouver.  Cette  espece  est  tres-rare,  et  peu 
caracteristique ;  peut-6tre  eut-il  mieux  valu,  des  1'origine,  1'envisager  simplement 
comme  une  varie"te"  de  Diff.  pyriformis. 

1  Votr  un  des  prochains  numeros  de  la  Revue  Suisse  de  Zoologie,  tome  19,  1911. 


RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE  231 

Difflugia  constricta.     EHRENBERG 
Abh.  Kon.  Akad.  Wiss.,  Berlin,  p.  410.      1841 

C'est  la  le  rhizopode  le  plus  constant  dans  les  mousses,  et  qui,  en  fait,  s'est 
montre  dans  toutes  les  stations  (il  manque  dans  1'Antarctique  proprement  dit,  ce 
qui  n'est  pas  sans  etonner).  II  est  toujours  et  parfout  represente  par  de  nombreuses 
varietes,  petites  ou  grandes,  longues  ou  larges,  plus  ou  moins  comprime'es,  etc., 
et  tout  cela  s'est  trouve"  dans  les  recoltes  de  Mr.  Murray. 


Difflugia  fallax.     PENARD 
M(kn.  Soc.  Phys.  Hist.  Nat.,  Geneve,  vol.  31,  p.  144.       1890 

Cette  petite  espece  n'a  ete  rencontree  que  dans  les  Alpes  australiennes,  puis  a 
Sydney,  sous  la  forme  de  rares  coquilles  vides.  Elle  est  toujours  difficile  a  deter- 
miner, et  vu  le  mauvais  etat  des  exemplaires  examines,  peut-etre  faudrait-il  ne 
1'indiquer  ici  que  suivie  d'un  point  d'interrogation. 


Difflugia  lucida.     PENARD 
M6m.  Soc.  Phys.  Hist.  Nat.,  Geneve,  vol.  31,  p.  145.      1890 

Ce  rhizopode  est  de  faible  taille,  peu  apparent,  et  passe  facilement  inapercu  ; 
mais  grace  a  sa  forme  special  e  et  a  1'aplatissement  considerable  de  la  coquille,  on 
le  reconnait  facilement.  Dans  la  plupart  des  recoltes,  il  s'est  montre  rare,  repre"- 
sente  par  quelques  coquilles  vides  seulement ;  a  Katoomba,  dans  la  mousse  comme 
aussi  dans  le  sphagnum,  les  exemplaires  en  etaient  plus  nombreux,  et  souvent 
vivants,  mais  alors  enkystds. 


Difflugia  manicata.     PENARD 
Faune  Rhizopodique  Le"man,  p.  226.      1902 

Quelques  individus  seulement,  dans  le  Sphagnum  du  Mont  Cook ;  ovoides,  de 
90  M  de  longueur,  peu  typiques  de  forme ;  mais  grace  a  leur  couronne  de  grosses 
particules  quartzeuses  en  arriere  du  peristome,  on  pouvait  les  identifier  sans  difficulte. 


E.  PENARD 


Difflugia  pyriformis.     PERTY,  var.  bryophila.     PENARD 

PERTY.     Zur  Kenntniss  Kleinstcr  Lebensformen,  p.  187.      1851 
PENARD.     Faune  Rhizop.  Leman,  p.  221.      1902 

La  Diff.  pyriformis,  le  plus  corumun  peut-etre  de  tous  les  rhizopodes  d'eau  douce 
en  general,  manque,  a  1'etat  typique,  dans  les  mousses  (sauf,  bien  entendu,  dans 
les  mousses  submergees,  qui  peuvent  heberger  toute  la  faune  habituelle  des  etangs) ; 
elle  y  est  remplacde,  cependant,  par  une  variete  plus  petite,  var.  bryophila,  pas  tres 
commune  en  general,  et  qui  ne  s'est  rencontree  que  dans  quelques-unes  des  recoltes. 


Diplochlamys  fragilis.     PENARD 
Arch,  fur  Protistenkunde,  B'1  17,  p.  272.      1909 

Parmi  les  differentes  especes  qui  composent  le  genre  Diplochlamys,  il  en  est 
deux,  D.  fragilis  et  D.  Leidyi,  qui  sont  fort  rapprochees  1'une  de  1'autre,  et  ne 
peuvent  guere  etre  distinguees  autrement  qu'a  1'etat  vivant ;  dans  les  recoltes  de 
Mr.  Murray,  les  rares  individus  rencontres  etaient  ou  morts,  ou  enkystes,  et  si  la 
determination  du  genre  est  certaine,  peut-etre  faudrait-il  mettre  un  point  d'interro- 
gation  a  cote  du  nom  de  1'espece. 

(?)  Diplochlamys  gruberi.     PENARD 
Arch,  fiir  Protistenk.,  Bd  17,  p.  282.      1909 

Les  restrictions  qui  viennent  d'etre  faites  a  propos  de  la  Diplochlamys  fragilis 
sont  peut-etre  plus  ne"cessaires  encore  dans  le  cas  actuel.  Un  representant  de  ce 
genre,  qui  semblait  ne  pouvoir  6tre  autre  chose  que  D.  gruberi,  s'est  montre*  dans 
plusieurs  des  recoltes,  mais  c'est  seulement  dans  les  mousses  d'Oahu  que  j'ai  cru 
pouvoir  m'assurer  d'une  determination  a  peu  pres  certaine. 

Diplochlamys  timida.     PENARD 
Arch,  fiir  Protistenk.,  Bd  17,  p.  275.      1909 

Cette  espece,  de  taille  plus  faible  que  les  prece"dentes,  et  qui  s'en  distingue 
en  outre  par  des  caracteres  assez  prdcis  (noyau,  enveloppe  interne,  revetement 
externe),  a  pu,  au  contraire  de  ces  deux  dernieres,  dtre  de'termine'e  avec  certitude. 

A  Ottawa,  au  Queensland,  on  la  trouvait  vivante,  mais  retractee  dans  son 
enveloppe. 


RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE  233 

Diplochlamys  vestita.     PENAED 

Amoeba  vestita.     PENARD.     M<kn.  Soc.  Phys.  Hist.  Nat.,  Genkve,  vol.  31.      1890 
Diploch.  vestita.     PENARD.     Arch,  fur  Protistenk.,  Bd  17,  p.  279.      1909 

Beaucoup  plus  grande  que  toutes  les  especes  precedentes,  dont  elle  differe 
egalement  par  la  nature  de  son  enveloppe  et  par  la  presence  de  noyaux  tres 
nombreux  et  tres-petits,  la  Dipl.  vestita  s'est  montree  a  Vancouver  et  a  Katoomba. 
Dans  cette  d era i ere  localite,  cependant,  le  seul  exemplaire  rencontre  etait  en  trop 
mauvais  etat  pour  qu'il  fut  possible  de  1'identifier  avec  certitude. 

Euglypha  alveolata.     DUJARDIN 
Hist.  Nat.  Zooph.  infusoires,  p.  252.      1841 

1-^  Euglypha  alveolata  ne  se  rencontre  guere  dans  les  mousses,  mais  par  centre  elle 
est  assez  frequente  dans  les  Sphagnum.  C'est  bien  dans  le  sphagnum  aussi  qu'elle 
a  ele  trouvee,  au  Mont  Cook,  ;\  Vancouver,  dans  les  Alpes  australiennes ;  a  File 
Macquarie,  par  centre,  le  sphagnum  manquait,  mais  on  y  voyait  une  toufFe  d'une 
mousse  claire,  longue  et  tres  foumie,  laquelle,  comme  nous  1'avons  deja  vu,  a  fourni 
plusieurs  organismes  sphagnicoles  en  general. 

Dans  les  trois  premieres  de  ces  stations,  1'espece  etait  representee  par  cette  varidtd, 
normalement  prolongee  en  arriere  de  quatre  longues  Opines,  que  Leidy,  par  exemple, 
figure  dans  la  PI.  35  (Fig.  15  a  17)  de  son  grand  ouvrage,  et  qui  &  1'heure  actuelle  est 
gdneralement  indiqude  comme  Euglypha  brachiata  (voir  page  suivante,  remarques  & 
propos  de  cette  espece).  Mais  cette  forme  elle-meme  est  assez  variable  quant  au 
nombre  des  epines  qui  la  caracterisent.  Dans  les  Alpes  australiennes,  comme  aussi 
au  Mont  Cook,  la  plus  grande  partie  des  coquilles,  reconnaissables  pourtant  (grace  a 
leur  forme,  aux  denticulations  buccales,  etc.)  comme  devant  se  rattacher  a  cette  variete 
spdciale,  etaient  lisses,  sans  dpines.  A  Vancouver,  on  trouvait  une  seule  aiguille,  sur 
le  cote,  ou  bien  deux,  ou  trois,  ou  bien  encore  1'une  des  aiguilles  e"tait  terminale,  pro- 
longeant  d'une  longue  e"pine  le  fond  de  la  coque. 

Quant  a  YEuylypha  alveolata  de  1'ile  Macquarie,  c'etait  une  varietd  speciale,  de  75 
a  105  M  de  longueur,  a  coquille  l^gerement  comprimee  (a  section  transversale  elliptique), 
ornee  de  dessins  areolaires  largement  marques,  et  munie  a  la  bouche  d'ecailles  pourvues 
en  avant  d'une  ligne  de  denticulations  tres-petites  et  serrees. 

Euglypha  brachiata.     LEIDY 

E.  brachiata.     LEIDY.     Freshw.  Rhiz.  N.  Amer.,  p.  220.      1879 
non  PENARD.      Faune  Rhizopodique  Leman,  p.  504.      1902 

Peu  de  Rhizopodes  sont  aussi  variables — en  apparence  au  moins — que  ceux  qui  se 
rapportent  au  genre  Euglypha  ;  et  pour  cette  raison  meme,  il  est  peu  de  genres  dans 


234  E.  PENARD 

lesquels  on  ait  reuni  sous  une  meme  denomination  spdcifique  une  aussi  grande  quantite 
de  formes  differentes,  et  dont  plusieurs,  sans  aucun  doute,  representent  en  realitd  des 
especes  bien  autonomes. 

Mais  il  est  aussi,  dans  ce  genre  Eugtypha,  des  especes  bien  nettement  distinctes, 
faciles  h,  caracteriser,  et  avant  toutes  les  autres  on  peut  citer  sous  ce  rapport  VEuglypha 
brachiata,  sous  sa  forme  typique,  celle  que  Leidy  figure  a  la  PI.  37  de  son  grand  ouvrage 
(Fig.  5  a  10).  Et  pourtant,  elle  aussi  reste  encore  meconnue ;  sous  le  nom  specifique 
de  brachiata,  on  s'accorde  en  general  aujourd'hui  a  reunir  toutes  les  formes  dont  les 
epines,  au  lieu  de  constituer  chacune  un  element  distinct  en  soi,  ne  sont  qne  le  pro- 
longement  effile  d'une  des  dcailles  ordinaires  et  regulierement  imbriquees  qui  con- 
stituent 1'ensemble  de  la  coquille. 

Cette  generalisation,  comprehensible  dans  1'etat  actuel  de  nos  connaissances,  est 
regrettable ;  et  quant  a  \Euglypha  brachiata,  il  y  a  Ik  une  grave  erreur  ;\  re"parer.  Parmi 
les  naturalistes  qui  ont  cite  cette  espece,  bien  pen,  en  realite,  me  semblent  avoir  eu  sous 
les  yeux  la  forme  type  de  LEIDY  ;  aucun  meme  peut-etre,  a  la  seule  exception  de  G.  S. 
WEST/  qui,  lui,  1'a  e"videmment  trouvee  (Capel  Curig,  N.  Wales,  et  small  lakes  East  of 
Recess,  W.  Ireland),  et  qui  dit  a  cette  occasion  :  "  This  is  another  rare  species  of  the 
genus,  which  I  have  only  obtained  twice,  and  in  both  instances  from  submerged 
sphagnum."  Pour  mon  compte,  ce  n'est  que  tout  recemment,  dans  les  sphagnum  de 
Vancouver,  que  j'ai  pu  voir  cette  espece  telle  qu'il  faut  la  comprendre  aujourd'hui ;  il 
s'en  est  tout-a-coup  montre  un  exemplaire,  une  coquille  vide  en  parfait  e"tat,  puis,  apres 
bien  des  recherches,  j'ai  fini  par  en  trouver  un  second. 

Comme  la  description  de  LEIDY,  bien  que  parfaitement  exacte,  est  un  peu  ecourt(5e, 
il  ne  sera  pas  inutile  de  donner  ici  quelques  renseignements  suppldmentaires  sur  cette 
Euglypha,  peut-etre  la  plus  elegante  dans  ses  formes  de  toutes  celles  que  Ton  connait 
actuellement  (Fig.  4,  a  et  &). 

La  coquille,  allongee,  legerement  pointue  en  arriere,  s'elargit  de  Ik  graduellement 
pour  acquerir  son  plus  grand  diametre  un  peu  en  arriere  du  milieu  de  la  longueur,  puis 
s'inflechit  vers  1' avant,  en  ddcrivant  une  Idgere  courbe  rentrante,  et  vient  se  terminer  en 
une  bouche  relativement  dtroite,  formee  de  7  ecailles  (7  en  tout  cas  dans  1'individu 
particulierement  examine). 

Comme  toujours  dans  le  genre  Euglypha,  ces  ecailles  de  la  bouche  sont  denticulees 
en  avant,  et  ici,  la  disposition  de  ces  dents  est  assez  curieuse :  une  large  dent  mediane, 
presque  triangulaire,  puis  de  chaque  cote  une  dent  plus  petite,  allongee  en  forme  de 
d^  k  coudre,  puis  une  plus  petite  encore,  et  enfin  1'ebauche  d'une  troisieme. 

En  arriere  de  cette  premiere  rangee  buccale,  la  seconde  ligne  d'dcailles  porte 
encore  des  denticulations,  puis  viennent  les  ecailles  lisses,  ovales,  tres-belles,  qui  se 
continuent  sur  toute  la  coque,  et,  en  rapport  avec  la  forme  meme  de  cette  derniere,  plus 
grandes  sur  les  parties  renHees,  plus  petites  sur  les  parties  etroites,  meme  rondes  au 
fond  de  la  coquille,  de  maniere  a  ne  jamais  violenter  la  belle  imbrication  reguliere. 

1  Linnsean  Society's  Journal,  Zool.,  vol.  28,  p.  328,  1901. 


RIIIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE  235 

Quant  aux  longs  "bras"  caracteristiques  de  cette  espece,  et  que  LEIDY  indiqne 
comme  etant  au  nombre  de  2  ou  de  4,  plus  rarement  de  6,  1'un  des  individus  que  j'ai 
pu  examiner  en  portait  2,  1'autre  4.  Ce  ne  sont  la  pas  autre  chose  que  des  ecailles, 
tres-fortement  modifies ;  par  leur  base,  elles  s'inserent  entre  les  ecailles  ordinaires,  et 
font  partie  du  revetement  general ;  puis  elles  s'elancent  au  dehors,  et  par  une  large 
courbe  elles  vont  s'epanouir  en  am  ere,  cornme  deux  ailes  ou  deux  longs  bois  de  renne. 

Vus  de  cdte,  ces  appendices  se  presentent  ccnmrfle  de  simples  aiguilles  recourbees 
en  alene ;  mais  si  Ton  s'arrange  a  les  voir  d'en  haut,  par  exemple,  on  constate  que  ce 
sont  des  lames,  larges,  minces,  et,  comme  j'ai  pu  m'en  assurer  sur  un  "  bras  "  casse, 
creusdes  en  gouttiere  l  (Fig.  46). 

Ces  longs  appendices  fonctionnant  comme  des  ancres,  doivent  etre  d'une  reelle 
utilite  pour  retenir  1' animal  entre  les  feuilles  des  Sphagnum;  peut-etre  m^me  est-ce  pour 
cette  raison  que  dans  les  localites  oil  on  le  trouve  on  a  peine  a  en  obtenir  quelques  rares 
individus  ;  mais  dans  d'autres  circonstances,  ces  ramures  doivent  ge'ner  considerable- 
ment  1'animal,  et  Ton  peut  se  demander  si  cette  espece  si  peu  repandue  n'est  pas  en 
train  de  disparaitre,  comme  out  disparu  d'autres  animaux  plus  eleves  en  organisation, 
par  suite  d'une  trop  grande  complication  de  leurs  organes  a  1'origine  protecteurs. 

Euglypha  ciliata.     EHRENBERG 
Monatsber.  K.  Akad.  Wiss.,  Berlin,  p.  a 79.      1848 

Cette  espece  est  toujours  commune  dans  les  mousses,  et  de  fait,  elle  a  ete  vue 
un  peu  partout.  A  Ngauruhoe,  it  1'ile  Macquarie,  dans  les  Alpes  australiennes,  on 
en  trouvait  une  variete  tres-hirsute,  a  epines  fortes  et  nombreuses,  disposees  en 
desordre  les  unes  dans  les  autres. 


Euglyplia  compressa.     CARTER 
Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  vol.  13,  p.  32.      1864 

Commune  en  general  dans  les  mousses  et  surtout  dans  les  Sphagnum,  cette 
espece  n'a  manque  nulle  part,  sauf  a  Fiji,  oil  les  circonstances,  nous  1'avons  vu, 
etaient  un  peu  particulieres.  Dans  plusieurs  des  recoltes  (He  Stewart,  M*  Cook, 
Sydney),  on  la  rencontrait  sous  deux  formes,  une  grande  et  une  petite,  sans  qu'il 
apparut  de  transitions.  A  File  Stewart,  presque  tons  les  exemplaires  se  rattachant 
a  la  grande  forme  etaient  depourvus  d'aiguilles ;  au  Mont  Cook,  3a  grande  forme, 
tres-belle,  rappelait  d'assez  pros  la  Placocysta  spinosa,  avec  laquelle  du  reste  cette 
espece  a  ete  souvent  confondue.  A  Sydney  (National  Park),  Ton  trouvait  une 
varidte  superbe,  de  145  /u  de  longueur. 

1  LEIDY  ecrit  Ji  ce  sujet :  "  Rarely,  I  have  seen  them  straight,  with  thickened  ends  and  oar-like,  as  seen 
in  Fig.  7." 

BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.   1907-9.     VOL.  T  E 


236  E.  PENAHD 

Euglypha  cristata.     LEIDY 

Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Philad.,  p.  226.      1874 
non  AWERINZEW.      Rhizopodienstudien,  Ann.  de  Biol.  Lacustre,  torn.  1,  p.  323.      1906 

Cette  jolie  petite  espece,  toujours  facile  a  reconuaitre,  ne  s'est  rencontree  que 
dans  une  senle  des  recoltes,  dans  les  Sphagnum  de  Katoomba,  Mes  Bleues,  et  cela 
sous  la  forme  d'une  seule  coquille  vide,  parfaitement  typique  d'ailleurs. 

Euglypha  fill/era.      PENARD 
M&n.  Soc.  Phys.  Hist.  Nat.,  Geneve,  vol.  31,  p.  179.      1890 

Ce  petit  rhizopode,  characterise  surtout  par  ses  aiguilles  fines,  longues  et  tres- 
droites,  pen  nombreuses,  disposees  de  distance  en  distance  sur  1'arete  de  la  coquille, 
s'est  montre  dans  la  seule  station  de  Creel,  Alpes  australiennes. 

Euglypha  lacvis.     PERTY 
Mittheil.  Naturf.  Ges.,  Bern.,  p.  163.      1849 

On  rencontre  pour  ainsi  dire  toujours,  dans  les  mousses,  toute  une  serie 
d' 'Euglypha  tres-petites,  lisses,  a  dessins  alveolaires  a  peine  reconnaissables,  et  que, 
faute  de  mieux,  on  s'accorde  generalement  a  considerer  comme  representant  V Euglypha 
laevis  de  Perty. 

Tel  a  etc"  le  cas  dans  les  recoltes  de  Mr.  Murray.  Dans  plusieurs  stations,  on 
voyait  egalement,  k  cote  de  la  forme  habituelle,  cette  variete  extremement  petite 
(36  M)  que  j 'avals  decrite  en  1890  *  comme  var.  minor. 

/ 

Euglypha  strigosa.     LEIDY 
Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Philad.,  p.  172.      1878 

Difficile  a  distinguer  de  V Euglypha  ciliata  dont  elle  differe  par  un  revetement 
d'aiguilles  tres-courtes  et  tres-serrees,  comme  aussi  par  sa  forme  un  pen  speciale 
et  la  structure  particuliere  du  peristome,2  V Euglypha  strigosa  s'est  montree  dans 
quelques-unes  seulement  des  recoltes.  Dans  les  Alpes  australiennes,  la  coquille  etait 
pourvue  d'aiguilles  relativement  tres-fortes  et  tres-serrees.  A  Vancouver,  dans  la 
mousse  lavee  depuis  trois  jours,  il  s'en  est  rencontre  un  individu  vivant,  qui  courait 
gaiement  au  milieu  des  debris,  avec  pseudopodes  deployes. 

1  Mem.  Soc.  Phys.  Hist.  Nat.,  Geneve,  vol.  31,  p.  182. 

2  Penard,  Faune  Rhizopodique  Lenian,  p.  503. 


RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE  237 

Heleopera  petricola.     LEIDY 
Freshw.  Rhiz.  North  Am,  p.  165.      1879 

Cette  espece  s'est  rencontree  dans  un  nombre  relativement  restreint  de  stations, 
sous  la  forme  de  coquilles  vides  ou  d'individus  enkystes,  et  souvent  (Australian  Alps, 
Mt.  Cook,  Vancouver)  avec  cette  teinte  rosee  que-  prend  volontiers  la  coquille.  A 
Suva  (Fiji)  comme  aussi  a  Sydney  (National  Park),  c'e"tait  une  petite  variete  incolore, 
qui  peut-etre  aurait  droit  a  une  denomination  specifique  particuliere. 

Heleopera  sordida.     PENARD 
Revue  Suisse  de  Zoologie,  torn.  18,  fasc.  3.      1910 

Cette  Heleopera,  a  coquille  petite,  large  et  renflee,  d'un  jaune  sale,  et  dont  la 
description  toute  recente  a  ete  donnee  d'apres  des  echantillons  re"coltes  en  1909  dans 
les  tourbieres  du  Jura  suisse,  ou  les  individus  ont  e"te  etudies  vivants  et  en  etat 
d'activite,  s'est  rencontree  dans  les  Sphagnum  de  Vancouver,  puis  au  Pare  National 
de  Sydney,  mais  toujours  a  1'etat  de  coquilles  vides. 

Heleopera  sphagni.     LEIDY 

Difflugia  (Nebela)  sphagni.     LEIDY.     Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Philad.,  p.  157.      1874 

Heleopera  picta.     LEIDY.      Freshw.  Rhiz.  N.  Amer.,  p.  162.      1879 

Heleopera  sphagni.     CASH  et  HOPKINSON.     Brit.  Freshw.  Rhiz.,  p.  143.      1909 

Cette  grande  et  belle  espece  s'est  montree  dans  cinq  des  recoltes,  toutes,  il  faut 
le  remarquer,  de  1'hemisphere  sud.  Elle  etait  partout  bien  reconnaissable,  mais 
partout  aussi  un  pen  differente  du  type  figure  par  LEIDY,  et  tel  que,  pour  mon 
compte,  je  1'ai  e'galement  trouve  en  Europe. 

La  coquille,  jaunatre  pale,  relativement  tres-elargie,  portait  ici  des  dessins 
areolaires  extremement  petits,  tels  qu'on  n'est  guere  habitue"  a  les  voir.  Elle  variait, 
suivant  les  exemplaires,  entre  92  et  110  M.  A  File  Macquarie,  c'etait  une  forme 
tres-belle,  de  130  a  140  M  en  longueur  ;  souvent  les  individus  se  trouvaient  a  1'etat 
enkyste,  et  Ton  pouvait  reconnaitre  au  plasma  une  teinte  verdatre  qui  semblait 
montrer  que  la  aussi  la  symbiose  est  un  phdnomene  ordinaire. 

Heleopera  sylvatica.     PENARD 
M<5m.  Soc.  Phys.  Hist.  Nat.,  Gen.,  vol.  31,  p.  168.      1890 

Caracteristique  des  mousses  proprement  dites,  ce  rhizopode  manque  le  plus 
souvent  dans  le  Sphagnum.  Distinct  des  autres  especes  du  genre  par  sa  taille  tres- 


238  E.   PENARD 

faible  (60  M  en  general),  par  sa  transparence,  1'imbrication  de  ses  ecailles,  comme  par 
d'autres  caracteres  moins  e"vidents,  il  s'est  montre  bien  normal  dans  les  differentes 
stations  ou  il  a  6te  recueilli.  A  Oahu,  cependant,  la  taille  etait  relativement 
tres-faible. 

Get  organisme  resiste  bien  a  la  dessication,  et   s'enkyste  volontiers ;    c'est  sous 
cette  forme  vivante,  mais  enkystee,  qu'il  a  etc  souvent  trouve". 


Hyalosphenia  cockayni,  spec,  nova 
Fig.  5,  a  et  & 

En  m'envoyant  quelques  petits  fragments  de  mousses  recueillis  par  le  Dr. 
Cockayne,  botaniste  du  Gouv.  de  Nile.  Zelande,  sur  le  tronc  d'un  arbre  aux  iles 
Auckland,  Mr.  Murray  attirait  mon  attention  sur  un  Ilhizopode  qu'il  croyait  nouveau. 
Ce  devait  6tre  la,  pensait-il,  une  Nebela ;  mais  a  mon  avis,  cet  orgauisme  doit  plutot 
rentrer  dans  le  genre  Hyalosphenia,  dont  il  serait  meme  un  representant  assez 
typique. 

Entre  ces  deux  genres,  du  reste,  il  n'existe  pas  de  differences  bien  sensibles ;  on 
s'accorde  a  considerer  comme  Hyalosphenia  les  formes  dont  la  coquille  est  ou  parait 
etre  lisse,  reservant  le  nom  de  Nebela  pour  celles  dont  1'enveloppe  est  revetue  d'ecailles 
ou  de  plaques.  Mais  dans  le  fait,  cette  distinction  est  assez  subtile,  et  dans  la  plupart 
des  Hyalosphenia,  on  distingue  souvent,  chez  certains  individus  ou  dans  certaines 
localites,  des  reticulations  dues  a  la  presence  d'elements  siliceux  fort  petits,  noyes  dans 
1'epaisseur  de  1'enveloppe.1 

Dans  la  H.  cockayni  1'enveloppe,  d'un  jaune  chamois  tres-clair,  transparente, 
comprimee,  a  peu  pros  pyriforme  d'apparence,  et  une  fois  et  demi  aussi  longue  que 
large,  se  montre  tout  d'abord  lisse  et  unie ;  mais  en  1'examinant  avec  attention,  on 
finit  par  y  reconnaitre,  dans  tous  les  individus  mais  sur  les  uns  plus  distinctement 
que  sur  les  autres,  la  presence  d'elements  siliceux,  generalement  tres-petits  (quelques  M), 
ronds  ou  plus  souvent  ovales,  et  se  touchant  les  uns  les  autres  sur  toute  la  surface  de 
1'enveloppe.  Dans  plusieurs  exemplaires,  j'ai  trouve  quelques-uns  de  ces  elements 
siliceux  qui  n'etaient  pas  autre  chose  que  les  ecailles  buccales  d'une  Euglypha,  ct 
meme,  grace  a  la  structure  et  a  la  disposition  des  denticulations  caracteristiques,  on 
reconnaissait  E.  compressa.2 

La  structure  de  notre  H.  cockayni  est  done  a  peu  pres  identique  a  celle  de 
H.  papilio ;  mais  la  forme  est  toute  differente :  les  bords  lateraux  de  la  coquille,  au 

1  Daus    //.   tincta  (Nebela  tincta,   AWERINZEW),   on   peut  trouver  des  stations  oil  tons  les   individus 
montreront  une  enveloppe  parfaitement  lisse  a  premiere  appareuce,  tandis  que  dans  d'autres  locality's,  plus 
nombreuses,  cette  euveloppe  se  verra  tout  entiere  recouverte  d'ecailles  bien  nettement  definies. 

2  C'est  pour  cette  raison,  meme,  que  j'ai  porte  sur  la  liste  des  especes  recoltees  cette  Euylypha  qui  en 
rdalite  n'y  a  pas  etc"  trouvee  en  tant  qu'individu ;  mais  il  fallait  bien  qu'elle  existat,  puisque  notre  Hyalo- 
sphenia en  avait  amasse  les  tScailles. 


RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE  239 

lieu  d'aller  tout  droit  et  d'une  seule  venue  jusqu'a  1'extremite,  se  creusent  brusquement, 
a  gauche  et  a  droite,  et  vers  le  tiers  anterieur  de  1'enveloppe,  d'une  encoche,  d'un  arc 
rentrant,  et  ces  deux  encoches  droite  et  gauche  donnent  &  toute  cette  enveloppe  une 
apparence  assez  elegante,  qui  rappellerait  celle  d'un  violon. 

En  avant,  1'ouverture  buccale,  plus  etroite  que  dans  H.  papilio,  est  un  pen  renflee 
en  levre,  arquee  sur  la  face  large,  creuse"e  sur  la  face  etroite. 

Sur  les  cotes  de  cette  partie  anterieure  retreeie,  qu'on  pourrait  appeler  le  tube 
buccal,  on  voit  souvent  une  ou  meme  deux  perforations  ou  pores,  mais  qui  n'existent 
pas  necessairement.  En  arriere,  on  ne  distingue  aucun  pore,  rien  d'analogue  a  ce  qui 
existe  chez  H.  papilio. 

Tons  les  exemplaires  rencontres  1'ont  ete  soit  a  1'etat  de  coquilles  vides,  soit 
enkystes,  le  plasma  figurant  une  masse  ovo'ide.  D'apres  la  couleur  et  1'apparence  de 
ce  plasma,  il  semblerait  qu'a  1'etat  de  vie  active  on  trouve,  ici  aussi,  normalement  des 
phenomenes  de  symbiose. 

C'est,  comme  nous  venous  de  le  voir,  aux  lies  Auckland  que  cette  espece  a  ete 
decouverte  tout  d'abord  ;  plus  tard,  elle  s'est  retrouvee  dans  les  Sphagnum  du  Mont 
Cook,  representee  par  une  seule  coquille  vide,  tres-grande,  de  115  M;  enfin,  dans  les 
environs  de  Sydney,  elle  s'est  revue  encore,  pas  tres-rare  ;  les  exemplaires  mesuraient 
100  M  environ. 

Aux  iles  Auckland,  la  longueur  variait  entre  89  et  100  M,  pour  un  largeur  de 
45  a  55  n.  L'enveloppe  est  assez  fortement  comprimee,  et  son  epaisseur  arrive  a  peine 
a  la  moitie  de  sa  largeur. 

Hyalosphenia  sub/lava.     CASH 

Brit.  Fresh w.  Rhiz.  and  Helioz.,  vol.  2,  p.  87.      1909 
Fig.  G,  a,  b,  et  c 

Dans  les  mousses  provenant  d'Eumundi,  Queensland,  et  plus  specialement  dans  la 
touffe  de  sphagnum  qui  s'y  trouvait  jointe,  s'est  rencontrde,  avec  une  abondance 
relative,  cette  petite  Hyalosphenia,  ddcrite  tout  demierement,  comme  provenant  soit 
des  tourbieres  d'Irlam  Moss  pres  de  Manchester,  soit  des  monts  Pentland  (Mr.  Evans) 
en  Ecosse. 

Bien  que  le  Rhizopode  trouve  au  Queensland  puisse  etre  assimile  sans  trop  de 
peine  a  celui  des  lies  Britanniques,  il  n'en  est  pas  moins  vrai  que  Ton  y  constatait  des 
differences  de  detail  assez  sensibles.  L'enveloppe,  plus  petite  (59  M  au  maximum,  et 
generalement  53  M,  en  regard  de  65  a  70  /«  qu'indique  CASH),  relativement  plus  large, 
un  pen  moins  comprimee,  etait  termine"e  par  une  ouverture  buccale  assez  petite,  ovale 
ou  presque  ronde,  pourvue  d'une  sorte  de  bordure  ou  levre  tres  courte  et  a  peine 
indiquee,  qu'entourait  a  son  tour  un  petit  cercle  de  grains  faiblement  marques ;  cette 
levre  ne  portait  pas  trace  d'encoche  sur  les  cotes,  et  aucun  exemplaire  n'a  montre  le 
pore  terminal  posterieur  dont  parle  CASH  (mais  qu'il  ne  figure  pas). 


240  E.  PENARD 

L'enveloppe,  jaunatre,  semblait  parfaitement  lisse  a  premiere  apparence,  mais  un 
examen  attentif  y  decelait  la  presence  de  granulations  serrees,  ou  elements  siliceux 
tres-petits  noye"s  dans  la  masse  chitineuse. 

Presque  tous  les  exemplaires  n'ont  ete  trouves  qu'a  1'dtat  d'enveloppes  vides ; 
quelquefois,  un  reste  de  plasma,  inerte  et  en  mauvais  etat,  laissait  supposer  qu'il  y 
avait  peut-etre  eu  la  des  zoochlorelles  symbiotiques. 


Lesquereusia  .  .  .  spec. 

Les  elements  siliceux  qui  forment  la  coquille  dans  les  Lesquereusia  sont  tellement 
caracteristiques,  que  je  n'ai  aucune  hesitation  a  indiquer  la  presence  de  ce  genre  dans 
le  sphagnum  de  Vancouver,  bien  qu'il  n'ait  e"te  trouve  qu'un  tout  petit  fragment  de 
coquille.  Meme,  d'apres  la  forme  trapue  et  courte  des  quelques  ecailles  siliceuses 
vermiculaires  qui  constituaient  ce  fragment,  je  croirais  volontiers  que  c'etait  la 
Lesquereusia  epistomium,  PENARD.  Mais  ce  serait  la  en  tout  cas  une  identification  un 
peu  aventureuse. 


Licberkiihnia  wageneri.     CLAP.  ET  LACIIMANN 
Mum.  Inst.  Nat.,  Geneve,  vol.  6,  p.  465.      1859 

Apres  avoir  observe,  a  Vancouver  comme  dans  les  Alpes  australiennes,  des 
organismes  inertes  et  peu  reconnaissables  que  je  croyais  pourtant  devoir  rapporter  a 
cette  espece,  j'ai  fini  par  constater  sur  quelques  individus  la  presence  de  ce  long 
"  pedoncule "  interne,  caracteristique  du  genre,  et  qui  ne  peut  montrer  autre  chose 
qu'une  Lieberkithnia.  La  taille,  la  presence  de  petits  globules  en  grand  nombre  qui 
sans  doute  reprdsentaient  les  noyaux,  indiquaient  la  Lieb.  ivageneri,  et  non  pas 
L.  paludosa  qui  ne  possede  qu'un  seul  noyau  tres-gros,  ou  bien  quelquefois  en 
renferme  plusieurs,  mais  encore  volumineux  et  en  nombre  tres-restreint. 


Nebela  bigibbosa.     PENARD 
Mem.  Soc.  Phys.  Hist.  Nat.,  Geneve,  vol.  31,  p.  161.      1890 

Cette  curieuse  Nebela,  si  typique  avec  ses  deux  brides  laterales  invaginees,  et  qui 
fut  trouve'e  pour  la  premiere  fois  aux  environs  de  Wiesbaden  en  1890,  puis  en  1902 
dans  les  mousses  du  Spitzberg,  en  1903  dans  les  forests  du  Valais,  enfin  en  1909  a  la 
montagne  des  Voirons  pros  de  Geneve,  s'est  encore  revue  dans  les  collections  Murray, 
a  Vancouver  et  a  Victoria ;  rare  d'ailleurs  et  representee  par  des  coquilles  vides,  mais 
bien  uettement  caracterisees. 


KHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE  241 

Nebela  caudata.     LEIDY 
Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Philad.,  p.  58.      1876 

Cette  espece  rare,  decouverte  par  Leidy  en  1876  dans  les  tourbieres  du  New 
Jersey,  et  qui,  a  ma  connaissance  n'a  etc  trouvee  en  Europe  qu'une  seule  fois,  dans  le 
Loch  Ness  en  Ecosse,1  semble  etre  beaucoup  plus  commune  dans  I'hemisphere  sud.2 

Les  recoltes  de  Mr.  Murray  1'ont  montree  dans  une  demi-douzaine  de  localites,  soit 
a  1'etat  de  coquilles  vides,  soit  enkystee,  le  plasma  figurant  une  masse  spherique 
protegee  par  un  epiphragme. 

Ce  qu'il  y  a  de  plus  caracteristique  dans  cette  espece,  ce  sont  ses  cornes,  ou 
prolongements  creux,  au  nombre  de  3,  4,  5,  qui  terminent  la  coquille  en  arriere.  Mais 
ces  cornes  sont  bien  souvent  rudimentaires,  a  moitie  formees,  ou  bien  manquent  en 
partie,  quelquefois  meme  tout-a-fait. 

Au  Queensland,  la  forme  etait  normale,  et  presque  toujours  les  individus  portaient 
les  prolongements  caracteristiques,  le  plus  souvent  au  nombre  de  4  ou  5.  A  Ngauruhoe, 
les  individus  montraient  le  plus  gdneralement  une  ou  deux  cornes  seulement,  et  plus  ou 
moins  rudimentaires ;  a  1'ile  Macquarie,  on  trouvait  toutes  les  transitions  possibles 
entre  un  simple  rudiment  d'une  seule  corne  et  des  prolongements  normaux.  A 
Victoria,  B.C.,  a  Vancouver,  presque  tons  les  individus  dtaient  lisses,  depourvus  de 
prolongements  quelconques,  et  persoune,  a  premiere  vue,  n'aurait  hesite-  a  considerer 
ces  coquilles  comme  autre  chose  que  ce  qu'elles  etaient  vraiment ;  il  y  avait  la,  en 
apparence,  une  simple  variete  de  Nebela  dentistoma. 

Nebela  certesi.     CERTES,  spec,  nova 

Neb.  collaris.     CERTES.     Var.  Cap  Horn,  a  et  b.     Mission  scientif. 

Cap  Horn,  torn.  6,  Zool.,  p.  14 

Fig.  7,  a  et  b 

En  meme  temps  qu'il  decrivait  sa  curieuse  Nebela  martiali,  CERTES  designait 
sous  les  noms  de  Neb.  collaris,  var.  o  Cap  Horn  et  Neb.  collaris,  var.  b  Cap  Horn, 
deux  rhizopodes  d'une  forme  et  d'une  apparence  speciale,  et  caracterises  par  la 
presence  d'un  "  sillon "  qui  "part  de  1'ouverture  et  va  en  s'attenuant  jusqu'a  la 
moitie  de  la  longueur  du  col,  orne  de  perles  irregulierernent  disposees  de  chaque 
cote  du  sillon  au  nombre  de  3  a  7  et  meme  plus."  La  variete  b  se  distinguait  en 
outre  par  la  presence  de  "  quatre  ouvertures  triangulaires  symetriquement  disposees," 
et  situdes  a  la  base  du  col. 

1  J    MURRAY,  in  Proc.  Koy.  Soc.,  Edinburgh,  1904-5,  vol.  25,  p.  6H. 

2  Elle  s'est  retrouvue  dans  les  mousses  rapporttes  par  le  Dr.  Bruce  de  Gough  Island,  Ocean  atlantiquc 
Sud,  an  cours  du  voyage  de  la  Scotia. 


242  E.   PENARD 

II  n'est  pas  difficile  de  reconnaitre  la  unc  Nebela  qui  s'est  rencontrde  d'abord  a 
Katoomba  (Montagues  Bleues),  puis  aux  environs  de  Sydney,  partout  tres-rare  et 
reprdsentde  par  des  euveloppes  vides  et  souvent  en  mauvais  dtat,  mais  suffisantes 
pour  une  determination  exacte. 

II  est  dtrange,  a  vrai  dire,  que  CERTES  n'ait  cru  devoir  considerer  ce  lihizopode 
que  comrae  une  varietd  de  Nebela  collaris,  clout  il  s'dloigne  en  rdalite  de  tres-loin ; 
mais,  si  j'en  puis  juger  d'apres  quelques-unes  des  figures  doimees  par  1'observateur 
francais,  il  est  probable  que  certaiues  coquilles  malformdes  et  en  mauvais  dtat 
lui  auront  paru  constituer  des  formes  de  transition  qui  Fauront  induit  en  erreur. 

En  meme  temps,  ces  deux  varidtes  a  et  b  de  CERTES  ne  concernent  bien 
certainement  qu'un  meme  organisme,  car  les  quatre  "  ouvertures  triangulaires " 
existent  toujours  en  principe,  mais  souvent  si  rudimentaires  et  si  inddcises  a  la  vue 
qu'on  a  peine  a  les  trouver. 

Pour  moi,  c'est  la  une  espece  tout-a-fait  caractdristique,  et  qui,  me  semble-t-il, 
doit  porter  le  nom  du  consciencieux  savant  francais. 

La  Nebela  ccrtesi  est  une  espece  d'assez  grande  taille,  ou  plutot,  faudrait-il  dire, 
d'une  taille  assez  allongee,  mesurant  145  a  150  M  en  general;  mais  la  coquille,  fine, 
mince,  etroite  et  delicate,  en  fait  un  organisme  assez  chdtif  en  apparence,  et  qui 
passe  facilement  inapercu. 

Elle  a  la  forme  d'une  bouteille,  etroite,  au  col  allonge,  et,  assez  fortement 
comprimde,  elle  prdsente  une  face  large  et  une  face  etroite.  Cette  enveloppe  est 
jaunatre.  tres-claire,  formee  d'une  matiere  chitinoi'de  dans  laquellc  sont  empatds 
des  elements  siliceux  ovales  ou  arrondis,  tres-petits,  ou  melds  de  plus  gros.  La 
bouche  est  bordde  d'un  epaississement,  ou  levre  saillante  et  arquee  en  avant  sur 
la  face  large,  creusee  d'une  faible  gouttiere  sur  la  face  etroite.  Mais  ce  qu'il  'y  a 
de  plus  curieux  dans  cette  espece,  c'est  la  presence  d'un  dtroit  sillon,  qui,  partant 
du  peristome  et  au  milieu  de  chacune  des  levres,  descend  tout  droit  le  long  du  col, 
pour  disparaitre  a  la  moitid  de  la  longueur  de  ce  col. 

C'est  la  un  veritable  canal,  creusd  dans  1'epaisseur  de  la  paroi,  et  bordd  par 
centre,  sur  1'un  de  ses  cotes,  d'un  epaississement  qui  simule  un  batonnet;  aussi, 
sur  des  coquilles  brisdes,  trouve-t-on  quelquefois  que  la  ddchirure  s'est  faite  juste 
le  long  du  sillon,  c.a.d.  sur  la  ligne  de  moindre  rdsistance. 

A  droite  et  a  gauche  du  canal,  on  remarque  egalement  toujours  deux  ou 
plusieurs  lignes  de  petites  perles  brillantes.1 

Plus  bas,  en  arriere  du  col,  on  voit,  a  gauche  et  a  droite,  et  sur  chacune  des 
faces,  une  petite  ouverture,  irrdguliere  de  contour,  mais  si  faible  qu'elle  ne  se 
distingue  guere  que  sur  des  coquilles  et  bon  dtat.  Ce  ne  sont  pas  la,  du  reste,  de 
simples  perforations,  mais  1'indice  d'une  sorte  dc  tube,  plus  ou  moins  rudimentaire, 
qui  traverse  la  coquille  de  part  en  part. 

1  Dans  le  bauuic  du  Canada,  cos  perles  no  so  distinguent  presque  plus,   et  le  sillou  buccal  lui-mt'me 
devient  peu  visible. 


RI-IIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE  243 

Aucun  des  individns  rencontres  ne  1'a  ete  autrement  qu'a-  1'etat  de  coquille  vide ; 
ou  bien  aussi  Ton  trouvait  qnelques  restes  de  plasma  mort,  a  1'abri  d'un  diaphragme 
epais  et  feuillete,  tel  qu'on  le  connait  dans  les  Nebelides  en  general. 

Nebela  collaris.     EHRENBERG 

Diffliu/ia  collaris.     EHRBG.     Monatsb.  Akad._Wiss.,  Berlin,  p.  218.      1848 
Nebela  collaris.     LEIDY.     Proc.  Acad.  Sci.,  Philad.,  p.  162.      1879 

Cette  espece  est  fort  variable,  et  souvent  difficile  a  determiner.  En  general, 
on  ne  la  trouve  guere  repre'sente'e  dans  les  mousses  proprement  dites  que  par  de 
petites  formes,  dont  certaines  (Neb.  minor,  parvula]  ont  dte"  elevees  au  rang 
d'especes ;  et  dans  les  rdcoltes  de  Mr.  Murray,  la  forme  type  s'est  montree  tres-rare ; 
on  ne  la  trouvait  guere  qu'au  Mont  Cook.  Dans  les  Montagnes  Rocheuses,  comme 
au  Queensland,  c'etaient  de  petites  varie'tes ;  a  Ngauruhoe,  a  Vancouver,  la  taille 
dtait  forte,  et  la  forme  rappelait  plutot  la  Neb.  bohemica  de  Taranek,  dont  les 
caracteres  ne  sont  peut-etre  ni  assez  prdcis  ni  assez  constants  pour  autoriser  une 
separation  d'avec  le  type.  A  Waiata-Rua,  une  varie'te  tres -petite  montrait  ce 
meme  type  bohemica,  tandis  qu'a  Oahu  Ton  avait  affaire  a  une  forme  tres-large, 
discoide,  qu'ou  eut  pu  sans  trop  de  difficulte  rapporter  a  Nebela  tincta. 

Nebela  dentistoma.     PENARD 

Mem.  Soc.  Phys.  Hist.  Nat.,  Geneve,  vol.  31,  p.  162.      1890 
Nebela  crenulata.     CASH.     Tran.  Manch.  Micr.  Soc.,  p.  50.      1891  (1892) 

A'-sez  peu  repandue  en  general,  cette  Nebela  ne  s'est  guere  trouvee  qu'au  Mont 
Cook  et  a  Vancouver,  dans  les  Sphagnum ;  puis  a  1'lle  Macquarie,  ou,  nous  1'avons 
deja  vu,  dans  une  grande  mousse  claire  et  serree,  plusieurs  especes  se  sont  rencontre'es 
qui  sont  sphagnicoles  en  general.1 

Nebela  flabellulum.     LEIDY 
Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Philad.,  p.  157.      1874 

Cette  espece  sera  toujours  difficile  a  determiner  exactement,  par  le  fait  que 
plusieurs  Nebelides  (Nebela  collaris,  galeata,  tincta,  &c.)  ont  une  tendance  a 

1  L'histoire  de  cette  espece  est  assez  curieuse :  decrite  en  1890  sous  le  nom  de  N.  dentistoma,  elle  devint 
C7i  1893  Neli.  crenulata;  j'avais  era  en  effet  devoir  operer  cette  rcforme,  pour  obeir  aux  lois  de  la  nomenclature 
qui,  parait-il,  repoussent  tout  adjectif  form6  d'un  nom  grec  et  d'un  nom  latin  a  la  fois.  Mais  en  adoptant  ce 
tenne  de  crenulata,  j'ignorais  totalement  qu'il  existait  dcja,  en  fait,  une  Nebela  crenulata,  creee  par  CASH  en 
1892,  et  qui,  bien  plus,  par  une  curieuse  coincidence,  se  trouvait  etre  justement  cette  meme  espece  que  je 
venais  de  debaptiser.  Aujourd'hui,  il  faut  parait-il  en  revenir  au  premier  nom  specifique  de  Neb.  dentistoma 
(ainsi  uommce  d6ja  dans  le  volume  de  Cash  &  Hopkinson,  1909);  un  auteur  n'a  plus  le  droit  de  changer  un 
nom  d'espece,  mgme  forme  coiitre  toutes  les  regies. 

BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.   1907-9.     VOL.  I.  F 


244  E.  PENARD 

revetir  la  forme  tres-large  qui   constitue  le  caractere   spdcial    de   N.  flabdhdum,   et 
dans  certaines  stations  ne  se  trouvent  meme  plus  guere  que  sous  cette  forme-la. 

L'espece  typique,  telle  qu'elle  est  indiquee  et  figuree  p.e.  par  CASH  et  HOPKINSON 
dans  le  2e  vol.  des  British  Freshwater  Khizopods  (p.  119,  PI.  28,  Fig.  9-11),  ne  s'est 
rencontree  que  dans  les  Sphagnum  de  Vancouver. 


Nebela  griseola,  spec,  nova 
Fig.  8,  a  ct  1} 

Dans  le  sphagnum  de  Katoomba  s'est  montre,  en  exemplaires  assez  nombreux, 
un  petit  Rhizopode  que  Ton  croirait  a  premiere  vue  devoir  rapporter  au  genre  Difflugia, 
mais  qui,  grace  a  la  nature  particuliere  de  son  enveloppe,  doit  etre  attribue  au  genre 
Nebela. 

La  coquille,  grisatre,  tres-peu  transparente,  de  70  a  75  M  en  longueur,  et  qui 
rappellerait  celle  de  certaines  varietes  de  Difflugia  pyriformis,  est  faite  d'une  matiere 
chitinoi'de,  une  pellicule  sur  laquelle  sont  colic's,  series  les  uns  centre  les  autres,  des 
elements  siliceux,  arrondis,  ovales,  droits  (diatome'es  modifie'es),  ou  bien  quelque 
peu  recourbe"s,  vermiformes ;  le  tout,  enfin,  formant  un  revetement  qui  tient  a  la 
fois  du  genre  Nebela  et  du  genre  Lesquereusia. 

Elle  est  pyriforme,  a  peu  pres  deux  fois  aussi  longue  que  large,  et  peut  etre 
indiquee  comme  comprimee,  car  elle  presente  une  face  large  et  une  face  etroite ; 
mais  cette  compression  est  si  faible  que,  dans  certains  individus  examines  en  section 
transversale,  on  se  demande  s'il  y  a  une  difference  quelconque  entre  les  deux  axes 
de  la  figure  elliptique  que  Ton  a  sous  les  yeux ;  plus  souvent,  cependant,  la  difference 
est  nettement  sensible,  le  grand  axe  etant  au  petit  comme  6  est  a  5,  ou  m6me  quel- 
quefois  comme  5  est  a  4. 

A  la  bouche,  1'enveloppe  s'eVase  legerement,  figurant  un  bourrelet  plus  ou  moins 
prononce,  et  qui  dans  certains  cas  m'a  paru  resulter  d'un  reploiement  sur  elle-meme 
de  la  membrane  garnie  encore  de  ses  elements  de  recouvrement. 

L'ouverture  buccale  est  petite,  elliptique  dans  son  contour,  ou  meme,  tres- 
souvent,  parfaitement  circulaire. 

La  Nebela  griseola  ne  s'est  montr^e,  dans  les  recoltes  de  Mr.  Murray,  qu'tl  1'etat 
d'enveloppes  vides ;  mais  pourtant,  je  puis  ajouter  ici  quelques  renseignements  con- 
cernant  le  plasma. 

Si  cette  espece,  en  effet,  est  aujourd'hui  ddcrite  pour  la  premiere  fois,  elle  n'est 
pas  absolument  nouvelle,  en  ce  sens  qu'elle  a  4te"  recoltee,  par  moi-meme,  le  30 
Juillet  1909,  dans  les  mousses  de  Glendarary  Ho.,  au  promontoire  d'Achill,  cote 
occidentale  de  1'Irlande ;  mais  les  resultats  de  mes  recherches  ne  devant  etre  publies 
que  dans  un  avenir  peut-etre  encore  assez  ^loigne,  la  station  des  Montagues  Bleues 
vient,  de  fait,  premiere  en  date. 


RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE  245 

L'enveloppe  renferme  alors  un  plasma  clair,  limpide,  dans  le  sein  duquel  on 
trouve  des  grains  d'amidon,  des  elements  de  reserve  pour  la  confection  d'une  nouvelle 
coquille,  puis  une,  on  deux,  ve"sicules  contractiles,  et  enfin  le  noyau  ;  ce  dernier, 
spherique,  relativement  petit  (12  M),  consiste  en  une  masse  d'un  bleu  tendre,  ren- 
fermant  un  amas  central,  irregulier,  de  nucleoles  pales  et  tres-petits. 

Tres-timides,  les  animaux  n'ont  jamais  deploye  de  pseudopodes ;  ils  se  collent 
souvent  au  substratum,  par  leur  pdristome  un  pen  glutineux. 

En  Irlande,  la  coquille  etait  identique  &  celle  de  Katoomba,  mais  plus  grande, 
en  general,  de  80  a  85  n  au  lieu  de  70  a  75  /u  qu'elle  avait  en  Australie. 

Nebela  lageniformis.     PENARD 
Mem.  Soc.  Phys.  Hist.  Nat.,  Geneve,  vol.  31,  p.  159.      1890 

La  Nebela  lageniformis  est  1'i.m  des  representants  les  plus  caractdristiques  des 
mousses,  aussi  les  rdcoltes  de  Mr.  Murray  1'ont-elles  montree  a  peu  pres  partout. 
Cependant  cette  espece,  qui  jusqu'ici  etait  connue  pour  posseder  des  caracteres  de 
forme  tres-nets  et  peu  sujets  a  de  serieuses  variations,  s'est  montree,  dans  tout 
1'hemisphere  sud,  extremement  variable,  et  cette  variabilite  affectait  uniquement  la 
partie  anterieure  de  la  coquille,  le  col,  qui  dans  le  type  figure  une  sorte  de  tube 
aplati,  pose  directement  sur  la  partie  renflee  et  arrondie  de  1'enveloppe. 

Au  Mont  Cook,  on  trouvait  toutes  les  transitions  entre  la  forme  normale  et 
une  autre  a  col  tres-elargi  a  sa  base ;  a  Waiata-Rua,  il  en  dtait  encore  de  inline,  et 
les  extremes  aiTivaient  si  loin  qu'a  certains  exemplaires  on  ne  trouvait  plus  de  col 
du  tout,  et  qu'on  aurait  cru  a  une  espece  speciale,  ou  a  une  variete  de  Neb.  collaris. 
A  1'ile  Stewart,  le  col  etait  toujoura  tres-large  a  sa  base,  un  simple  retrecissement 
graduel  de  la  partie  anterieure  de  la  coquille ;  a  1'ile  Macquarie,  avec  la  forme  typique 
mais  variable,  on  en  trouvait  une  autre,  a  col  etroit,  droit,  nettement  indique ;  a 
Ngauruhoe,  enfin,  c'etait  une  grande  forme,  de  140  a  160  /u,  a  col  tubulaire,  etroit, 
prolongeant  tout  droit  la  coquille  large  et  arrondie. 

On  constatait  egalement  d'assez  grandes  variations  sous  le  rapport  de  la  taille  ; 
tandis  que  dans  la  regie,  la  coquille  mesure  de  120  a  125  /w,  on  trouvait  140  k  160  M 
h,  Ngauruhoe ;  et  par  contre,  a  Katoomba,  une  petite  variete,  melee  a  la  forme  type, 
n'arrivait  qu'a  85  /u. 

Nebela  longicollis.     PENARD 
Mem.  Soc.  Phys.  Hist.  Nat.,  Geneve,  vol.  31,  p.  158.      1890 

En  1890,  j'avais  decrit  sous  le  nom  de  Neb.  longicollis  un  Rhizopode  a  coquille 
tres-allongee,  presque  tubulaire,  tres  peu  comprimee ;  mais  plus  tard,  j'avais  cru 
devoir  rattacher  cette  _espece  a  la  Neb.  americana  de  TARANEK.  Or,  a  ce  qu'il  me 
semble  aujourd'hui,  la  Neb.  americana  de  TARANEK  n'est  pas  autre  chose  que  la  Neb. 


E.  PENARD 

lagenifonnis,  PKNARD;  seulement,  la  chose  n'est  pas  certaine,  car  TARANEK  indique  la 
coquille  comrue  non  comprimee,  ronde  en  section  transversale  ;  mais  .  .  .  je  serais 
porte  a  croire  que  cette  determination  de  "  drehrund "  repose  stir  une  erreur  d' ob- 
servation. 

Reste  maintenant  la  Neb.  barbata  de  LEIDY,  a  laquelle  on  rapporte  quelquefois 
la  Neb.  longicollis;  mais,  on  le  sait  enfin  aujourd'hui,  la  Neb.  barbata  existe,  espece 
bien  autonome,  avec  sa  forme  speciale,  son  recouvrement  de  cils. 

II  me  faut  alors  reprendre  aujourd'hui  1'espece  abandonnee,  pour  distinguer  sous 
le  nom  de  Neb.  longicollis  une  forme  incolore,  claire  et  transparente,  en  forme  de 
bouteille  tres-allonge"e,  presque  tubuleuse,  faiblement  comprimee,  &  e"cailles  fortes  et 
nettes,  qui  dessinent  des  areoles  tres-marquds.  A  la  bouche,  les  ecailles  font  parfois 
saillie,  ou  bien  elles  y  sont  noyees  dans  un  bourrelet  jaunatre,  souvent  un  peu  creuse 
sur  la  face  e"troite. 

Mais,  il  faut  1'avouer,  cette  espece  est  extremement  polymorphe  ;  tantot  droite, 
tant6t  recourbe"e  en  virgule,  1'enveloppe  est  quelquefois  si  courte,  que  s'il  n'existait 
pas  toutes  les  transitions  possible  (par  ex.  au  Mont  Cook),  on  croirait  devoir  la  rapporter 
a  la  Nebela  vitraea. 

Au  Mont  Cook,  dans  le  sphagnum,  cette  espece  n'etait  pas  tres-rare ;  a  Waiata- 
Rua,  a  Katoomba,  il  ue  s'en  est  rencontre  que  quelques  exemplaires. 

Nebela  martiali.     CERTES 

Mission  scient.  du  Cap  Horn,  torn.  6,  Protoz.,  p.  14.      1889 

Fig.  9,  a  et  I 

CERTES  a  donne,  en  1889,  une  bonne  description  de  cette  curieuse  espece,  qu'il 
avait  recue  du  Cap  Horn,  et  qui  n'a  pas  6t6  revue  depuis. 

Comme  dans  la  Neb.  certesi  dont  il  a  6t6  question  plus  haut,  nous  trouvons 
sur  le  col  un  certain  nombre  d'ornements  en  forme  de  perles,  tres-petites,  disposees 
ici  comme  un  collier,  en  plusieurs  rangees  et  juste  en  arriere  de  la  bouche. 

CERTES  indique,  comme  traits  caracteristiques,  "  six  ouvertures  ou  pores  disposes 
symetriquement  deux  a  deux ;  la  premiere  paire  a  moitie"  du  col,  les  deux  autres 
perpendiculaires  a  la  premiere,  a  la  base  du  col." 

Mais  les  choses  sont  un  peu  differentes  en  realite  :  la  premiere  paire  dont  parle 
CERTES,  se  rapporte  en  effet  a  deux  perforations,  tres-faibles  et  souvent  meme  invisibles, 
sur  les  deux  cotes  du  col ;  mais  les  deux  autres  paires  representent  chacune  un  tube, 
qui  traverse  la  coquille  de  part  en  part,  et  dont  les  deux  ouvertures  ont  ete  prises  par 
CERTES  chacune  pour  une  simple  perforation.  Cos  tubes,  dont  les  orifices  se  trouvent 
eux-memes  au  fond  d'un  leger  etranglement  de  1'enveloppe,  s'ouvrent  au  dehors  en  une 
large  lumiere,  et  figurent  a  la  vue  deux  grands  yeux  enfonces ;  la  coquille,  vue  la 
tete  en  bas,  semble  etre  un  animal  fantastique,  une  sorte  de  chouette,  qui  rcgarde 
fixement. 


RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE  247 

Cette  enveloppe,  jaunatre,  est  couverte  de  petites  plaques  serrees,  pen  apparentes, 
generalement  elliptiques,  quelquefois  entremelees  de  plus  grandes,  qui  semblent  avoir 
e'te'  volees  aux  Trinema. 

A  1'ile  Macquarie,  les  exemplaires,  tres-rares,  mesuraient  125  M  ;  a  Ngauruhoe,  une 
seule  coquille  vide  a  ete  trouvee ;  dans  les  Alpes  australiennes,  cette  nebe"lide  etait 
commune,  tres-belle,  mais  toujours  a  1'dtat  de  coquilles  vides,  lesquelles,  beaucoup  plus 
grandes  qu'a  Macquarie,  mesuraient  de  165  a  180-?*— 

CERTES  indique  pour  cette  espece  une  longueur  de  550  M,  une  largetir  de  290  M  ;  il 
doit  y  avoir  la  un  simple  lapsus  calami. 

Nebela  militaris.      PENARD 
Me'm.  Soc.  Phys.  Hist.  Nat.,  Geneve,  torn.  31,  p.  164.      1890' 

Cette  jolie  petite  espece,  tres-delicate,  et  toujours  assez  rare,  s'est  rencontre'e  a 
Katoomba,  a  Ngauruhoe,  a  Oahu.  Dans  cette  derniere  station,  la  taille  dtait  tres-faible, 
51  M  en  longueur. 

Nebela  minor.     PENARD 
Arch.  Sci.  Phys.  Nat,  Geneve  (3),  vol.  29,  p.  181.      1893 

Cette  petite  Nebela,  a  coquille  tres-claire  et  tres-transparente,  couverte  en  general 
de  plaques  rondes  bien  regulieres,  et  qui  pent  etre  consideree  comme  un  diminutif  de  la 
Neb.  collar  is,  mais  semble  pourtant  avoir  droit  au  titre  d'espece,  etait  abondante  dans 
une  mousse  claire  et  bien  fournie  provenant  de  Oahu.  Elle  s'est  retrouvde,  beaucoup 
plus  rare,  a  Ottawa. 

Nebela  tincta.     LEIDY 

ITyalosphenia  tincta.     LEIDY.     Fresh w.  Rhiz.  N.A.,  p.  138.      1879 
Nebela  tinda.     AWERINZEW.     Trudui,  S.  Petersb.,  vol.  36,  p.  354.      1906 

Cette  espece,  qui  sous  sa  forme  typique,  avec  enveloppe  fortement  comprimee, 
r6gulierement  arrondie,  transparente  et  lisse,  represente  nettement  une  Hyalosphenia, 
est  assez  variable  pourtant,  et  dans  beaucoup  de  stations  se  montre  couverte  de  dessins 
qui  1'ont  fait  reunir  (a  tort,  peut-etre)  au  genre  Nebela.  Elle  s'est  rencontrde  dans  un 
assez  grand  nombre  des  recoltes. 

Nebela  tubulosa.     PENARD 
Mem.  Soc.  Phys.  Hist.  Nat.,  Geneve,  vol.  31,  p.  159.      1890 

Cette  grande  espece,  assez  rare,  n'est  apparue  que  dans  la  seule  station  de  Van- 
couver, bien  typique,  avec  ses  ecailles  tres-petites,  sa  teinte  speciale  d'un  brun  chocolat 
clair,  et  sa  taille  de  205  a  225  M  en  general. 


248  E.   PENARD 

Nebela  vas.     CERTES 
Mission  scientifique  du  Cap  Horn,  torn.  6,  Zoolog.,  p.  15.      1889.      Fig.  10 

Cette  belle  espece,  inconnue  jusqu'ici  en  Europe  comme  aussi  aux  Etats-Unis. 
mais  qui  semble  etre  tres-repandue  sur  tout  le  territoire  du  Pacifique  et  probablernent 
dans  1'hemisphere  sud  tout  entier,  a  etc  decrite,  avec  une  bonne  figure,  par  CERTES  en 
1889,  d'apres  des  exemplaires  provenant  du  Cap  Horn. 

Comme  forme,  elle  rappelle  a  s'y  meprendre  1'une  des  varietes  de  la  Difflugia 
(Pontigulasid)  vas  de  LEIDY,  et  plus  particulierement  celle  qui,  elevee  au  rang  d'espece, 
est  connue  comme  Pontigulasia  spectabilis,  PENARD.  Mais  ce  n'est  la  qu'une  conformite 
d'apparence,  et,  comme  CERTES  1'a  deja  remarque,  "  ce  n'est  pas  la  premiere  fois  que 
Ton  rencontre  des  especes  differentes  construisant  chacune  leur  coquille  sur  le  meme 
type."  L'enveloppe,  ici  bien  plus  fortement  comprimeX  revet  la  structure  typique  des 
Nebela.  Le  plasma,  le  noyau,  le  mode  d'enkystement,  le  diaphragme  qui  ferme  le  col 
lors  de  1'enkystement,  tout  cela  est  d'une  Nebela. 

La  Nebela  vas  s'est  trouvee  dans  la  plupart  des  recoltes  de  Mr.  Murray,  toujours 
bien  caracteristique,  mais  variable  dans  ses  dimensions,  suivant  la  localite.  Dans 
plusieurs  stations  (Mont  Cook,  ile  Macquarie),  outre  la  forme  normale  qui  generalement 
mesure  de  160  a  165  M  de  longueur,  on  en  trouvait  une  autre.  plus  claire,  plus  delicate, 
et  beaucoup  plus  petite;  a  WaTata-Rua,  cette  petite  forme,  de  95  /u  seulement,  existait 
seule ;  il  semble  y  avoir  Ik  une  variete"  speciale,  qu'aucune  transition  ne  relie  au  type. 

La  coquille  est  jaunatre,  et  formee  dans  la  regie  de  plaquettes  arrondies  bien 
nettes.  Mais  il  y  a  sous  ce  rapport  un  fait  interessant  a  noter :  dans  cette  espece, 
1'animal  semble  montrer  une  predilection  toute  particuliere  pour  les  ecailles  des 
Euglypha ;  il  les  capture,  les  incorpore  a  la  masse  de  ses  "plaques  de  reserve,"  et  les 
emploie  en  aussi  grand  nombre  que  possible.  Mais,  ce  qu'il  y  a  de  curieux,  c'est  que 
toutes  les  ecailles  qui  dans  YEuglypha  avaient  etc"  buccales,  c'est-a-dire  que  Ton  trouve 
munies  des  ornements  et  denticulations  caracteristiques,  se  voient  sur  le  col  de  la 
Nebela,  et  jamais  sur  le  corps  meme  de  la  coquille.  En  outre,  presque  toujours,  les 
denticulations  de  ces  ecailles  parsemees  un  peu  partout  sur  le  col,  sont  dirigees  en 
avant ;  il  y  a  done  eu  un  choix,  tant  dans  le  placement  des  ecailles  que  dans  leur 
orientation. 

Mais  ce  n'est  pas  tout :  s'il  y  a,  dans  cette  capture  des  ecailles  d'Euglypha,  en 
quelque  sorte  une  habitude  acquise  par  la  Nebela,  cette  habitude  peut  faire  defaut  dans 
certains  cas  ;  par  exemple,  tandis  qu'a  Ngauruhoe,  a  Vancouver,  la  plupart  des  coquilles 
portaient  de  ces  Ecailles  speciales,  et  que  dans  les  autres  stations  beaucoup  d'individus 
n'en  montraient  pas,  elles  manquaient  toujours  a  Tile  Macquarie,  au  Mont  Cook,  a 
Waiata-Rua,  bien  que  les  Euglypha  (E.  ciliata,  E.  compressa)  y  fussent  aussi 
nornbreuses  qu'ailleurs. 


RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE  249 

La  plupart  des  representants  de  cette  espece  ont  ete  trouvds  a  1'etat  de  coquilles 
vides,  ou  bien  aussi  le  plasma,  encore  vivant,  se  voyait  enkyste  ;  mais  aucun  individu 
n'est  revenu  a  la  vie  active.  Dans  un  exemplaire  provenant  de  Ngauruhoe,  cependant, 
et  garde  pendant  5  jours  dans  un  verre  de  montre,  j'ai  pu  examiner  le  plasma,  qui  se 
trouvait  rempli  de  petits  grains  d'amidon,  puis  renfermait  encore  de  grosses  spherules 
jaunatres,  d'aspect  cireux  (re"sidus  de  nourriture  ?),  et  un  beau  noyau,  de  28  n  de 
diametre,  du  type  habituel  aux  Nebela,  c'est-a-dire-  renfermant  un  certain  nombre  de 
nucleoles  dissemines  sans  ordre  dans  une  masse  (sue  nucldaire)  grisatre,  pateuse,  pleine 
de  granulations  tres-petites. 

Parmulina  cyathus.     PENARD 
Faune  Rhizopodique  Le"man,  p.  207.     1902 

Ce  petit  organisme,  tres-peu  apparent  de  sa  nature,  et  qui  lorsqu'il  n'est  pas  en 
tres-bon  etat  de  forme  reste  facilement  inapercu,  ne  s'est  rencontre  d'une  maniere 
evidente  qu'a  Sydney  (National  Park)  et  a  Ottawa.  Dans  ces  deux  stations,  1'animal 
etait  vivant,  mais  enkyste",  c'est-a-dire  simplement  retracte  en  boule  sous  la  protection 
de  son  envelqppe. 

Pkryganella  hemisphaerica.     PENARD 

Pseudodiffluffia  hemisphaerica.     PENARD.     Mern.  Soc.  Phys.  Hist.  Nat.,  Geneve, 

torn.  31,  p.  169.      1890 
Phryganella  hemisphaerica.     Faune  Rhizop.  Leman,  p.  421.      1902 

Le  plus  commun  peut-etre  de  tous  les  Rhizopodes  des  mousses,  et  qui  en  effet 
n'a  manque  nulle  part,  sauf  aux  lies  Auckland,  d'ou  il  n'a  ^te  rapporte  qu'un  simple 
fragment  d'ecorce  garni  d'une  petite  mousse  rase. 

On  la  rencontre  presque  toujours  et  partout  a  1'etat  de  coquilles  vides  ;  et  presque 
toujours  aussi,  on  y  reconnait  deux  formes,  1'une  petite,  tres-variable  d'ailleurs,  et  qui 
semble  se  rapporter  a  ces  divers  petits  rhizopodes  que  sous  le  nom  de  Difflugia 
globulosa,  LEIDY,  represente  a  la  PI.  XVI.  de  son  grand  ouvrages  (Fig.  11  h,  20) ;  puis 
une  plus  grande  (40  a  50  M),  que  dans  cette  meme  planche  de  Leidy  on  trouve  repre"- 
sentde  par  les  Fig.  23  et  24.  CASH  identifie  cette  esp6ce,  peut-^tre  avec  raison,  a 
Difflugia  acropodia,  HERTWIG  ET  LESSER. 

A  I'lle  Macquarie,  une  tres-grande  variete  arrivait  a  100  M. 

Phryganella  nidulus.     PENARD 
Faune  Rhizopodiqne  Leman,  p.  419.      1902 

Cette  grande  espece  est  apparue  dans  la  rdcolte  du  Mont  Cook  ;  mais  encore  faut-il 
faire  des  reserves  sur  1' exactitude  de  la  determination.  En  eifet,  la  seule  coquille  ren- 


250  E.  PENARD 

contree,  vide,  prdsentait  des  caracteres  particuliers  ;  de  190  M  de  diametre,  hemisphdrique, 
pourvue  d'une  ouverture  plutot  petite  et  dechiquetee,  elle  etait  munie  sur  tout  son 
pourtour,  a  la  face  ventrale,  d'une  sorte  de  rebord  ou  d'aile  circulaire,  qui  peut-etre 
n'avait  d'autre  signification  que  celle  d'un  mucilage  durci,  destine"  a  souder  la  coquille 
sur  le  substratum. 


Placocysta  jurassica.     PENARD 
Revue  Suisse  Zool.,  vol.  13,  p.  611.      1905 

Ce  Rhizopode,  qui  jusqu'ici  n'avait,  &  ma  connaissance,  ete  indique  que  dans  une 
tourbiere  du  Jura  suisse  (la  Pile),  a  refait  cette  annee  son  apparition,  clans  le  sphagnum 
de  Vancouver,  ou  il  n'etait  pas  rare ;  parfaitement  typique  d'ailleurs,  et  avec  la  taillc 
normale  de  70  a  75  /«  en  moyenne,  mais  pourvu  d'aiguilles  plus  longues  et  plus  serrees 
que  celles  des  exemplaires  du  Jura. 


Placocysta  spinosa.     LEIDY 
Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Philad.,  p.  226.      1874 

Dans  ce  mSme  sphagnum  de  Vancouver  s'est  egalement  montree,  beaucoup  moins 
abondante  que  la  precedente,  la  Placocysta  spinosa,  bien  typique,  mais  revetue  d'une 
profusion  tout-a-fait  anormale  d'aiguilles,  qui  poussaient  serrees,  souvent  en  faisceaux, 
tout  le  long  de  1'arete  laterale.  Ces  aiguilles,  dgalement,  etaient  moins  larges,  moins 
aplaties  que  dans  le  type  ordinaire,  et  leur  extremite  se  voyait  tronquee  il  angle  droit. 

Les  exemplaires  rencontres  montraient  entre  eux  de  grandes  differences  sous  le 
rapport  de  la  longueur,  et  variaient  de  104  a  140  /«.  II  est  rare  que  dans  1'espece  type 
on  ait  trouve  jusqu'ici  moins  de  130  M. 


Plagiopyxis  callida.     PENARD 
Revue  Suisse  de  Zoologie,  tome  18,  fasc.  3.      1910 

Cette  espece,  ddcrite  tout  rdcemment  d'apres  des  exemplaires  trouvds  aux  environs 
de  Geneve,  rappelle  a  premiere  vue  une  des  nombreuses  varietes  de  Diffiugia  constricta; 
mais  c'est  Ik  en  realite  vin  type  tout  different,  un  organisme  qui  par  la  structure  toute 
particuliere  de  son  plasma,  lequel  s'dpaissit  k  sa  surface  de  maniere  k  constituer  une 
veritable  enveloppe  interne,  se  rapproche  de  tres-pres  des  genres  Diplochlamys  et 
Bullinula. 

Elle  s'est  renccntree  dans  plusieurs  re'coltes,  mais  rare  partout  sauf  a  1'ile  Stewart, 
oil  elle  atteignait  jusqu'a  135  M,  une  taille  relativement  tres  forte.  Celle  du  type  mesure 
rarement  plus  de  120  M. 


RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE  251 

A  Sydney,  les  individus  etaient  vivants,  et  j'ai  pu  m'assurer  que  le  plasma 
etait  le  meme  qu'a  Geneve,  avec  ses  myriades  de  petits  grains  pales,  ses  particules 
nutritives  jaunatres  ou  Ton  reconnait  des  parcelles  arrachees  aux  mousses,  et  son  noyau 
caracteristique. 

Plagiopyxis  labiata,  spec,  nova 
Fig.  1 1 

Dans  les  mousses  des  environs  de  Sydney,  de  Creel,  de  Victoria  (B.C.),  s'est  montre, 
toujours  tres-rare,  un  petit  rhizopode  qui  a  premiere  vue  pouvait  etre  piis  poui  une  des 
nombreuses  formes  de  Difflugia  constricta,  mais  qui  en  realite  doit  rentrer  dans  le 
genre  Plagiopyxis. 

Plus  petite  que  dans  1'espece  precedente,  la  coquille,  de  80  a  88  M  de  diametre, 
brunatre,  chitino'ide  avec  pierres  de  recouvrement,  hdmisphe'rique  avec  face  dorsale 
sure'levee,  est  pourvue  d'un  orifice  allonge  en  fente,  ventral,  excentrique,  tres-rapproche 
du  bord  anterieur.  Le  peristome,  alors,  simplement  arrondi  sur  1'un  de  ses  bords  (bord 
anterieur),  est  prolonge  sur  1'autre  bord  d'une  levre  plus  ou  moins  proeminente,  une 
sorte  de  languette  vaguement  triangulaire,  qui  plonge  en  avant  vers  1'inte'rieur  de  la 
coquille,  et  tient  lieu  ici  de  ce  plancher  caracteristique  qui  dans  la  Plagiopyxis  callida 
s'enfonce  jusque  bien  bas  dans  1'interieur. 

Le  plasma,  qu'il  ne  m'a  etc  possible  d'examiner  que  sur  un  seul  individu,  est 
conforme  a  celui  de  1'espece  prece'dente,  completement  bourre  de  grains  pales  extra- 
ordinairement  petits,  puis  renfermant  des  parcelles  de  nourriture  jaunatres,  et  un  noyau 
spherique,  pourvu  a  son  interieur  d'un  gros  nucleole  granule.  II  n'a  pas  e"te  trouve  de 
vesicule  contractile,  laquelle  ne  s'observe  d'ailleurs  que  tres-rarement  dans  ce  genre. 
Quant  aux  pseudopodes,  il  en  est  probablement  ici  de  meme  que  dans  la  Flag,  callida, 
oil  Ton  pent  examiner  bien  des  centaines  d'animaux  pleins  de  vie  sans  les  voir  se 
deVelopper. 

Pontigulasia  bryophila.     PENARD 
Faune  Rhizopodique  Leman,  p.  324.      1902 

Ce  rhizopode,  qui  rappelle  Difflugia  pyriformis  dont  il  se  distingue  avant  tout  par 
1'etranglement  caracteristique  du  col,  ne  s'est  montre  qu'au  Mont  Cook  et  a  Vancouver, 
sous  la  forme  de  quelques  coquilles  vides. 

Pontigulasia  compressa.     CARTER 

Difflugia  compressa.     CARTEK.     Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.  (3),  vol.  13,  p.  22.      1864 
Pontig.  compressa.     CASH  et  HOPKINSON.     Brit.  Freshw.  Rhiz.,  vol.  2,  p.  62.      1909 

Cette   espece   s'est  rencontree  a  Waiata-Rua,  puis  au  Mont  Cook,  toujours  en 

individus  isoles,   qui  revetaient  la  forme   typique,  et  atteignaient  jusqu'a   190  M  en 
longueur. 

BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.  1907-9.     VOL.  I.  G 


252  E    PENARD 

Cette  Pontigtila&a  a  ete  signalee  dans  ces  dernieres  annees  par  differents 
auteurs  comme  6tant  identiqne  a  Pontiff,  bigibbosa,  PENARD,  laquelle  habite  les 
lacs  profonds.  A  differentes  reprises,  en  1909  et  1910,  je  1'ai  moi-meme  trouvee 
dans  les  Sphagnum  de  la  Suisse,  et  en  effet,  je  n'y  trouve  pas  de  difference  impor- 
tante  avec  Pont,  bigibbosa.  II  est  done  regrettable  que  cette  derniere  ait,  par 
suite  de  1'ignorance  de  ce  qu'etait  en  realite  la  Difflugia  coniprestsa  de  CARTER, 
ete  eleve'e  au.  rang  d'espece  distincte.  Mais  il  n'en  reste  pas  moins  vrai  qu'entre 
la  Pont,  compressa,  CARTER,  et  la  grande  forme  lacustre,  la  difference  est  tres- 
grande ;  dans  le  Leman,  les  individus  atteignent  facilement  250  M  en  longueur, 
avec  une  largeur  si  considerable  qu'elle  egale  tres-souvent  la  longueur,  et  dans  des 
cas  exceptionnels  va  meme  jusqu'a  la  depasser. 


Quadrula  irregularis.     ARCHER 
Quart.  Journ.  Micr.  Sci.,  vol.  17,  p.  103.      1877 

Cette  espece  est  assez  rare  dans  les  mousses ;  aussi  ne  s'est-elle  trouvee  repre- 
sentee  dans  les  collections  de  Mr.  Murray  que  dans  une  seule  station,  Suva  dans 
1'archipel  des  Fiji  (nous  1'avons  pourtant  dejk  rencontrtSe,  on  se  le  rappelle,  dans 
les  petits  lacs  du  Cape  Itoyds).  Mais  a  Suva,  les  conditions  etaient  un  pen 
speciales  ;  les  mousses  avaient  ete"  recoltees  au  bord  d'un  marecage,  puis  dans  les 
fosses  pres  de  la  route ;  aussi  cette  espece  n'etait-elle  peut-etre  pas  la  bryophile.1 


Quadrula  symmetrica.     F.  E.  SCHULZE 
Arch.  f.  Mikr.,  Anat.,  Bd  11,  p.  329.      1875 

C'est  dans  les  Sphagnum,  il  Vancouver  et  dans  les  Alpes  australiennes,  que 
s'est  rencontree  cette  espece,  laquelle  n'habite  pas  les  mousses  proprement  dites. 

II  ne  s'en  est  montre  qu'un  nombre  extremement  restreint  d'individus ;  mais 
j'ai  pu  faire,  cependant,  a  deux  reprises  et  sur  des  coquilles  provenant  de  Vancouver, 
certaines  experiences  qui  ne  seront  pas  hors  de  place  ici : 

On  sait  que  LAGERHEIM  (Geol.  Foren.  Forhand,  torn.  24)  a  fait  en  1902  la 
curieuse  constatation  que  les  plaques  caracteristiques  de  la  Quadrula  irregularis 
etaient,  non  pas  siliceuses,  mais  formees  d'une  combination  de  calcium.  En  1893, 
puis  plus  tard  encore,  je  confirmais  de  mon  cote  les  observations  de  LAGERHEIM, 
en  montrant  qu'en  tout  cas  ces  plaques  etaient  solubles  dans  1'acide  sulfurique 
concentre  a  chaud.  Awerinzew,  en  1907  (Zool.  Anzeiger,  B'1  31,  No.  8\  confirme 
a  son  tour  la  chose,  et  se  demande  en  meme  temps  si,  malgre  la  grande  analogic 
qui  existe  dans  la  structure  de  la  coquille,  il  ne  faudrait  pas  voir  dans  Quad. 

1  Voir  pages  suivantes  pour  les  observations  sur  la  nature  des  plaques  dans  cette  espece 


RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE 

irregularis  et  Quad,  symmetrica  deux  rhizopodes  tres-eloignes  1'un  de  1'autre,  et 
appartenant  en  realite  a  des  genres  differents. 

Cette  hypothese  est  tres-naturelle  en  elle-meme,  et  pour  mon  compte,  c'est 
ainsi  que,  depuis  1893,  je  m'expliquais  la  chose ;  mais  encore  fallait-il  connaitre 
d'une  maniere  certaine  la  composition  des  plaques  dans  la  Quad,  symmetrica. 
Uepuis  longtemps  j'avais  pu  m'assurer,  sur  une  coquille  appartenant  a  une  grande 
variete  speciale  provenant  des  Montagnes  Kocrreuses,  que  les  plaques  etaient 
siliceuses ;  mais  c'etait  la,  apres  tout,  une  variete ;  il  fallait  faire  des  experiences 
sur  le  type. 

Or,  en  experimentant  sur  la  Quad,  symmetrica  de  Vancouver,  qui  represente 
bien  le  type  normal,  j'ai  pu  constater  que  les  plaques  sont  purement  siliceuses ; 
1'acide  sulfurique  bouillant  les  laisse  parfaitement  indemnes,  et  on  les  retrouve 
bien  nettes  egalement  apres  Faction  du  chalumeau.  Je  serais  done  assez  dispose 
a  adopter  1'opinion  d'AwERixzEW,  qui  suppose  une  simple  convergence  dans  deux 
orgauismes  generiquement  differents.1 

Peut-etre  me  sera-t-il  permis,  a  ce  propos,  d'ajouter  quelques  mots  a  propos 
d'experiences  de  m6me  nature  faites  sur  la  Quadrula  irregularis  : 

Dans  cette  espece,  1'acide  sulfurique  concentre  froid  dissout  a  peine,  tres- 
difRcilement,  les  plaques;  a  chaud,  il  les  dissout  de  suite;  1'acide  chlorhydrique 
dissout  les  plaques,  mais  laisse  intacte  la  pellicule  fondamentale,  sur  laquelle  on 
voit  encore,  nettement  imprimees,  les  marques  des  plaques  disparues ;  1'acide  acetique, 
par  centre,  n'a  aucune  action ;  il  laisse  les  plaques  absolument  indemnes.  Pour 
dissoudre  les  plaques  dans  cette  espece,  il  faut  done  en  tout  cas  un  acide  fort,  et 
ce  n'est  pas  la,  sans  doute,  un  simple  carbonate  de  chaux. 


Sphertoderia  Ji&sirostris.     PENAKD 
Mem.  Soc.  Phys.  Hist.  Nat.,  Geneve,  vol.  31,  p.  187.      1890 

Une  seule  coquille  vide,  au  Mont  Cook. 


Trinema  complanatum.     PENARD 

M&n.  Soc.  Phys.  Hist.  Nat.,  Geneve,  vol.  31,  p.  187.      1890 

Cette  petite  espece,  tres-frequente  en  general  dans  les  mousses,  s'est  rencontree 
dans  quelques-unes  des  recoltes. 

1   AWERINZEW  se  fonde  d'ailleurs,  et  a  juste  titre,  non  pas  seulement  sur  la  composition  des  plaques,  mais 
encore  sur  la  forme  de  1'ouverture  buccale,  ainsi  que  sur  la  structure  differente  du  plasma. 


254  E.  PENARD 

Trinema  enchelys.     DUJARDIN 
Triiieme,  Duj.     Ann.  Sci.  Nat.,  p.  205.      1836 

Tres-frequente  dans  les  mousses,  la  Trinema  enchelys  s'est  montree  dans  un 
grand  nombre  de  stations,  tres-variable  comme  toujours,  et  ofFrant  surtout  deux 
formes  bien  accusees,  1'une  d'elles  belle,  grande,  a  fortes  ecailles  (la  forme  typique 
de  LKIDY,  Fig.  1,  2,  3,  4,  de  sa  PI.  39);  1'autre,  particuliere  aux  mousses,  toute 
differente  en  realite  de  la  premiere  (PENARD,  Faune  Rhizop.  Leman,  p.  527,  Fig.  5), 
et  qui  rappelle  de  fort  pres,  a  premiere  vue,  le  Corythion  dubium  de  TARANEK. 


Trinema  lineare.     PENARD 
Mem.  Soc.  Phys.  Hist.  Nat.,  Geneve,  vol.  31,  p.  187 

Cette  espece,  toute  petite,  chetive  et  qui  passe  facilement  inapergue,  a  ate"  notee 
dans  bon  nombre  de  stations,  soit  enkystee,  soit  a  I'd  tat  de  coquilles  vides. 


CONCLUSIONS 

LES  Rhizopodes  d'eau  douce  rapportes  par  le  biologiste  du  Nimrod  forment 
aujourd'hui  la  liste  assez  respectable  de  79  especes ;  assez  respectable  en  effet, 
car,  a  une  ou  deux  exceptions  pres,  les  collections  etaient  representees  par  des 
mousses,  et  seule  la  faune  des  mousses  s'y  est  trouvde,  presque  au  complet.  Les 
Sphagnum,  egalement,  se  sont  montrds  reprdsentes  dans  quelques-unes  des  recoltes, 
et  la  comme  partout,  ont  permis  d'etudier  quelques  especes  particulieres,  qui  manquent 
aux  mousses  proprement  dites. 

II  est  bien  evident  que  les  marecages,  les  etangs,  les  flaques  d'eau  douce,  auraient 
fourni  un  supplement  considerable  d'informations ;  on  eut  trouve*  des  Arcelles,  des 
Difflugies,  et  bien  d'autres  choses  encore ;  mais  dans  les  circonstances  ou  operait 
Mr.  Murray,  il  ne  faliait  guere  songer  a  ce  genre  de  recoltes ;  et  d'ailleurs,  on  peut 
se  demander  si  1'absence,  dans  ces  collections,  de  Rhizopodes  purement  aquatiques 
est  vraiment  a,  regretter. 

Tels  qu'ils  sont,  en  efFet,  les  resultats  acquis  montrent  une  homoge'neite  peut- 
etre  encore  plus  significative  que  s'ils  eussent  ete  fournis  par  differents  milieux. 

Cette  faune  speciale  et  pourtant  si  riche  encore,  apporte  avec  elle  certains 
renseignements,  quelque  confirmation  ;i  ce  que  nous  savions  deja ;  comme  la  faune 
aquatique,  elle  est  cosmopolite ;  mais  comme  elle  aussi,  elle  ne  Test  pas  d'une 
maniere  absolue ;  certaines  especes  sont  localisees,  et  leur  rencontre  peut  donner  lieu 
a  des  conclusions  d'un  interet  special. 

La  Nebela  mis,  par  exemple,  decrite  il  y  a  longtemps  deja  comme  provenant 
du  Cap  Horn,  et  que  le  Prof.  Richters  a  retrouvee  dans  toute  une  se"rie  de  locality's : 
Australie,  N"<!  Zelande,  Hawaii,  Java,  lies  Chatham,  Staaten  Isld,  Falklands, 
Kerguelen,  St.  Paul,  etc.  etc.,  s'est  montree  commune  dans  1'hemisphere  austral  et 
sur  le  territoire  du  Pacifique  tout  entier ;  on  la  trouve  encore  a  Vancouver,  mais  elle 
ue  semble  pas  penetrer  dans  1'interieur  du  continent  americain.  Les  Nebela  certesi, 
Nebela  martiali,  ces  formes  si  curieuses,  que  CEKTES  avait  egalement  observees 
au  Cap  Horn,  ct  qui  n'avaient  pas  e"te  vues  depuis,  ont  refait  leur  apparition,  et 
se  sont  montrees,  dans  le  Pacifique,  avec  leurs  caracteres  nettement  marquds ; 
Hyalosphenia  cockayni  semble  dans  le  Pacifique  sud  tenir  la  place  de  I'Hyalosph. 
papilio  en  Europe  et  aux  Etats-Unis ;  et  la  Centropyxis  horrida  possede  une  aire 
de  dispersion  peut-etre  plus  localisee  encore. 

Toutes  ces  donnees,  sans  doute,  n'apportent  pas  avec  elles  une  bien  grande 
certitude ;  les  Rhizopodes  d'eau  douce  sont  trop  insuffisamment  connus  pour  que 

255 


256  E.  PENARD 

Ton  soit  en  droit  de  tirer  de  leur  presence  des  conclusions  evidentes ;  mais  ils  ont 
pourtant  leur  mot  a  dire,  eux  aussi,  dans  les  questions  de  geographic  zoologique. 

On  les  a  trop  negliges  jusqu'ici,  et,  il  faut  bien  le  dire,  il  est  pen  de  naturalistes 
qui  semblent  se  reiidre  compte  de  1'importance  generale  qu'ils  pourraient  bien  avoir 
en  effet.  Certains  de  ces  organismes,  il  est  vrai,  se  montrent  sous  des  aspects  si 
divers,  ou  sous  la  forme  de  varietes  si  nombreuses,  qu'ils  semblent  n'etre  la  que 
pour  deconcerter  1'observateur ;  mais  beaucoup  d'autres,  les  plus  nombreux  meme, 
sont  parfaitement  nets  et  fixes  dans  leurs  caracteres ;  tout  au  moins  ne  varient-ils 
que  dans  une  faible  mesure,  souvent  beaucoup  moins,  meme,  que  tant  d'etres  plus 
Sieves  en  organisation,  Entomostraces,  Insectes,  Le'pidopteres,  qui  pourtant  sont 
consideres  comme  ayant  une  certaine  importance  dans  les  questions  de  faunistique 
generale. 

Dans  le  compte-rendu  donne  tout  dernierement  dans  "  Nature " l  du  volume  de 
CASH  et  HOPKINSUN  sur  les  Rhizopodes  d'eau  douce,  on  trouve  exprimee  dans  les 
termes  suivants  1'opinion  qui,  me  semble-t-il,  est  a  peu  pres  celle  de  la  majorite  des 
naturalistes:  "To  the  working  microscopist  who  is  anxious  to  find  names  for  the 
varieties  he  discovers  in  the  fresh-waters  that  he  visits,  the  book  will  doubtless  be 
of  some  value,  for  it  gives  him  .  .  ."  &c.  Mais  tout  cela  n'est  pas  tout-a-fait 
juste ;  pour  les  Rhizopodes,  il  est  vrai,  et  plus  pour  eux  peut-etre  que  pour  tout  autre 
groupe  animal,  les  etudes  systematiques  sont  necessaires,  et  le  seront  longtemps 
encore ;  mais  non  pas  pour  collectionner  des  noms ;  c'est  pour  arriver  a  des  faits 
qu'il  faut  cataloguer ;  quand  la  systematique  sera  mieux  fixe^e,  on  reconnaitra  a  ces 
organismes  une  importance  plus  grande  qu'on  ne  1'a  soupconnee  jusqu'ici. 

Et  alors,  si  cette  importance  etait  reconnue,  si  dans  chaque  expedition  aux  pays 
uouveaux  le  natural iste  decidait  de  songer  a  ces  organismes  un  peu  plus  qu'on  ne 
1'a  fait  jusqu'a  ce  jour,  si  les  mousses  et  les  sphagnum  etaient  consideres  comme 
devant  avoir  leur  juste  part  dans  la  repartition  entre  botanistes  et  zoologistes,  quoi 
de  plus  aise  que  de  les  re"colter?  quelques  petits  paquets  de  vegetaux  sees,  et  vous 
aurez  toute  une  faune,  Rotiferes,  Tardigrades,  Nematodes,  Rhizopodes  et  d'autres 
choses  encore,  que  souvent  vous  pourrez  rapporter  vivants,  et  qui  se  trouveront  avoir 
leur  importance  dans  les  re"sultats  biologiques  obtenus. 

Sous  ce  rapport  aussi,  me  semble-t-il,  les  collections  recueillies  par  Mr.  Murray 
renferment  un  enseignement.  Pour  moi,  j'ai  pris  a  cette  etude  un  interet  tout  par- 
ticulier,  et  en  rendant  compte  du  resultat  de  mes  recherches,  c'est  avec  autant  de 
plaisir  que  de  reconnaissance  que  je  remercierai  Sir  Ernest  Shackleton  et  Mr.  James 
Murray  d' avoir  bien  voulu  me  confier  ces  collections. 

1  No.  2118,  vol.  83,  June  2,  1910. 


LISTE    BIBLIOGRAPIIIQUE 

CASH,  J.,  AND  HOPKINSOX,  J.,  "The  British  Freshwater  Rhizopoda  and  Heliozoa."     Printed  for  the  Ray 
Society.     Vol.  ii.     1909. 

CERTES,  A.,  "  Mission  scientifique  du  Cap  Horn,"  torn,  vi.,  Zoologie,  1889. 

LEIDY,  J.,  '-Freshwater  Rhizopods  of  North  America,"  Report  of  the  United  States  Geol.  Survey,  vol.  xii., 
1879. 

LENHESFELTJ,  R.  V.,  "  Australian   Freshwater  Rhizopods,"  Proceed.  Linnaean  Soc.  of  New  South   Wales, 
vol.  x.,  1885,  p.  724. 

MURRAY,  JAMES,  "  On   Collecting   at  Cape   Royds,"  British  Antarctic  Exped.,   1907-9.     Biology,  vol.  i. 
part  i. 

,,  "On   Microscopic   Life  at  Cape    Royds,"  British  Antarctic  Exped.,  1907-9.      Biology, 

vol.  i.  part  ii. 

PENARD,    E.,    "  On   Some    Rhizopods   from   the    Sikkim    Himalaya,"    Journ.    Roy.    Microsc.    Soc.,    1907, 
pp.  274-78. 

,,  "  Faune  Rhizopodique  du  Bassin  du  Leman,"  Geneve,  1902. 

RICHTERS,  F.,  "  Fauna  der  Moosrasen  des  Gaussbergs  und  einiger  siidlichen  Inseln,"  Deutsche  Siidpolar 
Exped.,  1901-3,  Bd.  9,  Zool. 

„  "  Moosbewohner,"  Schwedische  Siidpolar  Exped.,  1901-3,  Bd.  6,  1908. 

,,  "  Moosfauna  Australiens,  etc.,"  Zool.  Jahrbuch. :  AU.fiir  Syst.,  Bd.  26,  1908,  p.  196. 

„  "  Moosfauna-Studien,"  Her.  der  Senclcbg.  Naff.  Ges.  Frankfurt-a-M.,  1908,  p.  22. 

SCHEWIAKOFF,   W.,   "  Ueber   die   geographische   Verbreitung   der   Siissw.    Protozoen,"  Mem.    Acad.   Sci., 
Petersbourg,  vii.  Ser.,  torn.  xli.  No.  8. 

WHITELEGGE,  T.,  "  Invertebrate  Fauna  of  Port  Jackson  and  Neighbourhood,"  Journ.  and  Proceed.  Roy. 
Soc.  New  South  Wales,  vol.  23,  1899,  p.  296. 

„  "List  of  the  Freshwater   Rhizopods  of  New  South  Wales,"  Proceed,  of  the  Linnivan 

Soc.  of  New  South  Wales,  Ser.  2,  vol.  i.,  1886,  p.  497. 


259 


PLATE    XXII 


H 


260 


EXPLICATION  DE  LA  PLANCHE  XXII 

FIGURE  1. — Bullinula  indica,  petite  vane" to  ronde. 

FIGURE  2. — Oentropyxia  horrida.     (a)  Forme  type  ;  (b)  forme  de"pourvue  d'epines. 

FIGURE  3. — Corythion  dubium.     (a)  Varidte'  orbiculaire  ;  (b)  varie"te  spicatum. 

FIGURE  4. — Euglypha  brachiata.     (a)  Aspect  general  de  la  coquille ;    (6)  la  meme  vue 
d'en  haut,  pour  montrer  1'aplatissement  des  "  bras." 

FIGURE  5. — Hyalosphenia  cockayni.     (a)  Vue  par  le  cote*  large  :  sur  le  col  on  remarque 
deux  ecailles  buccales  d'une  Euglypha ;  (b)  vue  par  le  c6te"  e"troit. 


BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.  1907-9 


VOL.  I.  PLATE  XXII 


PENARD:  RHIZOPODES 


3 


E.  Peiiard  del. 


261 


PLATE    XXIII 


262 


EXPLICATION  DE  LA  PLANCHE  XXIII 

FIGURE  6. — Hyalosphenia  subftava.     (a)  Vue  par  le  c6td  large ;  (b)  cote  etroit ;  (c)  la 
coquille  vue  d'en  haut  par  1' orifice  buccal. 

FIGURE  7. — Nebela  certesi.     (a)  Cdte1  large  ;  (b)  cdte  etroit. 

FIGURE  8. — Nebela  griseola.     (a)  Coquille  vide;  (b)  une  autre,  vue  d'en  haut. 

FIGURE  9. — Nebela  martiali.     (a)  C6te"  large;  (b)  cote"  etroit. 

FIGURE  10. — Nebela  vas.     Sur  le  col,  ou  voit  trois  ^cailles  buccales  d'Euglypha. 

FIGURE  11. — Plagiopyxis  labiata.     La  coquille  vue  par  la  face  ventrale. 


BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.   1907-9 


VOL.  I.  PLATE  XXIII 


PENARD:  RHIZOPODES 


a 


6 


V 


11 


a 


10 


E.  Penard  del. 


BRITISH   ANTARCTIC  EXPEDITION  1907-9 

UNDER  THE  COMMAND  OF  SIR  E.  H.  SHACKLETON,  C.V.O. 

REPORTS  ON   THE   SCIENTIFIC   INVESTIGATIONS 


VOL.    I 

BIOLOGY 

EDITOR    -    -    JAMES  MURRAY 

PART   VII 

FRESHWATER  ALG^E 

BY  W.  WEST,  F.L.S.,  AND  G.  S.  WEST,  M.A.,  D.Sc.,    F.L.S. 


(WITH  THREE  PLATES) 


LONDON 
PUBLISHED  FOR  THE  EXPEDITION  BY  WILLIAM  HEINEMANN 

21    BEDFORD  STKKKT.  W.C. 

1911 

ISSUED  SEPARATELY,    DECEMBER   1911 
PRICE  TIIIIKE  SHILLINGS  NET 


REPORTS  ALREADY  ISSUED 

VOL.  I.  PART  I.,  ON  COLLECTING  AT  CAPE  ROYDS 

BY  JAMES  MURRAY  PRICE  Is.  6d.  NET 

VOL.  I.  PART  II.,  ON  MICROSCOPIC  LIFE  AT  CAPE  ROYDS 

Bv  JAMES  MURRAY  PRICE  5s.  Od.  NET 

VOL.  I.  PART  III.,  ANTARCTIC  ROTIFERA 

BY  JAMES  MURRAY  PR,CE  5s.  Od.  NET 

VOL.  I.  PART  IV.,  MUSCI 

BY  JULES  CARDOT  PRICE  Is.  Od.  NET 

VOL.  I.  PART  V.,  TARDIGRADA 

BY  JAMES  MURRAY  PRICE  10s.  Od.  NET 

VOL.  I.  PART  VI.,  RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE 

BY  EUGENE  PENARD  PR,CE  3s.  Od.  NET 


PART   VII 

FRESHWATER  ALG^E 

BY  W.  WEST,  F.L.S.,  AND  G.  S.  WEST,  M.A.,  D.Sc.,  F.L.S. 

With  Plates  XXIV  to  XXVI 

INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS 

UP  to  the  present  our  knowledge  of  Antarctic  Freshwater  Algae  is  very  scanty.  The 
first  records  were  by  Hooker  and  Harvey*  of  certain  forms  collected  during  the 
voyage  of  H.M.  ships  Erebus  and  Terror  from  1839  to  1843.  Wildemanf  has  given 
a  brief  account  of  the  Algae  collected  by  Racovitza  on  the  Antarctic  expedition  of 
the  s.y.  Belgica,  and  Van  HeurckJ  has  worked  out  the  diatoms  of  this  expedition 
very  fully.  Wille§  has  also  recorded  two  Algse  from  Cape  Adare,  South  Victoria  Land 
(rather  more  than  71°  S.  lat.),  collected  on  the  Borchgrevink  Antarctic  Expedition. 
Other  papers  dealing  more  or  less  with  Antarctic  freshwater  algae  are  those  of  Reinsch 
on  Algae  collected  in  Kerguelen  Land||  and  in  South  Georgia.**  These  islands,  how- 
ever, do  not  extend  beyond  55°  S.  lat.,  and  they  possess  an  Alga-flora  which  cannot 
be  regarded  as  of  an  Antarctic  type. 

The  algal  material  collected  by  the  different  members  of  the  expedition,  but  mostly 
by  Mr.  James  Murray,  is  probably  fairly  representative  of  the  Alga-flora  of  the 
Antarctic  continent  in  the  vicinity  of  Ross  Island.  The  Algae  were  found  on  the 
ground,  on  stones,  and  in  the  lakes,  and  owing  to  the  severity  of  the  weather  conditions 
they  are  completely  frozen  for  at  least  nine  months  of  the  year.  In  some  cases  it 
appears  that  the  lake  does  not  become  free  from  ice  for  several  years,  and  the  Algae 
have  thus  to  retain  their  vitality  in  a  frozen  state  for  an  extended  period.  Many  of 

*  J.  D.  Hooker  and  W.  H.  Harvey,  "  Algoe  in  J.  D.  Hooker's  Botany  of  the  Antarctic  Voyage,"  Flora  Antarc- 
tica, Part  I.,  London,  1847. 

f  E.  de  Wildeman,  "  Note  preliminaire  sur  lea  Algues  rapportees  par  M.  E.  Racovitza,  naturaliste  de  1'expedition 
antarctique  beige,"  Bull.  Acad.  Soy.  Belgique,  1900. 

{  Van  Heurck,  "  Diatomees  in  Result.  Voyage  du  s.y.  Belyica  en  1897-99,"  Anvers,  1909,  pp.  1-128,  Pis.  I. -XIII. 

§  N.  Wille,  "  Antarktische  Algen  in  Mittheilungen  tiber  einigc  von  C.  E.  Borchgrevink  auf  dem  antarctischen 
Festlande  gesanimelte  Pflanzen,"  Nyt  Mag.  f.  Naturvidenskab,  Bd.  40,  Heft  III.  1902. 

||  P.  F.  Reinsch,  "  Species  ac.  gener.  Nov.  Algarum  aq.  dulc.  Expedit.  Vener.  transit,  hieme  1874-75  in  insul. 
Kerguelensi  a  cl.  Eaton  collectis,"  Journ.  Linn.  Soc.  lot.,  xv.,  1876. 

**  P.  F.  Reinsch,  "  Spec,  et  gen.  nov.  Algarum  ex  insul.  Georgia  Austr.,"  Ber.  Deutsch.  botan.  Oes.,  vi.,  1888. 

BEIT.  ANTAKCT.  EXPED.   1907-9.      VOL  I.      PART  7,  ISSUED  DECEMBER  1911  I 

0 


264  W.   AND  G-   S.  WEST 

them  were  actually  collected  by  being  thawed  out  of  the  ice,  in  which  they  could  be 
seen  embedded.  Others  were  obtained  from  under  the  ice  of  the  lakes,  and  from  the 
lake- bottom,  by  digging  through  a  great  thickness  of  ice,  in  one  case  as  much  as  15  feet. 
Yet  others  were  exposed  on  the  surface  of  the  ice  as  the  latter  was  removed  by  ablation 
during  the  blizzards. 

The  smaller  ponds  completely  thawed  in  the  brief  summer  period,  but  they  did 
not  contain  so  many  Algae  as  the  more  or  less  frozen  lakes. 

It  is  evident  from  the  foregoing  remarks  that  the  Antarctic  Freshwater  Algae  have 
a  very  severe  struggle  for  existence,  and  evidences  of  this  can  be  seen  in  many  ways. 
Both  slowness  of  growth  and  interrupted  growth  are  noticeable  in  the  Prasiolas,  and 
the  frustules  of  the  more  delicate  diatoms,  such  as  Tropidoneis  Icevissima,  exhibit 
considerable  deformity. 

The  Algae  observed  in  the  collections  were  as  follows : 

Genera  Species 

Chlorophyceae    .....           6  .          .  16 

Bacillarieae         .....         16  ..  30 

Myxophyceae 11  .         .  39 

33  84 

Thus  the  Chlorophyceae  were  but  feebly  represented,  and  it  should  be  remarked 
that  no  Conjugatae  were  observed.  The  Myxophyceae  (or  Blue-green  Algae)  were  the 
most  frequent,  although  the  diatoms  were  very  numerous  in  some  of  the  lakes.  Many 
representatives  of  both  these  groups  were  mixed  up  in  the  sediment  of  the  ponds  and 
lakes,  and  on  the  surface  of  the  latter,  often  embedded  in  the  ice,  were  very  extensive 
sheets  of  Myxophycese.  These  sheets  were  often  of  a  brilliant  blue-green  colour,  but 
were  frequently  bleached,  owing  most  probably  to  the  intensity"  of  the  light,  and 
were  usually  of  a  warm  brown  colour. 

There  was  a  conspicuous  absence  of  red  or  yellow  snow  in  the  region  visited  by 
the  expedition.  A  small  amount  of  yellow  snow  was  observed  by  Mr.  R.  E.  Priestley, 
of  the  Western  Geological  Party,  but  the  collection  was  lost  with  much  of  the  rest  of 
the  impedimenta  on  that  memorable  escape  of  the  members  of  this  party  from  a 
drifting  ice-floe. 

Special  attention  is  directed  to  the  great  salinity  of  the  water  of  Green  Lake,  from 
which  locality  quite  a  large  percentage  of  the  species  recorded  in  this  paper  were 
obtained.  These  species,  which  included  a  number  of  Algae  generally  regarded  as 
freshwater  types,  were  certainly  living  in  water  in  which  there  was  a  much  greater 
degree  of  concentration  of  salts  than  in  ordinary  sea- water.  A  number  of  typical 
maiine  diatoms  occurred  in  this  lake,  but  other  species  which  were  here  plentiful 
also  occurred  in  other  lakes  and  ponds  in  which  the  water  was  not  strongly  saline.  We 
have  not,  however,  as  yet  any  information  as  to  the  degree  of  salinity  of  Green  Lake 
in  summer,  when  the  ice  is  all  melted. 


FRESHWATER  ALGM  265 

Compared  with  the  Alga-flora  of  Arctic  land-areas  in  a  similar  latitude,  that  of 
the  Antarctic  continent  is  distinctly  poor.  The  Green  Algse  are  relatively  fewer,  and 
there  is  a  lack  of  diversity  among  the  species  of  diatoms.  Both  of  these  facts  may 
be  directly  due  to  the  undoubted  salinity  of  most  of  the  lakes  near  the  coast.  Such 
a  condition  would  be  prejudicial  to  the  growth  of  most  Green  Algse,  and  the  majority 
of  freshwater  species  of  diatoms  would  be  excluded  for  the  same  reason.  The  most 
truly  freshwater  of  the  diatoms  observed  were_jthpse  from  the  ponds  on  the  lower 
slopes  of  Mt.  Erebus.  The  comparative  poorness  of  the  Antarctic  Alga-flora  may 
also -be  in  part  due  to  the  greater  severity  of  the  climate  combined  with  the  remoteness 
of  the  Antarctic  continent  from  other  continental  areas. 

BRIEF  ACCOUNT   OF   THE  COLLECTIONS 

Most  of  the  collections  were  made  by  Mr.  James  Murray  in  the  near  vicinity  of 
the  winter  quarters  of  the  Expedition  at  Cape  Royds  on  Ross  Island.  One  was  made 
by  the  leader  of  the  Expedition  at  Hut  Point,  Ross  Island,  and  two  others  on  the 
mainland  of  South  Victoria  Land.  The  following  data  will  include  brief  statements 
as  to  the  habitats  and  the  principal  Algse  found  in  each  collection. 

I.    Ross  ISLAND 

The  camp  at  Cape  Royds  was  at  77°  32'  S.  lat.  and  166°  12'  E.  long.  All  the 
collections  were  made  within  a  few  miles  of  this,  except  the  one  at  Hut  Point,  lat. 
77°  50'  S.  The  numerous  ponds  and  lakes  near  the  camp  yielded  quite  a  number  of 
interesting  Algse,  and  special  attention  should  be  drawn  to  the  numerous  Blue- green 
Algse,  some  of  which  occurred  in  extensive  sheet- like  expansions. 

1  Pony  Lake,  Cape  Royds 

April  22,  1908,  and  January  4,  1909;  coll.  J.  Murray.  Close  to  winter  quarters. 
Never  clear  of  ice  except  in  small  parts  between  November  28,  1908,  and  the  end  of 
January  1909.  Temperature  of  water  never  much  above  freezing-point,  the  highest 
record  being  35°  F.  on  December  4,  1908. 

In  January  the  material  was  distinctly  green,  and  consisted  of  quantities  of 
Chlamydomonas  subcaudata  and  C.  intermedia  forma  antarctica  among  the  numerous 
trichomes  of  Phormidium  autumnale. 

In  April  the  material  (obtained  from  under  the  ice)  was  darker  in  colour  and 
contained  fewer  Algse. 

In  both  months  filaments  of  the  curiously  contorted  Phormidium  antarcticum 
were  common,  also  Pleurococcus  frigidus. 

2  Ponds,  Cape  Royds 

A  number  of  small  ponds  in  which  the  temperature  about  the  end  of  December  rose 
to  60°  F.  Coll.  J.  Murray. 


266  W.  AND  G.  S.  WEST 

(a)  December  1908.     Great  quantity  of  Nostoc  antarctica  with  many  diatoms. 

(b)  December   1908.     Large    quantity   of   Nostoc   antarctica    with    several   Green 
Algse. 

(c)  January  26,   1909.     Half  a  mile  from  camp.     Mostly  Ulothrix    subtilis  var. 
mriabilis,   with   several  blue- green  filamentous  forms,   including  Oscillatoria  terebri- 
f  or  mis  forma  tennis,  and  0.  amphibia  var.  robusta. 

3  Green  Lake,  Cape  Royds 

Half  a  mile  from  camp.     Coll.  J.  Murray.     Three  collections  were  made: 

(a)  November  29,  1908.     Some  open  water  on  the  lake. 

(b)  January  3,  1909.     Temperature  of  open  water  36°  F. 

(c)  February  2,  1909.     Temperature  of  open  water  35°  F.     On  this  day  the  lake 
became  frozen  over  again. 

The  water  of  this  lake  is  very  saline,  and  there  is  always  a  little  water  under  the 
ice.  Owing  to  its  remarkable  salinity,  the  fluid  obtained  from  under  the  ice  at  the 
time  when  it  was  thickest  did  not  freeze  until  the  temperature  was  reduced  to  —  7°  F. 
On  June  26  the  temperature  under  the  ice  was  21°  F.,  and  on  August  6,  1908,  it  was 
8°  F. 

The  lake  contained  twenty-six  species  of  Algse,  among  which  the  Myxophyceae 
predominated.  These  Blue- green  Algae  were  free-floating  in  the  briny  liquid,  no 
extensive  sheets  being  developed.  The  Green  Algse  occurred  mostly  in  February. 
Eleven  species  of  diatoms  were  observed,  almost  all  of  which  were  marine  forms. 
Two  of  them,  however,  Navicula  muticopsis  and  N.  (Pinnularia)  globiceps,  occurred 
plentifully  in  other  situations  which  were  not  so  saline  in  character. 

We  append  a  complete  list  of  the  species  of  Algse  which  lived  in  association  under 
the  conditions  of  great  salinity  prevailing  in  this  lake  : 

Ulothrix  tenerrima  Kiitz.  forma  antarctica. 
U.  cequalis  Kiitz.  forma. 
Pleurococcus  angulosus  Lagerh.  forma. 
PI.  antarcticus  sp.  n. 
PL  dissectus  (Kiitz.)  Nag. 
Trochiscia  aspera  (Reinsch)  Hansg. 
Coscinodiscus  lentiginosus  Jan. 
Hemiaulus  ambiguus  Jan.  var. 
Triceratium  arcticum  Btw. 
Fragilaria  obliquecpstata  V.  Heurck. 

„  „          forma  maxima  V.  Heurck. 

Navicula  muticopsis  V.  Heurck. 
2V.  (Pinnularia)  globiceps  Greg. 
Trachyneis  aspera  (Ehrenb.)  Cleve. 
Tropidoneis  Iwvissima  sp.  n. 


FRESHWATER  ALG^  267 

Cocconeis  litigiosa  V.  Heurck. 

Lyngbya  limnetica  Lemm. 

L.  murrayi  sp.  n. 

Phormidium  fragile  (Menegh.)  Gomont. 

Oscillatoria  deflexa  sp.  n. 

0.  chlorina  Kiitz. 

0   limosa  Ag. 

Chroococcus  cohcerens  (Breb.)  Nag. 

Chr.  minutus  (Kiitz.)  Nag. 

Chr.  minor  (Kiitz.)  Nag.  forma  minima  West. 

Microcystis  chroococcoidea  sp.  n. 

Asterocystis  antarctica  sp.  n. 

4  Penguin  Rookery,  Cape  Royds 

February  3,  1909.  On  the  sloping  ground  below  the  rookery,  largely  permeated 
by  the  drainage  from  this  nesting- place,  were  masses  of  the  Hormidium-  stage  of 
Prasiola  crispa.  Amongst  the  filaments  were  vast  numbers  of  Navicula  muticopsis. 

A  small  pond  in  the  rookery,  which  was  never  observed  with  water  in  it,  contained 
quantities  of  Prasiola  crispa  forma  aspera. 

5  Small,  almost  dried-up  lake,  Cape  Royds 

Not  far  from  the  Penguin  Rookery.  [No  further  data.]  Material  consisted  of  a 
great  quantity  of  Ulothrix  cequalis,  amongst  which  were  Phormidium  retzii  and  large 
numbers  of  Navicula  muticopsis, 

6  Moraines  near  camp,  Cape  Royds 

March  12,  1908  ;  coll.  J.  Murray.  Material  collected  in  underground  pockets, 
believed  to  have  formed  part  of  an  old  lake-bottom.  No  Algae  of  any  kind  were 
observed  in  this  collection. 

7  Recent  geological  deposit  containing  subfossil  diatoms 

Coll.  J.  Murray.  Material  obtained  from  the  summit  of  a  small  hill  about  200 
feet  high,  near  Cape  Royds.  Believed  by  the  geologists  to  be  the  bottom  of  an  old 
tarn. 

Contained  four  species  of  interesting  diatoms,  three  of  which  were  found  in  the 
ponds  and  lakes,  the  remaining  one  being  new.  The  species  were:  Navicula  muti- 
copsis V.  Heurck,  N.  globiceps  Greg.,  N.  peraustralis  sp.  n.,  and  Stauroneis  anceps 
Ehrenb.  var.  amphicephala  Kiitz. 

8  Blue  Lake,  Cape  Royds 

December  10,  1908  ;  coll.  J.  Murray.  This  was  the  largest  lake  of  the  district, 
situated  half  a  mile  east  of  the  camp.  It  was  never  even  partially  melted.  The 


268  W.  AND  G.  S.  WEST 

material  was  obtained  from  under  fifteen  feet  of  ice  in  one  place  and  from  one  to 
three  feet  in  another.  The  ice  of  this  lake  yielded  water  of  such  purity  that  it 
could  be  used  in  place  of  distilled  water  in  chemical  experiments. 

The  material  consisted  of  thin,  tough  sheets  of  Myxophycese,  of  a  deep  blue-green 
colour  and  0.5-1  mm.  in  thickness.  The  greater  part  of  the  material  consisted  of 
Phormidium  glaciale,  with  smaller  quantities  of  Phormidium  inundatum  and  Lyngbya 
martensiana.  A  species  of  Calothrix  was  also  present  in  small  quantity.  Among  the 
blue- green  sheets  were  Pleurococcus  antarcticus  forma  robusta  and  Chlamydomonas 
nivalis  (in  the  resting  state). 

No  diatoms  were  observed  in  the  lake. 

On  the  ground  not  far  away  from  the  margins  of  the  lake  was  an  abundance  of 
Prasiola  crispa  in  the  Schizogonium-stage  and  with  quantities  of  the  earlier  Pleuro- 
coccws-like  stages.  Amongst  it  were  large  numbers  of  Navicula  muticopsis. 

9  Coast  Lake,  Cape  Royds 

One  mile  from  the  camp.  Some  open  water  on  November  28,  1908,  and  all 
clear  of  ice  early  in  January  1909  ;  completely  frozen  over  again  early  in  February. 
Temperature  of  water  at  the  edge  of  lake :  December  4,  1908,  47°  F.  ;  January  2,  1909, 
40°  F. ;  January  18,  1909,  45°  F.  This  was  the  best  lake  for  animal  life. 

(a)  September2,  1908.     Expanded  sheets  of  a  deep  blue-green  colour,  often  bleached 
and  about  1  mm.  in  thickness,  consisting  of  two  species  of  Phormidium,  more  especially 
Ph.  glaciale. 

(b)  January  1909;     coll.  J.   Murray.     Algae   were  all  Myxophyceae,  but  all  free- 
floating.     No  sheet-like  expansions  observed.     No  diatoms.     Mostly  species  of  Oscil- 
latoria,  such    as  0.  deflexa,  0.  cortiana,  0.  formosa,  0.  tennis,  0.  subproboscidea,  and 
0.   limosa,    with  small    quantities   of    Lyngbya    kutzingii,   Microcystis   stagnalis,    and 
Chroococcus  minutus  var.  obliteratus. 

10  Clear  Lake,  Cape  Royds 

April  1908  ;  coll.  J.  Murray.  This  lake  was  one  mile  north  of  the  camp,  and 
was  never  seen  clear  of  ice.  The  temperature  of  the  water  was  just  above  freezing- 
point,  the  highest  reading  being  35°  F.  under  nine  feet  of  ice. 

(a)  Material  obtained  from  the  bottom  of  the  lake  at  a  depth  of  17  feet.     It  was 
black  and  smelt  offensively,   but  contained  many  species  of  ciatoms.     Also  small 
quantities  of  Pleurococcus  antarcticus,  the  cells  of  which  contained  one  or  two  small 
globules  of  a  fatty  oil. 

(b)  Material  melted  from  the  ice  and   consisting  of   layers  of  Algae.     Some  were 
sheets  of  Phormidium  glaciale  with  a  slight  admixture  of  Oscillatoria  cortiana  ;  others 
were  compactly  interwoven  layers  of  Ulothrix  cequalis. 

11  Deep  Lake,  Cape  Royds 

October  1908 ;     coll.   J.  Murray.     Two  miles  south   of  camp,    lying  in   a   deep 


FRESHWATER  ALGM  269 

gully,  and  of  unknown  depth.  The  lake  was  never  seen  clear  of  ice,  but  round  the 
stones  at  the  margin  a  little  water  was  found  in  which  Algae  occurred.  The  tem- 
perature of  the  water  was  just  over  freezing-point.  The  material  consisted  of  thin 
papery  sheets  of  Phormidium  angustissimum,  densely  studded  with  colonies  of 
Pleurococcus  dissectus. 

12  Ponds  on  the  slopes  of  Mt.  Erebus 

There  were  a  number  of  these  ponds  from  whieh^two  collections  were  obtained. 

(«)  March  28,  1908  ;  coll.  D.  Mawson,  from  ponds  rather  near  the  camp.  The 
material  consisted  of  extensive  cartilaginous  patches  of  Lyngbya  erebi,  some  3  to  5  mm. 
in  thickness.  Enclosed  in  this  tough  stratum  were  also  threads  of  Lyngbya  kiUzingii 
and  Oscillatoria  limosa,  together  with  colonies  of  Pleurococcus  dissectus  and  a  few 
specimens  of  Tabellaria  flocculosa,  Cocconema  pusitta,  Navicula  radiosa,  and  Melosira 
varians. 

(b)  December  31,  1908  ;  coll.  J.  Murray,  from  ponds  about  two  miles  from  the 
camp.  The  great  mass  of  material  consisted  of  grey  papery  patches  of  considerable 
extent  and  of  0.5  mm.  in  thickness,  the  nature  of  which  was  difficult  to  determine. 
It  is  probable  that  most  of  it  consisted  of  Leptothrix  or  other  allied  filamentous  bacteria. 
Amongst  these  colourless  threads  were  various  sparsely  scattered  Myxophycese, 
including  Phormidium  autumnale  and  Oscillatoria  producta.  Colonies  of  Pleurococcus 
dissectus  occurred  on  both  sides  of  the  grey  expanded  sheets. 

One  tube  contained  a  quantity  of  Nostoc  antarctica.* 

13  High  moraines  on  Mt.  Erebus 

Altitude  from  300  to  400  feet,  and  situated  about  three  miles  from  the  camp. 
Coll.  J.  Murray. 

(«)  December  1908.  Ulothrix  implexa,  with  large  numbers  of  Diatoms,  especially 
Navicula  muticopsis. 

(b)  January  1909.  Quantities  of  Prasiola  antarctica  attached  to  the  stones. 
Amongst  it  were  Gloeocapsa  shutUcworthiana  and  Aphanocapsa  montana,  the  latter 
covering  quite  large  areas  of  the  stones. 

14  Pond  at  Cape  Barne 

December  12,  1908 ;  coll.  J.  Murray.  Two  miles  south  of  the  camp.  Tem- 
perature of  water  54°  F.  The  pond  was  covered  from  side  to  side  (from  20  to  30 
yards)  with  an  unbroken  sheet  of  Myxophycese  about  12  mm.  in  thickness.  The  mass 
was  kept  floating  by  oxygen  bubbles  generated  by  the  activity  of  the  Algae. 

This  stratum,  which  was  of  a  totally  different  character  from  the  blue- green  sheets 
in  Blue  Lake,  Coast  Lake,  or  Deep  Lake,  consisted  of  Oscillatoria  sancta  and  Phormidium 
autumnale. 

*  Attached  to  some  half-decayed  thalli  of  this  Nostoc  were  a  few  small  colonies  of  the  fungus  Sporodinia  asper- 
gillus  Schroet.  The  specimens,  which  were  carefully  compared  with  British  ones,  were  found  to  be  typical  in  all 
respects.  This  is  probably  the  farthest  south  record  for  any  member  of  the  Mucorinse. 


270  W.  AND  G.  S.  WEST 

15  Lake  at  Hut  Point 

Coll.  Sir  E.  Shackleton.  Not  seen  clear  of  ice.  The  material  was  in  yellow- 
brown  or  greenish-brown  sheets,  and  consisted  mostly  of  a  Leptothrix,  in  which 
matrix  were  Phormidium  inundatum,  Lyngbya  shackletoni,  and  Calothrix  epiphytica. 

II.    SOUTH  VICTORIA  LAND 

Only  two  collections  were  brought  from  this  part  of  the  mainland  of  the  Antarctic 
continent. 

16  Lake  on  west  side  of  McMurdo  Sound 

January  1909 ;  coll.  R.  E.  Priestley.  This  lake  was  close  to  the  "  Stranded 
Moraines  "  and  twenty-five  miles  from  the  camp  at  Cape  Royds.  Lat.  77°  45'  S.  It 
is  said  to  be  a  large  lake,  but  there  were  no  data  as  to  the  temperature  of  the  water 
or  how  long  clear  of  ice.  Water  swarming  with  red  Rotifers.  Yellowish  snow  on 
shores,  believed  to  be  caused  by  Rotifers,  but  specimen  lost. 

The  main  mass  of  the  material  consisted  of  Oscillatoria  priestleyi,  amongst  which 
were  scattered  trichomes  of  Phormidium  autumnale  and  Oscillatoria  deflexa.  Also 
two  species  of  Chroococcus.  Numerous  diatoms  occurred,  of  a  very  similar  nature  to 
those  found  in  the  lakes  of  Ross  Island. 

17  Five  and  a  half  miles  south  of  Cape  Irizar 

On  the  western  side  of  the  Ross  Sea.  October  23,  1908  ;  coll.  Prof.  T.  W.  E. 
David.  Lat.  75°  40'  S.  Situated  120  miles  from  the  camp  at  Cape  Royds. 

The  material  consisted  of  Prasiola  crispa,  mostly  in  the  Hormidium-  and  Schizo- 
gonium-  stages. 


FRESHWATER  ALG^E  271 

SYSTEMATIC  ACCOUNT  OF  SPECIES  OBSERVED 
CHLOROPHYCE^E 

ULOTRICHACE.P 

Genus — ULOTHRIX  Kiitz. 

1   Ulothrix  subtilis  Kiitz. 

Phyc.  Germ.  1845,  p.  197  ;  Tab.  Phycol.  II,  1852,  t.  85,  f.  1 ;  Rabenh.  Flor.  Europ. 
Alg.  III.,  1868,  p.  365. 

Var.  variabilis  (Kiitz.)  Kirchner,  Alg.  Schles.  1878,  p.  77.  U.  variabilis  Kiitz. 
Spec.  Alg.  1849,  p.  346 

Crass,  fil.  6-7  M  ;    cellulis  diametro  lj- 2-plo  longioribus. 

Hob.     In  pond,  Cape  Royds. 

The  specimens  were  a  trifle  thicker  than  the  average  for  this  plant,  but  they  are 
referable  to  no  other  species  of  the  genus.  Some  of  the  more  elongated  cells  had 
formed  "  thin- walled  aplanospores,"  which  were  germinating  while  still  within  the 
original  mother- cell.  It  is  possible  that  this  may  have  been  the  germination  of 
incompletely  formed  zoogonidia,  a  phenomenon  which  occurs  not  infrequently  in 
U.  zonata,  but  the  material  did  not  admit  of  a  determination  of  this  point. 

2  Ulothrix  tenerrima  Kiitz. 

Phyc.  gen.  1843,  p.  253,  t.  9,  f.  1  ;  Phyc.  Germ.  1845,  p.  197 ;  Spec.  Alg.  1849, 
p.  346  ;  Rabenh.  Flor.  Europ.  Alg.  Ill,  1868,  p.  366.  U.  tennis  Kiitz.  Spec.  Alg. 
1849,  p.  346. 

Forma  antarctica.     (PI.  XXIV,  Figs.  5-7) 

Forma  filis  brevissimis,  flexuosis  vel  subcontortis,  libere  natantibus  inter  algas 
varias  Myxophycearum ;  cellulis  plerumque  brevibus,  diametro  J-l-plo  longioribus. 

Crass,  fil.  7-8  M. 

Hob.     Green  Lake. 

The  extreme  shortness  of  the  filaments  and  their  bent  character  are  the  distin- 
guishing features  of  this  form.  It  should  be  emphasised  that  this  form  was  growing 
in  very  saline  water,  with  a  much  greater  concentration  of  salts  than  in  sea- water. 

3  Ulothrix  implexa  Kiitz. 

Spec.  Alg.  1849,  p.  349 ;  Tab.  Phycol.  II,  1852,  t.  94,  f.  2  ;  Hazen  in  Mem.  Torr. 
Bot.  Club,  xi,  No.  2,  1902,  p.  153,  t.  21,  f.  1,  2. 

Crass,  fil.  11.5-12.5  p.;  cellulis  plerumque  paullo  inflatis,  diametro  f-l-plo 
longioribus. 

Hab.     High  moraines,  Mt.  Erebus. 

BRIT.  ANTARCT.   EXPED.   1907-9.      VOL.   I.  K 


272  W.  AND  G.  S.  WEST 

This  is  normally  a  submarine  species,  and  although  in  its  present  habitat  there 
would  doubtless  be  a  substratum  containing  a  considerable  percentage  of  saline 
constituents,  yet  this  locality  was  the  least  saline  of  any  from  which  species  of 
Ulothrix  were  obtained.  Some  of  the  diatoms  amongst  the  mass  of  Ulothrix  were 
typically  submarine. 

4  Ulothrix  cequalis  Kiitz. 

Phyc.  Germ.  1845,  p.  197  ;  Spec.  Alg.  1849,  p.  347  ;  Tab.  PJiycoL  II,  1852,  t.  89,  f.  1. 
Hormiscia  cequalis  Rabenh.  Flor.  Europ.  Alg.  Ill,  1868,  p.  363. 

U.  filis  exacte  cylindricis,  subrectis  vel  leviter  flexuosis,  cellulis  diametro  0.7-1 .3-plo 
longioribus;  chromatophora  parietali  subparva,  sublobata,  plerumque  unilateral! ter 
disposita,  pyrenoidibus  nullis. 

Diam.  cell.  14-20  M;   long.  cell.  10-25  M-    (PL  XXIV,  Figs.  1,  2) 

Hob.     Dried-up  Lake,  Cape  Royds. 

As  the  characters  of  Ulothrix  cequalis  are  still  somewhat  obscure,  we  have  given 
a  concise  description  and  figures  of  the  Antarctic  specimens.  We  attach  no  importance 
to  the  absence  of  pyrenoids  from  the  chloroplasts,  as  this  condition  is  frequent 
throughout  the  genus  when  the  chloroplasts  are  small  and  only  occupy  about  half 
the  cell. 

Both  Ulothrix  cequalis  and  U.  tenerrima  have  been  found  in  the  snow- flora  of 
Spitzbergen.  Cf.  Lagerheim  \nNuova  Notarisia,  ser.  vi,  1895,  p.  6  (sep.). 

Forma  filis  paullo  tenuioribus,  chromatophora  majori  cum  pyrenoide  singulo  vel 
rare  pyrenoidibus  birds. 

Diam.  cell.  13-16  M;  long.  cell.  11.5-18  M-    (PL  XXIV,  Figs.  3,  4) 

Hob.    Green  Lake. 

This  form  was  not  uncommon  among  various  Myxophyceae. 

PRASIOLACE./E 

Genus — PBASIOLA  Ag. 

5  Prasiola  crispa  (Lightf.)  Menegh. 

Kiitz.  Phyc.  gener.  1843,  p.  295 ;  Gay,  Recherches  sur  la  developpement  et  la 
classif.  Alg.  Vertes,  Paris,  1891,  p.  86. 

Hob.  On  the  ground  and  in  a  small  pond,  Cape  Royds ;  also  covering  a  consider- 
able area  of  the  ground  below  the  Penguin  Rookery.  Near  Blue  Lake,  on  the  ground. 
Also  on  the  ground  5j  miles  south  of  Cape  Irizar. 

Nearly  all  the  specimens  of  the  genus  Prasiola  examined  from  the  Antarctic  region 
were  without  doubt  forms  of  P.  crispa. 

In  the  vicinity  of  Cape  Royds  the  Hormidium-   and  Schizogonium-  stages  were 

iquent.     The  cells  measured  9-12   /u.  in  diameter,  and  the  filaments  were  mostly 

rather  short.     In  the  Penguin  Rookery,  where  the  necessary  conditions  for  the  growth 

of  this  Alga  were  fully  realised,  it  occurred  in  great  abundance.     The  filaments  showed 


FRESHWATER  ALGJE  273 

every  sign  of  being  subjected  to  very  rigorous  conditions.  The  small  amount  of 
growth  from  one  of  the  old  cells  of  a  preceding  season  could  be  well  seen  in  most  of 
the  specimens.  (Vide  PL  XXIV,  Figs.  12-14) 

Among  the  filaments  in  the  H or midium- stage,  which  formed  a  felty  covering  over 
the  ground  near  Blue  Lake  on  December  11,  1908,  were  all  the  early  stages  of  develop- 
ment which  so  much  resemble  both  small  and  large  colonies  of  Pleurococcus.  They 
have,  however,  several  distinguishing  features,-  one  of  which  is  in  the  form  and 
disposition  of  the  chloroplast. 

The  expanded  thalli  were  abundant  from  several  places  near  Cape  Royds  and 
from  5j  miles  south  of  Cape  Irizar,  South  Victoria  Land.  All  stages  in  the.develop- 
ment  were  frequent,  and  were  very  similar  to  those  figured  by  Wille  (in  Nyt  Mag  /. 
Naturvidenskab,  Bd.  40,  Heft  III,  1902,  t.  3)  from  another  Antarctic  region.  The 
spacing  of  the  cells  was  exactly  as  in  P.  crispa.  (PL  XXIV,  Figs.  8,  9) 

It  would  appear  that  the  great  mass  of  the  Antarctic  Prasiola  differs  in  no  way 
from  the  northern  P.  crispa.  The  fully  expanded  and  plicate  thalli  attained  a  breadth 
of  13  mm.,  the  cells  varying  from  6  to  9  M  in  diameter. 

Var.  aspera  var.  n.     (PL  XXIV,  Figs.  15-18) 

Filis  in  statu  Hormidio  modo  visis ;  membrana  exteriori  cellularum  incrassata  et 
lamellosa,  marginibus  valde  et  irregulariter  asperis ;  cellulis  ssepe  brevissimis. 

Crass,  fil.  12-18  /x;    diam.  cell.  9-11  /*;    long.  cell.  1.4-7.5  p. 

Hob.     In  small  pond,  Cape  Royds. 

This  peculiarly  rough  variety  certainly  does  not  agree  with  the  published  descrip- 
tions and  figures  of  Prasiola  crenulata.  (Kiitz.)  Gay  (  =  Hormidium  crenulatum  Kiitz. 
Phyc.  Germ.  1845,  p.  193  ;  Ulothrix  crenulata  Kiitz.  Tab.  Phycol.  II,  t.  97,  f.  2). 

6  Prasiola  antarctica  Kiitz. 

Spec.  Alg.  1849,  p.  473  ;  Tab.  Phycolog,  V,  t.  40,  f.  4 ;  Rabenh.  Flor.  Europ.  Alg. 
Ill,  1868,  p.  311. 

Long,  thall.  2-4  mm.;  lat.  thall.  1.5-3  M;  diam.  cell.  4-7  /*.  (PL  XXIV,  Figs. 
10,  11) 

Hob.     High  moraines  on  Mt.  Erebus,  attached  to  stones. 

Although  most  of  the  Prasiolas  examined  from  this  Antarctic  region  were  without 
doubt  forms  of  P.  crispa  the  one  on  the  "  high  moraines  "  of  Mt.  Erebus  was  different 
in  the  growth  of  its  thalli  and  in  the  spacing  of  the  cells.  The  spaces  between  the 
cell- groups  were  wider  and  the  cells  themselves  were  not  so  closely  aggregated.  This 
Prasiola  agrees  in  all  essential  particulars  with  that  described  and  figured  by  Kiitzing 
as  P.  antarctica  ;  and,  moreover,  the  habitat  on  the  moist  stones  of  Mt.  Erebus  is 
precisely  like  that  given  by  Kiitzing  ("  in  rupibus  madidis  ")  for  this  species,  whereas 
P.  crispa  was  only  observed  on  the  ground  or  submerged. 

Under  the  circumstances  we  are  compelled  to  regard  the  Mt.  Erebus  specimens  as 
Prasiola  antarctica,  and  to  disagree  with  Wille' s  assertion,  based  on  a  single  Antarctic 


274  W.  AND  G.  S.  WEST 

sample  from  Cape  Adare,  that  there  is  no  difference  between  P.  antarctica  and  P.  crispa. 
Wille's  figures  show  that  the  specimens  he  examined  were  ordinary  forms  of  P.  crispa, 
but  we  fail  to  see  how  that  in  any  way  affects  the  specific  distinctness  of  P.  antarctica. 


VOLVOCACE.E 
Genus — CHLAMYDOMONAS  Ehrenb. 

7  Chlamydomonas  nivalis  (Bauer)  Wille 

"Alg.  Notizen  XI,"  Nyt  Magazin  f.  Naturvidenskab,  Bd.  41,  Heft  1,  1903, 
pp.  147-149,  t.  3,  f.  44,  45  ;  t.  4,  f.  25.  Sphcerella  nivalis  (Bauer)  Sommerfeld,  1824. 

Diam.  cell.  19-23.5  ^ 

Hob.     Blue  Lake  and  Deep  Lake. 

Only  the  resting  stage  of  this  Alga  was  observed.  The  brillant  red  cells,  full  of 
fatty- oil  reserve,  occurred  in  small  groups  among  Pleurococcus  antarcticus  forma  robusta 
in  the  stratum  of  Phormidium  glaciate. 

8  Chlamydomonas  subcaudata  Wille 

I.e.  p.  118,  t.  3,  f.  12-18. 

Long.  cell.  31-34  /* ;   kt.  16.6-18 /u.     (PI.  XXIV,  Figs.  25-29) 

Hob.    Pony  Lake. 

This  rather  large  species  of  the  genus  was  fairly  common  amongst  Chlamydomonas 
intermedia  forma  antarctica.  It  possesses  very  distinctive  characters,  and  the 
Antarctic  form  scarcely  differs  in  any  way  from  that  originally  described  by  Wille 
from  Aalesund.  The  protoplast  fully  occupied  the  middle  portion  of  the  cell,  but 
both  in  front  and  behind  it  did  not  extend  close  up  to  the  cell- wall.  The  posterior 
extension  of  the  cell- wall  was  generally  acute,  but  no  specimens  were  seen  in  which 
it  was  subcaudate  as  in  Wille's  Fig.  12.  Nearly  all  the  cells  were  very  slightly 
asymmetrical  about  the  longitudinal  axis. 

The  chloroplast  is  massive,  with  a  very  large  pyrenoid  in  its  hinder  half.  The 
pyrenoid  is  in  the  median  line  and  immediately  in  front  of  it  is  the  nucleus.  The 
nucleus  is  thus  slightly  nearer  the  centre  of  the  cell  than  in  Wille's  specimens.  (Of. 
Wille's  Figs.  12-15.)  In  all  the  specimens  seen  the  chloroplast  appeared  to  be  finely 
pitted,  giving  rise  to  flattened  tooth-like  marginal  projections  such  as  those  figured 
by  Wille  in  his  end  view  of  the  cell  (Wille,  Fig.  16),  but  in  the  Antarctic  specimens  it 
was  not  possible  to  ascribe  this  appearance  to  longitudinal  grooves.  We  would  prefer, 
however,  not  to  press  this  point,  as  it  is  often  difficult  to  clearly  make  out  the  finer 
details  of  a  chloroplast  in  preserved  material. 

Many  examples  were  in  the  process  of  formation  of  daughter- cells,  four  of  which 
were  produced  in  the  mother- cell.  The  division  was  evidently  by  two  oblique  planes 
crossing  each  other  almost  at  right  angles.  ( Vide  PI.  XXIV,  Figs.  28,  29) 


FRESHWATER  ALG/E  275 

9  Chlamydomonas  intermedia  Chodat 

In  Bull,  de  VHerb.  Boiss.   torn,  ii,  p.  590,  t,  22,  23  ;   Wille,  I.e.  p.  142,  t,  4,  f.  15. 

Forma  antarctica.     (PI.  XXIV,  Figs.  19-24) 

Forma  minor,  stigmata  juxta  pyrenoidem. 

Long.  cell.  12-15  /*;    lat.  8-10  ^. 

Hob.     Pony  Lake. 

Very  well-preserved  specimens  of  this  species-were  abundant  among  Phormidium 
autumnale.  The  cells  were  ellipsoid,  or  ovoid- ellipsoid,  and  somewhat  smaller  than 
in  the  form  described  by  Chodat,  but  otherwise  they  were  very  similar.  The  proto- 
plast completely  occupied  the  confines  of  the  delicate  cell- wall,  and  the  chloroplast 
was  large  and  cup- shaped,  with  a  prominent  pyrenoid  situated  in  the  median  line 
toward  the  hinder  end  of  the  cell.  The  pigment  spot  (stigma)  was  of  variable  shape, 
generally  elongated  and  somewhat  curved,  and  was  disposed  towards  one  side  of  the 
cell,  either  near  the  pyrenoid  or  half  way  between  the  pyrenoid  and  the  insertion  of 
the  cilia.  Two  daughter- cells  evidently  arose  by  longitudinal  division  of  the  mother- 
cell.  (Figs.  23,  24.) 

One  cell  was  observed  with  two  pyrenoids  (Fig.  24).  This  individual  was  without 
doubt  active  when  fixed  in  formalin,  but  it  is  possible  that  the  division  of  the  pyrenoid 
had  occurred  as  an  antecedent  to  cell- division. 


PLEUROCOCCACEjE 
Genus — PLEUROCOCCUS  Menegh. 

10  Pleurococcus  pachydermus  Lagerh. 

In  Wittr.  et  Nordst.  Alg.  Exsic.  No.  447;   in  Botaniska  Notiser,  1882,  p.  55. 

Forma  cellulis  plerumque  globosis  sed  hinc  inde  anguloso-globosis  e  mutua  pres- 
sione;  crass,  membr.  cell.  2  p.;  diam.  cell,  matur.  17.5-19.5  fj,  cell.  juv.  (gonid.) 
8-8.5  M.  (PL  XXIV,  Figs.  45,  46) 

Hob.     Green  Lake. 

All  these  cells  contained  a  single  parietal  chloroplast  of  considerable  extent, 
furnished  with  a  single  pyrenoid.  Iodine  solution  stained  this  pyrenoid  deeply,  and 
also  brought  out  the  cell- nucleus.  The  latter  stained  well  after  treatment  with 
osmic  acid,  and  is  seen  to  be  situated  internal  to  the  chloroplast  and  rather  to  one  side 
of  the  cell. 

Forma  stipitata.     (PI.  XXIV,  Figs.  47,  48) 

Cellulis  solitariis,  libere  natantibus,  "  stipitatis." 

Diam.  cell.  18-20  /a;    long.  stip.  7.5-26  M;    lat.  stip.  1.8-3.1  M. 

Hub.     In  pond,  Cape  Royds. 

The  cells  of  this  curious  form  possessed  a  cylindrical  and  more  or  less  elongated 
appendage  at  one  side.  This  appendage  was  generally  curved  and  quite  solid,  and 


27(5  W.  AND  G.   S.  WEST 

had  more  the  appearance  of  a  short  stalk  than  anything  else,  although  the  cells  were 
quite  free  and  unattached. 

11  Pleurococcus  frigidus  sp.  n.     (PI.  XXIV,  Figs.  40-44) 

Cellulis  globosis,  20-24  ^  latis,  singulis  vel  plerumque  aggregatis,  intra  stratum 
Myxophycearum  nidulantibus ;  membrana  cellularum  1.4  /<  crassa;  chromatophora 
singula  magna,  indistincte  limitata,  cum  granulis  amylaceis  numerosis  vel  pyrenoidibus 
conspicuis  2-3.  Propagatio  gonidiis  globosis  2  vel  3  intra  cellulas  maternas  ortis; 
diam.  gonid.  10-14  i*. 

Hob.     Pony  Lake. 

This  species  was  more  or  less  abundant  in  a  matrix  consisting  mostly  of  Phormidium 
autumnale  and  other  Blue-green  Algae.  It  appears  to  belong  to  that  section  of 
Pleurococcus  for  which  Klebs  founded  the  special  genus  Chlorosphcera,  but  so  far  as 
could  be  ascertained  from  the  preserved  material  multiplication  takes  place  by  the 
division  of  the  contents  of  the  mother- cell  into  two  or  three  portions,  which  then 
become  rounded  non-motile  gonidia.  As  these  grow  in  size  they  gradually  throw  off 
the  old  wall  of  the  mother- cell.  Each  cell  possesses  a  single  nucleus,  placed  in  a  rather 
excentric  position. 

In  the  specimens  collected  in  April  1908  the  massive  chloroplast  contained  numerous 
minute  granules  of  starch.  In  those  obtained  from  the  same  locality  in  January 
1909  the  chloroplast  possessed  either  2  or  3  distinct  pyrenoids  and  no  scattered  starch 
granules. 

The  cells  are  considerably  larger  than  those  of  Pleurococcus  angulosus  Menegh., 
and  the  chloroplast  is  not  reticulated. 

12  Pleurococcus  antarcticus  sp.  n.     (PI.  XXIV,  Figs.  49-51) 

Cellulis  globosis,  20-37  (plerumque  32)  p.  latis,  singulis  vel  in  familiis  parvis  aggre- 
gatis inter  algas  Myxophycearum  libere  natantibus,  membrana  cellularum  usque  ad 
2.2  /a.  crassa,  homogenea  vel  nonnunquam  indistincte  lamellosa  ;  chromatophora  magna 
parietali,  indistincte  limitata,  ssepe  cum  globulis  oleariis  conspicuis.  Propagatio  ignota. 

Hob.  Green  Lake  and  Clear  Lake. 

This  is  a  large  species,  and,  like  the  preceding,  probably  belongs  to  the  section 
"  Chlorosphcera  (Klebs)  Hansg."  Nothing  was  seen  which  in  any  way  gave  a  clue  as 
to  its  methods  of  propagation.  The  chloroplast  is  massive,  but  its  limitations  could 
not  be  de6nitely  made  out  from  the  available  material.  It  was  generally  partly 
contracted  from  the  wall  at  one  side  of  the  cell,  and  this  space  frequently  contained 
one,  or  more  rarely  two,  globules  of  a  fatty  oil,  such  as  occurs  in  Pleurococcus  rufescens. 

Forma  robusta.     (PI.  XXIV,  Figs.  52-54) 

Cellulis  majoribus,  diam.  35-78  n,  intra  stratum  Myxophycearum  nidulantibus, 
saepe  dense  aggregatis ;  membr.  cell.  2.5-6  p.  crassa  et  lamellosa ;  chromatophora 
seepe  distincte  parietali,  globulis  oleariis  nullis. 


FRESHWATER   ALG.E  277 

Hob.     Blue  Lake. 

These  are  the  largest  Pleurococcus  cells  we  have  yet  seen. 

13  Pleurococcus  dissectus  (Kiitz.)  Nag. 

Gatt.  einzell.  Alg,  1849,  p.  65,  t.  4,  f.  3;  Protococcus  dissectus  Kiitz.  Spec.  Alg. 
1849,  p.  199  ;  Tab.  Phyc.  p.  4,  t.  3. 

Diam.  cell.  4.5-9  p.  (usque  ad  16  n  in  cellulis  solitarus).     (PI.  XXIV,  Figs.  30-39) 

Hab.  Ponds  on  Mt.  Erebus,  attached  to  tire  -tough  sheets  of  Lyngbya  Erebi. 
Green  Lake,  among  Ulothrix  ccqualis  forma.  Blue  Lake  and  Deep  Lake,  attached  to 
the  sheets  of  Myxophycese. 

The  specimens  agreed  well  with  forms  of  this  species,  and  especially  with  the 
figures  given  by  Suringar  (Observ.  Phyc.  in  Flor.  Batav.,  Leovardice,  1857,  p.  56,  t.  4, 
f. D)  of  "Protococcus  dissectus  /3  cuneata."  They  were,  however,  submerged  (though 
frozen),  whereas  the  usual  habitat  of  PI.  dissectus  is  a  subaerial  one.,  The  division  of 
the  cells,  partly  radial,  partly  tangential,  and  partly  oblique,  is  very  characteristic. 

This  species  often  forms  a  one- layered  stratum,  in  which  the  cells  remain  angular 
by  compression.  This  condition  is  almost  a  definite  state  of  the  plant.  (Vide 
PI.  XXIV,  Fig.  39). 

Genus — TKOCHISCIA  Kiitz. 

14  Trochiscia  aspera  (Reinsch)  Hansg. 

In  Hedwigia,  1888,  p.  128  ;    G.  S.  West,  Treatise  Brit.  Freshw.  Alg.  1904,  p.  303, 
c.  figs.  82  A-F.     Acanthococcus  aspera  Reinsch,  1886. 
Diam.  cell.  15.5-22  M. 
Hab.    Green  Lake. 

PALMELLACE.E. 

Genus — GLCEOCYSTIS  Nag. 
15  Gloeocystis  sp. 

Diam.  cell.  5-12  ^,  c.  integ.  gelat.  14-30  /j.. 

Hob.    In  pond,  Cape  Royds. 

From  the  available  material  it  is  not  possible  to  exactly  identify  this  Alga.  Wille 
has  recently  accepted  certain  views  of  Gerneck,  and  stated  that  the  various  Algse 
included  in  Nageli's  genus  Gloeocystis  are  merely  developmental  stages  of  other  green 
Algse  (c/.  Wille  in  Engler  and  Prantl,  Naturlich.  Pflanzenfam.  Chloropliycece,  1909, 
p.  31).  This  view  we  do  not  entirely  accept,  as  there  is  no  positive  proof  that  all 
these  Algse  are  states  of  species  belonging  to  other  genera,  and  Gerneck' s  experience 
is  much  too  limited  to  warrant  such  a  wide  statement.  This  is  the  more  emphasised 
when  one  finds  that  some  of  Gerneck' s  recently  proposed  genera  can  scarcely  be 
regarded  as  specifically  distinct,  let  alone  as  valid  generic  types. 

The  greatest  suspicion  always  attaches  itself  to  Algse  found  only  in  culture 
vessels.  Such  forms  may  in  many  cases  be  mere  states  of  other  Algse  which  remain 


278  W.   AND  G.  S.  WEST 

for  a  longer  or  shorter  period  in  a  profoundly  modified  condition  owing  to  the  unnatural 
and  generally  abnormal  conditions  of  the  culture. 

It  is  very  probable  that  several  species  of  Glaeocystis,  including  G.  gigas  (Kiitz.) 
Lagerh.,  to  which  the  Antarctic  plant  nearly  approaches,  are  independent  organisms 
with  a  life- history  of  their  own. 


BACILLARIE^E 

COSCINODISCACE.E 
Genus — MBLOSIRA  Ag. 

16  Melosira  distans  (Ehrenb.)   Kiitz. 

A.   Schmidt,  Atlas  Dial.   t.   182,    f.   4 ;   0.  Miiller  in  Engler's  Botan.    Jahrbuch. 
xxxiv,  1904.  p.  271. 
Diam.  cell.  9,4-10  /y. 
Hob.    In  pond,  Cape  Eoyds. 

17  Melosira  varians  Ag. 

W.  Sm.  Brit.  Diat.  II,  p.  57,  t.  51,  f.  332;   V.  Heurck,  Synops.  Diat.  Belg.  t.  85, 
f.  10,  11,  14,  15. 

Diam.  valv.  17-19  /*. 

Hob.    Ponds  on  Mt.  Erebus. 

Genus — COSCINODISCUS  Ehrenb. 

18  Coscinodiscus  lentiginosus  Jan. 
A.  Schmidt,  Atlas  Diat.  t.  58,  f.  11. 

Diam.  valv.  120  /u. 
Hob.     Green  Lake,  not  uncommon. 

This  interesting  species  has  been  found  to  be  fairly  frequent  in  soundings  made 
by  the  s.y.  Belgica  from  62°  11'  to  70°  53'  S.  lat. 

Genus — TRICERATIUM  Ehrenb. 

19  Triceratium  arcticum  B  right w. 

Diam.  valv.  230-258  fi. 
Hal).     Green  Lake. 

The  specimens  were  typical,  agreeing  exactly  with  the  figures  in  A.  Schmidt's  Atlas 
Diat.  t.  79,  f.  12  and  12«,  and  also  with  examples  mounted  and  named  by  J.  Tempere. 


FRESHWATER  ALGM  279 

Genus— HEMIATJLUS  Ehrenb. 

20  Hemiaulus  ambiguus  Janisch 

Var.  V.  Heurck,  Diatomees,  Result.  Voyage  du  s.y.  "Belgica,"  Anvers,  1909,  t.  8, 
f.  110. 

Diam.  valv.  60  /u. 

Hob.     Green  Lake. 

Dr.  Van  Heurck  was  apparently  somewhat  doubtful  concerning  the  exact 
determination  of  his  specimen  (I.e.  p.  36).  Those  observed  from  the  above  locality 
were  in  exact  agreement  with  his  figure. 

TABELLARIACE.E 

Genus — TABELLARIA  Ehrenb. 

21   Tabellaria  flocculosa  (Roth.)  Kiitz. 

W.  Sm.  Brit.  Dial.  II,  p.  45,  t.  43,  f.  316.  V.  Heurck,  Synops.  Dial.  Belg.  t.  52, 
f.  10-12. 

Long.  valv.  26-27  n ;    lat.  max.  ad  med.  9.5-10  fj. 

Hob.     Ponds  on  slopes  of  Mt.  Erebus. 

In  his  Synopsis  of  Naviculoid  Diatoms,  Part  I.,  1894,  p.  12,  Cleve  states  that  "  of 
Tabellaria  flocculosa,  one  of  the  most  frequent  diatoms  of  Europe,  not  a  trace  has 
been  found  either  in  S.  America  from  Ecuador  to  Argentina,  or  in  Australia  or  New 
Zealand."  Recently,  however  (G,  S.  West,  "  Alg.  Yan  Yean  Reservoir,"  Journ.  Linn. 
Soc.  bot.  xxxix,  1909,  p.  30),  this  cosmopolitan  species  has  been  shown  to  be  abundant 
in  at  least  one  district  of  Victoria,  and  the  examples  from  Mt.  Erebus  were  in  every 
way  typical.  Moreover,  the  specimens  were  in  no  way  fragmentary,  but  had  been 
fixed  in  the  living  state,  although  the  colonies  were  not  observed  to  consist  of  more 
than  two  cells,  possibly  owing  to  the  rigorous  conditions  of  existence. 

FRAGILARIACE^ 

Genus — FRAGILAEIA  Lyngb. 

22  Fragilaria  tenuicollis  Heib.  var.  antarctica  var.  n.     (PI.  XXVI,  Fig.  128) 

Var.  polis  valvso  valde  productis  et  leviter  subcapitatis ;  striis  non  radiatis,  16  in 
10  ft. 

Long.  valv.  37  M;    lat.  3  /u. 

Hob.     Clear  Lake. 

In  outward  form  the  valves  were  very  similar  to  F.  tenuicollis  var  intermedia 
(Grun.)  V.  Heurck  [  =  F.  intermedia  Grun. ;  V.  Heurck,  Synops.  Diat.  Belg.  t.  45,  f.  9"!, 
but  they  did  not  possess  the  median  unilateral  central  area  which  is  characteristic  of 
that  variety. 

BRIT.  ANTAKCT.   EXVED.   1907-9.      VOL.  I.  L 


280  W.  AND  G.  S.  WEST 

23  Fragilaria  virescens  Ralfs 

V.  Heurck,  I.e.  t.  44,  f.  1. 
Long.  valv.  40  n;   lat.  8.5  M. 
Hob.    Ponds  on  Mt.  Erebus. 

24  Fragilaria  obliquecostata  V.  Heurck 

Diatomees,  Result.  Voyage  du  s.y.  "  Belgica"  Anvers,  1909,  p.  25,  t.  3,  f.  38. 
Long.  valv.  47  /u ;   lat.  8  n ;   costis  6  in  10  ju. 
Hob.     Green  Lake,  frequent. 
Forma  maxima  V.  Heurck,  I.e.  f.  40. 
Long.  valv.  75  M;   lat.  med.  8.5  /x>    costis  5j  in  10  M. 
Hob.     Green  Lake,  rare. 

The  valves  were  not  so  large  as  those  described  and  figured  by  Van  Heurck,  but 
they  possessed  the  same  slightly  tumid  median  portion. 


ACHNANTHACE.E 

Genus — ACHNANTHES  Bory. 

25  Achnanthes  brevipes  Ag.  var.  intermedia  (Kiitz.)  Cleve 

Synops.  Navic.  Diat.  II.,  1895,  p.  193  ;   A.  subsessilis  Kiitz.,  1833. 

Long.  valv.  31-33  /* ;    lat.  8.8-9.3  ».     (PL  XXVI,  Figs.  126,  127) 

Hob.     Moraines  near  camp,  Cape  Royds.    Clear  Lake. 

In  outward  form  the  valves  were  similar  in  form  to  those  of  A.  brevipes  var.  inter- 
media, although  not  quite  so  elliptic,  and  occasionally  there  was  a  faint  indication 
of  a  median  constriction.  The  markings  agreed  well  with  the  general  disposition  of 
the  punctate  costse  of  this  most  variable  species.  We  figure  the  upper  and  lower 
valves  for  future  comparison  with  other  Antarctic  forms. 

Striations  on  lower  valve  13  in  10  n,  strongly  radiate;  on  upper  valve  12  in  10  M, 
transverse  in  the  middle  of  the  valve,  but  rather  irregularly  bent  towards  the  poles. 


COCCONEIDACE^E 
Genus — COCCONEIS  Ehrenb. 

26  Cocconeis  litigiosa  V.  Heurck 

Diatomees,  Result.   Voyage  du  s.y.  "Belgica,"  Anvers,  1909,  p.  18,  t.  2,  f.  28. 
Long.  valv.  79  /m ;   lat.  54  n ;   striis  9  in  10  p. 
Hob.     Green  Lake,  rare. 

Only  the  inferior  valves  were  seen,  and  although  a  little  smaller  than  Van  Heurck' s 
original    specimen,    they   possessed    precisely    the    same    striation.     Moreover,    they 


FRESHWATER  ALGM  281 

possessed  a  similar  transversely  expanded,  asymmetrical  central  area,  and  the  lunate 
terminal  areas.  The  latter  feature  is  also  possessed  by  C.  pellucida  Hantzsch  (cf. 
A.  Schmidt's  Atlas  Dial.  t.  195,  f.  1-6.) 


NAVICULACE.E 

Genus — TROPIDONEIS  Cle_ve. 

27   Tropidoneis  Icevissima  sp.  n.     (PL  XXVI,  Figs.  115-120) 

T.   parva,  delicatissima  et  laevissima;    valvis  oblongo-linearis,  diametro  8-11-plo 
longioribus,  in  parte  mediana  marginibus  parallelibus,  apices  versus  leviter  et  gradatim 
angustioribus,  polis  obtuse  rotunda tis,  raphe  recta  sed  juxta  polos  levissime  curvata 
nodulo  centrali  in  staurum    transversum  producto,   stauro  angustissimo  plerumqu 
valvae  margines  versus  paullulo  dilatato,  alis  (vel  carinis)  carentibus,  striis  non  visis 
Cellula  in  aspectu  cingulato  anguste  oblongo-rectangulari,  medio  constricta,  lateribu? 
convexis  et  angulis  rotundatis. 

Long.  valv.  49-98  M ;   lat.  med.  8-9.5  /*. 

Hob.     Clear  Lake,  Green  Lake,  and  lake  on  west  side  of  McMurdo  Sound. 

This  diatom  was  one  of  the  most  abundant  species  in  the  Antarctic  collections 
occurring  in  great  quantity  in  several  of  the  lakes,  both  freshwater  and  strongly  saline 

It  belongs  to  the  section  Orthotropis  of  the  genus  Tropidoneis,  having  a  raphe 
which  is  practically  straight.  The  valves  are  very  convex  (consult  Fig.  120),  with  a 
slight  thickening  along  the  central  axis,  but  they  are  entirely  destitute  of  wings  (or 
keels).  The  great  convexity  of  the  valves,  the  slight  indication  of  the  bending  of  the 
raphe  near  the  poles,  and  the  form  of  the  girdle- view  are  all  characters  which  place 
the  diatom  in  the  genus  Tropidoneis.  The  markings,  if  any  are  present,  must  be 
exceedingly  fine.  Carefully  prepared  valves  were  examined  most  minutely  with  a 
Leitz  oil-immersion  lens  giving  a  magnification  of  2000  diameters,  but  no  trace  of 
striations  could  be  discovered. 

The  central  stauros  is  very  narrow  and  reaches  to  the  edges  of  the  valve,  where  it 
is  slightly  dilated.  The  general  character  of  this  stauros  is  very  similar  to  that  of 
the  pelagic  Navicula  (Stauroneis)  Biblos  Cleve  (Le  Diatomiste,  Mar.  1892,  p.  77,  t.  12, 
f.  9,  10),  but  the  other  characters  of  the  diatom  are  very  different.  A  stauros  of  a 
similar  kind  is  found  in  several  species  of  Stauroneis,  and  there  is  a  slight  resemblance 
between  Tropidoneis  Iwvissima  and  Stauroneis  spicula  Dickie  (vide  Van  Heurck, 
Synops.  Diat.  Belg.  t.  4,  f.  9),  but  the  valves  are  not  so  attenuated  and  the  striations 
(if  present)  are  not  nearly  so  strong. 


282  W.  AND  G.  S.  WEST 

Genus — STAURONEIS  Ehrenb. 

28  Stauroneis  anceps  Ehrenb. 

W.  Sm.  Brit.  Diat.  I,  t.  19,  f.  190  ;    V.  Heurck,  Synops.  Diat.  Belg.  t.  4,  f.  4,  5. 
Var.  amphicephala  Kiitz. 
Long.  37-43  M  ;    lat.  8-10  n ;   striis  22  in  10  ^ 

Hob.  Recent  geological  deposit  containing  sub  fossil  diatoms.  Also  lake  on  west 
side  of  McMurdo  Sound. 

The  specimens  seen  were  rather  small,  but  otherwise  typical. 

Genus — TEACHYNEIS  Cleve. 

29  Trachyneis  aspera  (Ehrenb.)  Cleve. 

Synops.  Navic.  Diat.  I,  1894,  p.  191. 

Long.  254  ^;    lat.  48  ^. 

Hob.    Green  Lake. 

This  handsome  diatom  was  seen  very  sparingly,  and  we  have  not  placed  it  definitely 
under  one  of  the  numerous  described  varieties  synopsised  by  Cleve.  In  outward  form 
the  valves  would  agree  with  var.  genuina  Cleve,  but  in  general  appearance  of  markings 
it  agrees  best  with  var.  oblonga  (Bail.)  Cleve  [vide  figure  of  Stauroptera  oblonga  Bail, 
in  A.  Schmidt's  Atlas  Diat.  t.  48,  f.  16],  which  is  known  from  Australia,  South  America, 
and  the  Island  of  Kerguelen.  The  alveolate  striae  were  closer  together  (7  in  10  /«) 
near  the  poles  of  the  valves  than  they  were  in  the  median  part  (6  in  10  M). 

Genus — NAVICULA  Bory. 

30  Navicula  perlepida  Grun. 

"  Diatom.  Franz  Josefs-land,"  in  Denk.  Akad.  Wiss.  Wien,  xlviii,  1884,  p.  104, 
t.  1,  f.  44. 

Long.  16-18  n;   lat.  med.  valv.  2.6-2.7  n. 

Hob.    Clear  Lake. 

This  minute  diatom  agrees  with  Grunow's  description  of  Navicula  perlepida,  and 
also  with  his  Fig.  44a.  His  dimensions  are  long.  20-34  /x ;  lat.  2-3.3  M,  so  that  the 
Antarctic  specimens,  although  of  the  same  breadth,  are  scarcely  so  long  as  the  Arctic 
ones. 

In  general  form  and  size  the  valves  of  this  diatom  are  very  similar  to  species  of 
Achnanthes  of  the  section  Microneis. 

31  Navicula  glaberrima  sp.  n.    (PI.  XXVI,  Fig.  125) 

N.  minutissima  et  laevissima;  valvis  rhomboideis  vel  rhomboideo-ellipticis  cum 
lateribus  psene  rectis,  polis  levissime  rotundatis,  raphe  rectissima,  nodulis  terminalibus 
conspicuis ;  striis  non  visis. 


FRESHWATER  ALG.E  283 

Long.  valv.  19  M;   lat.  5.1  M. 

Hob.    Lake  on  west  side  of  McMurdo  Sound. 

This  minute  Navicula  was  rather  scarce  amongst  quantities  of  other  diatoms, 
especially  Hantzschia  elongata,  Tropidoneis  Icevissima,  and  Navicula  muticopsis. 
Careful  examination  of  the  valves  with  a  one- twelfth- inch  oil- immersion  lens  revealed 
no  trace  of  striations.  Other  examples  of  apparently  smooth  species  of  Navicula  are 
N.  perlepida  Grun.,  2V.  lineola  Grun.,  and  2V.  wwfo-P.antoesek. 

2V.  glabemma  should  be  compared  with  2V.  palpebralis  var.  minor  (Greg.)  V.  Heurck 
(Synops.  Diat.  Belg.  t.  11,  f.  11  ;  =  2V.  minor  Greg.),  from  which  it  differs  in  being 
smaller  and  more  angular,  and  in  having  no  striations. 

32  Navicula  rhynchocephala  Kiitz.  forma 

Long.  51  M;   lat.  10  n;   striis  12  in  10  /j.. 

Hob.     In  pond,  Cape  Royds. 

The  form  noticed  was  apparently  one  of  the  intermediate  states  between  the  more 
typical  form  (with  subcapitate  poles)  and  the  var.  amphiceros  (Kiitz.)  Cleve,  Synops. 
Navic.  Diat.  II,  1895,  p.  15.  The  poles  were  slightly  swollen  and  more  obtuse  than 
the  figure  of  var.  amphiceros  given  by  0.  Miiller  in  Engler's  Bot.  Jahrbuch.  xlv,  1910, 
t.  2,  f.  20.  The  form  was  very  similar  in  outline  to  "  2V.  rhynchocephala  var."  in  Cleve 
et  Grun.  Beitr.  Arctisch.  Diat.  1880,  t.  2,  f.  33. 

33  Navicula  muticopsis  V.  Heurck 

Diatomees,  Result.  Voyage  du  s.y.  "  Belgica,"  Anvers,  1909,  p.  12,  t.  2,  f.  181. 

Long.  14.6-23  /*;   lat.  8-9.1  /*;   striis  13-14  in  10  M.     (PL  XXVI,  Figs.  121-124) 

Hob.  In  ponds,  and  on  the  ground  in  the  Penguin  Rookery,  Cape  Royds.  Also 
in  recent  geological  deposit  containing  diatoms.  Clear  Lake,  Green  Lake,  Pony 
Lake,  and  near  Blue  Lake.  Lake  on  west  side  of  McMurdo  Sound. 

This  was  the  most  abundant  of  all  the  Antarctic  diatoms  collected  by  the 
Expedition.  It  occurred  in  nearly  all  the  ponds  and  lakes,  often  in  quantity,  but 
was  most  abundant  in  the  Penguin  Rookery  at  Cape  Royds. 

Considerable  range  of  variation  was  exhibited  by  the  valves,  mostly  in  the  character 
of  the  poles,  which  were  sometimes  decidedly  subcapitate,  whereas  at  other  times 
they  were  merely  "  produced."  The  actual  polar  margin  was  frequently  sub  truncate, 
but  more  often  much  more  rounded.  The  central  area  was  of  variable  form,  from 
a  transverse  stauros  to  a  rounded  area  of  considerable  size.  The  striations  in  all 
the  specimens  examined  were  13  or  14  in  10  /*,  and  consisted  of  3-5  puncta  each, 
except  in  the  median  part  of  the  valve  and  at  the  poles.  A  solitary  unilateral  punctum 
was  present  in  the  central  area  of  some  specimens,  but  no  trace  of  it  existed  in  others. 

In  all  cases  the  median  portion  of  the  valve  possessed  subparallel  sides. 

The  two  following  forms  may  be  distinguished: 

Forma  evoluta.  Cellulse  paullo  elongate,  infra  polum  unumquemque  distincte 
sed  leviter  constrictse ;  striis  13-14  in  10  ^. 


284  W.  AND  G.  S.  WEST 

Forma  reducta.  Cellulee  breviores,  polls  minus  productis  et  distincte  truncatis ; 
striis  13  in  10  /u. 

Both  of  these  forms  were  common  over  the  whole  area  in  which  collections  were 
made. 

34  Navicula  muticopsiforme  sp.  n.     (PI.  XXVI,  Fig.  131) 

N.  minutissima,  valvis  subellipticis,  diametro  circiter  duplo  longioribus,  parte 
mediana  parva  cum  marginibus  parallelis,  polis  longe  cuneiformibus  et  obtuse 
rotundatis,  platea  centrali  magna  et  transverse  dilatata,  platea  axiali  lata,  striis  17 
utrobique  (16  in  10  /z),  punctatis,  in  parte  mediana  (ad versus  plateam  centralem) 
striis  tribus  brevibus  e  puncto  singulo  elliptico  formatis,  ceteris  radiatis  e  punctis 
duobus  formatis. 

Long.  11.3  M;    lat.  5.3  M. 
Hob.    Clear  Lake. 

This  minute  species  has  a  slight  resemblance  to  the  more  reduced  forms  of 
N.  muticopsis  V.  Heurck,  but  differs  in  the  cuneate  poles  of  the  valves  and  in  its  striae. 
There  is  a  relatively  large  central  area,  caused  by  the  shortening  of  three  striae  on 
each  side.  These  striae  are  reduced  to  a  single  elliptical  punctum.  The  remaining 
striae,  which  are  somewhat  divergent,  are  disposed  in  seven  pairs  in  each  half  of  the 
valve.  They  leave  a  rather  wide  axial  area,  and  each  striation  consists  of  two  some- 
what elongated  puncta. 

The  species  should  be  compared  with  N.  mutica  Kiitz.  and  N.  seminulum  Grun., 
from  both  of  which  it  differs  in  outward  form  and  in  the  striation  of  the  valves. 

35  Navicula  peraustralis  sp.  n.     (PI.  XXVI,  Fig.  132) 

N.  parva,  valvis  anguste  lineari-lanceolatis,  diametro  circiter  4j-plo  longioribus, 
lateribus  triundulatis  inflatione  mediana  majori,  polis  inflato- capita tis  et  levissima 
angularibus,  platea  centrali  parva  et  elliptica,  platea  axiali  angusta,  striis  validis 
18  in  10  /u,  leviter  radiatis,  a  plateis  lateralibus  duobus  interruptis. 

Long.  47.7  /u;    lat.  11.1   p.. 

Hob.    Recent  geological  deposit  containing  subfossil  diatoms. 

This  species  is  similar  to  those  of  the  N.  mesolepta  group,  but  does  not  agree  with 
any  of  them.  The  two  lateral  areas  interrupting  the  striations  are  also  very 
characteristic.  In  general  outline  it  is  not  unlike  N.  semicruciata  Ehrenb.,  as 
figured  in  A.  Schmidt's  Atlas  Diat.  t.  44,  f.  45. 

36  Navicula  (Pinnularia)  globiceps  Greg. 

Cleve,  Synops.  Name.  Diat.  II,  1895,  p.  77. 

Long.  23-25  M;   lat.  9-9.5  /m;   striis  18  in  10  M.     (PI.  XXVI,  Fig.  135) 

Hob.     Green  Lake  and  Clear  Lake.     Recent  geological  deposit  containing  diatoms. 

In  one  half  of  the  central  area  was  a  single  isolated  punctum.  The  striations  in 
the  median  part  of  the  valve  were  interrupted  by  two  longitudinal  lines,  and  in  the 
region  of  the  capitate  poles  by  one  longitudinal  line. 


FRESHWATER  ALG/E  285 

37  Navicula  (Pinnularia)  murrayi  sp.  n.     (PI.  XXVI,  Fig.  129) 

N.  parva,  valvis  linear!- ellipticis,  diametro  circiter  4-plo  longioribus,  polis  obtusis 
laevissime  dilatatis,  platea  centrali  transverse  expansa,  marginem  utrinque  psene 
attingente,  cum  puncta  solitaria  asymmetrica,  platea  axiali  angusta,  striis  14  in  10  M, 
punctulatis,  in  to  to  radiatis,  in  parte  mediana  4  (circ.)  utrobique  multe  brevioribus. 

Long.  45  /a.;    lat.  11.5  n- 

Hob.     In  pond,  and  moraines  near  the  camp,~Cape  Royds. 

This  species  stands  nearest  to  N.  reinhardtii  Grun.  (cf.  V.  Heurck,  Synops.  Dial. 
Belg.  p.  86,  t.  7,  f.  5,  6 ;  =  N.  vernalis  Donkin),  but  differs  in  the  form  of  the  central 
area,  with  its  solitary  unilateral  puncta,  in  the  shorter  striae  bordering  the  central 
area,  and  in  the  much  closer  stria tions  (which  are  14  in  10  M  as  compared  with  9  in 
10  fi).  The  striations  are  also  radiate  throughout,  and  never  transverse  at  the  poles, 
which  are  very  slightly  dilated. 

Var.  elegans  var.  n.     (PI.  XXVI,  Fig.  130) 

Var.  minor,  polis  valvae  angustioribus,  productis  et  subcapitatis ;    striis  15  in  10  yu. 

Long.  31  n;    lat.  8.1  /x. 

Hob.     Pond,  Cape  Royds. 

This  variety  should  be  compared  with  N.  salinarum  Grun.  (in  Cleve  et  Grun. 
"  Beitr.  Arctisch.  Diat.,"  Kongl.  Sv.  Vet.-Akad.  Handl.  Bd.  17,  No.  2,  1880,  p.  33, 
t.  2,  f.  34),  from  which  it  differs  in  many  respects,  although  the  spacing  of  the  striae 
is  the  same. 

38  Navicula  (Pinnularia}  cymatopleura  sp.  n.     (PI.  XXVI,  Figs.  133,  134) 

N.  minutissima,  valvis  sublinearis,  diametro  4J- 5§-plo  longioribus,  lateribus 
triundulatis,  undulo  mediana  levissime  majori,  polis  subcapitatis,  platea  centrali 
magna  et  longitudinaliter  elliptica,  platea  axiali  lata,  striis  brevibus  et  laevibus, 
20-21  in  10  m,  leviter  radiatis,  in  parte  mediana  (adversus  plateam  centralem) 
brevioribus. 

Long.  17-27  /«;    lat.  4-5  a. 

Hub.     Clear  Lake.     Lake  on  west  side  of  McMurdo  Sound. 

This  minute  species  occurred  abundantly  in  the  above-mentioned  lakes.  It  is 
one  of  the  N.  mesolepta  group,  but  the  poles  are  much  too  wide  for  any  form  of 
2V.  mesolepta,  and  the  striations  are  too  fine.  The  iindulate  sides  are  not  quite  parallel, 
as  there  is  a  gradual  and  almost  imperceptible  attenuation.  N.  rupeslris  Hantzsch  is 
of  a  similar  shape,  and  there  is  a  similar  reduction  of  the  striations  in  the  middle  of 
the  valve  (vide  A.  Schmidt's  Atlas  Diat.  t.  45,  f.  45-48),  but  the  striations  oi  N.  cymato- 
pleura are  finer  and  shorter  than  in  any  of  these  forms. 

It  should  be  carefully  compared  with  Pinnularia  gracillima  Greg.,  P.  appendiculata 
Ag.,  and  P.  undulata  Greg.  The  latter  is  figured  in  Cleve's  "  Diatoms  of  Finland," 
Acta  Soc.  pro  fauna  et  flora  Fennica,  VIII,  No.  2,  1891,  t.  2,  f.  8,  and  is  at  once  seen  to 
be  quite  a  different  diatom. 


286  W.  AND  G.  S.  WEST 

39  Navicula  (Pinnularia)  shackletoni  sp.  n.     (PI.  XXVI,  Figs.  136-138) 

N.  minuta,  valvis  anguste  elliptico-lanceolatis  cum  polls  valde  productis  levissime 
subcapitatis  et  obtusis,  platea  central!  minuta,  platea  axiali  angustissima,  striis 
10-12  in  10  M,  leviter  radiatis,  validis  et  non  punctulatis,  in  medio  striis  duobus 
utrobique  adversus  plateam  centralem  delicatissimis  et  valde  indistinctis.  Cellula 
in  aspectu  cingulato  anguste  lineari-oblonga. 

Long.  25-29  p.;   lat.  4-5  M. 

Hob.     Clear  Lake,  abundant. 

This  minute  species  should  be  compared  with  N.  lanceolata  Kiitz.  var.  tenella 
(A.  Schm.)  Cleve  [  =  N.  tenella  A.  Schmidt,  Atlas  Diat.  1876,  t.  47,  f.  45],  from  which 
it  is  distinguished  by  its  distinctly  produced  poles,  its  more  distant  and  less  radiate 
striae,  and  by  the  two  faint  median  striae  on  each  side  of  the  central  area. 

N.  cryptocephala  Kiitz.  is  also  a  similar  species,  but  the  lateral  margins  of  the 
valves  are  more  ventricose  and  the  poles  more  distinctly  demarcated  from  the  elliptic 
body  of  the  valve  than  in  N.  shackletoni.  Moreover,  the  striae  are  as  a  rule  much 
finer. 

In  general  outline  N.  shackletoni  is  not  unlike  N.  El  Kab  forma  lanceolata 
0.  Mil  Her  (in  Hedwigia,  xxxviii,  1899,  p.  311,  t.  12,  f.  19),  but  the  striation  is  much 
coarser  and  differently  disposed. 

Var.  pellucida  var.  n.    (PI.  XXVI,  Figs.  139-141) 

Var.  platea  centrali  majori,  leviter  transverse  dilatata,  striis  minus  robustis,  in 
medio  duobus  utrobique  brevioribus.  Cellula  in  aspectu  cingulato  conspicue  latiori. 

Long.  25-29  p.;   lat.  4.5-4.8  M. 

Hob.     In  pond,  Cape  Eoyds,  common. 

This  appears  to  be  a  well-marked  variety,  but  the  distinctions  are  hardly  such  as 
to  warrant  specific  separation.  The  much  greater  width  in  the  girdle  view  was  a 
constant  and  noteworthy  feature. 

40  Navicula  radiosa  Kiitz. 

V.  Heurck,  Synops.  Diat.  Belg.  p.  83,  t.  7,  f.  20.  Pinnularia  radiosa  W.  Sm. 
Brit.  Diat.  p.  56,  t.  18,  f.  171.  P.  acuta  W.  Sm. 

Long.  74  ft;   lat.  13  p.;   striis  11-12  in  10  p.. 

Hob.     Ponds  on  Mt.  Erebus. 

The  specimens  were  not  altogether  typical  as  the  apices  were  as  acute  as  those  of 
the  var.  tenella  (Breb.)  Cleve,  Navic.  Diat.  II,  1895,  p.  17,  but  the  striations  were 
rather  coarser  than  in  that  variety. 


FRESHWATER   ALG.4S  287 

COCCONEMACE.E 
Genus — COCCONEMA  Ehrenb. 

41  Cocconema  pusilla  (Grun.)  nob. 

Cymbella  pusilla  Grun.,  1875  ;   Cleve,  Synops.  Name.  Dial.  I,  1894,  p.  162. 
Long.  valv.  31  M;   lat.  5.2  ^;   striis  17  in  10  n, 
Hob.     In  ponds,  Mt.  Erebus. 

NITZSCHIACE.& 

Genus — NITZSCHIA  H assail 
42  Nitzschia  subtilis  (Kiitz.)  Grun.  var. 

Long.  39.2  /u;    lat.  3.1  M;   punctis  16  vel  17  in  10  ^ 

Hub.     Clear  Lake. 

This  Nitzschia  seems  undoubtedly  to  belong  to  N.  subtilis,  and  resembles  very  much 
the  var.  glacialis  Grun.  ("  Diat.  Franz  Josefs- land,"  Denk.  Akad.  Wiss.  Wien.  xlviii,  1884, 
p.  107,  t.  1,  f.  64).  It  is,  however,  very  slightly  more  attenuated  and  the  carinal 
puncta  are  further  apart.  It  should  also  be  compared  with  N.  subtilis  var.  paleacea 
Grun.  (cf.  V.  Heurck,  Synops.  Diat.  Belg.  t.  68,  f.  9,  the  right-hand  figure). 

Genus — HANTZSCHIA  Grun. 

43  Hantzschia  amphioxys  (Ehrenb.)  Grun. 

Long.  56  fj. ;   lat.  8.6  //. 
Hah.     Lake  on  west  side  of  McMurdo  Sound. 

Var.  capitellata  Grun.  in  Cleve    et   Grun.  "  Arctisch.    Diat.,"    K.  Sv.  Vet. -Akad. 
Handl.  Bd.  17,  No.  2,  1880,  p.  103. 
Long.  72  M;    lat,  13  n. 
Hal>.     In  pond,  Cape  Royds. 

44  Hantzschia  elongata  (Hantzsch)  Grunow 

H.  Amphioxys  var.  elongata  Grun.  in  V.  Heurck,  Synops.  Diat.  Belg.  t.  26,  f.  21-24. 

Long.  168-190  /* ;   lat.  9.5-11  M;   carin.  punct.  7-8  in  10  /u. 

Hob.     Clear  Lake.     Lake  on  west  side  of  McMurdo  Sound,  very  common. 

SURIRELLACE.E 

Genus — SURIRELLA  Turpin. 

45  Surirella  angusta  Kiitz. 

Long.  29  M  ;    lat.  9.3  /x ;    costaa  6  in  10  M. 
Hub.     In  pond,  Cape  Royds. 

BEIT.  ANTAECT.   EXPED.   1907-9.      VOL.  I.  il 


288  W.  AND  G.   S.  WEST 

This  diatom  was  seen  very  sparingly,  but  the  specimens  were  quite  typical,  and 
agreed  exactly  both  in  the  poles  and  the  costae  with  those  in  A.  Schmidt's  Atlas  Dial. 
t.  23,  f.  40. 

MYXOPHYCE7R 

NOSTOCACB2E 

Genus — NOSTOC  Vaucher 

46  Nostoc  antarctica  sp.  n.     (PI.  XXV,  Figs.  58-67) 

Thallo  initio  globoso,  parvo,  pallide  eerugineo,  demum  irregulariter  expanso, 
fuscescente,  tenuissimo  et  membranaceo,  crispato,  usque  ad  4.5  cms.  lato,  brunneo ; 
trichomatibus  in  thallo  membranaceo  densissime  contorto-intricatis,  confertissimis ; 
cellulis  parvis,  globosis  vel  nonnunquam  ellipsoideis,  confertissimis  tanquam  paren- 
chymaticis;  heterocystis  subglobosis,  diametro  trichomatis  duplo  latioribus,  rare 
solitariis  sed  plerumque  2-5  seriatis ;  sporis  ellipsoideo-globosis,  episporio  glabro. 

Diam.  cell,  veget.  2.5-3  M;   diam.  heterocyst.  6-7  M;   diam.  spor.  6.5-7  M. 

Hob.     In  ponds,  Cape  Royds.     Also  in  ponds,  Mt.  Erebus. 

This  is  the  most  extraordinary  Nostoc  we  have  yet  examined.  Except  for  its 
brown  colour,  the  adult  thallus  presents  all  the  appearance  of  a  Monostroma.  It  is 
exceedingly  thin,  with  a  crisped  or  pleated  margin,  and  the  trichomes  are  so  densely 
intricate  as  to  give  rise  to  an  apparent  parenchyma.  In  fact,  we  know  of  no  species 
of  the  genus  with  anything  like  this  density  of  interlaced  trichomes.  The  hetero- 
cysts  are  rarely  single,  but  more  often  2-5  seriate,  a  character  in  common  with 
N.  commune  Vauch. 

N.  antarcticum  is  perhaps  nearest  to  N.  minutum  Desmaz.  (vide  Born,  et  Flah. 
"  Revis.  Nostoch.  Heter."  Ann.  Sci.  Nat.  7°  serie,  Bot.  vii,  1888,  p.  209),  from  which 
it  differs  in  the  much  greater  dimensions  of  the  adult  thallus,  the  much  denser 
disposition  of  the  trichomes,  the  spherical  cells,  and  the  greater  diameter  and  seriate 
character  of  the  heterocysts. 

NOTE. — A  species  of  Nostoc  was  observed  from  Blue  Lake,  forming  rounded 
colonies  up  to  800  M  diameter.  Diam.  cells  4  M.  The  material  was  only  fragmentary 
and  insufficient  for  accurate  identification. 

OSCILLATORIACE^i 

Genus — PLECTONEMA  Thuret. 

47  Plectonema  notatum  Schmidle 

In  Allg.  lot.  Zeitschr.  1901  Nos.  3  and  4,  p.  4,  Figs.  8,  9  on  p.  2. 
Crass,  fil.  3-3.8  M,  trich.  1.6-2  M. 
Hob.    In  ponds,  Mt.  Erebus. 
The    specimens    observed  from    the    Antarctic    were    more    in    agreement    with 


FRESHWATER  ALG.E  289 

Plectonema  notatum  than  with  any  of  the  other  small  species  of  the  genus.  The 
false  branches  were  rare  and  solitary,  and  the  cells  were  sometimes  twice  as  long  as 
broad. 

Genus— LYNGBYA  C.  Ag. 

48  Lyngbya  shacUetoni  sp.  n.     (PL  XXV,  Figs.  68,  69) 

L.  filis  sparsis  inter  stratum  algarum  Myxophycearum,  subrectis ;  vaginis  firmis 
achrois  distincte  lamellosis;  trichomatibus  Isete  aerugineo-coeruleis,  inter  cellulas  non 
constrictis,  massa  intercellular!  inflate- torulosa  et  refringenti  crebro  interruptis, 
apicibus  rectis ;  cellulis  diametro  trichomatis  quadruple  brevioribus,  cytioplasmate 
minute  granulate;  cellula  apicali  elongato-conica  et  pallidissime  seruginea. 

Crass,  fil.  12-12.5  /*,  trich.  8.5-9.5  M  ;    long.  cell.  2-2.4  M. 

Hob.    Lake  at  Hut  Point. 

This  species  should  be  carefully  compared  with  L.  nigra  Ag.,  which  is  the  only 
species  with  which  it  might  be  confused.  The  sheaths  of  L.  shackletoni  are  much 
thicker  than  those  of  L.  nigra  and  are  evidently  lamellose ;  the  trichomes  are 
also  frequently  interrupted  by  lens- shaped  masses  of  brightly  coloured,  highly 
refractive  material,  and  the  apical  cell,  although  markedly  conical,  has  no  calyptra. 
Moreover,  the  end  of  the  trichome  is  never  capitate. 

49  Lyngbya  martensiana  Menegh. 

1837 ;  Gomont  "  Monogr.  des  Oscillar.,"  Ann.  Sci.  Nat.  7C  serie,  Bot.  xvi., 
1892,  p.  165,  t.  3,  f.  17. 

Crass,  fil.  8-9  M,  trich.  6-7  M. 
Hob.     Blue  Lake. 

50  Lyngbya  cerugineo-coerulea  (Kiitz.)  Gomont, 

l.c.  p.  166,  t.  4,  f.  1-3. 

Crass,  fil.  7  M,  trich.  5.7. 
Hob.     Ponds  on  Mt.  Erebus. 

51  Lyngbya  murmyi  sp.  n.     (PI.  XXV,  Figs.  70,  71) 

L.  filis  inter  algas  varias  Myxophycearum  libere  natantibus,  stratum  non  formatis, 
flexuosis ;  vaginis  tenuibus  arctissimis  et  achrois ;  trichomatibus  laete  serugineo- 
coeruleis,  inter  cellulas  non  constrictis,  apicibus  rectis,  non  attenuatis,  obtusis  vel 
rotundato-truncatis;  cellulis  diametro  trichomatis  Ij-lf-plo  longioribus,  cytio- 
plasmate homogeneo  cum  granulis  magnis  1  vel  2  prope  dissepimenta  utrobique 
aggregatis. 

Crass,  fil.  3.1-3.3  /*;    long.  cell.  5-6  /*. 

Hal).     Green  Lake. 

This  species  probably  stands  nearest  to  L.  versicolor  (Wartm.)  Gomont,  but  is 
distinguished  by  its  free-floating  habit,  its  much  thinner  sheaths,  which  are  not 
agglutinated,  and  by  the  coarsely  granulate  dissepiments. 


290  W.  AND  G.   S.  WEST 

52  Lyncjbya  Kiitzingii  Schmidle 

in  Allg.  hot.  Zeitschr.  1896,  iii,  p.  58 ;  Lemm.  Alg.  Brandenburg,  1907,  p.  136. 
Leibleinia  martensiana  Kiitz. 

Crass,  fil.  2-3  M. 

Hob.     In  ponds  on  Mt.  Erebus.     Coast  Lake.     Blue  Lake. 

Var.  distincta  (Nordst.)  Lemm.  in  Engler's  Botan.  Jahrbuch.  xxxv,  1905,  p.  620. 
L.  martensiana  var.  distincta  Nordst.  Alg.  aq.  dulc.  et  Char.  Sandvic.  1878,  p.  4. 
L.  distincta  (Nordst.)  Schmidle,  1896.  L.  subtilis  West  in  Journ.  Roy.  Micr.  Soc. 
1892,  p.  29,  t.  10,  f.  58. 

Crass,  fil.  1.5  n. 

Hob.     In  pond,  Cape  Royds. 

In  his  "  Sylloge  Myxophycearum  "  Dr.  Achille  Forti  places  L.  subtilis  as  a  distinct 
species,  owing  perhaps  to  an  error  in  his  description.  His  "  articulis  diam.  ad  2-plo 
longioribus"  should  be  "  articulis  diam.  ad  2-plo  brevioribus" 

53  Lyngbya  limnetica  Lemm. 

in  Botan.  Centralbl.  Bd.  76,  1898,  p.  154;  Alg.  Brandenburg,  1907,  p.  135  et 
p.  102,  f.  8. 

Crass,  fil.  IM;   long.  cell.  1-1.4  /«. 

Hob.     In  pond,  Cape  Royds.     Green  Lake. 

54  Lyngbya  erebi  sp.  n.     (PI.  XXV,  Figs.  72a-72«!) 

L.  strato  valde  expanse,  cartilagineo,  3-5  mm.  crasso,  obscure  serugineo  vel  vix 
colorato ;  filis  flexuosis,  densissime  tortuoso-intricatis ;  vaginis  tenuibus  arctis,  validis 
et  achrois,  crebro  vacuis;  trichomatibus  angustissimis  pallide  serugineis,  inter 
cellulas  non  constrictis,  apicibus  rectis,  obtusis  et  non  attenuatis ;  cellulis  diametro 
trichomatis  paullo  brevioribus,  contentu  homogeneo. 

Crass,  fil.  et  trich  0.9  M  ;    long.  cell.  0.6-0.8  n. 

Hab.     In  pond  on  Mt.  Erebus. 

This  narrow  Lyngbya  formed  a  thick  and  very  tough  cartilaginous  stratum, 
almost  destitute  of  colour,  owing  to  a  great  extent  to  the  enormous  number  of 
empty  sheaths  of  which  it  was  composed.  The  sheaths  themselves,  although 
so  thin,  are  both  strong  and  persistent,  and  form  a  densely  contorted  mass 
difficult  to  tease  out.  The  trichomes  are  very  pale  aBi-ugiiious  green,  and  show  no 
signs  of  granulation. 

In  size  L.  erebi  compares  with  the  smallest  of  the  plankton- Lyngbyas,  but  is 
entirely  different  from  them  in  habit. 

It  should  be  compared  with  Phormidium  glaciale,  from  which  it  is  distinguished  by 
the  nature  of  its  stratum  and  its  strong  persistent  sheaths,  both  of  which  characters 
give  an  entirely  different  aspect  to  the  plant. 


FRESHWATER  ALG^E  291 

Genus — PHORMIDIUM  Kiitz. 

55  Phormidium  autumnale  (Ag.)  Gomont 

I.e.  1892,  p.  187,  t.  5,  f.  23,  24;  Johs.  Schmidt,  "  Danmarks  blaagroenne  Alger," 
Bot.  TidssJcrift,  Bd.  22,  Heft  3,  1899,  p.  348.  Ph.  uncinatum  (Ag.)  Gomont,  l.c.  p.  204, 
t.  5,  f.  21,  23. 

Crass,  trick.  4.6-7  M.     (PI.  XXV,  Figs.  77-85) 

Hob.     Pony  Lake.     Coast  Lake.     Ponds  on  Mt.-Erebus. 

This  Alga  appears  to  be  frequent  in  the  Antarctic  regions,  and  was  recorded  from 
the  Falkland  Islands  by  Hooker  and  Harvey  as  long  ago  as  1847.  It  occurred  in  great 
abundance  in  Pony  Lake,  and  the  ends  of  the  trichomes  were  furnished  with  precisely 
similar  small  clusters  of  Bacteria  as  one  so  constantly  observes  in  European  specimens. 

It  not  only  occurred  in  pure  masses,  but  was  frequent  in  the  strata  of  other  species 
of  Phormidium. 

As  pointed  out  by  Johs.  Schmidt,  there  is  no  question  of  the  identity  of  Ph. 
autumnale  and  Ph.  uncinatum.  There  are  no  characters  by  which  it  is  possible  to 
discriminate  between  them. 

56  Phormidium  retzii  (Ag.)  Gomont 

l.c.  p.  195,  t.  5,  f.  6-9. 

Crass,  trich.  6-6.5  /«. 

Hob.     Dried-up  lake,  Cape  Royds,  among  Vlothrix  cequalis  Kiitz. 

57  Phormidium  inundatum  Kiitz. 

Spec.  Alg.  1849,  p.  251  ;  Tab.  Phycol.  I,  p.  32,  t.  45,  f.  iii;  Gomont,  l.c.  p.  192, 
t.  4,  f.  31,  32. 

Crass,  trich.  3.5-4.1  /«. 

Hob.  Among  Calothrix  sp.  in  lake  at  Hut  Point.  In  pond  at  Cape  Barne, 
abundant  among  Oscillatoria  sancta. 

A  slightly  thicker  form  (crass,  trich.  4.6-5  M),  but  well  within  the  limits  of  size  for 
this  species,  also  occurred  in  Blue  Lake. 

58  Phormidium  fragile  (Menegh.)  Gomont 

l.c.  p.  183,  t.  4,  f.  13-15. 

Crass,  trich.  1.2-1.6  M. 

Hob.     Pony  Lake,  Green  Lake,  and  Coast  Lake. 

Forma  tenuis.     (PL  XXV,  Fig.  76) 

Crass,  trich.  0.9-1   n. 

Hab.     Coast  Lake. 

59  Phormidium  glaciale  sp.  n.     (PI.  XXV,  Figs.  73«-73d) 

Ph.  strato  valde  expanso,  laete  aeruginoso  vel  aeruginoso-cceruleo,  usque  ad  2  mm. 
crasso ;  fills  flexuosis  densissime  tortuoso-intricatis,  vaginis  in  muco  hyalino  diffluen- 


292  W.  AND  G.  S.   WEST 

tibus;  trichomatibus  angustissimis,  laete  eeruginosis,  inter  cellulas  plus  minusve 
constrictis,  apicibus  rectis  non  attenuatis  nee  capitatis;  cellulis  tarn  longis  quam 
latis  vel  paullo  longioribus,  contentu  homogeneo. 

Crass,  trich.  0.8-0.9  M;   long.  cell.  0.8-1.1  M. 

Hob.  Blue  Lake,  Coast  Lake,  and  Clear  Lake ;  in  great  abundance  and  forming 
extensive  sheets. 

This  species  was  one  of  the  most  abundant  of  the  Blue- green  Algae  which  occurred 
in  certain  of  the  frozen  lakes.  Most  of  the  specimens  were  obtained  by  melting  the 
blue- green  sheets  from  the  ice,  where  they  must  remain  frozen  sometimes  for  several 
years.  It  is  allied  to  Ph.  angustissimum,  but  forms  a  thicker  stratum,  has  slightly 
thicker  and  more  contorted  trichomes,  and  has  shorter  cells. 

60  Phormidium  angustissimum  W.  &  G.  S.  West 

"  Welw.  Afric.  Freshw.  Algae,"  Journ.  Bot.  Aug.  1897,  p.  72. 

Crass,  trich.  0.6-0.7  M  ;    long.  cell.  2-4  /j.. 

Hob.  Deep  Lake,  forming  thin  papery  sheets  of  considerable  extent  and  about 
0.1-0.2  mm.  in  thickness. 

This  species  was  only  observed  from  this  one  lake,  forming  extensive  sheets 
similar  to  those  formed  by  Ph.  glaciale,  but  much  thinner.  The  trichomes  are  densely 
intricate  and  flexuose,  but  are  not  so  contorted  as  those  of  Ph.  glaciale,  and  the  cells 
are  much  longer  than  in  that  species. 

61  Phormidium  antarcticum  sp.  n.     (PI.  XXV,  Figs.  74,  75a-75<?) 

Ph.  filis  non  in  strato  associatis,  sed  inter  algas  varias  Myxophycearum  libere 
natantibus,  brevibus ;  vaginis  indistinctis,  plerumque  diffluentibus ;  trichomatibus 
brevibus  vel  brevissimis,  pallide  serugineis,  valde  et  subirregulariter  spiraliter  contortis, 
apicibus  obtusis  et  non  attenuatis;  cellulis  diametro  trichomatis  1-2-plo  longioribus, 
contentu  homogeneo. 

Crass,  trich.  0.6  M;   long.  cell.  0.6-1.2  M. 

Hob.    Pony  Lake. 

This  minute  and  much- twisted  Phormidium  was  present  in  quantity  in  the 
sediment  obtained  from  under  the  ice  of  Pony  Lake  both  in  April  1908  and  in 
January  1909.  It  was  not  observed  in  any  of  the  other  collections,  and  occurred 
mixed  with  various  Green  and  Blue-green  Algse.  The  trichomes  are  very  short 
and  invariably  twisted  into  some  form  of  spiral,  although  they  exhibit  great 
irregularity. 

It  need  not  be  confused  with  any  of  the  spirally  twisted  piankton  species 
of  Lyngbya.  It  has  no  definite  sheath,  and  is  smaller  and  narrower  than  any  of 
them.  Some  specimens  showed  slight  indications  of  a  sheath  which  had  become 
diffluent,  otherwise  the  Alga  might  be  regarded  as  an  irregular  species  of  the  genus 
Arthrospira. 


FRESHWATER  ALGM  293 

Genus— OSCILLATORIA  Vaucher 

62  Oscillatoria  limosa  Ag. 

1812;   Gomont,  I.e.  p.  230,  t.  6,  f.  13. 

Crass,  trich.  14-17  n. 

Hob.     Pony  Lake,  Coast  Lake,  and  Green  Lake.     Also  ponds  on  Mt.  Erebus. 

This  species  was  abundant  in  the  above-mentioned  localities,  and  in  most  cases 
was  remarkable  for  the  shortness  of  its  filaments,  many  of  which  were  only  40-60  M  in 
length. 

63  Oscillatoria  sancta  Kiitz. 

Tab.  Phycol.  I,  p.  30,  t.  42,  f.  7 ;  Spec.  Alg.  1849,  p.  246 ;  Gomont,  l.c.  p.  229, 
t.  6,  f.  12. 

Crass,  trich.  12.5-15  M. 
Hob.     Pond,  Cape  Barne. 

64  Oscillatoria  subproboscidea  sp.  n.     (PI.  XXV,  Figs.  91-94) 

0.  trichomatibus  inter  varias  Oscillatorias  libere  natantibus,  olivaceo-eerugineis, 
elongatis,  rectis  vel  leviter  flexuosis,  juxta  apicem  attenuatis  et  plerumque  subuncinatis, 
inter  cellulas  non  constrictis ;  cellulis  diametro  trichomatis  circiter  2|-plo  brevioribus, 
non  elongatis  apicem  versus;  cytioplasmate  minutissime  granulatis,  dissepimenta 
non  granulata;  cellula  apicali  brevi  et  convexo-obtusa,  membranam  convexam  leviter 
incrassatam  praebens. 

Crass,  trich.  8.2-9  M;    long.  cell.  3-4  ft. 

Hab.     Coast  Lake. 

This  species  was  frequent  in  the  sediment  under  the  ice  of  Coast  Lake,  mixed  with 
0.  tennis  and  others.  It  is  perhaps  nearest  to  0.  proboscidea  Gomont,  but  is  consider- 
ably narrower,  with  straight  trichomes  and  rather  longer  cells.  The  apex  is  also 
different,  as  although  it  is  somewhat  suddenly  attenuated  and  frequently  uncinate, 
it  is  never  capitate. 

In  thickness  0.  subproboscidea  is  similar  to  0.  chalybea,  but  there  are  no  constric- 
tions between  the  cells  as  in  the  latter  species,  and  the  trichomes  are  only  attenuated 
close  to  the  apex.  The  apical  cell  is  also  short  and  possesses  a  calyptra. 

65  Oscillatoria  tennis  Ag. 

1813  ;   Gomont,  l.c.  p.  240,  t.  7,  f.  2,  3. 

Crass,  trich.  7-10  n. 

Hab.     Coast  Lake. 

This  species  was  frequent  amongst  0.  subproboscidea  and  a  small  quantity  of 
0.  limosa  Ag.  The  trichomes  were  typical  in  all  respects,  and  varied  considerably 
in  thickness. 


294  W.  AND  G.  S.  WEST 

66  Oscillatoria  producta  sp.  n.     (PI.  XXV,  Figs.  86-90) 

0.  trichomatibus  sparsis  inter  alias  algas  Myxophycearum  natantibus,  serugineis, 
subrectis,  inter  cellulas  leviter  constrictis,  apices  versus  et  juxta  leviter  attenuatis ; 
cellulis  diametro  trichomatis  3-4- plo  brevioribus;  cytioplasmate  granulata,  dissepi- 
menta  non  granulata ;  cellula  apicali  in  processum  mamillatum  vel  digitatum 
nonnunquam  uncinatum,  p^us  minusve  producta,  usque  diametro  2|-plo  longiori, 
pellucida,  ssepe  calyptra  convexo-conica  ornata. 

Crass,  trich.  5.3-6.8  n ;    long.  cell.  1.4-1.8  n. 

Hob.    Pond  on  Mt.  Erebus. 

Perhaps  the  nearest  species  to  0.  producta  is  the  one  described  as  0.  ttoydiana  by 
Gomont  (in  Bull,  Soc.  botan.  France,  xlvi,  1899.  p.  39,  t.  1,  f.  17),  from  which  it  is 
distinguished  by  its  narrower  trichomes,  the  absence  of  granules  at  the  dissepiments, 
the  differently  attenuated  apex,  and  the  presence  of  a  calyptra. 

It  might  also  be  compared  with  0.  janthophora  Gomont,  0.  cortiana  Menegh.,  and 
0.  oJceni  Ag ,  from  all  of  which  it  is  easily  distinguished. 

67  Oscillatoria  cortiana  Menegh. 

1837 ;   Gomont  in  Ann.  Sci.  Nat.  T  serie,  Bot.  xvi,  1892,  p.  251,  t.  7,  f.  17.. 
Forma  cellulis  paullo    brevioribus;    crass,  trich.  5.8-6.9  /* ;     long.  cell.  4-5.5   ju; 
crass,  apic.  trich.  2.8-3.3  /u ;    long.  cell.  apic.  7.5-10  ju. 

Hob.    Clear  Lake,  rather  scarce  among  the  sheets  of  Phormidium  glaciale. 

68  Oscillatoria  priestleyi  sp.  n.    (PI.  XXVI,  Figs.  99-101) 

0.  trichomatibus  libere  natantibus,  densissime  aggregatis,  pallide  serugineis, 
elongatis  et  subrectis,  apicem  versus  longe  attenuatis,  apicibus  curvatis  et  s^pe 
recurvatis,  interdum  irregulariter  flexuosis,  obtusis,  inter  cellulas  non  constrictis, 
hinc  inde  massa  intercellular!  inflate- tor ulosa  et  refringenti  interrupts;  cellulis 
subquadratis  vel  plerumque  paullo  brevioribus,  interdum  paullo  tumidulis,  non 
elongatis  apicem  versus ;  cytioplasmate  minutissime  granulatis  et  interdum  cum 
granulo  magno  subrefringenti  ornato ;  cellula  apicali  obtusa,  nunquam  capitata ; 
calyptra  nulla. 

Crass,  trich.  5-5.9  M  ;   crass,  apic.  trich.  2.3-3.2  /x;  long.  cell.  3-5  n. 

Hob.    Lake  on  west  side  of  McMurdo  Sound. 

The  only  species  related  to  Oscillatoria  priestleyi  are  0.  subitliformis  Kiitz., 
0.  cortiana  Menegh.,  and  0.  tanganyikce  G.  S.  West,  with  the  first  of  which  it  should 
be  very  carefully  compared. 

0.  priestleyi  differs  from  0.  subuliformis  in  the  entire  absence  of  undulation  from 
the  straight  or  gently  flexuose  filaments,  in  the  much  more  irregular  curvature  of 
their  attenuated  apices,  in  the  relatively  shorter  cells,  which  remain  short  to  the  very 
apex  of  the  filament,  and  in  the  presence  of  numerous  refractive  lens- shaped  masses 
of  deeply  coloured  and  deeply  staining  intercellular  substance.  The  trichomes  are 


FRESHWATER    ALGJS  295 

of  the  same  thickness  as  the  marine  0.  subuliformis,  and  the  gradual  attenuation 
towards  the  apex  is  a  very  similar  character. 

69  Oscillatoria  formosa  Bory 

1827  ;    Kutz.  Tab.  Phycol  I,  t.  41,  f.  8  ;    Gomont,  I.e.  p.  250,  t.  7,  f.  16. 

Crass,  trich.  4.8  p. 

Hob.     Coast  Lake,  scarce  among  0.  tennis,  0.  subproboscidea,  and  0.  limosa. 

70  Oscillatoria  chlorina  Kutz. 

Phyc.  gener.  1853,  p.  185  ;  Spec.  Alg.  1849,  p.  239  ;  Tab.  Phycol.  I,  p.  28,  t.  39, 
f.  iii;  Gomont,  l.c.  p.  243. 

Crass,  trich.  3.5-4  M;    long.  cell.  3.8-5.5  M. 
Hob.     Green  Lake.     In  pond,  Cape  Koyds. 

71  Oscillatoria  terebriformis  Ag. 

1827  ;    Gomont,  l.c.  p.  254,  t.  7.  f.  24. 
Forma  tennis.     (PI.  XXVI,  Fig.  98) 

Forma  trichomatibus  3  M  crassis,  cellulis  subquadratis ;  dissepimenta  granulata; 
cellula  apicali  subtruncata. 

Hob.     In  pond,  Cape  Royds. 

72  Oscillatoria  amphibia  Ag. 

1827  ;   Gomont,  l.c.  p.  241,  t.  7,  f.  4,  5. 
Crass,  trich.  2-2.1  n. 

Hab.     Coast  Lake,  infrequent  among  various  Myxophyceae. 
Var.  robusta  var.  n.     (PI.  XXVI,  Fig.  102) 

Var.     trichomatibus     crassioribus ;      dissepimenta     granules     plures     pulcherrime 
coaruleas  utrobique  prsebens. 
Crass,  trich.  3.5  M. 
Hob.     In  pond,  Cape  Royds. 

73  Oscillatoria  deflexa  sp.  n.     (PL  XXV,  Figs.  95-97) 

0.  trichomatibus  sparsis  et  nonnunquam  in  csespitibus  parvis  subspiraliter  contortis 
inter  alias  Myxophycearum  natantibus,  rectis,  serugineis,  apices  versus  gradatim 
attenuatis  et  juxta  apicem  subiter  deflexis;  inter  cellulas  non  constriotis,  dissepi- 
menta non  granulata ;  cellulis  diametro  trichomatis  2-2^-plo  longioribus,  cytioplasmate 
homogeneo ;  cellula  apicali  attenuata  obtusa,  calyptra  nulla. 

Crass,  trich.  0.9-1  n  ;    long.  cell.  2.4-2.9  M  ;    long.  part,  deflex.  apic.  4.2-4.8  /u. 

Hab.     Green  Lake.     Coast  Lake. 

This  species  should  be  compared  with  0.  subtilissima  Kiitz.,  0.  Kutzingiana  Nag., 
and  0.  angustissima  W.  &  G.  S.  West,  from  all  of  which  it  differs  in  the  apex  of  the 
trichomes  and  other  points.  0.  minuta  Hansg.  may  also  be  an  allied  species. 

BRIT.   ANTARCT.   EXPED.   1907-9.      VOL.  I.  N 


296  W.    AND    G.    S.    WEST 

CHROOCOCCACE^E 
Genus — ASTEBOCYSTIS  Gobi 

74  Asterocystis  antarctica  sp.  n.     (PI.  XXVI,  Figs.  103-106) 

A.  minuta,  inter  varias  algas  libere  natantes ;  filis  brevibus,  vaginatis,  vix  ramosis, 
valde  contortis,  e  serie  singula  cellularum  formatis ;  vaginis  arctis,  achrois  et 
gelatinosis;  cellulis  ante  divisionem  ellipsoideis,  post  divisionem  subhemisphsericis 
vel  elongato-hemisphsericis,  tarn  longis  quam  latis  vel  brevioribus ;  cytioplasmate 
a3rugineo  et  granuloso  (verisimiliter  ut  in  Chroococco  minuto). 

Long.  cell.  4.5-8  M  ;   lat.  6-8  /" ;    crass  vag.  9-10  /". 

Hob.     Green  Lake. 

Asterocystis  antarctica  is  of  about  the  same  size  asA.africana  G.  S.  West  (inJourn. 
Linn.  Soc,  bot.  xxxviii,  1907,  p.  196),  but  is  of  a  different  habit  and  has  cells  of  a 
different  form.  The  short,  contorted  filaments,  almost  without  any  trace  of  branches, 
distinguish  it  at  once  from  all  the  other  species  of  the  genus. 

Genus— MICROCYSTIS  Kiitz. 
75  Microcystis  chroococcoidea  sp.  n.     (PL  XXVI,  Figs.  107-114) 

M.  coloniis  parvis,  libere  natantibus,  e  cellulis  paucis  (6-24)  compositis,  tegumento 
gelatinoso  et  achroo,  vix  conspicuo ;  cellulis  confertis  sed  irregulariter  aggregatis,  iis 
periphericis  interdum  paullo  minoribus,  contentu  pallide  flavo-a3ruginoso,  subtiliter 
granuloso  cum  granulis  conspicuis  majoribus  2-4. 

Diam.  cell.  4-7  /" ;    diam.  colon.  14-33  n. 

Hob.     Green  Lake. 

This  member  of  the  Chroococcacese  was  not  uncommon  in  the  strongly  saline 
water  of  Green  Lake.  The  colonies  are  very  small,  free-floating,  and  often  do  not 
consist  of  more  than  a  dozen  cells.  The  cells  are  closely  aggregated  to  form  a  some- 
what irregular  colony,  in  which  the  peripheral  cells  are  sometimes  slightly  smaller 
than  the  others.  The  cells  do  not  possess  an  independent  envelope,  but  are  all  enclosed 
in  a  very  thin  and  almost  invisible  mucous  integument.  The  alga  forms  a  connecting 
link  between  the  genera  Microcystis  and  Chroococcus,  and  might  equally  well  be 
named  "  Chroococcus  microcystoidea," 

Genus — GLCEOCAPSA  Kiitz. 
76  Glosocapsa.  shuttleworthiana  Kiitz. 

Phyc.  gener.  1843,  p.  175 ;  Tab.  Phycol.  I,  p.  18,  t.  23,  f.  1  ;  Forti,  Syll. 
Myxophy.  1907,  p.  37. 

Diam.  cell.  2.5-3.5  n,  c.  integ.  prim.  7-8  M ;  tegumentis  internis  intense  aurantio-rubris. 

Hob.  On  stones,  High  Moraines,  Mt.  Erebus.  Also  fragmentary  in  pond,  Cape 
Royds. 


FRESHWATER    ALGM  297 

Genus — APHANOCAPSA  Nag. 

77  Aphanocapsa  montana  Cramer 

Rabenh.  Flor.  Europ,   Alg.  II,  1865,  p.  50 ;  Forti,  Syll.  Myxophy.  1907,  p.  72. 

Diam.  cell.  2-2.4  M. 

Hob.    On  stones,  High  Moraines,  Mt.  Erebus. 

The  cells  were  fairly  crowded,  and  formed  yellow- green,  gelatinous  colonies  from 
800  to  1300  /x  in  extent,  closely  adherent  to  the  stones,  and  amongst  the  thalli  of 
Prasiola  antarcticu  Kiitz. 

Genus — CHROOCOCCUS  Nag. 

78  Chroococcus  minutus  (Kiitz.)  Nag. 

Gatt.  einzett.  Alg.  1849,  p.  46;  Forti,  Syll.  Myxophy.  1907,  p.  14. 
Diam.  cell.  8-11  M;   colon,  usque  ad  60  M  diam. 
Hab.     Green  Lake.     Pond  on  Mt.  Erebus. 

Var.  obliteratus  (Richter)  Hansg.  Prodr.  Algenfl.  Bohm.  II.  p.  162.     Chr.  obliteratm 
Richter  in  Hauck  &  Richter,  Phyk.  Univ.  No.  41  ;  Notarisia,  1886,  p.  97. 
Diam.  cell.  6-8  M;  diam.  colon.  23-29  M. 
Hab.     Coast  Lake. 

79  Chroococcus  minor  (Kiitz.)  Nag. 

Gatt.  einzell.  Alg.  1849,  p.  47,  t.  1A  ;   Rabenh.  Flor.  Europ.  Alg.  II,  1865,  p.  30 

Diam.  cell.  4  M  ;    diam.  colon.  18-20  M. 

Hab.     In  pond,  Cape  Royds. 

Forma  minitna  West  in  Journ.  Linn.  Soc.  bot.  1894,  p.  275,  t.  16,  f.  18.  Chr. 
minutus  var.  minimus  v.  Keissler  in  Verhandl.  der  zool.-bot.  Ges.  Wein,  1901,  p.  394, 
f.  1,  2.  Chr.  minimus  (v.  Keissler)  Lemm.  in  Archiv.  fur  Botan.  utgifv.  af  K.  Sv.  Vet.- 
Akad.  Bd.  2,  No.  2,  1904,  p.  102. 

Diam.  cell.  1.9-2.2  M  ;    diam.  colon.  22-31  /u. 

Hab.     Green  Lake.     Lake  on  west  side  of  McMurdo  Sound. 

80  Chroococcus  pallidus  Nag. 

Gatt.  einzell '.  Alg.  1849,  p.  46,  t.  1,  f.  A2  ;  Rabenh.  Flor.  Europ.  Alg.  II,  1865,  p.  33. 
Diam.  cell.  6-7  M;    diam.  colon.  16-21  M. 
Hab.     Lake  on  west  side  of  McMurdo  Sound. 

The  colonies  were  rather  irregular  and  consisted  of  four  or  eight  almost  globose 
cells.  The  cell- contents  were  pale  yellow- green  and  granulose. 

81  Chroococcus  cohcerens  (Breb.)  Nag. 

Gatt.  einzell.  Alg.  1849,  p.  46  ;  Rabenh.  Flor.  Europ.  Alg.  II,  1865,  p.  30. 
Diam.  cell.  6-7 M;   diam.  colon.  16  M. 
Hub.     Green  Lake. 


298  W.    AND    G.    S.    WEST 

Colonies  small  and  compact,   consisting  of  eight  or  sixteen  regularly   arranged 
cells.     Cell- contents  of  a  brilliant  blue- green  colour  and  granulose. 

Genus — MICROCYSTIS  Kiitz. 

82  Microcystis  stagnates  Lemm. 

in  Forschungsber  Biol.  Stat.  PI  on.  X.,  p.  150.  Polycystis  pallida  Lemm.     P.  elongata 
W.  &  G.  S.  West. 

Diam.  cell.  1.7-1.8  n. 

Hob.    Coast  Lake. 

RIVULARIACEJ; 

Genus — CALOTHRIX  Ag. 

83  Calothrix  epiphytioa  W.  &  G.  S.  West 

"  Welw.  Afric.  Freshw.  Alg.,"  Journ.  Bot.  1897,  p.  240. 
Crass,  fil.  ad  bas.  7.5-8  M  ;    crass,  trich.  ad  bas.  5.4-5.8  M. 
Hob.    Lake  at  Hut  Point. 

84  Calothrix  sp.     (PI.  XXV,  Figs.  55-57) 

C.  strato  tenui  submembranaceo  serugineo-coaruleo ;  filis  subbrevibus  dense 
intricatis  et  contortis,  paullo  attenuatis  sed  non  in  pilum  productis;  trich omatibus 
cceruleis,  gradatim  attenuatis,  cellula  terminali  obtusa ;  cellulis  subtorulosis,  rotundato- 
rectangularibus,  diametro  trichomatis  paullo  brevioribus  vel  nonnunquam  duplo 
brevioribus;  heterocystis  basilaribus  singulis  et  inflate- hemisphsericis. 

Crass,  fil.  ad.  bas.  10-12  M;   crass,  trich.  ad  bas.  8-9.6  M. 

Hob.     Blue  Lake. 

It  is  highly  probable  that  this  is  as  yet  an  unnamed  species  of  Calothrix,  but  we  do 
not  feel  justified  in  expressing  a  definite  opinion  until  more  material  has  been  examined. 
It  occurred  in  very  small  thin  patches,  of  a  most  intense  blue- green  colour,  among 
the  tough  sheets  of  Phormidium  glaciale.  The  filaments  were  much  contorted,  densely 
intricate,  and  quite  without  any  definite  arrangement  in  the  stratum.  The  attenuation 
was  slight,  and  none  of  the  plants  showed  any  signs  of  hair- like  apices.  Thesubtorulose 
cells  are  also  a  feature  of  the  trichomes. 


PLATE   XXIV 


PLATE    XXIV 

FIGURES  1-2.     Ulothrix  cequalis  Kiitz.      x   500. 

FIGURES  3-4.     Ulothrix  cequalis  Kiitz.  forma,      x  500. 

FIGURES  5-7.     Ulothrix  tenerrima   Kiitz.    forma  untarctica.     5    and  6,     x    500 ;     7, 

x   1000.     py,  pyrenoid. 
FIGURES  8-9.     Prasiola  crispa  (Lightf.)  Menegh.     8,  thallus,  natural  size.-    9,  cells  of 

small  portion  of  thallus,   x  500. 
FIGURES  10-11.     Prasiola   antarctica    Kiitz.     10,    thalli,    natural   size;     11,    cells   of 

small  portion  of  thallus,    x  500. 
FIGURES  12-14.     Prasiola  crispa  (Lightf.)  Menegh.     Hormidium- stage,  from  vicinity 

of  Cape  Royds.      x   500. 

FIGURES  15-18.     Prasiola  crispa  var.  aspera  var.  n.      x  500. 
FIGURES  19-24.     Chlamydomonas  intermedia  Chodat  forma  antarctica.      x   500.    py, 

pyrenoid  ;  st,  pigment  spot.     23  and  24  show  stages  of  division. 

FIGURES  25-29.     Chlamydomonas  subcaudata  Wille.      x    500      n,  nucleus;   py,  pyre- 
noid ;  st,  pigment  spot.     28  and  29  show  stages  of  division. 
FIGURES  30-39.     Pleurococcus  dissectus  (Kiitz.)  Nag.      x  500. 
FIGURES  40^14.     Pleurococcus  frigidus   sp.    n.      x    500    n,    nucleus;     py,  pyrenoid; 

s,  small  granules  of  starch. 
FIGURES  45-46.     Pleurococcus  pachydermusLagerli.     x  500.     n,  nucleus ;  py,  pyrenoid. 

46  shows  escape  of  eight  daughter- cells  (gonidia)  from  old  mother- cell. 
FIGURES  47-48.     Pleurococcus  pachydermus  forma  stipitata.      x  500. 
FIGURES  49-51.     Pleurococcus  antarcticus  sp.  n.      x  500.     ol,  globules  of  fatty  oil. 
FIGURES  52-54.     Pleurococcus  antarcticus  forma  robusta.      x  500. 


Brit.  Antarct.  Exped.  1907-9. 


Vol.  1.  Plate  XXIV. 


W.  &  G.  S.  WEST:    FRESHWATER  ALG/E. 


OO 


-~ 

98  88  GO 
IB  §808  00 

CDCD  SS  QQ  \jQ 


u. 


G.  S.  WEST.  ad.  nat.  del. 


PLATE   XXV 


PLATE    XXV 

FIGURES  55-57.    Calothrix  sp.      x  500. 

FIGURES  58-67.  Nostoc  antarctica  sp.  n.  58,  young  thalli,  nat.  size ;  59,  fully  grown 
thalli,  nat.  size;  60,  margin  of  adult  thallus  showing  the  dense  crowding  of  the 
trichomes,  x  500  ;  61-65,  portions  of  isolated  trichomes  showing  seriate  hetero- 
cysts,  x  500  ;  66,  very  young  thallus,  x  500  ;  67,  portion  of  trichome  with  five 
spores  (sp.},  x  500. 

FIGURES  68-69.     Lyngbya  shackletoni  sp.  n.      x  500. 

FIGURES  70-71.     Lyngbya  murrayi  sp.  n.     70,    x   500;    71,    x   1000. 

FIGURE     72.     Lyngbya  erebi  sp.  n.      x   1000. 

FIGURE    73.    Phormidium  glaciate  sp.  n.      x  1000. 

FIGURES  74-75.     Phormidium  antarcticum  sp.  n.      x   1000. 

FIGURE     76.     Phormidium  fragile  (Menegh.)  Gom.  forma  tennis,      x  1000. 

FIGURES  77-85.    Phormidium  autumnale  (Ag.)  Gomont.    Various  forms,   x  500. 

FIGURES  86-90.     Oscillatoria  producta  sp.  n.     86,    x  500  ;   87-90,    x  1000. 

FIGURES  91-94.     Oscillatoria  subproboscidea  sp.  n.      x   500. 

FIGURES  95-97.  Oscillatoria  deflexa  sp.  n.  95,  twisted  bundle  of  trichomes,  x  100  ; 
96  and  97,  single  trichomes,  x  1000. 


Brit.  Antarct.  Exped.  1907-9.  Vol.  1.  Plate  XXV. 

W.  &  G.  S.  WEST:    FRESHWATER  ALGAE. 


G.  S.  WEST.  ad.  nat.  del. 


PLATE    XXVI 


BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.  1907-9.      VOL.  I. 


PLATK    XXVI 

FIGURE     98.  Oscillatoria  terebriformis  Ag.  forma  tennis,      x   500. 
FIGURES  99-101.     Oscillatoria  priestleyi  sp.  n.     99,    x  500  ;    100  and  101,    x  1000. 
FIGURE     102.     Oscillatoria  amphibia  Ag.  var.  robusta  var.  n.     a,   x  500  ;   b,   x  looo. 
FIGURES  103-106.     Asterocystis  antarctica  sp.  n.     103-105,    x  500;    106,    x  1000. 
FIGURES  107-114.     Microcystis  chroococcoidea  sp.  n.      x   500. 

FIGURES  115-120.     Tropidoneis  laivissima    sp.    n.     115-118    and   120,     x    500;     119, 
x   1000.     Fig.  117  is  one  of  the  deformed  valves  not  infrequent  in  Clear  Lake. 
Fig.  115  is  the  girdle  view,  and  Fig.  120  the  end  view  of  a  frustule. 
FIGURES  121-124.     Navicula  muticopsis  V.  Heurck.      x   1500. 
FIGURE     125.     Navicula  glaberrima  sp.  n.      x    1000. 

FIGURES  126-127.     Achnanthes  brevipes  Ag.  var.  intermedia  (Kiitz.)  Clove,      x  1500. 
FIGURE     128.     Fragilaria  tenuicollis  Heib.  var.  antarctica  var.  n.      x  1500. 
FIGURE     129.     Navicula  murrayi  sp.  n.      x   1500. 
FIGURE     130.     Navicula  murrayi  var.  elegans  var.  n.      x   1500. 
FIGURE     131.     Navicula  muticopsiforme  sp.  n.      x   1500. 
FIGURE     132.     Navicula  peraustralis     sp.  n.      x   1800. 
FIGURES  133-134.     Navicula  cymatopleura  sp.  n.      x   1500. 
FIGURE     135.     Navicula  globiceps  Greg,      x   1500. 
FIGURES  136-138.     Navicula  shackletoni  sp.  n.      x   1500. 
FIGURES  139-141.     Navicula  shackletoni  var.  pellucida  var.  n.      x   1500. 


Brit.  Antarct.  Exped.  1907-9. 


Vol.  1.  Plate  XXVI. 


W.  6"  G.  S.  WEST:    FRESHWATER  ALG/E. 


107.  108.  ilO. 


12.8. 


135. 


140. 


G.  S.  WEST.  ad.  nat.  del. 


BRITISH   ANTARCTIC  EXPEDITION  1907-9 

UNDER  THE  COMMAND  OF  SIR  E.  H.  SHACKLETON,  C.V.O. 


REPORTS  ON   THE   SCIENTIFIC   INVESTIGATIONS 


VOL.   II 

BIOLOGY 

EDITOR    -    -    JAMES  MURRAY 

PART    I 

MOLLUSC A 

BY   CHAS.   HEDLEY 

(AUSTRALIAN  MUSEUM,  SYDNEY) 


(WITH  OXE  PLATE) 


LONDON 
PUBLISHED  FOR  THE  EXPEDITION  BY  WILLIAM  HEINEMANN 

21   BEDFORD  STREET,  W.C. 

1911 

ISSUED   SEPARATELY,   APRIL,   1'Jll 
PRICE  l.v.  6d.  NET 


REPORTS  ALREADY  ISSUED 

VOL.  1.  PART  I.,  ON  COLLECTING  AT  CAPE  UOYDS 

BY  JAMES  MURRAY  PRICE  Is.  (id.  NET 

VOL.  I.  PART  II.,  ON  MICROSCOPIC  LIFE  AT  CAPE  ROYDS 

BY  JAMES  MURRAY  PRICE  5s.  Od.  NET 

VOL.  I.  PART  111.,  ANTARCTIC  ROTIFERA 

BY  JAMES  MURRAY  PRICE  5s.  Od.  NET 

VOL.  I.  PART  IV.,  MUSCI 

BY  JULES  CARDOT  P1(KE  is.  Od.  NET 

VOL.  I.  PART  V.,  TARDIGRADA 

BY  JAMES  MURRAY  PR,CE  10s.  Od.  NET 

VOL.  I  PART  VI.,  RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE 

BY  EUGENE  PEXARD  PHICE  3s.  Od.  NET 


PART   I 

MOLLUSCA 

BY   CHARLES   HEDLEY 

(Prepared  by  permission  of  the  Trustees  of  the  Australian  Museum,  Sydney) 

(With  Plate  I.) 


EDITORIAL  NOTE.  Mr.  Hedley  has  asked  me  to  preface  his  report  with  field  notes  on  the  species.  The 
Mollusca  were  collected  in  two  localities,  within  a  short  distance  of  one  another  at  Cape  Royds,  yet  of 
totally  difl'erent  character.  The  "Bay"  is  a  very  small  shallow  inlet,  lying  to  the  east  of  our  camp, 
between  Gape  Royds  and  Cape  Barne.  It  appears  to  be  little  affected  by  currents,  or  even  by  storms,  for 
the  ice  forms  early  there  and  stays  late.  Wherever  it  has  been  examined  at  depths  of  more  than  two 
fathoms,  the  bottom  resembles  the  bed  of  a  lake  in  being  covered  with  a  fine  tenacious  black  silt.  In 
consequence  of  the  early  formation  of  the  winter  ice  in  the  Bay  we  were  able  to  dredge  there  as  early  as 
April,  and  frequently  afterwards  till  July.  Then  this  dredging-ground  was  lost,  and  no  more  work  was 
done  in  the  Bay  till  February,  when  the  ice  had  gone  out  of  part  of  the  Bay.  The  Bay  is  only  free  from 
ice  for  a  few  weeks  in  summer,  perhaps  in  cold  seasons  not  at  all.  The  dredging  was  done  at  depths  of 
between  seven  and  twenty  fathoms. 

The  "  Sound  "  is  a  situation  of  very  different  character.  The  part  where  most  of  the  dredging  was  done 
is  at  the  mouth  of  the  Bay,  where  the  bottom  begins  to  slope  down  into  deeper  water.  A  strong  current 
prevails  there,  as  indicated  by  Brocklehurst's  Current  Indicator,  and  by  the  effect  on  our  dredging  lines. 
The  bottom  is  free  from  mud,  even  in  shallow  water  close  by  the  cliffs  of  Cape  Royds.  At  a  depth  of  less 
than  twenty-five  fathoms  there  are  many  pebbles  and  boulders  of  keny  te  and  other  rocks.  At  greater  depths 
no  pebbles  are  found,  the  dredge  bringing  up  only  living  or  dead  organisms,  which  apparently  grow  so 
densely  crowded  together  that  the  dredge  never  touches  the  bed  of  the  sea,  of  whatever  materials  composed. 

The  molluscan  fauna  of  these  two  localities  differs  greatly.  In  the  Bay  the  dominant  forms  are 
Neobuccinum,  Anatina,  Pecten,  and  Yoldia.  The  delicate  Trophon  is  not  rare,  and  there  are  many  small 
and  even  microscopic  molluscs,  both  Gastropods  and  Lamellibranchs. 

Neobuccinum  eatoni  appears  to  surpass  all  the  other  large  species  in  abundance,  but  this  may  be  due  to 
its  activity  and  voracity.  It  comes  readily  to  any  bait  which  is  put  down  for  even  a  short  time.  No  trap 
or  dredge  is  needed  to  get  them.  They  hold  tight  on  to  the  bait  and  come  up  with  it.  They  must  have 
keen  senses,  of  whatever  sort,  as  the  crowds  which  sometimes  covered  the  bait  must  have  collected  from 
some  little  distance  around.  The  shells  of  Pecten  colbecki  are  very  abundant,  but  the  animal  was  rarely  found 
alive.  The  first  living  example  was  got  on  June  17,  between  seven  and  twelve  fathoms.  On  account  of  the 
delicacy  of  its  valves  it  was  removed  from  the  bucket  and  placed  on  the  ice  for  safety.  The  temperature 
was  low,  and  it  showed  its  disapproval  of  its  first  experience  of  a  temperature  (  -  10°  F.)  forty  degrees  below 
that  to  which  it  was  accustomed  by  snapping  angrily  for  some  time.  When  replaced  in  the  bucket  and 
conveyed  to  the  house  it  seemed  none  the  worse,  and  again  snapped  when  exposed  to  the  air.  It  lived  for 
many  hours,  under  the  influence  of  a  weak  narcotic  (Eucaine),  thus  showing  a  tenacity  of  life  unusual 
among  Antarctic  marine  animals,  and  unexpected  in  this  delicate  Pecten.  A  very  small  specimen  was 
dredged  on  a  stony  bottom,  at  a  depth  of  only  two  fathoms,  close  to  the  shore. 

The  shells  of  Anatina  are  very  abundant  and  of  large  size,  but  only  very  small  examples  were  got  alive. 
BEIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.  1007-9.  VOL  II.  PART  1,  ISSUED  APRIL  1911  A 


/3 


2  CHARLES  HEDLEY 

It  may  be  that  the  living  molluscs  are  too  firmly  embedded  in  the  mud  to  be  detached  by  the  dredge. 
The  mud  which  has  been  stirred  up  by  the  dredging,  when  allowed  to  settle  in  the  bucket,  is  so  tenacious 
that  it  is  with  difficulty  that  a  half -buried  Anatina  shell  can  be  pulled  out. 

The  living  Yoldia,  as  well  as  shells,  are  very  plentiful. 

In  the  Sound  the  large  molluscs  are  entirely  different.  The  conspicuous  forms  of  the  muddy  bottom 
are  absent,  except  for  an  occasional  empty  shell  of  Anatina  or  Yoldia,  and  instead  we  find  Lima,  Tritoniella, 
Philobrya,  Nation,  and  others. 

Only  the  Lima  and  Philobrya  are  at  all  abundant ;  the  other  conspicuous  forms  are  rather  rare.  The 
Lima  is  constantly  present  at  depths  of  twenty-five  to  eighty  fathoms.  Very  commonly  the  animal  is 
embedded  in  a  sponge,  usually  in  one  of  the  softer  horny  kinds. 

Some  sorts  of  Opisthobranchs  (Tectibranchs)  were  obtained  both  in  the  Bay  and  the  Sound,  but  the 
best  specimens  were  got  in  the  mouths  of  the  Big-head  Fishes  (Trematomus). 

A  comparison  of  our  collection  with  that  of  the  Discovery  Expedition  is  instructive  for  the  light  it 
throws  on  local  distribution  in  the  Ross  Sea  area. 

Leaving  out  of  account  the  Opisthobranchs,  which  are  not  yet  fully  worked  out  for  our  Expedition 
(although  Mr.  Hedley  records  a  few  species),  our  collection  includes  ten  Lamellibranchs  and  twenty 
Gastropods,  against  fourteen  Lamellibranchs  and  twenty-five  Gastropods  obtained  by  the  Discovery.  Of 
these,  seven  Lamellibranchs  and  twelve  Gastropods  are  common  to  the  two  collections.  The  Discovery  had 
thus  twenty  species  (seven  Lamellibranchs  and  thirteen  Gastropods)  which  were  not  in  our  collection,  and 
we  had  eleven  species  (three  Lamellibranchs  and  eight  Gastropods)  which  were  not  in  the  Discovery  collection. 

This  amount  of  difference  between'collections  made  at  stations  only  twenty  miles  apart  is  very  considerable. 
It  is  more  important  that  one  of  our  most  abundant  shallow-water  species  ( Yoldia  eightsi)  did  not  occur  at 
all  at  Hut  Point  (the  Discovery  winter  quarters). 

Of  the  species  which  occurred  in  our  collection  and  not  in  that  of  the  Discovery,  one  Gastropod  and 
one  Lamellibranch  were  got  by  the  Sotithern  Cross  far  to  the  north  of  our  position,  and  one  Gastropod 
was  collected  by  the  Belgka. 

Seven  of  our  species  (two  Lamellibranchs  and  five  Gastropods)  are  described  by  Mr.  Hedley  as  new  to 
science.  J.  M. 


SIR  ERNEST  SHACKLETON  has  done  me  the  honour  to  hand  me  for  report  the 
collection  of  mollusca  accumulated  by  the  British  Antarctic  Expedition  of  1908 
under  his  command.  This  consists  chiefly  of  specimens  dredged  by  Mr.  James  Murray 
through  holes  and  cracks  in  the  ice  around  Cape  Royds.  In  this  neighbourhood  the 
slope  of  Mount  Erebus  continues  under  the  sea,  so  that  shallow  and  deep  stations 
lie  near  together. 

For  several  feet  below  the  surface  all  life  is  destroyed  by  the  floating  ice,  but 
below  its  influence  a  fauna  flourishes  which,  for  the  latitude,  may  be  considered 
luxuriant.  The  bottom  in  shoaler  depths  is  described  by  Mr.  Murray  as  carpeted 
with  a  matted  growth  of  weed  and  sponge,  beyond  which  was  an  area  of  soft 
black  rnud. 

Salient  characters  of  the  collection,  which  strike  an  observer  accustomed  to 
tropical  and  temperate  faunas,  are  the  great  chemical  erosion  which  the  shells  have 
suffered,  and  against  which  some,  Yoldia  for  instance,  have  developed  a  dense 
epidermis.  A  large  proportion  are  frail  and  thin. 

No  great  number  of  novelties  could  be  anticipated  from  this  collection,  for  the 
Expedition's  field  of  examination  had  already  been  exploited  by  the  Discovery; 


MOLLUSC  A  3 

while  the  area  searched  by  the  Southern  Cross  was  sufficiently  near  to  infringe 
upon  their  prospects.  But  viewing  this  collection  as  a  control  upon  its  predecessors 
and  as  an  intense r  study  of  the  fauna  of  McMurdo  Sound,  we  gain  from  it  a  better 
idea  of  the  distribution  of  the  Antarctic  marine  fauna. 

L  AMELLIBRA  NCHIATA 

Yoldia  eif/htsi,  Couthouy 

Smith,  Report  Collect.  Southern  Cross,  1902,  p.  211. 
Alive,  abundant,  from  five  to  thirty  fathoms. 

Adacnarca  nitens,  Pelseneer 

Smith,  Report  Nat.  Antarctic  Expecl,  Lamell.,  1907,  p.  5,  Plate  III.,  Figs.  6-6c. 
Alive,  twelve  specimens  from  eighteen  to  twenty  fathoms. 

Philobrya  limoides,  Smith 

Smith,  Report  Nat.  Antarctic  Exped.,  Lamell.,  1907,  p.  4,  Plate  III.,  Figs.  2-26. 
Alive,  abundant  from  ten  to  eighty  fathoms. 

Pecten  colbecki,  Smith 

Smith,  Report  Nat.  Antarctic  Exped.,  Lamell.,  1907,  p.  G,  Plate  III.,  Figs.  9-9a. 
Several  living  specimens,  largest  about  83  x  79  mm.,  from  two  to  twelve  fathoms. 
Several  double  and  many  single  and  broken  valves  from  ten  to  twelve  fathoms. 

Lima  hodgsoni,  Smith 

Smith,  Report  Nat.  Antarctic  Exped.,  Lamell.,  1907,  p.  G,  Plate  III.,  Figs.  8-86. 
Alive,  abundant  from  ten  to  eighty  fathoms. 

• 

Anatina  elliptica,  King  and  Broderip 

Smith,  Report  Nat.  Antarctic  Exped.,  Lamell.,  1907,  p.  1. 
Alive,  abundant  from  seven  to  thirty  fathoms. 

Thracia  meridionalis,  Smith 

Smith,  Report  Nat.  Antarctic  Exped.,  Lamell.,  1907,  p.  1. 

Alive,  a  few  specimens,  mostly  broken,  from  ten  to  eighty  fathoms. 

Gardita  astartoides,  Martens 

Smith,  Report  Nat.  Antarctic  Exped.,  Lamell.,  1907,  p.  2. 
A  couple  of  broken  valves  from  ten  to  twenty  fathoms. 


4  CHARLES  HEDLEY 

Kellia  nimrodiana,  sp.  nov.  (Plate  L,  Figs.  1-4) 

Shell,  subi-homboidal,  slightly  inequilateral,  thin,  inflated,  glossy,  white. 
Sculpture  :  fine  irregular  concentric  growth  lines  without  radials.  Hinge  line 
rather  straight,  umbo  tumid,  prodissoconch  conspicuous.  Ligament  internal,  right 
valve  with  a  prominent  cardinal  knob,  left  valve  with  a  feeble  ridge,  no  laterals. 
Length,  3  '8  ;  height,  4'25  ;  depth  of  conjoined  valves,  3'1  mm. 

Fifteen  specimens  alive  from  ten  to  twenty  fathoms  off  Cape  Royds. 

Solecardia  (Antarctica,  sp.  nov.  (Plate  L,  Fig.  5) 

Shell  small  oblong  compressed,  semi-transparent,  gaping  at  each  end,  polished, 
with  a  few  radial  stria;.  Length,  1'25  ;  height,  0'8  mm. 

Five  specimens  alive  from  ten  to  twenty  fathoms  off  Cape  Royds. 

GASTROPODA 

Lepeta  antarctica,  Smith 

Smith,  Hep.  Nat.  Antarctic  Exped.,  Gast.,  1907,  p.  12,  Plate  II.,  Figs.  11-1  la. 
Two  specimens  alive  from  eighteen  to  eighty  fathoms. 

Valvatella  refulyens,  Smith 

Smith,  Rep.  Nat.  Antarctic  Exped.,  Gast.,  1907,  p.  11,  Plate  II.,  Fig.  7. 
Abundant  alive  from  eighteen  to  eighty  fathoms. 


crebrilirulata,  Smith 

Smith,  Rep.  Nat.  Antarctic  Exped.,  Gast.,  1907,  p.  11,  Plate  II.,  Fig.  9. 
Abundant  alive  from  ten  to  twenty  fathoms. 

Lacuna  macmurdensis,  sp.  nov.  (Plate  L,  Fig.  G) 

Shell  small,  turbinate,  thin,  and  loosely  coiled.  Colour,  pale  buff.  Sculpture  : 
three  strong  peripheral  keels,  beneath  which  are  two  smaller  threads.  Base 
flattened,  angled  at  the  margin  of  a  rather  wide  spiral  umbilicus.  Major 
diam.,  3'5  mm. 

A  single  broken  specimen  from  ten  to  twenty  fathoms  oft'  Cape  Royds. 

This  appears  to  represent  L.  noto-rcadcitsis,  Melvill  and  Standen,*  from  the  opposite 
coast  of  Antarctica.  It  differs  by  having  the  shoulder  of  the  whorl  sloping  instead 
of  flat,  fewer  and  more  prominent  keels,  and  a  broad  smooth  area  between  the  lowest 
keel  and  the  umbilical  margin. 

*  Melvill  and  Standen,  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Edinburgh,  xlvi.,  1907,  p.  181,  Plate,  Figs.  3-3«. 


MOLLUSCA  5 

Rissoa  adarensis,  Smith 

Smith,  Hep.  Nat.  Antarctic  Exped.,  Gast.,  1907,  p.  8,  Plate  II.,  Fig.  2. 
Six  shells  from  ten  to  twenty  fathoms. 

Rissoa  fraudulenta,  Smith 

Smith,  Rep.  Nat.  Antarctic  Exped.,  Gast.,  19Wrp-  9,  Plate  II.,  Fig.  3. 
One  shell  from  ten  to  twenty  fathoms. 

Rissoa  gelida,  Smith 

Smith,  Rep.  Nat.  Antarctic  Exped.,  Gast.,  1907,  p.  9,  Plate  II.,  Fig.  5. 
Alive,  twenty  specimens  from  ten  to  twenty  fathoms. 

Rissoa  glacialis,  Smith 

Smith,  Hep.  Nat.  Antarctic  Exped.,  Gast.,  1907,  p.  9,  Plate  II,  Fig.  4. 
Two  shells  from  ten  to  twenty  fathoms. 

Capidus  subco'inpressus,  Pelseneer 

Pelseneer,  Result  voy.  Belgica,  Moll.,  1903,  p.  20,  Plate  V.,  Figs.  52-54. 
One    alive    from    "  Bay,    2/09."      This    is    an    addition   to  the    fauna    of    this 
quadrant  of  Antarctica. 

Lovenella  antarctica,  Smith 

Smith,  Rep.  Nat.  Antarctic  Exped.,  Gast.,  1907,  p.  10,  Plate  II.,  Figs.  G-G«. 
A  single  shell.     (Loc.  Sound,  twenty-five  to  fifty  fathoms,  "  6/7/08  ") 

Lovenella  austrina,  sp.  nov.  (Plate  I.,  Fig.  7) 

Shell  small  elongate-conical,  thin  and  semi-transparent.  Colour  pale  buff. 
Whorls  ten,  including  a  smooth  helicoid  protoconch  of  a  whorl  and  a  half. 
Sculpture  :  three  slender  spiral  keels  on  each  whorl,  of  which  one  margins  the  lower 
suture,  one  is  peripheral,  and  one  intermediate ;  on  the  last  whorl  an  incipient 
thread  appears  above  the  periphery  and  another  on  the  base.  These  are  beaded 
by  the  passage  of  fine  numerous  perpendicular  irregular  riblets  which  also  cancellate 
the  interspaces.  Aperture  subcircular,  angled  above,  notched  below  by  a  very 
short  perpendicular  canal,  columella  thickened,  arched,  outer  lip  thin.  Length,  8  ; 
breadth,  2 -5  mm. 

Twenty  specimens  alive  from  ten  to  twenty  fathoms  off  Cape  Royds,  June  1908. 

In  size  and  shape  closely  resembling  L.  antarctica,  but  differing  by  fewer  more 
delicate  spirals  and  thinner  shell.  Cerithium  charcoti,  Lamy,*  from  Booth  Wandel 
*  Lamy,  Exped.  Charcot,  Moll.,  1900,  p.  ],  Plate  I.,  Fig.  1. 


6  CHARLES  HEDLEY 

Island,  seems  to  be  related,  but  is  broader  and  has  an  extra  keel  on  the  shoulder  of 
the  whorl. 

Thesbia,  innocent,  Smith 

Smith,  Rep.  Nat,  Antarctic  Exped.,  Gast.,  1907,  p.  4,  Plate  I.,  Figs.  1-lfc. 
A  single  shell,  Sound,  twenty-five  to  fifty  fathoms. 

Vermici/htria  murmyi,  sp.  nov.  (Plate  I.,  Fig.  8) 

Shell  solitary,  small,  solid,  compactly  coiled  in  about  three  discoidal  whorls,  the 
last  rising  free  for  almost  a  third  of  a  revolution.  Sculpture :  on  the  upper  surface 
three  prominent  equidistant  spiral  ridges  parted  by  deep  interstices.  Aperture 
circular,  slightly  lobed.  Diameter  of  coil,  4'25  ;  diameter  of  aperture,  1'65  mm. 

Several  specimens,  mostly  young  and  fragmentary,  from  sixty  to  eighty  fathoms 
off  Cape  Royds. 

This  species  is  closely  related  to  V.  icaitei,  Hedley,*  from  off  Sydney,  but  is 
larger,  more  solid,  has  the  spirals  closer,  and  does  not  seem  to  develop  variceal  rings. 
It  is  named  in  honour  of  Mr.  James  Murray,  the  Biologist  of  the  Expedition. 

Odostorniopsis  major,  sp.  nov.  (Plate  I.,  Figs.  9-10) 

Shell  ovate-conical,  subperforate,  very  thin.  Whorls  four  and  a  half,  rounded, 
parted  by  deep  sutures.  Colour,  white.  Sculpture  :  on  the  second  whorl  half  a  dozen 
spiral  punctate  lines,  the  remainder  smooth,  save  for  microscopic  incremental 
threads.  Aperture  roundly  pyriform,  outer  lip  thin,  effuse  anteriorly.  Columella 
flattened,  expanded  over  the  axial  perforation  and  then  sharply  bent.  Length,  G  ; 
breadth,  4  mm. 

Type  labelled  "  Bay,  July,  1908  "  ;  another  specimen  eighteen  to  twenty  fathoms, 
and  two  more  from  sixty  to  eighty  fathoms  off  Cape  Royds.  All  alive. 

The  genus  Odostomiopsis  was  proposed  by  Thiele  t  for  the  reception  of  two  species 
from  Kerguelen.  To  this  genus  should  probably  be  referred  Admete  (?)  limmmformis , 
Smith,;}:  also  from  Kerguelen.  The  appearance  of  the  species  suggests  to  me  that 
possibly  it  may  be,  like  Stilifer,  a  parasite  upon  Echinoderms. 

Neobuccinum  eatoni,  Smith  (Plate  I.,  Figs.  11-12) 

Smith,  Rep.  Nat.  Antarctic  Exped.,  Gast.,  1907,  p.  1. 

Alive,  abundant  from  five  to  sixty  fathoms.  The  expeditions  led  by  Dr.  Bruce  § 
and  Dr.  Charcot  respectively  have  recently  extended  the  range  of  this  species  to 

*  Hedley,  Mem.  Austr.  Mus.,  IV.,  1903,  p.  346,  Fig.  72. 

f  Thiele,  in  Martens  Gast.  d.  deut.  Tiefsee  Exped.,  1898-1899,  p.  68  (1903);  not  Odontomopsis, 
Blanckenhorn,  Beitr.  z.  Geol.  Syriens,  1890. 

t  Smith,  Phil.  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Lond.,  clxviii.,  1879,  p.  172,  Plate  IX.,  Fig.  4. 
§  Wilton,  Zoological  Log,  Scotia,  1908,  p.  2,  Plate  XXIV.,  Fig.  74. 


MOLLUSCA  7 

the  opposite  coast  of  the  continent.  The  radula  has  lately  been  redescribed  by 
Professor  Thiele.* 

All  the  adult  specimens  have  the  apex  eroded,  but  the  youngest  examples  show 
it  (Fig.  11)  to  be  dome-shaped  and  paucispiral. 

The  collection  contains  a  quantity  of  molluscan  ova  labelled  "7-20  fath., 
June  1908,"  occurring  singly  or  plastered  together  in  masses.  From  its  size  and 
abundance  these  can  with  some  confidence  be  asertbed  to  N.  eatoni.  Each  capsule 
(Fig.  12)  is  a  hemispherical  orange  boss  about  a  third  of  an  inch  in  diameter  and 
surrounded  by  a  marginal  membrane.  The  ova  of  Cominella  densisculpta,  Martens,  f 
seem  to  be  similar. 

Amciuropsis  rossiana,  Smith 

Smith,  Rep.  Nat.  Antarctic  Exped.;  Gast.,  1907,  p.  5,  Plate  I.,  Figs.  6-Ga. 
Three  dead  and  broken  shells  from  five  to  twenty  fathoms. 

Naticct  yrisea,  von  Martens 

Watson,  Rep.  ChalL,  Zool,  XV.,  1886,  p.  432.,  Plate  XXVIII,  Fig.  5  ;  Thiele, 
Deut.  Tiefsee  Exped.,  VII.,  p.  64,  Plate  VIIL,  Fig.  44. 
Two  dead  shells  from  ten  to  twenty  fathoms. 

Lamellaria  mollis,  Smith 

Smith,  Report  Coll.  Southern  Cross,  1902,  p.  205,  Plate  XXIV.,  Figs.  19-21. 
Two  small  specimens  from  ten  to  eighty  fathoms. 

Trophon  shaMetoni,  sp.  nov.  (Plate  I.,  Fig.  13) 

Shell  biconical,  large,  and  thin.  Colour  dead  white.  Whorls  five,  and  a  subulate 
smooth  protoconch,  turreted,  rather  rapidly  increasing.  Sculpture :  broad  imbricate 
thin  lamellae,  spreading  from  the  base  upwards,  produced  above  in  hollow  curled 
spouts  which  crown  the  whorl,  thence  continuing  to  the  suture  in  a  low  oblique 
limb.  On  the  last  whorl  there  are  from  twelve  to  fourteen  lamellae,  which  continue 
in  a  diminishing  series  up  the  spire.  Interlamellar  spaces  are  scored  by  fine  spiral 
striae  and  more  conspicuous  scratches  in  the  line  of  growth.  Aperture  ample,  ovate. 
Canal  rather  short,  screwed  to  the  left,  externally  with  imbricating  hoods  formed  by 
bases  of  successive  lamellae.  Specimen  figured,  26  mm.  long,  18  mm.  broad.  A 
larger  example  is  33  mm.  long  and  23  mm.  broad. 

Ten  specimens,  several  alive,  from  seven  to  twenty  fathoms  off  Cape  Royds. 

This    appears  to  be  closely  related    to  T.  coulmanensis,  Smith,  \  from  which  it 

*  Thiele,  Deut.  Tiefsee  Exped.,  VII.,  p.  1C8,  Plate  IX.,  Fig.  57. 

t  Martens  and  Pfeff'er,  Jahrb.  Hamb.  wiss.  Anstal.  III.,  188C,  p.  73,  Plate  I.,  Fig.  P.. 

+  Smith,  Discovery,  Moll.,  p.  2,  Plate  I.,  Figs.  4-46. 


8  CHARLES  HEDLEY 

differs  by  greater  size,  broader  shape,  more  compact  spire,  shorter  and  more  bent 
canal.  Seeing  the  variability  of  the  genus,  I  distinguish  this  as  new  with  some 
diffidence,  but  the  series  before  me  is  quite  uniform,  and  T.  coulmanengig  is  reported 
from  much  deeper  water,  viz.,  100  fathoms.  As  the  handsomest  novelty  in  the 
collection,  it  is  dedicated  to  the  intrepid  leader  of  the  Expedition. 

The  apex  is  of  the  pattern  figured  for  T.  coulmanensis.  In  aged  specimens  several 
of  the  spire  whorls  are  usually  destroyed  by  erosion.  The  interlamellar  spaces  of  the 
last  whorl  are  usually  packed  with  sponges  and  diatoms,  thus  providing  the  shell 
with  an  additional  overcoat,  a  possible  defence  against  chemical  erosion. 

Trophon  lonystaffi,  Smith 

Smith,  liep.  Nat.  Antarctic  Exped.,  Gast.,  1907,  p.  3,  Plate  I,  Figs.  3-3cZ  (Plate  I., 
Fig.  14). 

Three  specimens  alive  from  twenty  to  eighty  fathoms. 

As  Mr.  Smith  observed,  the  upper  whorls  are  more  closely  ribbed  than  the  last. 
This  causes  much  dissimilarity  between  younger  and  older  shells.  An  immature 
shell  25  mm.  in  length  is  here  figured. 

Philine  apertissima,  Smith 

Smith,  Rep.  Coll.  Southern  Cross,  1902,  p.  208,  Plate  XXIV.,  Fig.  23. 
Twenty  living  specimens  from  ten  to  twenty  fathoms. 

Philine  antarctica,  Smith 

Smith,  Hep.  Coll.  Southern  Cross,  1902,  p.  208,  Plate  XXIV.,  Fig.  1. 
Six  living  specimens  from  ten  to  twenty  fathoms.     Others  from  stomach  of  fish 
(Big-head,  Trematomus). 

Clione  antarctica,  Smith 

Smith,  Rep.  Coll.  Southern  Cross,  1902,  p.  210,  Plate  XXV.,  Figs.  7-8. 
Two  specimens  from  surface  near  Cape  Royds. 

Limacina  antarctica,  Woodward 
Smith,  Rep.  Coll.  Southern  Cross,  1902,  p.  209. 

A  few  specimens  from  surface  near  Cape  Royds.  Their  shells  were  dissolved  by 
the  formed  in  which  they  were  placed. 

Tritoniella  belli,  Eliot 

Eliot,  Rep.  Nat.  Antarctic  Exped.,  Nudibr.,  1907,  p.  G,  Figs.  A,  B. 
Several  specimens  from  twenty  to  fifty  fathoms  off  Cape  Royds.     Some  coils   of 
molluscan  ova  marked  "  15-25  fath.,  7/08  "  probably  belong  to  this  species. 


PLATE 


BtUT.   ANTAKOT.   KXPEU.    l!H)7-!>.        VOL.   II. 


PLATE  I 


PAOE 


FIGURES  1-4. — KelUa  nimrodiana,  Hedley  .  .         4 

FIGURE  5. — Solecardia  antarctica,  Hedley   .  4 
FIGURE  6. — Lacuna  macmurdensis,  Hedley  . 

FIGURE  7. — Lovenella  austrina,  Hedley        .         .  5 

FIGURE  8. —  Vermicularia  murrayi,  Hedley  fi 

FIGURES  9-10. — Odostomiopsis  major,  Hedley       .  6 

FIGURE  11. — Apex  of  Neobuccinum  eatoni,  Smith  6 

FIGURE  12. — Eggs  of  Neobuccinum  eatoni,  Smith  7 

FIGURE  13. — Trophon  shackletoni,  Hedley    .          .  7 

FIGURE  14. — Trophon  longstaffi,  Smith.  8 


BRIT.   ANTARCT.  EXPED.  1907-9 

HEDLEY:  MOLLUSCA 


VOL.   II.   PLATE  I 


10 


9 


11 


14 


Miss  West  del. 


,  BRITISH   ANTARCTIC  EXPEDITION  1907-9 

UNDER  THE  COMMAND  OF  SIR  E.  H.  SHACKLETON,  C.V.O. 


REPORTS  ON   THE   SCIENTIFIC   INVESTIGATIONS 


VOL.   II 

BIOLOGY 

EDITOR    -    -    JAMES  MURRAY 
PART   II 

ANTARCTIC   FISHES 

BY   EDGAR   R.    WAITE,   F.L.S. 


(WITH  OXE  PLATE) 


LONDON 
PUBLISHED  FOR  THE  EXPEDITION  BY  WILLIAM  HEINEMANN 

21   BEDFORD  STREET,   W.C. 

1911 

ISSUED   SEPARATELY,    APRIL,    lull 
PRICE  Is.  6d.  NET 


REPORTS  ALREADY  ISSUED 

VOL.  I.  PART  I.,  ON  COLLECTING  AT  CAPE  ROYDS 

BY  JAMES  MURRAY  PIUCE  Is.  6cl.  NKT 

VOL.  I.  PART  II.,  ON  MICROSCOPIC  LIFE  AT  CAPE  ROYDS 

BY  JAMES  MURRAY  PRICE  5s.  Ocl.  NET 

VOL.  I.   PART  III.,  ANTARCTIC  ROTIFERA 

BY  JAMES  MURRAY  PRICE  .5s.  Ocl.  NET 

VOL.  I.   PART  IV.,  MUSCI 

BY  JULES  CARDOT  PUICE   Is.  Od.  NET 

VOL.   I.   PART  V.,  TARDIGRADA 

BY  JAMES   MURRAY  PRICE   10s.  Od.  NET 

VOL.  I    PART  VI.,  RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE 

BY  EUGENE  PENAR1)  PRICE  .'5s.  Od.  NET 

VOL.  II.  PART  I.,  MOLLUSCA 

BY  CHARLES  HEDLEY  PRICE   is.  6d    NKT 


PART  II 

PISCES 

ANTARCTIC    FISHES 

BY  EDGAR  R.    WAITE,  F.L.S. 

Curator,  Canterbury  Museum,  New  Zealand 
(With  Plabe  II.) 

THE  collection  of  fishes  placed  in  my  hands  for  report  by  Sir  Ernest  Shackleton  is 
quite  a  small  one,  comprising  five  species  only. 

Of  these,  four  were  described  by  Dr.  Boulenger  from  the  proceeds  of  the 
Southern  Cross  Expedition.*  When  examining  this  latter  collection,  Boulenger 
separated  off,  on  an  osteological  character,  certain  Nototheniids  under  the  name 
Trematomus :  four  species  were  referred  to  this  genus,  namely,  T.  newnesi, 
T.  borchgrevinki,  T.  hansoni,  and  T.  bernacchii,  all  from  the  Antarctic,  and  new,  whilst 
fifteen  were  retained  as  Notothenia,  two  only  of  which  were  taken  in  Antarctica, 
namely,  N.  nicholai  and  N.  coriiceps. 

Reporting  on  the  fishes  of  the  National  Antarctic  Expedition,  1901-1904,  taken 
on  the  voyage  of  the  Discovery,  Boulenger  t  records  three  of  the  four  known 
species  of  Trematomus,  that  is,  T.  borchgrevinki,  T.  hansoni,  and  T.  bernacchii,  and 
four  species  of  Notothenia,  two  of  which  were  new,  namely,  N.  scotti  and  N.  hodgsoni. 

Among  the  collection  obtained  by  the  Expedition  Antarctique  Frangaise,  1903- 
1905,  Professor  VaillantJ  found  eight  species  of  Notothenia,  but  not  a  single 
species  of  Trematomus. 

In  the  absence  of  the  reports  by  Dollo  on  the  fishes  of  the  Belgica  Expedition, 
and  by  Lonnberg  on  those  of  the  Swedish  South  Polar  Expedition,  I  cannot  make 
further  comparison,  and  the  want  of  the  latter  paper  makes  it  impossible  for  me  to 
specifically  determine,  at  present,  the  single  example  of  the  genus  Artedidraco  taken 
on  the  Expedition. 

Lonnberg  has  described  two  species  of  this  genus,  namely,  Artedidraco  mirus  and 

*  Boulenger,  SoutJi&rn  Cross  Exped.  Report,  1902,  Pisces,  p.  174. 
t  Boulenger,  Zoology,  Nat.  Antarct.  Exped.,  Fishes,  1907. 
J  Vaillant,  Exped.  Antarct.  Frang.,  1906,  Poissons. 

BEIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.    1907-9.      VOL.  II.       PART  2,  ISSUED  APRIL  1911  C 

5 


12  EDGAR  H.  WAITE 

A.    skottsbergi,   but    their    distinguishing   characters    are   not   at     present    known 
to  me. 

The  four  species  of  fishes  which  have  been  identified  are  : 

Trematomus  bernacchii,  Boulenger. 
Trematomus  hansoni,  Boulenger. 
Trematomus  newnesi,  Boulenger. 
Pleuragramma  antarcticum,  Boulenger. 

The  gill  cavities  of  the  two  first  named  yielded  small  crustaceans,  while  parasitic 
forms  were  found  upon  T.  bernacchii.  All  were  submitted  to  Dr.  Charles  Chilton, 
and  he  has  kindly  identified  them  as  follows : 

Euphausiacea. 

A  single  damaged  specimen,  not  identifiable. 
Isopoda. 

Antarcturus  franklinii,  Hodgson,  one  imperfect  specimen. 
Amphipoda. 

Orcliomenopsis  rossii,  Walker,  several  specimens. 

Orchomonella  pinguides,  Walker,  several  specimens. 

Harpinia  obtusifrons,  Stebbing,  one  specimen. 

Leptamphosus  novce-zealandice,  G.   M.  Thomson    ( =  Oradarea   longimana, 

Walker),  one  specimen. 
Copepoda. 

Calanus,  sp.,  one  specimen. 

Parasitic  Copepod,  several  specimens  from  T.  bernacchii. 

TREMATOMUS,  Boulenger,  1902 

Trematomus  bernacchii,  Boulenger 
Keport  Southern  Cross  Collections,  1902,  p.  181,  Plate  XIV. 

This  species  is  characterised  by  the  narrow  interorbital  space,  which  is  also  devoid 
of  scales,  with  the  exception  of  a  few  disposed  in  a  single  median  longitudinal  row. 

In  most  of  the  examples  preserved  the  upper  half  of  the  first  dorsal  fin  is  black  or 
blackish,  as  described,  though  in  some  there  is  no  trace  of  such  ;  the  other  fins  bear 
no  markings.  In  addition  to  the  coloration  described  by  Boulenger,  a  few  specimens 
possess  a  black  blotch  on  the  upper  part  of  the  opercle.  The  ground  colour  in 
preservative  is  reddish  brown,  but  the  red  tint  is  probably  more  pronounced  in  life, 
for  Mr.  Murray  has  recorded  the  colour  of  some  examples  as  "  strongly  ruddy," 
"  light  ruddy,"  &c. 

Specimens  examined  were  in  full  ripe  roe  when  taken  on  August  25,  1908  ;  the 
ova  are  bright  yellow  in  colour  and  very  large,  measuring  3 '8  mm.  in  diameter. 


PISCES:    ANTARCTIC  FISHES  13 

Eighteen  specimens  were  preserved,  of  which  the  largest  measures  239  mm.  in 
length  ;  they  were  localised  as  follows  : 

Nos.  1-3. — The  Bay,  Cape  Eoyds,  taken  in  trap  18  fathoms,  May  20,  1908. 

No.  4. — The  Bay,  Cape  Royds,  collected  by  Mawson,  May  11,  1908. 

Nos.  5-7. — Cape  Royds,  30-80  fathoms,  August  1908. 

Nos.  8-13.— Bay,  10-20  fathoms,  June  1908. 

No.  14.— The  Bay,  Cape  Royds,  dredge  '10-20-  fathoms,  May  12,  1908. 

Nos.  15-18.— Sound,  10  fathoms,  July  7,  1908. 

I  found  small  examples  of  Trematomus  newnesi  in  the  digestive  tracts  of  some 
of  the  specimens,  and  the  gills  of  most  of  the  fishes  submitted  harboured  many 
crustaceans ;  these  have  been  submitted  to  Dr.  Charles  Chilton,  who  furnished  the 
accompanying  report.  A  Copepod  (Calanus,  sp.)  was  found  to  be  parasitic  on 
this  fish. 

Trematomus  hansoni,  Boulenger 

Report  Southern  Cross  Collections,  1902,  p.  180,  Plate  XIII. 

The  narrow  scaly  interorbital  space  and  the  strongly  barred  fins  are  characteristic 
of  this  species,  the  markings  in  the  specimens  preserved  being  much  more  pronounced 
and  better  defined  than  portrayed  by  Boulenger :  this  feature  was  recognised  as 
distinctive  by  Mr.  Murray,  who  wrote  :  "  Big-heads  with  black  fins  and  markings." 
One  example  has  the  edge  of  the  preopercle  white,  continued  as  a  band  across  the 
occiput. 

Though  the  ground  colour  in  preservative  is  brownish,  Mr.  Murray  renders  the 
tint  in  fresh  specimens  as  "  dark  greenish,"  "  light  grey,"  &c. 

Of  six  examples  submitted  the  largest  measures  249  mm.  in  length. 

The  following  are  the  localities  of  the  specimens  : 

Nos.  1-2. — In  fish-trap,  Cape  Royds,  25  fathoms,  September  1,  1908. 
No.  3   (cut  in  two). — Found  on  ice   beside   seal-hole  in  the  Bay,  Cape  Royds, 
May  1908. 

Nos.  4-6. — In  fish-trap,  Cape  Royds,  25  fathoms,  August  25,  1908. 

Dr.  Charles  Chilton  has  examined  the  crustaceans  found  in  the  gill  cavities  oi 
these  fishes,  and  his  report  is  printed  herewith. 

Trematomus  newnesi,  Boulenger 
Report  Southern  Cross  Collections,  1902,  p.  177,  Plate  XI. 

With  two  exceptions  all  the  examples  referred  to  this  species  are  small.  The 
largest  measures  137  mm.  in  length  ;  most  of  the  others  are  much  smaller. 

The  relatively  wide  space  between  the  eyes  is  a  character  common  also  to 
T.  borchyrevinki,  Boul.,  but  T.  neivnesi  is  distinguishable  from  that  species  by  the 
strongly  marked  and  tubular  lateral  lines. 

The  specimens  placed  in  my  hands  agree  generally  with  the  description  of  this 


14  EDGAR  R.  WAITE 

species,  but  the  tail  is  truncate  and  not  rounded,  the  principal  outer  rays  being  as 
long  as  the  inner  ones.  The  pores  on  the  upper  surface  of  the  head  are,  on  the 
whole,  as  illustrated,  but  the  median  pore  is  placed  more  forward  than  shown,  so  that 
the  five  interorbital  pores  form  a  cross,  the  median  pore  being  nearly  in  the  axis. 

Young  examples  have  much  the  appearance  of  Notothenia  hodysoni,  Boul.,* 
and  were  so  tentatively  named  by  Mr.  Murray.  I  have,  however,  examined  the 
scapular  arch,  and  find  them  to  possess  the  distinguishing  character  of  Trematomus ; 
moreover,  the  vertebrae  number  fifty-four,  which  is  the  number  given  by  Boulenger 
for  T.  newnesi. 

The  localities  of  the  eleven  specimens  submitted  are  as  follows  : 

Nos.  1-6.— Backdoor  Bay  (Priestley),  5-10  fathoms,  February  6,  1909. 
No.  7.— The  Bay,  Cape  Royds,  5-10  fathoms,  May  8,  1908. 

No.  8. — "  In  mouth  of  Big-head,"  taken  in  fish-trap,  Cape  Royds,  25  fathoms, 
September  1908. 

Nos.  9-11.— The  Sound,  Cape  Royds,  10-25  fathoms,  July  1908. 

PLEUKAGBAMMA,  Boulenger,  1902 

Pleuragramma  antarcticum,  Boulenger 
Report  Southern  Cross  Collections,  1902,  p.  187,  Plate  XVIII. 

The  larger  of  the  two  specimens  preserved  was  contained  in  a  bottle  with 
examples  of  Trematomus  newnesi,  labelled  "  Backdoor  Bay,  Priestley,  five  to  ten 
fathoms,  February  6,  1909";  the  smaller  [one  was  with  specimens  of  T.  hansoni, 
August  25,  1908. 

The  appearance  of  the  fishes  suggests  that  they  were  taken  from  the  stomachs  of 
a  larger  fish,  or  of  a  seal,  all  the  fins  having  been  more  or  less  digested  away. 

The  type  specimens  were  also  in  poor  condition,  but  were  sufficiently  complete  to 
enable  an  accurate  description  and  figure  to  be  made,  as  confirmed  by  Vaillant,t 
who  had  two  excellent  examples  from  the  "  Francaise  "  Expedition.  He  was  enabled 
to  give  a  greater  range  in  the  number  of  fin  rays,  and  shows  that  a  rudimentary 
lateral  line  exists  on  the  hinder  part  of  the  body,  whereas  Boulenger  did  not  find 
trace  of  such.  Vaillant  gives  detailed  descriptions  and  figures  of  the  scales.  The 
scales,  though  thin,  are  very  adherent,  and  many  of  them  still  remain  on  our  fishes, 
though,  as  above  stated,  the  digestive  process  has  proceeded  to  a  considerable  extent, 
and  in  the  case  of  the  larger  example  has  removed  the  whole  of  the  hinder  part  of 
the  body. 

One  of  our  fishes  appears  to  have  been  larger  than  any  previously  obtained, 
though  its  length,  except  by  analogy,  cannot  be  measured  ;  in  its  mutilated  state  it 
measures  ]  78  mm.  The  head,  exclusive  of  the  projecting  lower  jaw,  is  55  mm.  in  length, 

*  Boulenger,  Nat.  Ant.  Exped.,  II.,  1907,  Fishes,  p.  2,  Plate  II.  (I.  in  text),  Fig.  2. 
t  Vaillant,  Exped.  Ant.  Fra^aise,  1906,  Poissons,  p.  48,  Figs.  3  and  4. 


PISCES:    ANTARCTIC  FISHES  15 

and  this,  contained  three  and  a  half  times  in  the  length  of  the  body  (the  proportion 
approximately  rendered  by  Boulenger  and  Vaillant),  would  yield  a  length 
of  193  mm. 

ARTEDIDRACO,  Lonnberg,  1908 

Since  writing  the  foregoing  I  have  received  the  account  of  the  fishes  of  the 
Swedish  South  Polar  Expedition  by  Lonnberg.* 

The  genus  Artedidraco  is  therein  diagnosed,  and  is  represented  by  two  species — 
A.  mirus  and  A.  skottsbergi. 

The  specimen  previously  referred  to  as  a  member  of  this  genus,  but  which,  owing 
to  the  want  of  Lonnberg's  paper,  could  not  be  specifically  determined,  proves  to 
be  a  species  distinct  from  either  of  the  two  previously  described  forms.  It  will  be 
known  as 

Artedidraco  shackletoni,  sp.  nov.  (Plate  II.) 
B.  V. ;  D.  V.  27 ;  A.  20  ;  V.  I.  5 ;  P.  15  ;  C.  12 ;  L.  lat.  19  +  19. 

Head  broad,  depressed  ;  body  rounded  anteriorly,  compressed  behind.  Length 
of  head,  2'8  ;  height  of  body,  4'2  ;  length  of  caudal,  37  in  the  total ;  diameter  of  eye, 
37  ;  interorbital  space,  10'2  ;  and  length  of  snout,  4'1  in  the  head. 

Mouth  large  and  horizontal ;  the  maxilla  extends  to  below  the  middle  of  the  eye, 
and  the  upper  jaw  is  the  longer  ;  mental  barb  simple,  its  length  equal  to  the  diameter 
of  the  eye.  The  eye  is  large  and  prominent  and  cuts  the  upper  profile  ;  the  nostril  is 
in  a  long  tube,  placed  a  little  nearer  to  the  eye  than  to  the  margin  of  the  preorbital. 
There  are  a  number  of  large  pores  with  raised  rims  on  the  head  placed  as  shown  in 
the  figure.  Opercular  spine  as  in  A.  mirus. 

The  teeth  are  confined  to  the  jaws  and  form  a  narrow  band  in  each ;  the  edges  of 
the  lips  and  the  frenum  behind  the  teeth  are  studded  with  minute  papillae. 

The  two  anterior  spines  of  the  dorsal  are  abruptly  bent  near  their  tips,  possibly 
an  individual  malformation;  the  second  is  the  longest,  its  length  being  2 '5  in  that 
of  the  head  ;  the  last  spine  does  not  quite  reach  to  the  second  fin.  The  latter  is  high  ; 
the  longest  rays  are  the  seventh  to  tenth,  which  are  subequal,  and  a  little  more 
than  one-half  the  length  of  the  head ;  the  last  few  rays  are  rapidly  shortened  and 
extend  to  the  base  of  the  caudal  rays.  The  anal  rays  are  much  shorter  than  those  of 
the  dorsal  and  have  their  tips  free.  Anal  papilla  prominent.  The  ventrals  are  widely 
separated  and  are  set  quite  horizontally ;  the  fourth  ray,  which  is  the  longest,  is  less 
than  half  the  length  of  the  head.  The  pectoral  has  a  broad  base  and  is  rounded  ;  it 
does  not  quite  reach  the  origin  of  the  anal.  The  caudal  is  feebly  rounded,  its  peduncle 
is  much  compressed,  and  its  least  depth  is  less  than  the  diameter  of  the  eye. 

The  whole  fish  is  scaleless,  but  is  covered  with  mucus ;  the  lateral  line  is  formed 
of  nineteen  pores,  which  are  a  continuation  of  the  post-orbital  row  of  pores,  and  form 

*  Lonnberg,  Wiss,  Ergeb.  Schwed.  Sudpolar-Exped.,  V.,  Zool.  I.,  1908. 


16 


EDGAR  R.  WAITE 


a  low  ridge  which  extends  to  below  the  base  of  the  eighth-ninth  dorsal  rays  ;  the 
pores  reappear  faintly  in  the  mid  line  above  the  fifth  anal  ray,  are  nineteen  in 
number,  and  do  not  quite  reach  the  base  of  the  caudal  rays. 

Colours. — The  single  specimen  preserved  is  almost  colourless,  but  bears  traces  of 
darker  markings  across  the  back,  and  spots  on  the  outer  caudal  rays. 

Length  of  specimen,  146  mm.  It  was  taken  in  company  with  examples  of 
Trematomus  bernacchii  in  August  1908,  off  Cape  Royds,  at  a  depth  of  thirty  to  eighty 
fathoms. 

The  most  apparent  difference  between  A.  shackletoni  and  the  other  members  of 
the  genus  is  in  the  larger  number  of  spines  and  rays  in  the  dorsal  and  anal  fins,  the 
dorsal  spines  in  the  other  species  being  but  three  in  number ;  some  systematists 
would  probably  regard  the  distinction  as  of  generic  import. 

In  other  respects  the  three  species  are  very  similar,  A.  shackletoni  being  in  some 
characters  intermediate.  By  comparison  with  Lonnberg's  figures,*  it  is  found  to 
resemble  A.  skottsbergi  in  general  form,  but  otherwise  more  nearly  approaches 
A.  minis,  agreeing  in  the  protuberant  eye,  the  high  second  dorsal  fin,  and  possibly 
also  the  coloration. 

The  comparative  proportions  of  the  three  species  are  shown  below  : 


A.  MIRUS 

A.  SKOTTSBERGI 

A.  SHACKLETONI 

Dorsal  spines  and  rays 

III.  23-24 

III.  25 

V.  27 

Anal  rays 

17 

19 

20 

Head  in  length 

2-6 

2-8 

2-8 

Height  in  length 

3-8 

4-7 

4-2 

Eye  in  head 

3-9 

3-2 

3-8 

Interorbital  space  in  head 

8-7 

10-0 

10-1 

Snout  in  head 

3-7 

3-6 

4-1 

Caudal  in  length 

4-2 

3-3 

3-7 

Lonnberg,  loc.  cit.,  Plate  IV,,  Figs.  14  [A.  mirus)  and  15  (A.  skottsbergi). 


PLATE  II 


PLATE  II 

Artedidraco  shackletoni,  Waite,  page  15. 
Natural  size. 


BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPE1).  1907-9 


VOL.  II.  PLATE  II 


WA1TE  :  PISCES 


c/5 

c 

I 


E.  R.  Waite  del. 


BRITISH   ANTARCTIC  EXPEDITION  1907-9 

UNDER  THE  COMMAND  OF  SIR  E.  H.  SHACKLETON,  C.V.O. 

REPORTS   ON   THE   SCIENTIFIC   INVESTIGATIONS 


VOL.   II 

BIOLOGY 

EDITOR  JAMES  MURRAY 

PART  III 

MALLOPHAGES 

BY   PROF.   L.   G.   NEUMANN 

(TOULOUSE) 


(WITH  OVE  PLATE) 


LONDON 

PUBLISHED  FOR  THE  EXPEDITION  BY  WILLIAM  HEINEMANN 

21  BEDFORD  STREET,  W.C. 

1911 

ISSUED  SEPARATELY,   APRIL,   1911 
PRICE   Is.  6d.  NET 


REPORTS  ALREADY  ISSUED 

VOL.  I.  PART  I.,  ON  COLLECTING  AT  CAPE  ROYDS 

BY  JAMES  MURRAY  PRICE  Is.  6d.  NET 

VOL.  I.  PART  II.,  ON  MICROSCOPIC  LIFE  AT  CAPE  ROYDS 

BY  JAMES  MURRAY  PRICE  5s.  Od.  NET 

VOL.  I.  PART  III.,  ANTARCTIC  ROT1FERA 

BY  JAMES  MURRAY  PRICE  5s.  Od.  NET 

VOL.  I.  PART  IV.,  MUSCI 

BY  JULES  CARDOT  PRICE  Is.  Od.  NET 

VOL.  I.  PART  V.,  TARDIGRADA 

BY  JAMES   MURRAY  PRICE   10s.  Od.  NET 

VOL.  I    PART  VI.,  RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE 

BY  EUGENE  PENARD  PRICE  3s.  Od.  NET 

VOL.  II.  PART  I.,  MOLLUSCA 

BY  CHARLES  MEDLEY  PRICK   Is.  6d.  NET 

VOL.  II.  PART  II.,  ANTARCTIC  FISHES 

BY  EDGAR  R.  WAITE,  F.L.S.  PRICE  Is.  6d.  NET 


PART  III 

MALLOPHAGA 

PAR  PROF.  L.  G.  NEUMANN,  TOULOUSE 

(Avec  la  Planche  III) 


EDITORIAL  NOTE. — The  collection  of  Bird-lice  is  a  very  small  one,  and  with  a  single  exception  was  not 
obtained  in  the  Antarctic  region,  but  on  the  Albatrosses  of  the  Southern  Ocean. 

The  one  exception,  a  variety  of  Philopterus  lari,  is  interesting  as  the  first  species  found  on  Maccormick's 
Skua,  and  also  for  its  occurrence  for  the  first  time  in  the  Antarctic. 

As  these  parasites  appear  to  be  extremely  rare  in  the  Antarctic  it  is  worth  noting  that  one  was 
observed  alive  on  an  Emperor  Penguin,  though  unfortunately  the  specimen  was  lost  among  the  down. 
The  rarity  appears  to  be  real,  as  we  carefully  examined  many  penguins  of  botli  species,  Skua  Gulls,  and 
Giant  and  Antarctic  Petrels,  and  never  saw  any  Bird-lice  except  these  three,  two  on  the  Skua  and  one  on 
the  Emperor.  J.  M. 

MALLOPHAGES 

La  collection  comprend  54  exemplaires,  prove nant  de  6  oiseaux,  dont  3  Diomedea 
exulans,  2  Thalassogeron  culminatus,  et  1  Megalestris  maccormicki,  ce  dernier  seul 
etant  reellement  antarctique. 

Tons  ces  Mallophages  representent  les  especes  suivantes  : 

1°.  Philopterus  lari  magnus  (Piaget),  sur  Megalestris  maccormicki. 
2°.  Lipeurus  concinnus  Kellogg  et  Chapman,  sur  1  Thalassigeron  culminatus. 
3°.  Lipeurus  ferox  Giebel,  sur  1  Diomedea  exulans. 
4°.  Lipeurus  hyalinus  n.  sp.,  sur  2  Diomedea  exulans. 

5°.  Taschenbergius  brews  (Dufour),  sur  les  3  Diomedea  exulans  et  1  Thalassigercn 
culminatus.        * 


1°.  Philopterus  lari  (0.  Fabricius)  (PI.  III.,  figs.  2  a  4) 

1780.  Pediculus  lari,  0.  Fabricius,  Fauna  groenlandica,  p.  219. 

1842.  Docophorus  lari,  H.  Denny,  Monographia  Anophirorum  Britannice,  p.  89,  PI.  V., 

fig.  9. 
1844.  Philopterus  lari,  P.  Gervais,  Histoire  naturelle  des  Insectes :  Apteres,  iii.,  p.  337. 

BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.   1907-9.       VOL.  II.     PART  3,    ISSUED  SEPARATELY  APRIL   1911 

D 


20  PROF.   L.   G.    NEUMANN 

1871.  Docophorus   gonothorax,    C.    G.    Giebel,    Zeitschrift  f.    ges.    Naturwss.,    xxxvii. 

p.  450. 

1874.  Docophorus  congener,  C.  G.  Giebel,  Insecta  Epizoa,  p.  111. 
1880.  Docophorus  lari  v.  mayna,  E.  Piaget,  Les  Pediculines,  p.  112. 

2  $,  sur  Megalestris  maccormicki  Saunders,  au  Cap  Royds,  par  77°  32'  lat.  S.  et 
166°  12'  long.  E.,  le  1"  Janvier  1909. 

Philopterus  lari  est  une  espece  commune  sur  nombre  d'especes  de  Larus.  Elle 
est  indiquee  aussi  sur  Sula  alba,  Rissa  tridactyla  policaris,  et  Creagrus  furcatus. 

Les  specimens  recueillis  sur  Megalestris  maccormicki,  les  premiers  Mallophages 
fournis  par  cet  Oiseau,  correspondent  a  la  sous-espece  de  Piaget,  P.  I.  magnus  : 
dimensions  plus  fortes  que  dans  le  type  (1  mm.  7  a  1  mm.  8  pour  le  $),  clypeus 
un  peu  plus  allonge  et  echancre.  Les  specimens  de  Piaget  provenaient  d'un 
Larus  atricilla. 

2°.  Lipeurus  concinnus  Kellogg  et  Chapman 

1899.  Lipeurus  concinnus,  V.  L.  Kellogg  et  B.  L.  Chapman,  Occasional  Papers  of  the 
California  Academy  of  Sciences,  vi.,  p.  97,  PI.  VII.,  fig.  2. 

1  $,  sur  Thalassogeron  culminatus  (Gould),  au  S.  de  1'Ocean  Indien,  par  43°  lat.  S. 
et  91°  30'  long.  E. 

L'espece  a  ete  decrite  par  Kellogg  et  Chapman  d'apres  des  individus  pris  sur 
Diomedea  albatrus  en  Californie. 

3°.  Lipeurus  ferox  Giebel 

1834.  Philopterus  diomedece,  L.  Dufour,  Ann.  de  la  Soc.  entomol.  de  France,  iv.,  p.  669, 
PI.  XXL,  figs.  1  et  2.  (NonPediculus  diomedece  Fabricius,  Entomologia  systematica, 
iv.,  1794,  p.  421). 

1834.  ?  Philopterus  pederiformis  L.  Dufour,  Ann.  de  la  Soc.  entomol.  de  France,  iv., 
p.  676,  PL  xxi.,  fig.  4. 

1864.  Lipeurus  diomedece  H.  Giglioli,  Quart.  Journal  of  Microsc.  Science  (N.S.),  iv., 
p.  19,  PL  L,  figs.  1  et  2. 

1867.  Lipeurus  ferox  C.  G.  Giebel,  Zeitschrift  f.  ges.  Naturwiss.,  xxix.,  p.  195. 

1  $,  sur  Diomedea  exulans  L.,  dans  1'Ocean  Indien  S.,  au  S.  de  la  Tasmanie  (avec 
Lipeurus  hyalinus  Nn.,  et  Taschenbergius  brevis  (Dufour). 

Kellogg  donne  pour  notes  a  cette  espece  :  Diomedea  melanophrys,  D.  brachyura, 
D.  nigripes  (Ocean  Pacifique  N.),  D.  albatrus  (Californie),  et  D.  exulans. 

L.  ferox  a  ete  etabli  par  Giebel  d'apres  un  individu  $  provenant  de  D.  mela- 
nophrys. En  en  reprenant  1'etude,  Taschenberg  a  decrit  comme  $  une  forme 
que  Kellogg  regarde  comme  etant  probablement  le  $  de  L.  densus  Kellogg.  La 
?  reelle  de  L.  ferox  a  ete  decrite  et  figuree  par  Kellogg  (1896).  La  ?  de  la  collection 
antarctique  est  conforme  a  la  description  et  a  la  figure  de  Kellogg. 


MALLOPHAGA  21 

4°.  Lipeurus  hyalinus,  n.  sp.  (PI.  III.,  figs,  la  a  Id) 

Cette  espece  est  representee  par  deux  lots,  recueillis  sur  Diomedea  exulans  L., 
savoir : 

5  $  et  3  ?,  dans  TOcean  Indien  S.,  par  40°  lat.  S.  et  47°  long.  E.  ;  4  $,  dans  TOcean 
Indien  S.,  au  S.  de  la  Tasmanie. 

Description. — Male.  Longueur  4  mm.  05,  largeur  1  mm.  Corps  large,  avec  des 
bandes  incolores,  transparentes  et  quelques  petites  taches  noires. 

Tete  subtriangulaire,  longue  de  0  mm.  9,  plus  large  (0  mm.  87)  en  arriere  des  yeux, 
parabolique  et  incolore  en  avant ;  un  long  poll  a  la  suture,  suivi  de  4  autres  plus  courts, 
le  dernier  etant  pre-antennal  et  tres  court ;  les  2  polls  suturaux  reunis  par  une  ligne 
concave,  suivie  d'une  ligne  anguleuse  qui  aboutit  aux  bandes  antennales  ;  celles-ci  inco- 
lores, a  bord  interne  sinueux.  Fosse  antennale  peu  profonde  a  son  bord  dorsal.  Antennes 
fortes,  incolores,  sauf  le  sommet  du  3e  article,  qui  est  brunatre.  ler  article  long,  renfle, 
ovo'ide,  une  fois  et  demie  aussi  long  que  les  4  autres  reunis  ;  2e  ovo'ide  et  presque 
aussi  long  que  les  3  suivants  reunis ;  le  3e  conique,  recourbe  en  avant,  plus  long  et 
plus  gros  que  chacun  des  2  suivants ;  4e  et  5"  egaux,  cylindriques,  le  4e  insere  sur  la 
concavite  du  3e.  Yeux  saillants,  au  sommet  d'une  tache  noire  trapezoiidale.  Bord 
temporal  d'abord  convexe  et  saillant,  puis  droit  et  dirige  en  dedans  et  en  arriere ; 
un  long  poil  a  Tangle  temporal.  Bord  occipital  concave.  Couleur  generale  blanchatre  ; 
bandes  incolores,  les  occipitales  reduites  a  un  espace  triangulaire. 

Thorax  long  de  0  mm.  9.  Prothorax  court,  rectangulaire,  pres  de  2  fois  aussi 
large  que  long,  le  bord  posterieur  un  peu  convexe,  une  epine  a  chaque  angle  posterieur  ; 
blanchatre  avec  bande  laterale  incolore  et  recourbee  un  peu  sur  le  bord  posterieur. 
Me ta thorax  un  peu  plus  large  que  long,  le  plus  large  en  arriere,  a  bords  lateraux  et 
posterieur  concaves ;  dans  chaque  angle  posterieur  3  longs  poils  colores  et  inseres 
sur  une  me  me  saillie  petite  et  conique  ;  une  bande  laterale  courte,  claire  et  saillante 
en  dedans  ;  3  sternites  incolores  (presternite  lineaire,  mesosternite  en  hexagone  allonge 
transversalement,  metasternite  subcirculaire.  Couleur  generale  blanchatre.  Pattes 
incolores,  sauf  les  tarses,  qui  sont  brun  chatain. 

Abdomen  long  de  2  mm.  3,  plus  large  au  4e  segment.  Segments  a  peu  pres  de 
memo  longueur.  A  chaque  angle  posterieur,  2  longs  poils  au  1"  segment ;  3  aux 
2e,  3e  et  4C ;  4  aux  5e  et  6" ;  6  au  T  ;  5  au  8e ;  le  9e  etroit,  emargine  a  son  extremite, 
dont  chaque  lobe  porte  un  poil  court  et  un  poil  long.  Couleur  generale  blanchatre. 
Sur  chaque  segment,  une  bande  laterale  tres  etroite,  elargie  en  un  prolongement 
transversal  au  bord  anterieur  et  en  un  autre  plus  court  en  avant  de  I'angle  posterieur ; 
au  7°  segment  les  deux  elargissements  out  la  meme  importance  ;  un  seul  au  8e.  Sur 
les  segments  2  a  6  une  petite  tache  noire  dans  Tangle  anterieur  ;  une  semblable  au  8e, 
suivie  d'une  tache  marron  ;  chaque  lobe  du  9C  presque  couvert  par  une  tache  marron  ; 
Textremite  de  Tappareil  copulateur  est  un  peu  coloree.  Stigmates  petits,  situes  sur  le 
milieu  de  la  longueur  du  segment,  leur  ecartement  egal  a  la  moitie  de  sa  largeur. 


22  PROF.  L.   G.    NEUMANN 

Femelle. — Corps  long  de  4  mm.  2,  large  de  1  mm.  Fosse  antennale  a  angle  anterieur 
formant  une  pointe  aigue.  Antennes  greles  ;  ler  article  renfle,  plus  gros  et  presque 
aussi  long  que  le  2e ;  ler  et  2e  formant  plus  de  la  moitie  de  la  longueur  de  1'antenne  ; 
3°  et  5e  de  meme  longueur  et  plus  longs  que  le  4".  Abdomen  long  de  2  mm.  4  ;  polls 
plus  longs  que  cliez  le  $ ;  bandes  laterales  ayant,  sur  chacun  des  segments  1  a  7,  deux 
elargissements  egaux.  Pas  de  tache  noire  anterieure  au  2e  segment,  une  au  7e ;  8" 
segment  plus  etroit  que  chez  le  $  ;  9"  a  fente  plus  etroite. 

Cette  espece  est  voisine  de  L.  tricolor  Piaget,  et  de  L.  confidens  Kellogg.  Elle 
rappelle  aussi  Nirmus  giganticola  Kellogg. 

5°.  Taschenbergius  brevis  Dufour 

1834.  Philopterus  brevis,  L.  Dufour,  Ann.  de  la  Soc.  entomol.  de  France,  iv.,  p.  674, 

PL  XXL,  fig.  3. 
1838.    Philopterus    (Docophorus  ?)    taunts   Nitzsch ;      H.    Burmeister,    Handbuch   der 

Entomologie,  ii.,  p.  433. 
1864.  Docophoroides  brevis,  H.  Giglioli,  Quart.  Journal  of  Microsc.  Science  (N.S.),  iv., 

p.  21,  PI.  I.,  figs.  3  et  4. 

1866.  Lipeurus  taurus,  C.  G.  Giebel,  Zeitschrift  f.  ges.  Naturwiss.,  xxviii.,  p.  385. 
1882.  Eurymetopus  taurus,  0.  Taschenberg,  Nova  Acta  der  Ksl.  Leop.-Carol.-Deutschen 

Akademie  der  Naturforscher,  xliv.,  p.  183,  PI.  V.,  figs.  8  et  8a. 
1906.  Taschenbergius  brevis  L.  G.  Neumann,  Bull,  de  la  Soc.  Zoolog.  de  France,  xx., 

p.  60. 

1  $  et  1  $,  sur  Diomedea  exulans  L.,  au  S.  de  1'Atlantique,  par  35°  lat.  S.  et  30°  27' 
long.  0. ;  15  $  et  10  $,  sur  Diomedea  exulans,  au  S.  de  1'Ocean  Indien,  par  40°  lat.  S.  et 
47°  long.  E.  (avec  Lipeurus  hyalinus  Nn.) ;  3  $  et  7  ?,  sur  D.  exulans,  dans  1'Ocean 
Indien,  au  S.  de  la  Tasmanie  (avec  Lipeurus  ferox  Giebel,  et  L.  hyalinus  Nn.) ;  1  $  sur 
Thalassogeron  culminatus  Gould,  au  S.  de  1'Ocean  Indien,  par  41°  lat.  S.  et  53°  24' 
long.  E. 

T.  brevis  a  encore  pour  hotes  connus  :  Diomedea  albatrus,  D.  nigripes,  D.  regia, 
Fulmarus  glacialis,  Puffinus  opisthomelas,  Arenaria  interpres. 


PLATE  III 


PLANCHE  III 


TACIE 


FIGURE  1. — Lipeurus  hyalinus,  n.  sp 21 

„         a. — $  Face  dorsale x  20 

„          6.— Abdomen  de  la  ? x  20 

,,         c. — Antennes  $  et  $ .  x  45 

,,          d. — Taches  sternales  du  $  . x  65 

FIGURE  2. — Philopterus  lari,  $,  face  dorsale 19 

FIGURE  3.  —Philopterus  lari,  $,  tete  et  thorax  (face  ventralc) 
FIGURE  4. — Philopterus  lari,  $,  taches  ventrales 


BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.  1907-9 


VOL.  II.  PLATE  III 


NEUMANN:  MALLOPHAGA 


3 


1.   LlPEURUS   HYALINUS,   SP.  N.  2-4.    PHII.OPTE11CS    tARI. 


G.  Neumann  del. 


BRITISH   ANTARCTIC  EXPEDITION  1907-9 

UNDER  THE  COMMAND  OF  SIR  E.  H.  SHACKLETON,  C.V.O. 

REPORTS   ON   THE   SCIENTIFIC   INVESTIGATIONS 

»-• 
VOL.   II 

BIOLOGY 

EDITOR  JAMES  MURRAY 

PART  IV 

A8TERIES,  OPHIURES,  ET  ECHINIDES 

BY   R.    KOEHLER 

(LYONS) 


(WITH  FIVE  PLATES} 


LONDON 
PUBLISHED  FOR  THE  EXPEDITION  BY  WILLIAM  HEINEMANN 

21   BEDFORD  STREET,  VV.C. 

1911 

ISSUED  SEPARATELY,   JUNE,   1911 
PRICE  5*.   NET 


REPORTS  ALREADY  ISSUED 

VOL.  I.  PART  I.,  ON  COLLECTING  AT  CAPE  ROYDS 

BY  JAMES  MURRAY  PRICE  Is.  6cl.  NET 

VOL.  I.  PART  II.,  ON  MICROSCOPIC  LIFE  AT  CAPE  ROYDS 

BY  JAMES  MURRAY  PRICE  5s.  Od.  NET 

VOL.  I.  PART  III.,  ANTARCTIC  ROTIFERA 

BY  JAMES  MURRAY  PRICE  5s.  Od.  NET 

VOL.  I.  PART  IV.,  MUSCI 

BY  JULES  CARDOT  PRICE  Is.  Od.  NET 

VOL.  I.  PART  V.,  TARDIGRADA 

Bv  JAMES   MURRAY  PRICE   10s.  Od.  NET 

VOL.  I.  PART  VI.,  RHIZOPODES  D'EAU  DOUCE 

BY  EUGENE  PENARD  PRICE  3s.  Od.  NET 

VOL.  II.  PART  1.,  MOLLUSCA 

BY  CHARLES  HEDLEY  PRICE  Is.  6d.  NET 

VOL.   II.  PART  II.,  ANTARCTIC  FISHES 

BY  EDGAR  R.  \VAITE,  F.L.S.  PRICE  Is.  6d.  NET 

VOL.  II.  PART  III.,  MALLOPHAGES 

BY  PROF.  L.  G.  NEUMANN   (TOULOUSE)  PRICE  Is.  6d.  NET 


PART  IV 

ECHINODERMA 

ASTERIES,   OPHIURES,    ET    fiCHINIDES 

DE  L'EXPEDITION  ANTARCTIQUE  ANGLAISE  DE  1907-1909 

PAR  R.  KGEHLER 

Professeur  a  1'UniversiW  de  Lyon 
(Avec  les  Planches  IV  &  VIII) 

M.  JAMES  MURRAY  a  bien  voulu  m'offrir  d'etudier  les  Asteries,  Ophiures  et  Echinides 
recueillis  par  le  Nimrod,  commandant  E.  Shackleton,  a  la  Terre  Victoria  du  Sud,  en 
1907-1909.  Je  suis  heureux  de  le  remercier  ici  de  la  confiance  qu'il  a  bien  voulu  me 
temoigner. 

Les  Echinoderm.es  recueillis  proviennent  tous  du  Cap  Royds,  qui  represente  la 
pointe  la  plus  occidentale  de  1'ile  Ross,  dans  la  Terre  Victoria  du  Sud,  par  77°  32'  lat.  S. 
et  166°  12'  long.  E.  La  Terre  Victoria  et  les  regions  avoisinantes  ont  deja  etc  explorees 
au  point  de  vue  zoologique  ;  la  Southern  Cross  et  la  Discovery  en  ont  rapporte  des 
collections  qui  ont  etc  etudiees  et  plusieurs  especes  d'Echinodermes  y  sont  connues. 
Aussi  pouvait-on  supposer  que  les  Echinodermes  du  Nimrod  n'offriraient  pas  un  tres 
grand  interet  et  ne  renfermeraient  que  des  representants  d'une  faune  deja  connue. 
Ces  previsions  n'ont  pas  ete  realisees,  heureusement :  la  collection  qui  m'a  ete  remise, 
bien  qu'elle  ne  soit  pas  tres  importante,  est  au  contraire  tres  interessante,  non  pas 
seulement  a  cause  des  especes  nouvelles  que  j'y  ai  trouvees,  mais  aussi  en  raison  des 
renseignements  qu'elle  fournit  sur  la  repartition  geographique  de  certaines  especes. 

Les  explorations  zoologiques  de  1'Antarctique  ont  surtout  ete  faites  dans  deux 
directions  differentes  et  presque  opposees  ;  les  unes,  qui  avaient  pour  point  de  depart 
le  detroit  de  Magellan,  ont  eu  pour  objet  1'etude  des  regions  situees  au  Sud  de  la 
pointe  meridionale  de  1'Amerique  du  Sad ;  les  Orcades  et  les  Shetland  du  Sud,  les 
terres  de  Graham,  de  Danco,  etc.,  c'est-a-dire  entre  les  50°  et  70°  long.  W. ;  les  autres^ 
qui  avaient  pour  point  de  depart  1'Australie  ou  la  Nouvelle-Zelande,  nous  ont  fait 
connaitre  des  regions  telles  que  la  Terre  Victoria  du  Sud,  situees  vers  le  170°  long.  E. 
II  reste  entre  ces  deux  points  extremes  un  territoire  a  peine  connu  quoique  la  Belgica 
se  soit  avancee  jusque  vers  le  100°  long.  W.,  et  le  Francais  jusqu'au  126°  long.  W. 

BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.   1907-9.      VOL.  II.      PART  4,  ISSUED  JUNE   1911  E 

B 


26  R.  KCEHLER 

Les  Echinodermes  recueillis  par  le  Nimrod  comprennent  six  Asteries,  quatre 
Ophiures,  et  trois  Echinides,  soit  en  tout  treize  especes  dont  huit  sont  nouvelles  et 
trois  representent  des  genres  nouveaux.  En  voici  1'enumeration  : 


ASTERIES 


Odontaster  validus  Kcehler. 
Cryaster  antarcticus  Koehler. 
Porania  antarctica  Smith. 


Ophioglypha  resistens,  n,  sp. 
Ophioglypha  flexibilis,  n.  sp. 


Sterechimis  neumayeri  Meissner. 


Coscinasterias  brucei  Koehler. 
Coscinasterias  victories,  n.  sp. 
Notasterias  armata,  n.  gen.  u.  sp. 


OPHIURES 


Amphiura  algida,  n.  sp. 
Ophiodiplax  disjuncta,  n.  gen.  n.  sp. 


ECHINIDES 


Pseudabatus  nimrodi,  n.  gen.  n.  sp. 


Abatus  shackletoni,  n.  sp. 

II  est  assez  interessant  de  constater,  qu'a  part  une  seule  et  unique  exception, 
aucune  des  especes  ci-dessus  n'a  ete  rapportee  par  la  Discovery  de  la  Terre  Victoria 
du  Sud ;  la  faune  echinologique  rencontree  par  ce  batiment  a  une  composition  toute 
differente  d'apres  le  rapport  de  J.  Bell  (08).*  II  me  parait  utile  de  rappeler  ici  les 
especes  signalees  par  ce  naturaliste  : 


Asterias  brandti  Bell. 
Asterias  longstaffi  Bell. 
Heuresaster  hodgsoni  Bell. 
Pentagonaster  incertus  Bell. 
Leptoptychaster  kerguelensis  Smith. 
Cycethra  verrucosa  Philippi. 
Henricia  ornata  Perrier. 
Solaster  octoradiatus  Ludwig. 
Ophioglypha  kcehleri  Bell. 
Ophiozona  inermis  Bell. 
Ophiosteira  antarctica  Bell. 


Ophionotiis  victor  ice  Bell. 
Ophiacantha  imago  Lyman. 
Ophiacantha  vivipara  Ljungmann. 
Ophiacantha  cosinica  Lyman. 
Ophioconis  antarctica  Lyman. 
Amphiura  belgicce  Koehler. 
Astrotoma  agassizii  I;yman. 
Jeune  Ophiure. 

Austrocidaris  canaliculata  Agassiz. 
Sterechinus  margaritaceus  Lamarck. 
Abatus  cavernosus  Philippi. 


La  seule  espece  de  cette  liste  que  j'ai  retrouvee  parmi  les  Echinodermes  du  Nimrod 
est  la  "  jeune  Ophiure  "  que  J.  Bell  s'est  contents  de  figurer  sans  la  decrire  ;  nous 
verrons  plus  loin  que  cette  forme,  que  le  savant  naturaliste  anglais  considerait  comme 
un  jeune,  a  tous  les  caracteres  d'un  adulte. 

Les  especes  deja  connues  que  1'Expedition  Antarctique  Anglaise  a  rapportees  sont 
au  nombre  de  cinq ;  elles  n'avaient  pas  encore  ete  signalees  a  la  Terre  Victoria.  Deux 
d'entre  elles  sont  plus  ou  moins  communes  dans  le  domaine  antarctique  ;  ce  sont  la 
Porania  antarctica  et  le  Sterechimis  neumayeri.  La  premiere  espece  est  tres  repandue 
dans  les  regions  antarctiques  et  subantarctiques ;  le  Nimrod  1'a  rencontree  a  une 
latitude  tres  elevee  (77° -32'  S.),  alors  que  sa  station  la  plus  australe  notee  par  la 
Belgica  etait  situee  par  71°  18'.  Le  Sterechinus  neumayeri  presente  aussi  une  repartition 

•  Les  chifl'res  en  caracteres  gras  renvoient  i  la  liste  des  ouvrages  cit6s  qui  se  trouve  4  la  fin  du  m6moire. 


ECHINODERMA  27 

geographique  assez  vaste  :  on  le  connait  au  detroit  de  Magellan,  a  la  Georgia  du  Sud, 
aux  Orcades  du  Sud,  a  la  Terre  de  Graham,  etc. ;  Mortensen  nous  apprend  (10,  p.  68) 
qu'il  a  etc  trouve  en  plusieurs  stations  par  1'Expedition  Sud-polaire  Suedoise  et  il  estime 
qu'il  doit  etre  circumpolaire  ;  sa  repartition  tient  evidemment  a  ce  qu'il  possede  une  larve 
pelagique.  II  n'y  a  done  rien  d'etonnant  a  ce  qu'il  ait  ete  capture  au  Cap  Royds. 

Les  trois  autres  especes  avaient  jusqu'a  present  un  habitat  beaucoup  plus  restreint. 
La  Coscinasterias  briwei  n'etait  connue  qu'aux  Orcades  du  Sud  ou  la  Scotia  1'a 
decouverte,  et  le  Cryaster  antarcticus  a  ete  trouve  par  le  Francais  vers  le  65°  lat.  S. 

Enfin  VOdontaster  validus  a  ete  rencontre  par  le  Francais  vers  les  Terres  de  Graham 
et  de  Danco,  et  par  la  Scotia  aux  Orcades  du  Sud.  Ces  localites,  comprises  entre  le 
50°  et  le  70°  long.  W.,  sont,  on  le  voit,  tres  eloignees  du  Cap  Royds. 

J'ai  dit  plus  haut  que  les  Echinodermes  proviennent  tous  du  Cap  Royds.  D'apres 
les  renseignements  qui  m'ont  ete  communiques,  les  echantillons  captures  a  une 
profondeur  de  10  a  20  brasses  ont  ete  recueillis  dans  une  petite  baie  dont  le  fond 
renfermait  une  vase  noire  tres  adherente  ;  ceux  qui  proviennent  de  40  a  80  brasses 
ont  ete  dragues  sur  un  fond  de  couleur  claire  dont  la  faune  etait  tres  riche. 

ASTERIES 

ODONTASTER  VALIDUS  Kcehler 
Odontaster  validus,  Kcehler  (06),  p.  6 
Cap  Royds.     Juin  1908.     Profondeur,  7-20  brasses.     Quelques  echantillons. 

L'un  des  exemplaires  est  de  tres  grande  taille  :  R  =  G8  millim.,  r  =  30  millim. ; 
il  est  tres  robuste  et  1'epaisseur  au  centre  du  disque  depasse  20  millim.  Cinq  autres 
individus  sont  plus  petits  et  R  varie  entre  38  et  25  millim. ;  enfin  d'autres  individus, 
beaucoup  plus  petits  et  chez  lesquels  R  est  compris  entre  15  et  8  millim.,  se  trouvent 
dans  la  collection. 

PORANIA   ANTARCTICA   Smith 

Voir  pour  la  bibliographic  : 

Perrier  (91),  p.  107  et  163. 
Leitpold  (95),  p.  588. 
Ludwig  (03),  p.  22. 
Ludwig  (05),  p.  51. 

Cap  Royds.     20  aout  1908.     Profondeur,  60-80  brasses.     Deux  echantillons. 

Les  exemplaires  sont  tres  jeunes  tous  deux  et  ils  ont  la  me  me  taille  :  R  =  20  et 
r  =  8  millim.,  mais  dans  1'un  d'eux  le  disque  est  plus  petit  tandis  que  les  bras  sont 
plus  greles  et  plus  longs  que  dans  1'autre. 

Les  auteurs  s'accordent  a  considerer  comme  devant  rentrer  dans  la  meme  espece 
les  P.  antarctica  Smith,  magellanica  Studer,  glaber  Sladen,  et  spinidata  Sladen. 
Les  Porania  antarctiques  varient  en  effet  beaucoup  dans  leurs  caracteres  et  Perrier 


28  R.  KCEHLER 

a  meme  fait  remarquer  que  certaines  formes  arrivaient  a  se  rapprocher  de  la  P.  pulvillus 
des  mers  du  Nord. 

Les  deux  individus  que  j'ai  sous  les  yeux  m'offrent  un  nouvel  exemple  de  cette 
variation.  L'un  d'eux,  qui  a  les  bras  plus  courts  et  plus  larges  et  le  disque  compara- 
tivement  grand,  offre,  sur  la  face  dorsale  du  disque,  des  tubercules  coniques  et  bien 
apparents,  au  nombre  d'une  douzaine  ;  sur  les  bras,  ces  tubercules  sont  beaucoup 
plus  petits,  mais  assez  nombreux  et  rapproches.  L'exemplaire  correspond  done,  par 
ses  caracteres,  a  la  P.antarctica.  Dans  Fautre,  dont  les  bras  sont  minces  et  allonges, 
il  n'y  a  pas  la  moindre  trace  de  tubercules  ou  de  saillies  sur  la  face  dorsale  :  il 
rappellerait  done  la  forme  decrite  par  Sladen  sous  le  nom  de  P.  glaber. 

En  raison  des  variations  qui  ont  ete  notees  par  differents  auteurs  sur  les  Porania 
des  diverses  regions  antarctiques  explorees,  il  ne  semble  pas  qu'on  puisse  etablir  une 
distinction  entre  les  formes  des  iles  Kerguelen  et  celles  de  1'extremite  meridionale  de 
I'Amerique  du  Sud. 

La  P.  antarctica  parait  avoir  une  aire  de  repartition  assez  vaste  dans  les  regions 
antarctiques.  La  Bdgica  1'a  rencontree  a  71°  18'  lat.  S. :  on  voit  qu'elle  peut  remonter 
encore  davantage  vers  le  pole  puisque  FEpedition  Anglaise  1'a  capturee  a  77°  32' 
lat.  S. 

CRYASTER  ANTARCTICUS  Kcehler  (PI.  IV,  fig.  1  et  2) 

Cryaster  antarcticus,  Koehler  (06),  p.  24,  PI.  I,  fig.  1,  et  PI.  II,  fig.  10 
Baie  de  Backdoor.     6  fevrier  1907.     Profondeur,  6-13  brasses.     Un  echantillon. 

L'exemplaire  est  en  excellent  etat  de  conservation.  Au  premier  abord,  il  semble 
assez  different  du  type  du  C.  antarcticus  que  j'ai  decrit  d'apres  les  individus  rapportes 
par  la  premiere  Expedition  du  Dr.  Charcot :  tandis  que  cliez  ces  derniers  les  faces 
dorsale  et  ventrale  du  corps  offrent  des  petits  piquants  nombreux  et  serres, 
Techantillon  de  1'Expedition  Antarctique  Anglaise  parait  tout  a  fait  inerme  :  de  fait, 
ces  piquants  font  a  peu  pres  completement  defaut  et  Ton  ne  trouve,  en  general,  que 
la  gaine  tegumentaire  des  piquants,  ceux-ci  ayant  disparu.  Mais  j'ai  heureusement 
rencontre  dans  les  collections  recueillies  recemment,  au  cours  de  la  deuxieme  Expedition 
du  Dr.  Charcot,  et  qui  viennent  de  m'etre  confies,  des  exemplaires  de  C.  antarcticus 
chez  lesquels  les  piquants  sont  beaucoup  moins  developpes  que  dans  le  type  et  peuvent 
rester  completement  caches  dans  leur  enveloppe  tegumentaire,  de  telle  sorte  que 
1'individu  de  la  Terre  Victoria  apparait  comme  le  dernier  terme  d'une  serie  dont  je 
possede  les  principaux  stades.  II  n'y  a  done  aucune  raison  pour  ne  point  le  rapporter 
au  C.  antarcticus. 

Les  bras,  au  nombre  de  cinq,  sont  subegaux,  mais,  comme  ils  sont  plus  ou  moins 
contournes  et  releves  Vers  la  face  dorsale,  il  est  difficile  de  mesurer  leur  longueur 
exacte  :  sur  les  plus  grands  bras,  R  varie  de  120  a  130  millim.  ;  r  =  49  millim. 

Le  disque  est  tres  epais,  sa  hauteur  maxima  atteignant  47  millim.  ;  il  a  la  forme 
d'un  cone  surbaisse,  a  sommet  tres  emousse  et  il  se  continue  largement  avec  les  bras. 


ECHINODERMA  29 

On  remarque,  le  long  de  chaque  interradius,  une  depression  assez  large  et  qui 
s'accentue  a  mesure  qu'on  se  rapproche  de  la  peripherie  du  disque  ;  la  base  des  bras 
se  trouve  ainsi  nettement  delimitee.  Cette  base  est  tres  large  :  elle  mesure  48  millim. 
sur  le  bras  le  plus  large  et  38  sur  le  plus  etroit.  Les  bras  se  retrecissent  tres  rapide- 
ment  sur  leur  premiere  moitie,  et  ensuite  d'une  maniere  plus  lente,  en  s'amincissant 
progressivement  jusqu'a  1'extremite  qui  est  etroite  et  obtuse. 

Malgre  1'absence  de  depots  calcaires  dans  les  teguments  de  la  face  dorsale,  celle-ei 
est  tres  resistante  et  indeformable  et  le  tegument  qui  la  recouvre  est  epais  et  dur. 
Tout  1'ensemble  de  1'animal  est  tres  robuste.  La  couclie  superficielle  de  ce  tegument, 
dont  1'epaisseur  atbeint  au  moins  un  millimetre,  est  constitute  par  des  saillies  de  forme 
tres  irreguliere  et  inegales,  qui  sont  tres  serrees  les  unes  centre  les  autres  et  separees 
par  des  sillons  tres  fins.  Ces  saillies  out  la  surface  tantot  lisse,  tantot  plissee  ;  elles 
rappellent,  par  leur  ensemble,  les  pustules  que  Ton  observe  sur  la  face  dorsale  de 
certaines  Anasterias,  mais  elles  sont  beaucoup  plus  petites  que  dans  ce  dernier  genre, 
car  les  plus  grandes  n'atteignent  pas  un  centimetre  de  largeur. 

Les  petits  piquants  que  j'ai  signales  en  1906  chez  les  C.  antarcticus  provenant  de 
la  premiere  Expedition  Charcot,  emergeaient  de  saillies  analogues  et  leur  base  restait 
plongee,  sur  une  longueur  plus  ou  moins  grande,  dans  le  tissu  mou  qui  lui  formait 
ainsi  une  collerette.  Ici  le  piquant  fait  completement  defaut  et  la  collerette  du 
piquant  existe  seule.  J'ai  examine  au  microscope  un  grand  nombre  de  ces  pustules 
sans  pouvoir  y  decouvrir  la  moindre  indication  de  piquants  ou  de  depots  calcaires ; 
sur  un  certain  nombre  d'entre  elles,  on  voit  s'elever  une  petite  protuberance  centrale, 
conique,  a  pointe  obtuse,  mais  celle-ci  ne  renferme  pas  non  plus  la  moindre  trace  de 
piquant.  On  ne  peut  pas  admettre  que  les  piquants  aient  ete  dissous  par  les  reactifs 
conservateurs,  car  j'en  observe  sur  la  face  ventrale  ainsi  que  je  le  dirai  plus  loin. 

L'aspect  de  la  face  dorsale  de  cet  individu  est  tout  a  fait  identique  a  celui  que 
j 'observe  chez  certains  individus  provenant  de  la  deuxieme  Expedition  Charcot  et 
chez  lesquels  cette  face  n'offre  aucun  piquant  apparent ;  mais  1'examen  microscopique 
des  collerettes  ou  pustules  de  ces  individus  montre  que  chacune  d'elles  renferme  un 
petit  piquant  interne. 

Vers  le  centre  du  disque,  les  petites  pustules  s'aplatissent  progressivement  et  elles 
disparaissent  sur  un  espace  mesurant  15  millim.  de  diametre  environ,  qui  est  occupe 
par  un  tegument  lisse  sur  lequel  on  aperyoit  cependant  un  fin  reseau  polygonal 
representant  sans  doute  1'impression  de  pustules  disparues.  II  semble  que  cette 
region  ait  subi  des  pressions  ou  des  frottements  qui  ont  comprime  ou  enleve  les  parties 
superficielles  du  tegument.  Au  centre  de  cette  region  se  trouve  un  tres  petit  pore 
qui  correspond  peut-etre  a  1'anus. 

Parmi  les  pustules,  se  trouvent  de  tres  nombreuses  papules  allongees  et  dont  la 
longueur  atteint  2  a  3  millim. ;  leurs  parois,  tres  molles,  sont  minces,  transparentes 
et  incolores  et  elles  tranchent  sur  les  autres  parties  des  teguments  dont  la  couleur 
est  brun-clair. 


30  R.   KCEHLER 

La  couche  ainsi  constitute  par  les  enveloppes  des  piquants  avortes  et  les  papules, 
atteint  une  epaisseur  d'au  moins  1  millim.  ;  en  dessous  d'elle  se  trouve  une  paroi 
conjonctive  resistante,  de  couleur  blanchatre,  formee  d'un  tissu  tres  dense  offrant 
des  orifices  circulaires  par  ou  passent  les  papules.  La  couche  superficielle  des 
teguments  donne,  a  la  main,  la  sensation  du  velours. 

La  plaque  madreporique,  tres  grande  et  allongee  dans  le  sens  interradial,  mesure 
10  millim.  sur  7'5,  et  elle  est  situee  plus  pres  du  centre  que  du  bord ;  sa  surface  est 
grossierement  granuleuse  et  les  sillons  ne  sont  pas  apparents. 

Dans  les  aires  interradiaires  ventrales,  les  sillons  qui  separent  les  saillies  tegu- 
mentaires  se  disposent  d'une  maniere  reguliere,  et  parallelement  les  uns  aux  autres, 
en  allant  du  sillon  ambulacraire  aux  bords  du  disque  et  des  bras.  Les  saillies  tegu- 
mentaires  elles-memes  s'alignent  ainsi  en  files  transversales  qui  se  continuent  sur  les 
bords  du  disque  et  des  bras  et  passent  aux  pustules  de  la  face  dorsale.  Ces  saillies  sont 
en  general  plus  accentuees  et  plus  grosses  que  celles  de  la  face  dorsale.  Certaines  d'entre 
elles,  surtout  au  voisinage  de  la  bouche,  renferment  un  petit  piquant  que  1'on  reconnait 
soit  a  1'examen  microscopique,  soit  en  tatant  1'expansion  a  1'aide  d'une  aiguille,  mais 
aucun  de  ces  piquants  ne  fait  saillie  au  dehors.  Sur  les  cotes  des  bras,  mais  dans  la 
partie  terminate  seulement,  j 'observe  aussi  quelques  saillies  coniques  renfermant 
chacune  un  piquant  interne. 

Les  sillons  ambulacraires  sont  etroits  et  les  tubes  sont  places  sans  ordre,  tres  serres 
les  uns  contre  les  autres.  Les  piquants  adambulacraires  sont  disposes  sur  trois  rangs 
comme  je  1'ai  decrit ;  ils  sont  tres  courts,  epais  et  entoures  d'une  forte  enveloppe 
tegumentaire. 

COSCINASTEEIAS  BRUCEI  Kcehler  (PI.  V,  fig.  5) 

Stolasterias  brucei  Koehler  (08),  p.  41,  PI.  V,  fig.  46  et  47 
Cap  Royds.  27  juillet  1908.  Profondeur,  10-18  brasses.  Quatre  echantillons. 
Les  quatre  exemplaires  sont  tres  jeunes  et  ils  ont  tous  a  peu  pres  la  meme  taille  : 
R  ne  mesure  pas  plus  de  27  millim.  Ils  n'ont  pas  encore  acquis  leur  forme  definitive, 
mais  ils  possedent  tous  les  caracteres  principaux  de  la  C.  brucei  et  je  ne  crois  pas  me 
tromper  en  les  rapportant  a  cette  espece  que  j'ai  decrite  d'apres  les  echantillons  recueillis 
par  la  Scotia  aux  Orcades  du  Sud,  a  une  profondeur  de  10  brasses.  Pour  les  raisons  que 
j'indiquerai  plus  loin,  il  me  parait  plus  correct  de  ranger  cette  Asterie  dans  le  genre 
Coscinasterias  plutot  que  dans  le  genre  Stolasterias  auquel  je  1'avais  d'abord  rapportee. 
Les  quatre  individus  presentent  les  memes  caracteres  :  j'ai  represente,  PI.  V, 
fig.  5,  la  face  dorsale  de  1'un  d'eux  que  j'ai  desseche  pour  rendre  ses  caracteres  plus 
apparents.  Le  disque  offre  un  cercle  externe  de  piquants  tres  courts  et  obtus,  entoures 
chacun  d'une  collerette  a  pedicellaires  croises,  peu  nombreux,  et,  au  centre,  un  petit 
piquant  ou  un  groupe  de  deux  ou  trois  piquants  ;  dans  1'espace  intermediate,  on 
n' observe  que  quelques  piquants  epars.  La  ligne  carinale  est  marquee  par  une  rangee 
de  piquants  qui  offre,  comrne  chez  le  type  de  1'espece,  des  sinuosites  plus  ou  moins 


ECHINODERMA  31 

accentuees.  Entre  cette  ligne  et  la  rangee  marginale  dorsale,  on  n'observe  que 
quelques  piquants  isoles,  toujours  entoures  de  leurs  collerettes,  mais  la  plus  grande 
partie  des' cotes  des  bras  reste  nue.  Les  piquants  sont  cylindriques  et  ils  se  terminent 
par  une  extremite  arrondie  offrant  des  denticulations  tres  fines  et  pointues.  Les 
piquants  des  rangees  marginales  dorsales  et  ventrales  sont  aplatis  et  un  peu  plus  gros 
que  les  precedents ;  leur  extremite  est  souvent  un  peu  elargie  et  elle  porte  aussi  de 
tres  fines  spinules.  La  rangee  marginale  ventrale  est  tres  rapprochee  des  piquants 
adambulacraires  dont  elle  est  simplement  separee  par  un  intervalle  etroit,  sans  la 
moindre  trace  de  piquants.  Ce  caractere  est  bien  conforme  a  ce  qui  existe  chez  la 
C.  brucei,  tandis  qu'il  existe  une  rangee  ventrale  de  piquants  chez  la  C.  victories  que 
je  decrirai  ci-dessous. 

Aux  quatre  echantillons  que  je  viens  de  mentionner  etaient  joints  une  douzaine 
d'individus  extreme  me  nt  jeunes  chez  lesquels  R  est  compris  entre  12  et  4  millim. 
Ils  appartiennent  tres  vraisemblablement  aussi  a  la  C.  brucei. 

En  rapportant  primitivement  la  C.  brucei  au  genre  Stolasterias,  j'avais  donne  a 
ce  dernier  genre  la  signification  assez  large  indiquee  par  Sladen  et  non  1'acception 
restreinte  qui  lui  a  ete  ensuite  attribute  par  Perrier.  Les  differentes  coupures  qui 
ont  ete  etablies  par  ce  dernier  savant  dans  1'ancien  genre  Stolasterias  de  Sladen  ne 
sont  peut-etre  pas  tres  necessaires,  et,  d'autre  part,  les  limites  memes  assignees  par 
Perrier  au  genre  Stolasterias  ne  sont  pas  bien  precises.  Ainsi  ce  naturalisle  etablit  en 
1896  (Stellerides  des  Campagnes  de  I'Hirondelle,  p.  34),  une  distinction  entre  le  genre 
Stolasterias  et  un  nouveau  genre  Distolasterias  qu'il  cree,  etqui  est  fonde  sur  le  fait  que  le 
premier  a  les  piquants  adambulacraires  isoles,  tandis  que  le  second  en  a  deux  par  plaque. 
Or,  trois  pages  plus  loin  (p.  37),  il  decrit,  sous  le  norn  de  Stolasterias  neglecta,  une 
nouvelle  espece  qui  possede  deux  rangees  de  piquants  adambulacraires ;  je  ne  puis  com- 
prendre  pourquoi  1'auteur  ne  la  rapporte  pas  a  son  genre  Distolasterias  plutot  qu'au 
genre  Stolasterias  qu'il  caracterise,  entre  autres,  par  la  rangee  unique  de  piquants 
adambulacraires. 

D'autre  part,  W.  K.  Fisher  a  montre  (06,  p.  1104)  que  le  genre  Stolasterias  cor- 
respondait  exactement  au  genre  Cosdnasterias,  etabli  par  Verrill  pour  la  C.  muricata 
(qui  est  synonyme  de  C.  calamaria  Gray)  ;  le  terme  Cosdnasterias  se  trouve  done 
anterieur  au  terme  Stolasterias  puisqu'il  date  de  1869,  et  le  naturaliste  americain 
estime  que,  logiquement,  le  premier  doit  etre  substitue  au  second.  Ce  genre  Cosdn- 
asterias, pris  dans  son  sens  le  plus  large,  comprend  les  formes  principales  suivantes  : 
calamaria,  tenuispina,  yemmifera,  volsellata,  stichantha,  eustyla,  gladalis,  etc. 

Sans  se  prononcer  d'une  maniere  formelle  sur  la  necessite  de  subdiviser  le  genre 
Cosdnasterias,  W.  K.  Fisher  propose  de  substituer  aux  genres  etablis  par  Perrier 
les  coupures  suivantes : 

Cosdnasterias  Verrill,  1869  ;    type,  calamaria. 

Stolasterias  Sladen,  1889  (  =  Polyasterias  Perrier);  type,  tenuispina. 


32  R.  KCEHLER 

MartJiasterias  Jullien,  1878  ;    type,  glatialis. 
Distolasterias  Perrier,  1896 ;    type,  stichantha. 

II  est  bon  de  remarquer,  a  propos  de  ces  quatre  sous-genres,  que  le  dernier  n'a  pas 
ete  utilise  par  son  createur  dans  le  travail  meme  ou  il  1'avait  etabli,  et  que  Favant- 
dernier  a  ete  fonde  sur  un  exemplaire  mal  conserve  et  n'offrant  aucune  valeur. 
D'autre  part,  1'un  des  principaux  caracteres  sur  lesquels  on  s'appuie  pour  separer 
des  autres  le  genre  Coscinasterias  (comme  aussi  le  genre  Polyasterias  de  Perrier),  est 
la  multiplicite  des  bras.  Dans  ces  conditions,  il  n'apparait  pas  d'une  maniere  bien 
evidente  qu'il  soit  necessaire  de  subdiviser  1'ancien  genre  Coscinasterias  de  Verrill ; 
aussi  j'ai  cru  devoir  conserver  ce  terme  en  lui  donnant  sa  signification  la  plus  large 
sous  laquelle  il  devient  exactement  synonyme  du  genre  Stolasterias  de  Sladen. 

COSCINASTEBIAS  VICTORLE,   UOV.  Sp.   (PL  V,   fig.   3  et  4) 

Cap  Royds.     20  aout  1908.     Profondeur,  50-80  brasses.     Un  echantillon. 
Cap  Royds.     30  aout  1908.     Profondeur,  25  brasses.     Un  echantillon. 

L'exemplaire  du  20  aout  est  en  bon  etat,  bien  qu'il  ait  ete  legerement  altere  par  un 
sejour  dans  le  formol.  Les  bras,  au  nombre  de  cinq,  sont  un  peu  inegaux :  dans  le 
plus  petit,  R  =  68  millim. ;  chez  d'autres,  R  varie  de  75  a  82  millim. ;  r  —  15  millim. 
Les  bras  sont  tres  legerement  retrecis  a  la  base  et  leur  largeur  maxima  varie  entre 
18  et  20  millim.  ;  ils  se  retrecissent  progressivement  jusqu'a  1'extremite  qui  est 
amincie  et  pointue.  C'est  cet  individu  qui  me  servira  de  type  pour  la  description 
de  1'espece  ;  il  est  represente  PI.  V,  fig.  3  et  4. 

L'individu  capture  le  30  aout  n'est  pas  tres  bien  conserve ;  il  est  quelque  peu 
macere  et  ses  tissus  sont  un  peu  ramollis ;  le  corps  est  aplati  et  il  a  du  subir  une 
certaine  compression.  Mesure  sur  le  bras  le  plus  grand,  R  depasse  130  millim. ;  les 
bras  atteignent  27  millim.  de  largeur  a  la  base  et  ils  s'amincissent  progressivement 
jusqu'a  1'extremite  qui  est  pointue  ;  r  =  20  millim. 

Le  disque  est  de  taille  moyenne  :  son  diametre,  mesure  entre  deux  espaces  inter- 
brachiaux  non  consecutifs,  oscille  autour  de  30  millim.  La  face  dorsale  des  bras  est 
convexe,  legerement  carenee  sur  la  ligne  mediane  ;  les  faces  laterales,  comprises  entre 
les  rangees  de  plaques  marginales  dorsales  et  ventrales,  sont  etroites.  Le  squelette 
des  bras  est  assez  resistant  et  1'ensemble  de  1'animal  est  assez  rigide. 

La  face  dorsale  du  disque  et  des  bras  offre  des  piquants  peu  developpes  qui 
emergent  d'une  collerette  ressemblant  plutot  a  une  pustule  d'Anasterias ;  ces 
collerettes  sont  accolees  les  unes  centre  les  autres,  et,  entre  elles,  se  montrent  de 
nombreuses  papules  saillantes,  de  telle  sorte  que  le  squelette  sous-jacent  est  absolu- 
ment  invisible.  Les  collerettes,  avec  les  piquants  qu'elles  enveloppent,  sont  beaucoup 
moins  distinctes  que  dans  la  C.  brucei  et  Ton  reconnait  moins  nettement  que  dans 
cette  derniere  espece  les  rangees  qu'elles  forment. 

La  region  centrale  du  disque,  sur  un  diametre  de  14  millim.,  est  occupee  par  un 


KCIIINODKKMA  33 

premier  cercle  de  piquants  entoures  de  leurs  collerettes  qui  sont  contigues,  inegales 
et  peu  distinctes :  ces  piquants  font  a  peine  saillie  hors  de  la  collerette  et  leur 
extremite  se  termine  en  pointe  emoussee.  En  dedans,  on  reconnait  un  deuxieme  cercle 
de  piquants  moins  apparents,  et  dont  les  collerettes  sont  encore  plus  petites  et  moins 
distinctes  que  les  precedentes.  Le  reste  de  1'espace  circulaire  est  occupe  par  des 
collerettes  depourvues  de  piquants,  sauf  au  centre  ou  il  existe  un  piquant  un  peu  plus 
fort  que  les  autres.  Entre  les  collerettes  se  montrent  de  nombreuses  papules. 

La  ligne  carinale  des  bras  offre  une  rangee  de  piquants  qui  partent  du  cercle 
exterieur  signale  ci-dessus  et  qui  depassent  a  peine  la  collerette  entourant  leur  base. 
Ces  collerettes  sont  serrees  les  unes  contre  les  autres  et  leurs  limites  ne  sont  pas  tres 
apparentes  en  general.  Elles  forment  une  ligne  irregulierement  sinueuse,  et,  si  leurs 
contours  ne  sont  pas  tres  distincts,  la  rangee  qu'elles  constituent  sur  chaque  bras  est, 
dans  son  ensemble,  assez  reconnaissable  en  general ;  sur  la  photographic,  ces  rangees 
ne  sont  pas  tres  apparentes.  Les  dimensions  de  ces  collerettes  decroissent  tres  lente- 
ment,  mais  elles  deviennent  tres  petites  dans  le  dernier  quart  des  bras,  et,  par  con- 
sequent, elles  s'y  montrent  tres  nombreuses ;  leur  piquant  central  reste  distinct 
jusqu'a  1'extremite  du  bras.  Je  compte  plus  de  soixante  collerettes  dans  cette  rangee 
carinale  :  elles  sont,  comme  on  le  voit,  plus  petites,  plus  nombreuses,  et  plus  serrees 
que  chez  la  C.  brucei  ou  leur  nombre  ne  depasse  pas  quarante-cinq  dans  un  exemplaire 
de  meme  taille.  On  peut  constater,  en  comparant  la  photographic  que  je  donne  ici 
(PI.  V,  fig.  3)  de  la  C.  victories  au  dessin  que  j'ai  public  de  la  C.  brucei  (08,  PI.  V,  fig.  46), 
que,  dans  cette  derniere,  les  collerettes  conservent  les  memes  dimensions  sur  presque 
toute  la  longueur  des  bras  et  qu'elles  sont  a  peine  plus  rapprochees  et  plus  petites 
vers  1'extremite,  tandis  qu'ici  il  en  est  tout  autrement.  Les  sinuosites  sont  plus 
accentuees  chez  la  C.  victories,  mais  la  ligne  elle-meme  est,  dans  son  ensemble,  moins 
distincte  que  chez  la  C.  brucei.  L'espace,  tres  large,  compris  entre  la  rangee  carinale 
et  la  rangee  marginale  dorsale,  est  occupe  par  des  collerettes  confluentes  dont  les 
contours  sont  presque  toujours  mal  indiques,  et  qui  sont  un  peu  plus  petites  et  moins 
developpees  que  celles  de  la  rangee  carinale  ;  on  reconnait,  par  endroits,  un  arrange- 
ment en  rangees  longitudinales  au  nombre  de  deux  ou  trois  de  chaque  cote.  Du 
centre  de  chaque  collerette,  s'eleve  habituellement  un  petit  piquant  tres  court  et 
obtus.  Enfin,  entre  les  collerettes,  se  montrent  de  nombreuses  papules. 

Sur  le  grand  exemplaire,  les  contours  des  collerettes  sont  mieux  marques :  elles 
sont  arrondies  ou  irregulierement  polygonales  par  pression  reciproque.  Celles  de  la 
ligne  carinale  ne  sont  pas  beaucoup  plus  grandes  que  les  autres  et  elles  mesurent 
environ  2'5  millim.  de  largeur ;  elles  sont  disposees  suivant  une  ligne  beaucoup  moins 
sinueuse  que  sur  le  premier  individu,  mais  plus  distincte  en  revanche.  Le  piquant 
central  reste  toujours  peu  saillant.  Les  collerettes  laterales  forment  trois  ou  quatre 
rangees  longitudinales  assez  regulieres  et  elles  constituent  egalement  des  rangees 
transversales  legerement  obliques  plus  ou  moins  apparentes,  dans  chacune  desquelles 
elles  sont  le  plus  souvent  au  nombre  de  quatre.  La  forme  de  ces  collerettes  est 

BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.   1907-9.      VOL.  II.  P 


34  R.  K(EHLER 

irregulierement  polygonale,  et  leur  largeur  atteint  2  millim.  Elles  sont  bien  separees 
les  unes  des  autres,  aussi  distinctes  et  presque  aussi  grosses  que  celles  de  la  rangee 
carinale  et  leurs  limites  sont  beaucoup  mieux  marquees  que  dans  1'autre  exemplaire. 
Chacune  d'elles  porte  un  piquant  central,  court  et  emousse.  Les  papules  sont  toujours 
abondantes  et  elles  sont  surtout  nombreuses  vers  les  bords  des  bras  ou  elles  forment 
de  petits  groupes  reguliers  entre  les  collerettes  successives. 

Le  bord  dorsal  des  bras  est  occupe  par  une  rangee  de  gros  piquants  aplatis,  courts, 
a  extremite  tronquee  et  legerement  elargie,  qui  s'elevent  chacun  du  centre  d'une 
collerette  ;  leur  region  libre  mesure  environ  1'5  millim.  de  hauteur.  La  surface  de 
ces  piquants  est  legerement  canaliculee.  Les  collerettes,  de  forme  rectangulaire,  sont 
un  peu  plus  grosses  que  celles  de  la  face  dorsale  des  bras.  Vers  1'extremite  des  bras, 
les  piquants  sont  plus  petits  et  plus  serres  ;  ils  deviennent  alors  tres  nombreux,  ainsi 
que  cela  arrive  pour  la  rangee  carinale. 

Les  piquants  de  la  rangee  marginale  ventrale  correspondent  a  ceux  de  la  rangee 
marginale  dorsale,  mais  ils  sont  plus  epais  et  plus  forts,  tout  en  conservant  la  meme 
forme  generale.  Les  collerettes  qui  en  entourent  la  base  sont  identiques  a  celles  de 
la  rangee  dorsale.  Entre  ces  deux  rangees  de  piquants  marginaux,  les  faces  laterales 
des  bras,  tres  etroites,  sont  occupees  par  des  papules  tres  serrees  et  meme  tout  a  fait 
contigues,  formant  une  bande  dont  la  largeur,  a  la  base  des  bras,  ne  depasse  pas  deux 
millimetres. 

La  face  ventrale  des  bras  presente  une  rangee  de  piquants  qui  correspondent  a 
peu  pres  exactement  a  ceux  de  la  rangee  marginale  ventrale,  mais  qui  sont  un  peu 
moins  developpes  qu'eux.  Ils  deviennent  plus  petits  dans  la  seconde  moitie  des  bras, 
et,  dans  le  dernier  quart,  ils  ne  se  montrent  qu'a  des  intervalles  assez  espaces.  Cette 
rangee  est  tout  a  fait  contigue  aux  piquants  adambulacraires  et  a  ceux  de  la  rangee 
marginale  ventrale  sur  I'exemplaire  qui  me  sert  de  type  ;  sur  le  plus  grand,  elle  est 
separee  des  premiers  par  un  espace  etroit  mais  cependant  bien  apparent :  mal- 
heureusement  la  face  ventrale  de  ce  dernier  individu  est  en  si  mauvais  etat  qu'elle  ne 
se  prete  pas  a  1' etude. 

Les  sillons  ambulacraires  sont  tres  larges  et  les  tubes  forment  quatre  rangees 
irregulieres.  Les  piquants  adambulacraires  sont  disposes  sur  deux  rangs :  ils  sont 
assez  courts,  mais  fortement  aplatis  dans  le  sens  transversal ;  leur  extremite  est  tronquee 
et  arrondie  ;  les  deux  rangees  sont  a  peu  pres  identiques.  Cinq  piquants  de  la  rangee 
externe  correspondent  a  peu  pres  a  deux  piquants  de  la  rangee  marginale  ventrale. 

Tous  ces  piquants,  comme  d'ailleurs  ceux  des  rangees  ventrales  et  marginale s 
ventrales,  sont  enveloppes  d'une  enveloppe  tegumentaire  assez  epaisse  qui  les  recouvre 
completement. 

Les  dents  portent,  a  leur  pointe  proximale,  chacune  deux  piquants  cylindriques, 
termines  par  une  extremite  arrondie  et  plus  minces  que  les  adambulacraires ;  sur 
leur  face  ventrale,  on  rencontre  un  piquant  plus  fort,  avec  1'extremite  tronquee  et 
rappelant  davantage  les  piquants  adambulacraires  dont  il  differe  cependant  par  sa 
forme  cylindrique. 


ECHINODERMA  35 

II  existe,  comme  d'habitude,  des  pedicellaires  croises  assez  nombreux  dans  le  tissu 
des  collerettes,  et  des  pedicellaires  droits  qui  se  montrent,  de  distance  en  distance,  sur  les 
parois  du  sillon  ambulacraire.  Malheureusement  le  tissu  calcaire  de  ces  petits  organes 
a  ete  quelque  pen  attaque  par  le  forinol  et  Ton  ne  peut  en  reconnaitre  la  structure. 

Rapports  et  differences. — La  C.  victories  est  tres  voisine  de  la  C.  bnicei  ;  elle  s'en 
distingue  par  ses  bras  plus  amincis  et  comparaiivement  plus  longs,  par  le  nombre 
des  piquants  carinaux,  beaucoup  plus  eleve  parce  que  ces  piquants  deviennent  tr&s 
petits  et  serres  dans  la  partie  terminate  des  bras,  par  les  piquants  plus  nombreux 
sur  la  face  dorsale  des  bras  ou  ils  forment  meme  plusieurs  rangees  longitudinales 
assez  reconnaissables  dans  le  grand  exemplaire  et  enfin  par  la  presence  d'une  rangee 
distincte  de  piquants  sur  la  face  ventrale,  entre  les  piquants  adambulacraires  externes 
et  la  rangee  marginale  ventrale.  Les  piquants  des  deux  rangees  adambulacraires, 
ainsi  que  ceux  des  rangees  ventrales  et  marginales  ventrales,  sont  enveloppes  d'une 
enveloppe  tegumentaire  qui  les  recouvre  completement,  disposition  que  je  n'ai  pas 
observee  chez  la  C,  brucei. 


NOTASTEKIAS,  nov.  gen. 

Le  squelette  des  bras  comprend  cinq  rangees  regulieres  de  plaques,  une  carinale, 
deux  marginales  dorsales  et  deux  marginales  ventrales,  ainsi  que  cela  est  la  regie 
dans  le  genre  Coscinasterias  et  les  genres  voisins.  II  existe  en  outre  un  commence- 
ment de  rangee  ventrale.  Chaque  plaque  porte  un  piquant  unique  assez  developpe, 
mais  depourvu  de  collerettes  a  pedicellaires  croises.  Les  piquants  de  la  rangee  carinale 
offrent,  a  leur  base,  chacun  un  pedicellaire  a  valves  croisees  mais  appartenant  a  un 
type  particulier,  et  dont  les  dimensions  sont  vraiment  considerables  puisque  leur 
longueur  peut  atteindre  et  meme  depasser  2  millim.  Ces  pedicellaires  sont  toujours 
isoles  a  la  base  du  piquant ;  ils  ont  les  memes  caracteres  que  ceux  que  j'ai  decrits 
chez  YAsterias  pedicellaris  recueilli  par  la  Scotia  (08,  p.  49) ;  leur  structure  differe 
de  celle  des  pedicellaires  forcipiformes  ordinaires  et  je  propose  de  leur  donner  le  nom 
de  macrocepji.ales  ;  je  reviendrai  plus  loin  sur  leurs  caracteres.  A  la  base  des  piquants 
portes  par  les  plaques  marginales  dorsales  et  ventrales,  on  rencontre  aussi  un  et 
parfois  deux  pedicellaires  macrocephales,  mais  ces  pedicellaires  sont  beaucoup  plus 
petits  que  ceux  qui  accompagnent  les  piquants  carinaux.  Certains  de  ces  piquants 
marginaux  portent  en  outre  des  pedicellaires  croises  ordinaires,  au  nombre  d'un  ou 
de  deux  au  plus,  et  s'inserant  sur  le  piquant  lui-meme  entre  sa  base  et  son  milieu. 
Ces  pedicellaires  forcipiformes  sont  toujours  plus  petits  que  les  plus  petits  pedicellaires 
macrocephales  voisins :  ils  mesurent  en  effet  0'4  millim.  de  longueur  environ,  tandis 
que  les  plus  petits  pedicellaires  macrocephales  atteignent  pres  du  double. 

Dans  la  seule  espece  connue,  qui  est  de  taille  plutot  petite,  il  n'y  a  pas  de  rangee 
de  plaques  dorso-laterales.  Les  papules  sont  isolees  et  bien  distinctes,  arrondies  et 


36  R.  KtEHLER 

relativement  assez  grandes ;  elles  sont  espacees  et  forment  une  premiere  rangee  entre 
les  carinales  et  les  marginales  dorsales,  puis  une  deuxieme,  plus  reguliere,  entre  les 
marginales  dorsales  et  ventrales.  Les  piquants  adambulacraires  sont  disposes  suivant 
quatre  rangees  irregulieres.  II  existe  des  pedicellaires  droits  qui  se  montrent  de 
distance  en  distance  sur  les  parois  des  sillons  ambulacraires.  Les  tubes  ambulacraires 
forment  plusieurs  series  irregulieres. 

II  me  parait  utile  de  revenir  sur  les  caracteres  des  pedicellaires  macrocephales  que 
j'ai  pu  etudier  sur  les  deux  echantillons  de  1' Expedition  Anglaise,  ainsi  que  sur  un 
troisieme  exemplaire  provenant  de  la  deuxieme  Expedition  Charcot,  d'une  maniere 
plus  complete  que  chez  YAsterias  pedicettaris  ou  ces  gros  pedicellaires  etaient  assez  rares. 
Cette  etude  m'a  convaincu  que  les  differences  entre  ces  pedicellaires  et  les  pedicellaires 
forcipiformes  sont  assez  marquees  pour  que  Ton  doive  considerer  les  premiers  comme 
representant  une  forme  a  part ;  c'est  pourquoi  j'ai  cru  devoir  leur  appliquer  un  nom 
particulier. 

Exterieurement,  les  pedicellaires  macrocephales  se  reconnaissent  non  seulement 
a  leur  taille,  mais  aussi  a  leur  forme  qui  est  conique,  les  deux  valves  qui  constituent 
chacun  d'eux  allant  en  se  retrecissant  jusqu'a  I'extremite,  au  lieu  de  former  une  lame 
convexe  dont  le  bord  libre  est  large,  arrondi  et  muni  d'une  serie  de  fines  denticulations. 
En  outre,  I'extremite  de  chaque  valve  est  recourbee  et  se  termine  par  un  crochet  plus 
ou  moins  developpe  qui  se  croise  avec  son  congenere  de  telle  sorte  qu'on  pourrait  dire 
que  ces  pedicellaires  sont  doublement  croises  :  en  effet,  leurs  valves  se  croisent  d'abord 
au  niveau  de  leur  articulation  sur  la  piece  basilaire,  puis,  une  deuxieme  fois,  vers  leur 
extremite.  On  peut  voir,  en  comparant  les  dessins  que  je  donne  ici  des  pedicellaires 
macrocephales  (PI.  V,  fig.  6  a  11  ;  PI.  VI,  fig.  4  a  8)  aux  figures  de  pedicellaires 
forcipiformes  qui  ont  ete  publiees,  soit  autrefois  par  Perrier,  soit  plus  recernment  par 
Ludwig  (03,  PI.  VII,  fig.  66  a  68),  combien  les  deux  formes  sont  differentes.  Dans  les 
gros  pedicellaires  d'Asterias  pedicettaris,  le  crochet  terminal  n'etait  pas  tres  developpe, 
mais  il  etait  toujours  tres  fort  ettres  apparent  sur  les  petits  (voir  Koehler,  08,  PL  VIII, 
fig-  75). 

Ainsi  que  je  1'ai  dit  en  1908,  les  valves  de  nos  pedicellaires  sont  creuses  :  elles  ont 
la  forme  d'un  cornet  dont  une  partie  du  bord  libre  se  continue  en  une  "  queue  "  qui 
sert  a  Farticulation  avec  la  piece  basilaire.  En  d'autres  termes,  la  lame  calcaire  qui 
constitue  la  valve,  s'enroule  sur  elle-meme  sur  la  moitie  de  sa  longueur  environ,  et 
les  deux  bords  de  la  partie  enroulee  s'adossent  1'un  a  1'autre  suivant  une  ligne  droite 
qui  porte  des  dents  coniques  et  pointues  (PL  V,  fig.  8,  9  et  11  ;  PL  VI,  fig.  5  et  6). 
Ces  dents  sont  moins  nombreuses  et  moins  fortes  sur  les  gros  pedicellaires  que  sur  les 
petits,  et  elles  ne  se  montrent  que  sur  la  partie  proximale  de  la  ligne  suturale,  de  telle 
sorte  que  toute  la  region  qui  precede  le  crochet  est  depourvue  de  dents.  Sur  les  petits 
pedicellaires,  les  dents  sont  plus  nombreuses  et  elles  se  montrent  sur  une  plus  grande 
longueur  le  long  de  la  ligne  suturale  ;  chez  YA.  pedicettaris,  elles  peuvent  meme 
s'avancer  jusqu'au  voisinage  du  crochet.  Elles  s'engrenent  avec  leurs  congeneres  de 


ECHINODERMA  37 

la  valve  opposee.     Le  crochet  terminal  est  pointu,  plus  ou  moins  allonge,  tantot  droit, 
tantot  legerement  recourbe. 

La  queue  de  la  valve,  assez  longue,  est  elargie,  concave  et  elle  se  termine  par  un 
bord  arrondi. 

La  lame  calcaire  qui  forme  chaque  valve  est  constitute  par  un  tissu  areole,  avec 
des  perforations  petites  et  tres  serrees,  et  la  meme  structure  s'observe  sur  toute  1'etendue 
de  la  queue  qui  n'est  pas  constitute  par  du  tissu  compact.  Seul  le  crochet  qui  termine 
les  valves  est  forme  par  un  tissu  compact  et  transparent. 

On  voit  done  que  les  valves  des  pedicellaires  macrocephales,  avec  leur  forme  de 
cone  ou  de  cornet,  leur  crochet  terminal,  leurs  denticulations  disposees  le  long  de  la 
ligne  suturale  qui  correspond  a  1'une  des  generatrices  du  cone,  et  la  queue  formee  de 
tissu  calcaire  areole,  sont  bien  differentes  de  celles  des  pedicellaires  croises  ou  forcipi- 
formes.  La  piece  basilaire  sur  laquelle  les  valves  s'articulent,  offre  au  contraire  une 
composition  peu  differente  de  celle  que  Ton  connait  chez  ces  derniers  (PI.  V,  fig.  10,  et 
PI.  VI,  fig.  7).  Son  corps  represente  une  lame  aplatie,  allongee  dans  le  genre 
Notasterias,  plus  courte  chez  V Asterias  ped-icellaris,  et  qui  se  termine  par  un  bord 
fortement  convexe  :  celle-ci  se  presente  par  sa  tranche  quand  on  regarde  le  pedi- 
cellaire  de  profil  comme  celui  qui  est  represente  PI.  V,  fig.  6  et  7,  tandis  que  lorsque  le 
pedicellaire  est  vu  de  face  (PI.  VI,  fig.  4  et  8),  la  lame  se  montre  a  plat.  Les  perfora- 
tions, petites  et  nombreuses,  sont  disposees  en  rangees  lineaires,  legerement  divergentes 
et  extremement  serrees.  La  base  de  cette  lame  s'epaissit  sur  ses  cotes  de  maniere 
a  former  deux  bords  arrondis  qui  s'etendent  presque  perpendiculairement  a  son  plan  et 
se  continuent  chacun  en  avant  et  en  arriere  par  une  sorte  d'apophyse  conique  et  arrondie  ; 
ces  apophyses  correspondent  respectivement  aux  apophyses  regulieres  et  irregulieres  de 
Perrier.  On  remarque  que  1'une  des  apophyses  d'un  cote  est  plus  forte  que  1'autre 
du  meme  cote,  mais  il  n'y  a  pas,  dans  le  developpement  et  la  direction,  une  inegalite 
comparable  a  celle  que  1'on  connait  chez  les  pedicellaires  forcipiformes.  Dans  les 
petits  pedicellaires  macrocephales,  les  apophyses  sont  plus  pointues  et  plus  allongees 
et  la  lame  est  au  contraire  plus  courte  ;  aussi,  quand  on  regarde  la  piece  basilaire  par 
le  cote,  on  voit  sur  le  plan  superieur  les  deux  apophyses  d'un  cote  et  sur  le  plan 
inferieur  les  deux  autres  apophyses,  tandis  que  la  piece  basilaire  ne  represente  qu'une 
saillie  peu  marquee.  C'est  1'aspect  que  j'ai  figure  chez  YA.  pedicellaris  (08,  PI.  VII, 
fig.  67)  :  la  lame,  moins  developpee  que  dans  le  genre  Notasterias,  etait  tout  a  fait 
invisible. 

Les  muscles  adducteurs  des  valves  sont  extremement  developpes ;  on  les  apergoit 
par  transparence  sur  des  pedicellaires  montes  en  entier  et  ils  se  prolongent  assez  haut 
dans  1'interieur  des  valves  (PI.  V,  fig.  7,  et  PL  VI,  fig.  4). 

Les  pedicellaires  macrocephales  sont  toujours  isoles ;  ils  ne  sont  jamais  reunis  en 
collerettes  a  la  base  des  piquants  comme  Ton  observe  dans  les  Asterias  et  les  genres  voisins. 
Leurs  valves  sont  entourees  par  un  tissu  conjonctif  transparent  qui  se  continue,  a  la 
base  du  pedicellaire,  par  un  pedicule  extremement  court  et  mince,  a  1'aide  duquel  le 


38  R.  KCEHLER 

pedicellaire  se  rattache  au  tegument  de  1'Asterie.     II  n'y  a  pas  de  cordon  fibreux 
s'inserant  sur  la  piece  basilaire  comme  dans  les  pedicellaires  forcipiformes. 

La  presence  d'une  forme  particuliere  de  pedicellaires  chez  une  Asterie  m'a  paru 
suffisante  pour  justifier  la  creation  d'un  genre  nouveau,  d'autant  plus  que  les  pedi- 
cellaires droits  ou  croises  conservent  chez  toutes  les  Asteriadees  une  structure  tres 
uniforme.  Je  propose  d'appliquer  le  nom  de  Notasterias  a  1' Asterie  decouverte  par 
1'Expedition  Antarctique  Anglaise. 

Ainsi  que  j'ai  eu  Foccasion  de  le  rappeler  plus  haut,  j'ai  rencontre  les  memes  pedi- 
cellaires macrocephales  chez  un  Asterie  recueillie  par  1'Expedition  Antarctique 
E'cossaise,  a  une  profondeur  de  1410  brasses,  et  que  j'ai  decrite  sous  le  nom  d'Asterias 
pedicellaris,  mais  cette  derniere  ne  saurait  rentrer  dans  le  genre  Notasterias  :  elle  en 
diflere,  en  efEet,  par  la  constitution  de  son  squelette,  par  la  repartition  irreguliere  des 
pedicellaires  macrocephales,  par  1'absence  de  pedicellaires  forcipiformes  et  par  les 
piquants  adambulacraires  ne  formant  qu'une  seule  rangee.  Je  crois  qu'il  est  necessaire 
d'enlever  cette  espece  au  genre  Asterias  et  je  serais  dispose  a  en  faire  le  type  d'un 
nouveau  genre  qu'on  pourrait  appeler  Aittasterias.  Les  caracteres  distinctifs  de  ces 
deux  genres  antarctiques  peuvent  se  resumer  de  la  facon  suivante  : 

Notasterias. — Le  squelette  des  bras  est  forme  par  cinq  rangees  longitudinales  de 
plaques  assez  grandes  et  unies  de  maniere  a  former  un  squelette  compact  ne  laissant 
que  des  orifices  petits  pour  le  passage  des  papules  qui  sont  isolees.  Chaque  plaque 
porte  un  piquant  depourvu  de  collerettes  a  pedicellaires  forcipiformes.  Les  piquants 
carinaux  offrent,  a  leur  base,  chacun  un  gros  pedicellaire  macrocephale  unique ;  des 
pedicellaires  analogues,  mais  plus  petits,  peuvent  se  rencontrer  a  la  base  des  piquants 
marginaux  dorsaux  et  ventraux,  et  ces  piquants  peuvent  en  outre  porter  quelques 
pedicellaires  forcipiformes.  Les  piquants  adambulacraires  sont  disposes  sur  deux 
rangees. 

Une  seule  espece,  antarctique  et  littorale. 

Autasterias. — Le  squelette  des  bras  est  forme  de  cinq  rangees  longitudinales  de 
plaques  petites,  portant  chacune  un  piquant  et  reliees  par  des  travees  qui  laissent 
entre  elles  de  tres  larges  mailles.  Sur  le  reseau  calcaire  de  la  face  dorsale,  mais  non 
specialement  a  la  base  de  chaque  piquant,  se  trouvent  dissemines  quelques  gros 
pedicellaires  macrocephales.  II  n'y  a  pas  de  pedicellaires  a  la  base  des  piquants 
portes  par  les  plaques  carinales  et  marginales  dorsales,  mais,  a  la  base  de  chaque 
piquant  marginal  ventral,  il  existe  un  groupe  de  quelques  petits  macrocephales ;  les 
pedicellaires  forcipiformes  font  completement  defaut.  Les  piquants  adambulacraires 
ne  forment  qu'une  seule  rangee. 

Une  seule  espece,  antarctique  et  abyssale. 


ECHINODERMA  39 

NOTASTEEIAS   ARMATA,   UOV.   Sp.    (PL   V,   fig.    6   a   11  ;   PI.   VI,   fig.    1    a   8) 

Bale  du  Cap  Royds.     2  juillet  1908.     Profondeur,  10-18  brasses. 

Deux  echantillons. 

Les  bras  sont  un  pen  inegaux.  Dans  le  plus  grand  individu,  R  =  25  a  28  millim., 
r  =  5'5  millim.  Dans  le  second,  R  =  11  a,  20,  r  =  4  millim. 

Le  tegument  est  assez  epais  et  il  cache  coinpletement  les  contours  des  plaques 
sous-jacentes ;  arm  de  pouvoir  etudier  ces  dernieres,  j'ai  desseche  le  plus  petit 
echantillon  chez  lequel  les  contours  des  plaques  sont  devenus  bien  apparents.  Je 
represente  ici  le  plus  grand  individu  (PL  VI,  fig.  1  et  2). 

Le  disque  est  petit ;  les  bras  en  sont  bien  distincts,  mais  ils  ne  sont  pas  retrecis  a 
la  base.  Leur  largeur  est  de  6'5  millim.  en  moyenne  ;  elle  ne  diminue  guere  que  dans 
le  dernier  quart  et  Fextremite  est  amincie. 

La  face  dorsale  du  disque  offre,  a  sa  peripherie,  un  cercle  de  plaques  au  nombre  de 
dix  dans  le  petit  exemplaire,  cinq  radiales  et  cinq  interradiales ;  la  disposition  parait 
etre  la  meme  dans  le  grand  exemplaire.  Le  centre  est  occupe  par  une  plaque  plus 
grande  qui  se  relie  a  celles  de  la  peripherie  par  des  ossicules  rayonnants.  Chaque 
plaque  porte  un  piquant  assez  fort,  mesurant  2'5  a  3  millim.  de  longueur,  assez  elargi 
a  la  base  et  devenant  ensuite  cylindrique  ;  Fextremite,  obtuse,  offre  des  rugosites  ou 
de  fines  denticulations ;  de  meme  que  les  piquants  des  bras,  ceux-ci  sont  recouverts 
d'une  mince  enveloppe  tegumentaire.  A  la  base  de  chaque  piquant  se  trouve  un 
gros  pedicellaire  macrocephale  identique  a  ceux  que  nous  retfouverons  sur  les  bras, 
mais  un  peu  plus  petit  en  general  que  ces  derniers,  sauf  celui  qui  se  trouve  a  la  base 
du  piquant  central.  La  plaque  madreparique  est  petite,  allongee  dans  le  sens  inter- 
radial  et  placee  a  peu  pres  a  egale  distance  du  centre  et  des  bords ;  ses  sillons  sont 
peu  marques. 

Les  bras  presentent  cinq  rangees  longitudinales  de  plaques  :  une  carinale,  deux 
marginales  dorsales  et  deux  marginales  ventrales.  La  rangee  carinale  est  bien 
saillante,  de  telle  sorte  que  les  bras  sont  assez  fortement  carenes  ;  la  rangee  marginale 
dorsale  est  aussi  tres  accusee.  La  rangee  marginale  ventrale  est  assez  eloignee  de  la 
precedente  et  separee  d'elle  par  une  face  verticale ;  la  coupe  du  bras  se  rapproche 
ainsi  d'un  polygone  presque  regulier,  et  dont  la  base  seule  est  un  peu  plus  grande  que 
les  autres  cotes.  Les  plaques  carinales,  fortes  et  saillantes,  ont  une  forme  trifoliee, 
due  a  la  presence  de  trois  lobes  arrondis,  le  lobe  proximal  recouvrant  la  region  mediane 
de  la  plaque  precedente  et  les  lobes  lateraux  se  reliant  par  de  petites  rangees  aux 
plaques  marginales  dorsales.  Les  trois  ou  quatre  premieres  plaques  de  chaque  rangee 
portent  chacune  un  piquant,  mais  les  suivantes  ne  le  possedent  pas  toujours  et  parfois 
on  ne  le  rencontre  qu'une  fois  sur  deux.  II  y  a  une  dizaine  de  piquants  sur  chaque 
bras  dans  le  grand  exemplaire  et  huit  en  moyenne  dans  le  petit.  Les  plaques  qui 
portent  un  piquant  sont  plus  fortes  que  les  autres.  Ces  piquants  ont  les  memes 
caracteres  que  ceux  du  disque ;  ils  sont  seulement  un  peu  plus  longs  et  leur  longueur 


40  R.   K(EHLER 

atteint  generalement  3  inillim.  Us  sont  absolument  depourvus  de  collerettes  a 
pedicellaires,  mais,  a  la  base  de  cnacun  d'eux,  se  trouve  un  gros  pedicellaire 
macrocephale  dont  la  longueur  peut  atteindre  pres  de  3  millim.  En  raison  de 
ses  dimensions,  ce  pedicellaire  rejette  souvent  le  piquant,  soit  d'un  cote,  soit  de 
1'autre  ;  comme,  d'autre  part,  la  taille  de  ces  pedicellaires  varie,  il  en  resulte  que  la 
rangee  carinale  de  piquants  parait  plus  ou  moins  irreguliere. 

Les  plaques  marginales  dorsales  ont  la  meme  forme  et  la  meme  disposition  que  les 
carinales,  mais  elles  sont  un  peu  plus  saillantes  que  ces  dernieres  ;  leurs  lobes  lateraux 
internes  ne  se  reunissent  directement  a  ceux  des  plaques  marginales  correspondantes 
qu'a  1'extremite  des  bras,  mais,  sur  le  reste  de  la  longueur  des  bras,  on  remarque  deux 
ou  trois  petites  plaques  intercalaires.  La  plupart  des  marginales  dorsales  portent 
un  piquant  rappelant  ceux  des  carinales,  mais  un  peu  plus  petit,  et  ces  piquants 
paraissent  plus  frequents  que  sur  ces  dernieres  plaques.  En  principe,  les  plaques 
marginales  dorsales  correspondent  aux  carinales,  mais  la  correspondance  est  parfois 
troublee  en  raison  de  la  presence  ou  de  1'absence  de  piquants  sur  les  plaques  con- 
siderees.  Certains  piquants  du  commencement  des  bras  offrent,  a  leur  base,  un 
pedicellaire  macrocephale  constitue  comme  ceux  de  la  serie  carinale,  mais  un  peu 
plus  petit ;  ces  pedicellaires  macrocephales  ne  sont  pas  tres  nombreux  sur  les  deux 
echantillons  de  1'Expedition  Anglaise  ;  j'aurai  1'occasion  de  faire  remarquer  plus  loin 
que  dans  un  exemplaire  de  Notasterias  armata,  recueilli  par  la  deuxieme  Expedition 
Charcot,  ces  pedicellaires  macrocephales  sont  assez  nombreux  sur  la  serie  marginale 
dorsale.  Ici,  ces  pedicellaires  ne  se  montrent  que  sur  les  premiers  piquants  de  la 
rangee  marginale  dorsale  et  les  suivants  portent,  en  general,  chacun  un  ou  deux 
pedicellaires  forcipiformes  ordinaires,  qui  s'inserent,  non  plus  a  la  base  du  piquant, 
mais  a  une  hauteur  variable  sur  sa  premiere  moitie,  comme  on  1'observe  chez  diverses 
Asterias.  Quand  il  y  a  deux  pedicellaires  croises  sur  le  meme  piquant,  ceux-ci  s'inserent 
au  meme  niveau  ;  ils  peuvent  d'ailleurs  coexister  avec  un  pedicellaire  macrocephale 
place  a  la  base  du  piquant.  Ainsi  que  je  1'ai  dit  plus  haut,  ces  pedicellaires  croises 
sont  toujours  plus  petits  que  les  plus  petits  pedicellaires  macrocephales. 

Les  plaques  marginales  ventrales  sont  encore  plus  saillantes  que  les  marginales 
dorsales  et  elles  forment,  par  leui  ensemble,  un  bord  tranchant  qui  separe  la  face 
ventrale  du  reste  du  corps.  Elles  correspondent  exactement  aux  marginales  dorsales 
dont  elles  sont  assez  eloignees  et  auxquelles  elles  sont  reunies  par  des  arceaux  tres 
reguliers,  disposes  parallelement  et  comprenant  chacun  quelques  petites  plaques : 
ainsi  se  trouvent  determinees  les  faces  laterales  qui  sont  verticales.  Chaque  plaque 
porte  un  piquant  analogue  a  ceux  des  marginales  dorsales,  mais  un  peu  plus  petit, 
legerement  aplati,  avec  1'extremite  arrondie  et  munie  de  fines  asperites.  La  plupart 
de  ces  piquants  presentent,  a  leur  base,  un  pedicellaire  macrocephale  plus  petit  que 
ceux  de  la  rangee  carinale,  et,  plus  haut,  un  ou  deux  petits  pedicellaires  croises 
ordinaires  s'inserant  sur  le  piquant  lui-meme. 

Entre  les  petits  arceaux  de  plaques  qui  relient  les  carinales  aux  marginales  dorsales, 


ECHINODERMA  41 

on  remarque  une  ligne  reguliere  de  papules  arrondies,  absomment  isolees  et  assez 
grandes  ;  on  pent  me  me  observer,  a  la  base  des  bras,  le  commencement  d'une  deuxieme 
rangee.  Sur  les  cotes  verticaux  des  bras,  entre  les  plaques  marginales  dorsales  et 
ventrales,  il  existe  une  autre  rangee,  tres  reguliere,  de  papules  analogues. 

Les  sillons  ambulacraires  sont  larges  et  renferment  quatre  series  irregulieres  de 
tubes  serres. 

Les  piquants  adambulacraires  sont  disposes  suivant  deux  rangees  tres  regulieres : 
ces  piquants  sont  cylindriques  ou  aplatis  par  suite  de  leur  pressionreciproque,  et  leur 
extremite  est  arrondie  ;  ils  sont  couverts  d'une  mince  enveloppe  tegumentaire  qui 
les  fait  paraitre  lisses,  mais,  quand  ils  sont  desseches,  on  constate  qu'ils  sont  couverts 
d'asperites  extremement  fines  et  rapprochees. 

Sur  les  parois  du  sillon,  on  reconnait,  de  distance  en  distance,  des  pedicellaires 
droits  qui  ne  presentent  rien  de  particulier,  et  dont  la  longueur  moyenne  est  d'un 
millimetre  (PI.  VI,  fig.  3). 

Sur  le  grand  exemplaire,  il  existe  a  la  base  des  bras,  entre  les  piquants  adambula- 
craires et  la  rangee  des  piquants  marginaux  ventraux,  une  rangee  intercalaire  de 
piquants  plus  petits  que  ces  derniers  et  qui  leur  correspondent  assez  exactement. 
Cette  rangee  ventrale  atteint  un  developpement  variable  :  tantot  elle  disparait  avant 
le  milieu  du  bras,  tantot  elle  s'etend  un  pen  plus  loin.  Ces  piquants  sont  en  general 
depourvus  de  pedicellaires  :  j'observe  cependant  un  pedicellaire  croise  sur  deux  d'entre 
eux.  Dans  le  petit  exemplaire,  cette  rangee  de  piquants  fait  a  pen  pres  completement 
defaut :  on  en  retrouve  cependant  quelques  vestiges  a  la  base  des  bras. 

Parmi  les  Echinodermes  qui  ont  ete  recueillis  par  la  deuxieme  Expedition 
Antarctique  Francaise  du  Dr.  Charcot,  et  qui  viennent  de  m'etre  confies,  se  trouve 
un  exemplaire  de  Notasterias  armata  qui  porte  a  trois  le  nombre  des  individus  actuelle- 
ment  connus  de  cette  espece.  Les  dimensions  sont  voisines  de  celles  des  deux 
echantillons  de  la  Terre  Victoria  :  R  -  20  a  25  millim.  Les  deux  rangees  de  plaques 
marginales  dorsales  sont  un  pen  plus  rapprochees  de  la  rangee  carinale  et  les  gros 
pedicellaires  macrocephales  sont  un  peu  plus  abondants  :  ils  se  montrent  d'une  maniere 
assez  constante  a  la  base  des  piquants  de  la  rangee  marginale  dorsale  et  j'en  retrouve 
meme  a  la  base  d'un  certain  nombre  de  piquants  marginaux  ventraux,  mais  ils  sont 
alors  beaucoup  plus  petits.  En  revanche,  les  pedicellaires  croises  ordinaircs  sont 
tres  rares  :  j'en  observe  cependant  quelques-uns  sur  les  piquants  des  plaques  marginales 
ventrales. 


BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.   1907-9.       VOL.    II.  G 


42  R.    KCEHLER 


OPHIURES 

OPHIOGLYPHA  RESISTENS,  nov.  sp.  (PI.  VII,  fig.  9  a  12) 
Cap  Royds.     Profondeur  10-20  brasses.      ler  juillet  1908.     Plusieurs  echantillons. 

Dans  le  plus  grand  exemplaire,  le  diametre  du  disque  est  de  12  millim.  et  les  bras 
n'ont  que  21  a  22  millim.  de  longueur :  en  general,  les  bras  sont  un  peu  plus  longs  et 
dans  un  echantillon  chez  lequel  le  diametre  du  disque  est  de  10  millim.  seulement, 
leur  longueur  atteint  28  millim.  L'ensemble  est  tres  robuste  :  le  disque  est  epais ; 
les  bras  sont  forts,  epais  et  carenes  sur  la  ligne  mediane  dorsale. 

Le  disque  est  arrondi  ou  subpentagonal.  La  face  dorsale  est  couverte  de  plaques 
assez  nombreuses,  tres  inegales,  epaisses  et  separees  par  de  larges  sillons.  On  distingue 
generalement  une  centro-dorsale,  grande  et  arrondie,  et,  en  dehors,  un  cercle  de  cinq 
radiales  un  peu  plus  petites  qu'elle  et  elargies  transversalement :  ces  plaques  sont 
separees  les  unes  des  autres  par  une  rangee  de  deux  petites  plaques  arrondies;  elles 
sont  egalement  separees  de  la  centro-dorsale  par  un  cercle  de  plaques  plus  petites, 
entre  lesquelles  se  montrent  d'autres  plaques  tres  reduites.  En  dehors  de  cette  partie 
centrale,  viennent  d'autres  plaques  parmi  lesquelles  on  remarque,  dans  les  espaces 
radiaux,  une  assez  grande  plaque  arrondie,  situee  a  la  base  de  chaque  paire  de 
boucliers  radiaux  et  a  laquelle  fait  suite  une  rangee  de  deux  ou  trois  petites  plaques 
separant  ces  boucliers  radiaux  1'un  de  1'autre.  Dans  chaque  espace  interradial,  on 
observe  deux  plaques  successives  principales,  dont  la  plus  externe  est  situee  vers  la 
peripherie  du  disque,  avec  d'autres  plaques  beaucoup  plus  petites.  Les  boucliers 
radiaux,  de  moyenne  grosseur,  sont  triangulaires  avec  les  angles  arrondis,  et  un  peu 
plus  longs  que  larges  :  leur  longueur  ne  depasse  guere  le  quart  du  rayon  du  disque ; 
ils  sont  legerement  divergents  et  separes  sur  toute  leur  longueur  par  la  serie  de  plaques 
signalee  plus  haut.  On  trouve,  sur  leur  bord  libre,  une  rangee  de  papilles,  petites, 
arrondies,  peu  developpees  et  formant  une  bordure  reguliere  dans  les  individus  de 
taille  moyenne  ;  dans  les  plus  grands,  ces  papilles  sont  plus  nombreuses,  et  elles  sont 
disposees  en  deux  ou  meme  en  trois  rangees  d'ailleurs  tres  irregulieres  :  elles  s'y 
montrent  du  reste  moins  developpees  que  dans  les  individus  moyens. 

On  remarque,  sur  les  grands  exemplaires,  que  les  boucliers  radiaux  off  rent,  dans 
leur  region  centrale,  une  depression  plus  ou  moins  accentuee,  tandis  qu'ils  se  relevent 
vers  leur  bord  externe  en  une  ou  deux  preeminences  arrondies.  Cette  disposition  est 
analogue  a  celle  que  j'ai  signalee  chez  VO.  anceps,  mais  elle  est  moins  accentuee.  De 
plus,  la  plupart  des  plaques  de  la  face  dorsale  du  disque,  surtout  celles  qui  sont  voisines 
des  bords,  ont  une  tendance  a  se  soulever  en  une  ou  deux  protuberances  centrales  : 
au  moins  sont-elles  toujours  plus  ou  moins  convexes  ;  leur  surface  est  rugueuse. 

La  face  ventrale  du  disque  offre,  vers  la  peripherie,  une  assez  grosse  plaque  mediane 


ECHINODERMA  43 

arrondie,  generalement  plus  large  que  longue,  avec  quelques  autres  plaques  plus 
petites.  Les  plaques  genitales  sont  allongees  et  elles  portent,  sur  leur  bord  libre,  une 
rangee  de  papilles  courtes  et  peu  developpees.  Les  fentes  genitales  sont  etroites,  mais 
elles  s'etendent  depuis  1'extremite  des  plaques  adorales  jusqu'a  la  peripherie  du  disque. 

Les  boucliers  buccaux  sont  assez  grands,  piriformes  ou  pentagonaux,  relativement 
plus  gros  dans  les  individus  de  taille  moyenne  que  dans  les  grands :  dans  ces  derniers, 
ils  sont  piriformes  avec  le  bord  externe  convexe  ;  dans  les  moyens,  ils  sont  plutot 
pentagonaux  et  ofErent  un  angle  proximal  aigu  limite  par  deux  cotes  droits  et  deux 
bords  lateraux  droits  se  reliant  par  des  angles  arrondis  au  cote  distal  convexe  ;  ils 
sont  un  peu  plus  longs  que  larges.  Les  plaques  adorales  sont  allongees  et  etroites, 
avec  les  bords  paralleles,  beaucoup  plus  longues  que  larges.  Les  plaques  orales  sont 
egalement  allongees  et  plus  longues  que  larges,  mais  elles  sont  plus  petites  et  un  peu 
plus  etroites  que  les  precedentes.  Les  papilles  buccales  sont  au  nombre  de  quatre  de 
chaque  cote ;  elles  sont  petites,  basses,  rectangulaires  et  subegales.  La  papille 
terminale  impaire  est  petite  et  elle  ne  depasse  guere  la  taille  des  precedentes. 

Les  plaques  brachiales  dorsales  sont  assez  grandes,  quadrangulaires,  avec  un  cote 
proximal  etroit,  un  cote  distal  tres  large  et  fortement  convexe  et  des  bords  lateraux 
divergents  et  droits  ;  elles  sont  toutes  contigues.  Les  premieres  sont  un  peu  plus  larges 
que  longues,  puis  elles  deviennent  aussi  longues  que  larges  et  finalement  plus  longues  que 
larges.  Elles  sont  carenees,  et,  de  plus,  elles  portent,  un  peu  en  arriere  du  bord  distal, 
chacune  un  gros  tubercule  arrondi  d'autant  plus  saillant  et  plus  marque  que  les  exem- 
plaires  sont  plus  gros;  ces  tubercules  rendent  la  carene  des  bras  encore  plus  apparente. 

La  premiere  plaque  brachiale  ventrale  est  assez  grande,  triangulaire,  avec  Tangle 
proximal  arrondi  et  le  bord  distal  un  peu  convexe  ;  elle  est  aussi  large  que  longue  ou 
un  peu  plus  large  que  longue.  Les  suivantes  sont  assez  grandes,  triangulaires,  avec 
un  angle  proximal  plutot  aigu,  limite  par  des  cotes  droits  et  un  bord  distal  legerement 
convexe  ;  elles  sont  plus  larges  que  longues.  Les  premieres  sont  contigues,  mais 
elles  se  separent  au  dela  du  disque. 

Les  plaques  laterales,  peu  proeminentes,  portent,  a  la  base  des  bras,  quatre  petits 
piquants  papilliformes  ;  ce  chiffre  tombe  a  trois  a  une  certaine  distance  de  la  base 
des  bras,  et  cela  d'autant  plus  vite  que  1'echantillon  est  plus  petit.  Les  deux  piquants 
ventraux  sont  tres  rapproches  1'un  de  1'autre  et  le  suivant  est  un  peu  eloigne  du  precedent ; 
le  dernier  est  tout  a  fait  dorsal  et  place  a  une  certaine  distance  du  troisieme. 

Les  pores  tentaculaires  sont  peu  developpes.  Ceux  de  la  premiere  paire  ne 
s'ouvrent  pas  dans  la  bouche  :  ils  ofErent,  sur  leur  bord  externe,  trois  papilles  basses, 
et,  sur  leur  bord  interne,  deux  ou  trois  papilles  moins  developpees  que  les  precedentes, 
plus  etroites  et  formant  une  bordure  tres  mince  dans  laquelle  il  est  difficile  de  distinguer 
les  limites  des  papilles.  Les  pores  de  la  deuxieme  paire  sont  tres  petits  et  ils  portent 
deux  petites  ecailles  papilliformes  ;  on  distingue  encore  les  pores  de  la  troisieme  paire 
qui  sont  tres  reduits  et  n'ont  que  deux  ecailles  rudimentaires,  mais,  au  dela,  les  pores 
cessent  d'exister. 


44  R.  K(EHLER 

Rapports  et  differences. — I/O.  resistens  rappelle  beaucoup  VO.  anceps  que  j'ai 
decrite  d'apres  les  exemplaires  decouverts  par  la  Scotia,  par  71°  lat.  S.  et  16°  long.  W.. 
a  une  profondeur  de  1410  brasses,  mais  elle  s'endistingue  nettement  par  les  fentes  genitales 
plus  allongees  et  par  la  presence  de  trois  paires  de  pores  tentaculaires  :  bien  que  les  deux 
dernieres  paires  soient  peu  developpees,  elles  sont  cependant  bien  visibles,  tandis  que 
YO.  anceps  n'en  possede  pas  plus  de  deux  paires  en  tout.  Les  plaques  dorsales  du 
disque  sont  moins  epaisses  dans  YO.  resistens  que  dans  YO.  anceps  et  si  leur  region 
centrale  est  deprimee,  elles  n'oflrent  pas,  comme  dans  cette  derniere  espece,  cet  epais- 
sissement  peripherique  que  j'ai  indique;  enfin  les  piquants  brachiaux  sont  au  nombre 
de  quatre  a  la  base  du  bras. 

L'O.  resistens  s'eloigne  de  YO.  martensi  Studer,  par  les  pores  tentaculaires  et  par 
la  forme  des  plaques  brachiales  ventrales. 


OPHIOGLYPHA  JXEXIBILIS,  nov.  sp.  (PI.  V,  fig.  1  et  2) 
Cap  Royds.     Profondeur,  60-80  brasses.     20  aout  1908.     Quelques  echautillons. 

Dans  les  plus  grands  individus,  le  diametre  du  disque  egale  8  niillim.  et  les  bras 
ont  de  20  a  25  millim.  de  longueur ;  dans  les  autres,  qui  sont  les  plus  nombreux,  le 
diametre  du  disque  varie  entre  3  et  6  millim. 

Le  disque  est  arrondi  ou  subpentagonal ;  la  face  dorsale  est  fortement  convexe 
et  la  face  ventrale  est  plane :  il  est  epais,  tandis  que  les  bras  sont  au  contraire  tres 
greles,  minces  et  flexibles. 

La  face  dorsale  du  disque  est  couverte  de  plaques  tres  inegales,  a  limites  nettement 
indiquees.  On  distingue  une  grande  centro-dorsale  arrondie,  et  cinq  radiales  priiuaires 
egalement  arrondies  et  de  meme  taille  que  la  centro-dorsale  ;  les  radiales  sont  separees 
les  unes  des  autres  par  une  rangee  de  petites  plaques  et  le  cercle  qu'elles  forment  est 
aussi  separe  de  la  centro-dorsale  par  une  rangee  de  plaques  inegales,  celles  qui 
correspondent  a  1'intervalle  des  radiales  etant  beaucoup  plus  grandes  que  les  autres. 
En  dehors  de  ces  plaques,  on  reconnait  dans  les  espaces  radiaux  une  plaque  triangulaire, 
plus  grande  que  les  voisines  et  qui  separe  les  regions  proximales  des  boucliers  radiaux 
de  chaque  paire ;  dans  les  espaces  interradiaux,  on  remarque,  vers  la  peripherie  du 
disque.  deux  plaques  tres  grandes,  arrondies,  dont  la  derniere  occupe  le  bord  du  disque. 
Les  autres  plaques  sont  beaucoup  plus  petites,  inegales  et  irregulierement  arrondies. 
Les  boucliers  radiaux  sont  petits  et  leur  taille  est  inferieure  a  celle  des  grandes  plaques 
du  disque  :  ils  sont  triangulaires,  divergents,  separes  sur  toute  leur  longueur  par  deux 
plaques,  la  distale  tres  petite,  la  proximale  grande  et  triangulaire  ;  ils  sont  raproches 
1'un  de  1'autre  au  niveau  de  leur  angle  externe,  mais  non  contigus  sur  les  plus  grands 
exemplaires.  Ils  sont  a  peine  plus  longs  que  larges  et  leur  longueur  ne  depasse  pas 
le  quart  du  rayon  du  disque.  En  dehors  de  chaque  bouclier,  on  observe  une  rangee 
de  papilles  assez  basses,  rectangulaires,  obtuses  ou  legerement  amincies  a  1'extremite. 


ECHINODERMA  45 

La  face  ventrale  n'offre,  en  dehors  des  grands  boucliers  buccaux,  que  quelques 
plaques  peu  nombreuses :  on  distingue  une  grande  plaque  mediane  faisant  suite 
au  bouclier  buccal  et  quelques  autres  plaques  plus  petites.  Les  plaques  genitales 
sont  etroites  et  elles  portent  sur  leur  bord  libre  une  rangee  de  papilles  basses.  Les 
fentes  genitales  sont  tres  apparentes. 

Les  boucliers  buccaux  sont  grands,  de  forme  pentagonale,  aussi  larges  que  longs  : 
Tangle  proximal,  obtus,  est  limite  par  deux  cotes  jjpits  et  les  bords  lateraux  se  relient 
par  deux  angles  arrondis  au  cote  distal  qui  est  convexe.  Les  plaques  adorales  sont 
assez  petites,  etroites,  deux  fois  plus  longues  que  larges.  Les  plaques  orales  sont 
petites  et  triangulaires.  Les  papilles  buccales  laterales  ne  depassent  generalement 
pas  le  nombre  de  trois,  elles  sont  rectangulaires,  assez  petites  et  elles  font  suite 
directement  aux  papilles  internes  du  pore  tentaculaire  buccal ;  la  papille  terminale 
impaire  est  un  peu  plus  grande  que  les  autres. 

Les  plaques  brachiales  dorsales  sont  assez  grandes.  Les  premieres  sont  rec- 
tangulaires et  plus  larges  que  longues,  avec  un  cote  proximal  tres  etroit,  deux  bords 
lateraux  divergents  et  un  cote  distal  tres  large  et  fortement  convexe  qui  se  decompose 
ordinairement  en  trois  cotes  distincts  se  reunissant  par  des  angles  obtus.  Le  cote 
proximal  ne  tarde  pas  a  disparaitre  sur  les  plaques  suivantes  qui  deviennent  alors 
triangulaires  en  jneme  temps  qu'elles  se  montrent  un  peu  plus  longues  que  larges. 
Elles  sont  contigues  sur  le  premier  tiers  des  bras,  puis  elles  se  separent  par  un  intervalle 
etroit  et  elles  deviennent  bientot  un  peu  plus  longues  que  larges. 

La  premiere  plaque  brachiale  ventrale  est  triangulaire,  un  peu  plus  large  que 
longue,  avec  Tangle  proximal  legerement  tronque ;  le  bord  distal,  tres  convexe  et 
offrant  en  son  milieu  un  lobe  assez  large  plus  ou  moins  apparent,  se  decompose  parfois 
en  trois  petits  cotes  distincts.  La  deuxieme  plaque  est  rectangulaire,  un  peu  plus 
longue  que  large,  avec  un  cote  proximal  plus  etroit,  un  cote  distal  large  et  convexe  et 
des  bords  lateraux  divergents.  Les  suivantes  sont  pentagonales  avec  un  angle  proximal 
aigu,  et  un  bord  distal  large  et  convexe  offrant  en  son  milieu  un  petit  lobe  plus  ou 
moins  accuse  ;  ces  plaques  se  separent  a  partir  de  la  troisieme. 

Les  plaques  laterales,  peu  proeminentes,  portent  chacune  quatre  piquants  courts, 
assez  larges,  coniques  et  pointus,  s'inserant  le  long  du  bord  distal  de  la  plaque  a  des 
interval  les  egaux. 

Les  pores  tentaculaires  ne  sont  pas  tres  developpes.  Ceux  de  la  premiere  paire, 
qui  s'ouvrent  dans  la  bouche,  portent  sur  chacun  de  leurs  bords  trois  ecailles  rec- 
tangulaires et  obtuses,  les  internes  plus  fortes  que  les  externes.  Les  pores  de  la 
deuxieme  paire  portent  trois  ecailles  proximales  et  externes,  epaisses,  coniques,  pointues, 
et  deux  ecailles  distales  et  internes  tres  petites,  basses  et  peu  developpees ;  ceux  de 
la  troisieme  paire  out  trois  ecailles  proximales  et  une  ou  deux  distales  ;  ceux  de  la 
quatrieme  paire  out  deux  ou  trois  ecailles  proximales  et  une  seule  distalc- ;  enfin  les 
pores  de  la  cinquieme  paire  ont  deux  ecailles  proximales  et  une  distale.  Au  dela,  il 
n'existe  qu'une  seule  ecaille  proximale. 


46  R.  KCEHLER 

Dans  les  jeunes  exemplaires,  le  nombre  des  plaques  dorsales  du  disque  est  beaucoup 
moins  eleve :  les  six  plaques  primaires,  avec  les  deux  grandes  plaques  de  chaque  inter- 
radius,  suffisent  pour  recouvrir  la  plus  grande  partie  de  la  face  dorsale  du  disque.  Les 
boucliers  radiaux  sont  rapproches  en  dehors  et  parfois  meme  contigus  sur  une  certaine 
partie  de  leur  longueur. 

Rapports  et  differences. — L'O.  flexibilis  se  rapproche  de  VO.  mimana  que  j'ai  decrite 
d'apres  des  exemplaires  recueillis  par  la  Scotia,  a  une  profondeur  de  1410  brasses,  par 
71°  22'  lat.  S.  et  16°  34'  long.  W.  ;  elle  en  differe  par  ses  plaques  brachiales  ventrales 
qui  deviennent  rapidement  plus  longues  que  larges,  tandis  que  chez  YO.  mimaria  elles 
restent  toujours  beaucoup  plus  larges  que  longues,  par  la  face  ventrale  du  disque 
offrant  une  grande  plaque  mediane  faisant  suite  au  bouclier  buccal  et  en  dehors  de 
laquelle  il  n'existe  qu'un  petit  nombre  de  plaques  seulement,  enfin  par  les  piquants 
brachiaux  qui  ne  sont  qu'au  nombre  de  quatre. 

Elle  s'ecarte  de  I'O.  martensi  Studer,  de  la  Georgie  du  Sud,  par  une  forme  complete- 
ment  differente  des  plaques  brachiales  dorsales  et  ventrales,  ainsi  que  par  les  pores 
tentaculaires,  et  par  la  presence  de  quatre  piquants  brachiaux. 

AMPHIURA  ALGIDA,  nov.  sp.  (PI.  VII,  fig.  14  et  15) 

Cap  Koyds.     Profondeur,  10-20  brasses.     Deux  echantillons. 
Cap  Royds.     Profondeur,  50-80  brasses.     Un  echantillon. 

Dans  le  plus  grand  individu,  le  diametre  du  disque  est  de  4*5  millim.  ;  dans  les 
deux  autres,  il  ne  depasse  pas  3  millim.  Les  bras  sont  tous  casses  et  ils  ne  devaient  pas 
avoir  plus  de  15  millim.  de  longueur. 

Le  disque  est  pentagonal  avec  les  angles  arrondis.  La  face  dorsale  est  couverte 
de  plaques  grandes  et  inegales,  en  forme  d'ecailles  aplaties,  imbriquees,  dont  le  bord 
libre  offre  une  tres  mince  bordure,  sorte  de  lisere  finement  strie  et  transparent.  Ces 
plaques  sont  tres  grandes  dans  la  region  centrale  du  disque  :  elles  deviennent  plus 
petites  vers  la  peripherie  et  vers  les  boucliers  radiaux ;  il  n'y  a  pas  la  moindre  indication 
de  plaques  primaires.  Les  boucliers  radiaux  sont  petits  et  peu  developpes :  ils  sont 
a  peine  deux  fois  et  demie  plus  longs  que  larges  et  leur  longueur  est  inferieure  au  quart 
du  rayon  du  disque  ;  ils  sont  assez  rapproches  1'un  de  1'autre,  peu  divergents  et 
separes  par  une  rangee  etroite  de  plaques. 

La  face  ventrale  du  disque  est  recouverte  de  plaques  identiques  a  celles  de  la  face 
dorsale,  mais  plus  petites  et  egales.  Les  fentes  genitales  sont  etroites. 

Les  boucliers  buccaux  sont  triangulaires  avec  des  cotes  convexes  et  un  angle  proximal 
arroudi  ;  le  cote  distal  est  fortement  convexe  et  il  offre  meme  en  son  milieu  un  lobe 
qui  n'estpas  tres  preeminent  dans  le  grand  exemplaire  ou  le  bouclier  est  a  peupres  aussi 
long  que  large  ;  dans  les  deux  petits,  ce  lobe  est  au  contraire  tres  preeminent  et  les 
boucliers  sont  plus  longs  que  larges.  Les  plaques  adorales  sont  triangulaires,  avec 


ECHINODERMA  47 

le  bord  oral  legerement  incurve ;  elles  sont  fortement  amincies  en  dedans  et  a  peine 
contigues  sur  la  ligne  mediane  :  parfois  meme  elles  restent  separees  de  leurs  congeneres 
par  Tangle  proximal  du  bouclier  buccal ;  leur  region  externe  est  au  contraire  fortement 
developpee  et  arrive  meme  a  toucher  la  region  correspondante  de  la  plaque  opposee 
en  comprimant  la  premiere  plaque  brachiale  ventrale.  Les  plaques  orales  sont 
etroites  et  assez  hautes.  Les  papilles  buccales  comprennent  d'abord  deux  papilles 
placees  sur  le  meme  plan  que  les  autres  pieces  buccales  :  1'interne  est  epaisse  et  arrondie, 
1'externe  est  allongee,  proeminente,  assez  epaisse  et  son  extremite  est  obtuse  ;  il  existe 
en  outre,  sur  un  plan  superieur,  une  petite  papille  conique  et  pointue  s'inserant  entre 
les  deux  precedentes. 

Les  plaques  brachiales  dorsales  sont  grandes  et  triangulaires  avec  les  cotes  legere- 
ment convexes  et  un  angle  proximal  arrondi ;  elles  sont  un  pen  plus  larges  que  longues 
et  toutes  contigues. 

La  premiere  plaque  brachiale  ventrale  est  tres  petite  et  triangulaire,  avec  un  angle 
distal  aigu  qui  est  limite  de  chaque  cote  par  les  plaques  adorales.  Quand  ces  dernieres 
plaques  sont  tres  rapprochees  ou  contigues,  Tangle  de  la  plaque,  resserre  entre  elles, 
est  tres  pointu  ;  quand  les  plaques  adorales  sont  un  peu  ecartees,  Tangle  devient  tronque. 
Les  plaques  suivantes  sont  pentagonales,  avec  un  angle  proximal :  sur  les  premieres 
plaques,  qui  sont  a  peu  pres  aussi  longues  que  larges,  cet  angle  est  d'abord  tres  obtus  ; 
il  se  montre  plus  aigu  sur  les  plaques  suivantes  qui  deviennent  sensiblement  plus 
longues  que  larges.  Le  bord  distal  s'echancre  legerement  au-dela  du  disque.  Toutes 
ces  plaques  sont  contigues. 

Les  plaques  laterales  portent  quatre  piquants  subegaux  et  dont  la  longueur  egale 
celle  de  Tarticle  ;  ces  piquants,  assez  epais,  s'amincissent  progressivement  jusqu'a 
Textremite  qui  forme  une  pointe  obtuse. 

L'ecaille  tentaculaire, unique,  est  bien  developpee ;  elle  offre  deux  cotes paralleles  et  une 
extremite  obtuse :  elle  est  presque  rectangulaire  et  pres  de  deux  fois  aussi  longue  que  large. 

Rapports  et  differences. — 1>'A.  algida  se  distingue  facilement  de  toutes  les 
Amphiura  s.  str.  connues  possedant  des  ecailles  sur  les  deux  faces  du  disque  et  une 
seule  ecaille  tentaculaire.  L'.4.  prcefecta,  que  j'ai  decrite  d'apres  un  exemplaire  de 
Tile  Campbell,  a  Tecaille  tentaculaire  remarquablement  grande  et  plus  forte  que  chez 
\'A.  algida  ;  les  plaques  primaires  sont  tres  apparentes,  la  papille  buccale  externe  est 
squamiforme  et  la  face  ventrale  du  disque  est  couverte  d'ecailles  tres  petites. 
L; 'A.  pusilla  Farquhar,  de  la  Nouvelle-Zelande,  a  six  piquants  brachiaux  et  son  ecaille 
tentaculaire,  arrondie,  est  assez  petite.  ISA.  magellanica,  avec  son  premier  piquant 
ventral  allonge,  est  bien  differente  de  VA.  algida. 

Notre  espece  se  rapproche  surtout  de  \'A.  angularis  Lyman,  mais,  chez  cette 
derniere,  la  face  ventrale  du  disque  est  nue  ou  garnie  d'ecailles  rudimentaires ;  de 
plus,  la  papille  buccale  externe  est  conique  et  pointue,  Tecaille  tentaculaire  est  arrondie 
et  les  boucliers  buccaux  sont  presque  circulaires. 


48  R.   KCKHLER 

OPHIODIPLAX,  nov.  gen. 

Ce  genre  rappelle  les  OphiacantJm  et  les  genres  voisins. 

La  face  dorsale  du  disque  est  recouverte  d'un  tegument  qui  cache  completement  les 
plaques  sous-jacentes,  y  compris  les  boucliers  radiaux,  et  qui  porte  de  petits  batonnets  ; 
ce  tegument  se  continue  sur  les  premieres  plaques  brachiales  dorsales.  Celles-ci  sont 
divisees,  par  une  suture  transversale,  en  deux  moities  inegales,  la  proximale  plus 
petite,  et  cette  division  existe  sur  toute  la  longueur  des  bras.  Les  papilles  buccales 
sont  nombreuses  et  elles  ne  forment  pas  une  rangee  reguliere. 

La  division  en  deux  des  plaques  brachiales  dorsales  s'observe  d'une  maniere  tres 
constante  dans  les  nombreux  exemplaires  que  j'ai  pu  etudier,  aussi  bien  chez  les 
individus  tres  jeunes  que  chez  ceux  dont  le  disque  atteintlO  a  11  millim.  de  diametre 
et  qu'on  peut  considerer  comme  adultes.  Ce  caractere  ne  s'observe  chez  aucune 
Ophiacanthidee  connue  et  il  m'a  paru  suffisant  pour  justifier  la  creation  d'un  nouveau 
genre. 

OPHIODIPLAX  MSJUNCTA,  nov.  sp.  (PL  VI,  figs.  9,  10  et  11  ;    PI.  VII,  fig.  13) 
Cap  Royds.     Profondeur,  60-80  brasses.     20  aout  1908.     Trois  echantillons. 

Le  diametre  du  disque  varie  entre  8  et  9  millim. ;  les  bras  atteignent  40  a  50  millim. 
de  longueur. 

Le  disque  est  subpentagonal  dans  1'un  des  individus  ;  dans  les  deux  autres,  il  est 
pentagonal  avec  les  cotes  plus  ou  moins  excaves. 

La  face  dorsale  du  disque  est  couverte  d'un  tegument  qui  cache  completement  les 
plaques  sous-jacentes  et  offre  de  petits  batonnets  assez  ecartes,  courts,  coniques  et 
dont  le  sommet,  emousse,  porte  de  deux  a  quatre  ou  cinq  spinules  tres  fines  et  pointues. 
A  la  peripherie  du  disque,  ces  batonnets  s'allongent  un  peu  et  deviennent  cylindriques  ; 
leur  surface  est  plus  ou  moins  rugueuse  et  ils  montrent  toujours  un  certain  nombre  de 
petites  spinules  a  leur  partie  terminale.  Les  boucliers  radiaux  ne  sont  pas  distincts  :  ils 
sont  settlement  indiques  par  des  saillies  plus  ou  moins  apparentes  de  la  face  dorsale  du 
disque  a  la  base  des  bras. 

La  face  ventrale  du  disque  presente  des  batonnets  identiques  a  ceux  de  la  face 
dorsale,  mais  plus  epais  que  sur  cette  derniere,  surtout  au  voisinage  des  fentes  genitales 
ou  Ton  distingue  des  plaques  tres  fines  et  arrondies  ;  ces  batomiets  se  continuent,  en 
diminuant  de  longueur,  jusqu'au  voisinage  des  boucliers  buccaux.  Les  fentes  genitales 
sont  tres  larges. 

Les  boucliers  buccaux  sont  assez  grands,  quadrangulaires,  plus  larges  que  longs, 
avec  les  angles  arrondis ;  la  region  proximale,  qui  correspond  au  sommet  de  Tangle 
proximal,  est  parfois  separee  du  reste  de  la  plaque  par  un  sillon  irregulier.  Les  plaques 
adorales  sont  assez  larges  mais  pas  tres  grandes,  et  elles  sont  a  peine  deux  fois  et  demie 
plus  longues  que  larges ;  elles  ne  possedent  pas  de  lobe  distal  separant  le  bouclier 


ECHINODERMA  49 

buccal  de  la  premiere  plaque  brachiale  ventrale.  Les  plaques  orales  sont  petites  et 
triangulaires.  Les  papilles  buccales  sont  nombreuses  et  serrees,  et  elles  ne  forment 
pas  une  serie  tres  reguliere,  car,  dans  la  region  moyenne,  on  observe  deux  rangees 
plus  ou  moins  distinctes  ;  il  y  en  a  une.dizaine  en  tout  de  chaque  cote.  Ces  papilles 
sont  petites,  coniques  et  pointues,  et  elles  deviennent  un  peu  plus  longues  vers 
Fextremite  proximale  des  plaques  orales  ;  la  papille  impaire  terminale  est  un  peu 
plus  grande  et  plus  forte  que  les  voisines. 

Les  contours  des  premieres  plaques  brachiales  dorsales  ne  sont  pas  distincts.  Le 
tegument  de  la  face  dorsale  du  disque  se  continue,  en  efiet,  sur  une  certaine  longueur 
de  la  face  dorsale  des  bras  en  recouvrant  les  cinq  ou  six  premieres  plaques  brachiales  : 
il  presente  des  batonnets  analogues  a  ceux  de  la  face  dorsale  du  disque,  mais  ceux-ci 
sont  plus  courts,  coniques  avec  la  pointe  rugueuse  ou  garnie  de  deux  ou  trois  petites 
spinules,  et  ils  deviennent  de  plus  en  plus  petits  pour  disparaitre  finalement.  Les 
plaques  brachiales  dorsales  apparaissent  alors  et  elles  se  montrent  de  suite  avec  leur 
structure  caracteristique  :  chacune  d'elles  est  en  effet  divisee  par  un  sillon  transversal 
legerement  convexe  en  deux  parties  inegales ;  la  partie  proximale  est  petite  et  la  partie 
distale  est  relativement  grande.  Dans  leur  ensemble,  ces  plaques  ont  une  forme 
triangulaire  et  elles  sont  un  peu  plus  longues  que  larges  avec  un  sommet  proximal 
arrondi  et  un  bord  distal  convexe.  La  region  proximale  de  la  plaque  est  petite,  en 
forme  de  triangle  a  sommet  plus  ou  moins  arrondi :  cette  region  est  un  peu  plus  longue 
que  large.  La  region  distale  de  la  plaque  est  plus  large  que  longue,  trapezoiidale, 
avec  un  cote  proximal  etroit  et  un  peu  concave,  un  cote  distal  tres  large  et  convexe 
et  deux  bords  lateraux  divergents. 

La  premiere  plaque  brachiale  ventrale  est  assez  grande,  triangulaire,  avec  les 
angles  arrondis  ;  le  sommet,  distal,  est  arrondi  et  la  base,  proximale,  est  convexe  ; 
elle  est  un  peu  plus  large  que  longue.  Les  plaques  suivantes  sont  triangulaires,  plus 
larges  que  longues,  avec  un  angle  proximal  obtus  et  arrondi,  et  un  bord  distal  forte- 
ment  convexe  ;  ce  bord  peut  offrir  un  petit  lobe  median  obtus  et  il  se  decompose 
parfois  en  deux  cotes  distincts.  Ces  plaques  sont  separees  des  la  base  du  bras.  A 
partir  du  premier  tiers,  elles  deviennent  plus  longues  que  larges,  avec  un  angle 
proximal  aigu  un  peu  arrondi  et  un  bord  distal  toujours  fortement  convexe. 

Les  plaques  laterales,  assez  proemineutes,  portent  six  piquants  a  la  base  des  bras  : 
la  longueur  de  ces  derniers  augmente  legerement  depuis  le  premier,  qui  egale  Farticle, 
jusqu'au  troisieme  ;  le  quatrieme  et  le  cinquieme  sont  un  peu  plus  longs  et  leur 
longueur  depasse  un  article  et  demi ;  le  sixieme  est  un  peu  plus  court.  Leur  surface 
est  couverte  de  tres  fines  rugosites  qui  sont  un  peu  plus  marquees  vers  1'extremite. 
On  trouve  parfois  sept  piquants  a  une  petite  distance  de  la  base  des  bras. 

L'ecaille  tentaculaire,  unique,  est  courte,  mince,  spiniforme  et  son  extremite  est 
pointue. 

J'ai  rencontre  dans  les  collections  de  la  deuxieme   Expedition  Antarctique  du 

BK1T.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.   1907-9.       VOL.  II.  H 


50  R.  KXEHLER 

Dr.  Charcot,  un  certain  nombre  d'exemplaires  de  cette  meme  Ophiure  qui  ni'ont 
permis  de  mieux  en  preciser  les  caracteres  et  de  m'assurer  de  leur  Constance  ;  j'ai 
note  egalement  quelques  particularites  qu'il  est  bon  de  signaler.  La  taille  des 
echantillons  peut  etre  superieure  a  celle  de  ceux  qui  ont  ete  recueillis  par  1'Expedition 
Anglaise,  et,  dans  certains  d'entre  eux,  le  diametre  du  disque  depasse  11  millim.  J'ai 
represente  ici  deux  de  ces  individus ;  dans  1'un,  qui  est  vu  par  la  face  dorsale,  le 
diametre  du  disque  atteint  a  peine  9  millim.  (PI.  VI,  fig.  10) ;  dans  Fautre,  qui  est 
vu  par  la  face  ventrale,  le  diametre  du  disque  est  de  1T2  millim.  (PI.  VI,  fig.  11).  Les 
plaques  brachiales  dorsales  sont  toujours  divisees,  mais  leur  forme  peut  offrir  des 
variations  :  tantot  elles  sont  plus  longues  que  larges  comme  dans  1'individu  reproduit 
PI.  VI,  fig.  10,  tantot  au  contraire  elles  sont  un  peu  plus  larges  que  longues. 
Les  piq  uants  brachiaux  peuvent  etre  plus  developpes  et  le  piquant  dorsal  depasse 
la  longueur  de  deux  articles,  ainsi  que  cela  arrive  dans  1'exemplaire  de  la  fig.  10, 
dont  le  disque  n'a  que  9  millim.  Dans  les  echantillons  de  grande  taille  (PI.  VI, 
fig.  11),  les  papilles  buccales  deviennent  plus  fortes  et  plus  nombreuses ;  les  plaques 
brachiales  ventrales  offrent,  a  partir  de  la  deuxieme,  une  forme  pentagonale  avec  un 
angle  proximal  tres  obtus  et  un  bord  distal  convexe  ;  ce  n'est  qu'a  partir  de  la  dixieme 
qu'elles  deviennent  triangulaires.  D'une  maniere  generale,  je  remarque  que,  sur  les 
exemplaires  de  I'Expedition  Charcot,  les  piquants  de  la  face  dorsale  du  disque  se 
continuent  moins  loin  sur  les  bras  que  sur  les  individus  de  la  Terre  Victoria  et  ils 
peuvent  disparaitre  des  la  troisieme  plaque  brachiale  dorsale. 

L'O.  disjuncta  me  parait  identique  a  une  Ophiure  antarctique  que  J.  Bell  a 
figuree,  sans  la  decrire  (08,  PL  IV) :  si  elle  n'est  pas  identique  a  cette  forme,  elle  en  est, 
en  tout  cas,  fort  voisine.  D'apres  les  dessins  de  J.  Bell,  les  plaques  brachiales  dorsales 
de  cette  Ophiure  sont  divisees,  a  la  base  des  bras,  en  deux  parties  inegales ;  mais, 
d'autre  part,  les  pores  tentaculaires  auraient  chacun  deux  ecailles,  1'une  proximale, 
1'autre  distale,  et  ces  ecailles  sont  elargies  transversalement ;  je  n' observe  aucune 
disposition  analogue  sur  mes  echantillons  et  je  me  demande  s'il  n'y  a  pas  une  erreur 
dans  les  dessins  de  J.  Bell.  J'ajouterai  que  cet  auteur  considere  son  Ophiure  comme 
un  jeune  :  or  sur  deux  dessins  qui  sont  faits  avec  un  grossissement  de  9/4,  le  diametre 
du  disque  est  de  22  millim.  mesure  entre  le  fond  d'un  espace  interradial  et  le  bord 
radial  oppose,  ce  qui  correspond  a  un  diametre  de  pres  de  10  millim.  en  grandeur 
naturelle.  Si  done  ces  chiffres  sont  exacts,  les  exemplaires  de  Bell  seraient  de  la  taille  de 
ceux  que  j'ai  etudies  et  il  me  parait  bien  difficile  d'admettre  qu'une  Ophiacanthidee, 
dont  le  disque  a  un  diametre  moyen  de  10  millim.,  soit  un  jeune. 

Le  savant  naturaliste  anglais  parait  attribuer  a  cette  jeunesse  des  exemplaires  les 
caracteres  des  plaques  brachiales  dorsales  qui  ne  seraient  pas  completement  calcifiees. 
Je  ne  suis  pas  de  cet  avis  :  j'estime  que  ces  plaques  sont  parfaitement  formees  et 
qu'elles  restent  fragrnentees  chez  1'adulte,  comme  on  1'observe  d'ailleurs  chez  quelques 
autres  Ophiures. 


ECHINODERMA  51 

ECHINIDES 

STERECHINUS  NEUMAYERI  (Meissner) 
Voir  pour  la  bibliographie  :  Mortensen  (10),  p.  64. 

Cap  Royds.     Profondeur,    10-50    brasses.     Juillct  ^1908.     Quelques    echantillons    de 
differentes  dimensions  :  le  diametre  du  test  varie  entre  58  et  24  millim. 

ABATUS  SHACKLETONI,  nov.  sp.  (PL  IV,  fig.  3  a  10 ;  PL  VIII,  fig.  1  a  6) 

Baie  du  Cap  Royds.     5  ma-rs  1908.    Profondeur,  10-20  brasses.     Treize 
echantillons  dont  un  incomplet  et  casse. 

Cinq  exemplaires  sont  d'assez  grande  taille  et  leur  longueur  est  voisine  de  35  millim., 
les  autres  sont  plus  petits.  Dans  les  plus  grands,  la  longueur  totale  avec  les  piquants 
varie  de  34  a  38  millim. 

Dans  1'individu  represents  PL  VIII,  fig.  3  a  5,  les  dimensions  sont  les  suivantes  : 

Longueur  (sans  les  piquants) 36  millim. 

Largeur  „  .....         31         „ 

Hauteur  ,,  .          ....         19*5      „ 

Get  individu  a  les  poches  incubatrices  tres  profondes  et  il  represents  incontestablement 
une  femelle.  On  voit,  par  les  photographies  que  j'en  donne,  que  sa  forme  est  reguliere- 
ment  ovoiide  et  que  le  corps  est  assez  allonge.  Cette  meme  forme  s'observe  sur  trois 
des  autres  grands  echantillons  et  me  parait  etre  typique.  Le  dernier  exemplaire  est 
relativement  plus  large  et  plus  court,  ainsi  qu'on  peut  le  constater  sur  la  photo- 
graphic reproduite  PL  VIII,  fig.  6.  Les  dimensions  de  cet  individu  sont  les  suivantes : 

Longueur  (sans  les  piquants)          .....         33  millim. 
Largeur  ,,  .....         32        „ 

Hauteur  ,,  .....         19         ,, 

Les  poches  incubatrices  de  cet  exemplaire  sont  beaucoup  moins  profondes  que  celles 
du  precedent,  mais  je  le  considere  neanmoins  comme  une  femelle.  Un  trois'eme 
individu,  dont  j'ai  laisse  le  test  intact,  presente  des  poches  incubatrices  profondes  et 
appartient  aussi  au  sexe  femelle.  Quant  aux  deux  autres  individus,  ils  ont  les 
ambulacres  dorsaux  a  peine  deprimes  et  non  transformes  en  poches  incubatrices  :  ce 
sont  des  males. 

Les  autres  exemplaires,  de  plus  petite  taille,  ont  le  corps  relativement  elargi  et 
moins  allonge ;  leurs  ambulacres  dorsaux  sont  peu  deprimes  et  tous  ont  le  caractere 
de  males. 


52  R.  K(EHLER 

Voici  les  dimensions  que  je  releve,  piquants  non  compris,  sur  les  sept  echantillons 
qui  sont  intacts  : 

L&n^ueur.  Largeur. 

13  millim.  11' 5  millim. 

16  „  13 

17  „  14 
17        „  15-5 
21-5    „  19 

22  „  19-5        „ 

23  „  19 

Je  decrirai  1'exemplaire  represente  PL  VIII,  fig.  3  a  5,  que  je  prendrai  comme  type  de 
1'espece  ;  j'indiquerai  ensuite  les  quelques  differences  que  je  releve  avec  celui  de  la 
PI.  VIII,  fig.  6,  et  enfin  je  donnerai  les  caracteres  du  male. 

Vu  d'en  haut,  le  test  est  assez  regulierement  ovoide ;  il  est  plus  retreci  en  arriere 
qu'en  avant  et  la  plus  grande  largeur  s'observe  au  niveau  de  Fappareil  apical  qui  est 
plus  rapproche  du  bord  anterieur  que  du  bord  posterieur. 

Le  bord  anterieur  est  a  peine  deprime  sur  la  ligne  mediane,  le  sillon  qui  correspond 
a  1'ambulacre  dorsal  anterieur  devenant  de  moins  en  moins  profond  a  mesure  qu'on 
se  rapproche  de  1'ambitus ;  nieme  1'echancrure,  qui,  dans  le  premier  exemplaire,  est 
a  peine  marquee  en  dessous  du  fasciole,  entre  celui-ci  et  1'ambitus,  devient,  ainsi  que 
nous  le  verrons  plus  loin,  tout  a  fait  nulle  dans  le  second  ou  le  sillon  est  d'ailleurs  moins 
profond,  comme  cela  arrive  aussi  chez  les  males. 

Vu  lateralement,  le  test  offre  d'abord  une  courbe  s'elevant  regulierement  jusqu'a 
1'appareil  apical,  puis,  en  arriere  de  cet  appareil,  il  forme  une  preeminence  interradiale 
assez  marquee  sur  I'echantillon  depourvu  de  ses  piquants,  mais  qui  n'apparait  pas  ou 
n'apparait  que  fort  peu  sur  les  individus  munis  de  leurs  piquants ;  cette  preeminence 
diminue  rapidement  jusqu'a  1'extremite  posterieure  qui  est  tronquee  verticalement  et 
peu  elevee.  La  face  ventrale  est  tout  a  fait  plane  en  avant  du  peristome  et  un  peu 
convexe  en  arriere. 

L'appareil  apical  est  situe  en  avant  du  milieu  du  corps  et  il  presente  trois  orifices 
genitaux,  deux  a  gauche  et  un  a  droite  ;  ces  orifices  sont  arrondis  et  assez  grands 
(PI.  VII,  fig.  4).  Les  deux  orifices  de  gauche  sont  tres  rapproches  1'un  de  1'autre 
tandis  que  1'orifice  de  droite  est  assez  ecarte  de  1'orifice  posterieur  gauche  :  il  n'est 
pas  situe  exactement  sur  le  meme  niveau  transversal  que  ce  dernier,  mais  se  trouve 
place  tres  legerement  en  arriere.  La  ligne  qui  reunit  les  deux  orifices  passe  a  15' 5  millim. 
du  bord  anterieur  du  test  eta  20' 5  millim.  du  bord  posterieur.  La  plaque  madreporique 
occupe  a  peu  pres  tout  1'espace  compris  entre  les  deux  orifices  posterieurs  ;  elle  s'etend 
en  avant  jusqu'au  niveau  du  bord  anterieur  de  1'orifice  anterieur,  et,  en  arriere,  elle 
depasse  le  bord  posterieur  des  orifices  posterieurs.  Elle  est  criblee  de  petits  pores 
arrondis,  regulierement  disposes  et  qui  en  occupent  a  peu  pres  toute  la  surface  ;  on 


ECHINODERMA  53 

reconnait,  en  outre,  un  certain  nombre  de  granules  tres  fins  et  places  aussi  d'une 
maniere  reguliere.  On  distingue  facilement  les  contours  des  plaques  ocellaires  qui 
sont  petites,  pentagonales  avec  un  angle  proximal  et  offrcnt  chacune  un  orifice  trans- 
versal en  forme  de  croissant  a  concavite  tournee  vers  1'exterieur.  Les  contours  des 
autres  plaques  sont  indistincts. 

L'ambulacre  anterieur  impair  forme,  a  la  face  dorsale  du  test,  un  sillon  assez  etroit 
et  peu  profond,  dont  les  cotes  se  continue nt  paimn  bord  tres  arrondi  avec  les  regions 
interradiales  du  test  et  qui  s'attenue  progressivement  avant  d'atteindre  le  fasciole  ; 
il  disparait  presque  complete ment  au  niveau  du  bord  anterieur  du  test  (PL  VIII,  fig.  5). 
Les  zones  poriferes,  situees  sur  les  cotes  legerement  obliques  du  sillon,  sont  droites 
et  elles  vont  en  divergeant  quelque  peu ;  elles  ne  sont  pas  tres  ecartees  1'une  de 
1'autre  en  raison  de  la  faible  largeur  du  sillon.  Je  compte  dans  chacune  d'elles,  et 
jusqu'au  fasciole,  vingt  paires  de  pores  dont  la  grosseur  augmente  depuis  la  premiere 
jusqu'a  la  septieme,  puis  decroit  ensuite  de  telle  sorte  que  les  pores  des  deux  dernieres 
paires  sont  tres  fins.  Les  huit  ou  dix  premieres  paires  de  pores  sont  separees  par  deux 
ou  trois  granules  formant  souvent  une  petite  rangee  trans versale ;  au  dela,  les 
granules  diminuent  ou  meme  disparaissent  completement  entre  les  pores,  tandis  qu'on 
voit  apparaitre  sur  chaque  plaque  un  granule  plus  gros  et  rapproche  de  son  bord 
interne.  Les  pores  des  premieres  paires  sont  disposes  suivant  une  ligne  perpendicu- 
laire  a  1'axe  du  sillon,  puis  les  paires  suivantes  se  placent  obliquement  par  rapport  a 
cet  axe,  en  meme  temps  que  les  pores  de  chaque  paire  se  rapprochent  1'un  de  1'autre 
et  deviennent  plus  petits. 

Les  ambulacres  lateraux  anterieurs  et  posterieurs  presentent  a  peu  pres  le  meme 
developpement.  Les  ambulacres  anterieurs  sont  fortement  divergents  et  ils  sont 
presque  places  sur  le  prolongement  1'un  de  1'autre,  tandis  que  les  posterieurs  sont 
tres  rapproches  et  peu  divergents ;  ils  sont  separes  par  la  preeminence  interradiale 
que  j'ai  signalee  plus  haut  et  dont  la  largeur,  a  la  base,  est  de  4  millim.  L'axe  de 
1'ambulacre  anterieur  forme,  avec  celui  de  1'ambulacre  posterieur  du  meme  cote  un 
angle  de  90°  environ. 

Les  ambulacres  anterieurs  sont,  comme  les  posterieurs,  tres  profondement 
deprimes  a  la  face  dorsale  du  test  et  ils  constituent  des  poches  incubatrices,  allongees 
mais  assez  etroites  dans  notre  espece ;  elles  ont  toutes  les  memes  dimensions  et 
mesurent  environ  12  millim.  de  longueur  sur  3  millim.  de  largeur ;  les  poches 
anterieures  sont  legerement  elargies  sur  leur  region  externe,  tandis  que  les  poches 
posterieures  conssrvent  la  meme  largeur  sur  toute  leur  etendue.  La  depression  qui 
constitue  chaque  poche  se  fait  tres  brusquement  a  partir  de  la  troisieme  paire  de  pores 
ambulacraires  et  les  parois  sont  a  peu  pres  verticales ;  elles  se  relient  par  un  angle 
arrondi  avec  la  face  dorsale  du  test.  La  profondeur  des  poches  est  de  6  millim.  La 
partie  de  1'ambulacre  qui  est  comprise  entre  1'appareil  apical  et  la  poche  proprement 
dite,  ne  reste  pas  a  fleur  du  test,  mais  elle  est  un  peu  deprimee  surtout  dans  le  sens  de 
la  longueur  de  maniere  a  former  un  sillon  oblique  qui  conduit  a  la  poche.  Chaque 


54  R.   KCEHLER 

poche  s'etend  jusqu'au  fascicle  :  en  1'abordant,  elle  se  releve  brusquement  pour  la 
poche  posterieure  et  un  peu  obliqucment  pour  1'anterieure. 

La  region  interradiale  dorsale  comprise  entre  le  sillon  et  1'ambulacre  lateral 
anterieur  est  convexe ;  elle  se  continue  insensiblement  avec  le  sillon  tandis  qu'elle 
s'arrete  brusquement  au  bord  de  la  poche  incubatrice.  Elle  est  recouverte  de  gramiles 
primaires  de  petite  taille,  de  dimensions  tres  uniformes  et  assez  espaces  ;  ces  granules 
sont  plus  serres  au  voisinage  de  la  poche  incubatrice  et  leurs  dimensions  augmentent 
un  peu  au  bord  meme  de  cette  poche.  Entre  ces  granules  primaires  se  montrent 
d'autres  granules  extremement  fins.  On  retrouve  ces  deux  sortes  de  granules  sur  les 
regions  interradiales  anterieures  et  posterieures,  ainsi  que  sur  la  preeminence  inter- 
radiale posterieure,  et  Ton  constate  que  les  granules  primaires  deviennent  toujours 
un  peu  plus  serres  et  un  peu  plus  gros  au  voisinage  des  poches  incubatrices. 

Le  face  ventrale  est  peu  convexe  (PI.  VIII,  fig.  3).  L'arnbulacre  anterieur  est  peu 
distinct:  il  est  legerement  deprime  au  voisinage  du  peristome,  mais  il  se  releve  en 
meme  temps  qu'il  se  retrecit  a  mesure  qu'on  se  rapproche  du  bord  du  test.  II  offre, 
de  chaque  cote,  quatre  paires  de  pores  ambulacraires  rapproches,  entoures  chacun 
d'un  cercle  ovalaire  tres  apparent ;  ca  et  la  se  montre  un  granule  extremement  fin. 
Puis  les  paires  s'espacent  rapidement  en  meme  temps  que  les  pores  deviennent  plus 
fins :  les  granules  au  contraire  deviennent  subitement  plus  gros  et  leurs  dimensions 
depassent  celles  des  granules  dorsaux  auxquels  ils  passent  d'ailleurs  a  1'ambitus.  Les 
ambulacres  lateraux  anterieurs  sont  places  sur  le  prolongement  Fun  de  1'autre  de  part 
et  d'autre  de  la  bouche  ;  ils  offrent,  de  chaque  cote,  cinq  paires  de  pores,  entoures 
chacun  de  leur  cercle  ovalaire,  formant  deux  rangees  convergentes  separees  par  quelques 
fins  granules ;  puis  les  pores  deviennent  tres  fins  et  espaces,  tandis  que  les  granules 
acquierent  les  memes  dimensions  que  dans  les  interradius  voisins.  Les  ambulacres 
lateraux  posterieurs  constituent  de  larges  avenues  n'offrant  que  des  granules  tres  fins 
et  peu  abondants  ;  des  granules  plus  gros  et  plus  serres  n'apparaissent  qu'au  voisinage 
de  1'extremite  posterieure. 

Les  regions  interradiales  anterieures  et  posterieures  de  la  face  ventrale  sont 
uniformement  couvertes  de  granules  assez  espaces,  de  taille  uniforme,  mais 
sensiblement  plus  gros  que  ceux  de  la  face  dorsale  avec  lesquels  ils  se  continuent 
a  1'ambitus ;  entre  ces  granules  primaires  on  en  voit  d'autres  tres  fins  et  peu 
serres.  Le  plastron  sternal  est  simplement  convexe  et  il  est  arrondi  a  son  extremite 
posterieure,  sans  former  de  preeminence  ou  de  pointe  saillante.  II  offre  des  granules 
disposes  en  rangees  obliques  divergentes  partant  de  son  extremite  posterieure  et  se 
dirigeant  veis  les  avenues  ambulacraires  ventrales  :  ces  granules  sont  d'abord  tres 
fins,  mais  leurs  dimensions  augmentent  a  mesure  qu'on  se  rapproche  des  avenues 
ambulacraires  et  du  peristome. 

Le  peristome  se  trouve  a  peu  pres  a  egale  distance  entre  le  bord  anterieur  du  test 
et  le  milieu  de  la  face  ventrale;  il  est  assez  profondement  situe,  etroit,  en  forme  de 
croissant,  et  plutot  petit.  Le  labre  est  de  dimensions  moyennes ;  son  bord  anterieur 


ECIIINODERMA  55 

est  fortement  convexe  et  il  forme  une  saillie  tres  marquee,  en  forme  de  bee  preeminent, 
qui  cache  la  plus  grande  partie  du  peristome ;  ses  bords  lateraux  sont  excaves  et  le 
bord  posterieur,  fortement  arrondi  et  convexe,  s'etend  jusqu'au  milieu  de  la  deuxieme 
plaque  ambulacraire  voisine. 

La  face  posterieure  est  verticale,  mais  peu  etendue  ;  elle  est  en  grande  partie 
occupee  par  le  periprocte  (PL  IV,  fig.  6).  Celui-ci,  de  taille  moyenne,  a  une  forme 
ovo'ide  un  peu  irreguliere  ;  il  est  un  peu  plus  haiit_que  large  et  mesure  5'1  millim.  sur 
4'6 ;  il  ofire  une  rangee  peripherique  de  grandes  plaques  rectangulaires  et  deux  cercles 
plus  ou  moins  reguliers  de  plaques  centrales  plus  petites.  II  n'y  a  pas  la  moindre 
indication  de  tubes  ambulacraires  au  voisinage  du  periprocte. 

Le  fascicle  offre  un  contour  assez  regulier,  sans  inflexions  ni  sinuosites  bien 
marquees  (PI.  IV,  fig.  6;  PI.  VIII,  fig.  4  et  5).  II  est  tres  rapproche  de  1'ambitus 
entre  1'ambulacre  anterieur  et  la  poche  incubatrice  anterieure  a  I'extremite  de  laquelle 
il  est  tangent :  dans  ce  parcours  il  a  la  forme  d'un  arc  de  cercle  presque  regulier,  a  part 
deux  sinuosites  tres  legeres.  Entre  les  deux  poches  incubatrices  de  chaque  cote,  le 
fascicle  s'eearte  progressivement  de  1'ambitus  et  devient  legerement  concave  ;  au 
niveau  de  l'extremite  de  la  poche  posterieure,  a  laquelle  il  est  egalement  tangent,  il 
presente  un  angle  obtus  tres  marque  et  se  dirige  vers  1'interradius  posterieur,  en 
suivant  une  direction  a  peu  pres  parallele  au  bord  posterieur  du  test :  il  reste  separe 
de  ce  bord  par  un  intervalle  de  4  millim.  environ.  Le  fasciole  conserve  la  meme 
largeur  sur  tout  son  trajet,  soit  T5  millim.  environ. 

Les  tubercules  primaires  sont  performs  et  finement  creneles.  Us  sont  plus  petits 
sur  la  face  dorsale  et  plus  gros  sur  la  face  ventrale.  Leurs  dimensions  restent 
uniformes  sur  presque  toute  1'etendue  de  la  face  doisale,  sauf  au  voisinage  immediat 
des  poches  incubatrices  ou  ils  deviennent  un  peu  plus  gros.  Sur  la  face  ventrale,  ils 
sont  plus  espaces  et  plus  gros,  mais  leur  taille  diminue  a  mesure  qu'on  s'eloigne  du 
peristome  et  ils  passent  progressivement  aux  granules  de  la  face  dorsale.  Au  milieu 
de  ces  granules  primaires  s'en  montrent  d'autres  tres  fins,  dont  les  dimensions  restent 
uniformes  sur  les  deux  faces  du  test. 

Les  piquants  de  la  face  dorsale  sont  fins  et  assez  courts,  leur  longueur  ne  depassant 
pas  3  millim.  ;  ils  sont  couches  sur  le  test  en  formant  un  feutrage  serre ;  ils  sont 
cylindriques,  obtus  a  l'extremite,  et,  vers  1'ambitus,  ils  sont  legerement  recourbes. 
Les  piquants  des  bords  des  poches  incubatrices  sont  plus  longs,  un  peu  aplatis  et  ils 
sont  diriges  de  maniere  a  recouvrir  ces  poches  qui  sont  a  peine  visibles  sur  les 
echantillons  non  depouilles  de  leurs  piquants.  Les  piquants  de  la  face  ventrale 
sont  bien  developpes  et  leur  longueur  peut  atteindre  5  millim. 

Les  pedicellaires  appartiennent  aux  trois  types  tridactyle,  rostre  et  globifere.  Les 
pedicellaires  tridactyles  sont  de  deux  formes  differentes,  mais  toujours  a  trois  valves. 
Les  uns  rappellent  ceux  que  Mortensen  a  decrits  et  figures  chez  YA.  cavernosus  (10  bis, 
PI.  XIX,  fig.  37)  :  les  valves  sont  elargies  en  forme  de  cuillerons  qui  sont  peu 
retrecis  a  leur  base  et  qui  se  toucheut  sur  une  bonne  partie  de  leur  longueur ;  ces  bords 


56  R.  K(EHLER 

sont  munis  de  denticulations  extremement  fines  et  regulieres.  Les  pedicellaires  de 
la  deuxieme  forme  ont  les  valves  plus  etroites,  recourbees,  separees  sur  la  plus  grande 
partie  de  leur  longueur  et  contigues  seulement  dans  leur  partie  terminale  qui  est 
elargie  et  munie  de  denticulations  aigue's  :  cette  forme  se  rapproche  ainsi  des  pedi- 
cellaires rostres.  Ces  deux  sortes  de  pedicellaires  sont  repandus  sur  tout  le  test,  la 
premiere  plus  abondamment  que  la  seconde  ;  toutes  deux  atteignent  une  assez  grande 
taille  et  la  longueur  de  la  tete  peut  etre  de  0'5  a  0'6  millim. 

Les  pedicellaires  rostres  ressemblent  a  ceux  que  Mortensen  a  indiques  chez 
I' A.  cavernosus  (10  bis,  PL  XIX,  fig.  30,  38  et  45)  ;  ils  ont  des  valves  fortement 
recourbees,  qui,  a  partir  de  la  base  triangulaire,  restent  etroites  en  s'amincissant  fort 
peu  jusqu'a  leur  extremite  qui  est  obtuse.  Les  bords  sont  depourvus  de  denticula- 
tions mais  ils  sont  un  peu  sinueux  et  ils  se  relevent,  de  distance  en  distance,  en  une 
dent  peu  saillante  ;  1'extremite  de  la  valve  n'est  pas  denticulee.  Ces  pedicellaires 
sont  plus  rares  que  les  precedents  et  ils  restent  generalement  plus  petits  ;  la  longueur 
de  leur  tete  peut  cependant  atteindre  0'3  a  0'4  millim. 

Les  pedicellaires  globiferes  sont  surtout  repandus  au  voisinage  du  periprocte  ;  ils 
rappellent  beaucoup  ceux  que  j'ai  decrits  et  figures  chez  YA.  elongatus  (  08,  p.  620, 
PI.  XVI,  fig.  154).  Les  valves  sont  plus  recourbees  que  dans  cette  derniere  espece  ; 
elles  se  terminent,  comme  chez  elle,  par  deux  crochets  extremement  developpes,  en 
arriere  desquels  se  trouve  une  fente  allongee  a  la  suite  de  laquelle  vient  une  courte 
partie  tubulaire.  Ces  valves  ressemblent  aussi  a  celles  des  pedicellaires  globiferes 
decrits  par  Mortensen  dans  la  var.  bidens  de  YA.  cavernosus,  mais,  ici,  la  fente  qui 
precede  les  deux  crochets  terminaux  est  plus  allongee.  Le  tige  calcaire  offre  un  peu 
avant  son  extremite  un  tres  leger  epaississement  parfois  a  peine  marque.  Les  valves 
et  I'extremite  distale  du  pedoncule  sont  enveloppees,  comme  chez  YA.  elongatus,  d'un 
tissu  fortement  pigmente  et  glandulaire  qui  rend  la  tete  du  pedicellaire  fort  apparente 
et  dont  1'ensemble  mesure  un  millimetre  de  longueur  environ,  tandis  que  les  valves 
incluses  dans  cette  enveloppe  ne  depassent  pas  0'35  millim. 

Les  spicules  des  tubes  ambulacraires  sont  petits  et  de  forme  tres  irreguliere.  Les 
plus  simples  se  presentent  sous  forme  de  batonnets  plus  ou  moins  recourbes  et  assez 
epais,  offrant  un  nombre  variable  de  prolongements  lateraux  en  forme  de  dents  ; 
quand  ces  prolongements  se  rejoignent,  il  en  resulte  la  formation  de  petites  plaques 
perforees,  allongees  et  de  forme  tres  irreguliere. 

Les  gros  exemplaires  ont  une  couleur  brunatre  assez  foncee  et  uniforme  ;  les 
petits  sont  d'un  brun  plus  clair  et  certains  d'entre  eux  sont  simple ment  grisatres. 

L'exemplaire  qui  est  represente  PI.  VIII,  fig.  6,  difiere  par  quelques  caracteres  de 
celui  que  je  viens  de  decrire.  Ainsi  que  je  1'ai  dit  plus  haut,  le  test  est  relativement 
elargi  au  niveau  de  1'appareil  apical  et  celui-ci  est  plus  rapproche  du  bord  anterieur : 
la  ligne  qui  joint  les  centres  des  deux  orifices  genitaux  posterieurs  se  trouve  a  13  millim. 
du  bord  anterieur  et  20  millim.  du  bord  posterieur  du  test.  Les  orifices  genitaux  sont 
un  peu  plus  petits  que  dans  le  type.  Le  sillon  auterieur  est  moins  profond  et  le  bord 


ECHINODERMA  57 

anterieur  du  test  cesse  d'etre  deprime  en  son  milieu  ;  les  pores  ambulacraires  du  sillon 
sont  plus  fins.  La  preeminence  interradiale  dorsale,  qui  separe  les  deux  ambulacres 
posterieurs,  est  aussi  moins  accusee  ;  enfin  le  periprocte  est  un  peu  plus  petit :  il  est 
sensiblement  plus  haut  que  large  et  il  mesure  5  millim.  de  hauteur  sur  4'5  de  largeur  ; 
il  se  rapproche  un  peu  de  la  forme  que  nous  observerons  chez  le  male.  Les  tubercules 
de  la  face  dorsale  du  test  sont  repartis  plus  uniformement  que  dans  le  type  et  la 
difference  de  taille  que  Ton  observe  avec  ceux  qui  avoisinent  les  ambulacres  lateraux 
est  moins  apparente. 

Les  ambulacres  lateraux  anterieurs  et  posterieurs  de  la  face  dorsale  sont  assez 
f ortement  deprimes,  mais  les  fossettes  qu'ils  constituent  sont  beaucoup  moins  profondes 
que  dans  le  type  et  leur  profondeur  ne  depasse  pas  3'5  millim.  Au  lieu  d'apparaitre 
brusquement  et  d'offrir  un  bord  proximal  abrupt  et  vertical,  les  fossettes  se  creusent 
progressivement  par  I'enfoncement  graduel  des  ambulacres.  Je  compte  dix-neuf  paires 
de  pores  dans  1'ambulacre  anterieur,  depuis  1'extremite  proximale  de  1'ambulacre 
jusqu'au  fascicle  et  vingt  dans  1'ambulacre  posterieur.  La  f ossette  posterieure  gauche 
ne  represente  pas  une  depression  continue  et  unique  :  elle  est  plutot  formee  par  deux 
depressions  successives  separees  par  une  region  moins  enfoncee  ;  cette  disposition  est 
evidemment  accidentelle  car  elle  n'existe  pas  du  cote  droit. 

Bien  que  les  poches  incubatrices  soient  moins  developpees  dans  cet  exemplaire 
que  dans  le  precedent,  elles  existent  cependant  et  il  ne  me  parait  pas  douteux  que 
1'exemplaire  ne  soit  une  femelle  ;  la  disposition  des  ambulacres  dorsaux  est  en  effet 
bien  differente  chez  le  male  qu'il  me  reste  a  decrire. 

J'ai  etudie  les  caracteres  du  male  sur  deux  exemplaires  de  tailles  un  peu  differentes, 
et  dont  les  dimensions  respectives  sans  les  piquants  sont  les  suivantes  : 

Longueur 34  millim.        29-5  millim. 

Largeur  maxima        ....         30      ,,  26          „ 

Hauteur  maxima       ....         15      ,,  18'5       ,, 

Je  represente  ici  le  plus  grand  individu  (PI.  IV,  fig.  3  a  5). 

Le  test  est  un  peu  plus  elargi  et  plus  court  que  chez  la  femelle  qui  m'a 
servi  de  type  pour  la  description  de  1'espece,  mais  ce  caractere  ne  doit  pas  etre  lie  a 
une  difference  de  sexe,  ainsi  que  nous  1'avons  Vu  plus  haut. 

Dans  les  deux  individus,  1'ambulacre  anterieur  dorsal  est  a  peine  deprime  et  il 
arrive  a  fleur  du  test  en  atteignant  le  bord  interne  du  fascicle.  Les  quinze  premieres 
paires  de  pores  seules  sont  assez  developpees,  et  les  suivantes  sont  a  peine  apparentes  ; 
les  pores  sont  relativement  un  peu  plus  gros  dans  le  plus  petit  exemplaire  que  dans 
1'autre.  Les  ambulacres  lateraux  anterieurs  et  posterieurs  sont  faiblement  deprimes ; 
les  ambulacres  anterieurs  sont  un  peu  plus  enfonces  que  les  posterieurs,  mais  la 
difference  est  peu  sensible.  La  depression  commence  des  la  premiere  paire  de  pores 
dans  les  ambulacres  posterieurs  et  seulement  a  partir  de  la  deuxieme  ou  de  la  troisieme 

BRIT.  ANTAECT.  EXPED.   1907-9.       VOL.  II.  I 


58  R.  KCEHLER 

paire  dans  les  anterieurs.  Je  compte  vingt  paires  de  pores  dans  chacun  de  ces 
ambulacres. 

Les  orifices  genitaux  sont  petits.  Dans  le  grand  individu,  les  deux  orifices  gauches 
sont  tres  allonges,  presque  deux  fois  plus  longs  que  larges,et  leur  grand  axe  est  oriente 
suivant  la  direction  de  1'interradius  :  ils  sont  par  consequent  diriges  obliquement  1'un 
par  rapport  a  1'autre.  L'orifice  droit  est  au  contraire  presque  circulaire  et  plus  petit 
que  les  deux  autres ;  le  bord  interne  de  cet  orifice  est  separe  du  bord  interne  de 
1'orifice  posterieur  gauche  par  une  distance  de  1'7  millim. 

Dans  le  petit  exemplaire,  les  trois  orifices  genitaux  sont  petits  et  circulaires,  et 
1'orifice  droit  est  plus  ecarte  de  1'orifice  gauche  que  sur  1'autre  individu,  car  il  en 
est  separe  par  un  intervalle  de  2  millim.  La  plaque  madreporique  n'offre  qu'une 
petite  plage  perforce  arrondie,  autour  de  laquelle  se  montrent  quelques  tubercules, 
tandis  que  dans  le  grand  individu,  cette  plaque  presente  la  structure  que  j'ai  decrite 
plus  haut  chez  la  femelle. 

Le  fascicle  offre  aussi  le  meme  trajet  que  chez  cette  derniere,  mais,  dans  le  petit 
echantillon,  ses  sinuosites  sont  a  peine  marquees. 

Le  periprocte  est  beaucoup  plus  haut  que  large  :  il  mesure  4' 7  millim.  de  hauteur 
sur  3'5  de  largeur  dans  le  grand  exemplaire  et  4 '4  sur  3  millim.  dans  le  petit ;  il  est 
done  comparativement  un  peu  plus  haut  chez  ce  dernier. 

Je  prie  Sir  Ernest  Shackleton,  commandant  de  1'Expedition  Antarctique  Anglaise, 
de  vouloir  bien  accepter  la  dedicace  de  cette  espece. 

Rapports  el  differences. — Mortensen  a  precise  recemment  les  limites  respectives  des 
genres  Hemiaster  et  Abatus  et  il  a  fait  une  revision  des  especes  appartenant  a  ce  dernier, 
especes  qui  sont  toutes  australes.  En  raison  de  la  constitution  de  son  appareil  apical, 
VA.  shackletoni  appartient  aux  Eihmolysii  de  Loven,  et,  par  consequent,  il  doit  etre 
range  dans  le  genre  Abatus  tel  que  Mortensen  1'admet.  Le  savant  naturaliste  danois 
a  rendu  aux  zoologistes  le  tres  grande  service  de  fixer  les  caracteres  des  differentes 
especes  du  genre  Abatus,  especes  qui  avaient  ete  plus  ou  moins  confondues  par  les 
auteurs  en  raison  des  descriptions  insufnsantes  qui  en  avaient  ete  donnees.  Ses 
recherches  1'ont  conduit  a  considerer,  comme  distinctes,  les  quatre  especes  suivantes  : 

Abatus  cordatus  (Verrill). 
Abatus  agassizii  (Pfeffer). 
Abatus  cavernosus  (Philippi). 
Abatus  philippii  Loven. 

Quant  a  VA.  elongatus  que  j'ai  decrit  sous  le  nom  d' Hemiaster  elongatus,  Mortensen 
incline  a  le  reunir  a  VA.  agassizii. 

"L'A.  cordatus  provient  des  iles  Kerguelen ;  les  trois  especes  suivantes  appartien- 
nent  toutes  trois  a  rextremite  meridionale  de  rAmerique  du  Sud  et  VA.  elongatus 
a  ete  rencontre  aux  Orcades  du  Sud, 


ECHINODERMA  59 

L'A.  shackletoni  est  depourvu  de  tubes  ambulacraires  sous-anaux,  caractere  qu'il 
partage  avec  les  A.  cordatus  et  agassizii  ;  il  se  distingue  ainsi  immediatement  des 
A.  philippii  et  cavernosus  qui  ont,  de  plus,  le  sillon  dorsal  tres  marque  et  il  s'ecarte 
surtout  de  \'A.  philippii  par  les  quatre  petales  dorsaux  profondement  deprimes  et 
formant  des  poches  incubatrices  egalement  developpees. 

Les  caracteres  de  \'A.  cordatus  ont  etc  bien  etablis  par  Mortensen  :  cette  espece  est 
tout  a  fait  speciale  aux  iles  de  Kerguelen  et  elle  ne  penetre  pas  dans  la  region  sud- 
americaine.  ISA.  shackletoni  s'en  distingue  facilement  par  la  presence  de  pedicellaires 
globiferes,  par  le  sillon  anterieur  dorsal  moins  enfonce,  par  les  poches  incubatrices 
plus  etroites  et  comparative ment  plus  longues,  par  une  forme  differente  du  corps  qui 
est  plus  allonge  et  par  1'appareil  apical  qui  est  reporte  en  avant. 

La  position  de  1'appareil  apical  permet  aussi  de  separer  1'A.  shackletoni  de 
YA.  agassizii  chez  lequel  cet  appareil  est  central ;  le  test  est  plus  allonge  et  le  peri- 
stome  est  plus  petit  dans  la  premiere  espece,  enfin  les  pedicellaires  sont  differente : 
je  n'observe  pas,  sur  la  face  interne  des  valves  des  pedicellaires  tridactyles  de 
YA.  shackletoni,  cette  saillie  mediane  formee  par  les  mailles  du  reseau  que  Mortensen 
a  indiquee  chez  YA.  agassizii. 

La  forme  allongee  de  YA.  shackletoni  rappelle  celle  de  YA.  elongalus.  Laissant  de 
cote  la  question  posee  par  Mortensen,  de  savoir  si  YA.  elongatus  doit  etre  reuni  ou  non 
a  YA.  agassizii,  il  est  certain  que  YA.  shackletoni  ne  peut  etre  confondu  avec  la 
premiere  espece  :  il  s'en  eloigne  par  son  appareil  apical  reporte  en  avant,  par  le 
periprocte  plus  grand  et  par  une  forme  differente  des  pedicellaires  tridactyles  et 
rostres. 

Les  spicules  des  tubes  ambulacraires  ne  presentent  aucun  caractere  particulier : 
ce  sont  des  batonnets  incurves  avec  des  dents  laterales  inegales  qui  peuvent  s'allonger 
et  se  reunir  pour  constituer  de  petites  plaques  perforees  irregulieres. 

Je  suis  heureux  de  remercier  ici  mon  excellent  ami,  M.  le  Dr.  Th.  Mortensen,  de 
1'examen  qu'il  a  bien  voulu  faire  de  cet  Abatus  ainsi  que  du  genre  que  je  decris 
ci-dessous ;  il  a  eu  egalement  1'extreme  obligeance  de  me  communiquer  les  epreuves 
du  texte  et  des  planches  de  son  memoire,  encore  sous  presse  lorsque  j'ecrivais  ces  lignes  : 
Echinoidea  of  the  Swedish  South-polar  Expedition,  dans  lequel  il  etudie  les  Spatangides 
antarctiques  et  qui  m'a  rendu  les  plus  grands  services  pour  mes  comparaisons. 

Aux  echantillons  que  j'ai  indiques  plus  haut,  il  y  a  lieu  d'aj  outer  encore  cinq 
exemplaires  extremement  jeunes,  dont  la  longueur  varie  entre  5  et  12  millim.  et  que 
je  rapporte  egalement  a  YA.  shackletoni.  Ces  exemplaires  etaient  associes  a  six  autres 
Oursins  Irreguliers  de  dimensions  analogues  et  que  je  considere  comme  appartenant 
au  genre  Brisaster  :  ce  sont  peut-etre  des  B.  antarcticus  Sladen,  mais  ils  sont  trop 
jeunes  pour  etre  determines  avec  certitude  et  ils  ne  m'ont  presente  que  quelques 
pedicellaires  non  caracteristiques  :  je  ne  les  signale  ici  que  pour  memoire. 


60  R.  KCEHLER 

PSEUDABATUS,   HOV.   geil. 

Ce  genre  est  voisin  du  genre  Abatus  qu'il  rappelle  par  la  constitution  de  son  appareil 
apical  dans  lequel  la  plaque  madreporique  separe  largement  les  deux  plaques  genitales 
posterieures,  mais  il  en  diflere  par  la  situation  des  poches  incubatrices.  Tandis  que 
dans  le  genre  Abatus,  celles-ci  commencent  a  1'appareil  apical  ou  a  une  tres  petite 
distance  de  ce  dernier,  ici  les  poches  ne  se  forment  qu'a  une  certaine  distance  de 
1'appareil  apical,  apres  la  huitieme  ou  la  neuvieme  paire  de  pores  ;  il  reste  done,  entre 
1'appareil  apical  et  chacune  des  poches  incubatrices,  une  partie  des  ambulacres  non 
modifiee  et  tout  a  fait  a  fleur  du  test,  tandis  que  la  depression  qui  forme  la  poche  se  fait 
tres  brusquement;  le  bord  externe  decelle-ci  est  voisin  du  fascicle.  L'ambulacre  anterieur 
reste  aussi  a  fleur  du  test.  Les  orifices  genitaux  sont  au  nombre  de  trois.  La  face 
posterieure  n'est  pas  verticale,  mais  elle  est  dirigee  obliquement  en  avant  du  cote 
ventral,  de  telle  sorte  que  le  periprocte,  qu'elle  porte,  est  subventral.  Dans  la  seule 
espece  connue,  les  pedicellaires  appartiennent  aux  trois  types  didactyle,  rostre  et 
globifere.  Les  pedicellaires  tridactyles  font  completement  defaut  et  les  pedicellaires 
globiferes  sont  d'une  forme  particuliere,  leurs  valves  ayant  I'extiemite  arrondie  et 
munie  de  petites  dents. 

Bien  que  le  genre  Pseudabatus  soit  voisin  du  genre  Abatus,  il  m'a  paru  necessaire 
de  1'en  separer  en  raison  des  trois  caracteres  principaux  indiques  ci-dessus :  position 
des  poches  incubatrices  eloignees  de  1'appareil  apical,  situation  du  periprocte  et  forme 
des  pedicellaires. 

PSEUDABATUS  NIMRODI,  nov.  sp.  (PL  VII,  fig.  1  a  8 ;    PL  VIII,  fig.  7  a  12) 
Baie  du  Cap  Royds.    Juin  1908.    Profondeur,  7-20  brasses.    Deux  echantillons. 

Les  deux  exemplaires  ne  sont  pas  en  parfait  etat  d'integrite  et  ils  presentent  des 
cassures,  soit  sur  la  face  ventrale,  soit  sur  les  cotes  du  test ;  ils  sont  neanmoins  tres 
suffisants  pour  permettre  une  etude  complete. 

Ils  ont  tous  deux  a  peu  pres  les  memes  dimensions  qui  sont  les  suivantes  :  longueur, 
49  millim. ;  largeur,  43  millim. ;  hauteur,  27  millim. 

Dans  1'un  des  individus,  que  j'appellerai  1'individu  A,  et  qui  est  represente  PL  VII, 
fig.  1,  et  PL  VIII,  fig.  8,  10  et  12,  la  face  dorsale  du  test  offre,  quand  on  regarde 
1'oursin  de  cote  (PL  VII,  fig.  1),  une  courbe  reguliere  aussi  bien  en  avant  qu'en  arriere 
de  1'appareil  apical,  de  telle  sorte  que  le  contour  de  cette  face  est  regulierement  arrondi. 
L'autre  individu,  ou  individu  B  (PL  VIII,  fig.  9),  offre,  dans  la  partie  anterieure  de 
la  face  dorsale,  un  profil  simplement  oblique  et  peu  convexe,  et  la  region  interradiale 
posterieure  est  peu  proeminente,  de  telle  sorte  que  le  test,  vu  lateralement,  est  plus 
conique  que  dans  1'autre  exemplaire.  Chez  tous  deux  d'ailleurs,  le  pole  apical  est 
aplati. 


ECHINODERMA  61 

Vu  par  la  face  dorsale  (PI.  VIII,  fig.  7  et  8),  le  contour  de  la  face  dorsale  est  ovalaire 
mais  il  n'est  parfaitement  regulier  chez  aucun  des  deux  echantillons,  et  le  cote  droit 
du  bord  anterieur  du  test  est  un  peu  plus  preeminent  que  le  cote  gauche.  Le  bord 
anterieur  n'offre  pas  la  moindre  trace  d'echancrure  en  son  milieu  car  I'ambulacre 
anterieur  est  a  fleur  du  test. 

La  face  ventrale  est  presque  plane,  et  1'interradius  impair  posterieur  est  tres  peu 
convexe.  Le  bord  anterieur  du  labre  se  trouve  a  15 '5  millim.  en  arriere  du  bord 
anterieur  du  test  chez  1'individu  A ;  la  mesure  n'a  pas  pu  etre  prise  sur  1'individu  B, 
dont  la  face  ventrale  est  brisee  dans  la  partie  centrale. 

En  examinant  1'echantillon  A  de  profil,  on  constate  que  le  bord  superieur  de  la 
face  dorsale  se  relie  a  la  face  ventrale  par  une  petite  face  posterieure  tres  courte  et 
oblique  ;  dans  I'echantillon  B,  cette  face  est  un  peu  plus  haute  et  moins  oblique.  II 
en  resulte  que  dans  le  premier,  le  periprocte  est  en  partie  place  sur  la  face  ventrale  et 
il  est  visible  quand  on  regarde  1'oursin  par  cette  face  (PI.  VIII,  fig.  12) ;  dans  le  second, 
il  n'apparait  que  fort  peu  du  cote  ventral.  D'ailleurs  dans  1'individu  A,  le  periprocte 
est  assez  petit :  il  ne  mesure  que  5  millim.  de  diametre  et  il  est  a  peu  pres  aussi  haut 
que  large  ;  son  contour  est  irregulierement  circulaire  avec  une  petite  pointe  du  cote 
ventral  (PI.  VIII,  fig.  10).  Dans  1'individu  B,  le  periprocte  est  plus  grand  :  il  mesure 
6 '5  millim.  de  largeur  sur  6  de  hauteur ;  son  contour  est  aussi  irregulierement  arrondi 
(PI.  VIII,  fig.  11). 

Le  pole  apical  est  plus  rapproche  du  bord  anterieur  du  test  que  du  bord  posterieur. 
La  ligne  qui  reunit  les  centres  des  deux  orifices  genitaux  posterieurs  se  trouve  a 
20  millim.  du  bord  anterieur  et  a  29  millim.  du  bord  posterieur  du  test.  Les  trois 
orifices  genitaux  de  1'exemplaire  A  sont  legerement  ovoiides  et  un  peu  plus  grands 
que  dans  le  second :  ils  mesurent  1*7  millim.  de  largeur  et  les  centres  des  deux  orifices 
anterieurs  sont  separes  par  un  intervalle  de  6  millim.  (fig.  8) ;  dans  1'exemplaire  B, 
ces  orifices  ont  1'2  millim.  de  largeur,  et  les  centres  sont  separes  par  une  distance  de 
5  millim.  (fig.  7). 

Les  contours  des  plaques  de  1'appareil  apical  se  reconnaissent  facilement,  surtout 
dans  I'echantillon  B  (PI.  VII,  fig.  4).  Dans  ce  dernier,  les  deux  plaques  genitales  gauches 
sont  une  fois  et  demie  plus  longues  que  larges  ;  1'orifice  que  chacune  d'elles  porte  est 
beaucoup  plus  rapproche  du  bord  externe  que  du  bord  interne,  et  il  existe  un  certain 
nombre  de  petits  tubercules  en  dehors  et  en  dedans  de  1'orifice.  Ces  plaques  sont  separees, 
sur  la  moitie  de  leur  longueur,  par  la  plaque  ocellaire  de  I'ambulacre  anterieur  gauche. 
La  plaque  genitale  droite  est  plus  petite  que  les  deux  autres  et  a  peine  plus  longue 
que  large  ;  1'orifice  se  trouve  place  a  peu  pres  a  egale  distance  du  bord  externe  et  du 
bord  interne.  La  plaque  madreporique,  qui  separe  les  deux  plaques  genitales  gauches 
de  la  plaque  droite,  est  allongee  et  retrecie  dans  sa  region  anterieure.  Elle  depasse  en 
avant  le  milieu  de  la  plaque  ocellaire  anterieure,  et  elle  s'arrete,  en  arriere,  au 
niveau  du  milieu  des  deux  plaques  ocellaires  posterieures.  Elle  offre  des  orifices, 
petits  et  peu  nombreux,  irregulierement  disposes  et  se  montrant  surtout  dans  sa^ 


62  R.  KCEHLER 

region  moyenne,  tandis  que  sur  le  reste  de  sa  surface,  elle  porte  de  petits  tubercules. 
Les  plaques  ocellaires  sont  triangulaires,  avec  un  angle  interne  arrondi  et  un  bord 
externe  plus  ou  moins  excave,  vers  le  milieu  duquel  se  trouve  le  pore  qui  est 
allonge  dans  le  sens  radiaire  ;  ces  plaques  sont  plus  saillantes  que  les  ambulacres 
qu'elles  terminent.  La  plaque  ocellaire  de  1'ambulacre  IV,  qui  est  placee  entre  les 
moities  externes  des  deux  plaques  genitales  gauches,  a  Tangle  proximal  plus  aigu 
et  moins  arrondi  que  les  autres ;  c'est  la  seule  qui  ne  soit  pas  contigue  a  la  plaque 
madreporique. 

Chez  1'individu  A  (PI.  VIII,  fig.  8),  je  constate, dans  les  caracteres  de  1'appareil  apical, 
quelques  differences  qui  ne  tiennent  pas  a  une  difference  de  sexe,  car  j'ai  reconnu  chez  tous 
deux  la  presence  d'oeufs  dans  les  poches  incubatrices.  Les  orifices  genitaux  sont  un 
peu  plus  grands  et  plus  ecartes  que  dans  1'echantillon  B  et  ils  sont  aussi  legerement 
ovalaires;  les  plaques  genitales  portent  des  tubercules  plus  nombreux.  Les  plaques 
ocellaires  ne  sont  pas  saillantes ;  elles  sont  plus  etroites  et  relativement  un  peu  plus 
allongees  que  dans  1'individu  B,  et  leurs  contours  sont  moins  distincts.  La  plaque 
madreporique  ne  presente  de  pores  que  sur  une  plage  centrale  peu  etendue,  et  tout  le 
reste  de  sa  surface  est  couvert  de  petits  tubercules  secondaires. 

L'ambulacre  anterieur  impair  reste  absolument  a  fleur  du  test  dans  1'individu  A 
(PI.  VIII,  fig.  8)  et  il  offre,  dans  sa  moitie  proximale,  une  tres  legere  tendance  a  se  deprimer 
chez  le  second  individu  (fig.  7).  Les  zones  poriferes  sont  droites  et  paralleles,  et  chacune 
d'elles  renferme  vingt-deux  paires  de  pores  comptes  jusqu'au  fasciole.  Les  pores  des 
trois  ou  quatre  premieres  paires  sont  tres  fins,  tres  rapproches  et  disposes  obliquement 
par  rapport  a  1'axe  de  1'ambulacre  ;  les  suivants  sont  plus  grands,  plus  ecartes  et 
places  transversalement.  A  partir  de  la  dix-septieme  ou  de  la  dix-huitieme  paire,  les 
pores  se  rapprochent  de  nouveau  en  se  placant  obliquement  et  ils  deviennent  tres 
petits.  Les  pores  sont  voisins  des  bords  anterieur  et  externe  de  la  plaque  ;  quelques 
petits  tubercules  tres  fins  se  montrent,  soit  entre  le  bord  interne,  soit  entre  le  bord 
posterieur  de  la  plaque  et  la  paire  de  pores ;  parmi  les  tubercules  internes,  on  en 
remarque  souvent  un  plus  gros  que  les  autres.  A  mesure  qu'on  se  rapproche  du 
fasciole,  le  nombre  et  la  taille  des  tubercules  augmentent  et  chaque  plaque  arrive  a 
porter  quelques  petits  tubercules  primaires.  Au-dela  du  fasciole,  ces  tubercules 
primaires  deviennent  plus  nombreux  et  plus  serres,et,dans  leurs  intervalles,setrouvent 
des  tubercules  beaucoup  plus  fins. 

Les  ambulacres  lateraux  anterieurs  sont  tres  forte ment  divergents ;  au  contraire 
les  ambulacres  posterieurs  sont  tres  rapproches.  L'ambulacre  anterieur  forme,  avec 
1'ambulacre  posterieur  du  meme  cote  un  angle  a  peu  pres  droit. 

L'ambulacre  anterieur  debute  par  une  partie  amincie  qui  va  en  s'elargissant  et  qui 

reste  absolument  au  niveau  du  test,  sans  la  moindre  tendance  a  s'enfoncer,  cela  jusqu'a 

la  neuvieme  paire  de  pores.     A  ce  niveau,  1'ambulacre  se  deprime  brusquement  en 

meme  temps  qu'il  s'elargit,  et  il  ne  suit  pas,  en  s'enfongant,  une  direction  verticale 

.  seulement,  mais  il  se  dirige  obliquement  en  dedans  vers  le  pole  apical,  de  telle  sorte 


ECHINODERMA  63 

que  la  poche  incubatrice  ainsi  constitute  est  en  realite  plus  longue  qu'elle  ne  le  parait 
exterieure  ment,  et  que  son  bord  interne,  aminci,  surplombe  une  portion  de  cavite 
qui  peut  atteindre  3  millim.de  longueur  environ.  La  cavite  incubatrice  atteint  les 
dimensions  suivantes  : 

Echantillon  A.  Echantillon  B. 

Longueur  exterieure  ...  11  millim.         .  14  millim. 

Largeur  exterieure      .         .         .  5'5-,r  .  6       ,, 

Profondeur  maxima   .         .         .  6      ,,  .  8 '9   „ 

Vers  son  tiers  externe,  la  poche  se  retrecit  et  son  fond  se  releve  progressivement  pour 
revenir  au  niveau  du  test ;  elle  se  termine  a  peu  pres  au  bord  interne  du  fascicle  dans 
1'echantillon  B,  tandis  que  dans  1'autre  elle  n'atteint  pas  exactement  ce  bord :  il 
reste  au  moins  a  fleur  du  test  une  plaque  ambulacraire  qui  separe  la  poche  du  fascicle 
et  le  relevement  de  cette  poche  est  plus  progressif. 

Les  ambulacres  posterieurs  presentent  des  dispositions  analogues.  La  poche,  qui 
se  forme  brusquement,  et  dont  la  face  interne  est  egalement  dirigee  obliquement  en 
dedans,  est  separee  de  1'appareil  apical  par  une  partie  ambulacraire  non  modifiee  et 
restant  a  fleur  du  test,  sur  laquelle  je  compte  neuf  paires  de  pores  dans  1'individu  B 
et  huit  dans  1'autre  ;  dans  le  premier,  la  poche  est  un  peu  plus  grande.  Les  poches 
ont  les  dimensions  respectives  suivantes  : 

Echantillon  A.  Echantillon  B, 

Longueur  exterieure  .  .         12  millim.          .  14  millim. 

Largeur  exterieure     ...  6        ,,  .  6      ,, 

Profondeur  maxima  .         .         .  9        ,,  .  9      ,, 

Les  poches  posterieures  sont  done  un  peu  plus  grandes  que  les  anterieures ;  dans 
1'echuntillon  B,  elles  s'etendent  jusqu'au  bord  interne  du  fascicle,  tandis  que  dans 
1'autre  individu,  elles  sont  separees  de  ce  bord  par  une  ou  deux  plaques  a  fleur 
du  test,  comme  cela  arrive  pour  les  poches  anterieures.  Les  plaques  qui  ferment 
les  parois  des  poches  presentent  de  petits  tubercules  portant  de  petits  piquants 
fins  et  cylindriques,  au  milieu  desquels  j'ai  trouve  quelques  oeufs  chez  les  deux 
individus. 

Au  dela  des  poches,  les  plaques  ambulacraires  sont  uniformement  couvertes  de 
tubercules  primaires  entremeles  d'autres  tubercules  beaucoup  plus  fins. 

Les  regions  interradiales  de  la  face  dorsale  off  rent  egalement  un  recouvrement 
uniforme  de  tubercules  primaires  rapproches,  entre  lesquels  se  montrent  des 
granules  tres  fins.  L'interradius  posterieur  est  simplement  convexe  sans  former  de 
gibbosite. 

La  face  ventrale  est  tres  peu  convexe  (PL  VIII,  fig.  12).  Le  peristome  est  assez 
large.  Le  bord  anterieur  du  labre  est  saillant  et  large,  mais  il  est  arrondi  et  pro- 
emine  peu  en  avant ;  il  laisse  a  decouvert  la  plus  grande  partie  des  plaques  du 
peristome,  II  m'a  ete  absolument  impossible  de  reconnaitre,  sur  1'exemplaire  ou 


64  R.  KCEHLER 

il  est  conserve,  les  limites  posterieures  du  labre,  meme  apres  traitement  a  1'eau  de 
Javelle. 

L'ambulacre  anterieur  ventral  est  legerement  deprime ;  il  est  assez  large  au 
voisinage  du  peristome,  puis  il  se  retrecit  et  se  releve  en  se  rapprochant  du  bord 
anterieur  du  test.  II  offre,  de  chaque  cote,  cinq  pores  ambulacraires  places  chacun 
au  bord  d'une  depression  ovalaire  bien  marquee.  Les  ambulacres  lateraux  anterieurs 
sont  presque  situes  sur  le  prolongement  1'un  de  1'autre.  Us  sont  deprimes  dans  leur 
region  proximale,  un  peu  plus  meme  que  1'ambulacre  anterieur,  mais  ils  reviennent  au 
niveau  du  test  vers  le  milieu  de  leur  longueur.  Chacun  d'eux  oflre,  de  chaque  cote,  cinq 
ou  six  pores  avec  leurs  depressions  ovalaires. 

Les  avenues  ambulacraires  posterieures  sont  larges  et  elles  ne  sont  un  peu 
deprimees  qu'au  voisinage  immediat  du  peristome,  ou  chacune  d'elles  offre  deux 
rangees  legerement  divergentes  de  quatre  ou  cinq  pores  avec  leurs  depressions  ovalaires. 
Les  plaques  suivantes,  tres  grandes,  presentent  comme  d'habitude,  un  petit  pore  place 
vers  le  bord  anterieur. 

Les  ambulacres  n'offrent  que  quelques  tubercules  tres  fins,  peu  serres  sur  les 
ambulacres  anterieurs,  plus  serres  sur  les  avenues  ambulacraires  posterieures.  Les 
tubercules  primaires  n'y  font  leur  apparition  qu'au  voisinage  du  bord  du  test.  Les 
regions  interradiales  ventrales  possedent  des  tubercules  primaires  sensiblement  plus 
gros  que  ceux  de  la  face  dorsale,  avec  des  tubercules  tres  fins  qui  forment  generalement 
un  cercle  autour  des  precedents.  Les  tubercules  de  1'interradius  posterieur  ne  sont 
pas  plus  developpes  que  les  autres :  ils  forment  des  files  plus  ou  moins  regulieres  et 
divergentes  partant  de  Tangle  posterieur,  qui  debutent  par  des  tubercules  d'abord  plus 
petits  et  qui  grossissent  ensuite  a  mesure  qu'on  se  rapproche  des  avenues  ambulacraires 
ventrales  ou  du  peristome. 

J'ai  dit  plus  haut  que  dans  1'echantillon  A,  1'extremite  posterieure  etait  legerement 
arrondie,  tandis  que  dans  le  second,  cette  extremite  etait  mieux  marquee  et  formait 
une  petite  face  dirigee  obliquement  vers  le  bas ;  aussi  le  periprocte  est-il  plus  visible 
par  la  face  ventrale  dans  1'echantillon  A  que  dans  1'echantillon  B,  bien  qu'il  soit  plus 
petit  dans  le  premier.  Les  plaques  qui  recouvrent  le  periprocte  sont  irregulieres 
comme  forme  et  comme  disposition,  et  elles  sont  plus  grandes  vers  la  peripherie. 

II  n'existe  pas  de  traces  de  tubes  ambulacraires  sous-anaux. 

Le  fasciole  se  trouve  tres  rapproche  du  bord  anterieur  du  test  dont  il  est  separe 
a  peine  par  une  distance  de  5  millim.,  mais,  comme  la  face  dorsale  s'inflechit  tres 
rapidement  en  avant  pour  rejoindre  la  face  ventrale  et  se  reunit  finalement  a  cette 
face  par  une  partie  a  peu  pres  verticale,  comme  d'autre  part  le  fasciole  se  trouve  place 
sur  cette  partie  presque  verticale,  celui-ci  est  a  peine  visible  quand  on  regarde  1'animal  par 
en  haut.  Apres  un  court  trajet  parallelement  au  bord  du  test,  le  fasciole  s'en  ecarte 
legerement  et  il  offre  deux  concavites  peu  profondes  separees  par  un  angle  aigu.  II 
atteint  ensuite  le  bord  externe  de  la  poche  incubatrice  anterieure  qu'il  contourne  et 
s'inflechit  d'abord  en  dedans,  parallelement  au  bord  posterieur  de  cette  poche.  II  ne 


ECHINODERMA  65 

tarde  pas,  en  formant  un  angle  obtus,  a  reprendre  son  trajet  parallele  au  bord  du  test 
dont  il  se  trouve  assez  ecarte  entre  les  deux  poches  incubatrices,  puis,  arrive  a  7  ou 
8  millim.  de  la  poche  posterieure.  il  forme  un  nouvel  angle  obtus,  se  rapproche  du  bord 
du  test,  contourne  le  bord  externe  de  la  poche  incubatrice  posterieure  et  se  dirige  vers 
la  ligne  interradiale  mediane  en  restant  a  8  millim.  environ  du  bord  posterieur  du  test. 
Sa  largeur  moyenne  est  d'un  millimetre  environ ;  il  s'amincit  legerement  dans  ses 
parties  anterieure  et  posterieure  et  s'elargit  -nn-  peu  au  niveau  des  deux  poches 
incubatrices. 

Les  tubercules  primaires  ne  sont  pas  tres  saillants.  Us  sont  plus  gros  sur  la  face 
ventrale  que  sur  la  face  dorsale  ainsi  que  j'ai  eu  1'occasion  de  le  dire,  mais  leurs 
dimensions  restent  tres  uniformes  dans  la  meme  region ;  ils  deviennent  seulement  un 
peu  plus  gros  sur  les  bords  anterieur  et  posterieur  des  poches  incubatrices.  Ils  sont 
performs  et  finement  creneles. 

Les  piquants  que  portent  les  tubercules  primaires  de  la  face  dorsale  sont  tres 
courts,  fins  et  serres,  separes  par  d'autres  piquants  beaucoup  plus  petits.  Ils  sont  un 
peu  aplatis  et  elargis  en  spatule,  avec  1'extremite  tronquee  et  leur  surface  est  finement 
striee  ;  ils  deviennent  un  peu  plus  forts  a  1'ambitus.  Vers  les  poches  incubatrices^ 
les  piquants  deviennent  plus  larges  et  plus  forts,  leur  extremite  est  plus  elargie  et  ils 
se  dirigent  horizontalement  en  s'enchevetrant  avec  leurs  congeneres  du  bord  oppose 
de  maniere  a  recouvrir  la  poche.  Ces  piquants,  ainsi  que  les  piquants  marginaux, 
offrent  souvent  une  cannelure  longitudinale  assez  marquee.  Les  piquants  de  la  face 
ventrale  sont  plus  developpes  que  sur  la  face  dorsale  ;  ils  sont  allonges,  aplatis,  elargis- 
a  1'extremite  et  les  plus  gros  sont  canneles. 

Les  pedicellaires  appartiennent  aux  trois  types  didactyle,  rostre  et  globifere.  Les 
pedicellaires  didactyles  sont  abondamment  repandus  sur  tout  le  test, (PI.  VII,  fig.  6 
et  7).  Leur  pedoncule  est  relativement  assez  long  et  la  tige  calcaire  est  eloignee 
de  la  tete  d'une  distance  qui  est  presque  egale  a  la  hauteur  de  celle-ci,  qui  varie  entre 
0'6  et  0'7  millim.  Les  valves  sont  apiaties,  et  leur  base  offre  une  echancrure  profor.de  ; 
leur  face  externe  est  convexe,  et,  en  dedans,  elles  s'adossent  a  leur  congenere  par 
un  bord  droit  muni  de  denticulations  extremement  fines  et  tres  regulieres.  Les  per- 
forations sont  disposees  regulierement.  Les  pedicellaires  tridactyles,  que  ceux-ci 
remplacent,  font  completement  defaut. 

Les  pedicellaires  rostres  sont  tres  abondants  aussi  (PI.  VII,  fig.  8).  Leur  tete 
mesure  0'8  a  1  millim.  de  hauteur  dans  les  plus  grands  et  la  tige  calcaire  de  leur 
pedoncule,  elargie  a  son  extremite,  en  est  tres  rapprochee.  Leurs  valves  offrent  une 
base  allongee  ;  le  limbe  est  etroit  et  il  conserve  a  peu  pres  la  meme  largeur  jusqu'a 
1'extremite  qui  est  un  peu  elargie  ;  les  bords  sont  reployes  en  dedans  :  ils  sont  un 
peu  irreguliers,  sinueux  et  ils  ofErent  quelques  dents  tres  petites  et  basses,  tres 
espacees,  tandis  que  1'extremite  porte  une  rangee  de  dents  tres  fines,  rapprochees  et 
ties  regulierement  disposees. 

Les  pedicellaires  globiferes  sont  tres  rares  (PI.  VII,  fig.  5).     Leur  tete,  qui  mesure 

BEIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.   1907-9.      VOL.  II.  K 


66  R.  KCEHLER 

0'4  a  0'5  de  hauteur,  est  recouverte  d'un  tegument  glandulaire  et  fonce  semblable 
a  celui  qu'on  rencontre  dans  le  genre  Abatus.  Les  valves  sont  formees  d'un  tissu 
calcaire  delicat  avec  de  grandes  perforations ;  elles  oflrent  un  limbe  allonge,  assez 
large  et  allant  en  s'elargissant  legerement  jusqu'a  1'extremite :  celle-ci  est  arrondie 
et  porte  dix  a  douze  dents  coniques,  pointues,  assez  courtes,  contigues,  un  peu  inegales 
et  formant  une  bordure  tout  le  long  du  bord  terminal.  L'orifice,  tres  large, 
depasse  le  milieu  de  la  longueur  du  limbe,  et,  en  dessous  de  lui,  ce  dernier  constitue 
un  tube  dont  les  parois  offrent  de  grandes  perforations. 

La  couleur  des  deux  echantillons  etait  a  peu  pres  uniformement  noire.  Pour  les 
-etudier  et  les  photographier,  j'ai  du  les  decolorer  incompletement  a  1'eau  de  Javelle, 
mais  le  test  a  conserve  des  taches  et  des  marbrures:  aussi  j'ai  eprouve  de  grandes 
difficultes  pdur  obtenir  des  photographies  passables. 

LYON,  Septembre  1910. 


LISTE  DES  OUVKAGES  CITE'S 

'91.  PERKIER,  ED.,  Echinodermes  de  la  Mission  du  Cap  Horn.     Paris,  1891. 

95.  LKITPOLD,  FB,  "  Asteroidea  der  Vettor  Pis&ni  Expedition  "  Zeit.fiir  wiss.  Zool.,  Bd.  LIX. 

'03.  LUDWIG,  H.   .  Resultats  du  Voyage  du  S.  7.  "  Bdgica."     Seesterne. 

05.  i,  •  "  Asterien  und  Ophiuren  der  schwedischen  Expedition  nach  den  Magalhaenslandern, 

1895-97."  Zeit.  fur  wiss.  Zool.,  Bd.  82. 

06.  FiSHER,3V.  K.   The  Starfishes  of  the  Hawa'ian  Islands.     U.S.  Fish  Commission  Bulletin  for  1903, 

Part  III.     Washington,  1906. 
06.     KCEHLER,  B.  .   Expedition  antarctique  framfaise  commandee  par  le  Dr.  J.  Charcot.    Echinodermes. 

•  08.  i,  .   "  Asteries,  Ophiures  et  Eehinides  de  1'Expedition  Antarctique  Nationale  Ecossaise." 

Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Edinburgh,  vol.  xlvi. 

•  08.     BELL,  J.          .  "  National  Antarctic  Expedition,"  Natural  History,  vol.  iv, :  Echinoderma. 

10.     MORTENSEX,  Tl).   "  Die  Echinoiden  der  deutschen  siidpolar  Expedition,  1901-03,"  Deutsch*  sudpolar 

Expedition,  xi. :  Zoologie,  iii. 
,10b:s.         „  South-polar  Expedition,  vol.  iii.:   Ethinoidea. 


PLATE  IV 


PLANCHE  IV 

FIG..I. — Cryaster  antarcticus.     Face  dorsale  reduite  d'un  cinquieme  environ. 

FIG.  2. — Cryaster  antarcticus.     Face  ventrale  reduite  d'un  cinquieme  environ. 

FIG.  3. — Abatus  shackletoni,  male.     Vue  laterale.     Grossissement  T6. 

FIG.  4 — Abatus  sJiacMetoni,  male.     Face  posterieure.     Grossissement  l-6 

FIG.  5. — Abatus  shackletoni,  male.     Face  dorsale.     Grossissement  T6. 

FIG.  6. — -Abatus  shackletoni,  femelle.     Face  posterieure.     Grossissement  To. 

FIG.  7. — Abatus  shackletoni.     Valve  d'un  pedicellaire  tridactyle  a  valves    larges  vue 

de  profil.     Grossissement  60. 

FIG.  8. — Abatus  sliackletoni.    Meme  valve  vue  de  trois  quarts.     Grossissement  60. 
FIG.  9. — Abatus  shackletoni.    Valve  d'un  pedicellaire  rostre  vue  par  la  face  externe. 

Grossissement  80. 
FIG.  10. — Abatus  shackletoni.     Valve  d'un  pedicellaire  rostre  vue  par  la  face  interne. 

Grossissement  80. 

FIG.  11. — Abatus  shackletoni.    Valve  d'un  pedicellaire  globifere.     Grossissement  110. 
FIG.  12. — Abatus  shackletoni.    Valve   d'un    pedicellaire    tridactyle  a   valves   etroites. 

Grossissement  60. 


BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.  1907-9 


VOL.  II.  PLATE  IV 


11.  KCEHLER:  ECHINODERMES 


R.  Kd-liler  fecit 


PLATE  V 


PLANCHE  V 

FIG.  1. — Ophioglypha  fiexibilis.    Face  dorsale.    Grossissement  4. 

Fia.  2. — Ophioglypha  flexibilis.    Face  ventrale.    Grossissement  4. 

FIG.  3. — Coscinasterias  victories.    Face  dorsale.    Grossissement  1*2. 

FIG.  4. — Coscinasterias  victoria.    Face  ventrale.    Grossissement  1*2. 

FIG.  5. — Coscinasterias  brucei.  Jeune  individu  vu  par  la  face  dorsale.  Grossisse- 
ment 1'8. 

FIG.  6. — Notasterias  armata.  Pedicellaire  macrocephale  vu  de  profil.  Grossisse- 
ment 25. 

FIG.  7. — Notasterias  armata.  Pedicellaire  macrocephale  vu  de  profil  apres  traitement 
par  la  potasse  qui  a  separe  les  deux  valves  et  la  piece  basilaire.  Grossisse- 
ment 25. 

FIG.  8. — Notasterias  armata.  Valve  isolee  d'un  petit  pedicellaire  macrocephale. 
Grossissement  40. 

FIG.  9. — Notasterias  armata.  Deuxieme  valve  du  meme  pedicellaire.  Grossissement 
40. 

FIG.  10. — Notasterias  armata.  Piece  basilaire  du  meme  pedicellaire.  Grossisse- 
ment 40. 

FIG.  11. — Notasterias  armata.  Valve  d'un  autre  pedicellaire  macrocephale  un  peu 
plus  gros  que  le  precedent.  Grossissement  30 


BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.  1907-9 


VOL.  II.  PLATE  V 


11    KCEHLER:  ECHIXODERMES 


R.  Koehler  fecit 


PLATE  VI 


PLANCHE  VI 

FIG.  1. — Notasterias  armata.  Face  ventrale  du  plus  grand  exemplaire.  Grossisse- 
ment  2. 

FIG.  2. — Notasterias  armata.    Face  dorsale.    Grossissement  2. 

FIG.  3. — Notasterias  armata.  Pedicellaire  droit  du  sillon  ambulacraire .  Grossisse- 
ment 35. 

FIG.  4. — Notasterias  armata.  Gros  pedicellaire  macrocephale  entier  vu  de  face. 
Grossissement  20. 

FIG.  5  a  7. — Notasterias  armata.  Les  deux  valves  et  la  "piece  basilaire  d'un  gros 
pedicellaire  macrocephale.  Grossissement  20. 

FIG.  8. — Notasterias  armata.  Pedicellaire  macrocephale  de  taille  moyenne  vu  de  face. 
Grossissement  35. 

FIG.  Q.— Ophiodiplax  disjuncta.  Echantillon  recueilli  par  1'Expedition  Antarctique 
Anglaise  ;  face  dorsale.  Grossissement  4.. 

FIG.  10. — Ophiodiplax  disjuncta.  Echantillon  recueilli  par  la  deuxieme  Expedition 
Antarctique  du  Dr.  Charcot ;  face  dorsale.  Grossissement  4. 

FIG.  11. — Ophiodiplax  disjuncta.  Face  ventrale  du  meme  echantillon.  Grossisse- 
ment 4. 


BRIT.   ANTABCT.  EXPED.  1907-9 

R.  KCEHLER:  ECHINODERMES 


VOL.  II.  PLATE  VI 


R.  K<*>hler  fecit 


PLATE  VII 


BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.   1907-9.       VOL.  II. 


PLANCHE  VII 

FIG.  1. — Pseuddbatus  nimrodi,  individu  A.     Vue  laterale.     Grossissement  1'4. 

FIG.  2. — Pseudabatus  nimrodi,  individu  B.     Vue  laterale.     Grossissement  1*4. 

FIG.  3. — Pseudabatus  nimrodi,  individu  B.     Face  ventrale.     Grossissement  1*4. 

FIG.  4. — Pseudabatus  nimrodi,  individu  B.     Region  apicale.     Grossissement  4. 

FIG.  5. — Pseudabatus  nimrodi.     Valve  d'un  pedicellaire  globifere.     Grossissement  100. 

FIG.  6. — Pseudabatus  nimrodi.     Valve  d'un  pedicellaire  didactyle.     Grossissement  65. 

FIG.  7. — Pseuddbatus  nimrodi.     Pedicellaire  didactyle.     Grossissement  35. 

FIG.  8. — Pseuddbatus  nimrodi.     Valve  d'un  pedicellaire  rostre.     Grossissement  55. 

FIG.  9. — Ophioglypha  resistens.     Face  dorsale.     Grossissement  3 '2. 

FIG.  10.— Ophioglypha  resistens.     Face  ventrale.     Grossissement  3 '2. 

FIG.  11. — Ophioglypha  resistens,  jeune  individu.    Face  dorsale.    Grossissement  6. 

FIG.  12. — Ophioglypha  resistens.    Face  ventrale  du  meme  individu.    Grossissement  6. 

FIG.  13. — Ophiodiplax  disjuncta.    Echantillon  de  FExpedition  Antarctique  Anglaise  ; 

face  ventrale.     Grossissement  4. 

FIG.  l4:.—  Amphiura  algida.    Face  dorsale.    Grossissement  14. 
FIG.  15.—  Amphiura  algida.    Face  ventrale.     Grossissement  14. 


BRIT.  ANTARCT.  EXPED.  1907-9 

R.  KXEHLER:  ECHINODERMES 


VOL.  II.  PLATE   VII 


R.  Ku-hlcr  fecit 


PLATE  VIII 


PLANCHE  VIII 

FIG.  1. — Abatus  shackletoni,  individu  femelle  muni  de  ses  piquants.    Face  dorsale. 

Grossissement  1'6. 
FIG.  2. — Abatus  shackletoni,  meme  individu  vu  par  la  face  ventrale.      Grossissement 

re. 

FIG.  3. — Abatus  shackletoni,  individu  femelle   en  partie   depouille  de   ses  piquants. 

Face  ventrale.     Grossissement  1'6 

FIG.  4. — Abatus  shackletoni,  meme  individu.     Vue  laterale.     Grossissement  I1 6. 
FIG.  5.— Abatus  shackletoni,  meme  individu.     Face  dorsale.     Grossissement  1'6. 
FIG.  6. — Abatus  shackletoni.     Face  dorsale  d'un  autre  individu  femelle.      Grossisse- 
ment 1'6 

FIG.  7.— Pseudabatus  nimrodi,  individu  B.     Face  dorsale.     Grossissement  1'4. 
FIG.  8. — Pseudabatus  nimrodi,  individu  A.     Face  dorsale.     Grossissement  1 '  4. 
FIG.  9. — Pseudabatus  nimrodi,  individu  B.     Vue  laterale.     Grossissement  1'4. 
FIG.  10. — Pseudabatus  nimrodi,  individu  A.     Face  posterieure.     Grossissement  1*4. 
FIG.  11. — Pseudabatus  nimrodi,  individu  B.     Face  posterieure.     Grossissement  1*  4. 
FIG.  12. — Pseudabatus  nimrodi,  individu  A.     Face  ventrale.     Grossissement  1*4. 


BKIT.  ANTARCT.   EXPEI).  1907-9 


VOL.  II.  PLATE  VIII 


K.  KCEHLER:  ECHINODERMES 


R.  Kd-hlur  fecit 


REPORTS  IN  PREPARATION 

FRESH-WATER  ALG^.     BY  W.  WEST,  F.L.S.,  AND 

PROF.  G.  S.  WEST,  M.A.,  D.Sc. 

LICHENS.     BY  DR.  O.  V.  DARBISHIRE,  NEWCASTLE. 
AVES.     BY  .1.  MURRAY. 
MAMMALIA.     Bv  J.   MURRAY. 
PYCNOGONIDA.     BY  T.  V.  HODGSON.  PLYMOUTH. 
ISOPODA.     BY  T.  V.  HODGSON,  PLYMOUTH. 
AMPH1PODA.     BY  T.   V.  HODGSON,  PLYMOUTH. 
CUMACEA.     BY  DR.  W.  T.  CALMAN,  BRITISH  MUSEUM. 
VERMES.     BY  E.  J.  GODDARD,  B.A.,  B.Sc.,  SYDNEY. 
ROTIFERA  OF  NEW  ZEALAND,  AUSTRALIA,  PACIFIC  ISLANDS 

AND  CANADA.     BY  J.  MURRAY. 

POLYZOA.     BY  W.  D.  HENDERSON,  M.A.,  B.Sc.,  Pn.D.,  BRISTOL. 
ALCYONARIA.      KY  PROF.  J.  ARTHUR  THOMSON,  M.A.,  ABERDEEN. 
PORIFERA.       BY     R.    KIRKPATRICK,    BRITISH    MUSEUM     (Natural 

History). 

LIFE  UNDER  POLAR  CONDITIONS.     BY  J.  MURRAY. 
STUDIES  IN  GEOGRAPHICAL  DISTRIBUTION.     BY  J.  MURRAY. 
GENERAL  GEOLOGY.     BY  PROF.  T.  W.  E.  DAVID,  F.R.S.,  SYDNEY, 

AND  R.  E.  PRIESTLEY. 

GLACIOLOGY.     BY  PROF.  T.  W.  E.  DAVID,  F.R.S.,  SYDNEY. 
PETROLOGY  AND  MINERALOGY.     BY  DRS.  MAWSON,  WOOL- 

NOUGH,  AND  JENSEN. 

TIDES.     BY  Sm  G.  DARWIN,  K.C.B.,  F.R.S.,  CAMBRIDGE. 
PHYSICS.     BY  DOUGLAS  MAWSON,  D.Sc.,  BE. 
MAGNETISM.     BY  COLERIDGE  FARR,  D.Sc.,  CHRISTCHL-RCH,  N.Z. 
AURORA.     BY  DOUGLAS  MAWSON,  D.Sc.,  B.E.,  ADELAIDE. 
METEOROLOGY.     BY  H.  A.  HUNT,  COMMONWEALTH  METEOROLOGIST, 

ETC     ETC. 


THE     HEART     OF    THE 
ANTARCTIC 

POPULAR  EDITION 

THE  STORY  OF  THE  BRITISH   ANTARCTIC- 
EXPEDITION,  1907-1909 

BY  SIR  ERNEST  SHACKLETON,  C.V.O. 

Richly  illustrated  from  Photographs,  and  with   Coloured  Drawings  and 
Map,  in  One  Volume,  crown  8vo,  6s.  net. 

The  above  can  also  be  obtained  in  the.  Original  Edition,  in  Two  Volumes, 
profusely  illustrated  in  Colour,  Photogravure,  etc.,  price  36s.  net. 

Also  an  Edition  de  Luxe  printed  on  hand-made  paper,  limited  to 
350  copies,  containing,  in  addition,  the  signature  of  every  member 
of  the  Shore  Party,  specially  etched  plates  engraved  at  winter 
quarters,  1908,  and  pastel  portraits  of  the  four  members  of  the 
Southern  Party  by  GEORGE  MARSTON. 

In  Two  Volumes,  medium  4lo,  bound  in  Vellum,  price  1 0  guineas  net. 
LONDON:  WILLIAM   HEINEMANX,  21  Bedford  Street,  W.C. 


LIBRARY    OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   OF 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  of  any 
University  of  California  Library 

or  to  the 

NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
Bldg,  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

•  2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 
(510)642-6753 

•  1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing 
books  to  NRLF 

•  Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made  4 
days  prior  to  due  date. 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 

JUN 1 1 1998 

APR  1  4  2000 
DEC  0  b  ZOUb 


IBRARY    OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   OF 


w 


12,000(11/95) 


QJ/~M£> 
IBRARY    OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   OF    CALIFORNIA 


i  Desk  i 

te 


LIBRARY    OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   OF    CALIFORNIA          LIBRARY    OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   0 


BRARY    OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   OF    CALIFORNIA 


ff 
LIBRARY   OF  THE    IINUFRSITY   lu 


Y          N>-— -4— *y     °°      v~ 

.     ,- J&xpS:  i  ) 

C~tO3 


% 

EJ\y«    "- 


iSITY   OF    CALIFORNIA 
.o 


LIBRARY    OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   OF    CAUBR4IA 

M 


LIBRARY    OF   THE    UNIVERSITY    OF    CALIFORNIA 


ale 


RSITY   OF    CALIFORNIA          LIBRARY    OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   OF    CALIFORNIA          LIBRARY    OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   OF    CALIFORNIA 


LIBI 


'  6   _-_.  tSVvy"  ^~.  ^ " 


ERSITY   OF    CALIFORNIA 


WO 

LIBRARY    OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   OF    CALIFORNIA 


^ 

LIBRARY    OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   OF    CALIFORNIA 


LIB 


ERSITY   OF   CALIFORNIA          LIBRARY    OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   OF    CALIFORNIA          LIBRARY    OF   THE    UNIVERSITY   OF    CALIFORNIA          Lll